To our customers,
Old Company Name in Catalogs and Other Documents
On April 1st, 2010, NEC Electronics Corporation merged with Renesas Technology
Corporation, and Renesas Electronics Corporation took over all the business of both
companies. Therefore, although the old company name remains in this document, it is a valid
Renesas Electronics document. We appreciate your understanding.
Renesas Electronics website: http://www.renesas.com
April 1st, 2010
Renesas Electronics Corporation
Issued by: Renesas Electronics Corporation (http://www.renesas.com)
Send any inquiries to http://www.renesas.com/inquiry.
Notice
1. All information included in this document is current as of the date this document is issued. Such information, however, is
subject to change without any prior notice. Before purchasing or using any Renesas Electronics products listed herein, please
confirm the latest product information with a Renesas Electronics sales office. Also, please pay regular and careful attention to
additional and different information to be disclosed by Renesas Electronics such as that disclosed through our website.
2. Renesas Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights, or other intellectual property rights
of third parties by or arising from the use of Renesas Electronics products or technical information described in this document.
No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted hereby under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights
of Renesas Electronics or others.
3. You should not alter, modify, copy, or otherwise misappropriate any Renesas Electronics product, whether in whole or in part.
4. Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided only to illustrate the operation of
semiconductor products and application examples. You are fully responsible for the incorporation of these circuits, software,
and information in the design of your equipment. Renesas Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by
you or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software, or information.
5. When exporting the products or technology described in this document, you should comply with the applicable export control
laws and regulations and follow the procedures required by such laws and regulations. You should not use Renesas
Electronics products or the technology described in this document for any purpose relating to military applications or use by
the military, including but not limited to the development of weapons of mass destruction. Renesas Electronics products and
technology may not be used for or incorporated into any products or systems whose manufacture, use, or sale is prohibited
under any applicable domestic or foreign laws or regulations.
6. Renesas Electronics has used reasonable care in preparing the information included in this document, but Renesas Electronics
does not warrant that such information is error free. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability whatsoever for any damages
incurred by you resulting from errors in or omissions from the information included herein.
7. Renesas Electronics products are classified according to the following three quality grades: “Standard”, “High Quality”, and
“Specific”. The recommended applications for each Renesas Electronics product depends on the product’s quality grade, as
indicated below. You must check the quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product before using it in a particular
application. You may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application categorized as “Specific” without the prior
written consent of Renesas Electronics. Further, you may not use any Renesas Electronics product for any application for
which it is not intended without the prior written consent of Renesas Electronics. Renesas Electronics shall not be in any way
liable for any damages or losses incurred by you or third parties arising from the use of any Renesas Electronics product for an
application categorized as “Specific” or for which the product is not intended where you have failed to obtain the prior written
consent of Renesas Electronics. The quality grade of each Renesas Electronics product is “Standard” unless otherwise
expressly specified in a Renesas Electronics data sheets or data books, etc.
“Standard”: Computers; office equipment; communications equipment; test and measurement equipment; audio and visual
equipment; home electronic appliances; machine tools; personal electronic equipment; and industrial robots.
“High Quality”: Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.); traffic control systems; anti-disaster systems; anti-
crime systems; safety equipment; and medical equipment not specifically designed for life support.
“Specific”: Aircraft; aerospace equipment; submersible repeaters; nuclear reactor control systems; medical equipment or
systems for life support (e.g. artificial life support devices or systems), surgical implantations, or healthcare
intervention (e.g. excision, etc.), and any other applications or purposes that pose a direct threat to human life.
8. You should use the Renesas Electronics products described in this document within the range specified by Renesas Electronics,
especially with respect to the maximum rating, operating supply voltage range, movement power voltage range, heat radiation
characteristics, installation and other product characteristics. Renesas Electronics shall have no liability for malfunctions or
damages arising out of the use of Renesas Electronics products beyond such specified ranges.
9. Although Renesas Electronics endeavors to improve the quality and reliability of its products, semiconductor products have
specific characteristics such as the occurrence of failure at a certain rate and malfunctions under certain use conditions. Further,
Renesas Electronics products are not subject to radiation resistance design. Please be sure to implement safety measures to
guard them against the possibility of physical injury, and injury or damage caused by fire in the event of the failure of a
Renesas Electronics product, such as safety design for hardware and software including but not limited to redundancy, fire
control and malfunction prevention, appropriate treatment for aging degradation or any other appropriate measures. Because
the evaluation of microcomputer software alone is very difficult, please evaluate the safety of the final products or system
manufactured by you.
10. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office for details as to environmental matters such as the environmental
compatibility of each Renesas Electronics product. Please use Renesas Electronics products in compliance with all applicable
laws and regulations that regulate the inclusion or use of controlled substances, including without limitation, the EU RoHS
Directive. Renesas Electronics assumes no liability for damages or losses occurring as a result of your noncompliance with
applicable laws and regulations.
11. This document may not be reproduced or duplicated, in any form, in whole or in part, without prior written consent of Renesas
Electronics.
12. Please contact a Renesas Electronics sales office if you have any questions regarding the information contained in this
document or Renesas Electronics products, or if you have any other inquiries.
(Note 1) “Renesas Electronics” as used in this document means Renesas Electronics Corporation and also includes its majority-
owned subsidiaries.
(Note 2) “Renesas Electronics product(s)” means any product developed or manufactured by or for Renesas Electronics.
Document No. U17555EJ4V0UD00 (4th edition)
Date Published March 2007 NS CP(K)
Printed in Japan
2005
μ
PD78F0881(A)
μ
PD78F0881(A2)
μ
PD78F0882(A)
μ
PD78F0882(A2)
μ
PD78F0883(A)
μ
PD78F0883(A2)
μ
PD78F0884(A)
μ
PD78F0884(A2)
μ
PD78F0885(A)
μ
PD78F0885(A2)
μ
PD78F0886(A)
μ
PD78F0886(A2)
78K0/FC2
8-Bit Single-Chip Microcontrollers
User’s Manual
The 78K0/FC2 has an on-chip debug function.
Do not use this product for mass production after the on-chip debug function has been used because its reliability cannot
be guaranteed, due to issues with respect to the number of times the flash memory can be rewritten. NEC Electronics
does not accept complaints concerning when use this product for mass production after the on-chip debug function has
been used.
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
2
[MEMO]
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 3
1
2
3
4
VOLTAGE APPLICATION WAVEFORM AT INPUT PIN
Waveform distortion due to input noise or a reflected wave may cause malfunction. If the input of the
CMOS device stays in the area between V
IL
(MAX) and V
IH
(MIN) due to noise, etc., the device may
malfunction. Take care to prevent chattering noise from entering the device when the input level is fixed,
and also in the transition period when the input level passes through the area between V
IL
(MAX) and
V
IH
(MIN).
HANDLING OF UNUSED INPUT PINS
Unconnected CMOS device inputs can be cause of malfunction. If an input pin is unconnected, it is
possible that an internal input level may be generated due to noise, etc., causing malfunction. CMOS
devices behave differently than Bipolar or NMOS devices. Input levels of CMOS devices must be fixed
high or low by using pull-up or pull-down circuitry. Each unused pin should be connected to V
DD
or GND
via a resistor if there is a possibility that it will be an output pin. All handling related to unused pins must
be judged separately for each device and according to related specifications governing the device.
PRECAUTION AGAINST ESD
A strong electric field, when exposed to a MOS device, can cause destruction of the gate oxide and
ultimately degrade the device operation. Steps must be taken to stop generation of static electricity as
much as possible, and quickly dissipate it when it has occurred. Environmental control must be
adequate. When it is dry, a humidifier should be used. It is recommended to avoid using insulators that
easily build up static electricity. Semiconductor devices must be stored and transported in an anti-static
container, static shielding bag or conductive material. All test and measurement tools including work
benches and floors should be grounded. The operator should be grounded using a wrist strap.
Semiconductor devices must not be touched with bare hands. Similar precautions need to be taken for
PW boards with mounted semiconductor devices.
STATUS BEFORE INITIALIZATION
Power-on does not necessarily define the initial status of a MOS device. Immediately after the power
source is turned ON, devices with reset functions have not yet been initialized. Hence, power-on does
not guarantee output pin levels, I/O settings or contents of registers. A device is not initialized until the
reset signal is received. A reset operation must be executed immediately after power-on for devices
with reset functions.
POWER ON/OFF SEQUENCE
In the case of a device that uses different power supplies for the internal operation and external
interface, as a rule, switch on the external power supply after switching on the internal power supply.
When switching the power supply off, as a rule, switch off the external power supply and then the
internal power supply. Use of the reverse power on/off sequences may result in the application of an
overvoltage to the internal elements of the device, causing malfunction and degradation of internal
elements due to the passage of an abnormal current.
The correct power on/off sequence must be judged separately for each device and according to related
specifications governing the device.
INPUT OF SIGNAL DURING POWER OFF STATE
Do not input signals or an I/O pull-up power supply while the device is not powered. The current
injection that results from input of such a signal or I/O pull-up power supply may cause malfunction and
the abnormal current that passes in the device at this time may cause degradation of internal elements.
Input of signals during the power off state must be judged separately for each device and according to
related specifications governing the device.
NOTES FOR CMOS DEVICES
5
6
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
4
EEPROM is trademark of NEC Electronics Corporation.
Windows, Windows NT and Windows XP are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
PC/AT is a trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
HP9000 series 700 and HP-UX are trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
SPARCstation is a trademark of SPARC International, Inc.
Solaris and SunOS are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.
SuperFlash is a registered trademark of Silicon Storage Technology, Inc. in several countries including the
United States and Japan.
Caution: This product uses SuperFlash® technology licensed from Silicon Storage Technology, inc.
The information in this document is current as of March, 2007. The information is subject to change
without notice. For actual design-in, refer to the latest publications of NEC Electronics data sheets or
data books, etc., for the most up-to-date specifications of NEC Electronics products. Not all
products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC Electronics sales
representative for availability and additional information.
No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior
written consent of NEC Electronics. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may
appear in this document.
NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual
property rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document
or any other liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is
granted under any patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others.
Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative
purposes in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these
circuits, software and information in the design of a customer's equipment shall be done under the full
responsibility of the customer. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by
customers or third parties arising from the use of these circuits, software and information.
While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products,
customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To
minimize risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC
Electronics products, customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as
redundancy, fire-containment and anti-failure features.
NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades: "Standard", "Special" and
"Specific".
The "Specific" quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customer-
designated "quality assurance program" for a specific application. The recommended applications of an NEC
Electronics product depend on its quality grade, as indicated below. Customers must check the quality grade of
each NEC Electronics product before using it in a particular application.
The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC
Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications
not intended by NEC Electronics, they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to
determine NEC Electronics' willingness to support a given application.
(Note)
•
•
•
•
•
•
M8E 02. 11-1
(1)
(2)
"NEC Electronics" as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its
majority-owned subsidiaries.
"NEC Electronics products" means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics (as
defined above).
Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio
and visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment
and industrial robots.
Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster
systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed
for life support).
Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life
support systems and medical equipment for life support, etc.
"Standard":
"Special":
"Specific":
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 5
[MEMO]
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
6
INTRODUCTION
Readers This manual is intended for user engineers who wish to understand the functions of the
78K0/FC2 and design and develop application systems and programs for these devices.
The target products are as follows.
78K0/FC2:
μ
PD78F0881 (A), 78F0882 (A), 78F0883 (A), 78F0884 (A), 78F0885 (A),
78F0886 (A), 78F0881 (A2), 78F0882 (A2), 78F0883 (A2), 78F0884 (A2),
78F0885 (A2), 78F0886 (A2)
Purpose This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the functions described in the
Organization below.
Organization The 78K0/FC2 manual is separated into two parts: this manual and the instructions
edition (common to the 78K/0 Series).
78K0/FC2
User’s Manual
(This Manual)
78K/0 Series
User’s Manual
Instructions
• Pin functions
• Internal block functions
• Interrupts
• Other on-chip peripheral functions
• Electrical specifications
• CPU functions
• Instruction set
• Explanation of each instruction
How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the readers of this manual have general knowledge of electrical
engineering, logic circuits, and microcontrollers.
• When using this manual as the manual for (A) and (A2) grade products:
→ Only the quality grade differs between (A) grade products and (A2) grade
products.
Read the part number as follows.
•
μ
PD78F0881→
μ
PD78F0881 (A), 78F0881 (A2)
•
μ
PD78F0882→
μ
PD78F0882 (A), 78F0882 (A2)
•
μ
PD78F0883→
μ
PD78F0883 (A), 78F0883 (A2)
•
μ
PD78F0884→
μ
PD78F0894 (A), 78F0894 (A2)
•
μ
PD78F0885→
μ
PD78F0885 (A), 78F0885 (A2)
•
μ
PD78F0886→
μ
PD78F0886 (A), 78F0886 (A2)
• To gain a general understanding of functions:
→ Read this manual in the order of the CONTENTS. The mark <R> shows major
revised points.
• How to interpret the register format:
→ For a bit number enclosed in brackets, the bit name is defined as a reserved word
in the assembler, and is already defined in the header file named sfrbit.h in the C
compiler.
• To check the details of a register when you know the register name:
→ Refer to APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX.
Conventions Data significance: Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right
Active low representations: ××× (overscore over pin and signal name)
Note: Footnote for item marked with Note in the text.
Caution: Information requiring particular attention
Remark: Supplementary information
Numerical representations: Binary
...×××× or ××××B
Decimal
...××××
Hexadecimal
...××××H
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 7
Related Documents The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions.
However, preliminary versions are not marked as such.
Documents Related to Devices
Document Name Document No.
78K0/FC2 User’s Manual This manual
78K/0 Series Instructions User’s Manual U12326E
Documents Related to Development Tools (Software) (User’s Manuals)
Document Name Document No.
Operation U17199E
Language U17198E
RA78K0 Ver.3.80 Assembler Package
Structured Assembly Language U17197E
Operation U17201E CC78K0 Ver.3.70 C Compiler
Language U17200E
ID78K0-QB Ver. 2.90 Integrated Debugger Operation U17437E
PM plus Ver. 5.20 U16934E
Documents Related to Development Tools (Hardware) (User’s Manuals)
Document Name Document No.
QB-78K0FX2 In-Circuit Emulator U17534E
QB-78K0MINI ON-CHIP DEBUG Emulator U17029E
QB-MINI2 On-Chip Debug Emulator with Programming Function U18371E
Documents Related to Flash Memory Programming
Document Name Document No.
PG-FP4 Flash Memory Programmer User’s Manual U15260E
PG-FPL3 Flash Memory Programmer User’s Manual U17454E
Other Documents
Document Name Document No.
SEMICONDUCTOR SELECTION GUIDE − Products and Packages − X13769X
Semiconductor Device Mount Manual Note
Quality Grades on NEC Semiconductor Devices C11531E
NEC Semiconductor Device Reliability/Quality Control System C10983E
Guide to Prevent Damage for Semiconductor Devices by Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) C11892E
Note See the “Semiconductor Device Mount Manual” website (http://www.necel.com/pkg/en/mount/index.html).
Caution The related documents listed above are subject to change without notice. Be sure to use the latest
version of each document when designing.
<R>
<R>
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
8
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE ............................................................................................................................ 17
1.1 Features......................................................................................................................................... 17
1.2 Applications .................................................................................................................................. 18
1.3 Ordering Information ................................................................................................................... 18
1.4 Pin Configuration (Top View) ...................................................................................................... 19
1.5 Fx2 Series Lineup......................................................................................................................... 22
1.5.1 78K0/Fx2 product lineup ................................................................................................................... 22
1.6 Block Diagram .............................................................................................................................. 24
1.7 Outline of Functions .................................................................................................................... 26
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................................... 28
2.1 Pin Function List .......................................................................................................................... 28
2.2 Description of Pin Functions ...................................................................................................... 32
2.2.1 P00, P01, P06 (port 0)....................................................................................................................... 32
2.2.2 P10 to P17 (port 1) ............................................................................................................................ 33
2.2.3 P30 to P33 (port 3) ............................................................................................................................ 34
2.2.4 P40, P41 (port 4) ............................................................................................................................... 34
2.2.5 P60 to P63 (port 6) ............................................................................................................................ 34
2.2.6 P70 to P73 (port 7) ............................................................................................................................ 35
2.2.7 P80 to P87 (port 8) ............................................................................................................................ 35
2.2.8 P90 (port 9) ....................................................................................................................................... 36
2.2.9 P120 to P124 (port 12) ...................................................................................................................... 36
2.2.10 P130, P131 (port 13) ....................................................................................................................... 37
2.2.11 AVREF............................................................................................................................................... 37
2.2.12 AVSS ................................................................................................................................................ 37
2.2.13 RESET ............................................................................................................................................ 37
2.2.14 REGC.............................................................................................................................................. 37
2.2.15 VDD and EVDD .................................................................................................................................. 37
2.2.16 VSS and EVSS................................................................................................................................... 37
2.2.17 FLMD0 ............................................................................................................................................ 38
2.3 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins ........................................... 39
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE ...................................................................................................... 43
3.1 Memory Space .............................................................................................................................. 43
3.1.1 Internal program memory space........................................................................................................ 48
3.1.2 Internal data memory space.............................................................................................................. 49
3.1.3 Special function register (SFR) area ................................................................................................. 49
3.1.4 Data memory addressing .................................................................................................................. 50
3.2 Processor Registers .................................................................................................................... 54
3.2.1 Control registers ................................................................................................................................ 54
3.2.2 General-purpose registers................................................................................................................. 58
3.2.3 Special Function Registers (SFRs) ................................................................................................... 59
3.3 Instruction Address Addressing................................................................................................. 65
3.3.1 Relative addressing........................................................................................................................... 65
3.3.2 Immediate addressing ....................................................................................................................... 66
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 9
3.3.3 Table indirect addressing ...................................................................................................................67
3.3.4 Register addressing ...........................................................................................................................67
3.4 Operand Address Addressing .................................................................................................... 68
3.4.1 Implied addressing .............................................................................................................................68
3.4.2 Register addressing ...........................................................................................................................69
3.4.3 Direct addressing ...............................................................................................................................70
3.4.4 Short direct addressing ......................................................................................................................71
3.4.5 Special function register (SFR) addressing........................................................................................72
3.4.6 Register indirect addressing...............................................................................................................73
3.4.7 Based addressing ..............................................................................................................................74
3.4.8 Based indexed addressing.................................................................................................................75
3.4.9 Stack addressing................................................................................................................................76
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS........................................................................................................... 77
4.1 Port Functions.............................................................................................................................. 77
4.2 Port Configuration ....................................................................................................................... 78
4.2.1 Port 0 .................................................................................................................................................79
4.2.2 Port 1 .................................................................................................................................................81
4.2.3 Port 3 .................................................................................................................................................84
4.2.4 Port 4 .................................................................................................................................................86
4.2.5 Port 6 .................................................................................................................................................87
4.2.6 Port 7 .................................................................................................................................................88
4.2.7 Port 8 .................................................................................................................................................91
4.2.8 Port 9 .................................................................................................................................................92
4.2.9 Port 12 ...............................................................................................................................................94
4.2.10 Port 13 .............................................................................................................................................97
4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function .......................................................................................... 99
4.4 Port Function Operations.......................................................................................................... 106
4.4.1 Writing to I/O port.............................................................................................................................106
4.4.2 Reading from I/O port.......................................................................................................................106
4.4.3 Operations on I/O port......................................................................................................................106
4.5 Cautions on 1-Bit Manipulation Instruction for Port Register n (Pn).................................... 107
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR .................................................................................................... 108
5.1 Functions of Clock Generator................................................................................................... 108
5.2 Configuration of Clock Generator ............................................................................................ 109
5.3 Registers Controlling Clock Generator ................................................................................... 111
5.4 System Clock Oscillator ............................................................................................................ 120
5.4.1 X1 oscillator .....................................................................................................................................120
5.4.2 XT1 oscillator ...................................................................................................................................120
5.4.3 When subsystem clock is not used ..................................................................................................123
5.4.4 Internal high-speed oscillator ...........................................................................................................123
5.4.5 Internal low-speed oscillator.............................................................................................................123
5.4.6 Prescaler..........................................................................................................................................123
5.5 Clock Generator Operation ....................................................................................................... 124
5.6 Controlling Clock ....................................................................................................................... 128
5.6.1 Controlling high-speed system clock................................................................................................128
5.6.2 Example of controlling internal high-speed oscillation clock.............................................................131
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
10
5.6.3 Example of controlling subsystem clock...........................................................................................133
5.6.4 Controlling internal low-speed oscillation clock ................................................................................135
5.6.5 Clocks supplied to CPU and peripheral hardware ............................................................................135
5.6.6 CPU clock status transition diagram.................................................................................................136
5.6.7 Condition before changing CPU clock and processing after changing CPU clock ...........................141
5.6.8 Time required for switchover of CPU clock and main system clock .................................................142
5.6.9 Conditions before clock oscillation is stopped ..................................................................................143
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01......................................................... 144
6.1 Functions of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01............................................................. 145
6.2 Configuration of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01 ...................................................... 146
6.3 Registers Controlling 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01.............................................. 154
6.4 Operation of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01............................................................. 166
6.4.1 Interval timer operation.....................................................................................................................166
6.4.2 PPG output operations .....................................................................................................................169
6.4.3 Pulse width measurement operations ..............................................................................................172
6.4.4 External event counter operation......................................................................................................180
6.4.5 Square-wave output operation .........................................................................................................183
6.4.6 One-shot pulse output operation ......................................................................................................185
6.5 Special Use of TM0n .................................................................................................................. 190
6.5.1 Rewriting CR01n during TM0n operation .........................................................................................190
6.5.2 Setting LVS0n and LVR0n ...............................................................................................................190
6.6 Cautions for 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01 ............................................................. 192
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51........................................................... 196
7.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51............................................................... 196
7.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 ........................................................ 198
7.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51................................................ 200
7.4 Operations of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51............................................................. 205
7.4.1 Operation as interval timer ...............................................................................................................205
7.4.2 Operation as external event counter ................................................................................................207
7.4.3 Square-wave output operation .........................................................................................................208
7.4.4 PWM output operation......................................................................................................................209
7.5 Cautions for 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51 ............................................................... 213
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1 .......................................................................................... 214
8.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 ....................................................................................... 214
8.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1................................................................................. 214
8.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1 ........................................................................ 218
8.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1........................................................................................ 223
8.4.1 Operation as interval timer/square-wave output ...............................................................................223
8.4.2 Operation as PWM output mode ......................................................................................................226
8.4.3 Carrier generator mode operation (8-bit timer H1 only)....................................................................232
CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER................................................................................................................ 239
9.1 Functions of Watch Timer ......................................................................................................... 239
9.2 Configuration of Watch Timer................................................................................................... 240
9.3 Register Controlling Watch Timer ............................................................................................ 241
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 11
9.4 Watch Timer Operations............................................................................................................ 243
9.4.1 Watch timer operation ......................................................................................................................243
9.4.2 Interval timer operation ....................................................................................................................244
9.5 Cautions for Watch Timer ......................................................................................................... 245
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER ..................................................................................................... 246
10.1 Functions of Watchdog Timer ................................................................................................ 246
10.2 Configuration of Watchdog Timer.......................................................................................... 247
10.3 Register Controlling Watchdog Timer ................................................................................... 248
10.4 Operation of Watchdog Timer................................................................................................. 249
10.4.1 Controlling operation of watchdog timer.........................................................................................249
10.4.2 Setting overflow time of watchdog timer.........................................................................................251
10.4.3 Setting window open period of watchdog timer..............................................................................252
CHAPTER 11 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER............................................... 254
11.1 Functions of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller.......................................................... 254
11.2 Configuration of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller ................................................... 255
11.3 Register Controlling Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller............................................. 255
11.4 Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller Operations............................................................. 258
11.4.1 Clock output operation ...................................................................................................................258
11.4.2 Operation as buzzer output............................................................................................................258
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER ......................................................................................................... 259
12.1 Function of A/D Converter ...................................................................................................... 259
12.2 Configuration of A/D Converter .............................................................................................. 260
12.3 Registers Used in A/D Converter ........................................................................................... 262
12.4 A/D Converter Operations ....................................................................................................... 271
12.4.1 Basic operations of A/D converter..................................................................................................271
12.4.2 Input voltage and conversion results..............................................................................................273
12.4.3 A/D converter operation mode .......................................................................................................274
12.5 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table .............................................................. 276
12.6 Cautions for A/D Converter..................................................................................................... 278
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61.......................................................... 282
13.1 Functions of Serial Interfaces UART60 and UART61 ........................................................... 282
13.2 Configurations of Serial Interface UART60 and UART61..................................................... 287
13.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interfaces UART60 and UART61 ............................................ 291
13.4 Operations of Serial Interface UART60 and UART61 ........................................................... 310
13.4.1 Operation stop mode......................................................................................................................310
13.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode .................................................................................311
13.4.3 Dedicated baud rate generator ......................................................................................................326
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10 ........................................................................................ 332
14.1 Functions of Serial Interface CSI10........................................................................................ 332
14.2 Configuration of Serial Interface CSI10 ................................................................................. 333
14.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface CSI10......................................................................... 335
14.4 Operation of Serial Interface CSI10........................................................................................ 338
14.4.1 Operation stop mode......................................................................................................................338
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
12
14.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode ....................................................................................................................339
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER ..................................................................................................... 349
15.1 Outline Description .................................................................................................................. 349
15.1.1 Features .........................................................................................................................................349
15.1.2 Overview of functions .....................................................................................................................350
15.1.3 Configuration ..................................................................................................................................351
15.2 CAN Protocol ............................................................................................................................ 352
15.2.1 Frame format..................................................................................................................................352
15.2.2 Frame types ...................................................................................................................................353
15.2.3 Data frame and remote frame ........................................................................................................353
15.2.4 Error frame .....................................................................................................................................361
15.2.5 Overload frame...............................................................................................................................362
15.3 Functions .................................................................................................................................. 363
15.3.1 Determining bus priority .................................................................................................................363
15.3.2 Bit stuffing ......................................................................................................................................363
15.3.3 Multi masters..................................................................................................................................363
15.3.4 Multi cast ........................................................................................................................................363
15.3.5 CAN sleep mode/CAN stop mode function ....................................................................................363
15.3.6 Error control function ......................................................................................................................364
15.3.7 Baud rate control function ..............................................................................................................370
15.4 Connection With Target System ............................................................................................. 374
15.5 Internal Registers of CAN Controller...................................................................................... 375
15.5.1 CAN controller configuration...........................................................................................................375
15.5.2 Register access type ......................................................................................................................376
15.5.3 Register bit configuration................................................................................................................385
15.6 Bit Set/Clear Function.............................................................................................................. 389
15.7 Control Registers ..................................................................................................................... 391
15.8 CAN Controller Initialization.................................................................................................... 426
15.8.1 Initialization of CAN module ...........................................................................................................426
15.8.2 Initialization of message buffer .......................................................................................................426
15.8.3 Redefinition of message buffer.......................................................................................................426
15.8.4 Transition from initialization mode to operation mode ....................................................................427
15.8.5 Resetting error counter C0ERC of CAN module ............................................................................428
15.9 Message Reception.................................................................................................................. 429
15.9.1 Message reception .........................................................................................................................429
15.9.2 Receive Data Read ........................................................................................................................430
15.9.3 Receive history list function............................................................................................................431
15.9.4 Mask function .................................................................................................................................433
15.9.5 Multi buffer receive block function ..................................................................................................435
15.9.6 Remote frame reception.................................................................................................................436
15.10 Message Transmission.......................................................................................................... 437
15.10.1 Message transmission..................................................................................................................437
15.10.2 Transmit history list function.........................................................................................................439
15.10.3 Automatic block transmission (ABT).............................................................................................441
15.10.4 Transmission abort process .........................................................................................................442
15.10.5 Remote frame transmission..........................................................................................................443
15.11 Power Save Modes................................................................................................................. 444
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 13
15.11.1 CAN sleep mode ..........................................................................................................................444
15.11.2 CAN stop mode............................................................................................................................446
15.11.3 Example of using power saving modes........................................................................................447
15.12 Interrupt Function .................................................................................................................. 448
15.13 Diagnosis Functions and Special Operational Modes ....................................................... 449
15.13.1 Receive-only mode ......................................................................................................................449
15.13.2 Single-shot mode .........................................................................................................................450
15.13.3 Self-test mode..............................................................................................................................451
15.13.4 Receive/Transmit Operation in Each Operation Mode .................................................................452
15.14 Time Stamp Function............................................................................................................. 453
15.14.1 Time stamp function.....................................................................................................................453
15.15 Baud Rate Settings ................................................................................................................ 455
15.15.1 Baud rate settings ........................................................................................................................455
15.15.2 Representative examples of baud rate settings ...........................................................................459
15.16 Operation of CAN Controller................................................................................................. 463
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS ............................................................................................ 489
16.1 Interrupt Function Types......................................................................................................... 489
16.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration ..................................................................................... 489
16.3 Registers Controlling Interrupt Functions ............................................................................ 493
16.4 Interrupt Servicing Operations ............................................................................................... 501
16.4.1 Maskable interrupt acknowledgement............................................................................................501
16.4.2 Software interrupt request acknowledgement ................................................................................503
16.4.3 Multiple interrupt servicing .............................................................................................................504
16.4.4 Interrupt request hold .....................................................................................................................507
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION.................................................................................................. 508
17.1 Standby Function and Configuration..................................................................................... 508
17.1.1 Standby function ............................................................................................................................508
17.1.2 Registers controlling standby function............................................................................................508
17.2 Standby Function Operation................................................................................................... 511
17.2.1 HALT mode....................................................................................................................................511
17.2.2 STOP mode ...................................................................................................................................516
CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION ....................................................................................................... 523
18.1 Register for Confirming Reset Source................................................................................... 531
CHAPTER 19 MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER................................................................................................... 532
19.1 Functions of Multiplier/Divider ............................................................................................... 532
19.2 Configuration of Multiplier/Divider......................................................................................... 532
19.3 Register Controlling Multiplier/Divider .................................................................................. 536
19.4 Operations of Multiplier/Divider.............................................................................................. 537
19.4.1 Multiplication operation ..................................................................................................................537
19.4.2 Division operation...........................................................................................................................539
CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT ..................................................................................... 541
20.1 Functions of Power-on-Clear Circuit ..................................................................................... 541
20.2 Configuration of Power-on-Clear Circuit ............................................................................... 542
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
14
20.3 Operation of Power-on-Clear Circuit...................................................................................... 542
20.4 Cautions for Power-on-Clear Circuit ...................................................................................... 545
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR ....................................................................................... 547
21.1 Functions of Low-Voltage Detector........................................................................................ 547
21.2 Configuration of Low-Voltage Detector ................................................................................. 548
21.3 Registers Controlling Low-Voltage Detector......................................................................... 548
21.4 Operation of Low-Voltage Detector........................................................................................ 551
21.4.1 When used as reset .......................................................................................................................552
21.4.2 When used as interrupt ..................................................................................................................557
21.5 Cautions for Low-Voltage Detector ........................................................................................ 562
CHAPTER 22 OPTION BYTE............................................................................................................... 565
22.1 Functions of Option Bytes ...................................................................................................... 565
22.2 Format of Option Byte ............................................................................................................. 567
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY .......................................................................................................... 570
23.1 Internal Memory Size Switching Register.............................................................................. 570
23.2 Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register ................................................................ 571
23.3 Writing with Flash Memory Programmer ............................................................................... 572
23.4 Programming Environment ..................................................................................................... 578
23.5 Communication Mode.............................................................................................................. 578
23.6 Connection of Pins on Board.................................................................................................. 580
23.6.1 FLMD0 pin......................................................................................................................................580
23.6.2 Serial interface pins........................................................................................................................580
23.6.3 RESET pin......................................................................................................................................582
23.6.4 Port pins .........................................................................................................................................582
23.6.5 REGC pin .......................................................................................................................................582
23.6.6 Other signal pins ............................................................................................................................582
23.6.7 Power supply..................................................................................................................................583
23.7 Programming Method .............................................................................................................. 584
23.7.1 Controlling flash memory................................................................................................................584
23.7.2 Flash memory programming mode.................................................................................................584
23.7.3 Selecting communication mode......................................................................................................585
23.7.4 Communication commands ............................................................................................................586
23.8 Security Settings ...................................................................................................................... 587
23.9 Processing Time for Each Command When PG-FP4 Is Used (Reference)......................... 589
23.10 Flash Memory Programming by Self-Programming ........................................................... 590
23.10.1 Registers used for self-programming function ..............................................................................596
23.11 Boot Swap Function............................................................................................................... 600
CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 602
24.1 Outline of Functions ................................................................................................................ 602
24.2 Connection with MINICUBE..................................................................................................... 603
24.3 Connection Circuit Examples ................................................................................................. 604
24.4 On-Chip Debug Security ID ..................................................................................................... 606
24.5 Restrictions and Cautions on On-Chip Debug Function ..................................................... 606
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 15
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET ...................................................................................................... 607
25.1 Conventions Used in Operation List...................................................................................... 607
25.1.1 Operand identifiers and specification methods ..............................................................................607
25.1.2 Description of operation column.....................................................................................................608
25.1.3 Description of flag operation column ..............................................................................................608
25.2 Operation List........................................................................................................................... 609
25.3 Instructions Listed by Addressing Type ............................................................................... 617
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS).................................. 620
26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................................................... 620
26.2 Oscillator Characteristics........................................................................................................ 622
26.3 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 624
27.4 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 631
27.5 Data Retention Characteristics............................................................................................... 641
27.6 Flash EEPROM Programming Characteristics...................................................................... 642
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)................................ 643
27.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings .................................................................................................... 643
27.2 Oscillator Characteristics........................................................................................................ 645
27.3 DC Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 647
27.4 AC Characteristics ................................................................................................................... 653
27.5 Data Retention Characteristics............................................................................................... 663
27.6 Flash EEPROM Programming Characteristics...................................................................... 664
CHAPTER 28 PACKAGE DRAWINGS................................................................................................ 665
CHAPTER 29 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS........................................................... 667
CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT ................................................................................................ 668
30.1 Cautions for Wait ..................................................................................................................... 668
30.2 Peripheral Hardware That Generates Wait ............................................................................ 669
30.3 Example of Wait Occurrence .................................................................................................. 671
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS .............................................................................................. 672
A.1 Software Package...................................................................................................................... 676
A.2 Language Processing Software............................................................................................... 676
A.3 Control Software........................................................................................................................ 677
A.4 Flash Memory Programming Tools ......................................................................................... 678
A.4.1 When using flash memory programmer FG-FP4, FL-PR4, PG-FPL3, and FP-LITE3......................678
A.4.2 When using on-chip debug emulator with programming function QB-MINI2 ...................................678
A.5 Debugging Tools (Hardware) ................................................................................................... 679
A.5.1 When using in-circuit emulator QB-78K0FX2 ..................................................................................679
A.5.2 When using on-chip debug emulator QB-78K0MINI ........................................................................679
A.5.3 When using on-chip debug emulator with programming function QB-MINI2 ...................................680
A.6 Debugging Tools (Software)..................................................................................................... 680
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
16
APPENDIX B NOTES ON TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN ................................................................... 681
APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX ......................................................................................................... 683
C.1 Register Index (In Alphabetical Order with Respect to Register Names) ............................ 683
C.2 Register Index (In Alphabetical Order with Respect to Register Symbol)........................... 688
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY ..................................................................................................... 692
D.1 Main Revisions in this Edition.................................................................................................. 692
D.2 Revision History of Preceding Editions .................................................................................. 693
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 17
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
1.1 Features
{ Minimum instruction execution time can be changed from high speed (0.1
μ
s: @ 20 MHz operation with high-
speed system clock) to ultra low-speed (122
μ
s: @ 32.768 kHz operation with subsystem clock)
{ General-purpose register: 8 bits × 32 registers (8 bits × 8 registers × 4 banks)
{ ROM, RAM capacities
Data Memory Item
Part Number
Program Memory
(ROM) Internal High-Speed RAMNote Internal Expansion RAMNote
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884
Flash memoryNote 32 KB 1024 bytes 1024 bytes
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885
48 KB 2048 bytes
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886
60 KB
Note The internal flash memory, internal high-speed RAM capacities, and internal expansion RAM capacities
can be changed using the internal memory size switching register (IMS) and the internal expansion RAM
size switching register (IXS).
{ On-chip single-power-supply flash memory
{ Self-programming (with boot swap function)
{ On-chip debug function
{ On-chip power-on-clear (POC) circuit and low-voltage detector (LVI)
{ Short startup is possible via the CPU default start using the on-chip internal high-speed oscillator
{ On-chip watchdog timer (operable with on-chip internal low-speed oscillator clock)
{ On-chip multiplier/divider
{ On-chip clock output/buzzer output controller
{ I/O ports:
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883: 37 (N-ch open drain: 3)
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886: 41 (N-ch open drain: 4)
{ Timer: 8 channels Note 1
{ Serial interface: 3 channels
(UART (LIN (Local Interconnect Network)-bus supported): 1 channel,
CSI/UART
Note 2: 1 channel, CAN: 1 channel)
{ 10-bit resolution A/D converter:
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883: 8 channels
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886: 9 channels
{ Supply voltage: VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V when 20 MHz, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V when 10 MHz, VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V when 5 MHz
(with internal high-speed oscillator clock or subsystem clock: VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)
{ Operating ambient temperature: TA = −40 to +85°C, −40 to +125°C
Notes 1. Since TM01 does not have the following terminal at 78K0/FC2, the function is restricted in part.
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, and 78F0883: TI001, TI011, TO01
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886: TI001
2. Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins.
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
18
1.2 Applications
{ Automotive electrical appliances (Body control, Door control, Front light control)
{ Industrial equipment (Industrial robot, Building control)
1.3 Ordering Information
• Flash memory version
Part Number Package Quality Grade
μ
PD78F0881GB(A)-GAF-AX 44-pin plastic LQFP (10x10) Special
μ
PD78F0881GB(A2)-GAF-AX 44-pin plastic LQFP (10x10) Special
μ
PD78F0882GB(A)-GAF-AX 44-pin plastic LQFP (10x10) Special
μ
PD78F0882GB(A2)-GAF-AX 44-pin plastic LQFP (10x10) Special
μ
PD78F0883GB(A)-GAF-AX 44-pin plastic LQFP (10x10) Special
μ
PD78F0883GB(A2)-GAF-AX 44-pin plastic LQFP (10x10) Special
μ
PD78F0884GA(A)-GAM-AX 48-pin plastic LQFP (Fine pitch) (7x7) Special
μ
PD78F0884GA(A2)-GAM-AX 48-pin plastic LQFP (Fine pitch) (7x7) Special
μ
PD78F0885GA(A)-GAM-AX 48-pin plastic LQFP (Fine pitch) (7x7) Special
μ
PD78F0885GA(A2)-GAM-AX 48-pin plastic LQFP (Fine pitch) (7x7) Special
μ
PD78F0886GA(A)-GAM-AX 48-pin plastic LQFP (Fine pitch) (7x7) Special
μ
PD78F0886GA(A2)-GAM-AX 48-pin plastic LQFP (Fine pitch) (7x7) Special
Remark All these products are lead free products.
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 19
1.4 Pin Configuration (Top View)
• 44-pin plastic LQFP (10x10)
P41
P40
RESET
P124/XT2/EXCLKS
P123/XT1
FLMD0
P122/X2/EXCLK
P121/X1
REGC
V
SS
/EV
SS
V
DD
/EV
DD
AV
SS
AV
REF
P10/SCK10/TxD61
P11/SI10/RxD61
P12/SO10
P13/TxD60
P14/RxD60
P15/TOH0
P16/TOH1/INTP5
P17/TI50/TO50
P30/INTP1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
P120/INTP0/EXLVI
P00/TI000
P01/TI010/TO00
P80/ANI0
P81/ANI1
P82/ANI2
P83/ANI3
P84/ANI4
P85/ANI5
P86/ANI6
P87/ANI7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
P60
P61
P62
P33/TI51/TO51/INTP4
P130
P73/BUZ/INTP7
P72/PCL/INTP6
P71/CRxD
P70/CTxD
P32/INTP3
P31/INTP2
Cautions 1. Make AVSS the same potential as VSS/EVSS.
2. Connect the REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1
μ
F: recommended).
3. ANI0/P80 to ANI7/P87 are set in the analog input mode after release of reset.
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
20
• 48-pin plastic LQFP (Fine pitch) (7x7)
P120/INTP0/EXLVI
P41
P40
RESET
P124/XT2/EXCLKS
P123/XT1
FLMD0
P122/X2/EXCLK
P121/X1
REGC
V
SS
/EV
SS
V
DD
/EV
DD
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
P131
P00/TI000
P01/TI010/TO00
P80/ANI0
P81/ANI1
P82/ANI2
P83/ANI3
P84/ANI4
P85/ANI5
P86/ANI6
P87/ANI7
P90/ANI8
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
P60
P61
P62
P63
P33/TI51/TO51/INTP4
P130
P73/BUZ/INTP7
P72/PCL/INTP6
P71/CRxD
P70/CTxD
P06/TI011/TO01
P32/INTP3
AV
SS
AV
REF
P10/SCK10/TxD61
P11/SI10/RxD61
P12/SO10
P13/TxD60
P14/RxD60
P15/TOH0
P16/TOH1/INTP5
P17/TI50/TO50
P30/INTP1
P31/INTP2
Cautions 1. Make AVSS the same potential as VSS/EVSS.
2. Connect the REGC pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1
μ
F: recommended).
3. ANI0/P80 to ANI7/P87 are set in the analog input mode after release of reset.
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 21
Pin Identification
ANI0 to ANI8: Analog input
AVREF: Analog reference voltage
AVSS: Analog ground
BUZ: Buzzer output
CRxD: Receive data for CAN
CTxD: Transmit data for CAN
EVDD: Power supply for port
EVSS: Ground for port
EXCLK: External clock input
(Main system clock)
EXCLKS: External clock input
(Subsystem clock)
EXLVI: External potential input
for low-voltage detector
FLMD0: Flash programming mode
INTP0 to INTP7: External interrupt input
P00, P01,
P06: Port 0
P10 to P17: Port 1
P30 to P33: Port 3
P40, P41: Port 4
P60 to P63: Port 6
P70 to P73: Port 7
P80 to P87: Port 8
P90: Port 9
P120 to P124: Port 12
P130, P131: Port 13
PCL: Programmable clock output
REGC: Regulator Capacitance
RESET: Reset
RxD60, RxD61: Receive data
SCK10: Serial clock input/output
SI10: Serial data input
SO10: Serial data output
TI000, TI010,
TI011, TI50, TI51: Timer input
TO00, TO01,
TO50, TO51,
TOH0, TOH1: Timer output
TxD60, TxD61: Transmit data
VDD: Power supply
VSS: Ground
X1, X2: Crystal oscillator (high-speed system clock)
XT1, XT2: Crystal oscillator (subsystem clock)
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
22
1.5 Fx2 Series Lineup
1.5.1 78K0/Fx2 product lineup
• 80-pin LQFP (12 × 12 mm 0.5 mm pitch, 14 × 14 mm 0.65 mm pitch)
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 60 KB,
RAM: 3 KB
78K0/FF2
μ
PD78F0891
• 44-pin LQFP (10 × 10 mm 0.8 mm pitch)
μ
PD78F0881
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 32 KB,
RAM: 2 KB
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 48 KB,
RAM: 3 KB
μ
PD78F0882
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 60KB,
RAM: 3 KB
78K0/FC2
μ
PD78F0883
μ
PD78F0887
• 64-pin LQFP (10 × 10 mm 0.5 mm pitch, 12 × 12 mm 0.65 mm pitch)
78K0/FE2
μ
PD78F0888
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 60 KB,
RAM: 3 KB
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 48 KB,
RAM: 3 KB
• 48-pin LQFP (7 × 7 mm 0.5 mm pitch)
μ
PD78F0884
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 32 KB,
RAM: 2 KB
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 48 KB,
RAM: 3 KB
μ
PD78F0885
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 60KB,
RAM: 3 KB
78K0/FC2
μ
PD78F0886
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 96 KB,
RAM: 5 KB
μ
PD78F0892
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 128 KB,
RAM: 7 KB
μ
PD78F0893
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 96 KB,
RAM: 5 KB
μ
PD78F0889
Single-power-supply flash
memory: 128 KB,
RAM: 7 KB
μ
PD78F0890
Remark All product with on-chip debug function.
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 23
The list of functions in the 78K0/Fx2 is shown below.
Part Number
Item
78K0/FC2
78K0/FE2 78K0/FF2
Number of pins 44 pins 48 pins 64 pins 80 pins
Flash memory 32 K/48 K/60 K 48 K/60 K/96 K/128 K 60 K/96 K/128 K Internal
memory
(bytes) RAM 2 K/3 K/3 K 3 K/3 K/5 K/7 K 3 K/5 K/7 K
Power supply voltage VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V when 20 MHz, VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V when 10 MHz,
VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V when 5 MHz
Minimum instruction execution time 0.1
μ
s (when 20 MHz, VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V)
Crystal/ceramic 4 to 20 MHz
Subclock 32.768 kHz
Internal low-speed
oscillator
240 kHz (TYP.)
Clock
Internal high-speed
oscillator
8 MHz (TYP., VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)
CMOS I/O 33 36 50 66
CMOS output 1
Ports
N-ch open-drain I/O 3 4
16 bits (TM0) 2 ch Note 4 ch
8 bits (TM5) 2 ch
8 bits (TMH) 2 ch
For watch 1 ch
Timer
WDT 1 ch
CAN 1 ch
3-wire CSI − 1 ch
LIN-UART 1 ch
Serial
interface
LIN-UART/CSI 1 ch
10-bit A/D converter 8 ch 9 ch 12 ch 16 ch
External 8
Interrupts
Internal 24 29
RESET pin Provided
POC 1.59 V ±0.15 V (detection voltage is fixed)
LVI 4.24/4.09/3.93/3.78/3.62/3.47/3.32/3.16/3.01/2.85/2.70/2.55/2.39/2.24/2.08/1.93 V
(selectable by software)
Reset
WDT Provided
Multiplier/divider Provided
Clock output/buzzer output Provided
Self-programming function Provided
On-chip debug function Provided
Standby function HALT/STOP mode
Operating ambient temperature TA = −40 to +85°C, −40 to +125°C
Note Since TM01 does not have the following terminal at 78K0/FC2, the function is restricted in part.
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, and 78F0883: TI001, TI011, TO01
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886: TI001
<R>
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
24
1.6 Block Diagram
•
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883
Port 0 P00, P01
2
Port 3 P30-P33
4
Internal
high-speed
RAM
V
SS
,
EV
SS
FLMD0V
DD
,
EV
DD
Port 1 P10-P17
8
Multiplier/Divider
Reset control
Port 4 P40, P41
2
Port 6 P60-P62
3
Port 7 P70-P73
4
Port 8 P80-P87
8
Port 12 P120-P124
5
Port 13
Buzzer output BUZ/P73
System control
RESET
X1/P121
X2/EXCLK/P122
XT1/P123
XT2/EXCLKS/P124
EXLVI/P120
Clock output control PCL/P72
Power on clear/
low voltage
indicator
POC/LVI
control
Internal
expansion
RAM
16-bit timer/
event counter 00
TO00/TI010/P01
TI000/P00 (LINSEL)
Serial
interface CSI10
SI10/P11
SO10/P12
SCK10/P10
ANI0/P80-ANI7/P87
Interrupt control
8-bit timer H0
TOH0/P15
8-bit timer H1
TOH1/P16
TI50/TO50/P17 8-bit timer/
event counter 50
8
A/D converter
RxD60/P14
RxD60/P14 (LINSEL)
TxD60/P13
Serial
interface UART60
Watchdog timer
RxD61/P11
TxD61/P10
Serial
interface UART61
AV
REF
AV
SS
INTP1/P30-
INTP4/P33 4
INTP0/P120 (LINSEL)
TI51/TO51/P33 8-bit timer/
event counter 51
Low-speed
internal oscillator
Watch timer
INTP5/P16
INTP6/P72
INTP7/P73 2
78K/0
CPU
core
Flash
memory
On-chip
debugger
CRxD/P71
CTxD/P70
CAN
P130
RxD60/P14 (LINSEL)
16-bit timer/
event counter 01
LINSEL
High-speed
internal oscillator
Bank
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 25
•
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886
Port 0 P00, P01, P06
3
Port 3 P30-P33
4
Internal
high-speed
RAM
V
SS
,
EV
SS
FLMD0V
DD
,
EV
DD
Port 1 P10-P17
8
Multiplier/Divider
Reset control
Port 4 P40, P41
2
Port 6 P60-P63
4
Port 7 P70-P73
4
Port 8 P80-P87
8
Port 9 P90
Port 12 P120-P124
5
Port 13 P131
Buzzer output BUZ/P73
System control
RESET
X1/P121
X2/EXCLK/P122
XT1/P123
XT2/EXCLKS/P124
EXLVI/P120
Clock output control PCL/P72
Power on clear/
low voltage
indicator
POC/LVI
control
Internal
expansion
RAM
16-bit timer/
event counter 00
TO00/TI010/P01
TI000/P00 (LINSEL)
Serial
interface CSI10
SI10/P11
SO10/P12
SCK10/P10
ANI0/P80-ANI7/P87,
ANI8/P90
Interrupt control
8-bit timer H0
TOH0/P15
8-bit timer H1
TOH1/P16
TI50/TO50/P17 8-bit timer/
event counter 50
9
A/D converter
RxD60/P14
RxD60/P14 (LINSEL)
TxD60/P13
Serial
interface UART60
Watchdog timer
RxD61/P11
TxD61/P10
Serial
interface UART61
AV
REF
AV
SS
INTP1/P30-
INTP4/P33 4
INTP0/P120 (LINSEL)
TI51/TO51/P33 8-bit timer/
event counter 51
Low-speed
internal oscillator
Watch timer
INTP5/P16
INTP6/P72
INTP7/P73 2
78K/0
CPU
core
Flash
memory
On-chip
debugger
CRxD/P71
CTxD/P70 CAN
P130
RxD60/P14 (LINSEL)
16-bit timer/
event counter 01
TO01/TI011/P06
LINSEL
High-speed
internal oscillator
Bank
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
26
1.7 Outline of Functions
(1/2)
Item
μ
PD78F0881
μ
PD78F0882
μ
PD78F0883
μ
PD78F0884
μ
PD78F0885
μ
PD78F0886
Flash memory
(self-programming
supported)Note 1
32 K 48 K 60 K 32 K 48 K 60 K
Bank −
High-speed RAMNote 1 1 K
Internal
memory
(bytes)
Expansion RAMNote 1 1 K 2 K 2 K 1 K 2 K 2 K
Memory space 64 KB
High-speed system clock
(oscillation frequency)
Crystal/ceramic oscillation (X1), external main system clock input (EXCLK)
4 to 20 MHz: VDD = 4.0 to 5.5 V, 4 to 10 MHz: VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V,
4 to 5 MHz: VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V
Internal high-speed oscillation
clock (oscillation frequency)
On-chip internal oscillation (8 MHz (TYP.): VDD = 2.7 to 5.5 V)
Internal low-speed oscillation
clock
(oscillation frequency)
On-chip internal oscillation (240 kHz (TYP.))
Subsystem clock
(oscillation frequency)
Crystal oscillation (XT1), external subsystem clock input (EXCLKS)
(32.768 kHz: VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V)
General-purpose registers 8 bits × 32 registers (8 bits × 8 registers × 4 banks)
0.1
μ
s/0.2
μ
s/0.4
μ
s/0.8
μ
s/1.6
μ
s (high-speed system clock: @ fXP = 20 MHz operation)
0.25
μ
s/0.5
μ
s/1.0
μ
s/2.0
μ
s/4.0
μ
s (TYP.) (internal oscillator clock: @ fRH = 8 MHz (TYP.)
operation)
Minimum instruction execution
time
122
μ
s (subsystem clock: when operating at fXT = 32.768 kHz)
Instruction set • 16-bit operation
• Multiply/divide (8 bits × 8 bits, 16 bits ÷ 8 bits)
• Bit manipulate (set, reset, test, and Boolean operation)
• BCD adjust, etc.
I/O ports Total: 37
CMOS I/O 33
CMOS output 1
N-ch open-drain I/O 3
Total: 41
CMOS I/O 36
CMOS output 1
N-ch open-drain I/O 4
Timers • 16-bit timer/event counter: 2 channels Note 2
• 8-bit timer/event counter: 2 channels
• 8-bit timer: 2 channels
• Watch timer 1 channel
• Watchdog timer: 1 channel
Timer outputs 8 (PWM output: 4)
Clock output • 78.125 kHz, 156.25 kHz, 312.5 kHz, 625 kHz, 1.25 MHz, 2.5 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz
(high-speed system clock: 10 MHz)
• 32.768 kHz (subsystem clock: 32.768 kHz)
Notes 1. The internal flash memory capacity, internal high-speed RAM capacity, and internal expansion RAM
capacity can be changed using the internal memory size switching register (IMS) and the internal
expansion RAM size switching register (IXS).
2. Since TM01 does not have the following terminal at 78K0/FC2, the function is restricted in part.
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, and 78F0883: TI001, TI011, TO01
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886: TI001
CHAPTER 1 OUTLINE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 27
(2/2)
Item
μ
PD78F0881
μ
PD78F0882
μ
PD78F0883
μ
PD78F0884
μ
PD78F0885
μ
PD78F0886
Buzzer output 1.22 kHz, 2.44 kHz, 4.88 kHz, 9.77 kHz (high-speed system clock: 10 MHz)
A/D converter 10-bit resolution × 8 channels 10-bit resolution × 9 channels
CAN 1 ch
LIN-UART 1 ch
Serial interface
LIN-UART/
CSI Note
1 ch
Multiplier/divider • 16 bit x 16 bit = 32 bit (Multiplication)
• 32 bit ÷ 32 bit = 32 bit remainder of 16 bits (Division)
Internal 24
Vectored
interrupt sources External 8
Reset • Reset using RESET pin
• Internal reset by watchdog timer
• Internal reset by power-on-clear
• Internal reset by low-voltage detector
On-chip debug function Provided
Supply voltage VDD = 1.8 to 5.5 V
Operating ambient temperature TA = −40 to +85°C, −40 to +125°C
Package 44-pin plastic LQFP(10x10) 48-pin plastic LQFP (Fine pitch) (7x7)
Note Select either of the functions of these alternate-function pins.
An outline of the timer is shown below.
16-Bit Timer/
Event Counters 00 to 03
8-Bit Timer/
Event Counters
50 and 51
8-Bit Timers H0
and H1
TM00 TM01 TM02 TM03 TM50 TM51 TMH0 TMH1
Watch Timer Watchdog
Timer
Interval timer 1 ch 1 ch − − 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch 1 ch Note 1
1 channel 1 channel
Operation
mode External event counter 1 ch − − − 1 ch 1 ch − − − −
Timer output 1 1 Note 2 − − 1 1 1 1 − −
PPG output 1 1 Note 2 − − − − − − − −
PWM output − − − − 1 1 1 1 − −
Pulse width measurement 2 − − − − − − − − −
Square-wave output 1 1 Note2 − − 1 1 1 1 − −
Function
Interrupt source 2 2 − − 1 1 1 1 1 −
Notes 1. In the watch timer, the watch timer function and interval timer function can be used simultaneously.
2.
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
Remark TM51 and TMH1 can be used in combination as a carrier generator mode.
<R>
<R>
<R>
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
28
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
2.1 Pin Function List
There are three types of pin I/O buffer power supplies: AVREF, EVDD/VDD. The relationship between these power
supplies and the pins is shown below.
Table 2-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies
Power Supply Corresponding Pins
AVREF P80 to P87, P90Note
EVDD/VDD • Port pins other than P80 to P87, P90Note
• Non-port pins
Note P90 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
This section explains the names and functions of the pins of the 78K0/FC2.
(1) Port pins
Table 2-2. Port pins (1/2)
Pin Name I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function
P00 TI000
P01 TI010/TO00
P06 Note
I/O Port 0.
3-bit I/O port.
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a
software setting.
Input
TI011/TO01
P10 SCK10/TxD61
P11 SI10/RxD61
P12 SO10
P13 TxD60
P14 RxD60
P15 TOH0
P16 TOH1/INTP5
P17
I/O Port 1.
8-bit I/O port.
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a
software setting.
Input
TI50/TO50
P30 INTP1
P31 INTP2
P32 INTP3
P33
I/O Port 3.
4-bit I/O port.
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a
software setting.
Input
INTP4/TI51/TO51
P40, P41 I/O Port 4.
2-bit I/O port.
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a
software setting.
Input −
Note P06 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 29
Table 2-2. Port pins (2/2)
Pin Name I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function
P60 to P63 Note I/O Port 6.
4-bit I/O port
Input/output can be
specified in 1-bit units.
N-ch open drain I/O port. Input −
P70 CTxD
P71 CRxD
P72 PCL/INTP6
P73
I/O Port 7.
4-bit I/O port.
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a
software setting.
Input
BUZ/INTP7
P80 to P87 I/O Port 8.
8-bit I/O port.
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Input ANI0 to ANI7
P90 Note I/O
Port 9.
1-bit I/O port.
Input/output can be specified in 1-bit units.
Input ANI8
P120 INTP0/EXLVI
P121 X1
P122 X2/EXCLK
P123 XT1
P124
I/O Port 12.
5-bit I/O port.
Only for P120, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be
specified by a software setting.
Input
XT2/EXCLKS
P130 Output Output
P131 Note I/O
Port 13.
P130 is 1-bit output-only port.
P131 is 1-bit I/O port.
P131 use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by a
software setting.
Input
−
Note P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
30
(2) Non-port pins
Table 2-3. Non-port pins (1/2)
Pin Name I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function
INTP0 P120/EXLVI
INTP1 P30
INTP2 P31
INTP3 P32
INTP4 P33/TI51/TO51
INTP5 P16/TOH1
INTP6 P72/PCL
INTP7
Input External interrupt request input for which the valid edge (rising
edge, falling edge, or both rising and falling edges) can be
specified
Input
P73/BUZ
SI10 Input Serial data input to serial interface Input P11/RxD61
SO10 Output Serial data output from serial interface Input P12
SCK10 I/O Clock input/output for serial interface Input P10/TxD61
RxD60 P14
RxD61
Input Serial data input to asynchronous serial interface Input
P11/SI10
TxD60 P13
TxD61
Output Serial data output from asynchronous serial interface Input
P10/SCK10
TI000 External count clock input to 16-bit timer/event counter 00
Capture trigger input to capture registers (CR000, CR010) of
16-bit timer/event counter 00
P00
TI010 Capture trigger input to capture register (CR000) of 16-bit
timer/event counter 00
P01/TO00
TI011
Input
Capture trigger input to capture register (CR001) of 16-bit
timer/event counter 01
Input
P06/TO01
TO00 16-bit timer/event counter 00 output P01/TI010
TO01
Output
16-bit timer/event counter 01 output
Input
P06/TI011
TI50 External count clock input to 8-bit timer/event counter 50 P17/TO50
TI51
Input
External count clock input to 8-bit timer/event counter 51
Input
P33/TO51/INTP4
TO50 8-bit timer/event counter 50 output P17/TI50
TO51 8-bit timer/event counter 51 output P33/TI51/INTP4
TOH0 8-bit timer H0 output P15
TOH1
Output
8-bit timer H1 output
Input
P16/INTP5
PCL Output
Clock output (for trimming of high-speed system clock,
subsystem clock)
Input P72/INTP6
BUZ Output Buzzer output Input P73/INTP7
ANI0 to ANI8 Note Input A/D converter analog input Input P80 to P87, P90
Note ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 31
Table 2-3. Non-port pins (2/2)
Pin Name I/O Function After Reset Alternate Function
CTxD Input CAN transmit data output Input P70
CRxD Output CAN receive data input Input P71
AVREF Input
A/D converter reference voltage input and positive power
supply for port 2
− −
AVSS − A/D converter ground potential. Make the same potential as
EVSS or VSS.
− −
RESET Input System reset input − −
X1 Input Input P121
X2 −
Connecting resonator for high-speed system clock
Input P122/EXCLK
XT1 Input Input P123
XT2 −
Connecting resonator for subsystem clock
Input P124/EXCLKS
EXCLK Input External clock input for main system clock Input P122/X2
EXCLKS Input External clock input for subsystem clock Input P124/XT2
EXLVI Input Potential input for external low-voltage detection Input P120/INTP0
VDD − Positive power supply (except for ports) − −
EVDD − Positive power supply for ports − −
VSS − Ground potential (except for ports) − −
EVSS − Ground potential for ports − −
FLMD0 − Flash memory programming mode setting. − −
REGC − This is the pin for connecting regulator output (2.5 V)
stabilization capacitance for internal operation. Connect this
pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1
μ
F: recommended).
− −
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
32
2.2 Description of Pin Functions
2.2.1 P00, P01, P06 (port 0)
P00, P01 and P06 function as a 3-bit I/O port. These pins also function as timer I/O.
The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.
(1) Port mode
P00, P01 and P06 function as 3-bit I/O port. P00, P01 and P06 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using
port mode register 0 (PM0). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register
0 (PU0).
(2) Control mode
P00, P01 and P06 function as timer I/O.
(a) TI000
These is the pin for inputting an external count clock to 16-bit timer/event counters 00 and are also for
inputting a capture trigger signal to the capture registers (CR000) of 16-bit timer/event counters 00.
(b) TI010, TI011
These are the pin for inputting a capture trigger signal to the capture register (CR010, CR011) of 16-bit
timer/event counters 00 and 01.
(c) TO00, TO01
These are timer output pin.
Caution P06 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 33
2.2.2 P10 to P17 (port 1)
P10 to P17 function as an 8-bit I/O port. These pins also function as pins for external interrupt request input, serial
interface data I/O, clock I/O, and timer I/O.
The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.
(1) Port mode
P10 to P17 function as an 8-bit I/O port. P10 to P17 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode
register 1 (PM1). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1).
(2) Control mode
P10 to P17 function as external interrupt request input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, and timer I/O.
(a) SI10
This is a serial interface serial data input pin.
(b) SO10
This is a serial interface serial data output pin.
(c) SCK10
This is a serial interface serial clock I/O pin.
(d) RxD60, RxD61
These are the serial data input pins of the asynchronous serial interface.
(e) TxD60, TxD61
These are the serial data output pins of the asynchronous serial interface.
(f) TI50
This is the pin for inputting an external count clock to 8-bit timer/event counter 50.
(g) TO50, TOH0, and TOH1
These are timer output pins.
(h) INTP5
This is an external interrupt request input pin for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both rising
and falling edges) can be specified.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
34
2.2.3 P30 to P33 (port 3)
P30 to P33 function as a 4-bit I/O port. These pins also function as pins for external interrupt request input and
timer I/O.
The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.
(1) Port mode
P30 to P33 function as a 4-bit I/O port. P30 to P33 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode
register 3 (PM3). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3).
(2) Control mode
P30 to P33 function as external interrupt request input pins and timer I/O pins.
(a) INTP1 to INTP4
These are the external interrupt request input pins for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both
rising and falling edges) can be specified.
(b) TI51
This is an external count clock input pin to 8-bit timer/event counter 51.
(c) TO51
This is a timer output pin.
Cautions 1. Be sure to pull the P31/INTP2 pin down before a reset release, to prevent malfunction.
2. Connect P31/INTP2 as follows when writing the flash memory with a flash programmer.
- P31/INTP2: Connect to EVSS via a resistor (10 kΩ: recommended).
The above connection is not necessary when writing the flash memory by means of self
programming.
Remark P31/INTP2 and P32/INTP3 can be used as on-chip debug mode setting pins when the on-chip debug
function is used. For details, refer to CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION.
2.2.4 P40, P41 (port 4)
P40, P41 function as a 2-bit I/O port. P40, P41 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register
4 (PM4). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 4 (PU4).
2.2.5 P60 to P63 (port 6)
P60 to P63 function as a 4-bit I/O port. P60 to P63 can be set to input port or output port in 1-bit units using port
mode register 6 (PM6)
P60 to P63 are N-ch open-drain pins.
Caution P63 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 35
2.2.6 P70 to P73 (port 7)
P70 to P73 function as a 4-bit I/O port. These pins also function as external interrupt request input, clock output
pins, buzzer output pins, CAN I/F I/O.
The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.
(1) Port mode
P70 to P73 function as a 4-bit I/O port. P70 to P73 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode
register 7 (PM7). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7).
(2) Control mode
P70 to P73 function as external interrupt request input, output pins, buzzer output pins, CAN I/F I/O.
(a) INTP6, INTP7
These are the external interrupt request input pins for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or both
rising and falling edges) can be specified.
(b) CRxD
This is the CAN serial receive data input pin.
(c) CTxD
This is the CAN serial transmit data output pin.
(d) PCL
This is a clock output pin.
(e) BUZ
This is a buzzer output pin.
2.2.7 P80 to P87 (port 8)
P80 to P87 function as an 8-bit I/O port. These pins also function as pins for A/D converter analog input.
The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.
(1) Port mode
P80 to P87 function as an 8-bit I/O port. P80 to P87 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode
register 8 (PM8).
(2) Control mode
P80 to P87 function as A/D converter analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI7). When using these pins as analog input
pins, see (5) P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7, P90/ANI8 in 12.6 Cautions for A/D Converter.
Caution P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 is set in the analog input mode after release of reset.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
36
2.2.8 P90 (port 9)
P90 function as a 1-bit I/O port. These pins also function as pins for A/D converter analog input.
The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.
(1) Port mode
P90 function as a 1-bit I/O port. P90 can be set to input or output in 1-bit units using port mode register 9 (PM9).
(2) Control mode
P90 function as A/D converter analog input pins (ANI8). When using these pins as analog input pins, see (5)
P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7, P90/ANI8 in 12.6 Cautions for A/D Converter.
Cautions 1. P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 is set in the analog input mode after release of reset.
2. P90 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
2.2.9 P120 to P124 (port 12)
P120 to P124 function as a 5-bit I/O port. These pins also function as pins for external interrupt request input,
external clock input for main system clock, external clock input for subsystem clock and potential input for external
low-voltage detection. The following operation modes can be specified in 1-bit units.
(1) Port mode
P120 to P124 function as a 5-bit I/O port. P120 to P124 can be set to input or output using port mode register 12
(PM12). Only for P120, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor option register 12
(PU12).
(2) Control mode
P120 to P124 function as pins for external interrupt request input, potential input for external low-voltage
detection, resonator connection for main system clock, resonator connection for subsystem clock, external clock
input for main system clock and external clock input for subsystem clock.
(a) INTP0
This functions as an external interrupt request input for which the valid edge (rising edge, falling edge, or
both rising and falling edges) can be specified.
(b) EXLVI
This is a potential input pin for external low-voltage detection.
(c) X1, X2
These are the pins for connecting a resonator for high-speed system clock.
When supplying an external clock, input a signal to the X1 pin and input the inverse signal to the X2 pin.
Caution Connect P121/X1 as follows when writing the flash memory with a flash programmer.
- P121/X1: When using this pin as a port, connect it to VSS via a resistor (10 kΩ:
recommended) (in the input mode) or leave it open (in the output mode).
The above connection is not necessary when writing the flash memory by means of self
programming.
Remark The X1 and X2 pins can be used as on-chip debug mode setting pins when the on-chip debug
function is used. For details, refer to CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 37
(d) EXCLK
This is an external clock input pin for main system clock.
(e) XT1, XT2
These are the pins for connecting a resonator for subsystem clock.
When supplying an external clock, input a signal to the XT1 pin and input the inverse signal to the XT2 pin.
(f) EXCLKS
This is an external clock input pin for subsystem clock.
2.2.10 P130, P131 (port 13)
P130 functions as a 1-bit output-only port. P131 function as a 1-bit I/O port. P131 can be set to input or output in
1-bit units using port mode register 13 (PM13). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified by pull-up resistor
option register 13 (PU13).
Caution P131 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
2.2.11 AVREF
This is the A/D converter reference voltage input pin.
When the A/D converter is not used, connect this pin directly to EVDD or VDDNote.
Note Connect port 8 and port 9 directly to EVDD when it is used as a digital port.
2.2.12 AVSS
This is the A/D converter ground potential pin. Even when the A/D converter is not used, always use this pin with
the same potential as the EVSS pin or VSS pin.
2.2.13 RESET
This is the active-low system reset input pin.
2.2.14 REGC
This is the pin for connecting regulator output (2.5 V) stabilization capacitance for internal operation. Connect this
pin to VSS via a capacitor (0.47 to 1 µF: recommended).
REGC
V
SS
Caution Keep the wiring length as short as possible for the broken-line part in the above figure.
2.2.15 VDD and EVDD
VDD is the positive power supply pin for other than ports.
EVDD is the positive power supply pin for ports.
2.2.16 VSS and EVSS
VSS is the ground potential pin for other than ports.
EVSS is the ground potential pin for ports.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
38
2.2.17 FLMD0
This is a pin for setting flash memory programming mode.
Connect to EVSS or VSS in the normal operation mode. In flash memory programming mode, be sure to connect
this pin to the flash programmer.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 39
2.3 Pin I/O Circuits and Recommended Connection of Unused Pins
Table 2-4 shows the types of pin I/O circuits and the recommended connections of unused pins.
Refer to Figure 2-1 for the configuration of the I/O circuit of each type.
Table 2-4. Pin I/O Circuit Types (1/2)
Pin Name I/O Circuit
Type
I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins
P00/TI000
P01/TI010/TO00
P06/TI011/TO01 Note 1
P10/SCK10/TxD61
P11/SI10/RxD61
5-AH
P12/SO10
P13/TxD60
5-H
P14/RxD60 5-AH
P15/TOH0 5-H
P16/TOH1/INTP5
P17/TI50/TO50
P30/INTP1
P31/INTP2 Note 2
P32/INTP3
P33/TI51/TO51/INTP4
5-AH
P40, P41 5-H
Input: Independently connect to EVDD or
EVSS via a resistor.
Output: Leave open.
P60 to P63 Note 1 13-P
Input: Connect to EVSS.
Output: Leave this pin open at low-level
output after clearing the output latch of the
port to 0.
P70/CTxD 5-H
P71/CRxD
P72/PCL/INTP6
P73/BUZ/INTP7
5-AH
I/O
Input: Independently connect to EVDD or
EVSS via a resistor.
Output: Leave open.
P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7Note 3 11-G I/O
P90/ANI8 Note 1
<Analog setting>
Connect to AVREF or AVSS.
<Digital setting>
Input: Independently connect to EVDD or
EVSS via a resistor.
Output: Leave open.
Notes 1. P06, P63 and P90 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
2. Connect P31/INTP2 as follows when writing the flash memory with a flash
programmer.
- P31/INTP2: Connect to EVSS via a resistor (10 kΩ: recommended).
The above connection is not necessary when writing the flash memory by means
of self programming.
3. P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 and P90/ANI8 is set in the analog input mode after release
of reset.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
40
Table 2-4. Pin I/O Circuit Types (2/2)
Pin Name I/O Circuit
Type
I/O Recommended Connection of Unused Pins
P120/INTP0/EXLVI 5-AH I/O Input: Independently connect to EVDD or
EVSS via a resistor.
Output: Leave open.
P121/X1Note 1, 2
P122/X2/EXCLKNote 1
P123/XT1Note 1
P124/XT2/EXCLKSNote 1
37 I/O Input: Independently connect to EVDD or
EVSS via a resistor.
Output: Leave open.
P130 3-C Output Leave open.
P131 Note 3 5-AH I/O Input: Independently connect to EVDD or
EVSS via a resistor.
Output: Leave open.
RESET 2 Input Connect to EVDD or VDD.
AVREF Connect directly to EVDD or VDDNote 4.
AVSS Connect directly to EVSS or VSS.
FLMD0
− −
Connect to EVSS or VSS.
Notes 1. Use the recommended connection above in I/O port mode (see Figure 5-6 Format
of Clock Operation Mode Select Register (OSCCTL)) when these pins are not
used.
2. Connect P121/X1 as follows when writing the flash memory with a flash
programmer.
- P121/X1: When using this pin as a port, connect it to VSS via a resistor (10 kΩ:
recommended) (in the input mode) or leave it open (in the output mode).
The above connection is not necessary when writing the flash memory by means
of self programming.
3. P131 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
4. Connect port 8 directly to EVDD when it is used as a digital port.
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 41
Figure 2-1. Pin I/O Circuit List (1/2)
Type 3-C
Type 2 Type 5-H
Type 11-G
Schmitt-triggered input with hysteresis characteristics
IN
EV
DD
P-ch
N-ch
Data OUT
Vss
Pullup
enable
Output
data
Output
disable
Input
enable
EV
DD
P-ch
EV
DD
P-ch
IN/OUT
N-ch
EVss
Data
Output
disable
AV
REF
P-ch
IN/OUT
N-ch
P-ch
N-ch
AV
REF
(threshold voltage)
Comparator
Input enable
+
_
AV
SS
AV
SS
Pull-up
enable
Data
Output
disable
Input
enable
EV
DD
P-ch
EV
DD
P-ch
IN/OUT
N
-ch
EV
SS
Type 5-AH
Data
Output disable
IN/OUT
N-ch
input enable
EVss
Type 13-P
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
42
Figure 2-1. Pin I/O Circuit List (2/2)
Data
Output
disable
Input
enable
EVDD
P-ch X1,
XT1
N
-ch
EVSS
Reset
Data
Output
disable
Input
enable
EVDD
P-ch
N
-ch
EVSS
Reset
P-ch
N-ch
X2,
XT2
Type 37
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 43
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
3.1 Memory Space
Products in the 78K0/FC2 can each access a 64 KB memory space. Figures 3-1 to 3-3 show the memory map.
Caution Regardless of the internal memory capacity, the initial values of the internal memory size
switching register (IMS) and internal expansion RAM size switching register (IXS) of the
78K0/FC2 is fixed (IMS = CFH, IXS = 0CH). Therefore, set the value corresponding to each
product as indicated below.
Table 3-1. Set Values of Internal Memory Size Switching Register (IMS)
and Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register (IXS)
Flash Memory Version IMS IXS
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884
C8H 0AH
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885
CCH 08H
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886
CFH 08H
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
44
Figure 3-1. Memory Map (
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884)
FFFFH
FF00H
FEFFH
FEE0H
FEDFH
F800H
F7FFH
F3FFH
0000H
Internal high-speed RAM
1024 × 8 bits
General-purpose
registers
32 × 8 bits
Flash memory
32768 × 8 bits
Program
memory space
Data memory
space
F400H
Internal expansion RAM
1024 × 8 bits
RAM space in
which instruction
can be fetched
FA00H
F9FFH
FE20H
FE1FH
Reserved
FB00H
FAFFH AFCAN area
(256 × 8 bits)
Special function registers
(SFR)
256 × 8 bits FF20H
FF1FH
Short direct
addressing
8000H
7FFFH
Reserved
Note 1 FE10H
FE0FH
Note 2
0190H
018FH
0083H
0082H
0800H
07FFH
1000H
0FFFH
Vector table area
64 × 8 bits
0040H
003FH
0000H
CALLT table area
64 × 8 bits
0085H
0084H
Program area
1915 × 8 bits
Option byte area
Note 3
5 × 8 bits
CALLF entry area
2048 × 8 bits
Program area
7FFFH
Program area
0080H
007FH
1085H
1084H
1080H
107FH
Option byte area
Note 3
5 × 8 bits
1FFFH
Boot cluster 0
Note 4
Boot cluster 1
Notes 1. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the user data backup area for
communication.
2. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the communication command
area (269 bytes).
3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 0080H to 0084H.
When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 0080H to 0084H and 1080H to 1084H.
4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 23.8 Security
Setting).
Remark The flash memory is divided into blocks (one block = 1 KB). For the address values and block numbers,
see Table 3-2 Correspondence Between Address Values and Block Numbers in Flash Memory.
Block 00H
Block 01H
Block 1FH
1 KB
7FFFH
07FFH
0000H
0400H
03FFH
EC00H
EBFFH
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 45
Figure 3-2. Memory Map (
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0884)
FFFFH
FF00H
FEFFH
FEE0H
FEDFH
F800H
F7FFH
F000H
EFFFH
0000H
Internal high-speed RAM
1024 × 8 bits
General-purpose
registers
32 × 8 bits
Flash memory
49152 × 8 bits
Program
memory space
Data memory
space
Internal expansion RAM
2048 × 8 bits
RAM space in
which instruction
can be fetched
FA00H
F9FFH
FE20H
FE1FH
Reserved
FB00H
FAFFH AFCAN area
(256 × 8 bits)
Special function registers
(SFR)
256 × 8 bits FF20H
FF1FH
Short direct
addressing
C000H
BFFFH
Reserved
Note 1 FE10H
FE0FH
Note 2
0190H
018FH
0083H
0082H
0800H
07FFH
1000H
0FFFH
Vector table area
64 × 8 bits
0040H
003FH
0000H
CALLT table area
64 × 8 bits
0085H
0084H
Program area
1915 × 8 bits
Option byte area
Note 3
5 × 8 bits
CALLF entry area
2048 × 8 bits
Program area
BFFFH
Program area
0080H
007FH
1085H
1084H
1080H
107FH
Option byte area
Note 3
5 × 8 bits
1FFFH
Boot cluster 0
Note 4
Boot cluster 1
Notes 1. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the user data backup area for
communication.
2. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the communication command
area (269 byte).
3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 0080H to 0084H.
When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 0080H to 0084H and 1080H to 1084H.
4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 23.8 Security
Setting).
Remark The flash memory is divided into blocks (one block = 1 KB). For the address values and block numbers,
see Table 3-2 Correspondence Between Address Values and Block Numbers in Flash Memory.
Block 00H
Block 01H
Block 2FH
1 KB
BFFFH
07FFH
0000H
0400H
03FFH
EC00H
EBFFH
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
46
Figure 3-3. Memory Map (
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886)
FFFFH
FF00H
FEFFH
FEE0H
FEDFH
F800H
F7FFH
F000H
EFFFH
0000H
Internal high-speed RAM
1024 × 8 bits
General-purpose
registers
32 × 8 bits
Flash memory
61440 × 8 bits
Program
memory space
Data memory
space
Internal expansion RAM
2048 × 8 bits
RAM space in
which instruction
can be fetched
FA00H
F9FFH
FE20H
FE1FH
Reserved
FB00H
FAFFH AFCAN area
(256 × 8 bits)
Special function registers
(SFR)
256 × 8 bits FF20H
FF1FH
Short direct
addressing
Note 1 FE10H
FE0FH
Note 2
0190H
018FH
0083H
0082H
0800H
07FFH
1000H
0FFFH
0040H
003FH
0000H
0085H
0084H
Program area
EFFFH
Program area
0080H
007FH
1085H
1084H
1080H
107FH
Vector table area
64 × 8 bits
CALLT table area
64 × 8 bits
Program area
1915 × 8 bits
Option byte area
Note 3
5 × 8 bits
CALLF entry area
2048 × 8 bits
Option byte area
Note 3
5 × 8 bits
1FFFH
Boot cluster 0
Note 4
Boot cluster 1
Notes 1. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the user data backup area for
communication.
2. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the communication command
area (269 bytes).
3. When boot swap is not used: Set the option bytes to 0080H to 0084H.
When boot swap is used: Set the option bytes to 0080H to 0084H and 1080H to 1084H.
4. Writing boot cluster 0 can be prohibited depending on the setting of security (see 23.8 Security
Setting).
Remark The flash memory is divided into blocks (one block = 1 KB). For the address values and block numbers,
see Table 3-2 Correspondence Between Address Values and Block Numbers in Flash Memory.
Block 00H
Block 01H
Block 3BH
1 KB
EFFFH
07FFH
0000H
0400H
03FFH
EC00H
EBFFH
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 47
Correspondence between the address values and block numbers in the flash memory are shown below.
Table 3-2. Correspondence Between Address Values and Block Numbers in Flash Memory
(1)
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883, 78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886
Address Value Block
Number
Address Value Block
Number
Address Value Block
Number
Address Value Block
Number
0000H to 03FFH 00H 4000H to 43FFH 10H 8000H to 83FFH 20H C000H to C3FFH 30H
0400H to 07FFH 01H 4400H to 47FFH 11H 8400H to 87FFH 21H C400H to C7FFH 31H
0800H to 0BFFH 02H 4800H to 4BFFH 12H 8800H to 8BFFH 22H C800H to CBFFH 32H
0C00H to 0FFFH 03H 4C00H to 4FFFH 13H 8C00H to 8FFFH 23H CC00H to CFFFH 33H
1000H to 13FFH 04H 5000H to 53FFH 14H 9000H to 93FFH 24H D000H to D3FFH 34H
1400H to 17FFH 05H 5400H to 57FFH 15H 9400H to 97FFH 25H D400H to D7FFH 35H
1800H to 1BFFH 06H 5800H to 5BFFH 16H 9800H to 9BFFH 26H D800H to DBFFH 36H
1C00H to 1FFFH 07H 5C00H to 5FFFH 17H 9C00H to 9FFFH 27H DC00H to DFFFH 37H
2000H to 23FFH 08H 6000H to 63FFH 18H A000H to A3FFH 28H E000H to E3FFH 38H
2400H to 27FFH 09H 6400H to 67FFH 19H A400H to A7FFH 29H E400H to E7FFH 39H
2800H to 2BFFH 0AH 6800H to 6BFFH 1AH A800H to ABFFH 2AH E800H to EBFFH 3AH
2C00H to 2FFFH 0BH 6C00H to 6FFFH 1BH AC00H to AFFFH 2BH EC00H to EFFFH 3BH
3000H to 33FFH 0CH 7000H to 73FFH 1CH B000H to B3FFH 2CH
3400H to 37FFH 0DH 7400H to 77FFH 1DH B400H to B7FFH 2DH
3800H to 3BFFH 0EH 7800H to 7BFFH 1EH B800H to BBFFH 2EH
3C00H to 3FFFH 0FH 7C00H to 7FFFH 1FH BC00H to BFFFH 2FH
Remark
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884: Block numbers 00H to 1FH
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885: Block numbers 00H to 2FH
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886: Block numbers 00H to 3BH
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
48
3.1.1 Internal program memory space
The internal program memory space stores the program and table data. Normally, it is addressed with the program
counter (PC).
78K0/FC2 products incorporate internal ROM (flash memory), as shown below.
Table 3-3. Internal ROM Capacity
Internal ROM Part Number
Structure Capacity
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884
32768 × 8 bits (0000H to 7FFFH)
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885 49152 × 8 bits (0000H to BFFFH)
μ
PD78F0893, 78F0886
Flash memory
61440 × 8 bits (0000H to EFFFH)
The internal program memory space is divided into the following areas.
(1) Vector code area
The 64-byte area 0000H to 003FH is reserved as a Vector code area. The program start addresses for branch
upon reset signal input or generation of each interrupt request are stored in the Vector code area.
Of the 16-bit address, the lower 8 bits are stored at even addresses and the higher 8 bits are stored at odd
addresses.
Table 3-4. Vector Code
Vector Code Address Interrupt Source Vector Code Address Interrupt Source
0020H INTCSI10/INTSRE61 0000H RESET input, POC, LVI,
WDT 0022H INTP6/INTSR61
0004H INTLVI 0024H INTP7/INTST61
0006H INTP0 0026H INTTMH1
0008H INTP1 0028H INTTMH0
000AH INTP2 002AH INTTM50
000CH INTP3 002CH INTTM000
000EH INTP4 002EH INTTM010
0010H INTP5 0030H INTAD
0012H INTC0ERR 0032H INTWTI/INTDMU
0014H INTC0WUP 0034H INTTM51
0016H INTC0REC 0036H INTWT
0018H INTC0TRX 003AH INTTM001
001AH INTSRE60 003CH INTTM011
001CH INTSR60 003EH BRK
001EH INTST60
(2) CALLT instruction table area
The 64-byte area 0040H to 007FH can store the subroutine entry address of a 1-byte call instruction (CALLT).
(3) Option byte area
The option byte area is assigned to the 1-byte area of 0080H. Refer to CHAPTER 22 OPTION BYTE for details.
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 49
(4) CALLF instruction entry area
The area 0800H to 0FFFH can perform a direct subroutine call with a 2-byte call instruction (CALLF).
(5) On-chip debug security ID setting area
A 10-byte area of 0085H to 008EH and 1085H to 108EH can be used as an on-chip debug security ID setting
area. Set the on-chip debug security ID of 10 bytes at 0085H to 008EH when the boot swap is not used and at
0085H to 008EH and 1085H to 108EH when the boot swap is used. For details, see CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP
DEBUG FUNCTION.
3.1.2 Internal data memory space
78K0/FC2 products incorporate the following RAM.
(1) Internal high-speed RAM
Table 3-5. Internal High-Speed RAM Capacity
Part Number Internal High-Speed RAM
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886
1024 × 8 bits (FB00H to FEFFH)
The 32-byte area FEE0H to FEFFH is assigned to four general-purpose register banks consisting of eight 8-bit
registers per one bank.
This area cannot be used as a program area in which instructions are written and executed.
The internal high-speed RAM can also be used as a stack memory.
(2) Internal expansion RAM
Table 3-6. Internal Expansion RAM Capacity
Part Number Internal Expansion RAM
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884 1024 × 8 bits (F400H to F7FFH)
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885 2048 × 8 bits (F000H to F7FFH)
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886
The internal expansion RAM can also be used as a normal data area similar to the internal high-speed RAM, as
well as a program area in which instructions can be written and executed.
The internal expansion RAM cannot be used as a stack memory.
3.1.3 Special function register (SFR) area
On-chip peripheral hardware special function registers (SFRs) are allocated in the area FF00H to FFFFH (refer to
Table 3-7 Special Function Register List in 3.2.3 Special Function Registers (SFRs)).
Caution Do not access addresses to which SFRs are not assigned.
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
50
3.1.4 Data memory addressing
Addressing refers to the method of specifying the address of the instruction to be executed next or the address of
the register or memory relevant to the execution of instructions.
Several addressing modes are provided for addressing the memory relevant to the execution of instructions for the
78K0/FC2, based on operability and other considerations. For areas containing data memory in particular, special
addressing methods designed for the functions of special function registers (SFR) and general-purpose registers are
available for use. Figure 3-4 to 3-6 show correspondence between data memory and addressing. For details of each
addressing mode, refer to 3.4 Operand Address Addressing.
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 51
Figure 3-4. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (
μ
PD78F0881,
μ
PD78F0884)
FFFFH
FF20H
FF1FH
0000H
FF00H
FEFFH
FEE0H
FEDFH
FE20H
FE1FH
8000H
7FFFH
F800H
F7FFH
F400H
F3FFH
FB00H
FAFFH
Special function registers (SFR)
256 × 8 bits
Short direct
addressing
SFR addressing
Internal high-speed RAM
1024 × 8 bits
General-purpose registers
32 × 8 bits
Flash memory
32768 × 8 bits
Register addressing
Direct addressing
Register indirect addressing
Based addressing
Based indexed addressing
Reserved
Internal expansion RAM
1024 × 8 bits
FA00H
F9FFH
Reserved
AFCAN area
(256 × 8 bits)
Note 1
Note 2
0083H
0082H
0190H
018FH
FE10H
FE0FH
Notes 1. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the user data backup area for
communication.
2. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the communication command
area (269 bytes).
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
52
Figure 3-5. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885)
FFFFH
FF20H
FF1FH
0000H
FF00H
FEFFH
FEE0H
FEDFH
FE20H
FE1FH
F800H
F7FFH
F000H
EFFFH
Special function registers (SFR)
256 × 8 bits
Short direct
addressing
SFR addressing
Internal high-speed RAM
1024 × 8 bits
General-purpose registers
32 × 8 bits
Flash memory
49152 × 8 bits
Direct addressing
Register indirect addressing
Based addressing
Based indexed addressing
Internal expansion RAM
2048 × 8 bits
FA00H
F9FFH
Reserved
AFCAN area
(256 × 8 bits)
FB00H
FAFFH
Register addressing
C000H
BFFFH
Reserved
Note 1
Note 2
0083H
0082H
0190H
018FH
FE10H
FE0FH
Notes 1. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the user data backup area for
communication.
2. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the communication command
area (269 bytes).
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 53
Figure 3-6. Correspondence Between Data Memory and Addressing (
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886)
FFFFH
FF20H
FF1FH
0000H
FF00H
FEFFH
FEE0H
FEDFH
FE20H
FE1FH
F800H
F7FFH
F000H
EFFFH
Special function registers (SFR)
256 × 8 bits
Short direct
addressing
SFR addressing
Internal high-speed RAM
1024 × 8 bits
General-purpose registers
32 × 8 bits
Flash memory
61440 × 8 bits
Direct addressing
Register indirect addressing
Based addressing
Based indexed addressing
Internal expansion RAM
2048 × 8 bits
FA00H
F9FFH
Reserved
AFCAN area
(256 × 8 bits)
FB00H
FAFFH
Register addressing
Note 1
Note 2
0083H
0082H
0190H
018FH
FE10H
FE0FH
Notes 1. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the user data backup area for
communication.
2. During on-chip debugging, use of this area is disabled since it is used as the communication command
area (269 bytes).
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
54
3.2 Processor Registers
78K0/FC2 products incorporate the following processor registers.
3.2.1 Control registers
The control registers control the program sequence, statuses and stack memory. The control registers consist of a
program counter (PC), a program status word (PSW) and a stack pointer (SP).
(1) Program counter (PC)
The program counter is a 16-bit register that holds the address information of the next program to be executed.
In normal operation, the PC is automatically incremented according to the number of bytes of the instruction to be
fetched. When a branch instruction is executed, immediate data and register contents are set.
Reset signal generation sets the reset Vector code values at addresses 0000H and 0001H to the program
counter.
Figure 3-7. Format of Program Counter
15 0
PC PC15 PC14 PC13 PC12 PC11 PC10 PC9 PC8 PC7 PC6 PC5 PC4 PC3 PC2 PC1 PC0
(2) Program status word (PSW)
The program status word is an 8-bit register consisting of various flags set/reset by instruction execution.
Program status word contents are automatically stacked upon interrupt request generation or PUSH PSW
instruction execution and are restored upon execution of the RETB, RETI and POP PSW instructions.
Reset signal generation sets the PSW to 02H.
Figure 3-8. Format of Program Status Word
7 0
PSW IE Z RBS1 AC RBS0 0 ISP CY
(a) Interrupt enable flag (IE)
This flag controls the interrupt request acknowledge operations of the CPU.
When 0, the IE flag is set to the interrupt disabled (DI) state, and all maskable interrupt requests are disabled.
Other interrupt requests are all disabled.
When 1, the IE flag is set to the interrupt enabled (EI) state and interrupt request acknowledgement is
controlled with an in-service priority flag (ISP), an interrupt mask flag for various interrupt sources, and a
priority specification flag.
The IE flag is reset (0) upon DI instruction execution or interrupt acknowledgement and is set (1) upon EI
instruction execution.
(b) Zero flag (Z)
When the operation result is zero, this flag is set (1). It is reset (0) in all other cases.
(c) Register bank select flags (RBS0 and RBS1)
These are 2-bit flags to select one of the four register banks.
In these flags, the 2-bit information that indicates the register bank selected by SEL RBn instruction
execution is stored.
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 55
(d) Auxiliary carry flag (AC)
If the operation result has a carry from bit 3 or a borrow at bit 3, this flag is set (1). It is reset (0) in all other
cases.
(e) In-service priority flag (ISP)
This flag manages the priority of acknowledgeable maskable vectored interrupts. When this flag is 0, low-
level vectored interrupt requests specified by a priority specification flag register (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, PR1H)
(refer to 16.3 (3) Priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, PR1H)) can not be
acknowledged. Actual request acknowledgement is controlled by the interrupt enable flag (IE).
(f) Carry flag (CY)
This flag stores overflow and underflow upon add/subtract instruction execution. It stores the shift-out value
upon rotate instruction execution and functions as a bit accumulator during bit operation instruction execution.
(3) Stack pointer (SP)
This is a 16-bit register to hold the start address of the memory stack area. Only the internal high-speed RAM
area can be set as the stack area.
Figure 3-9 Format of Stack Pointer
15 0
SP SP15 SP14 SP13 SP12 SP11 SP10 SP9 SP8 SP7 SP6 SP5 SP4 SP3 SP2 SP1 SP0
The SP is decremented ahead of write (save) to the stack memory and is incremented after read (restored) from
the stack memory.
Each stack operation saves/restores data as shown in Figures 3-10 and 3-11.
Caution Since reset signal generation makes the SP contents undefined, be sure to initialize the SP
before using the stack.
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
56
Figure 3-10. Data to Be Saved to Stack Memory
(a) PUSH rp instruction (when SP = FEE0H)
Register pair lower
FEE0H
SP
SP
FEE0H
FEDFH
FEDEH
Register pair higher
FEDEH
(b) CALL, CALLF, CALLT instructions (when SP = FEE0H)
PC15 to PC8
FEE0H
SP
SP
FEE0H
FEDFH
FEDEH PC7 to PC0
FEDEH
(c) Interrupt, BRK instructions (when SP = FEE0H)
PC15 to PC8
PSW
FEDFH
FEE0H
SP
SP
FEE0H
FEDEH
FEDDH PC7 to PC0
FEDDH
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 57
Figure 3-11. Data to Be Restored from Stack Memory
(a) POP rp instruction (when SP = FEDEH)
Register pair lower
FEE0H
SP
SP
FEE0H
FEDFH
FEDEH
Register pair higher
FEDEH
(b) RET instruction (when SP = FEDEH)
PC15 to PC8
FEE0H
SP
SP
FEE0H
FEDFH
FEDEH PC7 to PC0
FEDEH
(c) RETI, RETB instructions (when SP = FEDDH)
PC15 to PC8
PSW
FEDFH
FEE0H
SP
SP
FEE0H
FEDEH
FEDDH PC7 to PC0
FEDDH
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
58
3.2.2 General-purpose registers
General-purpose registers are mapped at particular addresses (FEE0H to FEFFH) of the data memory. The
general-purpose registers consists of 4 banks, each bank consisting of eight 8-bit registers (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, and H).
Each register can be used as an 8-bit register, and two 8-bit registers can also be used in a pair as a 16-bit register
(AX, BC, DE, and HL).
These registers can be described in terms of function names (X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H, AX, BC, DE, and HL) and
absolute names (R0 to R7 and RP0 to RP3).
Register banks to be used for instruction execution are set by the CPU control instruction (SEL RBn). Because of
the 4-register bank configuration, an efficient program can be created by switching between a register for normal
processing and a register for interrupts for each bank.
Figure 3-12. Configuration of General-Purpose Registers
(a) Absolute name
BANK0
BANK1
BANK2
BANK3
FEFFH
FEF8H
FEE0H
RP3
RP2
RP1
RP0
R7
15 0 7 0
R6
R5
R4
R3
R2
R1
R0
16-bit processing 8-bit processing
FEF0H
FEE8H
(b) Function name
BANK0
BANK1
BANK2
BANK3
FEFFH
FEF8H
FEE0H
HL
DE
BC
AX
H
15 0 7 0
L
D
E
B
C
A
X
16-bit processing 8-bit processing
FEF0H
FEE8H
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 59
3.2.3 Special Function Registers (SFRs)
Unlike a general-purpose register, each special function register has a special function.
SFRs are allocated to the FF00H to FFFFH area.
Special function registers can be manipulated like general-purpose registers, using operation, transfer and bit
manipulation instructions. The manipulatable bit units, 1, 8, and 16, depend on the special function register type.
Each manipulation bit unit can be specified as follows.
• 1-bit manipulation
Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 1-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfr.bit).
This manipulation can also be specified with an address.
• 8-bit manipulation
Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 8-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfr).
This manipulation can also be specified with an address.
• 16-bit manipulation
Describe the symbol reserved by the assembler for the 16-bit manipulation instruction operand (sfrp).
When specifying an address, describe an even address.
Table 3-7 gives a list of the special function registers. The meanings of items in the table are as follows.
• Symbol
Symbol indicating the address of a special function register. It is a reserved word in the RA78K0, and is defined
by the header file “sfrbit.h” in the CC78K0. When using the RA78K0, ID78K0-NS, ID78K0, or SM78K0, symbols
can be written as an instruction operand.
• R/W
Indicates whether the corresponding special function register can be read or written.
R/W: Read/write enable
R: Read only
W: Write only
• Manipulatable bit units
Indicates the manipulatable bit unit (1, 8, or 16). “−” indicates a bit unit for which manipulation is not possible.
• After reset
Indicates each register status upon reset signal generation.
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
60
Table 3-7. Special Function Register List (1/5)
Manipulatable Bit Unit Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W
1 Bit 8 Bits 16 Bits
After
Reset
FF00H Port register 0 P0 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF01H Port register 1 P1 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF02H 8-bit timer H compare register 00 CMP00 R/W − √ − 00H
FF03H Port register 3 P3 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF04H Port register 4 P4 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF06H Port register 6 P6 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF07H Port register 7 P7 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF08H Port register 8 P8 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF09H Port register 9 P9 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF0AH Receive buffer register 60 RXB60 R − √ − FFH
FF0BH Transmit buffer register 60 TXB60 R/W − √ − FFH
FF0CH Port register 12 P12 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF0DH Port register 13 P13 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF0EH 8-bit timer H compare register 10 CMP10 R/W − √ − 00H
FF0FH Serial I/O shift register 10 SIO10 R − √ − 00H
FF10H
FF11H
16-bit timer counter 00 TM00 R − − √ 0000H
FF12H
FF13H
16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 CR000 R/W − − √ 0000H
FF14H
FF15H
16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 CR010 R/W − − √ 0000H
FF16H 8-bit timer counter 50 TM50 R − √ − 00H
FF17H 8-bit timer compare register 50 CR50 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF18H 10- bit A/D conversion result register ADCR R − − √ 0000H
FF19H 8-bit A/D conversion result register ADCRH R − √ − 00H
FF1AH 8-bit timer H compare register 01 CMP01 R/W − √ − 00H
FF1BH 8-bit timer H compare register 11 CMP11 R/W − √ − 00H
FF1FH 8-bit timer counter 51 TM51 R − √ − 00H
FF20H Port mode register 0 PM0 R/W √ √ − FFH
FF21H Port mode register 1 PM1 R/W √ √ − FFH
FF22H A/D port configuration register ADPC R/W √ √ − 00H
FF23H Port mode register 3 PM3 R/W √ √ − FFH
FF24H Port mode register 4 PM4 R/W √ √ − FFH
FF26H Port mode register 6 PM6 R/W √ √ − FFH
FF27H Port mode register 7 PM7 R/W √ √ − FFH
FF28H Port mode register 8 PM8 R/W √ √ − FFH
FF29H Port mode register 9Note PM9 R/W
√ √ − FFH
FF2AH A/D converter mode register ADM R/W √ √ − 00H
FF2BH Analog input channel specification register ADS R/W √ √ − 00H
Note
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 61
Table 3-7. Special Function Register List (2/5)
Manipulatable Bit Unit Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W
1 Bit 8 Bits 16 Bits
After
Reset
FF2CH Port mode register 12 PM12 R/W √ √ − FFH
FF2DH Port mode register 13 PM13 R/W √ √ − FEH
FF2EH Asynchronous serial interface selection register
61
ASIM61 R/W √ √ − 01H
FF2FH Asynchronous serial interface reception error
status register 61
ASIS61 R
− √ − 00H
FF30H Pull-up resistor option register 0 PU0 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF31H Pull-up resistor option register 1 PU1 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF33H Pull-up resistor option register 3 PU3 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF34H Pull-up resistor option register 4 PU4 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF37H Pull-up resistor option register 7 PU7 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF38H Asynchronous serial interface transmission
status register 61
ASIF61 R
− √ − 00H
FF39H Clock selection register 61 CKSR61 R/W − √ − 00H
FF3AH Asynchronous serial interface Receive buffer
register 61
RXB61 R/W − √ − FFH
FF3BH Asynchronous serial interface Transmit buffer
register 61
TXB61 R/W − √ − FFH
FF3CH Pull-up resistor option register 12 PU12 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF3DH Pull-up resistor option register 13Note PU13 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF3EH Baud rate generator control register 61 BRGC61 R/W − √ − FFH
FF3FH Asynchronous serial interface control register 61 ASICL61 R/W √ √ − 16H
FF40H Clock output selection register CKS R/W √ √ − 00H
FF41H 8-bit timer compare register 51 CR51 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF42H Multiplier/divider control register 0 DMUC0 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF43H 8-bit timer mode control register 51 TMC51 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF44H
SDR0L
FF45H
Multiplier/divider data register 0 SDR0
SDR0H
R/W − √ √ 0000H
FF48H External interrupt rising edge enable register EGP R/W √ √ − 00H
FF49H External interrupt falling edge enable register EGN R/W √ √ − 00H
FF4AH Multiplication/Division Data Register A0L MDA0L R/W − √ √ 0000H
FF4BH
FF4CH Multiplication/Division Data Register A0H MDA0H R/W − √ √ 0000H
FF4DH
FF4FH Input switch control register ISC R/W √ √ − 00H
FF50H Asynchronous serial interface operation mode
register 60
ASIM60 R/W √ √ − 01H
FF53H Asynchronous serial interface reception error
status register 60
ASIS60 R
− √ − 00H
Note
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
62
Table 3-7. Special Function Register List (3/5)
Manipulatable Bit Unit Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W
1 Bit 8 Bits 16 Bits
After
Reset
FF55H Asynchronous serial interface transmission
status register 60
ASIF60 R
− √ − 00H
FF56H Clock selection register 60 CKSR60 R/W − √ − 00H
FF57H Baud rate generator control register 60 BRGC60 R/W − √ − FFH
FF58H Asynchronous serial interface control register 60 ASICL60 R/W √ √ − 16H
FF60H
FF61H
Module Receive History List Get Pointer
Register
C0RGPT
R/W − − √ xx02H
FF62H
FF63H
Module Transmission History List Get Pointer
Register
C0TGPT R/W − − √ xx02H
FF64H
FF65H
CAN Global Macro Clock Selection C0GMCTRL R/W − − √ 0000H
FF66H
FF67H
CAN Global Macro Automatic Block
Transmission Delay Register
C0GMABT R/W − − √ 0000H
FF68H Module Last Out Pointer Register C0LOPT R − √ − Undefined
FF69H 8-bit timer H mode register 0 TMHMD0 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF6AH Timer clock selection register 50 TCL50 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF6BH 8-bit timer mode control register 50 TMC50 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF6EH CAN Global Macro Clock Selection Register C0GMCS R/W − √ − 0FH
FF6FH CAN Global Macro Automatic Block
Transmission Register
C0GMABTD R/W − √ − 00H
FF70H
FF71H
CAN Module Mask 1 Register L C0MASK1L R/W − − √ Undefined
FF72H
FF73H
CAN Module Mask 1 Register H C0MASK1H R/W − − √ Undefined
FF74H
FF75H
CAN Module Mask 2 Register L C0MASK2L R/W − − √ Undefined
FF76H
FF77H
CAN Module Mask 2 Register H C0MASK2H R/W − − √ Undefined
FF78H
FF79H
CAN Module Mask 3 Register L C0MASK3L R/W − − √ Undefined
FF7AH
FF7BH
CAN Module Mask 3 Register H C0MASK3H R/W − − √ Undefined
FF7CH
FF7DH
CAN Module Mask 4 Register L
C0MASK4L R/W
−
−
√
Undefined
FF7EH
FF7FH
CAN Module Mask 4 Register H C0MASK4H R/W − − √ Undefined
FF80H Serial operation mode register 10 CSIM10 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF81H Serial clock selection register 10 CSIC10 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF84H Transmit buffer register 10 SOTB10 R/W − √ − 00H
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 63
Table 3-7. Special Function Register List (4/5)
Manipulatable Bit Unit Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W
1 Bit 8 Bits 16 Bits
After Reset
FF8AH CAN module time stamp register C0TS R/W − − √ 0000H
FF8BH
FF8CH Timer clock selection register 51 TCL51 R/W √ √ − 00H
FF8FH Watch timer operation mode register WTM R/W √ √ − 00H
FF90H
FF91H
CAN Module Control Register C0CTRL R/W − − √ 0000H
FF92H CAN Module Last Error Code Register C0LEC R/W − √ − 00H
FF93H CAN Module Information Register C0INFO R − √ − 00H
FF94H
FF95H
CAN Module Error Counters C0ERC R − − √ 0000H
FF96H
FF97H
CAN Module Interrupt Enable Register C0IE R/W − − √ 0000H
FF98H
FF99H
CAN Module Interrupt Pending Register C0INTS R/W − − √ 0000H
FF9BH Watchdog timer enable register WDTE R/W − √ − 1AH/9AHNote1
FF9CH
FF9DH
CAN Module Bit Rate Register C0BTR R/W − − √ 370FH
FF9EH CAN Module bit rate Prescaler register C0BRP R/W − √ − FFH
FF9FH CAN Module Last In Pointer Register C0LIPT R − √ − Undefined
FFA0H Internal oscillator mode register RCM R/W √ √ − 00HNote2
FFA1H Main clock mode register MCM R/W √ √ − 00H
FFA2H Main OSC control register MOC R/W √ √ − 80H
FFA3H Oscillation stabilization time counter status register OSTC R √ √ − 00H
FFA4H Oscillation stabilization time select register OSTS R/W √ √ − 05H
FFACH Reset control flag register RESF R − √ − 00HNote3
FFAEH MDB0L
FFAFH
Multiplier/divider data register B0 MDB0
MDB0H
R/W − √ √ 0000H
FFB0H
FFB1H
16-bit timer counter 01 TM01 R − − √ 0000H
FFB2H 16-bit timer capture/compare register 001 CR001 R/W − − √ 0000H
FFB3H
FFB4H
FFB5H
16-bit timer capture/compare register 011 CR011 R/W − − √ 0000H
FFB6H 16-bit timer mode control register 01 TMC01 R/W √ √ − 00H
FFB7H Prescaler mode register 01 PRM01 R/W √ √ − 00H
FFB8H Capture/compare control register 01 CRC01 R/W √ √ − 00H
Notes 1. The reset value of WDTE is determined by setting of option byte.
2. The value of this register is 00H immediately after a reset release but automatically changes to 80H after
internal high-speed oscillator oscillation has been stabilized.
3. This value varies depending on the reset source.
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
64
Tables 3-7. Special Function Register List (5/5)
Manipulatable Bit Unit Address Special Function Register (SFR) Name Symbol R/W
1 Bit 8 Bits 16 Bits
After Reset
FFB9H 16-bit timer output control register 01 TOC01 R/W √ √ − 00H
FFBAH 16-bit timer mode control register 00 TMC00 R/W √ √ − 00H
FFBBH Prescaler mode register 00 PRM00 R/W √ √ − 00H
FFBCH Capture/compare control register 00 CRC00 R/W √ √ − 00H
FFBDH 16-bit timer output control register 00 TOC00 R/W √ √ − 00H
FFBEH Low-voltage detection register LVIM R/W √ √ − 00H
FFBFH Low-voltage detection level selection register LVIS R/W √ √ − 00H
FFC2H Flash status register PFS R/W √ √ − 00H
FFC4H Flash programming mode control register FLPMC R/W √ √ − 08H/0CHNote1
FFE0H Interrupt request flag register 0L IF0 IF0L R/W √ √ √ 00H
FFE1H Interrupt request flag register 0H IF0H R/W √ √ 00H
FFE2H Interrupt request flag register 1L IF1 IF1L R/W √ √ √ 00H
FFE3H Interrupt request flag register 1H IF1H R/W √ √ 00H
FFE6H Interrupt mask flag register 1L MK1L R/W √ √ FFH
FFE7H Interrupt mask flag register 1H
MK1
MK1H R/W √ √
√
DFH
FFE8H Priority specification flag register 0L PR0L R/W √ √ FFH
FFE9H Priority specification flag register 0H
PR0
PR0H R/W √ √
√
FFH
FFEAH Priority specification flag register 1L PR1L R/W √ √ FFH
FFEBH Priority specification flag register 1H
PR1
PR1H R/W √ √
√
FFH
FFEEH 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 TMCYC1 R/W √ √ − 00H
FFEFH Clock operation mode select register OSCCTL R/W √ √ − 00H
FFF0H Internal memory size switching registerNote2 IMS R/W
− √ − CFH
FFF4H Internal expansion RAM size switching
registerNote2
IXS R/W
− √ − 0CH
FFFAH 8-bit timer H mode register 1 TMHMD1 R/W √ √ − 00H
FFFBH Processor clock control register PCC R/W √ √ − 01H
Notes 1. Varies depending on the operation mode.
• User mode: 08H
• On-board mode: 0CH
2. Regardless of the internal memory capacity, the initial values of the internal memory size switching
register (IMS) and internal expansion RAM size switching register (IXS) of the 78K0/FC2 is fixed (IMS =
CFH, IXS = 0CH). Therefore, set the value corresponding to each as indicated below.
Flash Memory Version IMS IXS
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884 C8H 0AH
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885 CCH 08H
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886
CFH 08H
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 65
3.3 Instruction Address Addressing
An instruction address is determined by program counter (PC) contents and is normally incremented (+1 for each
byte) automatically according to the number of bytes of an instruction to be fetched each time another instruction is
executed. When a branch instruction is executed, the branch destination information is set to the PC and branched by
the following addressing (for details of instructions, refer to 78K/0 Series Instructions User’s Manual (U12326E).
3.3.1 Relative addressing
[Function]
The value obtained by adding 8-bit immediate data (displacement value: jdisp8) of an instruction code to the
start address of the following instruction is transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched. The
displacement value is treated as signed two’s complement data (−128 to +127) and bit 7 becomes a sign bit.
In other words, relative addressing consists of relative branching from the start address of the following
instruction to the −128 to +127 range.
This function is carried out when the BR $addr16 instruction or a conditional branch instruction is executed.
[Illustration]
15 0
PC
+
15 0
876
S
15 0
PC
α
jdisp8
When S = 0, all bits of are 0.
When S = 1, all bits of are 1.
PC indicates the start address
of the instruction after the BR instruction.
...
α
α
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
66
3.3.2 Immediate addressing
[Function]
Immediate data in the instruction word is transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched.
This function is carried out when the CALL !addr16 or BR !addr16 or CALLF !addr11 instruction is executed.
CALL !addr16 and BR !addr16 instructions can be branched to the entire memory space. The CALLF !addr11
instruction is branched to the 0800H to 0FFFH area.
[Illustration]
In the case of CALL !addr16 and BR !addr16 instructions
15 0
PC
87
70
CALL or BR
Low Addr.
High Addr.
In the case of CALLF !addr11 instruction
15 0
PC
87
70
fa10–8
11 10
00001
643
CALLF
fa7–0
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 67
3.3.3 Table indirect addressing
[Function]
Table contents (branch destination address) of the particular location to be addressed by bits 1 to 5 of the
immediate data of an operation code are transferred to the program counter (PC) and branched.
This function is carried out when the CALLT [addr5] instruction is executed.
This instruction references the address stored in the memory table from 40H to 7FH, and allows branching to
the entire memory space.
[Illustration]
15 1
15 0
PC
70
Low Addr.
High Addr.
Memory (Table)
Effective address+1
Effective address 01
00000000
87
87
65 0
0
111
765 10
ta
4–0
Operation code
3.3.4 Register addressing
[Function]
Register pair (AX) contents to be specified with an instruction word are transferred to the program counter (PC)
and branched.
This function is carried out when the BR AX instruction is executed.
[Illustration]
70
rp
07
AX
15 0
PC
87
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
68
3.4 Operand Address Addressing
The following methods are available to specify the register and memory (addressing) to undergo manipulation
during instruction execution.
3.4.1 Implied addressing
[Function]
The register that functions as an accumulator (A and AX) among the general-purpose registers is automatically
(implicitly) addressed.
Of the 78K0/FC2 instruction words, the following instructions employ implied addressing.
Instruction Register to Be Specified by Implied Addressing
MULU A register for multiplicand and AX register for product storage
DIVUW AX register for dividend and quotient storage
ADJBA/ADJBS A register for storage of numeric values that become decimal correction targets
ROR4/ROL4 A register for storage of digit data that undergoes digit rotation
[Operand format]
Because implied addressing can be automatically employed with an instruction, no particular operand format is
necessary.
[Description example]
In the case of MULU X
With an 8-bit × 8-bit multiply instruction, the product of A register and X register is stored in AX. In this example,
the A and AX registers are specified by implied addressing.
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 69
3.4.2 Register addressing
[Function]
The general-purpose register to be specified is accessed as an operand with the register bank select flags
(RBS0 to RBS1) and the register specify codes (Rn and RPn) of an operation code.
Register addressing is carried out when an instruction with the following operand format is executed. When an
8-bit register is specified, one of the eight registers is specified with 3 bits in the operation code.
[Operand format]
Identifier Description
r X, A, C, B, E, D, L, H
rp AX, BC, DE, HL
‘r’ and ‘rp’ can be described by absolute names (R0 to R7 and RP0 to RP3) as well as function names (X, A, C,
B, E, D, L, H, AX, BC, DE, and HL).
[Description example]
MOV A, C; when selecting C register as r
Operation code 01100010
Register specify code
INCW DE; when selecting DE register pair as rp
Operation code 10000100
Register specify code
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
70
3.4.3 Direct addressing
[Function]
The memory to be manipulated is directly addressed with immediate data in an instruction word becoming an
operand address.
[Operand format]
Identifier Description
addr16 Label or 16-bit immediate data
[Description example]
MOV A, !0FE00H; when setting !addr16 to FE00H
Operation code 10001110 OP code
00000000 00H
11111110 FEH
[Illustration]
Memory
07
addr16 (lower)
addr16 (upper)
OP code
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 71
3.4.4 Short direct addressing
[Function]
The memory to be manipulated in the fixed space is directly addressed with 8-bit data in an instruction word.
This addressing is applied to the 256-byte space FE20H to FF1FH. Internal RAM and special function registers
(SFRs) are mapped at FE20H to FEFFH and FF00H to FF1FH, respectively.
The SFR area (FF00H to FF1FH) where short direct addressing is applied is a part of the overall SFR area.
Ports that are frequently accessed in a program and compare and capture registers of the timer/event counter
are mapped in this area, allowing SFRs to be manipulated with a small number of bytes and clocks.
When 8-bit immediate data is at 20H to FFH, bit 8 of an effective address is set to 0. When it is at 00H to 1FH,
bit 8 is set to 1. Refer to the [Illustration] shown below.
[Operand format]
Identifier Description
saddr Immediate data that indicate label or FE20H to FF1FH
saddrp Immediate data that indicate label or FE20H to FF1FH (even address only)
[Description example]
MOV 0FE30H, A; when transferring value of A register to saddr (FE30H)
Operation code 11110010 OP code
00110000 30H (saddr-offset)
[Illustration]
15 0
Short direct memory
Effective address 1111111
87
07
OP code
saddr-offset
α
When 8-bit immediate data is 20H to FFH,
α
= 0
When 8-bit immediate data is 00H to 1FH,
α
= 1
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
72
3.4.5 Special function register (SFR) addressing
[Function]
A memory-mapped special function register (SFR) is addressed with 8-bit immediate data in an instruction word.
This addressing is applied to the 240-byte spaces FF00H to FFCFH and FFE0H to FFFFH. However, the SFRs
mapped at FF00H to FF1FH can be accessed with short direct addressing.
[Operand format]
Identifier Description
sfr Special function register name
sfrp 16-bit manipulatable special function register name (even address
only)
[Description example]
MOV PM0, A; when selecting PM0 (FF20H) as sfr
Operation code 1 1110110 OP code
0 0100000 20H (sfr-offset)
[Illustration]
15 0
SFR
Effective address 1111111
87
07
OP code
sfr-offset
1
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 73
3.4.6 Register indirect addressing
[Function]
Register pair contents specified by a register pair specify code in an instruction word and by a register bank
select flag (RBS0 and RBS1) serve as an operand address for addressing the memory. This addressing can be
carried out for all the memory spaces.
[Operand format]
Identifier Description
− [DE], [HL]
[Description example]
MOV A, [DE]; when selecting [DE] as register pair
Operation code 10000101
[Illustration]
16 08
D
7
E
07
7 0
A
DE
The contents of the memory
addressed are transferred.
Memory
The memory address
specified with the
register pair DE
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
74
3.4.7 Based addressing
[Function]
8-bit immediate data is added as offset data to the contents of the base register, that is, the HL register pair in
the register bank specified by the register bank select flag (RBS0 and RBS1), and the sum is used to address
the memory. Addition is performed by expanding the offset data as a positive number to 16 bits. A carry from
the 16th bit is ignored. This addressing can be carried out for all the memory spaces.
[Operand format]
Identifier Description
− [HL + byte]
[Description example]
MOV A, [HL + 10H]; when setting byte to 10H
Operation code 10101110
00010000
[Illustration]
16 08
H
7
L
07
7 0
A
HL
The contents of the memory
addressed are transferred.
Memory +10
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 75
3.4.8 Based indexed addressing
[Function]
The B or C register contents specified in an instruction word are added to the contents of the base register, that
is, the HL register pair in the register bank specified by the register bank select flag (RBS0 and RBS1), and the
sum is used to address the memory. Addition is performed by expanding the B or C register contents as a
positive number to 16 bits. A carry from the 16th bit is ignored. This addressing can be carried out for all the
memory spaces.
[Operand format]
Identifier Description
− [HL + B], [HL + C]
[Description example]
In the case of MOV A, [HL + B]; (selecting B register)
Operation code 10101011
[Illustration]
16 0
H
78
L
07
B
+
07
7 0
A
HL
The contents of the memory
addressed are transferred.
Memory
CHAPTER 3 CPU ARCHITECTURE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
76
3.4.9 Stack addressing
[Function]
The stack area is indirectly addressed with the stack pointer (SP) contents.
This addressing method is automatically employed when the PUSH, POP, subroutine call and return
instructions are executed or the register is saved/reset upon generation of an interrupt request.
With stack addressing, only the internal high-speed RAM area can be accessed.
[Description example]
In the case of PUSH DE; (saving DE register)
Operation code 10110101
[Illustration]
E
FEE0H
SP
SP
FEE0H
FEDFH
FEDEH
D
Memory 07
FEDEH
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 77
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
4.1 Port Functions
There are two types of pin I/O buffer power supplies: AVREF, EVDD/VDD. The relationship between these power
supplies and the pins is shown below.
Table 4-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies
Power Supply Corresponding Pins
AVREF P80 to P87, P90Note
EVDD/VDD • Port pins other than P80 to P87, P90Note
• Non-port pins
Note P90 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
78K0/FC2 products are provided with the ports shown in Figure 4-1 and 4-2, which enable variety of control
operations.
In addition to the function as digital I/O ports, these ports have several alternate functions. For details of the
alternate functions, refer to CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS.
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883 have a total of 37 I/O ports, ports 0, 1, 3, 4, 6 to 8, 12 and 13. The port
configuration is shown below.
Figure 4-1. Port Types (
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883)
P10
P17
Port 1
P30
P33
Port 3
Port 0
P00
P01
P130
Port 13
P40
P41 Port 4
P60
P62
Port 6
P70
Port 7
P73
P120
Port 12
P124
P80
P87
Port 8
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
78
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 have a total of 41 I/O ports, ports 0, 1, 3, 4, 6 to 9, 12 and 13. The port
configuration is shown below.
Figure 4-2. Port Types (
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886)
P10
P17
Port 1
P30
P33
Port 3
P131
P130
Port 13
P40
P41 Port 4
P90Port 9
P60
P63
Port 6
P70
Port 7
P73
P120
Port 12
P124
P80
P87
Port 8
Port 0
P00
P06
P01
4.2 Port Configuration
Ports include the following hardware.
Table 4-2. Port Configuration (
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883)
Item Configuration
Control registers Port mode register (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM4, PM6 to PM8, PM12, PM13)
Port register (P0, P1, P3, P4, P6 to P8, P12, P13)
Pull-up resistor option register (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU4, PU7, PU12)
Port Total: 37 (CMOS I/O: 33, CMOS output: 1, N-ch open drain I/O: 3)
Pull-up resistor Total: 21
Table 4-3. Port Configuration (
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886)
Item Configuration
Control registers Port mode register (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM6 to PM9, PM12, PM13)
Port register (P0, P1, P3, P4 to P9, P12, P13)
Pull-up resistor option register (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU4, PU7, PU12, PU13)
Port Total: 41 (CMOS I/O: 36, CMOS output: 1, N-ch open drain I/O: 4)
Pull-up resistor Total: 23
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 79
4.2.1 Port 0
Port 0 is a 3-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 0 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units
using port mode register 0 (PM0). When the P00, P01 and P06 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-
up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0).
This port can also be used for timer I/O.
Reset signal generation sets port 0 to input mode.
Figures 4-3 and 4-4 show block diagrams of port 0.
Caution P06 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Figure 4-3. Block Diagram of P00
P00/TI000
WRPU
RD
WRPORT
WRPM
PU00
Alternate function
Output latch
(P00)
PM00
EVDD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU0
PM0
P0
P0: Port register 0
PU0: Pull-up resistor option register 0
PM0: Port mode register 0
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
80
Figure 4-4. Block Diagram of P01 and P06
P01/TI010/TO00,
P06/TI011/TO01
WRPU
RD
WRPORT
WRPM
PU01, PU06
Alternate
function
Output latch
(P01, P06)
PM01, PM06
Alternate
function
EVDD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU0
PM0
P0
P0: Port register 0
PU0: Pull-up resistor option register 0
PM0: Port mode register 0
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
Caution P06 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 81
4.2.2 Port 1
Port 1 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 1 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units
using port mode register 1 (PM1). When the P10 to P17 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up
resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1).
This port can also be used for external interrupt request input, serial interface data I/O, clock I/O, and timer I/O.
Reset signal generation sets port 1 to input mode.
Figures 4-5 to 4-7 show block diagrams of port 1.
Caution To use P10/SCK10/TxD61, P11/SI10/RxD61 and P12/SO10 as general-purpose ports, set serial
operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) and serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10) to the
default status (00H).
Figure 4-5. Block Diagram of P10, P16 and P17
P10/SCK10/TxD61,
P16/TOH1/INTP5,
P17/TI50/TO50
WR
PU
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
PU10, PU16
and PU17
Alternate
function
Output latch
(P10, P16, P17)
PM10, PM16
and PM17
Alternate
function
EV
DD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU1
PM1
P1
P1: Port register 1
PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1
PM1: Port mode register 1
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
82
Figure 4-6. Block Diagram of P11 and P14
P11/SI10/RxD61,
P14/RxD60
WRPU
RD
WRPORT
WRPM
PU11, PU14
Alternate
function
Output latch
(P11, P14)
PM11, PM14
EVDD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU1
PM1
P1
P1: Port register 1
PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1
PM1: Port mode register 1
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 83
Figure 4-7. Block Diagram of P12, P13 and P15
P12/SO10,
P13/TxD60,
P15/TOH0
WR
PU
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
PU12, ,PU13
and PU15
Output latch
(P12, PU13, P15)
PM12, PM13
and PM15
Alternate
function
EV
DD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU1
PM1
P1
P1: Port register 1
PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1
PM1: Port mode register 1
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
84
4.2.3 Port 3
Port 3 is a 4-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 3 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units
using port mode register 3 (PM3). When used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in
1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3).
This port can also be used for external interrupt request input and timer I/O.
Reset signal generation sets port 3 to input mode.
Figures 4-8 and 4-9 show block diagrams of port 3.
Cautions 1. Be sure to pull the P31 pin down before a reset release, to prevent malfunction.
2. Connect P31/INTP2 as follows when writing the flash memory with a flash programmer.
- P31/INTP2: Connect to EVSS via a resistor (10 kΩ: recommended).
The above connection is not necessary when writing the flash memory by means of self
programming.
Remark P31/INTP2 and P32/INTP3 can be used for on-chip debug mode setting when the on-chip debug
function is used. For details, refer to CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION.
Figure 4-8. Block Diagram of P30 to P32
P30/INTP1,
P31/INTP2,
P32/INTP3
WR
PU
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
PU30 to PU32
Alternate
function
Output latch
(P30 to P32)
PM30 to PM32
EV
DD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU3
PM3
P3
P3: Port register 3
PU3: Pull-up resistor option register 3
PM3: Port mode register 3
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
<R>
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 85
Figure 4-9. Block Diagram of P33
P33/INTP4/TI51/TO51
WRPU
RD
WRPORT
WRPM
PU33
Alternate
function
Output latch
(P33)
PM33
Alternate
function
EVDD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU3
PM3
P3
P3: Port register 3
PU3: Pull-up resistor option register 3
PM3: Port mode register 3
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
86
4.2.4 Port 4
Port 4 is a 2-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 4 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units
using port mode register 4 (PM4). Use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units with pull-up resistor
option register 4 (PU4).
Reset signal generation sets port 4 to input mode.
Figure 4-10 shows a block diagram of port 4.
Figure 4-10. Block Diagram of P40, P41
RD
P-ch
WR
PU
WR
PORT
WR
PM
EV
DD
P40, P41
PU40, PU41
Output latch
(P40, P41)
PM40, PM41
Selector
Internal bus
PU4
PM4
P4
P4: Port register 4
PU4: Pull-up resistor option register 4
PM4: Port mode register 4
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 87
4.2.5 Port 6
Port 6 is a 4-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 6 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units
using port mode register 6 (PM6).
The P60 to P63 pins are N-ch open-drain pins (6 V tolerance).
Reset signal generation sets port 6 to input mode.
Figures 4-11 shows block diagrams of port 6.
Caution P63 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Figure 4-11. Block Diagram of P60 to P63
RD
P60 to P63
WRPORT
WRPM
Output latch
(P60 to P63)
PM60 to PM63
Selector
Internal bus
PM6
P6
P6: Port register 6
PM6: Port mode register 6
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
88
4.2.6 Port 7
Port 7 is a 4-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 7 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units
using port mode register 7 (PM7). When the P70 to P73 pins are used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up
resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7).
This port can also be used for external interrupt request input, and clock output pins, buzzer output pins, CAN I/F
I/O.
Reset signal generation sets port 7 to input mode.
Figures 4-12 and 4-13 show block diagrams of port 7.
Figure 4-12. Block Diagram of P70
P70/CTxD
WR
PU
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
PU70
Output latch
(P70)
PM70
Alternate
function
EV
DD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU7
PM7
P7
P7: Port register 7
PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7
PM7: Port mode register 7
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
<R>
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 89
Figure 4-13. Block Diagram of P71
P71/CRxD
WRPU
RD
WRPORT
WRPM
PU71
Alternate function
Output latch
(P71)
PM71
EVDD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU7
PM7
P7
P7: Port register 7
PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7
PM7: Port mode register 7
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
90
Figure 4-14. Block Diagram of P72 and P73
P72/PCL/INTP6
P73/BUZ/INTP7
WR
PU
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
PU72 and PU73
Alternate
function
Output latch
(P72 and P73)
PM72 and PM73
Alternate
function
EV
DD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU7
PM7
P7
P7: Port register 7
PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7
PM7: Port mode register 7
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 91
4.2.7 Port 8
Port 8 is an 8-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 8 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units
using port mode register 8 (PM8).
This port can also be used for A/D converter analog input.
To use P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 as digital input pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the A/D port
configuration register (ADPC) and in the input mode by using PM8. Use these pins starting from the lower bit.
To use P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 as digital output pins, set them in the digital I/O mode by using ADPC and in the
output mode by using PM8 (for details, see 12.3 (5) A/D port configuration register (ADPC)).
Table 4-4. Setting Functions of P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 Pins
ADPC PM8 ADS P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 Pin
Input mode − Digital input Digital I/O selection
Output mode − Digital output
Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Input mode
Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted)
Selects ANI.
Analog input selection
Output mode
Does not select ANI.
Setting prohibited
All P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 are set in the analog input mode when the reset signal is generated.
Figure 4-15 shows a block diagram of port 8.
Caution Make the AVREF pin the same potential as the VDD pin when port 8 is used as a digital port.
Figure 4-15. Block Diagram of P80 to P87
Internal bus
P80/ANI0 to
P87/ANI7
RD
WRPORT
WRPM
Output latch
(P80 to P87)
PM80 to PM87
Selector
PM8
A/D converter
P8
P8: Port register 8
PM8: Port mode register 8
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
92
4.2.8 Port 9
Port 9 is a 1-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 9 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units
using port mode register 9 (PM9).
This port can also be used for A/D converter analog input.
To use P90/ANI8 as digital input pin, set them in the digital I/O mode by using the A/D port configuration register
(ADPC) and in the input mode by using PM9. Use these pins starting from the lower bit.
To use P90/ANI8 as digital output pin, set them in the digital I/O mode by using ADPC and in the output mode by
using PM9 (for details, see 12.3 (5) A/D port configuration register (ADPC)).
Table 4-5. Setting Function of P90/ANI8 Pin
ADPC PM9 ADS P90/ANI8
Input mode − Digital input Digital I/O selection
Output mode − Digital output
Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Input mode
Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted)
Selects ANI.
Analog input selection
Output mode
Does not select ANI.
Setting prohibited
All P90/ANI8 are set in the analog input mode when the reset signal is generated.
Figure 4-16 shows a block diagram of port 9.
Cautions 1. P90 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
2. Make the AVREF pin the same potential as the VDD pin when port 9 is used as a digital port.
3. When using P90/ANI80 in the input mode, not only PM9 (input/output) but also the A/D port
configuration register (ADPC) (analog input/digital input)must be set (for details, see 12.3 (5)
A/D port configuration register (ADPC)). The reset value of ADPC is 00H (P90/ANI8 is
analog input pin).
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 93
Figure 4-16. Block Diagram of P90
Internal bus
P90/ANI8
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
Output latch
(P90)
PM90
Selector
PM9
A/D converter
P9
P9: Port register 9
PM9: Port mode register 9
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
94
4.2.9 Port 12
Port 12 is a 5-bit I/O port with an output latch. Port 12 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units
using port mode register 12 (PM12). When used as an input port only for P120, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can
be specified by pull-up resistor option register 12 (PU12).
This port can also be used for external interrupt input, potential input for external low-voltage detector, connecting
resonator for main system clock, connecting resonator for subsystem clock, external clock input for main system clock,
external clock input for subsystem clock.
Reset signal generation sets port 12 to input mode.
Figures 4-17 and 4-18 show block diagrams of port 12.
Cautions 1. When using the P121 to P124 pins to connect a resonator for the main system clock (X1, X2)
or subsystem clock (XT1, XT2), or to input an external clock for the main system clock
(EXCLK) or subsystem clock (EXCLKS), the X1 oscillation mode, XT1 oscillation mode, or
external clock input mode must be set by using the clock operation mode select register
(OSCCTL) (for detail, see 5.3 (5) Clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)). The reset
value of OSCCTL is 00H (all of the P121 to P124 pins are I/O port pins). At this time, setting
of the PM121 to PM124 and P121 to P124 pins is not necessary.
2. Connect P121/X1 as follows when writing the flash memory with a flash programmer.
- P121/X1: When using this pin as a port, connect it to VSS via a resistor (10 kΩ:
recommended) (in the input mode) or leave it open (in the output mode).
The above connection is not necessary when writing the flash memory by means of self
programming.
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 95
Figure 4-17. Block Diagram of P120
P120/INTP0/EXLVI
WRPU
RD
WRPORT
WRPM
PU120
Alternate
function
Output latch
(P120)
PM120
EVDD
P-ch
Selector
Internal bus
PU12
PM12
P12
P12: Port register 12
PU12: Pull-up resistor option register 12
PM12: Port mode register 12
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
96
Figure 4-18. Block Diagram of P121 to P124
P122/X2/EXCLK,
P124/XT2/EXCLKS
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
Output latch
(P122/P124)
PM122/PM124
PM12
P12
RD
WR
PORT
WR
PM
Output latch
(P121/P123)
PM121/PM123
PM12
P12
EXCLK, OSCSEL/
EXCLKS, OSCSELS
OSCCTL
OSCSEL/
OSCSELS
OSCCTL
P121/X1,
P123/XT1
OSCSEL/
OSCSELS
OSCCTL
OSCSEL/OSCSELS
OSCCTL
Internal bus
Selector Selector
EXCLK/EXCLKS
OSCCTL
P12: Port register 12
PU12: Pull-up resistor option register 12
PM12: Port mode register 12
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 97
4.2.10 Port 13
Port 130 is a 1-bit output-only port.
Port 131 is 1-bit I/O port. P131 can be set to the input mode or output mode in 1-bit units using port mode register
13 (PM13). When used as an input port, use of an on-chip pull-up resistor can be specified in 1-bit units by pull-up
resistor option register 13 (PU13).
Figures 4-19 and 4-20 show block diagrams of port 13.
Caution P131 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Figure 4-19. Block Diagram of P130
RD
Output latch
(P130)
WR
PORT
P130
Internal bus
P13
P13: Port register 13
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
Remark When reset is effected, P130 outputs a low level. If P130 is set to output a high level before reset is
effected, the output signal of P130 can be dummy-output as the CPU reset signal.
P130
Set by software
Reset signal
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
98
Figure 4-20. Block Diagram of P131
RD
P-ch
WR
PU
WR
PORT
WR
PM
EV
DD
P131
PU131
Output latch
(P131)
PM131
Selector
Internal bus
PU13
PM13
P13
P13: Port register 13
PU13: Pull-up resistor option register 13
PM13: Port mode register 13
RD: Read signal
WR××: Write signal
Caution P131 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 99
4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function
Port functions are controlled by the following three types of registers.
• Port mode registers (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM4, PM6 to PM9, PM12, PM13)
• Port registers (P0, P1, P3, P4, P6 to P9, P12, P13)
• Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU4, PU7, PU12, PU13)
• A/D port configuration register (ADPC)
Caution P06, P63, P90, P131, PM06, PM63, PM90, PM131, PU06 and PU131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885,
78F0886 only.
(1) Port mode registers (PM0, PM1, PM3, PM4, PM6 to PM9, PM12, PM13)
These registers specify input or output mode for the port in 1-bit units.
These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH except for PM13. PM13 is set to FEH.
When port pins are used as alternate-function pins, set the port mode register and output latch as shown in Table
4-6.
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
100
Figure 4-21. Format of Port Mode Register
7
PM17
PM1
6
PM16
5
PM15
4
PM14
3
PM13
2
PM12
1
PM11
0
PM10 FF21H FFH R/W
7
1
PM3
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
PM33
2
PM32
1
PM31
0
PM30 FF23H FFH R/W
7
1
PM4
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
PM41
0
PM40 FF24H FFH R/W
7
1
PM7
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
PM73
2
PM72
1
PM71
0
PM70 FF27H FFH R/W
7
PM87
PM8
6
PM86
5
PM85
4
PM84
3
PM83
2
PM82
1
PM81
0
PM80 FF28H FFH R/W
7
1
PM12
6
1
5
1
4
PM124
3
PM123
2
PM122
1
PM121
0
PM120 FF2CH FFH R/W
7
1
Symbol
PM0
6
PM06
5
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
PM01
0
PM00
Address
FF20H
After reset
FFH
R/W
R/W
Note
7
1
PM9
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
1
0
PM90 FF29H FFH R/W
Note
7
1
PM6
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
PM63
2
PM62
1
PM61
0
PM60 FF26H FFH R/W
Note
7
1
PM13
6
1
5
1
4
1
3
1
2
1
1
PM131
0
0 FF2DH FEH R/W
Note
Note Be sure to clear bit 6 of PM0, bit 3 of PM6, bit 0 of PM9 and bit 1 of PM13 to 1 at
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882,
78F0883.
PMmn Pmn pin I/O mode selection
(m = 0, 1, 3, 4, 6 to 9, 12, 13; n = 0 to 7)
0 Output mode (output buffer on)
1 Input mode (output buffer off)
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 101
Table 4-6. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function (1/2)
Alternate Function
Pin Name
Function Name I/O
PM×× P××
P00 TI000 Input 1
×
TI010 Input 1
×
P01
TO00 Output 0 0
TI011 Input 1
×
P06
TO01 Output 0 0
Input 1 ×
SCK10
Output 0 1
P10
TxD61 Output 0 1
SI10 Input 1
×
P11
RxD61 Input 1
×
P12 SO10 Output 0 0
P13 TxD60 Output 0 1
P14 RxD60 Input 1
×
P15 TOH0 Output 0 0
TOH1 Output 0 0
P16
INTP5 Input 1
×
TI50 Input 1
×
P17
TO50 Output 0 0
P30 INTP1 Input 1
×
P31 INTP2 Input 1
×
P32 INTP3 Input 1
×
INTP4 Input 1
×
TI51 Input 1
×
P33
TO51 Output 0 0
P70 CTxD Output 0 1
P71 CRxD Input 1
×
PCL Output 0 0
P72
INTP6 Input 1
×
BUZ Output 0 0
P73
INTP7 Input 1
×
P80-P87 ANI0-ANI7 Input 1 ×
P90 ANI8 Input 1 ×
Caution When using P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7, P90/ANI8 in the input mode, not only PM8 and PM9 (input/output)
but also the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) (analog input/digital input) must be set (for
details, see 12.3 (4) Analog input channel specification register (ADS) to (7) Port mode register 9
(PM9)). The reset value of ADPC is 00H (P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7, P90/ANI8 are all analog input pins).
Remark ×: Don’t care
PM××: Port mode register
P××: Port output latch
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
102
Table 4-6. Settings of Port Mode Register and Output Latch When Using Alternate Function (2/2)
Alternate Function
Pin Name
Function Name I/O
PM×× P××
INTP0 Input 1 ×
P120
EXLVI Input 1 ×
P121 X1 Input 1 ×
X2 Input 1
×
P122
EXCLK Input 1
×
P123 XT1 Input 1
×
XT2 Input 1
×
P124
EXCLKS Input 1
×
Remark ×: Don’t care
PM××: Port mode register
P××: Port output latch
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 103
(2) Port registers (P0, P1, P3, P4, P6 to P9, P12, P13)
These registers write the data that is output from the chip when data is output from a port.
If the data is read in the input mode, the pin level is read. If it is read in the output mode, the value of the output
latch is read.
These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H.
Caution P9 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Figure 4-22. Format of Port Register
7
0
Symbol
P0
6
P06
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
P01
0
P00
Address
FF00H
After reset
00H (output latch)
R/W
R/W
7
P17
P1
6
P16
5
P15
4
P14
3
P13
2
P12
1
P11
0
P10 FF01H 00H (output latch) R/W
7
0
P3
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
P33
2
P32
1
P31
0
P30 FF03H 00H (output latch) R/W
7
0
P4
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
P41
0
P40 FF04H 00H (output latch) R/W
7
0
P7
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
P73
2
P72
1
P71
0
P70 FF07H 00H (output latch) R/W
7
0
P12
6
0
5
0
4
P124
3
P123
2
P122
1
P121
0
P120 FF0CH 00H (output latch) R/W
7
P87
P8
6
P86
5
P85
4
P84
3
P83
2
P82
1
P81
0
P80 FF08H 00H (output latch)
R/W
R/W
Note
7
0
P6
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
P63
2
P62
1
P61
0
P60 FF06H 00H (output latch) R/W
Note
7
0
P9
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
P90 FF09H 00H (output latch)
Note
7
0
P13
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
P131
0
P130 FF0DH 00H (output latch) R/W
Note
Note Be sure to clear bit 6 of P0, bit 3 of P6, bit 0 to P9 and bit 1 of P13 to 0 at
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883.
m = 0, 1, 3, 4, 6 to 9, 12, 13; n = 0 to 7
Pmn
Output data control (in output mode) Input data read (in input mode)
0 Output 0 Input low level
1 Output 1 Input high level
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
104
(3) Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU4, PU7, PU12, PU13)
These registers specify whether the on-chip pull-up resistors of P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33, P40, P41,
P70 to P73, P120, P131 are to be used or not. On-chip pull-up resistors can be used in 1-bit units only for the bits set
to input mode of the pins to which the use of an on-chip pull-up resistor has been specified in PU0, PU1, PU3, PU4,
PU7, PU12, and PU13. On-chip pull-up resistors cannot be connected to bits set to output mode and bits used as
alternate-function output pins, regardless of the settings of PU0, PU1, PU3, PU4 PU5, PU7, PU12, and PU13.
These registers can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H.
Caution PU06 and PU131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Figure 4-23. Format of Pull-up Resistor Option Register
7
PU17
PU1
6
PU16
5
PU15
4
PU14
3
PU13
2
PU12
1
PU11
0
PU10 FF31H 00H R/W
7
0
PU3
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
PU33
2
PU32
1
PU31
0
PU30 FF33H 00H R/W
7
0
PU4
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
PU41
0
PU40 FF34H 00H R/W
7
0
PU7
6
PU76
5
PU75
4
PU74
3
PU73
2
PU72
1
PU71
0
PU70 FF37H 00H R/W
7
0
PU12
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
0
0
PU120 FF3CH 00H R/W
7
0
PU13
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
PU131
0
0 FF3DH 00H R/W
7
0
Symbol
PU0
6
PU06
5
0
4
0
3
0
2
0
1
PU01
0
PU00
Address
FF30H
After reset
00H
R/W
R/W
Note
Note
Note Be sure to clear bit 6 of PU0 and bit 1 of PU13 to 0 at
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883.
PUmn PUmn pin on-chip pull-up resistor selection
(m = 0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 12, 13, n = 0 to 7)
0 On-chip pull-up resistor not connected
1 On-chip pull-up resistor connected
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 105
(4) A/D port configuration register (ADPC)
This register switches the P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 and P90/ANI8 pins to digital I/O of port or analog input of A/D
converter.
ADPC can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Table 4-7. Format of A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPC)
Analog input (A)/ digital input (D) switching
ADPC3 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0
P90/ANI8 P87/ANI7 P86/ANI6 P85/ANI5 P84/ANI4 P83/ANI3 P82/ANI2 P81/ANI1 P80/ANI0
0 0 0 0 A A A A A A A A A
0 0 0 1 A A A A A A A A D
0 0 1 0 A A A A A A A D D
0 0 1 1 A A A A A A D D D
0 1 0 0 A A A A A D D D D
0 1 0 1 A A A A D D D D D
0 1 1 0 A A A D D D D D D
0 1 1 1 A A D D D D D D D
1 0 0 0 A D D D D D D D D
1 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D D
Other than above Setting prohibited
Cautions 1. Select the port from P80, in case P80/ANI0 to P80/ANI7, P90/ANI8 is used as digital port.
2. Set the channel used for A/D conversion to the input mode by using port mode register
8 (PM8) and port mode register 9 (PM9).
3. If data is written to ADPC, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to ADPC when the
CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the peripheral hardware clock is stopped.
For details, see CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
106
4.4 Port Function Operations
Port operations differ depending on whether the input or output mode is set, as shown below.
4.4.1 Writing to I/O port
(1) Output mode
A value is written to the output latch by a transfer instruction, and the output latch contents are output from the pin.
Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again.
The data of the output latch is cleared by reset.
(2) Input mode
A value is written to the output latch by a transfer instruction, but since the output buffer is off, the pin status does
not change.
Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again.
4.4.2 Reading from I/O port
(1) Output mode
The output latch contents are read by a transfer instruction. The output latch contents do not change.
(2) Input mode
The pin status is read by a transfer instruction. The output latch contents do not change.
4.4.3 Operations on I/O port
(1) Output mode
An operation is performed on the output latch contents, and the result is written to the output latch. The output
latch contents are output from the pins.
Once data is written to the output latch, it is retained until data is written to the output latch again.
The data of the output latch is cleared by reset.
(2) Input mode
The pin level is read and an operation is performed on its contents. The result of the operation is written to the
output latch, but since the output buffer is off, the pin status does not change.
CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 107
4.5 Cautions on 1-Bit Manipulation Instruction for Port Register n (Pn)
When a 1-bit manipulation instruction is executed on a port that provides both input and output functions, the
output latch value of an input port that is not subject to manipulation may be written in addition to the targeted bit.
Therefore, it is recommended to rewrite the output latch when switching a port from input mode to output mode.
<Example> When P10 is an output port, P11 to P17 are input ports (all pin statuses are high level), and the port
latch value of port 1 is 00H, if the output of output port P10 is changed from low level to high level
via a 1-bit manipulation instruction, the output latch value of port 1 is FFH.
Explanation: The targets of writing to and reading from the Pn register of a port whose PMnm bit is 1 are the
output latch and pin status, respectively.
A 1-bit manipulation instruction is executed in the following order in the 78K0/FC2.
<1> The Pn register is read in 8-bit units.
<2> The targeted one bit is manipulated.
<3> The Pn register is written in 8-bit units.
In step <1>, the output latch value (0) of P10, which is an output port, is read, while the pin statuses
of P11 to P17, which are input ports, are read. If the pin statuses of P11 to P17 are high level at
this time, the read value is FEH.
The value is changed to FFH by the manipulation in <2>.
FFH is written to the output latch by the manipulation in <3>.
Figure 4-24. Bit Manipulation Instruction (P10)
Low-level output
1-bit manipulation
instruction
(set1 P1.0)
is executed for P10
bit.
Pin status: High level
P10
P11 to P17
Port 1 output latch
00000000
High-level output
Pin status: High level
P10
P11 to P17
Port 1 output latch
11111111
1-bit manipulation instruction for P10 bit
<1> Port register 1 (P1) is read in 8-bit units.
• In the case of P10, an output port, the value of the port output latch (0) is read.
• In the case of P11 to P17, input ports, the pin status (1) is read.
<2> Set the P10 bit to 1.
<3> Write the results of <2> to the output latch of port register 1 (P1)
in 8-bit units.
<R>
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
108
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
5.1 Functions of Clock Generator
The clock generator generates the clock to be supplied to the CPU and peripheral hardware.
The following system clocks and clock oscillators are selectable.
(1) Main system clock
<1> X1 oscillator
This circuit oscillates a clock of fX = 4 to 20 MHz. Oscillation can be stopped by executing the STOP
instruction or using the main OSC control register (MOC).
<2> Internal high-speed oscillator
This circuit oscillates a clock of fRH = 8 MHz (TYP.). After a RESET release, the CPU always starts
operating with this internal high-speed oscillation clock. Oscillation can be stopped by executing the
STOP instruction or using the internal oscillator mode register (RCM).
An external main system clock (fEXCLK = 4 to 20 MHz) can also be supplied from the EXCLK pin. As the main
system clock, a high-speed system clock (X1 clock or external main system clock) or internal high-speed
oscillation clock can be selected by using the main clock mode register (MCM).
(2) Subsystem clock
• Subsystem clock oscillator
This circuit oscillates at a frequency of fXT = 32.768 kHz. Oscillation can be stopped by using the processor
clock control register (PCC) and clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL). An external subsystem
clock (fEXCLKS = 32.768 kHz) can also be supplied from the EXCLKS pin.
(3) Internal low-speed oscillation clock (clock for watchdog timer)
• Internal low-speed oscillator
This circuit oscillates a clock of fRL = 240 kHz (TYP.). After a RESET release, the internal low-speed
oscillation clock always starts operating. Oscillation can be stopped by using the internal oscillator mode
register (RCM).
The internal low-speed oscillation clock cannot be used as the CPU clock. The following hardware operates
with the internal low-speed oscillation clock.
• Watchdog timer
• TMH1 (fRL, fRL/27, fRL/29)
Remarks 1. fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency
2. fRH: Internal high-speed oscillation clock frequency
3. fEXCLK: External main system clock frequency
4. fXT: XT1 clock oscillation frequency
5. fEXCLKS: External subsystem clock frequency
6. fRL: Internal low-speed oscillation clock frequency
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 109
5.2 Configuration of Clock Generator
The clock generator includes the following hardware.
Table 5-1. Configuration of Clock Generator
Item Configuration
Control registers Processor clock control register (PCC)
Internal oscillator mode register (RCM)
Main clock mode register (MCM)
Main OSC control register (MOC)
Clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)
Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)
Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)
Oscillators X1 oscillator
XT1 oscillator
Internal high-speed oscillator
Internal low-speed oscillator
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
110
Figure 5-1. Block Diagram of Clock Generator
Option byte
1:
Cannot be stopped
0:
Can be stopped
Internal oscillator
mode register
(RCM)
LSRSTOP
RSTS RSTOP
Internal
high-speed
oscillator
(8 MHz (TYP.))
Internal
low-speed
oscillator
(240 kHz (TYP.))
f
RL
Clock operation mode
select register
(OSCCTL)
OSCSELS
EXCLKS
XT1/P123
XT2/EXCLKS/
P124
f
SUB
Peripheral
hardware
clock (f
PRS
)
Watchdog timer,
8-bit timer H1
Watch timer
1/2
CPU clock
(f
CPU
)
Processor clock
control register
(PCC)
CSS PCC2CLS PCC1 PCC0
Prescaler
Main system
clock switch
f
XP
Peripheral
hardware
clock switch
X1 oscillation
stabilization time counter
OSTS1 OSTS0OSTS2
Oscillation stabilization
time select register (OSTS)
3
MOST
16
MOST
15
MOST
14
MOST
13
MOST
11
Oscillation
stabilization
time counter
status register
(OSTC)
Controller
MCM0
XSEL
MCS
MSTOP
STOP
EXCLK
OSCSEL
AMPH
Clock operation mode
select register
(OSCCTL)
4
f
XP
2
f
XP
2
2
f
XP
2
3
f
XP
2
4
Main clock
mode register
(MCM)
Main clock
mode register
(MCM)
Main OSC
control register
(MOC)
f
RH
Internal bus
Internal bus
High-speed system
clock oscillator
Crystal/ceramic
oscillation
External input
clock
X1/P121
X2/EXCLK/
P122
f
XH
f
SUB
2
Crystal
oscillation
External input
clock
Subsystem
clock oscillator
f
X
fEXCLK
f
XT
fEXCLKS
Selector
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 111
Remarks 1. fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency
2. fRH: Internal high-speed oscillation clock frequency
3. fEXCLK: External main system clock frequency
4. fXH: High-speed system clock oscillation frequency
5. fXP: Main system clock oscillation frequency
6. fPRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
7. fCPU: CPU clock oscillation frequency
8. fXT: XT1 clock oscillation frequency
9. fEXCLKS: External subsystem clock frequency
10. fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency
11. fRL: Internal low-speed oscillation clock frequency
5.3 Registers Controlling Clock Generator
The following seven registers are used to control the clock generator.
• Processor clock control register (PCC)
• Internal oscillator mode register (RCM)
• Main clock mode register (MCM)
• Main OSC control register (MOC)
• Clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)
• Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)
• Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)
(1) Processor clock control register (PCC)
This register is used to select the CPU clock and the division ratio.
PCC is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets PCC to 01H.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
112
Figure 5-2. Format of Processor Clock Control Register (PCC)
Address: FFFBH After reset: 01H R/WNote 1
Symbol 7 6 <5> <4> 3 2 1 0
PCC 0 0 CLS CSS 0 PCC2 PCC1 PCC0
CLS CPU clock status
0 Main system clock
1 Subsystem clock
Notes 1. Bit 5 is read-only.
2. Be sure to switch CSS from 1 to 0 when bits 1 (MCS) and 0 (MCM0) of the main clock
mode register (MCM) are 1.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 3 and 6 to 0.
Remarks 1. fXP: Main system clock oscillation frequency
2. fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency
The fastest instruction can be executed in 2 clocks of the CPU clock in the 78K0/FC2. Therefore, the relationship
between the CPU clock (fCPU) and the minimum instruction execution time is as shown in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2. Relationship Between CPU Clock and Minimum Instruction Execution Time
Minimum Instruction Execution Time: 2/fCPU
High-Speed System ClockNote High-Speed Internal
Oscillator ClockNote
Subsystem Clock
CPU Clock (fCPU)
At 10 MHz
Operation
At 20 MHz
Operation
At 8 MHz (TYP.) Operation At 32.768 kHz Operation
fXP 0.2
μ
s 0.1
μ
s 0.25
μ
s (TYP.) −
fXP/2 0.4
μ
s 0.2
μ
s 0.5
μ
s (TYP.) −
fXP/22 0.8
μ
s 0.4
μ
s 1.0
μ
s (TYP.) −
fXP/23 1.6
μ
s 0.8
μ
s 2.0
μ
s (TYP.) −
fXP/24 3.2
μ
s 1.6
μ
s 4.0
μ
s (TYP.) −
fSUB/2 − − 122.1
μ
s
Note The main clock mode register (MCM) is used to set the CPU clock (high-speed system clock/internal
high-speed oscillation clock) (see Figure 5-4).
CSSNote 2 PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CPU clock (fCPU) selection
0 0 0 fXP
0 0 1 fXP/2 (default)
0 1 0 fXP/22
0 1 1 fXP/23
0
1 0 0 fXP/24
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1
1 0 0
fSUB/2
Other than above Setting prohibited
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 113
(2) Internal oscillator mode register (RCM)
This register sets the operation mode of internal oscillator.
RCM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to 80HNote 1.
Figure 5-3. Format of Internal Oscillator Mode Register (RCM)
Address: FFA0H After reset: 80HNote 1 R/WNote 2
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0>
RCM RSTS 0 0 0 0 0 LSRSTOP RSTOP
RSTS Status of internal high-speed oscillator oscillation
0
Waiting for stabilization of internal high-speed oscillator oscillation in high-accuracy mode
(internal high-speed oscillator operation in low-accuracy mode)
1 Internal high-speed oscillator operation in high-accuracy mode
LSRSTOP Internal low-speed oscillator oscillating/stopped
0 Internal low-speed oscillator oscillating
1 Internal low-speed oscillator stopped
RSTOP Internal high-speed oscillator oscillating/stopped
0 Internal high-speed oscillator oscillating
1 Internal high-speed oscillator stopped
Notes 1. The value of this register is 00H immediately after a reset release but automatically
changes to 80H after internal high-speed oscillator oscillation has been stabilized.
2. Bit 7 is read-only.
Caution When setting RSTOP to 1, be sure to confirm that the CPU operates with a clock
other than the internal high-speed oscillation clock. Specifically, set RSTOP to 1
under either of the following conditions.
• When MCS = 1 (when CPU operates with the high-speed system clock)
• When CLS = 1 (when CPU operates with the subsystem clock)
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
114
(3) Main clock mode register (MCM)
This register selects the main system clock supplied to CPU clock and clock supplied to peripheral hardware
clock.
MCM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 5-4. Format of Main Clock Mode Register (MCM)
Address: FFA1H After reset: 00H R/WNote
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 <2> <1> <0>
MCM 0 0 0 0 0 XSEL MCS MCM0
Selection of clock supplied to main system clock and peripheral hardware
XSEL MCM0
Main system clock (fXP) Peripheral hardware clock (fPRS)
0 0
0 1
Internal high-speed oscillation clock
(fRH)
1 0
Internal high-speed oscillation clock
(fRH)
1 1 High-speed system clock (fXH)
High-speed system clock (fXH)
MCS Main system clock status
0 Operates with internal high-speed oscillation clock
1 Operates with high-speed system clock
Note Bit 1 is read-only.
Cautions 1. XSEL can be changed only once after a reset release.
2. The peripheral hardware cannot operate when the peripheral hardware clock is
stopped. To resume the operation of the peripheral hardware after the
peripheral hardware clock has been stopped, initialize the peripheral hardware.
3. A clock other than fPRS is supplied to the following peripheral functions
regardless of the setting of XSEL and MCM0.
• Watchdog timer
• When “fRL/27” is selected as the count clock for 8-bit timer H1
• Peripheral hardware selects the external clock as the clock source
(Except when the external count clock of TM0n (n = 0, 1) is selected (TI00n pin
valid edge))
4. It takes one clock to change the CPU clock.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 115
(4) Main OSC control register (MOC)
This register selects the operation mode of the high-speed system clock.
This register is used to stop the X1 oscillator or to disable an external clock input from the EXCLK pin when the
CPU operates with a clock other than the high-speed system clock.
MOC can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to 80H.
Figure 5-5. Format of Main OSC Control Register (MOC)
Address: FFA2H After reset: 80H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MOC MSTOP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Control of high-speed system clock operation
MSTOP
X1 oscillation mode External clock input mode
0 X1 oscillator operating External clock from EXCLK pin is enabled
1 X1 oscillator stopped External clock from EXCLK pin is disabled
Cautions 1. When setting MSTOP to 1, be sure to confirm that the CPU operates with a clock
other than the high-speed system clock. Specifically, set MSTOP to 1 under
either of the following conditions.
• When MCS = 0 (when CPU operates with the internal high-speed oscillation
clock)
• When CLS = 1 (when CPU operates with the subsystem clock)
In addition, stop peripheral hardware that is operating on the high-speed system
clock before setting MSTOP to 1.
2. Do not clear MSTOP to 0 while bit 6 (OSCSEL) of the clock operation mode select
register (OSCCTL) is 0.
3. The peripheral hardware cannot operate when the peripheral hardware clock is
stopped. To resume the operation of the peripheral hardware after the peripheral
hardware clock has been stopped, initialize the peripheral hardware.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
116
(5) Clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)
This register selects the operation modes of the high-speed system and subsystem clocks.
OSCCTL can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 5-6. Format of Clock Operation Mode Select Register (OSCCTL)
Address: FFEFH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> 3 2 1 <0>
OSCCTL EXCLK OSCSEL EXCLKS OSCSELS 0 0 0 AMPH
EXCLK OSCSEL High-speed system
clock operation mode
P121/X1 pin P122/X2/EXCLK pin
0 0 I/O port mode I/O port
0 1 X1 oscillation mode Crystal/ceramic resonator connection
1 0 I/O port mode I/O port
1 1 External clock input
mode
I/O port External clock input
EXCLKS OSCSELS Subsystem clock
operation mode
P123/XT1 pin P124/XT2/EXCLKS pin
0 0 I/O port mode I/O port
0 1 XT1 oscillation mode Crystal resonator connection
1 0 I/O port mode I/O port
1 1 External clock input
mode
I/O port External clock input
AMPH Operating frequency control
0 4 MHz ≤ fXH ≤ 10 MHz
1 10 MHz < fXH ≤ 20 MHz
Cautions 1. Be sure to set AMPH to 1 if the high-speed system clock oscillation frequency
exceeds 10 MHz.
2. Set AMPH before setting the peripheral functions after a reset release. The value
of AMPH can be changed only once after a reset release. When the high-speed
system clock (X1 oscillation) is selected as the CPU clock, supply of the CPU
clock is stopped for 4.06 to 16.12
μ
s after AMPH is set to 1. When the high-
speed system clock (external clock input) is selected as the CPU clock, supply of
the CPU clock is stopped for the duration of 160 external clocks after AMPH is
set to 1.
3. If the STOP instruction is executed when AMPH = 1, supply of the CPU clock is
stopped for 4.06 to 16.12
μ
s after the STOP mode is released when the internal
high-speed oscillation clock is selected as the CPU clock, or for the duration of
160 external clocks when the high-speed system clock (external clock input) is
selected as the CPU clock. When the high-speed system clock (X1 oscillation) is
selected as the CPU clock, the oscillation stabilization time is counted after the
STOP mode is released.
4. AMPH can be changed only once after a reset release.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 117
Cautions 5. To change the value of EXCLK and OSCSEL, be sure to confirm that bit 7
(MSTOP) of the main OSC control register (MOC) is 1 (the X1 oscillator stops or
the external clock from the EXCLK pin is disabled).
6. To change the value of EXCLKS and OSCSELS, confirm that bit 5 (CLS) of the
processor clock control register (PCC) is 0 (the CPU is operating with the high-
speed system clock).
Remark f
XH: High-speed system clock oscillation frequency
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
118
(6) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)
This is the status register of the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time counter. If the internal high-speed
oscillation clock or subsystem clock is used as the CPU clock, the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time can be
checked.
OSTC can be read by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
When reset is released (reset by RESET input, POC, LVI, and WDT), the STOP instruction and MSTOP (bit 7 of
MOC register) = 1 clear OSTC to 00H.
Figure 5-7. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC)
Address: FFA3H After reset: 00H R
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OSTC 0 0 0 MOST11 MOST13 MOST14 MOST15 MOST16
MOST11 MOST13 MOST14 MOST15 MOST16 Oscillation stabilization time status
fX = 10 MHz fX = 20 MHz
1 0 0 0 0 211/fX min. 204.8
μ
s min. 102.4
μ
s min.
1 1 0 0 0 213/fX min. 819.2
μ
s min. 409.6
μ
s min.
1 1 1 0 0 214/fX min. 1.64 ms min. 819.2
μ
s min.
1 1 1 1 0 215/fX min. 3.27 ms min. 1.64 ms min.
1 1 1 1 1 216/fX min. 6.55 ms min. 3.27 ms min.
Cautions 1. After the above time has elapsed, the bits are set to 1 in order from MOST11 and
remain 1.
2. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the internal high-speed
oscillation clock or subsystem clock is being used as the CPU clock, set the
oscillation stabilization time as follows.
• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time
set by OSTS
The oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation
stabilization time set by OSTS. Note, therefore, that only the status up to the
oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS is set to OSTC after STOP mode is
released.
3. The X1 clock oscillation stabilization wait time does not include the time until
clock oscillation starts (“a” below).
STOP mode release
X1 pin voltage
waveform
a
Remark fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 119
(7) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)
This register is used to select the X1 clock oscillation stabilization wait time when the STOP mode is released.
The wait time set by OSTS is valid only after the STOP mode is released with the X1 clock selected as the CPU
clock. After the STOP mode is released with the internal high-speed oscillation clock or subsystem clock
selected as the CPU clock, the oscillation stabilization time must be confirmed by OSTC.
OSTS can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets OSTS to 05H.
Figure 5-8. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS)
Address: FFA4H After reset: 05H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OSTS 0 0 0 0 0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0
OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 Oscillation stabilization time selection
fX = 10 MHz fX = 20 MHz
0 0 1 211/fX 204.8
μ
s 102.4
μ
s
0 1 0 213/fX 819.2
μ
s 409.6
μ
s
0 1 1 214/fX 1.64 ms 819.2
μ
s
1 0 0 215/fX 3.27 ms 1.64 ms
1 0 1 216/fX 6.55 ms 3.27 ms
Other than above Setting prohibited
Cautions 1. To set the STOP mode when the X1 clock is used as the CPU clock, set OSTS
before executing the STOP instruction.
2. Do not change the value of the OSTS register during the X1 clock oscillation
stabilization time.
3. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the internal high-speed
oscillation clock or subsystem clock is being used as the CPU clock, set the
oscillation stabilization time as follows.
• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time
set by OSTS
The oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation
stabilization time set by OSTS. Note, therefore, that only the status up to the
oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS is set to OSTC after STOP mode is
released.
4. The X1 clock oscillation stabilization wait time does not include the time until
clock oscillation starts (“a” below).
STOP mode release
X1 pin voltage
waveform
a
Remark f
X: X1 clock oscillation frequency
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
120
5.4 System Clock Oscillator
5.4.1 X1 oscillator
The X1 oscillator oscillates with a crystal resonator or ceramic resonator (4 to 20 MHz) connected to the X1 and X2
pins.
An external clock can also be input. In this case, input the clock signal to the EXCLK pin.
Figure 5-9 shows an example of the external circuit of the X1 oscillator.
Figure 5-9. Example of External Circuit of X1 Oscillator (Crystal or Ceramic Oscillation)
(a) Crystal or ceramic oscillation (b) External clock
VSS
X1
X2
Crystal resonator
or
ceramic resonator
EXCLK
External clock
Cautions are listed on the next page.
5.4.2 XT1 oscillator
The XT1 oscillator oscillates with a crystal resonator (standard: 32.768 kHz) connected to the XT1 and XT2 pins.
An external clock can also be input. In this case, input the clock signal to the EXCLKS pin.
Figure 5-10 shows an example of the external circuit of the XT1 oscillator.
Figure 5-10. Example of External Circuit of XT1 Oscillator (Crystal Oscillation)
(a) Crystal oscillation (b) External clock
XT2
V
SS
XT1
32.768
kHz
EXCLKS
External clock
Cautions are listed on the next page.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 121
Caution When using the X1 oscillator and XT1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the
broken lines in the Figures 5-9 and 5-10 to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.
• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.
• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines. Do not route the wiring near a signal line
through which a high fluctuating current flows.
• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS. Do not
ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.
• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.
Note that the XT1 oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power
consumption.
Figure 5-11 shows examples of incorrect resonator connection.
Figure 5-11. Examples of Incorrect Resonator Connection (1/2)
(a) Too long wiring (b) Crossed signal line
X2V
SS
X1 X1V
SS
X2
PORT
Remark When using the subsystem clock, replace X1 and X2 with XT1 and XT2, respectively. Also, insert
resistors in series on the XT2 side.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
122
Figure 5-11. Examples of Incorrect Resonator Connection (2/2)
(c) Wiring near high alternating current (d) Current flowing through ground line of oscillator
(potential at points A, B, and C fluctuates)
V
SS
X1 X2
V
SS
X1 X2
AB C
Pmn
V
DD
High current
High current
(e) Signals are fetched
VSS X1 X2
Remark When using the subsystem clock, replace X1 and X2 with XT1 and XT2, respectively. Also, insert
resistors in series on the XT2 side.
Caution When X2 and XT1 are wired in parallel, the crosstalk noise of X2 may increase with XT1, resulting
in malfunctioning.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 123
5.4.3 When subsystem clock is not used
If it is not necessary to use the subsystem clock for low power consumption operations, or if not using the
subsystem clock as an I/O port, set the XT1 and XT2 pins to I/O mode (OSCSELS = 0) and connect them as follows.
Input (PM123/PM124 = 1): Independently connect to VDD or VSS via a resistor.
Output (PM123/PM124 = 0): Leave open.
Remark OSCSELS: Bit 4 of clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)
PM123, PM124: Bits 3 and 4 of port mode register 12 (PM12)
5.4.4 Internal high-speed oscillator
The internal high-speed oscillator is incorporated in the 78K0/FC2. Oscillation can be controlled by the internal
oscillator mode register (RCM).
After a RESET release, the internal high-speed oscillation clock starts oscillation (8 MHz (TYP.)).
5.4.5 Internal low-speed oscillator
The internal low-speed oscillator is incorporated in the 78K0/FC2.
The internal low-speed oscillator oscillation clock is only used as the watchdog timer and the clock of 8-bit timer H1.
The internal low-speed oscillation clock cannot be used as the CPU clock.
“Can be stopped by software” or “Cannot be stopped” can be selected by the option byte. When “Can be stopped
by software” is set, oscillation can be controlled by the internal oscillator mode register (RCM).
After a RESET release, the internal low-speed oscillation clock starts oscillation and the watchdog timer is
operated (240 kHz (TYP.)).
5.4.6 Prescaler
The prescaler generates various clocks by dividing the main system clock when the main system clock is selected
as the clock to be supplied to the CPU.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
124
5.5 Clock Generator Operation
The clock generator generates the following clocks and controls the operation modes of the CPU, such as standby
mode.
• Main system clock fXP
• High-speed system clock fXH
X1 clock fX
External main system clock fEXCLK
• Internal high-speed oscillation clock fRH
• Subsystem clock fSUB
• XT1 clock fXT
• External subsystem clock fEXCLKS
• Internal low-speed oscillation clock fRL
• CPU clock fCPU
• Peripheral hardware clock fPRS
The CPU starts operation when the on-chip internal high-speed oscillator starts outputting after a reset release in
the 78K0/FC2, thus enabling the following.
(1) Enhancement of security function
When the X1 clock is set as the CPU clock by the default setting, the device cannot operate if the X1 clock is
damaged or badly connected and therefore does not operate after reset is released. However, the start clock of
the CPU is the on-chip internal high-speed oscillation clock, so the device can be started by the internal high-
speed oscillation clock after a reset release. Consequently, the system can be safely shut down by performing a
minimum operation, such as acknowledging a reset source by software or performing safety processing when
there is a malfunction.
(2) Improvement of performance
Because the CPU can be started without waiting for the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time, the total
performance can be improved.
A timing diagram of the CPU default start using the internal high-speed oscillation clock is shown in Figure 5-12
and 5-13.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 125
Figure 5-12 Operation of the clock generating circuit when power supply voltage injection
(When 1.59 V POC mode setup (option byte: LVISTART = 0))
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock (f
RH
)
CPU clock
High-speed
system clock (f
XH
)
(when X1 oscillation
selected)
Internal high-speed oscillation clock
High-speed system clock
Switched by
software
Subsystem clock (f
SUB
)
(when XT1 oscillation
selected)
Subsystem clock
X1 clock
oscillation stabilization time:
2
11
/f
X
to 2
16
/f
XNote 2
Starting X1 oscillation
is set by software.
Starting XT1 oscillation
is set by software.
Reset processing
(11 to 45 s)
<3> Waiting for
voltage stabilization
Internal reset signal
0 V
1.59 V
(TYP.)
1.8 V
0.5 V/ms
(MIN.)
Power supply
voltage (VDD)
<1>
<2>
<4>
<5> <5>
<4>
Note 1
(1.93 to 5.39 ms)
μ
<1> The internal reset signal by the power-on clear (POC) circuit is generated after a power supply injection.
<2> If power supply voltage exceeds 1.59 V (TYP.), reset will be released and the oscillation start of the high-
speed oscillator will be carried out automatically.
<3> If power supply voltage is rose by inclination of 0.5 V/ms (MAX.), after the voltage stable waiting time of a
power supply/regulator passed after reset release and reset processing will be performed, CPU carries out a
start of operation with high-speed oscillation clock .
<4> One clock or XT1 clock should set up an oscillation start by software (see (1) in 5.6.1 Controlling high-
speed system clock and (1) in 5.6.3 Example of controlling subsystem clock).
<5> When you change CPU to X1 clock or XT1 clock, set up a change by software after the oscillation stability
waiting of a clock (see (3) in 5.6.1 Controlling high-speed system clock and (3) in 5.6.3 Example of
controlling subsystem clock).
Notes 1. The internal voltage stabilization time includes the oscillation accuracy stabilization time of the internal
high-speed oscillation clock.
2. When releasing a reset (above figure) or releasing STOP mode while the CPU is operating on the
internal high-speed oscillation clock, confirm the oscillation stabilization time for the X1 clock using the
oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC). If the CPU operates on the high-speed
system clock (X1 oscillation), set the oscillation stabilization time when releasing STOP mode using the
oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS).
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
126
Cautions 1. When the standup of voltage until it reaches 1.8 V from the time of a power supply injection is
looser than 0.5 V/ms (MAX.), input a low level into RESET pin, or set up 2.7 V/1.59 V POC
mode (LVISTART = 1) from an option byte until it reaches 1.8 V from the time of a power
supply injection (refer to Figure 5-13). When a low level is inputted into RESET pin until it
reaches 1.8 V, after the reset release by RESET pin operates to the same timing as <2> of
Figure 5-12 or subsequent ones.
2. When using the external clock input from EXCLK pin and EXCLKS pin, oscillation stable
waiting time is unnecessary.
Remark The clock which is not used as a CPU clock can be suspended by setup of software during
microcomputer operation. Moreover, high-speed oscillation clock and a high-speed system clock can
suspend a clock by execution of a STOP command (see (4) in 5.6.1 Controlling high-speed system
clock, (3) in 5.6.2 Example of controlling internal high-speed oscillation clock, and (4) in 5.6.3
Example of controlling subsystem clock).
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 127
Figure 5-13 Operation of the clock generating circuit when power supply voltage injection
(When 2.7 V/1.59V POC mode setup (option byte: LVISTART = 1))
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock (fRH)
CPU clock
High-speed
system clock (fXH)
(when X1 oscillation
selected)
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock High-speed system clock
Switched by
software
Subsystem clock (fSUB)
(when XT1 oscillation
selected)
Subsystem clock
X1 clock
oscillation stabilization time:
2
11
/f
X
to 2
16
/f
XNote
Starting X1 oscillation
is set by software.
Starting XT1 oscillation
is set by software.
Waiting for oscillation accuracy
stabilization (86 to 361 s)
Internal reset signal
0 V
2.7 V (TYP.)
Power supply
voltage (V
DD
)
<1>
<3>
<2>
<4>
<5>
Reset processing
(11 to 45 s)
<4>
<5>
μ
μ
<1> The internal reset signal by the power-on clear (POC) circuit is generated after a power supply injection.
<2> If power supply voltage exceeds 1.59 V (TYP.), reset will be canceled and the oscillation start of the high-
speed oscillator will be carried out automatically.
<3> After reset release, after reset processing is performed, CPU carries out a start of operation with high-speed
oscillation clock.
<4> X1 clock or XT1 clock should set up an oscillation start by software (see (1) in 5.6.1 Controlling high-
speed system clock and (1) in 5.6.3 Example of controlling subsystem clock).
<5> When you change CPU to X1 clock or XT1 clock, set up a change by software after the oscillation stability
waiting of a clock (see (3) in 5.6.1 Controlling high-speed system clock and (3) in 5.6.3 Example of
controlling subsystem clock).
Note Check the oscillation stable time of X1 clock with an oscillation stable time counter status register
(OSTC) when STOP mode release in case the time of reset release (figure 5-13) and a CPU clock are
high-speed oscillation clocks . Moreover, when a CPU clock is a high-speed system clock (X1
oscillation), set up the oscillation stable time at the time of STOP mode release by the oscillation stable
time selection register (OSTS).
Cautions 1. A voltage oscillation stabilization time of 1.93 to 5.39 ms is required after the supply voltage
reaches 1.59 V (TYP.). If the supply voltage rises from 1.59 V (TYP.) to 2.7 V (TYP.) within 1.93
ms, the power supply oscillation stabilization time of 0 to 5.39 ms is automatically generated
before reset processing.
2. It is not necessary to wait for the oscillation stabilization time when an external clock input
from the EXCLK and EXCLKS pins is used.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
128
Remark The clock which is not used as a CPU clock can be suspended by setup of software during
microcomputer operation. Moreover, high-speed oscillation clock and a high-speed system clock can
suspend a clock by execution of a STOP command (see (4) in 5.6.1 Controlling high-speed
system clock, (3) in 5.6.2 Example of controlling internal high-speed oscillation clock, and (4)
in 5.6.3 Example of controlling subsystem clock).
5.6 Controlling Clock
5.6.1 Controlling high-speed system clock
The following two types of high-speed system clocks are available.
• X1 clock: Crystal/ceramic resonator is connected across the X1 and X2 pins.
• External main system clock: External clock is input to the EXCLK pin.
When the high-speed system clock is not used, the X1/P121 and X2/EXCLK/P122 pins can be used as I/O port
pins.
Caution The X1/P121 and X2/EXCLK/P122 pins are in the I/O port mode after a reset release.
The following describes examples of setting procedures for the following cases.
(1) When oscillating X1 clock
(2) When using external main system clock
(3) When using high-speed system clock as CPU clock and peripheral hardware clock
(4) When stopping high-speed system clock
(1) Example of setting procedure when oscillating the X1 clock
<1> Setting frequency (OSCCTL register)
Using AMPH, set the gain of the on-chip oscillator according to the frequency to be used.
AMPHNote Operating Frequency Control
0 4 MHz ≤ fXH ≤ 10 MHz
1 10 MHz < fXH ≤ 20 MHz
Note Set AMPH before setting the peripheral functions after a reset release. The value of AMPH can
be changed only once after a reset release. When AMPH is set to 1, the clock supply to the CPU
is stopped for 4.06 to 16.12
μ
s.
Remark f
XH: High-speed system clock oscillation frequency
<2> Setting P121/X1 and P122/X2/EXCLK pins and selecting X1 clock or external clock (OSCCTL register)
When EXCLK is cleared to 0 and OSCSEL is set to 1, the mode is switched from port mode to X1
oscillation mode.
EXCLK OSCSEL Operation Mode of High-
Speed System Clock Pin
P121/X1 Pin P122/X2/EXCLK Pin
0 1 X1 oscillation mode Crystal/ceramic resonator connection
<3> Controlling oscillation of X1 clock (MOC register)
If MSTOP is cleared to 0, the X1 oscillator starts oscillating.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 129
<4> Waiting for the stabilization of the oscillation of X1 clock
Check the OSTC register and wait for the necessary time.
During the wait time, other software processing can be executed with the internal high-speed oscillation
clock.
Cautions 1. Do not change the value of EXCLK and OSCSEL while the X1 clock is operating.
2. Set the X1 clock after the supply voltage has reached the operable voltage of the clock to
be used (see CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS) or
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)).
(2) Example of setting procedure when using the external main system clock
<1> Setting frequency (OSCCTL register)
Using AMPH, set the frequency to be used.
AMPHNote Operating Frequency Control
0 4 MHz ≤ fXH ≤ 10 MHz
1 10 MHz < fXH ≤ 20 MHz
Note Set AMPH before setting the peripheral functions after a reset release. The value of AMPH can
be changed only once after a reset release. The clock supply to the CPU is stopped for the
duration of 160 external clocks after AMPH is set to 1.
Remark fXH: High-speed system clock oscillation frequency
<2> Setting P121/X1 and P122/X2/EXCLK pins and selecting operation mode (OSCCTL register)
When EXCLK and OSCSEL are set to 1, the mode is switched from port mode to external clock input
mode.
EXCLK OSCSEL Operation Mode of High-
Speed System Clock Pin
P121/X1 Pin P122/X2/EXCLK Pin
1 1 External clock input mode I/O port External clock input
<3> Controlling external main system clock input (MOC register)
When MSTOP is cleared to 0, the input of the external main system clock is enabled.
Cautions 1. Do not change the value of EXCLK and OSCSEL while the external main system clock is
operating.
2. Set the external main system clock after the supply voltage has reached the operable
voltage of the clock to be used (see CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS
((A) GRADE PRODUCTS) or CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE
PRODUCTS)).
(3) Example of setting procedure when using high-speed system clock as CPU clock and peripheral
hardware clock
<1> Setting high-speed system clock oscillationNote
(See 5.6.1 (1) Example of setting procedure when oscillating the X1 clock and (2) Example of
setting procedure when using the external main system clock.)
Note The setting of <1> is not necessary when high-speed system clock is already operating.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
130
<2> Setting the high-speed system clock as the main system clock (MCM register)
When XSEL and MCM0 are set to 1, the high-speed system clock is supplied as the main system clock
and peripheral hardware clock.
Selection of Main System Clock and Clock Supplied to Peripheral Hardware XSEL MCM0
Main System Clock (fXP) Peripheral Hardware Clock (fPRS)
1 1 High-speed system clock (fXH) High-speed system clock (fXH)
Caution If the high-speed system clock is selected as the main system clock, a clock other than
the high-speed system clock cannot be set as the peripheral hardware clock.
<3> Setting the main system clock as the CPU clock and selecting the division ratio (PCC register)
When CSS is cleared to 0, the main system clock is supplied to the CPU. To select the CPU clock
division ratio, use PCC0, PCC1, and PCC2.
CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CPU Clock (fCPU) Selection
0 0 0 fXP
0 0 1 fXP/2 (default)
0 1 0 fXP/22
0 1 1 fXP/23
1 0 0 fXP/24
0
Other than above Setting prohibited
(4) Example of setting procedure when stopping the high-speed system clock
The high-speed system clock can be stopped in the following two ways.
• Executing the STOP instruction and stopping the X1 oscillation (disabling clock input if the external clock is
used)
• Setting MSTOP to 1 and stopping the X1 oscillation (disabling clock input if the external clock is used)
(a) To execute a STOP instruction
<1> Setting to stop peripheral hardware
Stop peripheral hardware that cannot be used in the STOP mode (for peripheral hardware that
cannot be used in STOP mode, see CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION).
<2> Setting the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time after standby release
When the CPU is operating on the X1 clock, set the value of the OSTS register before the STOP
instruction is executed.
<3> Executing the STOP instruction
When the STOP instruction is executed, the system is placed in the STOP mode and X1 oscillation
is stopped (the input of the external clock is disabled).
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 131
(b) To stop X1 oscillation (disabling external clock input) by setting MSTOP to 1
<1> Confirming the CPU clock status (PCC and MCM registers)
Confirm with CLS and MCS that the CPU is operating on a clock other than the high-speed system clock.
When CLS = 0 and MCS = 1, the high-speed system clock is supplied to the CPU, so change the
CPU clock to the subsystem clock or internal high-speed oscillation clock.
CLS MCS CPU Clock Status
0 0 Internal high-speed oscillation clock
0 1 High-speed system clock
1 × Subsystem clock
<2> Stopping the high-speed system clock (MOC register)
When MSTOP is set to 1, X1 oscillation is stopped (the input of the external clock is disabled).
Caution Be sure to confirm that MCS = 0 or CLS = 1 when setting MSTOP to 1. In addition, stop
peripheral hardware that is operating on the high-speed system clock.
5.6.2 Example of controlling internal high-speed oscillation clock
The following describes examples of clock setting procedures for the following cases.
(1) When restarting oscillation of the internal high-speed oscillation clock
(2) When using internal high-speed oscillation clock as CPU clock, and internal high-speed oscillation clock or
high-speed system clock as peripheral hardware clock
(3) When stopping the internal high-speed oscillation clock
(1) Example of setting procedure when restarting oscillation of the internal high-speed oscillation clockNote 1
<1> Setting restart of oscillation of the internal high-speed oscillation clock (RCM register)
When RSTOP is cleared to 0, the internal high-speed oscillation clock starts operating.
<2> Waiting for the oscillation accuracy stabilization time of internal high-speed oscillation clock (RCM
register)
Wait until RSTS is set to 1Note 2.
Notes 1. After a reset release, the internal high-speed oscillator automatically starts oscillating and the
internal high-speed oscillation clock is selected as the CPU clock.
2. This wait time is not necessary if high accuracy is not necessary for the CPU clock and peripheral
hardware clock.
(2) Example of setting procedure when using internal high-speed oscillation clock as CPU clock, and
internal high-speed oscillation clock or high-speed system clock as peripheral hardware clock
<1> • Restarting oscillation of the internal high-speed oscillation clockNote
(See 5.6.2 (1) Example of setting procedure when restarting internal high-speed oscillation
clock).
• Oscillating the high-speed system clockNote
(This setting is required when using the high-speed system clock as the peripheral hardware clock.
See 5.6.1 (1) Example of setting procedure when oscillating the X1 clock and (2) Example of
setting procedure when using the external main system clock.)
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
132
Note The setting of <1> is not necessary when the internal high-speed oscillation clock or high-
speed system clock is already operating.
<2> Selecting the clock supplied as the main system clock and peripheral hardware clock (MCM register)
Set the main system clock and peripheral hardware clock using XSEL and MCM0.
Selection of Main System Clock and Clock Supplied to Peripheral Hardware XSEL MCM0
Main System Clock (fXP) Peripheral Hardware Clock (fPRS)
0 0
0 1
Internal high-speed oscillation clock
(fRH)
1 0
Internal high-speed oscillation clock
(fRH)
High-speed system clock (fXH)
<3> Selecting the CPU clock division ratio (PCC register)
When CSS is cleared to 0, the main system clock is supplied to the CPU. To select the CPU clock
division ratio, use PCC0, PCC1, and PCC2.
CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CPU Clock (fCPU) Selection
0 0 0 fXP
0 0 1 fXP/2 (default)
0 1 0 fXP/22
0 1 1 fXP/23
1 0 0 fXP/24
0
Other than above Setting prohibited
(3) Example of setting procedure when stopping the internal high-speed oscillation clock
The internal high-speed oscillation clock can be stopped in the following two ways.
• Executing the STOP instruction to set the STOP mode
• Setting RSTOP to 1 and stopping the internal high-speed oscillation clock
(a) To execute a STOP instruction
<1> Setting of peripheral hardware
Stop peripheral hardware that cannot be used in the STOP mode (for peripheral hardware that
cannot be used in STOP mode, see CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION).
<2> Setting the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time after standby release
When the CPU is operating on the X1 clock, set the value of the OSTS register before the STOP
instruction is executed.
<3> Executing the STOP instruction
When the STOP instruction is executed, the system is placed in the STOP mode and internal high-
speed oscillation clock is stopped.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 133
(b) To stop internal high-speed oscillation clock by setting RSTOP to 1
<1> Confirming the CPU clock status (PCC and MCM registers)
Confirm with CLS and MCS that the CPU is operating on a clock other than the internal high-speed
oscillation clock.
When CLS = 0 and MCS = 0, the internal high-speed oscillation clock is supplied to the CPU, so
change the CPU clock to the high-speed system clock or subsystem clock.
CLS MCS CPU Clock Status
0 0 Internal high-speed oscillation clock
0 1 High-speed system clock
1 × Subsystem clock
<2> Stopping the internal high-speed oscillation clock (RCM register)
When RSTOP is set to 1, internal high-speed oscillation clock is stopped.
Caution Be sure to confirm that MCS = 1 or CLS = 1 when setting RSTOP to 1. In addition, stop
peripheral hardware that is operating on the internal high-speed oscillation clock.
5.6.3 Example of controlling subsystem clock
The following two types of subsystem clocks are available.
• XT1 clock: Crystal/ceramic resonator is connected across the XT1 and XT2 pins.
• External subsystem clock: External clock is input to the EXCLKS pin.
When the subsystem clock is not used, the XT1/P123 and XT2/EXCLKS/P124 pins can be used as I/O port pins.
Caution The XT1/P123 and XT2/EXCLKS/P124 pins are in the I/O port mode after a reset release.
The following describes examples of setting procedures for the following cases.
(1) When oscillating XT1 clock
(2) When using external subsystem clock
(3) When using subsystem clock as CPU clock
(4) When stopping subsystem clock
(1) Example of setting procedure when oscillating the XT1 clock
<1> Setting XT1 and XT2 pins and selecting operation mode (PCC and OSCCTL registers)
When XTSTART, EXCLKS, and OSCSELS are set as any of the following, the mode is switched from
port mode to XT1 oscillation mode.
XTSTART EXCLKS OSCSELS Operation Mode of
Subsystem Clock Pin
P123/XT1 Pin P124/XT2/
EXCLKS Pin
0 0 1
1 × ×
XT1 oscillation mode Crystal/ceramic resonator connection
Remark ×: don’t care
<2> Waiting for the stabilization of the subsystem clock oscillation
Wait for the oscillation stabilization time of the subsystem clock by software, using a timer function.
Caution Do not change the value of XTSTART, EXCLKS, and OSCSELS while the subsystem clock is
operating.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
134
(2) Example of setting procedure when using the external subsystem clock
<1> Setting XT1 and XT2 pins, selecting XT1 clock/external clock and controlling oscillation (PCC and
OSCCTL registers)
When XTSTART is cleared to 0 and EXCLKS and OSCSELS are set to 1, the mode is switched from
port mode to external clock input mode. In this case, input the external clock to the EXCLKS/XT2/P124
pins.
XTSTART EXCLKS OSCSELS Operation Mode of
Subsystem Clock Pin
P123/XT1 Pin P124/XT2/
EXCLKS Pin
0 1 1 External clock input
mode
I/O port External clock input
Caution Do not change the value of XTSTART, EXCLKS, and OSCSELS while the subsystem clock is
operating.
(3) Example of setting procedure when using the subsystem clock as the CPU clock
<1> Setting subsystem clock oscillationNote
(See 5.6.3 (1) Example of setting procedure when oscillating the XT1 clock and (2) Example of
setting procedure when using the external subsystem clock.)
Note The setting of <1> is not necessary when while the subsystem clock is operating.
<2> Switching the CPU clock (PCC register)
When CSS is set to 1, the subsystem clock is supplied to the CPU.
CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CPU Clock (fCPU) Selection
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
fSUB/2 1
Other than above Setting prohibited
(4) Example of setting procedure when stopping the subsystem clock
<1> Confirming the CPU clock status (PCC and MCM registers)
Confirm with CLS and MCS that the CPU is operating on a clock other than the subsystem clock.
When CLS = 1, the subsystem clock is supplied to the CPU, so change the CPU clock to the internal
high-speed oscillation clock or high-speed system clock.
CLS MCS CPU Clock Status
0 0 Internal high-speed oscillation clock
0 1 High-speed system clock
1 × Subsystem clock
<2> Stopping the subsystem clock (OSCCTL register)
When OSCSELS is cleared to 0, XT1 oscillation is stopped (the input of the external clock is disabled).
Caution1. Be sure to confirm that CLS = 0 when clearing OSCSELS to 0. In addition, stop the watch
timer if it is operating on the subsystem clock.
2. The subsystem clock oscillation cannot be stopped using the STOP instruction.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 135
5.6.4 Controlling internal low-speed oscillation clock
The internal low-speed oscillation clock is a clock for the watchdog timer. It cannot be used as the CPU clock.
With this clock, only the following peripheral hardware can operate.
• Watchdog timer
• 8-bit timer H1 (if fRL is selected as the count clock)
In addition, the following operation modes can be selected by the option byte.
• Internal low-speed oscillation clock oscillation cannot be stopped
• Internal low-speed oscillation clock oscillation can be stopped by software
After a reset release, the internal low-speed oscillation clock automatically oscillates.
(1) To stop the internal low-speed oscillation clock (example of setting method)
<1> Setting LSRSTOP to 1 (RCM register)
If LSRSTOP is set to 1, the internal low-speed oscillator oscillation is stopped.
(2) To oscillate the internal low-speed oscillation clock (example of setting method)
<1> Clearing LSRSTOP to 0 (RCM register)
If LSRSTOP is cleared to 0, the internal low-speed oscillation clock is oscillated.
Caution If “internal low-speed oscillation clock oscillation cannot be stopped” is selected by the option
byte, oscillation of the internal low-speed oscillation clock cannot be controlled.
5.6.5 Clocks supplied to CPU and peripheral hardware
The following table shows the relation among the clocks supplied to the CPU and peripheral hardware, and setting
of registers.
Table 5-3. Clocks Supplied to CPU and Peripheral Hardware, and Register Setting
Supplied Clock XSEL CSS MCM0 EXCLK
Clock Supplied to CPU Clock Supplied to Peripheral
Hardware
0 0 × × Internal high-speed oscillation clock
0 1 × × Subsystem clock Internal high-speed oscillation
clock
1 0 0 0 X1 clock
1 0 0 1
Internal high-speed oscillation
clock External main system clock
1 0 1 0 X1 clock
1 0 1 1 External main system clock
1 1 0 0 X1 clock
1 1 0 1 External main system clock
1 1 1 0 X1 clock
1 1 1 1
Subsystem clock
External main system clock
Remarks 1. XSEL: Bit 2 of the main clock mode register (MCM)
2. CSS: Bit 4 of the processor clock control register (PCC)
3. MCM0: Bit 0 of MCM
4. EXCLK: Bit 7 of the clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
136
5.6.6 CPU clock status transition diagram
Figure 5-14 shows the CPU clock status transition diagram of this product.
Figure 5-14. CPU Clock Status Transition Diagram
Power ON
Reset release V
DD
≥ 1.59 V (TYP.)
V
DD
≥ 1.8 V (MIN.)
V
DD
< 1.59 V (TYP.)
Internal low-speed oscillation: Woken up
Internal high-speed oscillation: Woken up
X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Stops (I/O port mode)
XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Stops (I/O port mode)
Internal low-speed oscillation: Operating
Internal high-speed oscillation: Operating
X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Stops (I/O port mode)
XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Stops (I/O port mode)
CPU: Operating
with internal high-
speed oscillation
Internal low-speed oscillation: Operable
Internal high-speed oscillation: Operating
X1 oscillation/EXCLK input:
Selectable by CPU
XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input:
Selectable by CPU
CPU: Internal high-
speed oscillation
→ STOP
Internal low-speed oscillation:
Operable
Internal high-speed oscillation:
Stops
X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Stops
XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input:
Operable
CPU: Internal high-
speed oscillation
→ HALT
Internal low-speed oscillation:
Operable
Internal high-speed oscillation:
Operating
X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Operable
XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input:
Operable
CPU: Operating
with X1 oscillation or
EXCLK input
CPU: X1
oscillation/EXCLK
input → STOP
CPU: X1
oscillation/EXCLK
input → HALT
Internal low-speed oscillation: Operable
Internal high-speed oscillation:
Selectable by CPU
X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Operating
XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input:
Selectable by CPU Internal low-speed oscillation:
Operable
Internal high-speed oscillation:
Stops
X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Stops
XT1 oscillation: Operable
Internal low-speed oscillation:
Operable
Internal high-speed oscillation:
Operable
X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Operating
XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Operable
CPU: Operating
with XT1 oscillation or
EXCLKS input
CPU: XT1
oscillation/EXCLKS
input → HALT
Internal low-speed oscillation: Operable
Internal high-speed oscillation:
Selectable by CPU
X1 oscillation/EXCLK input:
Selectable by CPU
XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input: Operating
Internal low-speed oscillation: Operable
Internal high-speed oscillation: Operable
X1 oscillation/EXCLK input: Operable
XT1 oscillation/EXCLKS input:
Operating
(B)
(A)
(C)
(D)
(E)
(F)
(G)
(H)
(I)
Remark In the 2.7 V/1.59 V POC mode (option byte: LVISTART = 1), the CPU clock status changes to (A) in the
above figure when the supply voltage exceeds 2.7 V (TYP.), and to (B) after reset processing (11 to 45
μ
s).
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 137
Table 5-4 shows transition of the CPU clock and examples of setting the SFR registers.
Table 5-4. CPU Clock Transition and SFR Register Setting Examples (1/4)
(1) CPU operating with high-speed system clock (C) after reset release (A)
(The CPU operates with the internal high-speed oscillation clock immediately after a reset release (B).)
(Setting sequence of SFR registers)
Setting Flag of SFR Register
Status Transition
AMPH EXCLK OSCSEL MSTOP OSTC
Register
XSEL MCM0
(A) → (B) → (C) (X1 clock: less than 10 MHz) 0 0 1 0 Must be
checked
1 1
(A) → (B) → (C) (external main clock: less than 10
MHz)
0 1 1 0
Must not be
checked
1 1
(A) → (B) → (C) (X1 clock: 10 MHz or more) 1 0 1 0 Must be
checked
1 1
(A) → (B) → (C) (external main clock: 10 MHz or
more)
1 1 1 0
Must not be
checked
1 1
(2) CPU operating with internal high-speed oscillation clock (B) after reset release (A)
Status Transition SFR Register Setting
(A) → (B) SFR registers do not have to be set (default status after reset release).
(3) CPU operating with subsystem clock (D) after reset release (A)
(The CPU operates with the internal high-speed oscillation clock immediately after a reset release (B).)
(Setting sequence of SFR registers)
Setting Flag of SFR Register
Status Transition
EXCLKS OSCSELS
Waiting for
Oscillation
Stabilization
CSS
(A) → (B) → (D) (XT1 clock) 0 1 Necessary 1
(A) → (B) → (D) (external subsystem clock) 1 1 Unnecessary 1
Remarks 1. (A) to (I) in Table 5-4 correspond to (A) to (I) in Figure 5-14.
2. EXCLK, OSCSEL, EXCLKS, OSCSELS, AMPH:
Bits 7 to 4 and 0 of the clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)
MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC)
XSEL, MCM0: Bits 2 and 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM)
CSS: Bit 4 of the processor clock control register (PCC)
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
138
Table 5-4. CPU Clock Transition and SFR Register Setting Examples (2/4)
(4) CPU clock changing from internal high-speed oscillation clock (B) to high-speed system clock (C)
(Setting sequence of SFR registers)
Setting Flag of SFR Register
Status Transition
AMPH EXCLK OSCSEL MSTOP OSTC
Register
XSEL MCM0
(B) → (C) (X1 clock: less than 10 MHz) 0 0 1 0 Must be
checked
1 1
(B) → (C) (external main clock: less than 10 MHz) 0 1 1 0 Must not be
checked
1 1
(B) → (C) (X1 clock: 10 MHz or more) 1 0 1 0 Must be
checked
1 1
(B) → (C) (external main clock: 10 MHz or more) 1 1 1 0 Must not be
checked
1 1
Unnecessary if these registers
are already set
Unnecessary if the
CPU is operating
with the high-speed
system clock
↑
Unnecessary if this
register is already
set
(5) CPU clock changing from internal high-speed oscillation clock (B) to subsystem clock (D)
(Setting sequence of SFR registers)
Setting Flag of SFR Register
Status Transition
EXCLKS OSCSELS
Waiting for
Oscillation
Stabilization
CSS
(B) → (D) (XT1 clock) 0 1 Necessary 1
(B) → (D) (external subsystem clock) 1 1 Unnecessary 1
Unnecessary if the CPU is operating
with the subsystem clock
Remarks 1. (A) to (I) in Table 5-4 correspond to (A) to (I) in Figure 5-14.
2. EXCLK, OSCSEL, EXCLKS, OSCSELS, AMPH:
Bits 7 to 4 and 0 of the clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)
MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC)
XSEL, MCM0: Bits 2 and 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM)
CSS: Bit 4 of the processor clock control register (PCC)
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 139
Table 5-4. CPU Clock Transition and SFR Register Setting Examples (3/4)
(6) CPU clock changing from high-speed system clock (C) to internal high-speed oscillation clock (B)
(Setting sequence of SFR registers)
Setting Flag of SFR Register
Status Transition
RSTOP RSTS MCM0
(C) → (B) 0 Confirm this flag is 1. 0
Unnecessary if the CPU is operating
with the internal high-speed oscillation clock
(7) CPU clock changing from high-speed system clock (C) to subsystem clock (D)
(Setting sequence of SFR registers)
Setting Flag of SFR Register
Status Transition
EXCLKS OSCSELS
Waiting for
Oscillation
Stabilization
CSS
(C) → (D) (XT1 clock) 0 1 Necessary 1
(C) → (D) (external subsystem clock) 1 1 Unnecessary 1
Unnecessary if the CPU is operating
with the subsystem clock
(8) CPU clock changing from subsystem clock (D) to high-speed system clock (C)
(Setting sequence of SFR registers)
Setting Flag of SFR Register
Status Transition
AMPH EXCLK OSCSEL MSTOP OSTC
Register
XSEL MCM0 CSS
(D) → (C) (X1 clock: less than 10 MHz) 0 0 1 0 Must be
checked
1 1 0
(D) → (C) (external main clock: less than
10 MHz)
0 1 1 0
Must not be
checked
1 1 0
(D) → (C) (X1 clock: 10 MHz or more) 1 0 1 0 Must be
checked
1 1 0
(D) → (C) (external main clock: 10 MHz or
more)
1 1 1 0
Must not be
checked
1 1 0
Unnecessary if these registers
are already set
Unnecessary if the
CPU is operating
with the high-speed
system clock
↑
Unnecessary if this register is
already set
Remarks 1. (A) to (I) in Table 5-4 correspond to (A) to (I) in Figure 5-14.
2. EXCLK, OSCSEL, EXCLKS, OSCSELS, AMPH:
Bits 7 to 4 and 0 of the clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)
MSTOP: Bit 7 of the main OSC control register (MOC)
XSEL, MCM0: Bits 2 and 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM)
CSS: Bit 4 of the processor clock control register (PCC)
RSTS, RSTOP: Bits 7 and 0 of the internal oscillator mode register (RCM)
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
140
Table 5-4. CPU Clock Transition and SFR Register Setting Examples (4/4)
(9) CPU clock changing from subsystem clock (D) to internal high-speed oscillation clock (B)
(Setting sequence of SFR registers)
Setting Flag of SFR Register
Status Transition
RSTOP RSTS MCM0 CSS
(D) → (B) 0 Confirm this flag
is 1.
0 0
Unnecessary if the CPU is operating
with the internal high-speed
oscillation clock
↑
Unnecessary if
XSEL is 0
(10) • HALT mode (E) set while CPU is operating with internal high-speed oscillation clock (B)
• HALT mode (F) set while CPU is operating with high-speed system clock (C)
• HALT mode (G) set while CPU is operating with subsystem clock (D)
Status Transition Setting
(B) → (E)
(C) → (F)
(D) → (G)
Executing HALT instruction
(11) • STOP mode (H) set while CPU is operating with internal high-speed oscillation clock (B)
• STOP mode (I) set while CPU is operating with high-speed system clock (C)
(Setting sequence)
Status Transition Setting
(B) → (H)
(C) → (I)
Stopping peripheral functions that
cannot operate in STOP mode
Executing STOP instruction
Remarks 1. (A) to (I) in Table 5-4 correspond to (A) to (I) in Figure 5-14.
2. MCM0: Bit 0 of the main clock mode register (MCM)
CSS: Bit 4 of the processor clock control register (PCC)
RSTS, RSTOP: Bits 7 and 0 of the internal oscillator mode register (RCM)
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 141
5.6.7 Condition before changing CPU clock and processing after changing CPU clock
Condition before changing the CPU clock and processing after changing the CPU clock are shown below.
Table 5-5. Changing CPU Clock
CPU Clock
Before Change After Change
Condition Before Change Processing After Change
X1 clock Stabilization of X1 oscillation
• MSTOP = 0, OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 0
• After elapse of oscillation stabilization time
• Internal high-speed oscillator can be
stopped (RSTOP = 1).
• Clock supply to CPU is stopped for 4.06
to 16.12
μ
s after AMPH has been set to 1.
Internal high-
speed oscillation
clock
External main
system clock
Enabling input of external clock from EXCLK
pin
• MSTOP = 0, OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 1
• Internal high-speed oscillator can be
stopped (RSTOP = 1).
• Clock supply to CPU is stopped for the
duration of 160 external clocks from the
EXCLK pin after AMPH has been set to 1.
X1 clock X1 oscillation can be stopped (MSTOP = 1).
External main
system clock
Internal high-
speed oscillation
clock
Oscillation of internal high-speed oscillator
• RSTOP = 0 External main system clock input can be
disabled (MSTOP = 1).
Internal high-
speed oscillation
clock
Operating current can be reduced by
stopping internal high-speed oscillator
(RSTOP = 1).
X1 clock X1 oscillation can be stopped (MSTOP = 1).
External main
system clock
XT1 clock Stabilization of XT1 oscillation
• XTSTART = 0, EXCLKS = 0,
OSCSELS = 1, or XTSTART = 1
• After elapse of oscillation stabilization time
External main system clock input can be
disabled (MSTOP = 1).
Internal high-
speed oscillation
clock
Operating current can be reduced by
stopping internal high-speed oscillator
(RSTOP = 1).
X1 clock X1 oscillation can be stopped (MSTOP = 1).
External main
system clock
External
subsystem clock
Enabling input of external clock from
EXCLKS pin
• XTSTART = 0, EXCLKS = 1,
OSCSELS = 1
External main system clock input can be
disabled (MSTOP = 1).
Internal high-
speed oscillation
clock
Oscillation of internal high-speed oscillator
and selection of internal high-speed
oscillation clock as main system clock
• RSTOP = 0, MCS = 0
XT1 oscillation can be stopped or external
subsystem clock input can be disabled
(OSCSELS = 0).
X1 clock Stabilization of X1 oscillation and selection
of high-speed system clock as main system
clock
• MSTOP = 0, OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 0
• After elapse of oscillation stabilization time
• MCS = 1
• XT1 oscillation can be stopped or external
subsystem clock input can be disabled
(OSCSELS = 0).
• Clock supply to CPU is stopped for 4.06
to 16.12
μ
s after AMPH has been set to 1.
XT1 clock,
external
subsystem clock
External main
system clock
Enabling input of external clock from EXCLK
pin and selection of high-speed system
clock as main system clock
• MSTOP = 0, OSCSEL = 1, EXCLK = 1
• MCS = 1
• XT1 oscillation can be stopped or external
subsystem clock input can be disabled
(OSCSELS = 0).
• Clock supply to CPU is stopped for the
duration of 160 external clocks from the
EXCLK pin after AMPH has been set to 1.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
142
5.6.8 Time required for switchover of CPU clock and main system clock
By setting bits 0 to 2 (PCC0 to PCC2) and bit 4 (CSS) of the processor clock control register (PCC), the CPU clock
can be switched (between the main system clock and the subsystem clock) and the division ratio of the main system
clock can be changed.
The actual switchover operation is not performed immediately after rewriting to PCC; operation continues on the
pre-switchover clock for several clocks (see Table 5-6).
Whether the CPU is operating on the main system clock or the subsystem clock can be ascertained using bit 5
(CLS) of the PCC register.
Table 5-6. Time Required for Switchover of CPU Clock and Main System Clock Cycle Division Factor
Set Value Before
Switchover
Set Value After Switchover
CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0 CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0CSS PCC2 PCC1 PCC0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 × × ×
0 0 0 16 clocks 16 clocks 16 clocks 16 clocks 2fXP/fSUB clocks
0 0 1 8 clocks 8 clocks 8 clocks 8 clocks fXP/fSUB clocks
0 1 0 4 clocks 4 clocks 4 clocks 4 clocks fXP/2fSUB clocks
0 1 1 2 clocks 2 clocks 2 clocks 2 clocks fXP/4fSUB clocks
0
1 0 0 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock 1 clock fXP/8fSUB clocks
1 × × × 2 clocks 2 clocks 2 clocks 2 clocks 2 clocks
Caution Selection of the main system clock cycle division factor (PCC0 to PCC2) and switchover from
the main system clock to the subsystem clock (changing CSS from 0 to 1) should not be set
simultaneously.
Simultaneous setting is possible, however, for selection of the main system clock cycle
division factor (PCC0 to PCC2) and switchover from the subsystem clock to the main system
clock (changing CSS from 1 to 0).
Remarks 1. The number of clocks listed in Table 5-6 is the number of CPU clocks before switchover.
2. When switching the CPU clock from the main system clock to the subsystem clock, calculate the
number of clocks by rounding up to the next clock and discarding the decimal portion, as shown
below.
Example When switching CPU clock from fXP/2 to fSUB/2 (@ oscillation with fXP = 10 MHz, fSUB =
32.768 kHz)
fXP/fSUB = 10000/32.768 ≅ 305.1 → 306 clocks
By setting bit 0 (MCM0) of the main clock mode register (MCM), the main system clock can be switched (between
the internal high-speed oscillation clock and the high-speed system clock).
The actual switchover operation is not performed immediately after rewriting to MCM0; operation continues on the
pre-switchover clock for several clocks (see Table 5-7).
Whether the CPU is operating on the internal high-speed oscillation clock or the high-speed system clock can be
ascertained using bit 1 (MCS) of MCM.
CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 143
Table 5-7. Maximum Time Required for Main System Clock Switchover
Set Value Before Switchover Set Value After Switchover
MCM0 MCM0
0 1
0 1 + 2fRH/fXH clock
1 1 + 2fXH/fRH clock
Caution When switching the internal high-speed oscillation clock to the high-speed system clock, bit 2
(XSEL) of MCM must be set to 1 in advance. The value of XSEL can be changed only once after a
reset release.
Remarks 1. The number of clocks listed in Table 5-7 is the number of main system clocks before switchover.
2. Calculate the number of clocks in Table 5-7 by removing the decimal portion.
Example When switching the main system clock from the internal high-speed oscillation clock to the
high-speed system clock (@ oscillation with fRH = 8 MHz, fXH = 10 MHz)
1 + 2fRH/fXH = 1 + 2 × 8/10 = 1 + 2 × 0.8 = 1 + 1.6 = 2.6 → 2 clocks
5.6.9 Conditions before clock oscillation is stopped
The following lists the register flag settings for stopping the clock oscillation (disabling external clock input) and
conditions before the clock oscillation is stopped.
Table 5-8. Conditions Before the Clock Oscillation Is Stopped and Flag Settings
Clock Conditions Before Clock Oscillation Is Stopped
(External Clock Input Disabled)
Flag Settings of SFR
Register
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock
MCS = 1 or CLS = 1
(The CPU is operating on a clock other than the internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
RSTOP = 1
X1 clock
External main system clock
MCS = 0 or CLS = 1
(The CPU is operating on a clock other than the high-speed system clock)
MSTOP = 1
XT1 clock
External subsystem clock
CLS = 0
(The CPU is operating on a clock other than the subsystem clock)
OSCSELS = 0
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
144
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
The 78K0/FC2 incorporates 16-bit timer/event counters 00 and 01.
Since the composition of a timer I/O pin changes with products, the 16-bit timer/event counter 01 (TM01) has the
difference of function in a 16-bir timer/event counter00 (TM00).
The difference in the function by the product is shown below.
Product
Pin
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882 and
78F0883
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885 and
78F0886
TI001 − −
TI011 − Provided
TO01 − Provided
Be careful to the following restrictions for function of TM01 for
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882 and 78F0883.
• Selecting TI001 and TI011 for count clock is prohibited. When Using TI001 for baud rate error calculation, it is not
applicable.
• Timer output is prohibited.
Be careful to the following restrictions for function of TM01 for
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885 and 78F0886.
• Selecting TI001 for count clock is prohibited. When Using TI001 for baud rate error calculation, it is not
applicable.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 145
6.1 Functions of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01
16-bit timer/event counters 00 and 01 have the following functions.
• Interval timer
• PPG output
• Pulse width measurement
• External event counter
• Square-wave output
• One-shot pulse output
(1) Interval timer
16-bit timer/event counters 00 and 01 generate an interrupt request at the preset time interval.
(2) PPG output
16-bit timer/event counters 00 and 01 can output a rectangular wave whose frequency and output pulse width can
be set freely.
(3) Pulse width measurement
16-bit timer/event counters 00 and 01 can measure the pulse width of an externally input signal.
(4) External event counter
16-bit timer/event counters 00 and 01 can measure the number of pulses of an externally input signal.
(5) Square-wave output
16-bit timer/event counters 00 and 01 can output a square wave with any selected frequency.
(6) One-shot pulse output
16-bit timer event counters 00 and 01 can output a one-shot pulse whose output pulse width can be set freely.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
146
6.2 Configuration of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01
16-bit timer/event counters 00 and 01 include the following hardware.
Table 6-1. Configuration of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01
Item Configuration
Timer counter 16 bits (TM0n)
Register 16-bit timer capture/compare register: 16 bits (CR00n, CR01n)
Timer input TI000, TI01n
Timer output TO0n, output controller
Control registers 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n)
16-bit timer capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n)
16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n)
Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n)
Port mode register 0 (PM0)
Port register 0 (P0)
Remarks 1. There are no TI001, TI011 and TO01 in
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882 and 78F0883.
2. There is no TI001 in
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885 and 78F0886.
3. n = 0, 1
Figures 6-1, 6-2 and 6-3 show the block diagrams.
Figure 6-1. Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 00
Internal bus
Capture/compare control
register 00 (CRC00)
TI010/TO00/P01
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
2
f
PRS
/2
8
f
PRS
TI000/P00
Prescaler mode
register 00 (PRM00)
2
PRM001 PRM000
CRC002
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 010 (CR010)
Match
Match
16-bit timer counter 00
(TM00) Clear
Noise
elimi-
nator
CRC002 CRC001 CRC000
INTTM000
TO00/TI010/
P01
INTTM010
16-bit timer output
control register 00
(TOC00)
16-bit timer mode
control register 00
(TMC00)
Internal bus
TMC003 TMC002
TMC001
OVF00
TOC004
LVS00 LVR00
TOC001
TOE00
Selector
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 000 (CR000)
Selector
Selector
Selector
Noise
elimi-
nator
Noise
elimi-
nator
Output
controller
OSPE00
OSPT00
Output latch
(P01)
PM01
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 147
Figure 6-2. Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 01 (
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883)
Internal bus
Capture/compare control
register 01 (CRC01)
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
4
f
PRS
/2
6
f
PRS
Prescaler mode
register 01 (PRM01)
2
PRM011 PRM010
CRC012
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 011 (CR011)
Match
Match
16-bit timer counter 01
(TM01) Clear
Noise
elimi-
nator
CRC012 CRC011 CRC010
INTTM001
INTTM011
16-bit timer output
control register 01
(TOC01)
16-bit timer mode
control register 01
(TMC01)
Internal bus
TMC013 TMC012
TMC011
OVF01
TOC014
LVS01 LVR01
TOC011
TOE01
Selector
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 001 (CR001)
Selector
Selector
Selector
Noise
elimi-
nator
Noise
elimi-
nator
Output
controller
OSPE01
OSPT01
Figure 6-3. Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 01 (
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886)
Internal bus
Capture/compare control
register 01 (CRC01)
TI011/TO01/P06
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
4
f
PRS
/2
6
f
PRS
Prescaler mode
register 01 (PRM01)
2
PRM011 PRM010
CRC012
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 011 (CR011)
Match
Match
16-bit timer counter 01
(TM01) Clear
Noise
elimi-
nator
CRC012 CRC011 CRC010
INTTM001
TO01/TI011/
P06
INTTM011
16-bit timer output
control register 01
(TOC01)
16-bit timer mode
control register 01
(TMC01)
Internal bus
TMC013 TMC012
TMC011
OVF01
TOC014
LVS01 LVR01
TOC011
TOE01
Selector
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 001 (CR001)
Selector
Selector
Selector
Noise
elimi-
nator
Noise
elimi-
nator
Output
controller
OSPE01
OSPT01
Output latch
(P06)
PM06
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
148
(1) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n)
TM0n is a 16-bit read-only register that counts count pulses.
The counter is incremented in synchronization with the rising edge of the input clock.
If the count value is read during operation, then input of the count clock is temporarily stopped, and the count
value at that point is read.
Figure 6-4. Format of 16-Bit Timer Counter 0n (TM0n)
TM0n
(n = 0, 1)
Symbol FF11H (TM00)
FFB1H (TM01)
FF10H (TM00)
FFB0H (TM01)
Address: FF10H, FF11H (TM00), FFB0H, FFB1H (TM01) After reset: 0000H R
The count value is reset to 0000H in the following cases.
<1> At reset signal generation
<2> If TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 are cleared
<3> If the valid edge of the TI000 pin is input in the mode in which clear & start occurs when inputting the valid
edge of the TI000 pin
<4> If TM0n and CR00n match in the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM0n and CR00n
<5> OSPT00 is set to 1 in one-shot pulse output mode or the valid edge is input to the TI000 pin
Caution Even if TM0n is read, the value is not captured by CR01n.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 149
(2) 16-bit timer capture/compare register 00n (CR00n)
CR00n is a 16-bit register that has the functions of both a capture register and a compare register. Whether it is
used as a capture register or as a compare register is set by bit 0 (CRC0n0) of capture/compare control register
0n (CRC0n).
CR00n can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H.
Figure 6-5. Format of 16-Bit Timer Capture/Compare Register 00n (CR00n)
CR00n
(n = 0, 1)
Symbol FF13H (CR000)
FFB2H (CR001)
FF12H (CR000)
FFB3H (CR001)
Address: FF12H, FF13H (CR000), FFB2H, FFB3H (CR001) After reset: 0000H R/W
• When CR00n is used as a compare register
The value set in CR00n is constantly compared with 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) count value, and an
interrupt request (INTTM00n) is generated if they match. The set value is held until CR00n is rewritten.
• When CR00n is used as a capture register
It is possible to select the valid edge of the TI000 pin or the TI01n pin as the capture trigger. The TI000 or
TI01n pin valid edge is set using prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) (see Table 6-2).
Caution CR00n does not perform the capture operation when it is set in the comparison mode, even
if a capture trigger is input to it.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
150
Table 6-2. CR00n Capture Trigger and Valid Edges of TI000 and TI01n Pins
(1) TI000 pin valid edge selected as capture trigger (CRC001 = 1, CRC000 = 1)
TI000 Pin Valid Edge CR000 Capture Trigger
ES001 ES000
Falling edge Rising edge 0 1
Rising edge Falling edge 0 0
No capture operation Both rising and falling edges 1 1
(2) TI01n pin valid edge selected as capture trigger (CRC0n1 = 0, CRC0n0 = 1)
TI01n Pin Valid Edge CR00n Capture Trigger
ES1n1 ES1n0
Falling edge Falling edge 0 0
Rising edge Rising edge 0 1
Both rising and falling edges Both rising and falling edges 1 1
Cautions 1. Set a value other than 0000H in CR00n in the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of
TM0n and CR00n.
2. If CR00n is cleared to 0000H in the free-running mode and an interrupt request (INTTM00n) is
generated when the value of CR00n changes from 0000H to 0001H following TM0n overflow
(FFFFH). In addition, INTTM00n is generated after a match between TM0n and CR00n, after
detecting the valid edge of the TI01n pin, and the timer is cleared by a one-shot trigger.
3. When P01 or P06 is used as the valid edge input of the TI01n pin, it cannot be used as the timer
output (TO0n). Moreover, when P01 or P06 is used as TO0n, it cannot be used as the valid edge
input of the TI01n pin.
4. When CR00n is used as a capture register, read data is undefined if the register read time and
capture trigger input conflict (the capture data itself is the correct value).
If count stop input and capture trigger input conflict, the captured data is undefined.
5. Do not rewrite CR00n during TM0n operation.
Remarks 1. Setting ES001, ES000 = 1, 0 and ES1n1, ES1n0 = 1, 0 is prohibited.
2. ES001, ES000: Bits 5 and 4 of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)
ES1n1, ES1n0: Bits 7 and 6 of prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n)
CRC0n1, CRC0n0: Bits 1 and 0 of capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n)
3. n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 151
(3) 16-bit timer capture/compare register 01n (CR01n)
CR01n is a 16-bit register that has the functions of both a capture register and a compare register. Whether it is
used as a capture register or a compare register is set by bit 2 (CRC002) of capture/compare control register 00
(CRC00).
CR01n can be set by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H.
Figure 6-6. Format of 16-Bit Timer Capture/Compare Register 01n (CR01n)
CR01n
(n = 0, 1)
Symbol FF15H (CR010)
FFB5H (CR011)
FF14H (CR010)
FFB4H (CR011)
Address: FF14H, FF15H (CR010), FFB4H, FFB5H (CR011) After reset: 0000H R/W
• When CR01n is used as a compare register
The value set in the CR01n is constantly compared with 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) count value, and an
interrupt request (INTTM01n) is generated if they match. The set value is held until CR01n is rewritten.
• When CR010 is used as a capture register
It is possible to select the valid edge of the TI000 pin as the capture trigger. The TI000 pin valid edge is set by
prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) (see Table 6-3).
Table 6-3. CR01n Capture Trigger and Valid Edge of TI000 Pin (CRC002 = 1)
TI000 Pin Valid Edge CR010 Capture Trigger
ES001 ES000
Falling edge Falling edge 0 0
Rising edge Rising edge 0 1
Both rising and falling edges Both rising and falling edges 1 1
Cautions 1. If the CR01n register is cleared to 0000H, an interrupt request (INTTM01n) is generated when the
value of CR01n changes from 0000H to 0001H following TM0n overflow (FFFFH). In addition,
INTTM01n is generated after a match between TM0n and CR01n, after detecting the valid edge of
the TI000 pin, and the timer is cleared by a one-shot trigger.
2. When CR01n is used as a capture register, read data is undefined if the register read time and
capture trigger input conflict (the capture data itself is the correct value).
If count stop input and capture trigger input conflict, the captured data is undefined.
3. CR01n can be rewritten during TM0n operation. For details, see Caution 2 in Figure 6-22 PPG
Output Operation Timing.
Remarks 1. Setting ES001, ES000 = 1, 0 is prohibited.
2. ES001, ES000: Bits 5 and 4 of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)
CRC002: Bit 2 of capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)
3. n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
152
(4) Setting range when CR00n or CR01n is used as a compare register
When CR00n or CR01n is used as a compare register, set it as shown below.
Operation CR00n Register Setting Range CR01n Register Setting Range
Operation as interval timer
Operation as square-wave output
Operation as external event counter
0000H < N ≤ FFFFH 0000HNote ≤ M ≤ FFFFH
Normally, this setting is not used. Mask the
match interrupt signal (INTTM01n).
Operation in the clear & start mode
entered by TI000 pin valid edge input
Operation as free-running timer
0000HNote ≤ N ≤ FFFFH 0000HNote ≤ M ≤ FFFFH
Operation as PPG output M < N ≤ FFFFH 0000HNote ≤ M < N
Operation as one-shot pulse output 0000HNote ≤ N ≤ FFFFH (N ≠ M) 0000HNote ≤ M ≤ FFFFH (M ≠ N)
Note When 0000H is set, a match interrupt immediately after the timer operation does not occur and timer output
is not changed, and the first match timing is as follows. A match interrupt occurs at the timing when the
timer counter (TM0n register) is changed from 0000H to 0001H.
• When the timer counter is cleared due to overflow
• When the timer counter is cleared due to TI000 pin valid edge (when clear & start mode is entered by
TI000 pin valid edge input)
• When the timer counter is cleared due to compare match (when clear & start mode is entered by match
between TM0n and CR00n (CR00n = other than 0000H, CR01n = 0000H))
Operation enabled
(other than 00)
TM0n register
Timer counter clear
Interrupt signal
is not generated Interrupt signal
is generated
Timer operation enable bit
(TMC0n3, TMC0n2)
Interrupt request signal
Compare register set value
(0000H)
Operation
disabled (00)
Remarks 1. N: CR00n register set value, M: CR01n register set value
2. For details of TMC0n3 and TMC0n2, see 6.3 (1) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n).
3. n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 153
Table 6-4. Capture Operation of CR00n and CR01n
External Input
Signal
Capture
Operation
TI000 Pin Input
TI01n Pin Input
Set values of ES001 and
ES000
Position of edge to be
captured
Set values of ES1n1 and
ES1n0
Position of edge to be
captured
01: Rising
01: Rising
00: Falling
00: Falling
CRC001 = 1
TI000 pin input
(reverse phase)
11: Both edges
(cannot be captured)
CRC0n1 bit = 0
TI01n pin input
11: Both edges
Capture operation of
CR00n
Interrupt signal INTTM000 signal is not
generated even if value
is captured.
Interrupt signal INTTM00n signal is
generated each time
value is captured.
Set values of ES001 and
ES000
Position of edge to be
captured
01: Rising
00: Falling
TI000 pin inputNote
11: Both edges
Capture operation of
CR010
Interrupt signal INTTM010 signal is
generated each time
value is captured.
Note The capture operation of CR010 is not affected by the setting of the CRC001 bit.
Caution To capture the count value of the TM00 register to the CR000 register by using the phase
reverse to that input to the TI000 pin, the interrupt request signal (INTTM000) is not generated
after the value has been captured. If the valid edge is detected on the TI010 pin during this
operation, the capture operation is not performed but the INTTM000 signal is generated as an
external interrupt signal. To not use the external interrupt, mask the INTTM000 signal.
Remarks 1. CRC0n1: See 6.3 (2) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n).
ES1n1, ES1n0, ES001, ES000: See 6.3 (4) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n).
2. n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
154
6.3 Registers Controlling 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01
The following six registers are used to control 16-bit timer/event counters 00 and 01.
• 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n)
• Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n)
• 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n)
• Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n)
• Port mode register 0 (PM0)
• Port register 0 (P0)
(1) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n)
This register sets the 16-bit timer operating mode, the 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) clear mode, and output
timing, and detects an overflow.
Rewriting TMC0n is prohibited during operation (when TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 = other than 00). However, it can
be changed when TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 are cleared to 00 (stopping operation) and when OVF0n is cleared to 0.
TMC0n can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears TMC0n to 00H.
Caution 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) starts operation at the moment TMC0n2 and TMC0n3 are set to
values other than 0, 0 (operation stop mode), respectively. Set TMC0n2 and TMC0n3 to 0, 0 to
stop the operation.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 155
Figure 6-7. Format of 16-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 00 (TMC00)
Address: FFBAH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0>
TMC00 0 0 0 0 TMC003 TMC002 TMC001 OVF00
TMC003 TMC002 Operation enable of 16-bit timer/event counter 00
0 0
Disables 16-bit timer/event counter 00 operation. Stops supplying operating clock.
Clears 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00).
0 1 Free-running timer mode
1 0 Clear & start mode entered by TI000 pin valid edge inputNote
1 1 Clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM00 and CR000
TMC001 Condition to reverse timer output (TO00)
0 • Match between TM00 and CR000 or match between TM00 and CR010
1 • Match between TM00 and CR000 or match between TM00 and CR010
• Trigger input of TI000 pin valid edge
OVF00 TM00 overflow flag
Clear (0) Clears OVF00 to 0 or TMC003 and TMC002 = 00
Set (1) Overflow occurs.
OVF00 is set to 1 when the value of TM00 changes from FFFFH to 0000H in all the operation modes (free-running
timer mode, clear & start mode entered by TI000 pin valid edge input, and clear & start mode entered upon a match
between TM00 and CR000).
It can also be set to 1 by writing 1 to OVF00.
Note The TI000 pin valid edge is set by bits 5 and 4 (ES001, ES000) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00).
Remark TO00: 16-bit timer/event counter 00 output pin
TI000: 16-bit timer/event counter 00 input pin
TM00: 16-bit timer counter 00
CR000: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000
CR010: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
156
Figure 6-8. Format of 16-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 01 (TMC01)
Address: FFB6H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 <0>
TMC01 0 0 0 0 TMC013 TMC012 TMC011 OVF01
TMC013 TMC012 Operation enable of 16-bit timer/event counter 01
0 0
Disables 16-bit timer/event counter 01 operation. Stops supplying operating clock.
Clears 16-bit timer counter 01 (TM01).
0 1 Free-running timer mode
1 0 Setting prohibited
1 1 Clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM01 and CR001
TMC011 Condition to reverse timer output (TO01)
0 • Match between TM01 and CR001 or match between TM01 and CR011
1 • Match between TM01 and CR001 or match between TM01 and CR011
OVF01 TM01 overflow flag
Clear (0) Clears OVF01 to 0 or TMC013 and TMC012 = 00
Set (1) Overflow occurs.
OVF01 is set to 1 when the value of TM01 changes from FFFFH to 0000H in all the operation modes (free-running
timer mode and clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM01 and CR001).
It can also be set to 1 by writing 1 to OVF01.
Remark TO01: 16-bit timer/event counter 01 output pin
TM01: 16-bit timer counter 01
CR001: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 001
CR011: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 011
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 157
(2) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n)
CRC0n is the register that controls the operation of CR00n and CR01n.
Changing the value of CRC0n is prohibited during operation (when TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 = other than 00).
CRC0n can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears CRC0n to 00H.
Remark n = 0, 1
Figure 6-9. Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 00 (CRC00)
Address: FFBCH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CRC00 0 0 0 0 0 CRC002 CRC001 CRC000
CRC002 CR010 operating mode selection
0 Operates as compare register
1 Operates as capture register
CRC001 CR000 capture trigger selection
0 Captures on valid edge of TI010 pin
1 Captures on valid edge of TI000 pin by reverse phaseNote
The valid edge of the TI010 and TI000 pin is set by PRM00.
If ES001 and ES000 are set to 11 (both edges) when CRC001 is 1, the valid edge of the TI000 pin cannot
be detected.
CRC000 CR000 operating mode selection
0 Operates as compare register
1 Operates as capture register
If TMC003 and TMC002 are set to 11 (clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM00 and
CR000), be sure to set CRC000 to 0.
Note When the valid edge is detected from the TI010 pin, the capture operation is not performed but the
INTTM000 signal is generated as an external interrupt signal.
Caution To ensure that the capture operation is performed properly, the capture trigger requires a pulse
two cycles longer than the count clock selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00).
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
158
Figure 6-10. Example of CR01n Capture Operation (When Rising Edge Is Specified)
Count clock
TM00
TI000
Rising edge detection
CR010
INTTM010
N − 3N − 2N − 1 N N + 1
N
Valid edge
Figure 6-11. Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 01 (CRC01)
Address: FFB8H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CRC01 0 0 0 0 0 CRC012Note 1 CRC011Note 2 CRC010Note 1
CRC012 CR011 operating mode selection
0 Operates as compare register
1 Operates as capture register
CRC011 CR001 capture trigger selection
0 Captures on valid edge of TI011 pin
1 Setting prohibited
The valid edge of the TI011 pin is set by PRM01.
CRC010 CR001 operating mode selection
0 Operates as compare register
1 Operates as capture register
If TMC013 and TMC012 are set to 11 (clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM01 and
CR001), be sure to set CRC010 to 0.
Notes 1. Be sure to set to bit 2 and 0 of CRC01 to 0 in
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882 and 78F0883.
2. Be sure to set to bit 1 of CRC01 to 0.
Caution To ensure that the capture operation is performed properly, the capture trigger requires a pulse
two cycles longer than the count clock selected by prescaler mode register 01 (PRM01) (see
Figure 6-10 Example of CR01n Capture Operation (When Rising Edge Is Specified)).
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 159
(3) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n)
TOC0n is an 8-bit register that controls the TO0n pin output.
TOC0n can be rewritten while only OSPT0n is operating (when TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 = other than 00).
Rewriting the other bits is prohibited during operation.
However, TOC0n4 can be rewritten during timer operation as a means to rewrite CR01n (see 6.5.1 Rewriting
CR01n during TM0n operation).
TOC0n can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears TOC0n to 00H.
Caution Be sure to set TOC0n using the following procedure.
<1> Set TOC0n4 and TOC0n1 to 1.
<2> Set only TOE0n to 1.
<3> Set either of LVS0n or LVR0n to 1.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
160
Figure 6-12. Format of 16-Bit Timer Output Control Register 00 (TOC00)
Address: FFBDH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 <6> <5> 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
TOC00 0 OSPT00 OSPE00 TOC004 LVS00 LVR00 TOC001 TOE00
OSPT00 One-shot pulse output trigger via software
0 −
1 One-shot pulse output
The value of this bit is always “0” when it is read. Do not set this bit to 1 in a mode other than the one-
shot pulse output mode.
If it is set to 1, TM00 is cleared and started.
OSPE00 One-shot pulse output operation control
0 Successive pulse output
1 One-shot pulse output
One-shot pulse output operates correctly in the free-running timer mode or clear & start mode entered by
TI000 pin valid edge input.
The one-shot pulse cannot be output in the clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM00 and
CR000.
TOC004 TO00 pin output control on match between CR010 and TM00
0 Disables inversion operation
1 Enables inversion operation
The interrupt signal (INTTM010) is generated even when TOC004 = 0.
LVS00 LVR00 Setting of TO00 pin output status
0 0 No change
0 1 Initial value of TO00 pin output is low level (TO00 pin output is cleared to 0).
1 0 Initial value of TO00 pin output is high level (TO00 pin output is set to 1).
1 1 Setting prohibited
• LVS00 and LVR00 can be used to set the initial value of the output level of the TO00 pin. If the initial
value does not have to be set, leave LVS00 and LVR00 as 00.
• Be sure to set LVS00 and LVR00 when TOE00 = 1.
LVS00, LVR00, and TOE00 being simultaneously set to 1 is prohibited.
• LVS00 and LVR00 are trigger bits. By setting these bits to 1, the initial value of the output level of the
TO00 pin can be set. Even if these bits are cleared to 0, output of the TO00 pin is not affected.
• The values of LVS00 and LVR00 are always 0 when they are read.
• For how to set LVS00 and LVR00, see 6.5.2 Setting LVS0n and LVR0n.
TOC001 TO00 pin output control on match between CR000 and TM00
0 Disables inversion operation
1 Enables inversion operation
The interrupt signal (INTTM000) is generated even when TOC001 = 0.
TOE00 TO00 pin output control
0 Disables output (TO00 pin output fixed to low level)
1 Enables output
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 161
Figure 6-13. Format of 16-Bit Timer Output Control Register 01 (TOC01)
Address: FFB9H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 <6> <5> 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
TOC01 0 OSPT01Note OSPE01Note TOC014Note LVS01Note LVR01Note TOC011Note TOE01Note
OSPT01 One-shot pulse output trigger via software
0 −
1 One-shot pulse output
The value of this bit is always 0 when it is read. Do not set this bit to 1 in a mode other than the one-shot
pulse output mode.
If it is set to 1, TM01 is cleared and started.
OSPE01 One-shot pulse output operation control
0 Successive pulse output
1 One-shot pulse output
One-shot pulse output operates correctly in the free-running timer mode.
The one-shot pulse cannot be output in the clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM01 and
CR001.
TOC014 TO01 pin output control on match between CR011 and TM01
0 Disables inversion operation
1 Enables inversion operation
The interrupt signal (INTTM011) is generated even when TOC014 = 0.
LVS01 LVR01 Setting of TO01 pin output status
0 0 No change
0 1 Initial value of TO01 pin output is low level (TO01 pin output is cleared to 0).
1 0 Initial value of TO01 pin output is high level (TO01 pin output is set to 1).
1 1 Setting prohibited
• LVS01 and LVR01 can be used to set the initial value of the output level of the TO01 pin. If the initial
value does not have to be set, leave LVS01 and LVR01 as 00.
• Be sure to set LVS01 and LVR01 when TOE01 = 1.
LVS01, LVR01, and TOE01 being simultaneously set to 1 is prohibited.
• LVS01 and LVR01 are trigger bits. By setting these bits to 1, the initial value of the output level of the
TO01 pin can be set. Even if these bits are cleared to 0, output of the TO01 pin is not affected.
• The values of LVS01 and LVR01 are always 0 when they are read.
• For how to set LVS01 and LVR01, see 6.5.2 Setting LVS0n and LVR0n.
TOC011 TO01 pin output control on match between CR001 and TM01
0 Disables inversion operation
1 Enables inversion operation
The interrupt signal (INTTM001) is generated even when TOC011 = 0.
TOE01 TO01 pin output control
0 Disables output (TO01 pin output is fixed to low level)
1 Enables output
Note Be sure to set to bit 6 to 0 of TOC01 to 0 in
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882 and 78F0883.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
162
(4) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n)
PRM0n is the register that sets the TM0n count clock and TI000 and TI01n pin input valid edges.
Rewriting PRM0n is prohibited during operation (when TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 = other than 00).
PRM0n can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears PRM0n to 00H.
Cautions 1. Do not apply the following setting when setting the PRM0n1 and PRM0n0 bits to 11 (to
specify the valid edge of the TI000 pin as a count clock).
• Clear & start mode entered by the TI000 pin valid edge
• Setting the TI000 pin as a capture trigger
2. If the operation of the 16-bit timer/event counter 0n is enabled when the TI000 or TI01n pin
is at high level and when the valid edge of the TI000 or TI01n pin is specified to be the
rising edge or both edges, the high level of the TI000 or TI01n pin is detected as a rising
edge. Note this when the TI000 or TI01n pin is pulled up. However, the rising edge is not
detected when the timer operation has been once stopped and then is enabled again.
3. The valid edge of TI010 and timer output (TO00) cannot be used for the P01 pin at the same
time, and the valid edge of TI011 and timer output (TO01) cannot be used for the P06 pin at
the same time. Select either of the functions.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 163
Figure 6-14. Format of Prescaler Mode Register 00 (PRM00)
Address: FFBBH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PRM00 ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000 0 0 PRM001 PRM000
ES101 ES100 TI010 pin valid edge selection
0 0 Falling edge
0 1 Rising edge
1 0 Setting prohibited
1 1 Both falling and rising edges
ES001 ES000 TI000 pin valid edge selection
0 0 Falling edge
0 1 Rising edge
1 0 Setting prohibited
1 1 Both falling and rising edges
Count clock selection PRM001 PRM000
f
PRS = 4 MHz fPRS = 5 MHz fPRS = 10 MHz fPRS = 20 MHz
0 0 fPRS 4 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
0 1 fPRS/22 1 MHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz
1 0 fPRS/28 15.62 kHz 19.53 kHz 39.06 kHz 78.12 kHz
1 1 TI000 valid edgeNote
Note The external clock requires a pulse two cycles longer than internal clock (fPRS).
Cautions 1. Always set data to PRM00 after stopping the timer operation.
2. If the valid edge of the TI000 pin is to be set for the count clock, do not set the clear & start
mode using the valid edge of the TI000 pin and the capture trigger.
3. If the TI000 or TI010 pin is high level immediately after system reset, the rising edge is
immediately detected after the rising edge or both the rising and falling edges are set as
the valid edge(s) of the TI000 pin or TI010 pin to enable the operation of 16-bit timer counter
00 (TM00). Care is therefore required when pulling up the TI000 or TI010 pin. However,
when re-enabling operation for TI000 pin or TI010 pin are high level after the operation has
been stopped, the rising edge is not detected.
4. When TI010 pin is used valid edge, it cannot be used as the timer output (TO00) to P01, and
when TO00 is used, it cannot be used to the TI010 pin valid edge.
Remark f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
<R>
<R>
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
164
Figure 6-15. Format of Prescaler Mode Register 01 (PRM01)
Address: FFB7H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PRM01 ES111Note ES110Note 0 0 0 0 PRM011 PRM010
ES111 ES110 TI011 pin valid edge selection
0 0 Falling edge
0 1 Rising edge
1 0 Setting prohibited
1 1 Both falling and rising edges
Count clock selection PRM011 PRM010
f
PRS = 4 MHz fPRS = 5 MHz fPRS = 10 MHz fPRS = 20 MHz
0 0 fPRS 4 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
0 1 fPRS/24 250 kHz 312.5 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz
1 0 fPRS/26 62.5 kHz 78.125 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz
1 1 Setting prohibited
Note Be sure to set to bit 7 and 6 of PRM01 to 0 in
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882 and 78F0883.
Cautions 1. Always set data to PRM01 after stopping the timer operation.
2. If the TI011 pin is high level immediately after system reset, the rising edge is immediately
detected after the rising edge or both the rising and falling edges are set as the valid edge(s)
of the TI011 pin to enable the operation of 16-bit timer counter 01 (TM01). Care is therefore
required when pulling up the TI011 pin. However, when re-enabling operation for TI011 pin
are high level after the operation has been stopped, the rising edge is not detected.
3. When TI011 pin is used valid edge, it cannot be used as the timer output (TO01) to P06, and
when TO01 is used, it cannot be used to the TI011 pin valid edge.
Remark f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
<R>
<R>
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 165
(5) Port mode register 0 (PM0)
This register sets port 0 input/output in 1-bit units.
When using the P01/TO00/TI010 and P06/TO01/TI011 pin for timer output, set PM01, PM06, the output latch of
P01 and P06 to 0.
When using the P01/TO00/TI010 and P06/TO01/TI011 pin for timer input, set PM01 and PM06 to 1. At this time,
the output latch of P01 and P06 may be 0 or 1.
PM0 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets PM0 to FFH.
Figure 6-16. Format of Port Mode Register 0 (PM0)
Address: FF14H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PM0 1 PM06Note 1 1 1 1 PM01 PM00
PM0n P0n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0, 1, 6)
0 Output mode (Output buffer on)
1 Input mode (Output buffer off)
Note
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
166
6.4 Operation of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01
6.4.1 Interval timer operation
Setting 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) and capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) as shown
in Figure 6-17 allows operation as an interval timer.
Setting
The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.
<1> Set the CRC0n register (see Figure 6-17 for the set value).
<2> Set any value to the CR00n register.
<3> Set the count clock by using the PRM0n register.
<4> Set the TMC0n register to start the operation (see Figure 6-17 for the set value).
Caution CR00n cannot be rewritten during TM0n operation.
Remark For how to enable the INTTM00n interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.
Interrupt requests are generated repeatedly using the count value preset in 16-bit timer capture/compare register
00n (CR00n) as the interval.
When the count value of 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n) matches the value set in CR00n, counting continues with
the TM0n value cleared to 0 and the interrupt request signal (INTTM00n) is generated.
The count clock of 16-bit timer/event counter 0n can be selected with bits 0 and 1 (PRM0n0, PRM0n1) of prescaler
mode register 0n (PRM0n).
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 167
Figure 6-17. Control Register Settings for Interval Timer Operation
(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
TMC0n3
1
TMC0n2
1
TMC0n1
0/1
OVF0n
0TMC0n
Clears and starts on match between TM0n and CR00n.
(b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
CRC0n2
0/1
CRC0n1
0/1
CRC0n0
0CRC0n
CR00n used as compare register
(c) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n)
ES1n1
0/1
ES1n0
0/1
ES001
0/1
ES000
0/1
3
0
2
0
PRM0n1
0/1
PRM0n0
0/1PRM0n
Selects count clock.
Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)
Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)
Note Note
Note PRM00 only. Be sure to set to 0 in PRM01
Remarks 1. 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with the interval timer. See the
description of the respective control registers for details.
2. n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
168
Figure 6-18. Interval Timer Configuration Diagram
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 00n (CR00n)
16-bit timer counter 0n
(TM0n) OVF0n
Clear
circuit
INTTM00n
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
2
f
PRS
/2
8
TI000/P00
Selector
Noise
eliminator
f
PRS
Note
Note OVF0n is set to 1 only when 16-bit timer capture/compare register 00n is set to FFFFH.
Figure 6-19. Timing of Interval Timer Operation
Count clock
t
TM0n count value
CR00n
INTTM00n
0000H
0001H
N
0000H 0001H
N
0000H 0001H
N
NNNN
Timer operation enabled Clear Clear
Interrupt acknowledged Interrupt acknowledged
Remark Interval time = (N + 1) × t
N = 0001H to FFFFH
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 169
6.4.2 PPG output operations
Setting 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n) and capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n) as shown
in Figure 6-20 allows operation as PPG (Programmable Pulse Generator) output.
Setting
The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.
<1> Set the CRC0n register (see Figure 6-20 for the set value).
<2> Set any value to the CR00n register as the cycle.
<3> Set any value to the CR01n register as the duty factor.
<4> Set the TOC0n register (see Figure 6-20 for the set value).
<5> Set the count clock by using the PRM0n register.
<6> Set the TMC0n register to start the operation (see Figure 6-20 for the set value).
Caution To change the value of the duty factor (the value of the CR01n register) during operation, see
Caution 2 in Figure 6-22 PPG Output Operation Timing.
Remarks 1. For the setting of the TO0n pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0).
2. For how to enable the INTTM00n interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.
In the PPG output operation, rectangular waves are output from the TO0n pin with the pulse width and the cycle
that correspond to the count values preset in 16-bit timer capture/compare register 01n (CR01n) and in 16-bit timer
capture/compare register 00n (CR00n), respectively.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
170
Figure 6-20. Control Register Settings for PPG Output Operation
(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
TMC0n3
1
TMC0n2
1
TMC0n1
0
OVF0n
0TMC0n
Clears and starts on match between TM0n and CR00n.
(b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
CRC0n2
0
CRC0n1
×
CRC0n0
0CRC0n
CR00n used as compare register
CR01n used as compare register
(c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n)
7
0
OSPT0n
0
OSPE0n
0
TOC0n4
1
LVS0n
0/1
LVR0n
0/1
TOC0n1
1
TOE0n
1TOC0n
Enables TO0n output.
Inverts output on match between TM0n and CR00n.
Specifies initial value of TO0n output F/F (setting “11” is prohibited).
Inverts output on match between TM0n and CR01n.
Disables one-shot pulse output.
(d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n)
ES1n1
0/1
ES1n0
0/1
ES001
0/1
ES000
0/1
3
0
2
0
PRM0n1
0/1
PRM0n0
0/1PRM0n
Selects count clock.
Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)
Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)
Note Note
Note PRM00 only. Be sure to set to 0 in PRM01
Cautions 1. Values in the following range should be set in CR00n and CR01n:
0000H ≤ CR01n < CR00n ≤ FFFFH
2. The cycle of the pulse generated through PPG output (CR00n setting value + 1) has a duty of
(CR01n setting value + 1)/(CR00n setting value + 1).
Remark ×: Don’t care
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 171
Figure 6-21. Configuration Diagram of PPG Output
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 00n (CR00n)
16-bit timer counter 0n
(TM0n)
Clear
circuit
Noise
eliminator
fPRS
fPRS
fPRS/22
fPRS/28
TI000/P00
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 01n (CR01n)
TO00/TI010/P01
Selector
Output controller
Figure 6-22. PPG Output Operation Timing
t
0000H 0000H
0001H
0001H
M − 1
Count clock
TM0n count value
TO0n
Pulse width: (M + 1) × t
1 cycle: (N + 1) × t
N
CR00n capture value
CR01n capture value M
M
N − 1
NN
ClearClear
Cautions 1. CR00n cannot be rewritten during TM0n operation.
2. In the PPG output operation, change the pulse width (rewrite CR01n) during TM0n operation
using the following procedure.
<1> Disable the timer output inversion operation by match of TM0n and CR01n (TOC0n4 = 0)
<2> Disable the INTTM01n interrupt (TMMK01n = 1)
<3> Rewrite CR01n
<4> Wait for 1 cycle of the TM0n count clock
<5> Enable the timer output inversion operation by match of TM0n and CR01n (TOC0n4 = 1)
<6> Clear the interrupt request flag of INTTM01n (TMIF01n = 0)
<7> Enable the INTTM01n interrupt (TMMK01n = 0)
Remarks 1. 0000H ≤ M < N ≤ FFFFH
2. n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
172
6.4.3 Pulse width measurement operations
Pulse width measurement is using for16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) only.
It is possible to measure the pulse width of the signals input to the TI000 pin using 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00).
There are two measurement methods: measuring with TM00 used in free-running mode, and measuring by
restarting the timer in synchronization with the edge of the signal input to the TI000 pin.
When an interrupt occurs, read the valid value of the capture register, check the overflow flag, and then calculate
the necessary pulse width. Clear the overflow flag after checking it.
The capture operation is not performed until the signal pulse width is sampled in the count clock cycle selected by
prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n) and the valid level of the TI000 or TI010 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating
noise with a short pulse width.
Figure 6-23. CR010 Capture Operation with Rising Edge Specified
Count clock
TM00
TI000
Rising edge detection
CR010
INTTM010
N − 3N − 2N − 1 N N + 1
N
Setting
The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.
<1> Set the CRC00 register (see Figures 6-24, 6-27, 6-29, and 6-31 for the set value).
<2> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register.
<3> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figures 6-24, 6-27, 6-29, and 6-31 for the set value).
Caution To use two capture registers, set the TI000 and TI010 pins.
Remarks 1. For the setting of the TI000 (or TI010) pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0).
2. For how to enable the INTTM000 (or INTTM010) interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT
FUNCTIONS.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 173
(1) Pulse width measurement with free-running counter and one capture register
When 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is operated in free-running mode, and the edge specified by prescaler mode
register 00 (PRM00) is input to the TI000 pin, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare
register 010 (CR010) and an external interrupt request signal (INTTM010) is set.
Specify both the rising and falling edges of the TI000 pin by using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of PRM00.
Sampling is performed using the count clock selected by PRM00, and a capture operation is only performed
when a valid level of the TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width.
Figure 6-24. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter
and One Capture Register (When TI000 and CR010 Are Used)
(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
TMC003
0
TMC002
1
TMC001
0/1
OVF00
0TMC00
Free-running mode
(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
CRC002
1
CRC001
0/1
CRC000
0CRC00
CR000 used as compare register
CR010 used as capture register
(c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)
ES101
0/1
ES100
0/1
ES001
1
ES000
1
3
0
2
0
PRM001
0/1
PRM000
0/1PRM00
Selects count clock (setting “11” is prohibited).
Specifies both edges for pulse width detection.
Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)
Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement.
See the description of the respective control registers for details.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
174
Figure 6-25. Configuration Diagram for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
2
f
PRS
/2
8
TI000
16-bit timer counter 0n
(TM00) OVF00
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 010 (CR010)
Internal bus
INTTM010
Selector
Figure 6-26. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with Free-Running Counter
and One Capture Register (with Both Edges Specified)
t
0000H 0000H
FFFFH
0001H
D0
D0
Count clock
TM00 count value
TI000 pin input
CR010 capture value
INTTM010
OVF00
(D1 − D0) × t (D3 − D2) × t(10000H − D1 + D2) × t
D1 D2 D3
D2 D3
D0 + 1
D1
D1 + 1
Note
Note Clear OVF0n by software.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 175
(2) Measurement of two pulse widths with free-running counter
When 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is operated in free-running mode, it is possible to simultaneously measure
the pulse widths of the two signals input to the TI000 pin and the TI010 pin.
When the edge specified by bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) is input to
the TI000 pin, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010) and an interrupt
request signal (INTTM010) is set.
Also, when the edge specified by bits 6 and 7 (ES100 and ES101) of PRM00 is input to the TI010 pin, the value
of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) and an interrupt request signal
(INTTM000) is set.
Specify both the rising and falling edges as the edges of the TI000 and TI010 pins, by using bits 4 and 5 (ES000
and ES001) and bits 6 and 7 (ES100 and ES101) of PRM00.
Sampling is performed using the count clock cycle selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00), and a
capture operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 or TI010 pin is detected twice, thus
eliminating noise with a short pulse width.
Figure 6-27. Control Register Settings for Measurement of Two Pulse Widths with Free-Running Counter
(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
TMC003
0
TMC002
1
TMC001
0/1
OVF00
0TMC00
Free-running mode
(b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC00)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
CRC002
1
CRC001
0
CRC000
1CRC00
CR000 used as capture register
Captures valid edge of TI010 pin to CR000.
CR010 used as capture register
(c) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM00)
ES101
1
ES100
1
ES001
1
ES000
1
3
0
2
0
PRM001
0/1
PRM000
0/1PRM00
Selects count clock (setting “11” is prohibited).
Specifies both edges for pulse width detection.
Specifies both edges for pulse width detection.
Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement.
See the description of the respective control registers for details.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
176
Figure 6-28. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with Free-Running Counter
(with Both Edges Specified)
t
0000H 0000H
FFFFH
0001H
D0
D0
TI010 pin input
CR000 capture value
INTTM010
INTTM000
OVF00
(D1 − D0) × t (D3 − D2) × t(10000H − D1 + D2) × t
(10000H − D1 + (D2 + 1)) × t
D1
D2 + 1D1
D2
D2 D3
D0 + 1
D1
D1 + 1 D2 + 1 D2 + 2
Count clock
TM00 count value
TI000 pin input
CR010 capture value
Note
Note Clear OVF0n by software.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 177
(3) Pulse width measurement with free-running counter and two capture registers
When 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is operated in free-running mode, it is possible to measure the pulse width
of the signal input to the TI000 pin.
When the rising or falling edge specified by bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode register 00
(PRM00) is input to the TI000 pin, the value of TM00 is taken into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010
(CR010) and an interrupt request signal (INTTM010) is set.
Also, when the inverse edge to that of the capture operation is input into CR010, the value of TM00 is taken into
16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000).
Sampling is performed using the count clock cycle selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00), and a
capture operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise
with a short pulse width.
Figure 6-29. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement with Free-Running Counter and
Two Capture Registers (with Rising Edge Specified)
(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
TMC003
0
TMC002
1
TMC001
0/1
OVF00
0TMC00
Free-running mode
(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
CRC002
1
CRC001
1
CRC000
1CRC00
CR000 used as capture register
Captures to CR000 at inverse edge
to valid edge of TI000.
CR010 used as capture register
(c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)
ES101
0/1
ES100
0/1
ES001
0
ES000
1
3
0
2
0
PRM001
0/1
PRM000
0/1PRM00
Selects count clock (setting “11” is prohibited).
Specifies rising edge for pulse width detection.
Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)
Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with pulse width measurement.
See the description of the respective control registers for details.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
178
Figure 6-30. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation with Free-Running Counter
and Two Capture Registers (with Rising Edge Specified)
t
0000H 0000H
FFFFH
0001H
D0
D0
INTTM010
OVF00
D2
D1 D3
D2 D3
D0 + 1 D2 + 1
D1
D1 + 1
CR000 capture value
Count clock
TM00 count value
TI000 pin input
CR010 capture value
(D1 − D0) × t (D3 − D2) × t(10000H − D1 + D2) × t
Note
Note Clear OVF00 by software.
(4) Pulse width measurement by means of restart
When input of a valid edge to the TI000 pin is detected, the count value of 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) is taken
into 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010), and then the pulse width of the signal input to the TI000
pin is measured by clearing TM00 and restarting the count operation.
Either of two edges⎯rising or falling⎯can be selected using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of prescaler mode
register 00 (PRM00).
Sampling is performed using the count clock cycle selected by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) and a
capture operation is only performed when a valid level of the TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise
with a short pulse width.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 179
Figure 6-31. Control Register Settings for Pulse Width Measurement by Means of Restart
(with Rising Edge Specified)
(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
TMC003
1
TMC002
0
TMC001
0/1
OVF00
0TMC00
Clears and starts at valid edge of TI000 pin.
(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
CRC002
1
CRC001
1
CRC000
1CRC00
CR000 used as capture register
Captures to CR000 at inverse edge to valid edge of TI000.
CR010 used as capture register
(c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)
ES101
0/1
ES100
0/1
ES001
0
ES000
1
3
0
2
0
PRM001
0/1
PRM000
0/1PRM00
Selects count clock (setting “11” is prohibited).
Specifies rising edge for pulse width detection.
Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)
Figure 6-32. Timing of Pulse Width Measurement Operation by Means of Restart (with Rising Edge Specified)
t
0000H 0001H0000H0001H 0000H 0001H
D0
D0
INTTM010
D1 × t
D2 × t
D2
D1
D2D1
CR000 capture value
Count clock
TM00 count value
TI000 pin input
CR010 capture value
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
180
6.4.4 External event counter operation
This function is using for16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) only.
Setting
The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.
<1> Set the CRC00 register (see Figure 6-33 for the set value).
<2> Set the count clock by using the PRM00 register.
<3> Set any value to the CR000 register (0000H cannot be set).
<4> Set the TMC00 register to start the operation (see Figure 6-33 for the set value).
Remarks 1. For the setting of the TI000 pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0).
2. For how to enable the INTTM000 interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.
The external event counter counts the number of external clock pulses input to the TI000 pin using 16-bit timer
counter 00 (TM00).
TM00 is incremented each time the valid edge specified by prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00) is input.
When the TM00 count value matches the 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000) value, TM00 is
cleared to 0 and the interrupt request signal (INTTM000) is generated.
Input a value other than 0000H to CR000 (a count operation with 1-bit pulse cannot be carried out).
Any of three edges⎯rising, falling, or both edges⎯can be selected using bits 4 and 5 (ES000 and ES001) of
prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00).
Sampling is performed using the internal clock (fPRS) and an operation is only performed when a valid level of the
TI000 pin is detected twice, thus eliminating noise with a short pulse width.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 181
Figure 6-33. Control Register Settings in External Event Counter Mode (with Rising Edge Specified)
(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
TMC003
1
TMC002
1
TMC001
0/1
OVF00
0
TMC00
Clears and starts on match between TM00 and CR000.
(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
CRC002
0/1
CRC001
0/1
CRC000
0CRC00
CR000 used as compare register
(c) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)
ES101
0/1
ES100
0/1
ES001
0
ES000
1
3
0
2
0
PRM001
1
PRM000
1PRM00
Selects external clock.
Specifies rising edge for pulse width detection.
Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)
Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with the external event counter.
See the description of the respective control registers for details.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
182
Figure 6-34. Configuration Diagram of External Event Counter
fPRS
Internal bus
16-bit timer capture/compare
register 000 (CR000)
Match
Clear
OVF00Note
Noise eliminator 16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00)
Valid edge of TI000 pin
INTTM000
Note OVF00 is set to 1 only when CR000 is set to FFFFH.
Figure 6-35. External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified)
TI000 pin input
TM00 count value
CR000
INTTM000
0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H 0005H
N – 1 N
0000H 0001H 0002H 0003H
N
Caution When reading the external event counter count value, TM00 should be read.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 183
6.4.5 Square-wave output operation
Setting
The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.
<1> Set the count clock by using the PRM0n register.
<2> Set the CRC0n register (see Figure 6-36 for the set value).
<3> Set the TOC0n register (see Figure 6-36 for the set value).
<4> Set any value to the CR00n register (0000H cannot be set).
<5> Set the TMC0n register to start the operation (see Figure 6-36 for the set value).
Caution CR00n cannot be rewritten during TM0n operation.
Remarks 1. For the setting of the TO0n pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0).
2. For how to enable the INTTM00n interrupt, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.
A square wave with any selected frequency can be output at intervals determined by the count value preset to 16-
bit timer capture/compare register 00n (CR00n).
The TO0n pin output status is reversed at intervals determined by the count value preset to CR00n + 1 by setting
bit 0 (TOE0n) and bit 1 (TOC0n1) of 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) to 1. This enables a square wave
with any selected frequency to be output.
Figure 6-36. Control Register Settings in Square-Wave Output Mode (1/2)
(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
TMC0n3
1
TMC0n2
1
TMC0n1
0
OVF0n
0TMC0n
Clears and starts on match between TM0n and CR00n.
(b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n)
7
0
6
0
5
0
4
0
3
0
CRC0n2
0/1
CRC0n1
0/1
CRC0n0
0CRC0n
CR00n used as compare register
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
184
Figure 6-36. Control Register Settings in Square-Wave Output Mode (2/2)
(c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n)
7
0
OSPT0n
0
OSPE0n
0
TOC0n4
0
LVS0n
0/1
LVR0n
0/1
TOC0n1
1
TOE0n
1TOC0n
Enables TO0n output.
Inverts output on match between TM0n and CR00n.
Specifies initial value of TO0n output F/F (setting “11” is prohibited).
Does not invert output on match between TM0n and CR01n.
Disables one-shot pulse output.
(d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n)
ES1n1
0/1
ES1n0
0/1
ES001
0/1
ES000
0/1
3
0
2
0
PRM0n1
0/1
PRM0n0
0/1PRM0n
Selects count clock.
Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)
Setting invalid (setting “10” is prohibited.)
Note Note
Note PRM00 only. Be sure to set to 0 in PRM01
Remark 0/1: Setting 0 or 1 allows another function to be used simultaneously with square-wave output. See the
description of the respective control registers for details.
n = 0, 1
Figure 6-37. Square-Wave Output Operation Timing
Count clock
TM0n count value
CR00n
INTTM00n
TO0n pin output
0000H 0001H 0002H
N – 1 N
0000H 0001H 0002H
N – 1 N
0000H
N
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 185
6.4.6 One-shot pulse output operation
16-bit timer/event counter 0n can output a one-shot pulse in synchronization with a software trigger or an external
trigger (TI000 pin input).
Setting
The basic operation setting procedure is as follows.
<1> Set the count clock by using the PRM0n register.
<2> Set the CRC0n register (see Figures 6-38 and 6-40 for the set value).
<3> Set the TOC0n register (see Figures 6-38 and 6-40 for the set value).
<4> Set any value to the CR00n and CR01n registers (0000H cannot be set).
<5> Set the TMC0n register to start the operation (see Figures 6-38 and 6-40 for the set value).
Remarks 1. For the setting of the TO0n pin, see 6.3 (5) Port mode register 0 (PM0) and (6) Port mode
register 3 (PM3).
2. For how to enable the INTTM00n (if necessary, INTTM01n) interrupt, see CHAPTER 16
INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.
(1) One-shot pulse output with software trigger
A one-shot pulse can be output from the TO0n pin by setting 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n),
capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n), and 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n) as shown in
Figure 6-38, and by setting bit 6 (OSPT0n) of the TOC0n register to 1 by software.
By setting the OSPT0n bit to 1, 16-bit timer/event counter 0n is cleared and started, and its output becomes
active at the count value (N) set in advance to 16-bit timer capture/compare register 01n (CR01n). After that, the
output becomes inactive at the count value (M) set in advance to 16-bit timer capture/compare register 00n
(CR00n)Note.
Even after the one-shot pulse has been output, the TM0n register continues its operation. To stop the TM0n
register, the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits of the TMC0n register must be set to 00.
Note The case where N < M is described here. When N > M, the output becomes active with the CR00n
register and inactive with the CR01n register. Do not set N to M.
Cautions 1. Do not set the OSPT0n bit while the one-shot pulse is being output. To output the one-
shot pulse again, wait until the current one-shot pulse output is completed.
2. When using the one-shot pulse output of 16-bit timer/event counter 0n with a software
trigger, do not change the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function port pin.
Because the external trigger is valid even in this case, the timer is cleared and started
even at the level of the TI000 pin or its alternate-function port pin, resulting in the output of
a pulse at an undesired timing.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
186
Figure 6-38. Control Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output with Software Trigger
(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n)
0000
7654
0
TMC0n3
TMC0n
TMC0n2 TMC0n1 OVF0n
Free-running mode
100
(b) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n)
00000
76543
CRC0n
CRC0n2 CRC0n1 CRC0n0
CR00n as compare register
CR01n as compare register
0 0/1 0
(c) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n)
0
7
0 1 1 0/1
TOC0n
LVR0nLVS0nTOC0n4OSPE0nOSPT0n TOC0n1 TOE0n
Enables TO0n output.
Inverts output upon match
between TM0n and CR00n.
Specifies initial value of
TO0n output F/F (setting “11” is prohibited.)
Inverts output upon match
between TM0n and CR01n.
Sets one-shot pulse output mode.
Set to 1 for output.
0/1 1 1
(d) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n)
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1 0
PRM0n
PRM0n1 PRM0n0
Selects count clock.
Setting invalid
(setting “10” is prohibited.)
0 0/1 0/1
ES1n1 ES1n0 ES001 ES000
Setting invalid
(setting “10” is prohibited.)
32
Note Note
Note PRM00 only. Be sure to set to 0 in PRM01
Caution Do not set 0000H to the CR00n and CR01n registers.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 187
Figure 6-39. Timing of One-Shot Pulse Output Operation with Software Trigger
0000H N
NN N N
MM M M
NMN + 1 N – 1 M – 1
0001H
M + 1 M + 2
0000H
Count clock
TM0n count
CR01n set value
CR00n set value
OSPT0n
INTTM01n
INTTM00n
TO0n pin output
Set TMC0n to 04H
(TM0n count starts)
Caution 16-bit timer counter 0n starts operating as soon as a value other than 00 (operation stop mode) is
set to the TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 bits.
Remark N < M
n = 0, 1
(2) One-shot pulse output with external trigger
This function is using for16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00) only.
A one-shot pulse can be output from the TO00 pin by setting 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00),
capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00), and 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00) as shown in
Figure 6-40, and by using the valid edge of the TI000 pin as an external trigger.
The valid edge of the TI000 pin is specified by bits 4 and 5 (ES000, ES001) of prescaler mode register 00
(PRM00). The rising, falling, or both the rising and falling edges can be specified.
When the valid edge of the TI000 pin is detected, the 16-bit timer/event counter is cleared and started, and the
output becomes active at the count value set in advance to 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010).
After that, the output becomes inactive at the count value set in advance to 16-bit timer capture/compare register
000 (CR000)Note.
Note The case where N < M is described here. When N > M, the output becomes active with the CR000
register and inactive with the CR010 register. Do not set N to M.
Caution Even if the external trigger is generated again while the one-shot pulse is output, it is ignored.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
188
Figure 6-40. Control Register Settings for One-Shot Pulse Output with External Trigger
(with Rising Edge Specified)
(a) 16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00)
0000
7654
1
TMC003
TMC00
TMC002 TMC001 OVF00
Clears and starts at
valid edge of TI000 pin.
000
(b) Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)
00000
76543
CRC00
CRC002 CRC001 CRC000
CR000 used as compare register
CR010 used as compare register
0 0/1 0
(c) 16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)
0
7
011 0/1
TOC00
LVR00 TOC001 TOE00OSPE00OSPT00 TOC004 LVS00
Enables TO00 output.
Inverts output upon match
between TM00 and CR000.
Specifies initial value of
TO00 output F/F (setting “11” is prohibited.)
Inverts output upon match
between TM00 and CR010.
Sets one-shot pulse output mode.
0/1 1 1
(d) Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)
0/1 0/1 0 1
PRM00
PRM001 PRM000
Selects count clock
(setting “11” is prohibited).
Specifies the rising edge
for pulse width detection.
0/1 0/1
ES101 ES100 ES001 ES000
Setting invalid
(setting “10” is prohibited.)
00
32
Caution Do not set the CR000 and CR010 registers to 0000H.
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 189
Figure 6-41. Timing of One-Shot Pulse Output Operation with External Trigger (with Rising Edge Specified)
0000H N
NN N N
MM M M
MN + 1 N + 2 M + 1 M + 2M – 2 M – 1
0001H
0000H
Count clock
TM00 count value
CR010 set value
CR000 set value
TI000 pin input
INTTM010
INTTM000
TO00 pin output
When TMC00 is set to 08H
(TM00 count starts)
t
Caution 16-bit timer counter 00 starts operating as soon as a value other than 00 (operation stop mode) is
set to the TMC002 and TMC003 bits.
Remark N < M
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
190
6.5 Special Use of TM0n
6.5.1 Rewriting CR01n during TM0n operation
In principle, rewriting CR00n and CR01n of the 78K0/FC2 when they are used as compare registers is prohibited
while TM0n is operating (TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 = other than 00).
However, the value of CR01n can be changed, even while TM0n is operating, using the following procedure if
CR01n is used for PPG output and the duty factor is changed (change the value of CR01n immediately after its value
matches the value of TM0n. If the value of CR01n is changed immediately before its value matches TM0n, an
unexpected operation may be performed).
Procedure for changing value of CR01n
<1> Disable interrupt INTTM01n (TMMK01n = 1).
<2> Disable reversal of the timer output when the value of TM0n matches that of CR01n (TOC0n4 = 0).
<3> Change the value of CR01n.
<4> Wait for one cycle of the count clock of TM0n.
<5> Enable reversal of the timer output when the value of TM0n matches that of CR01n (TOC0n4 = 1).
<6> Clear the interrupt flag of INTTM01n (TMIF01n = 0) to 0.
<7> Enable interrupt INTTM01n (TMMK01n = 0).
Remark For TMIF01n and TMMK01n, see CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS.
6.5.2 Setting LVS0n and LVR0n
(1) Usage of LVS0n and LVR0n
LVS0n and LVR0n are used to set the default value of the TO0n pin output and to invert the timer output without
enabling the timer operation (TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 = 00). Clear LVS0n and LVR0n to 00 (default value: low-
level output) when software control is unnecessary.
LVS0n LVR0n Timer Output Status
0 0 Not changed (low-level output)
0 1 Cleared (low-level output)
1 0 Set (high-level output)
1 1 Setting prohibited
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 191
(2) Setting LVS0n and LVR0n
Set LVS0n and LVR0n using the following procedure.
Figure 6-42. Example of Flow for Setting LVS0n and LVR0n Bits
Setting TOC0n.OSPE0n, TOC0n4, TOC0n1 bits
Setting TOC0n.TOE0n bit
Setting TOC0n.LVS0n, LVR0n bits
Setting TMC0n.TMC0n3, TMC0n2 bits <3> Enabling timer operation
<2> Setting of timer output F/F
<1> Setting of timer output operation
Caution Be sure to set LVS0n and LVR0n following steps <1>, <2>, and <3> above.
Step <2> can be performed after <1> and before <3>.
Figure 6-43. Timing Example of LVR0n and LVS0n
TOC0n.LVS0n bit
TOC0n.LVR0n bit
Operable bits
(TMC0n3, TMC0n2)
TO0n pin output
INTTM00n signal
<1>
00
<2> <1> <3> <4> <4> <4>
01, 10, or 11
<1> The TO0n pin output goes high when LVS0n and LVR0n = 10.
<2> The TO0n pin output goes low when LVS0n and LVR0n = 01 (the pin output remains unchanged from the
high level even if LVS0n and LVR0n are cleared to 00).
<3> The timer starts operating when TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 are set to 01, 10, or 11. Because LVS0n and
LVR0n were set to 10 before the operation was started, the TO0n pin output starts from the high level.
After the timer starts operating, setting LVS0n and LVR0n is prohibited until TMC0n3 and TMC0n2 = 00
(disabling the timer operation).
<4> The output level of the TO0n pin is inverted each time an interrupt signal (INTTM00n) is generated.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
192
6.6 Cautions for 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01
(1) Restrictions for each channel of 16-bit timer/event counter 0n
Table 6-5 shows the restrictions for each channel.
Table 6-5. Restrictions for Each Channel of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 0n
Operation Restriction
As interval timer
As square-wave output
As external event counter
−
As clear & start mode entered by
TI000 pin valid edge input
Using timer output (TO00) is prohibited when detection of the valid edge of the TI010 pin is
used. (TOC00 = 00H)
As free-running timer −
As PPG output 0000H ≤ CP01n < CR00n ≤ FFFFH
As one-shot pulse output Setting the same value to CR00n and CP01n is prohibited.
As pulse width measurement Using timer output (TO0n) is prohibited (TOC0n = 00H)
(2) Timer start errors
An error of up to one clock may occur in the time required for a match signal to be generated after timer start.
This is because counting TM0n is started asynchronously to the count pulse.
Figure 6-44. Start Timing of TM0n Count
0000H
Timer start
0001H 0002H 0003H 0004H
Count pulse
TM0n count value
(3) Setting of CR00n and CR01n (clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM0n and CR00n)
Set a value other than 0000H to CR00n and CR01n (TM0n cannot count one pulse when it is used as an external
event counter).
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 193
(4) Timing of holding data by capture register
(a) When the valid edge is input to the TI000/TI01n pin and the reverse phase of the TI000 pin is detected while
CR000/CR01n is read, CR01n performs a capture operation but the read value of CR000/CR01n is not
guaranteed. At this time, an interrupt signal (INTTM000/INTTM01n) is generated when the valid edge of the
TI000/TI01n pin is detected (the interrupt signal is not generated when the reverse-phase edge of the TI000
pin is detected).
When the count value is captured because the valid edge of the TI000/TI01n pin was detected, read the
value of CR000/CR01n after INTTM000/INTTM01n is generated.
Figure 6-45. Timing of Holding Data by Capture Register
N N + 1 N + 2
X N + 1
M M + 1 M + 2
Count pulse
TM0n count value
Edge input
INTTM01n
Value captured to CR01n
Capture read signal
Capture operation is performed
but read value is not guaranteed.
Capture operation
(b) The values of CR00n and CR01n are not guaranteed after 16-bit timer/event counter 0n stops.
(5) Setting valid edge
Set the valid edge of the TI000 pin while the timer operation is stopped (TMC003 and TMC002 = 00). Set the
valid edge by using ES000 and ES001.
(6) Re-triggering one-shot pulse
Make sure that the trigger is not generated while an active level is being output in the one-shot pulse output mode.
Be sure to input the next trigger after the current active level is output.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
194
(7) Operation of OVF0n flag
(a) Setting OVF0n flag (1)
The OVF0n flag is set to 1 in the following case, as well as when TM0n overflows.
Select the clear & start mode entered upon a match between TM0n and CR00n.
↓
Set CR00n to FFFFH.
↓
When TM0n matches CR00n and TM0n is cleared from FFFFH to 0000H
Figure 6-46. Operation Timing of OVF0n Flag
FFFEH
FFFFH
FFFFH 0000H 0001H
Count pulse
TM0n
INTTM00n
OVF0n
CR00n
(b) Clearing OVF0n flag
Even if the OVF0n flag is cleared to 0 after TM0n overflows and before the next count clock is counted
(before the value of TM0n becomes 0001H), it is set to 1 again and clearing is invalid.
(8) One-shot pulse output
One-shot pulse output operates correctly in the free-running timer mode or the clear & start mode entered by the
TI000 pin valid edge. The one-shot pulse cannot be output in the clear & start mode entered upon a match
between TM0n and CR00n.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 6 16-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 00 AND 01
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 195
(9) Capture operation
(a) When valid edge of TI000 is specified as count clock
When the valid edge of TI000 is specified as the count clock, the capture register for which TI000 is specified
as a trigger does not operate correctly.
(b) Pulse width to accurately capture value by signals input to TI01n and TI000 pins
To accurately capture the count value, the pulse input to the TI000 and TI01n pins as a capture trigger must
be wider than two count clocks selected by PRM0n (see Figure 6-10).
(c) Generation of interrupt signal
The capture operation is performed at the falling edge of the count clock but the interrupt signals (INTTM00n
and INTTM01n) are generated at the rising edge of the next count clock (see Figure 6-10).
(d) Note when CRC001 (bit 1 of capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)) is set to 1
When the count value of the TM00 register is captured to the CR000 register in the phase reverse to the
signal input to the TI000 pin, the interrupt signal (INTTM000) is not generated after the count value is
captured. If the valid edge is detected on the TI010 pin during this operation, the capture operation is not
performed but the INTTM000 signal is generated as an external interrupt signal. Mask the INTTM000 signal
when the external interrupt is not used.
(10) Edge detection
(a) Specifying valid edge after reset
If the operation of the 16-bit timer/event counter 0n is enabled after reset and while the TI000 or TI01n pin is
at high level and when the rising edge or both the edges are specified as the valid edge of the TI000 or TI01n
pin, then the high level of the TI000 or TI01n pin is detected as the rising edge. Note this when the TI000 or
TI01n pin is pulled up. However, the rising edge is not detected when the operation is once stopped and
then enabled again.
(b) Sampling clock for eliminating noise
The sampling clock for eliminating noise differs depending on whether the valid edge of TI000 is used as the
count clock or capture trigger. In the former case, the sampling clock is fixed to fPRS. In the latter, the count
clock selected by PRM00 is used for sampling.
When the signal input to the TI000 pin is sampled and the valid level is detected two times in a row, the valid
edge is detected. Therefore, noise having a short pulse width can be eliminated (see Figure 6-10).
(11) Timer operation
The signal input to the TI000/TI01n pin is not acknowledged while the timer is stopped, regardless of the
operation mode of the CPU.
Remarks 1. fPRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
2. n = 0, 1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
196
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
7.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51
8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51 have the following functions.
• Interval timer
• External event counter
• Square-wave output
• PWM output
Figures 7-1 and 7-2 show the block diagrams of 8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51.
Figure 7-1. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 50
Internal bus
8-bit timer compare
register 50 (CR50)
TI50/TO50/
P17
f
PRS
/2
2
f
PRS
/2
6
f
PRS
/2
8
f
PRS
/2
13
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
Match
Mask circuit
OVF
Clear
3
Selector
TCL502 TCL501 TCL500
Timer clock selection
register 50 (TCL50)
Internal bus
TCE50
TMC506
LVS50 LVR50
TMC501
TOE50
Invert
level
8-bit timer mode control
register 50 (TMC50)
S
R
SQ
R
INV
Selector
To TMH0
To UART0
To UART6
INTTM50
TO50/TI50/
P17
Note 1
Note 2
Selector
8-bit timer
counter 50 (TM50)
Selector
Output latch
(P17)
PM17
Notes 1. Timer output F/F
2. PWM output F/F
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 197
Figure 7-2. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counter 51
Internal bus
8-bit timer compare
register 51 (CR51)
TI51/TO51/P33/INTP4
fPRS/28
fPRS/212
fPRS
fPRS/2
Match
Mask circuit
OVF
Clear
3
Selector
TCL512 TCL511 TCL510
Timer clock selection
register 51 (TCL51)
Internal bus
TCE51
TMC516
LVS51 LVR51
TMC511
TOE51
Invert
level
8-bit timer mode control
register 51 (TMC51)
S
R
SQ
R
INV
Selector INTTM51
TO51/TI51/
P33/INTP4
Note 1
Note 2
Selector
8-bit timer
counter 51 (TM51)
Selector
Output latch
(P33)
PM33
fPRS/26
fPRS/24
Notes 1. Timer output F/F
2. PWM output F/F
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
198
7.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51
8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51 include the following hardware.
Table 7-1. Configuration of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51
Item Configuration
Timer register 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n)
Register 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n)
Timer input TI5n
Timer output TO5n
Control registers Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n)
8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n)
Port mode register 1 (PM1) or port mode register 3 (PM3)
Port register 1 (P1) or port register 3 (P3)
(1) 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n)
TM5n is an 8-bit register that counts the count pulses and is read-only.
The counter is incremented in synchronization with the rising edge of the count clock.
Figure 7-3. Format of 8-Bit Timer Counter 5n (TM5n)
Symbol
TM5n
(n = 0, 1)
Address: FF16H (TM50), FF1FH (TM51) After reset: 00H R
In the following situations, the count value is cleared to 00H.
<1> Reset signal generation
<2> When TCE5n is cleared
<3> When TM5n and CR5n match in the mode in which clear & start occurs upon a match of the TM5n and
CR5n.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 199
(2) 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n)
CR5n can be read and written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Except in PWM mode, the value set in CR5n is constantly compared with the 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) count
value, and an interrupt request (INTTM5n) is generated if they match.
In PWM mode, when the TO5n pin becomes active due to a TM5n overflow and the values of TM5n and CR5n
match, the TO5n pin becomes inactive.
The value of CR5n can be set within 00H to FFH.
Reset signal generation clears CR5n to 00H.
Figure 7-4. Format of 8-Bit Timer Compare Register 5n (CR5n)
Symbol
CR5n
(n = 0, 1)
Address: FF17H (CR50), FF41H (CR51) After reset: 00H R/W
Cautions 1. In the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM5n and CR5n (TMC5n6 = 0), do
not write other values to CR5n during operation.
2. In PWM mode, make the CR5n rewrite period 3 count clocks of the count clock (clock
selected by TCL5n) or more.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
200
7.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51
The following four registers are used to control 8-bit timer/event counters 50 and 51.
• Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n)
• 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n)
• Port mode register 1 (PM1) or port mode register 3 (PM3)
• Port register 1 (P1) or port register 3 (P3)
(1) Timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n)
This register sets the count clock of 8-bit timer/event counter 5n and the valid edge of the TI5n pin input.
TCL5n can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears TCL5n to 00H.
Remark n = 0, 1
Figure 7-5. Format of Timer Clock Selection Register 50 (TCL50)
Address: FF6AH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TCL50 0 0 0 0 0 TCL502 TCL501 TCL500
Count clock selection TCL502 TCL501 TCL500
fPRS = 4
MHz
fPRS = 8
MHz
fPRS = 10
MHz
fPRS = 20
MHz
0 0 0 TI50 pin falling edgeNote 1
0 0 1 TI50 pin rising edgeNote 2
0 1 0 fPRS 4 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
0 1 1 fPRS/2 2 MHz 4 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz
1 0 0 fPRS/22 1 MHz 2 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz
1 0 1 fPRS/26 62.5 kHz 125 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz
1 1 0 fPRS/28 15.62 kHz 31.25 kHz 39.06 kHz 78.13 kHz
1 1 1 fPRS/213 0.48 kHz 0.97 kHz 1.22 kHz 2.44 kHz
Notes 1. In the on-board mode, the FLMD0 pin falling edge is selected.
2. In the on-board mode, the FLMD0 pin rising edge is selected.
Cautions 1. When rewriting TCL50 to other data, stop the timer operation beforehand.
2. Be sure to set bits 3 to 7 to 0.
Remark f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 201
Figure 7-6. Format of Timer Clock Selection Register 51 (TCL51)
Address: FF8CH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TCL51 0 0 0 0 0 TCL512 TCL511 TCL510
Count clock selection TCL512 TCL511 TCL510
fPRS = 4
MHz
fPRS = 8
MHz
fPRS = 10
MHz
fPRS = 20
MHz
0 0 0 TI51 pin falling edge
0 0 1 TI51 pin rising edge
0 1 0 fPRS 4 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
0 1 1 fPRS/2 2 MHz 4 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz
1 0 0 fPRS/24 500 kHz 1 MHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz
1 0 1 fPRS/26 62.5 kHz 125 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz
1 1 0 fPRS/28 15.62 kHz 31.25 kHz 39.06 kHz 78.13 kHz
1 1 1 fPRS/212 0.97 kHz 1.95 kHz 2.44 kHz 4.88 kHz
Cautions 1. When rewriting TCL51 to other data, stop the timer operation beforehand.
2. Be sure to set bits 3 to 7 to 0.
Remark f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
202
(2) 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n)
TMC5n is a register that performs the following five types of settings.
<1> 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) count operation control
<2> 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) operating mode selection
<3> Timer output F/F (flip flop) status setting
<4> Active level selection in timer F/F control or PWM (free-running) mode.
<5> Timer output control
TMC5n can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Remark n = 0, 1
Figure 7-7. Format of 8-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 50 (TMC50)
Address: FF6BH After reset: 00H R/WNote
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
TMC50 TCE50 TMC506 0 0 LVS50 LVR50 TMC501 TOE50
TCE50 TM50 count operation control
0 After clearing to 0, count operation disabled (counter stopped)
1 Count operation start
TMC506 TM50 operating mode selection
0 Mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM50 and CR50
1 PWM (free-running) mode
LVS50 LVR50 Timer output F/F status setting
0 0 No change
0 1 Timer output F/F reset (0)
1 0 Timer output F/F set (1)
1 1 Setting prohibited
In other modes (TMC506 = 0) In PWM mode (TMC506 = 1) TMC501
Timer F/F control Active level selection
0 Inversion operation disabled Active-high
1 Inversion operation enabled Active-low
TOE50 Timer output control
0 Output disabled (TM50 output is low level)
1 Output enabled
Note Bits 2 and 3 are write-only.
(Refer to Cautions and Remarks on the next page.)
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 203
Figure 7-8. Format of 8-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 51 (TMC51)
Address: FF43H After reset: 00H R/WNote
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 <3> <2> 1 <0>
TMC51 TCE51 TMC516 0 0 LVS51 LVR51 TMC511 TOE51
TCE51 TM51 count operation control
0 After clearing to 0, count operation disabled (counter stopped)
1 Count operation start
TMC516 TM51 operating mode selection
0 Mode in which clear & start occurs on a match between TM51 and CR51
1 PWM (free-running) mode
LVS51 LVR51 Timer output F/F status setting
0 0 No change
0 1 Timer output F/F reset (0)
1 0 Timer output F/F set (1)
1 1 Setting prohibited
In other modes (TMC516 = 0) In PWM mode (TMC516 = 1) TMC511
Timer F/F control Active level selection
0 Inversion operation disabled Active-high
1 Inversion operation enabled Active-low
TOE51 Timer output control
0 Output disabled (TM51 output is low level)
1 Output enabled
Note Bits 2 and 3 are write-only.
Cautions 1. The settings of LVS5n and LVR5n are valid in other than PWM mode.
2. Perform <1> to <4> below in the following order, not at the same time.
<1> Set TMC5n1, TMC5n6: Operation mode setting
<2> Set TOE5n to enable output: Timer output enable
<3> Set LVS5n, LVR5n (see Caution 1): Timer F/F setting
<4> Set TCE5n
3. Stop operation before rewriting TMC5n6.
Remarks 1. In PWM mode, PWM output is made inactive by clearing TCE5n to 0.
2. If LVS5n and LVR5n are read, the value is 0.
3. The values of the TMC5n6, LVS5n, LVR5n, TMC5n1, and TOE5n bits are reflected at the TO5n pin
regardless of the value of TCE5n.
4. n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
204
(3) Port mode registers 1 and 3 (PM1, PM3)
These registers set port 1 and 3 input/output in 1-bit units.
When using the P17/TO50/TI50 and P33/TO51/TI51/INTP4 pins for timer output, clear PM17 and PM33 and the
output latches of P17 and P33 to 0.
When using the P17/TO50/TI50 and P33/TO51/TI51/INTP4 pins for timer input, set PM17 and PM33 to 1. The
output latches of P17 and P33 at this time may be 0 or 1.
PM1 and PM3 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH.
Figure 7-9. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1)
Address: FF21H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10
PM1n P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7)
0 Output mode (output buffer on)
1 Input mode (output buffer off)
Figure 7-10. Format of Port Mode Register 3 (PM3)
Address: FF23H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PM3 1 1 1 1 PM33 PM32 PM31 PM30
PM3n P3n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 3)
0 Output mode (output buffer on)
1 Input mode (output buffer off)
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 205
7.4 Operations of 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51
7.4.1 Operation as interval timer
8-bit timer/event counter 5n operates as an interval timer that generates interrupt requests repeatedly at intervals
of the count value preset to 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n).
When the count value of 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n) matches the value set to CR5n, counting continues with the
TM5n value cleared to 0 and an interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) is generated.
The count clock of TM5n can be selected with bits 0 to 2 (TCL5n0 to TCL5n2) of timer clock selection register 5n
(TCL5n).
Setting
<1> Set the registers.
• TCL5n: Select the count clock.
• CR5n: Compare value
• TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM5n
and CR5n.
(TMC5n = 0000×××0B × = Don’t care)
<2> After TCE5n = 1 is set, the count operation starts.
<3> If the values of TM5n and CR5n match, INTTM5n is generated (TM5n is cleared to 00H).
<4> INTTM5n is generated repeatedly at the same interval.
Set TCE5n to 0 to stop the count operation.
Caution Do not write other values to CR5n during operation.
Figure 7-11. Interval Timer Operation Timing (1/2)
(a) Basic operation
t
Count clock
TM5n count value
CR5n
TCE5n
INTTM5n
Count start Clear Clear
00H 01H N 00H 01H N 00H 01H N
NNNN
Interrupt acknowledged Interrupt acknowledged
Interval timeInterval time
Remark Interval time = (N + 1) × t
N = 00H to FFH
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
206
Figure 7-11. Interval Timer Operation Timing (2/2)
(b) When CR5n = 00H
t
Interval time
Count clock
TM5n
CR5n
TCE5n
INTTM5n
00H 00H 00H
00H 00H
(c) When CR5n = FFH
t
Count clock
TM5n
CR5n
TCE5n
INTTM5n
01 FE FF 00 FE FF 00
FFFFFF
Interval time
Interrupt
acknowledged
Interrupt acknowledged
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 207
7.4.2 Operation as external event counter
The external event counter counts the number of external clock pulses to be input to the TI5n pin by 8-bit timer
counter 5n (TM5n).
TM5n is incremented each time the valid edge specified by timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n) is input.
Either the rising or falling edge can be selected.
When the TM5n count value matches the value of 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n), TM5n is cleared to 0
and an interrupt request signal (INTTM5n) is generated.
Whenever the TM5n value matches the value of CR5n, INTTM5n is generated.
Setting
<1> Set each register.
• Set the port mode register (PM17 or PM33)Note to 1.
• TCL5n: Select TI5n pin input edge.
TI5n pin falling edge → TCL5n = 00H
TI5n pin rising edge → TCL5n = 01H
• CR5n: Compare value
• TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select the mode in which clear & start occurs on match of TM5n and
CR5n, disable the timer F/F inversion operation, disable timer output.
(TMC5n = 0000××00B × = Don’t care)
<2> When TCE5n = 1 is set, the number of pulses input from the TI5n pin is counted.
<3> When the values of TM5n and CR5n match, INTTM5n is generated (TM5n is cleared to 00H).
<4> After these settings, INTTM5n is generated each time the values of TM5n and CR5n match.
Note 8-bit timer/event counter 50: PM17
8-bit timer/event counter 51: PM33
Figure 7-12. External Event Counter Operation Timing (with Rising Edge Specified)
TI5n
TM5n count value
CR5n
INTTM5n
00 01 02 03 04 05 N – 1 N 00 01 02 03
N
Count start
Remark N = 00H to FFH
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
208
7.4.3 Square-wave output operation
A square wave with any selected frequency is output at intervals determined by the value preset to 8-bit timer
compare register 5n (CR5n).
The TO5n pin output status is inverted at intervals determined by the count value preset to CR5n by setting bit 0
(TOE5n) of 8-bit timer mode control register 5n (TMC5n) to 1. This enables a square wave with any selected
frequency to be output (duty = 50%).
Setting
<1> Set each register.
• Clear the port output latch (P17 or P33)Note and port mode register (PM17 or PM33)Note to 0.
• TCL5n: Select the count clock.
• CR5n: Compare value
• TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select the mode in which clear & start occurs on a match of TM5n and
CR5n.
LVS5n LVR5n Timer Output F/F Status Setting
1 0 High-level output
0 1 Low-level output
Timer output F/F inversion enabled
Timer output enabled
(TMC5n = 00001011B or 00000111B)
<2> After TCE5n = 1 is set, the count operation starts.
<3> The timer output F/F is inverted by a match of TM5n and CR5n. After INTTM5n is generated, TM5n is
cleared to 00H.
<4> After these settings, the timer output F/F is inverted at the same interval and a square wave is output from
TO5n.
The frequency is as follows.
Frequency = 1/2t (N + 1)
(N: 00H to FFH)
Note 8-bit timer/event counter 50: P17, PM17
8-bit timer/event counter 51: P33, PM33
Caution Do not write other values to CR5n during operation.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 209
Figure 7-13. Square-Wave Output Operation Timing
Count clock
TM5n count value 00H 01H 02H N − 1N
N
00H N − 1 N 00H01H 02H
CR5n
TO5n
Note
t
Count start
Note The initial value of TO5n output can be set by bits 2 and 3 (LVR5n, LVS5n) of 8-bit timer mode control
register 5n (TMC5n).
7.4.4 PWM output operation
8-bit timer/event counter 5n operates as a PWM output when bit 6 (TMC5n6) of 8-bit timer mode control register 5n
(TMC5n) is set to 1.
The duty pulse determined by the value set to 8-bit timer compare register 5n (CR5n) is output from TO5n.
Set the active level width of the PWM pulse to CR5n; the active level can be selected with bit 1 (TMC5n1) of
TMC5n.
The count clock can be selected with bits 0 to 2 (TCL5n0 to TCL5n2) of timer clock selection register 5n (TCL5n).
PWM output can be enabled/disabled with bit 0 (TOE5n) of TMC5n.
Caution In PWM mode, make the CR5n rewrite period 3 count clocks of the count clock (clock selected
by TCL5n) or more.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
210
(1) PWM output basic operation
Setting
<1> Set each register.
• Clear the port output latch (P17 or P33)Note and port mode register (PM17 or PM33)Note to 0.
• TCL5n: Select the count clock.
• CR5n: Compare value
• TMC5n: Stop the count operation, select PWM mode.
The timer output F/F is not changed.
TMC5n1 Active Level Selection
0 Active-high
1 Active-low
Timer output enabled
(TMC5n = 01000001B or 01000011B)
<2> The count operation starts when TCE5n = 1.
Clear TCE5n to 0 to stop the count operation.
Note 8-bit timer/event counter 50: P17, PM17
8-bit timer/event counter 51: P33, PM33
PWM output operation
<1> PWM output (output from TO5n) outputs an inactive level until an overflow occurs.
<2> When an overflow occurs, the active level is output. The active level is output until CR5n matches the
count value of 8-bit timer counter 5n (TM5n).
<3> After the CR5n matches the count value, the inactive level is output until an overflow occurs again.
<4> Operations <2> and <3> are repeated until the count operation stops.
<5> When the count operation is stopped with TCE5n = 0, PWM output becomes inactive.
For details of timing, see Figures 7-14 and 7-15.
The cycle, active-level width, and duty are as follows.
• Cycle = 28t
• Active-level width = Nt
• Duty = N/28
(N = 00H to FFH)
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 211
Figure 7-14. PWM Output Operation Timing
(a) Basic operation (active level = H)
Count clock
TM5n
CR5n
TCE5n
INTTM5n
TO5n
00H 01H FFH 00H 01H 02H
N
N + 1
FFH 00H 01H 02H
M
00H
N
<2> Active level
<1> <3> Inactive level Active level
<5>
t
(b) CR5n = 00H
Count clock
TM5n
CR5n
TCE5n
INTTM5n
TO5n
Inactive level Inactive level
01H00H FFH 00H 01H 02H
N
N + 1
FFH 00H 01H 02H
M
00H
00H
N + 2
L
t
(c) CR5n = FFH
TM5n
CR5n
TCE5n
INTTM5n
TO5n
01H00H FFH 00H 01H 02H
N
N + 1
FFH 00H 01H 02H
M
00H
FFH
N + 2
Inactive level Active level
Inactive level
Active level Inactive level
t
Remarks 1. <1> to <3> and <5> in Figure 7-14 (a) correspond to <1> to <3> and <5> in PWM output operation in
7. 4. 4 (1) PWM output basic operation.
2. n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
212
(2) Operation with CR5n changed
Figure 7-15. Timing of Operation with CR5n Changed
(a) CR5n value is changed from N to M before clock rising edge of FFH
→ Value is transferred to CR5n at overflow immediately after change.
Count clock
TM5n
CR5n
TCE5n
INTTM5n
TO5n
<1> CR5n change (N → M)
N
N + 1 N + 2
FFH 00H 01H
M
M + 1 M + 2
FFH 00H 01H 02H
M
M + 1 M + 2
N
02H
M
H
<2>
t
(b) CR5n value is changed from N to M after clock rising edge of FFH
→ Value is transferred to CR5n at second overflow.
Count clock
TM5n
CR5n
TCE5n
INTTM5n
TO5n
N
N + 1 N + 2
FFH 00H 01H
N
N + 1 N + 2
FFH 00H 01H 02H
N
02H
N
H
M
M
M + 1 M + 2
<1> CR5n change (N → M) <2>
t
Caution When reading from CR5n between <1> and <2> in Figure 7-15, the value read differs from the
actual value (read value: M, actual value of CR5n: N).
CHAPTER 7 8-BIT TIMER/EVENT COUNTERS 50 AND 51
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 213
7.5 Cautions for 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51
(1) Timer start error
An error of up to one clock may occur in the time required for a match signal to be generated after timer start.
This is because 8-bit timer counters 50 and 51 (TM50, TM51) are started asynchronously to the count clock.
Figure 7-16. 8-Bit Timer Counter 5n Start Timing
Count clock
TM5n count value 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H
Timer start
Remark n = 0, 1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
214
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
8.1 Functions of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1
8-bit timers H0 and H1 have the following functions.
• Interval timer
• PWM output mode
• Square-wave output
• Carrier generator mode (8-bit timer H1 only)
8.2 Configuration of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1
8-bit timers H0 and H1 include the following hardware.
Table 8-1. Configuration of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1
Item Configuration
Timer register 8-bit timer counter Hn
Registers 8-bit timer H compare register 0n (CMP0n)
8-bit timer H compare register 1n (CMP1n)
Timer output TOHn
Control registers 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn)
8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)Note
Port mode register 1 (PM1)
Port register 1 (P1)
Note 8-bit timer H1 only
Remark n = 0, 1
Figures 8-1 and 8-2 show the block diagrams.
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 215
Figure 8-1. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer H0
TMHE0
CKS02
CKS01
CKS00
TMMD01 TMMD00
TOLEV0
TOEN0
TOH0/P15
INTTMH0
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
f
PRS
/2
2
f
PRS
/2
6
f
PRS
/2
10
1
0
F/F
R
32
PM15
Match
Internal bus
8-bit timer H mode register 0
(TMHMD0)
8-bit timer H
compare register
10 (CMP10)
Decoder
Selector
Interrupt
generator
Output
controller
Level
inversion
PWM mode signal
Timer H enable signal
Clear
8-bit timer H
compare register
00 (CMP00)
Output latch
(P15)
8-bit timer/
event counter 50
output
Selector
8-bit timer
counter H0
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
216
Figure 8-2. Block Diagram of 8-Bit Timer H1
Match
Internal bus
TMHE1
CKS12
CKS11
CKS10
TMMD11 TMMD10
TOLEV1
TOEN1
8-bit timer H
compare
register 11
(CMP11)
Decoder
TOH1/
INTP5/
P16
8-bit timer H carrier
control register 1
(TMCYC1)
INTTMH1
INTTM51
Selector
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
2
f
PRS
/2
4
f
PRS
/2
6
f
PRS
/2
12
f
RL
f
RL
/2
7
f
RL
/2
9
Interrupt
generator
Output
controller
Level
inversion
PM16
Output latch
(P16)
1
0
F/F
R
PWM mode signal
Carrier generator mode signal
Timer H enable signal
3 2
8-bit timer H
compare
register 01
(CMP01)
8-bit timer
counter H1
Clear
RMC1
NRZB1
NRZ1
Reload/
interrupt control
8-bit timer H mode
register 1 (TMHMD1)
Selector
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 217
(1) 8-bit timer H compare register 0n (CMP0n)
This register can be read or written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. This register is used in all of the
timer operation modes.
This register constantly compares the value set to CMP0n with the count value of the 8-bit timer counter Hn and,
when the two values match, generates an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) and inverts the output level of
TOHn.
Rewrite the value of CMP0n while the timer is stopped (TMHEn = 0).
A reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 8-3. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Compare Register 0n (CMP0n)
Symbol
CMP0n
(n = 0, 1)
Address: FF02H (CMP00), FF1AH (CMP01) After reset: 00H R/W
765432 1 0
Caution CMP0n cannot be rewritten during timer count operation. CMP0n can be refreshed (the same
value is written) during timer count operation.
(2) 8-bit timer H compare register 1n (CMP1n)
This register can be read or written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. This register is used in the
PWM output mode and carrier generator mode.
In the PWM output mode, this register constantly compares the value set to CMP1n with the count value of the 8-
bit timer counter Hn and, when the two values match, inverts the output level of TOHn. No interrupt request
signal is generated.
In the carrier generator mode, the CMP1n register always compares the value set to CMP1n with the count value
of the 8-bit timer counter Hn and, when the two values match, generates an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn).
At the same time, the count value is cleared.
CMP1n can be refreshed (the same value is written) and rewritten during timer count operation.
If the value of CMP1n is rewritten while the timer is operating, the new value is latched and transferred to CMP1n
when the count value of the timer matches the old value of CMP1n, and then the value of CMP1n is changed to
the new value. If matching of the count value and the CMP1n value and writing a value to CMP1n conflict, the
value of CMP1n is not changed.
A reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 8-4. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Compare Register 1n (CMP1n)
Symbol
CMP1n
(n = 0, 1)
Address: FF0EH (CMP10), FF1BH (CMP11) After reset: 00H R/W
765432 1 0
Caution In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set CMP1n when starting the
timer count operation (TMHEn = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHEn = 0)
(be sure to set again even if setting the same value to CMP1n).
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
218
8.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1
The following four registers are used to control 8-bit timers H0 and H1.
• 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn)
• 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)Note
• Port mode register 1 (PM1)
• Port register 1 (P1)
Note 8-bit timer H1 only
(1) 8-bit timer H mode register n (TMHMDn)
This register controls the mode of timer H.
This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 219
Figure 8-5. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 0 (TMHMD0)
Address: FF69H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0>
TMHMD0 TMHE0 CKS02 CKS01 CKS00 TMMD01 TMMD00 TOLEV0 TOEN0
TMHE0 Timer operation enable
0 Stops timer count operation (Counter is cleared to 0)
1 Enables timer count operation (Count operation started by inputting clock)
Count clock selection CKS02 CKS01 CKS00
fPRS = 4
MHz
fPRS = 8
MHz
fPRS = 10
MHz
fPRS = 20
MHz
0 0 0 fPRS 4 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
0 0 1 fPRS/2 2 MHz 4 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz
0 1 0 fPRS/22 1 MHz 2 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz
0 1 1 fPRS/26 62.5 kHz 125 kHz
156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz
1 0 0 fPRS/210 3.90 kHz 7.81 kHz 9.77 kHz
19.54 kHz
1 0 1 TM50 outputNote
Other than above Setting prohibited
TMMD01 TMMD00 Timer operation mode
0 0 Interval timer mode
1 0 PWM output mode
Other than above Setting prohibited
TOLEV0 Timer output level control (in default mode)
0 Low level
1 High level
TOEN0 Timer output control
0 Disables output
1 Enables output
Note When TM50 output as the count clock.
• Set to PWM mode (TMC506 = 1) after the following order to bellow.
<1>Set the count clock to make the duty = 50%.
<2>Start the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 50.
• Set to Mode in which the count clock is cleared and started upon a match of TM50 and CR50 (TMC506 =
0) after the following order to bellow.
<1>Enable the timer F/F inversion operation (TMC501 = 1).
<2>Start the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 50.
It is not necessary to enable the TO50 pin as a timer output pin in any mode.
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
220
Cautions 1. When TMHE0 = 1, setting the other bits of TMHMD0 is prohibited. However, TMHMD0 can be
refreshed (the same value is written).
2. In the PWM output mode, be sure to set 8-bit timer H compare register 10 (CMP10) when
starting the timer count operation (TMHE0 = 1) after the timer count operation was stopped
(TMHE0 = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to CMP10).
Remarks 1. f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
2. TMC506: Bit 6 of 8-bit timer mode control register 50 (TMC50)
TMC501: Bit 1 of TMC50
Figure 8-6. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 1 (TMHMD1)
Address: FFFAH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0>
TMHMD1 TMHE1 CKS12 CKS11 CKS10 TMMD11 TMMD10 TOLEV1 TOEN1
TMHE1 Timer operation enable
0 Stops timer count operation (Counter is cleared to 0)
1 Enables timer count operation (Count operation started by inputting clock)
Count clock selection CKS12 CKS11 CKS10
fPRS = 4
MHz
fPRS = 8
MHz
fPRS = 10
MHz
fPRS = 20
MHz
0 0 0 fPRS 4 MHz 8 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
0 0 1 fPRS/22 1 MHz 2 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz
0 1 0 fPRS/24 500 kHz 1 MHz 625 kHz
1.25 MHz
0 1 1 fPRS/26 62.5 kHz 125 kHz
156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz
1 0 0 fPRS/212 0.97 kHz 1.95 kHz 2.44 kHz 4.88 kHz
1 0 1 fRL/27 1.88 kHz (TYP.)
1 1 0 fRL/29 0.47 kHz (TYP.)
1 1 1 fRL 240 kHz (TYP.)
TMMD11 TMMD10 Timer operation mode
0 0 Interval timer mode
0 1 Carrier generator mode
1 0 PWM output mode
1 1 Setting prohibited
TOLEV1 Timer output level control (in default mode)
0 Low level
1 High level
TOEN1 Timer output control
0 Disables output
1 Enables output
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 221
Cautions 1. When TMHE1 = 1, setting the other bits of TMHMD1 is prohibited. However, TMHMD1 can be
refreshed (the same value is written).
2. In the PWM output mode and carrier generator mode, be sure to set 8-bit timer H compare
register 11 (CMP11) when starting the timer count operation (TMHE1 = 1) after the timer count
operation was stopped (TMHE1 = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the same value to
CMP11).
3. When the carrier generator mode is used, set so that the count clock frequency of TMH1
becomes more than 6 times the count clock frequency of TM51.
Remarks 1. f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
2. f
RL: Internal low-speed oscillation clock frequency
(2) 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)
This register controls the remote control output and carrier pulse output status of 8-bit timer H1.
This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 8-7. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Carrier Control Register 1 (TMCYC1)
0TMCYC1 0 0 0 0 RMC1 NRZB1 NRZ1
Address: FFEEH After reset: 00H R/WNote
Low-level output
High-level output at rising edge of INTTM51 signal input
Low-level output
Carrier pulse output at rising edge of INTTM51 signal input
RMC1
0
0
1
1
NRZB1
0
1
0
1
Remote control output
Carrier output disabled status (low-level status)
Carrier output enabled status
(RMC1 = 1: Carrier pulse output, RMC1 = 0: High-level status)
NRZ1
0
1
Carrier pulse output status flag
<0>
Note Bit 0 is read-only.
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
222
(3) Port mode register 1 (PM1)
This register sets port 1 input/output in 1-bit units.
When using the P15/TOH0 and P16/TOH1/INTP5 pins for timer output, clear PM15 and PM16 and the output
latches of P15 and P16 to 0.
PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH.
Figure 8-8. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1)
Address: FF21H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10
PM1n P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7)
0 Output mode (output buffer on)
1 Input mode (output buffer off)
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 223
8.4 Operation of 8-Bit Timers H0 and H1
8.4.1 Operation as interval timer/square-wave output
When 8-bit timer counter Hn and compare register 0n (CMP0n) match, an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is
generated and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H.
Compare register 1n (CMP1n) is not used in interval timer mode. Since a match of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the
CMP1n register is not detected even if the CMP1n register is set, timer output is not affected.
By setting bit 0 (TOENn) of timer H mode register n (TMHMDn) to 1, a square wave of any frequency (duty = 50%)
is output from TOHn.
(1) Usage
Generates the INTTMHn signal repeatedly at the same interval.
<1> Set each register.
Figure 8-9. Register Setting During Interval Timer/Square-Wave Output Operation
(i) Setting timer H mode register n (TMHMDn)
0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0 0 0/1 0/1
TMMDn0 TOLEVn TOENnCKSn1CKSn2TMHEn
TMHMDn
CKSn0 TMMDn1
Timer output setting
Timer output level inversion setting
Interval timer mode setting
Count clock (f
CNT
) selection
Count operation stopped
(ii) CMP0n register setting
• Compare value (N)
<2> Count operation starts when TMHEn = 1.
<3> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the INTTMHn signal is generated
and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 00H.
Interval time = (N +1)/fCNT
<4> Subsequently, the INTTMHn signal is generated at the same interval. To stop the count operation, clear
TMHEn to 0.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
224
(2) Timing chart
The timing of the interval timer/square-wave output operation is shown below.
Figure 8-10. Timing of Interval Timer/Square-Wave Output Operation (1/2)
(a) Basic operation
00H
Count clock
Count start
8-bit timer counter Hn
CMP0n
TMHEn
INTTMHn
TOHn
01H N
Clear
Interval time
Clear
N
00H 01H N 00H 01H 00H
<2>
Level inversion,
match interrupt occurrence,
8-bit timer counter Hn clear
<2>
Level inversion,
match interrupt occurrence,
8-bit timer counter Hn clear
<3><1>
<1> The count operation is enabled by setting the TMHEn bit to 1. The count clock starts counting no more than
1 clock after the operation is enabled.
<2> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn
is cleared, the TOHn output level is inverted, and the INTTMHn signal is output.
<3> The INTTMHn signal and TOHn output become inactive by clearing the TMHEn bit to 0 during timer Hn
operation. If these are inactive from the first, the level is retained.
Remark n = 0, 1
N = 01H to FEH
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 225
Figure 8-10. Timing of Interval Timer/Square-Wave Output Operation (2/2)
(b) Operation when CMP0n = FFH
00H
Count clock
Count start
8-bit timer counter Hn
CMP0n
TMHEn
INTTMHn
TOHn
01H FEH
Clear
Clear
FFH 00H FEH FFH 00H
FFH
Interval time
(c) Operation when CMP0n = 00H
Count clock
Count start
8-bit timer counter Hn
CMP0n
TMHEn
INTTMHn
TOHn
00H
00H
Interval time
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
226
8.4.2 Operation as PWM output mode
In PWM output mode, a pulse with an arbitrary duty and arbitrary cycle can be output.
8-bit timer compare register 0n (CMP0n) controls the cycle of timer output (TOHn). Rewriting the CMP0n register
during timer operation is prohibited.
8-bit timer compare register 1n (CMP1n) controls the duty of timer output (TOHn). Rewriting the CMP1n register
during timer operation is possible.
The operation in PWM output mode is as follows.
TOHn output becomes active and 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared to 0 when 8-bit timer counter Hn and the
CMP0n register match after the timer count is started. TOHn output becomes inactive when 8-bit timer counter Hn
and the CMP1n register match.
(1) Usage
In PWM output mode, a pulse for which an arbitrary duty and arbitrary cycle can be set is output.
<1> Set each register.
Figure 8-11. Register Setting in PWM Output Mode
(i) Setting timer H mode register n (TMHMDn)
0 0/1 0/1 0/1 1 0 0/1 1
TMMDn0 TOLEVn TOENnCKSn1CKSn2TMHEn
TMHMDn
CKSn0 TMMDn1
Timer output enabled
Timer output level inversion setting
PWM output mode selection
Count clock (f
CNT
) selection
Count operation stopped
(ii) Setting CMP0n register
• Compare value (N): Cycle setting
(iii) Setting CMP1n register
• Compare value (M): Duty setting
Remarks 1. n = 0, 1
2. 00H ≤ CMP1n (M) < CMP0n (N) ≤ FFH
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 227
<2> The count operation starts when TMHEn = 1.
<3> The CMP0n register is the compare register that is to be compared first after counter operation is enabled.
When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared,
an interrupt request signal (INTTMHn) is generated, and TOHn output becomes active. At the same time,
the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn is changed from the CMP0n register to the
CMP1n register.
<4> When 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register match, TOHn output becomes inactive and the
compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer counter Hn is changed from the CMP1n register to the
CMP0n register. At this time, 8-bit timer counter Hn is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not
generated.
<5> By performing procedures <3> and <4> repeatedly, a pulse with an arbitrary duty can be obtained.
<6> To stop the count operation, set TMHEn = 0.
If the setting value of the CMP0n register is N, the setting value of the CMP1n register is M, and the count clock
frequency is fCNT, the PWM pulse output cycle and duty are as follows.
PWM pulse output cycle = (N + 1)/fCNT
Duty = Active width : Total width of PWM = (M + 1) : (N + 1)
Cautions 1. In PWM output mode, three operation clocks (signal selected using the CKSn2 to CKSn0
bits of the TMHMDn register) are required to transfer the CMP1n register value after
rewriting the register.
2. Be sure to set the CMP1n register when starting the timer count operation (TMHEn = 1) after
the timer count operation was stopped (TMHEn = 0) (be sure to set again even if setting the
same value to the CMP1n register).
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
228
(2) Timing chart
The operation timing in PWM output mode is shown below.
Caution Make sure that the CMP1n register setting value (M) and CMP0n register setting value (N) are
within the following range.
00H ≤ CMP1n (M) < CMP0n (N) ≤ FFH
Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (1/4)
(a) Basic operation
Count clock
8-bit timer counter Hn
CMP0n
TMHEn
INTTMHn
TOHn
(TOLEVn = 0)
TOHn
(TOLEVn = 1)
00H 01H A5H 00H 01H 02H A5H 00H A5H 00H01H 02H
CMP1n
A5H
01H
<1> <2> <3> <4>
<1> The count operation is enabled by setting the TMHEn bit to 1. Start 8-bit timer counter Hn by masking one
count clock to count up. At this time, TOHn output remains inactive (when TOLEVn = 0).
<2> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the TOHn output level is inverted,
the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn is cleared, and the INTTMHn signal is output.
<3> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register match, the level of the TOHn output is
returned. At this time, the 8-bit timer counter value is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not output.
<4> Clearing the TMHEn bit to 0 during timer Hn operation makes the INTTMHn signal and TOHn output inactive.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 229
Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (2/4)
(b) Operation when CMP0n = FFH, CMP1n = 00H
Count clock
8-bit timer counter Hn
CMP0n
TMHEn
INTTMHn
TOHn
(TOLEVn = 0)
00H 01H FFH 00H 01H 02H FFH 00H FFH 00H01H 02H
CMP1n
FFH
00H
(c) Operation when CMP0n = FFH, CMP1n = FEH
Count clock
8-bit timer counter Hn
CMP0n
TMHEn
INTTMHn
TOHn
(TOLEVn = 0)
00H 01H FEH FFH 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H 01H FEH FFH 00H
CMP1n
FFH
FEH
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
230
Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (3/4)
(d) Operation when CMP0n = 01H, CMP1n = 00H
Count clock
8-bit timer counter Hn
CMP0n
TMHEn
INTTMHn
TOHn
(TOLEVn = 0)
01H
00H 01H 00H 01H 00H 00H 01H 00H 01H
CMP1n 00H
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 231
Figure 8-12. Operation Timing in PWM Output Mode (4/4)
(e) Operation by changing CMP1n (CMP1n = 01H → 03H, CMP0n = A5H)
Count clock
8-bit timer counter Hn
CMP0n
TMHEn
INTTMHn
TOHn
(TOLEVn = 0)
00H 01H 02H A5H 00H 01H 02H 03H A5H 00H 01H 02H 03H A5H 00H
CMP1n 01H
A5H
03H01H (03H)
<1> <3> <4>
<2> <2>'
<5> <6>
<1> The count operation is enabled by setting TMHEn = 1. Start 8-bit timer counter Hn by masking one count
clock to count up. At this time, the TOHn output remains inactive (when TOLEVn = 0).
<2> The CMP1n register value can be changed during timer counter operation. This operation is asynchronous
to the count clock.
<3> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP0n register match, the value of 8-bit timer counter Hn
is cleared, the TOHn output becomes active, and the INTTMHn signal is output.
<4> If the CMP1n register value is changed, the value is latched and not transferred to the register. When the
values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register before the change match, the value is transferred to
the CMP1n register and the CMP1n register value is changed (<2>’).
However, three count clocks or more are required from when the CMP1n register value is changed to when
the value is transferred to the register. If a match signal is generated within three count clocks, the changed
value cannot be transferred to the register.
<5> When the values of 8-bit timer counter Hn and the CMP1n register after the change match, the TOHn output
becomes inactive. 8-bit timer counter Hn is not cleared and the INTTMHn signal is not generated.
<6> Clearing the TMHEn bit to 0 during timer Hn operation makes the INTTMHn signal and TOHn output inactive.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
232
8.4.3 Carrier generator mode operation (8-bit timer H1 only)
The carrier clock generated by 8-bit timer H1 is output in the cycle set by 8-bit timer/event counter 51.
In carrier generator mode, the output of the 8-bit timer H1 carrier pulse is controlled by 8-bit timer/event counter 51,
and the carrier pulse is output from the TOH1 output.
(1) Carrier generation
In carrier generator mode, 8-bit timer H compare register 01 (CMP01) generates a low-level width carrier pulse
waveform and 8-bit timer H compare register 11 (CMP11) generates a high-level width carrier pulse waveform.
Rewriting the CMP11 register during 8-bit timer H1 operation is possible but rewriting the CMP01 register is
prohibited.
(2) Carrier output control
Carrier output is controlled by the interrupt request signal (INTTM51) of 8-bit timer/event counter 51 and the
NRZB1 and RMC1 bits of the 8-bit timer H carrier control register (TMCYC1). The relationship between the
outputs is shown below.
RMC1 Bit NRZB1 Bit Output
0 0 Low-level output
0 1 High-level output
1 0 Low-level output
1 1 Carrier pulse output
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 233
To control the carrier pulse output during a count operation, the NRZ1 and NRZB1 bits of the TMCYC1 register
have a master and slave bit configuration. The NRZ1 bit is read-only but the NRZB1 bit can be read and written.
The INTTM51 signal is synchronized with the 8-bit timer H1 count clock and output as the INTTM5H1 signal. The
INTTM5H1 signal becomes the data transfer signal of the NRZ1 bit, and the NRZB1 bit value is transferred to the
NRZ1 bit. The timing for transfer from the NRZB1 bit to the NRZ1 bit is as shown below.
Figure 8-13. Transfer Timing
8-bit timer H1
count clock
TMHE1
INTTM51
INTTM5H1
NRZ1
NRZB1
RMC1
1
1
10
00
<1>
<2>
<1> The INTTM51 signal is synchronized with the count clock of 8-bit timer H1 and is output as the INTTM5H1
signal.
<2> The value of the NRZB1 bit is transferred to the NRZ1 bit at the second clock from the rising edge of the
INTTM5H1 signal.
Cautions 1. Do not rewrite the NRZB1 bit again until at least the second clock after it has been
rewritten, or else the transfer from the NRZB1 bit to the NRZ1 bit is not guaranteed.
2. When 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is used in the carrier generator mode, an interrupt is
generated at the timing of <1>. When 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is used in a mode other
than the carrier generator mode, the timing of the interrupt generation differs.
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
234
(3) Usage
Outputs an arbitrary carrier clock from the TOH1 pin.
<1> Set each register.
Figure 8-14. Register Setting in Carrier Generator Mode
(i) Setting 8-bit timer H mode register 1 (TMHMD1)
0 0/1 0/1 0/1 0
Timer output enabled
Timer output level inversion setting
Carrier generator mode selection
Count clock (f
CNT
) selection
Count operation stopped
1 0/1 1
TMMD10 TOLEV1 TOEN1CKS11CKS12TMHE1
TMHMD1
CKS10 TMMD11
(ii) CMP01 register setting
• Compare value
(iii) CMP11 register setting
• Compare value
(iv) TMCYC1 register setting
• RMC1 = 1 ... Remote control output enable bit
• NRZB1 = 0/1 ... carrier output enable bit
(v) TCL51 and TMC51 register setting
• See 7.3 Registers Controlling 8-Bit Timer/Event Counters 50 and 51.
<2> When TMHE1 = 1, 8-bit timer H1 starts counting.
<3> When TCE51 of 8-bit timer mode control register 51 (TMC51) is set to 1, 8-bit timer/event counter 51 starts
counting.
<4> After the count operation is enabled, the first compare register to be compared is the CMP01 register.
When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP01 register value match, the INTTMH1 signal
is generated, 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared, and at the same time, the compare register to be compared
with 8-bit timer counter H1 is switched from the CMP01 register to the CMP11 register.
<5> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11 register value match, the INTTMH1 signal
is generated, 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared, and at the same time, the compare register to be compared
with 8-bit timer counter H1 is switched from the CMP11 register to the CMP01 register.
<6> By performing procedures <4> and <5> repeatedly, a carrier clock is generated.
<7> The INTTM51 signal is synchronized with count clock of 8-bit timer H1 and output as the INTTM5H1 signal.
The INTTM5H1 signal becomes the data transfer signal for the NRZB1 bit, and the NRZB1 bit value is
transferred to the NRZ1 bit.
<8> When the NRZ1 bit is high level, a carrier clock is output from the TOH1 pin.
<9> By performing the procedures above, an arbitrary carrier clock is obtained. To stop the count operation,
clear TMHE1 to 0.
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 235
If the setting value of the CMP01 register is N, the setting value of the CMP11 register is M, and the count clock
frequency is fCNT, the carrier clock output cycle and duty are as follows.
Carrier clock output cycle = (N + M + 2)/fCNT
Duty = High-level width : Carrier clock output width = ( M + 1) : (N + M + 2)
Cautions 1. Be sure to set the CMP11 register when starting the timer count operation (TMHE1 = 1)
after the timer count operation was stopped (TMHE1 = 0) (be sure to set again even if
setting the same value to the CMP11 register).
2. Set so that the count clock frequency of TMH1 becomes more than 6 times the count clock
frequency of TM51.
(4) Timing chart
The carrier output control timing is shown below.
Cautions 1. Set the values of the CMP01 and CMP11 registers in a range of 01H to FFH.
2. In the carrier generator mode, three operating clocks (signal selected by CKS12 to CKS10
bits of TMHMD1 register) or more are required from when the CMP11 register value is
changed to when the value is transferred to the register.
3. Be sure to set the RMC1 bit before the count operation is started.
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
236
Figure 8-15. Carrier Generator Mode Operation Timing (1/3)
(a) Operation when CMP01 = N, CMP11 = N
00H N 00H N 00H N 00H N 00H N 00H N
N
N
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H 00H 01HL
L
CMPn0
CMPn1
TMHEn
INTTMHn
Carrier clock
8-bit timer 5n
count clock
TM5n count value
CR5n
TCE5n
TOHn
INTTM5n
NRZBn
NRZn
Carrier clock
INTTM5Hn
8-bit timer Hn
count clock
8-bit timer counter
Hn count value
<1> <2>
<3> <4>
<5>
<6>
<7>
<1> When TMHE1 = 0 and TCE51 = 0, 8-bit timer counter H1 operation is stopped.
<2> When TMHE1 = 1 is set, 8-bit timer counter H1 starts a count operation. At that time, the carrier clock is held
at the inactive level.
<3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP01 register value, the first INTTMH1 signal
is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer
counter H1 is switched from the CMP01 register to the CMP11 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to
00H.
<4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP11 register value, the INTTMH1 signal is
generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer
counter H1 is switched from the CMP11 register to the CMP01 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to
00H. By performing procedures <3> and <4> repeatedly, a carrier clock with duty fixed to 50% is generated.
<5> When the INTTM51 signal is generated, it is synchronized with 8-bit timer H1 count clock and output as the
INTTM5H1 signal.
<6> The INTTM5H1 signal becomes the data transfer signal for the NRZB1 bit, and the NRZB1 bit value is
transferred to the NRZ1 bit.
<7> When NRZ1 = 0 is set, the TOH1 output becomes low level.
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 237
Figure 8-15. Carrier Generator Mode Operation Timing (2/3)
(b) Operation when CMP01 = N, CMP11 = M
N
L
00H N 00H 01H M 00H N 00H 01H M 00H 00HN
M
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H L 00H 01H 00H 01HL
CMPn0
CMPn1
TMHEn
INTTMHn
Carrier clock
8-bit timer 5n
count clock
TM5n count value
CR5n
TCE5n
TOHn
INTTM5n
NRZBn
NRZn
Carrier clock
INTTM5Hn
8-bit timer Hn
count clock
8-bit timer counter
Hn count value
<1> <2>
<3> <4>
<5>
<6> <7>
<1> When TMHE1 = 0 and TCE51 = 0, 8-bit timer counter H1 operation is stopped.
<2> When TMHE1 = 1 is set, 8-bit timer counter H1 starts a count operation. At that time, the carrier clock is held
at the inactive level.
<3> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP01 register value, the first INTTMH1 signal
is generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer
counter H1 is switched from the CMP01 register to the CMP11 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to
00H.
<4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP11 register value, the INTTMH1 signal is
generated, the carrier clock signal is inverted, and the compare register to be compared with 8-bit timer
counter H1 is switched from the CMP11 register to the CMP01 register. 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to
00H. By performing procedures <3> and <4> repeatedly, a carrier clock with duty fixed to other than 50% is
generated.
<5> When the INTTM51 signal is generated, it is synchronized with 8-bit timer H1 count clock and output as the
INTTM5H1 signal.
<6> A carrier signal is output at the first rising edge of the carrier clock if NRZ1 is set to 1.
<7> When NRZ1 = 0, the TOH1 output is held at the high level and is not changed to low level while the carrier
clock is high level (from <6> and <7>, the high-level width of the carrier clock waveform is guaranteed).
CHAPTER 8 8-BIT TIMERS H0 AND H1
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
238
Figure 8-15. Carrier Generator Mode Operation Timing (3/3)
(c) Operation when CMP11 is changed
8-bit timer H1
count clock
CMP01
TMHE1
INTTMH1
Carrier clock
00H 01H N 00H 01H 01H
M00H N 00H L 00H
<1>
<3>’
<4>
<3>
<2>
CMP11
<5>
M
N
L
M (L)
8-bit timer counter
H1 count value
<1> When TMHE1 = 1 is set, 8-bit timer H1 starts a count operation. At that time, the carrier clock is held at the
inactive level.
<2> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 matches the CMP01 register value, 8-bit timer counter H1 is
cleared and the INTTMH1 signal is output.
<3> The CMP11 register can be rewritten during 8-bit timer H1 operation, however, the changed value (L) is
latched. The CMP11 register is changed when the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11
register value before the change (M) match (<3>’).
<4> When the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11 register value before the change (M) match,
the INTTMH1 signal is output, the carrier signal is inverted, and 8-bit timer counter H1 is cleared to 00H.
<5> The timing at which the count value of 8-bit timer counter H1 and the CMP11 register value match again is
indicated by the value after the change (L).
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 239
CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER
9.1 Functions of Watch Timer
The watch timer has the following functions.
• Watch timer
• Interval timer
The watch timer and the interval timer can be used simultaneously.
Figure 9-1 shows the watch timer block diagram.
Figure 9-1. Block Diagram of Watch Timer
f
PRS
/2
7
f
W
/2
4
f
W
/2
5
f
W
/2
6
f
W
/2
7
f
W
/2
8
f
W
/2
10
f
W
/2
11
f
W
/2
9
f
SUB
INTWT
INTWTI
WTM0WTM1WTM2WTM3WTM4WTM5WTM6WTM7
f
W
Clear
11-bit prescaler
Clear
5-bit counter
Watch timer operation
mode register (WTM)
Internal bus
Selector
Selector
Selector
Selector
f
WX
/2
4
f
WX
/2
5
f
WX
Remark f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
f
SUB: Subsystem clock frequency
f
W: Watch timer clock frequency (fPRS/27 or fSUB)
fWX: fW or fW/29
CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
240
(1) Watch timer
When the high-speed system clock or subsystem clock is used, interrupt requests (INTWT) are generated at
preset intervals.
Table 9-1. Watch Timer Interrupt Time
Interrupt Time When Operated at
fSUB = 32.768 kHz
When Operated at
fPRS = 4 MHz
When Operated at
fPRS = 5 MHz
When Operated at
fPRS = 10 MHz
When Operated at
fPRS = 20 MHz
24/fW 488
μ
s 0.51 ms 410
μ
s 205
μ
s 102
μ
s
25/fW 977
μ
s 1.03 ms 819
μ
s 410
μ
s 205
μ
s
213/fW 0.25 s 0.26 s 0.210 s 0.105 s 520
μ
s
214/fW 0.5 s 0.53 s 0.419 s 0.210 s 0.105 s
Remark fPRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
f
SUB: Subsystem clock frequency
f
W: Watch timer clock frequency (fPRS/27 or fSUB)
(2) Interval timer
Interrupt requests (INTWTI) are generated at preset time intervals.
Table 9-2. Interval Timer Interval Time
Interrupt Time When Operated at
fSUB = 32.768 kHz
When Operated at
fPRS = 4 MHz
When Operated at
fPRS = 5 MHz
When Operated at
fPRS = 10 MHz
When Operated at
fPRS = 20 MHz
24/fW 488
μ
s 0.51 ms 410
μ
s 205
μ
s 102
μ
s
25/fW 977
μ
s 1.03 ms 820
μ
s 410
μ
s 205
μ
s
26/fW 1.95 ms 2.05 ms 1.64 ms 820
μ
s 410
μ
s
27/fW 3.91 ms 4.1 ms 3.28 ms 1.64 ms 820
μ
s
28/fW 7.81 ms 8.2 ms 6.55 ms 3.28 ms 1.64 ms
29/fW 15.6 ms 16.4 ms 13.1 ms 6.55 ms 3.28 ms
210/fW 31.3 ms 32.75 ms 26.2 ms 13.1 ms 6.55 ms
211/fW 62.5 ms 65.55 ms 52.4 ms 26.2 ms 13.1 ms
Remark fPRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
f
SUB: Subsystem clock frequency
f
W: Watch timer clock frequency (fPRS/27 or fSUB)
9.2 Configuration of Watch Timer
The watch timer includes the following hardware.
Table 9-3. Watch Timer Configuration
Item Configuration
Counter 5 bits × 1
Prescaler 11 bits × 1
Control register Watch timer operation mode register (WTM)
CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 241
9.3 Register Controlling Watch Timer
The watch timer is controlled by the watch timer operation mode register (WTM).
• Watch timer operation mode register (WTM)
This register sets the watch timer count clock, enables/disables operation, prescaler interval time, and 5-bit
counter operation control.
WTM is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears WTM to 00H.
Figure 9-2. Format of Watch Timer Operation Mode Register (WTM)
Address: FF8FH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 <1> <0>
WTM WTM7 WTM6 WTM5 WTM4 WTM3 WTM2 WTM1 WTM0
Watch timer count clock selection (fW) WTM7
f
SUB = 32.768 kHz fPRS = 4 MHz fPRS = 8 MHz fPRS = 10 MHz fPRS = 20 MHz
0 fPRS/27 − 31.25 kHz 62.5 kHz 78.125 kHz 156.25 kHz
1 fSUB 32.768 kHz −
WTM6 WTM5 WTM4 Prescaler interval time selection
0 0 0 24/fW
0 0 1 25/fW
0 1 0 26/fW
0 1 1 27/fW
1 0 0 28/fW
1 0 1 29/fW
1 1 0 210/fW
1 1 1 211/fW
WTM3 WTM2 Interrupt time selection
0 0 214/fW
0 1 213/fW
1 0 25/fW
1 1 24/fW
WTM1 5-bit counter operation control
0 Clear after operation stop
1 Start
WTM0 Watch timer operation enable
0 Operation stop (clear both prescaler and 5-bit counter)
1 Operation enable
CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
242
Caution Do not change the count clock and interval time (by setting bits 4 to 7 (WTM4 to WTM7) of WTM)
during watch timer operation.
Remarks 1. f
W: Watch timer clock frequency (fPRS/27 or fSUB)
2. f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
3. fSUB: Subsystem clock frequency
CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 243
9.4 Watch Timer Operations
9.4.1 Watch timer operation
The watch timer generates an interrupt request signal (INTWT) at a specific time interval by using the peripheral
hardware clock or subsystem clock.
When bit 0 (WTM0) and bit 1 (WTM1) of the watch timer operation mode register (WTM) are set to 1, the count
operation starts. When these bits are cleared to 0, the 5-bit counter is cleared and the count operation stops.
When the interval timer is simultaneously operated, zero-second start can be achieved only for the watch timer by
clearing WTM1 to 0. In this case, however, the 11-bit prescaler is not cleared. Therefore, an error up to 29 × 1/fW
seconds occurs in the first overflow (INTWT) after zero-second start.
The interrupt request is generated at the following time intervals.
Table 9-4. Watch Timer Interrupt Time
WTM3
WTM2
Interrupt Time
Selection
When Operated at
fSUB = 32.768 kHz
(WTM7 = 1)
When Operated at
fPRS = 4 MHz
(WTM7 = 0)
When Operated at
fPRS = 5 MHz
(WTM7 = 0)
When Operated at
fPRS = 10 MHz
(WTM7 = 0)
When Operated at
fPRS = 20 MHz
(WTM7 = 0)
0 0 214/fW 0.5 s 0.53 s 0.419 s 0.210 s 0.105 s
0 1 213/fW 0.25 s 0.26 s 0.210 s 0.105 s 52.5 ms
1 0 25/fW 977
μ
s 1.03 ms 819
μ
s 410
μ
s 205
μ
s
1 1 24/fW 488
μ
s 0.51 ms 410
μ
s 205
μ
s 102
μ
s
Remarks 1. fW: Watch timer clock frequency (fPRS/27 or fSUB)
2. fPRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
3. f
SUB: Subsystem clock frequency
CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
244
9.4.2 Interval timer operation
The watch timer operates as interval timer which generates interrupt requests (INTWTI) repeatedly at an interval of
the preset count value.
The interval time can be selected with bits 4 to 6 (WTM4 to WTM6) of the watch timer operation mode register
(WTM).
When bit 0 (WTM0) of the WTM is set to 1, the count operation starts. When this bit is set to 0, the count operation
stops.
Table 9-5. Interval Timer Interval Time
WTM6
WTM5
WTM4 Interval Time When Operated
at fSUB = 32.768
kHz (WTM7 = 1)
When Operated
at fPRS = 4 MHz
(WTM7 = 0)
When Operated
at fPRS = 5 MHz
(WTM7 = 0)
When Operated
at fPRS = 10 MHz
(WTM7 = 0)
When Operated
at fPRS = 20 MHz
(WTM7 = 0)
0 0 0 24/fW 488
μ
s 0.51 ms 410
μ
s 205
μ
s 102
μ
s
0 0 1 25/fW 977
μ
s 1.03 ms 820
μ
s 410
μ
s 205
μ
s
0 1 0 26/fW 1.95 ms 2.05 ms 1.64 ms 820
μ
s 410
μ
s
0 1 1 27/fW 3.91 ms 4.1 ms 3.28 ms 1.64 ms 820
μ
s
1 0 0 28/fW 7.81 ms 8.2 ms 6.55 ms 3.28 ms 1.64 ms
1 0 1 29/fW 15.6 ms 16.4 ms 13.1 ms 6.55 ms 3.28 ms
1 1 0 210/fW 31.3 ms 32.75 ms 26.2 ms 13.1 ms 6.55 ms
1 1 1 211/fW 62.5 ms 65.55 ms 52.4 ms 26.2 ms 13.1 ms
Remarks 1. fW: Watch timer clock frequency (fPRS/27 or fSUB)
2. fPRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
3. f
SUB: Subsystem clock frequency
Figure 9-3. Operation Timing of Watch Timer/Interval Timer
0H
Start Overflow Overflow
5-bit counter
Count clock
Watch timer
interrupt INTWT
Interval timer
interrupt INTWTI
Interrupt time of watch timer (0.5 s)
Interval time
(T)
T
Interrupt time of watch timer (0.5 s)
Remark f
W: Watch timer clock frequency
Figures in parentheses are for operation with fW = 32.768 kHz (WTM7 = 1, WTM3, WTM2 = 0, 0)
CHAPTER 9 WATCH TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 245
9.5 Cautions for Watch Timer
When operation of the watch timer and 5-bit counter is enabled by the watch timer mode control register (WTM) (by
setting bits 0 (WTM0) and 1 (WTM1) of WTM to 1), the interval until the first interrupt request (INTWT) is generated
after the register is set does not exactly match the specification made with bits 2 and 3 (WTM2, WTM3) of WTM.
Subsequently, however, the INTWT signal is generated at the specified intervals.
Figure 9-4. Example of Generation of Watch Timer Interrupt Request (INTWT) (When Interrupt Period = 0.5 s)
It takes 0.515625 seconds for the first INTWT to be generated (29 × 1/32768 = 0.015625 s longer). INTWT is then
generated every 0.5 seconds.
0.5 s0.5 s0.515625 s
WTM0, WTM1
INTWT
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
246
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
10.1 Functions of Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer operates on the low-speed internal oscillator clock.
The watchdog timer is used to detect an inadvertent program loop. If a program loop is detected, an internal reset
signal is generated.
Program loop is detected in the following cases.
• If the watchdog timer counter overflows
• If a 1-bit manipulation instruction is executed on the watchdog timer enable register (WDTE)
• If data other than “ACH” is written to WDTE
• If data is written to WDTE during a window close period
• If the instruction is fetched from an area not set by the IMS and IXS registers (detection of an invalid check while
the CPU hangs up)
• If the CPU accesses an area that is not set by the IMS and IXS registers (excluding FB00H to FFFFH) by
executing a read/write instruction (detection of an abnormal access during a CPU program loop)
When a reset occurs due to the watchdog timer, bit 4 (WDTRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1.
For details of RESF, see CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION.
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 247
10.2 Configuration of Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer includes the following hardware.
Table 10-1. Configuration of Watchdog Timer
Item Configuration
Control register Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE)
How the counter operation is controlled, overflow time, and window open period are set by the option byte.
Table 10-2. Setting of Option Bytes and Watchdog Timer
Setting of Watchdog Timer Option Byte (0080H)
Window open period Bits 6 and 5 (WINDOW1, WINDOW0)
Controlling counter operation of watchdog timer Bit 4 (WDTON)
Overflow time of watchdog timer Bits 3 to 1 (WDCS2 to WDCS0)
Remark For the option byte, see CHAPTER 22 OPTION BYTE.
Figure 10-1. Block Diagram of Watchdog Timer
f
RL
/2
Clock
input
controller
Reset
output
controller
Internal reset signal
Internal bus
Selector
17-bit
counter
2
10
/f
RL
to
2
17
/f
RL
Watchdog timer enable
register (WDTE)
Clear, reset control
WDTON of
option byte
(0080H)
WINDOW1 and WINDOW0
of option byte (0080H)
Count clear
signal
WDCS2 to WDCS0
of option byte (0080H)
Overflow
signal
CPU access signal CPU access
error detector
Window size
determination
signal
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
248
10.3 Register Controlling Watchdog Timer
The watchdog timer is controlled by the watchdog timer enable register (WDTE).
(1) Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE)
Writing ACH to WDTE clears the watchdog timer counter and starts counting again.
This register can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to 9AH or 1AHNote.
Figure 10-2. Format of Watchdog Timer Enable Register (WDTE)
01234567
Symbol
WDTE
Address: FF9BH After reset: 9AH/1AH
Note
R/W
Note The WDTE reset value differs depending on the WDTON setting value of the option byte (0080H). To
operate watchdog timer, set WDTON to 1.
WDTON Setting Value WDTE Reset Value
0 (watchdog timer count operation disabled) 1AH
1 (watchdog timer count operation enabled) 9AH
Cautions 1. If a value other than ACH is written to WDTE, an internal reset signal is generated. If the
source clock to the watchdog timer is stopped, however, an internal reset signal is
generated when the source clock to the watchdog timer resumes operation.
2. If a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction is executed for WDTE, an internal reset signal
is generated. If the source clock to the watchdog timer is stopped, however, an internal
reset signal is generated when the source clock to the watchdog timer resumes
operation.
3. The value read from WDTE is 9AH/1AH (this differs from the written value (ACH)).
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 249
10.4 Operation of Watchdog Timer
10.4.1 Controlling operation of watchdog timer
1. When the watchdog timer is used, its operation is specified by the option byte (0080H).
• Enable counting operation of the watchdog timer by setting bit 4 (WDTON) of the option byte (0080H) to 1
(the counter starts operating after a reset release) (for details, see CHAPTER 22).
WDTON Operation Control of Watchdog Timer Counter/Illegal Access Detection
0 Counter operation disabled (counting stopped after reset), Illegal access detection operation disabled.
1 Counter operation enabled (counting started after reset), Illegal access detection operation enabled.
• Set an overflow time by using bits 3 to 1 (WDCS2 to WDCS0) of the option byte (0080H) (for details, see
10.4.2 and CHAPTER 22).
• Set a window open period by using bits 6 and 5 (WINDOW1 and WINDOW0) of the option byte (0080H) (for
details, see 10.4.3 and CHAPTER 22).
2. After a reset release, the watchdog timer starts counting.
3. By writing “ACH” to WDTE after the watchdog timer starts counting and before the overflow time set by the
option byte, the watchdog timer is cleared and starts counting again.
4. After that, write WDTE the second time or later after a reset release during the window open period. If WDTE is
written during a period other than the window open period, an internal reset signal is generated.
5. If the overflow time expires without “ACH” written to WDTE, an internal reset signal is generated.
An internal reset signal is generated in the following cases.
• If a 1-bit manipulation instruction is executed on the watchdog timer enable register (WDTE)
• If data other than “ACH” is written to WDTE
• If the instruction is fetched from an area not set by the IMS and IXS registers (detection of an invalid check
during a CPU program loop)
• If the CPU accesses an area not set by the IMS and IXS registers (excluding FB00H to FFFFH) by executing
a read/write instruction (detection of an abnormal access during a CPU program loop)
Cautions 1. The first writing to WDTE after a reset release clears the watchdog timer, if it is made before
the overflow time regardless of the timing of the writing, and the watchdog timer starts
counting again.
2. If the watchdog timer is cleared by writing “ACH” to WDTE, the actual overflow time may be
different from the overflow time set by the option byte by up to 2/fRL seconds.
3. The watchdog timer can be cleared immediately before the count value overflows (FFFFH).
<R>
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
250
Cautions 4. The operation of the watchdog timer in the HALT and STOP modes differs as follows
depending on the set value of bit 0 (LSROSC) of the option byte.
LSROSC = 0 (Internal Low-Speed
Oscillator Can Be Stopped by Software)
LSROSC = 1 (Internal Low-Speed
Oscillator Cannot Be Stopped)
In HALT mode Watchdog timer operation continues.
In STOP mode
Watchdog timer operation stops.
If LSROSC = 0, the watchdog timer resumes counting after the HALT or STOP mode is
released. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0 but starts counting from the value at
which it was stopped.
If oscillation of the internal low-speed oscillator is stopped by setting LSRSTOP (bit 1 of the
internal oscillation mode register (RCM) = 1) when LSROSC = 0, the watchdog timer stops
operating. At this time, the counter is not cleared to 0.
5. The watchdog timer continues its operation during self-programming and EEPROMTM
emulation of the flash memory. During processing, the interrupt acknowledge time is
delayed. Set the overflow time and window size taking this delay into consideration.
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 251
10.4.2 Setting overflow time of watchdog timer
Set the overflow time of the watchdog timer by using bits 3 to 1 (WDCS2 to WDCS0) of the option byte.
If an overflow occurs, an internal reset signal is generated. If “ACH” is written to WDTE during the window open
period before the overflow time, the present count is cleared and the watchdog timer starts counting again.
The following overflow time is set.
Table 10-3. Setting of Overflow Time of Watchdog Timer
WDCS2 WDCS1 WDCS0 Overflow Time of Watchdog Timer
0 0 0 210/fRL (3.88 ms)
0 0 1 211/fRL (7.76 ms)
0 1 0 212/fRL (15.52 ms)
0 1 1 213/fRL (31.03 ms)
1 0 0 214/fRL (62.06 ms)
1 0 1 215/fRL (124.12 ms)
1 1 0 216/fRL (248.24 ms)
1 1 1 217/fRL (496.48 ms)
Cautions 1. The combination of WDCS2 = WDCS1 = WDCS0 = 0 and WINDOW1 =
WINDOW0 = 0 is prohibited.
2. The watchdog timer continues its operation during self-programming and
EEPROM emulation of the flash memory. During processing, the
interrupt acknowledge time is delayed. Set the overflow time and window
size taking this delay into consideration.
Remarks 1. fRL: Internal low-speed oscillation clock frequency
2. ( ): fRL = 264 kHz (MAX.)
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
252
10.4.3 Setting window open period of watchdog timer
Set the window open period of the watchdog timer by using bits 6 and 5 (WINDOW1, WINDOW0) of the option
byte (0080H). The outline of the window is as follows.
• If “ACH” is written to WDTE during the window open period, the watchdog timer is cleared and starts counting
again.
• Even if “ACH” is written to WDTE during the window close period, an abnormality is detected and an internal
reset signal is generated.
Example: If the window open period is 25%
Window close period (75%) Window open
period (25%)
Counting
starts
Overflow
time
Counting starts again when
ACH is written to WDTE.
Internal reset signal is generated
if ACH is written to WDTE.
Caution The first writing to WDTE after a reset release clears the watchdog timer, if it is made before the
overflow time regardless of the timing of the writing, and the watchdog timer starts counting
again.
The window open period to be set is as follows.
Table 10-4. Setting Window Open Period of Watchdog Timer
WINDOW1 WINDOW0 Window Open Period of Watchdog Timer
0 0 25%
0 1 50%
1 0 75%
1 1 100%
Cautions 1. The combination of WDCS2 = WDCS1 = WDCS0 = 0 and WINDOW1 =
WINDOW0 = 0 is prohibited.
2. The watchdog timer continues its operation during self-programming and
EEPROM emulation of the flash memory. During processing, the
interrupt acknowledge time is delayed. Set the overflow time and window
size taking this delay into consideration.
CHAPTER 10 WATCHDOG TIMER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 253
Remark If the overflow time is set to 210/fRL, the window close time and open time are as follows.
Setting of Window Open Period
25% 50% 75% 100%
Window close time 0 to 3.56 ms 0 to 2.37 ms 0 to 0.119 ms None
Window open time 3.56 to 3.88 ms 2.37 to 3.88 ms 0.119 to 3.88 ms 0 to 3.88 ms
<When window open period is 25%>
• Overflow time:
210/fRL (MAX.) = 210/264 kHz (MAX.) = 3.88 ms
• Window close time:
0 to 210/fRL (MIN.) × (1 − 0.25) = 0 to 210/216 kHz (MIN.) × 0.75 = 0 to 3.56 ms
• Window open time:
210/fRL (MIN.) × (1 − 0.25) to 210/fRL (MAX.) = 210/216 kHz (MIN.) × 0.75 to 210/264 kHz (MAX.)
= 3.56 to 3.88 ms
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
254
CHAPTER 11 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER
11.1 Functions of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller
The clock output controller is intended for carrier output during remote controlled transmission and clock output for
supply to peripheral LSIs. The clock selected with the clock output selection register (CKS) is output.
In addition, the buzzer output is intended for square-wave output of buzzer frequency selected with CKS.
Figure 11-1 shows the block diagram of clock output/buzzer output controller.
Figure 11-1. Block Diagram of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
10
to f
PRS
/2
13
f
PRS
to f
PRS
/2
7
f
SUB
BZOE BCS1 BCS0 CLOE
CLOE
BZOE
84
PCL/INTP6/P72
BUZ/INTP7/P73
BCS0, BCS1
Clock
controller
Prescaler
Internal bus
CCS3
Clock output selection register (CKS)
CCS2 CCS1 CCS0
Output latch
(P73)
PM73
Output latch
(P72)
PM72
Selector
Selector
CHAPTER 11 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 255
11.2 Configuration of Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller
The clock output/buzzer output controller includes the following hardware.
Table 11-1. Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller Configuration
Item Configuration
Control registers Clock output selection register (CKS)
Port mode register 7 (PM7)
Port register 7 (P7)
11.3 Register Controlling Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller
The following two registers are used to control the clock output/buzzer output controller.
• Clock output selection register (CKS)
• Port mode register 7 (PM7)
(1) Clock output selection register (CKS)
This register sets output enable/disable for clock output (PCL) and for the buzzer frequency output (BUZ), and
sets the output clock.
CKS is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears CKS to 00H.
CHAPTER 11 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
256
Figure 11-2. Format of Clock Output Selection Register (CKS)
Address: FF40H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 <4> 3 2 1 0
CKS BZOE BCS1 BCS0 CLOE CCS3 CCS2 CCS1 CCS0
BZOE BUZ output enable/disable specification
0 Clock division circuit operation stopped. BUZ fixed to low level.
1 Clock division circuit operation enabled. BUZ output enabled.
BUZ output clock selection BCS1 BCS0
f
PRS = 10 MHz fPRS = 20 MHz
0 0 fPRS/210 9.77 kHz 19.54 kHz
0 1 fPRS/211 4.88 kHz 9.77 kHz
1 0 fPRS/212 2.44 kHz 4.88 kHz
1 1 fPRS/213 1.22 kHz 2.44 kHz
CLOE PCL output enable/disable specification
0 Clock division circuit operation stopped. PCL fixed to low level.
1 Clock division circuit operation enabled. PCL output enabled.
PCL output clock selectionNote CCS3 CCS2 CCS1 CCS0
fSUB =
32.768 kHz
fPRS =
10 MHz
fPRS =
20 MHz
0 0 0 0 fPRS 10 MHz
Setting
prohibitedNote
0 0 0 1 fPRS/2 5 MHz 10 MHz
0 0 1 0 fPRS/22 2.5 MHz 5 MHz
0 0 1 1 fPRS/23 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz
0 1 0 0 fPRS/24 625 kHz 1.25 MHz
0 1 0 1 fPRS/25 312.5 kHz 625 kHz
0 1 1 0 fPRS/26 156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz
0 1 1 1 fPRS/27
−
78.125 kHz 156.25 kHz
1 0 0 0 fSUB 32.768 kHz −
Other than above Setting prohibited
Notes 1. If the peripheral hardware clock operates on the internal high-speed oscillation clock when 1.8 V ≤ VDD
< 2.7 V, setting CCS3 = CCS2 = CCS1 = CCS0 = 0 (output clock of PCL: fPRS) is prohibited.
2. The PCL output clock prohibits settings if they exceed 10 MHz.
Cautions 1. Set BCS1 and BCS0 when the buzzer output operation is stopped (BZOE = 0).
2. Set CCS3 to CCS0 while the clock output operation is stopped (CLOE = 0).
Remarks 1. fPRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
2. f
SUB: Subsystem clock frequency
CHAPTER 11 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 257
(2) Port mode register 7 (PM7)
This register sets port 7 input/output in 1-bit units.
When using the P72/INTP6/PCL pin for clock output and the P73/INTP7/BUZ pin for buzzer output, set PM72,
PM73 and the output latch of P72, P73 to 0.
PM7 is set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets PM7 to FFH.
Figure 11-3. Format of Port Mode Register 7 (PM7)
Address: FF27H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PM7 1 PM76 PM75 PM74 PM73 PM72 PM71 PM70
PM7n P7n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 6)
0 Output mode (output buffer on)
1 Input mode (output buffer off)
CHAPTER 11 CLOCK OUTPUT/BUZZER OUTPUT CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
258
11.4 Clock Output/Buzzer Output Controller Operations
11.4.1 Clock output operation
The clock pulse is output as the following procedure.
<1> Select the clock pulse output frequency with bits 0 to 3 (CCS0 to CCS3) of the clock output selection register
(CKS) (clock pulse output in disabled status).
<2> Set bit 4 (CLOE) of CKS to 1 to enable clock output.
Remark The clock output controller is designed not to output pulses with a small width during output
enable/disable switching of the clock output. As shown in Figure 11-4, be sure to start output from the
low period of the clock (marked with * in the figure). When stopping output, do so after the high-level
period of the clock.
Figure 11-4. Remote Control Output Application Example
CLOE
Clock output
**
11.4.2 Operation as buzzer output
The buzzer frequency is output as the following procedure.
<1> Select the buzzer output frequency with bits 5 and 6 (BCS0, BCS1) of the clock output selection register
(CKS) (buzzer output in disabled status).
<2> Set bit 7 (BZOE) of CKS to 1 to enable buzzer output.
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 259
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
12.1 Function of A/D Converter
The A/D converter converts an analog input signal into a digital value, and consists of up to eight channels (ANI0 to
ANI8Note) with a resolution of 10 bits.
The A/D converter has the following function.
• 10-bit resolution A/D conversion
10-bit resolution A/D conversion is carried out repeatedly for one channel selected from analog inputs ANI0 to
ANI8. Each time an A/D conversion operation ends, an interrupt request (INTAD) is generated.
Figure 12-1. Block Diagram of A/D Converter
AV
REF
AV
SS
INTAD
ADCS bit
ADCS FR2 FR1 ADCEFR0
Sample & hold circuit
AV
SS
Voltage comparator
A/D converter mode
register (ADM)
Internal bus
4
ADS2 ADS1 ADS0
Analog input channel
specification register (ADS)
Controller
A/D conversion result
register (ADCR)
Successive
approximation
register (SAR)
LV1 LV0
5
A/D port configuration
register (ADPC)
ADPC3 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0
4
Tap selector
P80/ANI0
P81/ANI1
P82/ANI2
P83/ANI3
P84/ANI4
P85/ANI5
P86/ANI6
P87/ANI7
P90/ANI8
Selector
Note1
ADS3
Note2
Notes 1. P90/ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
2. ADS3 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
260
12.2 Configuration of A/D Converter
The A/D converter includes the following hardware.
(1) ANI0 to ANI8Note pins
These are the analog input pins of the 8-channel A/D converter. They input analog signals to be converted into
digital signals. Pins other than the one selected as the analog input pin can be used as I/O port pins.
Note ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
(2) Sample & hold circuit
The sample & hold circuit samples the input voltage of the analog input pin selected by the selector when A/D
conversion is started, and holds the sampled voltage value during A/D conversion.
(3) Series resistor string
The series resistor string is connected between AVREF and AVSS, and generates a voltage to be compared with
the sampled voltage value.
Figure 12-2. Circuit Configuration of Series Resistor String
ADCS
Series resistor string
AVREF
P-ch
AVSS
(4) Voltage comparator
The voltage comparator compares the sampled voltage value and the output voltage of the series resistor string.
(5) Successive approximation register (SAR)
This register converts the result of comparison by the voltage comparator, starting from the most significant bit
(MSB).
When the voltage value is converted into a digital value down to the least significant bit (LSB) (end of A/D
conversion), the contents of the SAR register are transferred to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR).
(6) 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR)
The A/D conversion result is loaded from the successive approximation register to this register each time A/D
conversion is completed, and the ADCR register holds the A/D conversion result in its higher 10 bits (the lower 6
bits are fixed to 0).
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 261
(7) 8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH)
The A/D conversion result is loaded from the successive approximation register to this register each time A/D
conversion is completed, and the ADCRH register stores the higher 8 bits of the A/D conversion result.
Caution When data is read from ADCR and ADCRH, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from
ADCR and ADCRH when the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the peripheral
hardware clock is stopped. For details, see CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.
(8) Controller
This circuit controls the conversion time of an input analog signal that is to be converted into a digital signal, as
well as starting and stopping of the conversion operation. When A/D conversion has been completed, this
controller generates INTAD.
(9) AVREF pin
This pin inputs an analog power/reference voltage to the A/D converter. Make this pin the same potential as the
VDD pin when port 8 and port 9 are used as a digital port.
The signal input to ANI0 to ANI8 is converted into a digital signal, based on the voltage applied across AVREF and
AVSS.
(10) AVSS pin
This is the ground potential pin of the A/D converter. Always use this pin at the same potential as that of the VSS
pin even when the A/D converter is not used.
(11) A/D converter mode register (ADM)
This register is used to set the conversion time of the analog input signal to be converted, and to start or stop the
conversion operation.
(12) A/D port configuration register (ADPC)
This register switches the P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 and P90/ANI8 pins to analog input of A/D converter or digital I/O
of port.
(13) Analog input channel specification register (ADS)
This register is used to specify the port that inputs the analog voltage to be converted into a digital signal.
(14) Port mode register 8 (PM8)
This register switches the P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 pins to input or output.
(15) Port mode register 9 (PM9)
This register switches the P90/ANI8 pin to input or output.
Caution P90/ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
<R>
<R>
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
262
12.3 Registers Used in A/D Converter
The A/D converter uses the following six registers.
• A/D converter mode register (ADM)
• A/D port configuration register (ADPC)
• Analog input channel specification register (ADS)
• Port mode register 8 (PM8)
• Port mode register 9 (PM9)Note
• 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR)
• 8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH)
Note PM9 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
(1) A/D converter mode register (ADM)
This register sets the conversion time for analog input to be A/D converted, and starts/stops conversion.
ADM can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 12-3. Format of A/D Converter Mode Register (ADM)
ADCELV0
Note 1
LV1
Note 1
FR0
Note 1
FR1
Note 1
FR2
Note 1
0ADCS
A/D conversion operation control
Stops conversion operation
Enables conversion operation
ADCS
0
1
<0>123456<7>
ADM
Address: FF2AH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol
Comparator operation control
Note 2
Stops comparator operation
Enables comparator operation (comparator: 1/2AV
REF
operation)
ADCE
0
1
Notes 1. For details of FR2 to FR0, LV1, LV0, and A/D conversion, see Table 12-2 A/D Conversion Time
Selection.
2. The operation of the comparator is controlled by ADCS and ADCE, and it takes 1
μ
s from operation
start to operation stabilization. Therefore, when ADCS is set to 1 after 1
μ
s or more has elapsed from
the time ADCE is set to 1, the conversion result at that time has priority over the first conversion
result. Otherwise, ignore data of the first conversion.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 263
Table 12-1. Settings of ADCS and ADCE
ADCS ADCE A/D Conversion Operation
0 0 Stop status (DC power consumption path does not exist)
0 1
Conversion waiting mode (comparator: 1/2AVREF operation, only comparator
consumes power)
1 0 Conversion mode (comparator operation stoppedNote)
1 1 Conversion mode (comparator: 1/2AVREF operation)
Note Ignore data of the first conversion because it is not guaranteed range.
Figure 12-4. Timing Chart When Comparator Is Used
ADCE
Comparator
ADCS
Conversion
operation
Conversion
operation
Conversion
stopped
Conversion
waiting
Comparator: 1/2AV
REF
operation
Note
Note To stabilize the internal circuit, the time from the rising of the ADCE bit to the rising of the ADCS bit must be
1
μ
s or longer.
Cautions 1. A/D conversion must be stopped before rewriting bits FR0 to FR2, LV1, and LV0 to values
other than the identical data.
2. If data is written to ADM, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to ADM when the CPU is
operating on the subsystem clock and the peripheral hardware clock is stopped. For details,
see CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
264
Table 12-2. A/D Conversion Time Selection
(1) 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V
A/D Converter Mode Register (ADM) Conversion Time Selection
FR2 FR1 FR0 LV1 LV0 fPRS = 4 MHz fPRS = 10 MHz fPRS = 20 MHz
Conversion Clock (fAD)
0 0 0 0 0 264/fPRS 26.4
μ
s 13.2
μ
s fPRS/12
0 0 1 0 0 176/fPRS
Setting prohibited
17.6
μ
s 8.8
μ
sNote fPRS/8
0 1 0 0 0 132/fPRS 33.0
μ
s 13.2
μ
s 6.6
μ
sNote fPRS/6
0 1 1 0 0 88/fPRS 22.0
μ
s 8.8
μ
sNote fPRS/4
1 0 0 0 0 66/fPRS 16.5
μ
s 6.6
μ
sNote fPRS/3
1 0 1 0 0 44/fPRS 11.0
μ
sNote Setting prohibited
Setting prohibited
fPRS/2
Other than above Setting prohibited
Note This can be set only when 4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V.
(2) 2.3 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V
A/D Converter Mode Register (ADM) Conversion Time Selection
FR2 FR1 FR0 LV1 LV0 fPRS = 2 MHz fPRS = 5 MHz
Conversion Clock (fAD)
0 0 0 0 1 480/fPRS Setting prohibited fPRS/12
0 0 1 0 1 320/fPRS
Setting prohibited
64.0
μ
s fPRS/8
0 1 0 0 1 240/fPRS 60.0
μ
s 48.0
μ
s fPRS/6
0 1 1 0 1 160/fPRS 40.0
μ
s 32.0
μ
s fPRS/4
1 0 0 0 1 120/fPRS 30.0
μ
s Setting prohibited fPRS/3
Other than above Setting prohibited
Cautions 1. Set the conversion times with the following conditions.
• 4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V: fAD = 0.6 to 3.6 MHz
• 2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V: fAD = 0.6 to 1.8 MHz
• 2.3 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V: fAD = 0.6 to 1.48 MHz
2. When rewriting FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0 to other than the same data, stop A/D conversion
once (ADCS = 0) beforehand.
3. Change LV1 and LV0 from the default value, when 2.3 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V.
4. The above conversion time does not include clock frequency errors. Select conversion time,
taking clock frequency errors into consideration.
Remark f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 265
Figure 12-5. A/D Converter Sampling and A/D Conversion Timing
ADCS
Wait
period
Note
Conversion time Conversion time
Sampling time
Sampling
timing
INTAD
ADCS ← 1 or ADS rewrite
Sampling time
SAR
clear
SAR
clear
Transfer
to ADCR,
INTAD
generation
Successive
conversion time
Note For details of wait period, see CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.
(2) 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR)
This register is a 16-bit register that stores the A/D conversion result. The lower 6 bits are fixed to 0. Each time
A/D conversion ends, the conversion result is loaded from the successive approximation register, and is stored in
ADCR in order starting from bit 7 of FF19H. FF19H indicates the higher 8 bits of the conversion result, and
FF18H indicates the lower 2 bits of the conversion result.
ADCR can be read by a 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 0000H.
Figure 12-6. Format of 10-Bit A/D Conversion Result Register (ADCR)
Symbol
Address: FF18H, FF19H After reset: 0000H R
FF19H FF18H
000000
ADCR
Cautions 1. When writing to the A/D converter mode register (ADM), analog input channel specification
register (ADS), and A/D port configuration register (ADPC), the contents of ADCR may
become undefined. Read the conversion result following conversion completion before
writing to ADM, ADS, and ADPC. Using timing other than the above may cause an incorrect
conversion result to be read.
2. If data is read from ADCR, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ADCR when the
CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the peripheral hardware clock is stopped. For
details, see CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
266
(3) 8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH)
This register is an 8-bit register that stores the A/D conversion result. The higher 8 bits of 10-bit resolution are
stored.
ADCRH can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 12-7. Format of 8-Bit A/D Conversion Result Register (ADCRH)
Symbol
ADCRH
Address: FF19H After reset: 00H R
76543210
Cautions 1. When writing to the A/D converter mode register (ADM), analog input channel specification
register (ADS), and A/D port configuration register (ADPC), the contents of ADCRH may
become undefined. Read the conversion result following conversion completion before
writing to ADM, ADS, and ADPC. Using timing other than the above may cause an incorrect
conversion result to be read.
2. If data is read from ADCRH, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ADCRH when
the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the peripheral hardware clock is stopped.
For details, see CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 267
(4) Analog input channel specification register (ADS)
This register specifies the input port of the analog voltage to be A/D converted.
ADS can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 12-8. Format of Analog Input Channel Specification Register (ADS)
Address: FF2BH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADS 0 0 0 0 ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0
ADS3 ADS2 ADS1 ADS0 Analog input channel specification
0 0 0 0 ANI0
0 0 0 1 ANI1
0 0 1 0 ANI2
0 0 1 1 ANI3
0 1 0 0 ANI4
0 1 0 1 ANI5
0 1 1 0 ANI6
0 1 1 1 ANI7
1 0 0 0 ANI8Note
Note ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 4 to 7 to 0. Be sure to clear ADS3 to 0 (
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883).
2 Because ADS and ADPC do not control input and output, set the channel used for A/D
conversion in the input mode by using port mode register 8 (PM8) and port mode register 9
(PM9). If the channel is set in the output mode, selection of ADPC is disabled.
3. Do not set a pin to be used as a digital input pin with ADPC with ADS.
4. If data is written to ADS, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to ADS when the CPU is
operating on the subsystem clock and the peripheral hardware clock is stopped. For details,
see CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
268
(5) A/D port configuration register (ADPC)
This register switches the P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7, P90/ANI8 pins to analog input of A/D converter or digital I/O of
port.
ADPC can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 12-9. Format of A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPC)
Address: FF22H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ADPC 0 0 0 0 ADPC3 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0
Analog input (A)/ digital I/O (D) switching
ADPC3 ADPC2 ADPC1 ADPC0
P90/ANI8 P87/ANI7 P86/ANI6 P85/ANI5 P84/ANI4 P83/ANI3 P82/ANI2 P81/ANI1 P80/ANI0
0 0 0 0 A A A A A A A A A
0 0 0 1 A A A A A A A A D
0 0 1 0 A A A A A A A D D
0 0 1 1 A A A A A A D D D
0 1 0 0 A A A A A D D D D
0 1 0 1 A A A A D D D D D
0 1 1 0 A A A D D D D D D
0 1 1 1 A A D D D D D D D
1 0 0 0 A D D D D D D D D
1 0 0 1 D D D D D D D D D
Other than above Setting prohibited
Cautions 1. Set the channel to be used for A/D conversion in the input mode by using port mode
register 8, 9 (PM8, PM9).
2. If data is written to ADPC, a wait cycle is generated. Do not write data to ADPC when the
CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the peripheral hardware clock is stopped. For
details, see CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.
3. P90/ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 269
(6) Port mode register 8 (PM8)
When using the P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 pins for analog input port, set PM80 to PM87 to 1. The output latches of
P80 to P87 at this time may be 0 or 1.
If PM80 to PM87 are set to 0, they cannot be used as analog input port pins.
PM8 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH.
Figure 12-10. Format of Port Mode Register 8 (PM8)
Address: FF28H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PM8 PM87 PM86 PM85 PM84 PM83 PM82 PM81 PM80
PM8n P8n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7)
0 Output mode (Output buffer on)
1 Input mode (Output buffer off)
(7) Port mode register 9 (PM9)Note
When using the P90/ANI8 pin for analog input port, set PM90 to 1. The output latches of P90 at this time may be
0 or 1.
If PM90 is set to 0, they cannot be used as analog input port pin.
PM9 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH.
Figure 12-11. Format of Port Mode Register 9 (PM9)
Address: FF29H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PM9 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PM90
PM90 P90 pin I/O mode selection
0 Output mode (Output buffer on)
1 Input mode (Output buffer off)
Note PM9 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
270
P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7, P90/ANI8 pins are as shown below depending on the settings of ADPC, ADS, PM8 and
PM9.
Table 12-3. Setting Functions of P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7, P90/ANI8 Pins
ADPC PM8, PM9 ADS P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7,
P90/ANI8 Pins
Selects ANI. Analog input (to be converted) Input mode
Does not select ANI. Analog input (not to be converted)
Selects ANI.
Analog input selection
Output mode
Does not select ANI.
Setting prohibited
Input mode − Digital input Digital I/O selection
Output mode − Digital output
Caution P90/ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 271
12.4 A/D Converter Operations
12.4.1 Basic operations of A/D converter
<1> Set bit 0 (ADCE) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 1 to start the operation of the comparator.
<2> Set channels for A/D conversion to analog input by using the A/D port configuration register (ADPC) and set
to input mode by using port mode register 8, 9 (PM8, PM9).
<3> Set A/D conversion time by using bits 5 to 1 (FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0) of ADM.
<4> Select one channel for A/D conversion using the analog input channel specification register (ADS).
<5> Start the conversion operation by setting bit 7 (ADCS) of ADM to 1.
(<6> to <12> are operations performed by hardware.)
<6> The voltage input to the selected analog input channel is sampled by the sample & hold circuit.
<7> When sampling has been done for a certain time, the sample & hold circuit is placed in the hold state and the
sampled voltage is held until the A/D conversion operation has ended.
<8> Bit 9 of the successive approximation register (SAR) is set. The series resistor string voltage tap is set to
(1/2) AVREF by the tap selector.
<9> The voltage difference between the series resistor string voltage tap and sampled voltage is compared by the
voltage comparator. If the analog input is greater than (1/2) AVREF, the MSB of SAR remains set to 1. If the
analog input is smaller than (1/2) AVREF, the MSB is reset to 0.
<10> Next, bit 8 of SAR is automatically set to 1, and the operation proceeds to the next comparison. The series
resistor string voltage tap is selected according to the preset value of bit 9, as described below.
• Bit 9 = 1: (3/4) AVREF
• Bit 9 = 0: (1/4) AVREF
The voltage tap and sampled voltage are compared and bit 8 of SAR is manipulated as follows.
• Analog input voltage ≥ Voltage tap: Bit 8 = 1
• Analog input voltage < Voltage tap: Bit 8 = 0
<11> Comparison is continued in this way up to bit 0 of SAR.
<12> Upon completion of the comparison of 10 bits, an effective digital result value remains in SAR, and the result
value is transferred to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) and then latched.
At the same time, the A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD) can also be generated.
<13> Repeat steps <6> to <12>, until ADCS is cleared to 0.
To stop the A/D converter, clear ADCS to 0.
To restart A/D conversion from the status of ADCE = 1, start from <5>. To start A/D conversion again when
ADCE = 0, set ADCE to 1, wait for 1
μ
s or longer, and start <5>. To change a channel of A/D conversion,
start from <4>.
Cautions 1. Make sure the period of <1> to <5> is 1
μ
s or more.
2. PM9 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
Remark Two types of A/D conversion result registers are available.
• ADCR (16 bits): Store 10-bit A/D conversion value
• ADCRH (8 bits): Store 8-bit A/D conversion value
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
272
Figure 12-12. Basic Operation of A/D Converter
Conversion time
Sampling time
Sampling A/D conversion
Undefined Conversion
result
A/D converter
operation
SAR
ADCR
INTAD
Conversion
result
A/D conversion operations are performed continuously until bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM)
is reset (0) by software.
If a write operation is performed to the analog input channel specification register (ADS) during an A/D conversion
operation, the conversion operation is initialized, and if the ADCS bit is set (1), conversion starts again from the
beginning.
Reset signal generation clears the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) to 0000H or 00H.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 273
12.4.2 Input voltage and conversion results
The relationship between the analog input voltage input to the analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI8Note) and the
theoretical A/D conversion result (stored in the 10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR)) is shown by the following
expression.
SAR = INT ( × 1024 + 0.5)
ADCR = SAR × 64
or
(ADCR − 0.5) × ≤ VAIN < (ADCR + 0.5) ×
where, INT( ): Function which returns integer part of value in parentheses
V
AIN: Analog input voltage
AVREF: AVREF pin voltage
ADCR: A/D conversion result register (ADCR) value
SAR: Successive approximation register
Note P90/ ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
Figure 12-13 shows the relationship between the analog input voltage and the A/D conversion result.
Figure 12-13. Relationship Between Analog Input Voltage and A/D Conversion Result
1023
1022
1021
3
2
1
0
FFC0H
FF80H
FF40H
00C0H
0080H
0040H
0000H
A/D conversion result
(ADCR)
SAR ADCR
1
2048
1
1024
3
2048
2
1024
5
2048
Input voltage/AVREF
3
1024
2043
2048
1022
1024
2045
2048
1023
1024
2047
2048
1
VAIN
AVREF
AVREF
1024
AVREF
1024
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
274
12.4.3 A/D converter operation mode
The operation mode of the A/D converter is the select mode. One channel of analog input is selected from ANI0 to
ANI8 by the analog input channel specification register (ADS) and A/D conversion is executed.
(1) A/D conversion operation
By setting bit 7 (ADCS) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 1, the A/D conversion operation of the
voltage, which is applied to the analog input pin specified by the analog input channel specification register
(ADS), is started.
When A/D conversion has been completed, the result of the A/D conversion is stored in the A/D conversion result
register (ADCR), and an interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated. When one A/D conversion has been
completed, the next A/D conversion operation is immediately started.
If ADS is rewritten during A/D conversion, the A/D conversion operation under execution is stopped and restarted
from the beginning.
If 0 is written to ADCS during A/D conversion, A/D conversion is immediately stopped. At this time, the
conversion result immediately before is retained.
Figure 12-14. A/D Conversion Operation
ANIn
Rewriting ADM
ADCS = 1 Rewriting ADS ADCS = 0
ANIn
ANIn ANIn ANIm
ANIn ANIm ANIm
Stopped
Conversion result
immediately before
is retained
A/D conversion
ADCR,
ADCRH
INTAD
Conversion is stopped
Conversion result immediately
before is retained
Caution ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
Remarks 1. n = 0 to 8
2. m = 0 to 8
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 275
The setting methods are described below.
<1> Set bit 0 (ADCE) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 1.
<2> Set the channel to be used in the analog input mode by using bits 3 to 0 (ADPC3 to ADPC0) of the A/D
port configuration register (ADPC) and bits 7 to 0 (PM87 to PM80) of port mode register 8 (PM8), bit 0
(PM90) of port mode register 9 (PM9)Note.
<3> Select conversion time by using bits 5 to 1 (FR2 to FR0, LV1, and LV0) of ADM.
<4> Select a channel to be used by using bits 3 to 0 (ADS3 to ADS0) of the analog input channel
specification register (ADS).
<5> Set bit 7 (ADCS) of ADM to 1 to start A/D conversion.
<6> When one A/D conversion has been completed, an interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated.
<7> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH).
<Change the channel>
<8> Change the channel using bits 3 to 0 (ADS3 to ADS0) of ADS to start A/D conversion.
<9> When one A/D conversion has been completed, an interrupt request signal (INTAD) is generated.
<10> Transfer the A/D conversion data to the A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH).
<Complete A/D conversion>
<11> Clear ADCS to 0.
<12> Clear ADCE to 0.
Note PM9 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
Cautions 1. Make sure the period of <1> to <5> is 1
μ
s or more.
2. <1> may be done between <2> and <4>.
3. <1> can be omitted. However, ignore data of the first conversion after <5> in this case.
4. The period from <6> to <9> differs from the conversion time set using bits 5 to 1 (FR2 to
FR0, LV1, LV0) of ADM. The period from <8> to <9> is the conversion time set using FR2
to FR0, LV1, and LV0.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
276
12.5 How to Read A/D Converter Characteristics Table
Here, special terms unique to the A/D converter are explained.
(1) Resolution
This is the minimum analog input voltage that can be identified. That is, the percentage of the analog input
voltage per bit of digital output is called 1LSB (Least Significant Bit). The percentage of 1LSB with respect to the
full scale is expressed by %FSR (Full Scale Range).
1LSB is as follows when the resolution is 10 bits.
1LSB = 1/210 = 1/1024
= 0.098%FSR
Accuracy has no relation to resolution, but is determined by overall error.
(2) Overall error
This shows the maximum error value between the actual measured value and the theoretical value.
Zero-scale error, full-scale error, integral linearity error, and differential linearity errors that are combinations of
these express the overall error.
Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error in the characteristics table.
(3) Quantization error
When analog values are converted to digital values, a ±1/2LSB error naturally occurs. In an A/D converter, an
analog input voltage in a range of ±1/2LSB is converted to the same digital code, so a quantization error cannot
be avoided.
Note that the quantization error is not included in the overall error, zero-scale error, full-scale error, integral
linearity error, and differential linearity error in the characteristics table.
Figure 12-15. Overall Error Figure 12-16. Quantization Error
Ideal line
0……0
1……1
Digital output
Overall
error
Analog input
AV
REF
0
0……0
1……1
Digital output
Quantization error
1/2LSB
1/2LSB
Analog input
0AVREF
(4) Zero-scale error
This shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical
value (1/2LSB) when the digital output changes from 0......000 to 0......001.
If the actual measurement value is greater than the theoretical value, it shows the difference between the actual
measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical value (3/2LSB) when the digital output
changes from 0……001 to 0……010.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 277
(5) Full-scale error
This shows the difference between the actual measurement value of the analog input voltage and the theoretical
value (Full-scale − 3/2LSB) when the digital output changes from 1......110 to 1......111.
(6) Integral linearity error
This shows the degree to which the conversion characteristics deviate from the ideal linear relationship. It
expresses the maximum value of the difference between the actual measurement value and the ideal straight line
when the zero-scale error and full-scale error are 0.
(7) Differential linearity error
While the ideal width of code output is 1LSB, this indicates the difference between the actual measurement value
and the ideal value.
Figure 12-17. Zero-Scale Error Figure 12-18. Full-Scale Error
111
011
010
001 Zero-scale error
Ideal line
000
012 3 AV
REF
Digital output (Lower 3 bits)
Analog input (LSB)
111
110
101
000
0
AVREF−3
Full-scale error
Ideal line
Analog input (LSB)
Digital output (Lower 3 bits)
AVREF−2AVREF−1
AV
REF
Figure 12-19. Integral Linearity Error Figure 12-20. Differential Linearity Error
0
AV
REF
Digital output
Analog input
Integral linearity
error
Ideal line
1……1
0……0
0
AV
REF
Digital output
Analog input
Differential
linearity error
1……1
0……0
Ideal 1LSB width
(8) Conversion time
This expresses the time from the start of sampling to when the digital output is obtained.
The sampling time is included in the conversion time in the characteristics table.
(9) Sampling time
This is the time the analog switch is turned on for the analog voltage to be sampled by the sample & hold circuit.
Sampling
time Conversion time
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
278
12.6 Cautions for A/D Converter
(1) Operating current in STOP mode
The A/D converter stops operating in the STOP mode. At this time, the operating current can be reduced by
clearing bit 7 (ADCS) and bit 0 (ADCE) of the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 0.
To restart from the standby status, clear bit 6 (ADIF) of interrupt request flag register 1L (IF1L) to 0 and start
operation.
(2) Input range of ANI0 to ANI8Note
Observe the rated range of the ANI0 to ANI8 input voltage. If a voltage of AVREF or higher and AVSS or lower
(even in the range of absolute maximum ratings) is input to an analog input channel, the converted value of that
channel becomes undefined. In addition, the converted values of the other channels may also be affected.
(3) Conflicting operations
<1> Conflict between A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) write and ADCR or ADCRH read by
instruction upon the end of conversion
ADCR or ADCRH read has priority. After the read operation, the new conversion result is written to ADCR
or ADCRH.
<2> Conflict between ADCR or ADCRH write and A/D converter mode register (ADM) write, analog input
channel specification register (ADS), or A/D port configuration register (ADPC) write upon the end of
conversion
ADM, ADS, or ADPC write has priority. ADCR or ADCRH write is not performed, nor is the conversion end
interrupt signal (INTAD) generated.
(4) Noise countermeasures
To maintain the 10-bit resolution, attention must be paid to noise input to the AVREF pin and pins ANI0 to ANI8.
<1> Connect a capacitor with a low equivalent resistance and a good frequency response to the power supply.
<2> The higher the output impedance of the analog input source, the greater the influence. To reduce the
noise, connecting external C as shown in Figure 12-21 is recommended.
<3> Do not switch these pins with other pins during conversion.
<4> The accuracy is improved if the HALT mode is set immediately after the start of conversion.
Note ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 279
Figure 12-21. Analog Input Pin Connection
Reference
voltage
input
C = 100 to 1,000 pF
If there is a possibility that noise equal to or higher than AV
REF
or
equal to or lower than AV
SS
may enter, clamp with a diode with a
small V
F
value (0.3 V or lower).
AV
REF
AV
SS
V
SS
ANI0 to ANI8
Note
Note ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
(5) P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7, P90/ANI8
<1> The analog input pins (ANI0 to ANI8) are also used as I/O port pins (P80 to P87, P90).
When A/D conversion is performed with any of ANI0 to ANI8 selected, do not access P80 to P87 and P90
while conversion is in progress; otherwise the conversion resolution may be degraded. It is recommended
to select pins used as P80 to P87, P90 starting with the P80/ANI0 that is the furthest from AVREF.
<2> If a digital pulse is applied to the pins adjacent to the pins currently used for A/D conversion, the expected
value of the A/D conversion may not be obtained due to coupling noise. Therefore, do not apply a pulse to
the pins adjacent to the pin undergoing A/D conversion.
(6) Input impedance of ANI0 to ANI8 pins
This A/D converter charges a sampling capacitor for sampling during sampling time.
Therefore, only a leakage current flows when sampling is not in progress, and a current that charges the
capacitor flows during sampling. Consequently, the input impedance fluctuates depending on whether sampling
is in progress, and on the other states.
To make sure that sampling is effective, however, it is recommended to keep the output impedance of the analog
input source to within 10 kΩ, and to connect a capacitor of about 100 pF to the ANI0 to ANI8 pins (see Figure 12-
21).
(7) AVREF pin input impedance
A series resistor string of several tens of kΩ is connected between the AVREF and AVSS pins.
Therefore, if the output impedance of the reference voltage source is high, this will result in a series connection to
the series resistor string between the AVREF and AVSS pins, resulting in a large reference voltage error.
Caution P90/ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
280
(8) Interrupt request flag (ADIF)
The interrupt request flag (ADIF) is not cleared even if the analog input channel specification register (ADS) is
changed.
Therefore, if an analog input pin is changed during A/D conversion, the A/D conversion result and ADIF for the
pre-change analog input may be set just before the ADS rewrite. Caution is therefore required since, at this time,
when ADIF is read immediately after the ADS rewrite, ADIF is set despite the fact A/D conversion for the post-
change analog input has not ended.
When A/D conversion is stopped and then resumed, clear ADIF before the A/D conversion operation is resumed.
Figure 12-22. Timing of A/D Conversion End Interrupt Request Generation
ADS rewrite
(start of ANIn conversion)
A/D conversion
ADCR
ADIF
ANIn ANIn ANIm ANIm
ANIn ANIn ANIm ANIm
ADS rewrite
(start of ANIm conversion)
ADIF is set but ANIm conversion
has not ended.
Remarks 1. n = 0 to 8
2. m = 0 to 8
(9) Conversion results just after A/D conversion start
The first A/D conversion value immediately after A/D conversion starts may not fall within the rating range if the
ADCS bit is set to 1 within 1
μ
s after the ADCE bit was set to 1, or if the ADCS bit is set to 1 with the ADCE bit =
0. Take measures such as polling the A/D conversion end interrupt request (INTAD) and removing the first
conversion result.
(10) A/D conversion result register (ADCR, ADCRH) read operation
When a write operation is performed to the A/D converter mode register (ADM), analog input channel
specification register (ADS), and A/D port configuration register (ADPC), the contents of ADCR and ADCRH may
become undefined. Read the conversion result following conversion completion before writing to ADM, ADS, and
ADPC. Using a timing other than the above may cause an incorrect conversion result to be read.
Caution ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
CHAPTER 12 A/D CONVERTER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 281
(11) Internal equivalent circuit
The equivalent circuit of the analog input block is shown below.
Figure 12-23. Internal Equivalent Circuit of ANIn Pin
ANIn
C1 C2
R1
Table 12-4. Resistance and Capacitance Values of Equivalent Circuit (Reference Values)
AVREF R1 C1 C2
4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V 8.1 kΩ 8 pF 5 pF
2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V 31 kΩ 8 pF 5 pF
2.3 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V 381 kΩ 8 pF 5 pF
Caution ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, and 78F0886 only.
Remarks 1. The resistance and capacitance values shown in Table 12-4 are not guaranteed values.
2. n = 0 to 8
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
282
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
The 78K0/FC2 incorporate serial interfaces UART60 and UART61.
13.1 Functions of Serial Interfaces UART60 and UART61
Serial interfaces UART60 and UART61 have the following two modes.
(1) Operation stop mode
This mode is used when serial communication is not executed and can enable a reduction in the power
consumption.
For details, see 13.4.1 Operation stop mode.
(2) Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode
This mode supports the LIN (Local Interconnect Network)-bus. The functions of this mode are outlined below.
For details, see 13.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode and 13.4.3 Dedicated baud rate
generator.
• Maximum transfer rate: 625 kbps
• Two-pin configuration TxD6n: Transmit data output pin
R
XD6n: Receive data input pin
• Data length of communication data can be selected from 7 or 8 bits.
• Dedicated internal 8-bit baud rate generator allowing any baud rate to be set
• Transmission and reception can be performed independently (full-duplex operation).
• Twelve operating clock inputs selectable
• MSB- or LSB-first communication selectable
• Inverted transmission operation
• Sync break field transmission from 13 to 20 bits
• More than 11 bits can be identified for sync break field reception (SBF reception flag provided).
Cautions 1. The TXD6n output inversion function inverts only the transmission side and not the
reception side. To use this function, the reception side must be ready for reception of
inverted data.
2. If clock supply to serial interfaces UART60 and UART61 are not stopped (e.g., in the HALT
mode), normal operation continues. If clock supply to serial interfaces UART60 and
UART61 are stopped (e.g., in the STOP mode), each register stops operating, and holds the
value immediately before clock supply was stopped. The TXD6n pins also holds the value
immediately before clock supply was stopped and outputs it. However, the operation is not
guaranteed after clock supply is resumed. reset the circuit by setting POWER6n = 0, RXE6n
= 0, and TXE6n = 0.
3. Set POWER6n = 1 and then set TXE6n = 1 (transmission) or RXE6n = 1 (reception) to start
communication.
4. TXE6n and RXE6n are synchronized by the base clock (fXCLK6) set by CKSR6n. To enable
transmission or reception again, set TXE6n or RXE6n to 1 at least two clocks of the base
clock after TXE6n or RXEn6 has been cleared to 0. If TXE6n or RXE6n is set within two
clocks of the base clock, the transmission circuit or reception circuit may not be initialized.
5. Set transmit data to TXB6n at least one base clock (fXCLK6) after setting TXE6n = 1.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 283
Cautions 6. If data is continuously transmitted, the communication timing from the stop bit to the next
start bit is extended two operating clocks of the macro. However, this does not affect the
result of communication because the reception side initializes the timing when it has
detected a start bit. Do not use the continuous transmission function if the interface is
used in LIN communication operation.
Remarks 1. LIN stands for Local Interconnect Network and is a low-speed (1 to 20 kbps) serial
communication protocol intended to aid the cost reduction of an automotive network.
LIN communication is single-master communication, and up to 15 slaves can be connected to
one master.
The LIN slaves are used to control the switches, actuators, and sensors, and these are
connected to the LIN master via the LIN network.
Normally, the LIN master is connected to a network such as CAN (Controller Area Network).
In addition, the LIN bus uses a single-wire method and is connected to the nodes via a
transceiver that complies with ISO9141.
n the LIN protocol, the master transmits a frame with baud rate information and the slave
receives it and corrects the baud rate error. Therefore, communication is possible when the baud
rate error in the slave is ±15% or less.
2. n = 0, 1
Figures 13-1 and 13-2 outline the transmission and reception operations of LIN.
Figure 13-1. LIN Transmission Operation
LIN bus
Wakeup
signal frame
8 bits
Note 1
55H
transmission
Data
transmission
Data
transmission
Data
transmission
Data
transmission
13-bit
Note 2
SBF
transmission
Note 3
Sync
break field
Sync
field
Identifier
field
Data field Data field Checksum
field
TXD6n
INTST6n
Notes 1. The wakeup signal frame is substituted by 80H transmission in the 8-bit mode.
2. The sync break field is output by hardware. The output width is the bit length set by bits 4 to 2 (SBL62n
to SBL60n) of asynchronous serial interface control register 6n (ASICL6n). If more precise output width
adjustment is necessary, use baud rate generator control register 6n (BRGC6n)
(see 13.4.2 (2) (h) SBF transmission).
3. INTST6n is output on completion of each transmission. It is also output when SBF is transmitted.
Remark The interval between each field is controlled by software.
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
284
Figure 13-2. LIN Reception Operation
LIN bus
13-bit
SBF reception
SF
reception
ID
reception
Data
reception
Data
reception
Data
reception
<3>
<1>
<4>
Wakeup
signal frame
Sync
break field
Sync
field
Identifer
field
Data field Data field Checksum
field
RXD6n
Reception interrupt
(INTSR6n)
Edge detection
(INTPn)
Capture timer Disable Enable
Disable Enable
<2> <5>
Reception processing is as follows.
<1> The wakeup signal is detected at the edge of the pin, and enables UART6n and sets the SBF reception
mode.
<2> Reception continues until the STOP bit is detected. When an SBF with low-level data of 11 bits or more has
been detected, it is assumed that SBF reception has been completed correctly, and an interrupt signal is
output. If an SBF with low-level data of less than 11 bits has been detected, it is assumed that an SBF
reception error has occurred. The interrupt signal is not output and the SBF reception mode is restored.
<3> If SBF reception has been completed correctly, an interrupt signal is output. Start 16-bit timer/event counter
00 by the SBF reception end interrupt servicing and measure the bit interval (pulse width) of the sync field
(see 6.4.3 Pulse width measurement operation). Detection of errors OVE6n, PE6n, and FE6n is
suppressed, and error detection processing of UART communication and data transfer of the shift register
and RXB6n is not performed. The shift register holds the reset value FFH.
<4> Calculate the baud rate error from the bit length of the sync field, disable UART6n after SF reception, and
then re-set baud rate generator control register 6n (BRGC6n).
<5> Distinguish the checksum field by software. Also perform processing by software to initialize UART6n after
reception of the checksum field and to set the SBF reception mode again.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 285
Figure 13-3 and 13-4 show the port configuration for LIN reception operation.
The wakeup signal transmitted from the LIN master is received by detecting the edge of the external interrupt
(INTP0 and INTP1). The length of the sync field transmitted from the LIN master can be measured using the external
event capture operation of 16-bit timer/event counter 00, and the baud rate error can be calculated.
The input source of the reception port input (RxD60 and RxD61) can be input to the external interrupt (INTP0 and
INTP1) and 16-bit timer/event counter 00 by port input switch control (ISC), without connecting RxD60, RxD61, INTP0,
INTP1, TI010 externally.
Figure 13-3. Port Configuration for LIN Reception Operation
RxD60 input
P14/RxD60
Port mode
(PM14)
Output latch
(P14)
Selector
TI010 input
P01/TI010
Port input
switch control
(ISC1)
<ISC1>
0: Select TI010 (P01)
1: Select RxD60 (P14)
Port mode
(PM01)
Output latch
(P01)
Selector Selector
INTP0 input
P120/INTP0
Port input
switch control
(ISC3)
<ISC3>
0: Select INTP0 (P120)
1: Select RxD60 (P14)
Port mode
(PM120)
Output latch
(P120)
Selector Selector
Remark ISC1, ISC3: Bits 1 and 3 of the input switch control register (ISC) (see Figure 13-19)
The peripheral functions used in the LIN communication operation are shown below.
<Peripheral functions used>
• External interrupt (INTP0); wakeup signal detection
Use: Detects the wakeup signal edges and detects start of communication.
• 16-bit timer/event counter 00 (TI010); baud rate error detection
Use: Detects the baud rate error (measures the TI010 input edge interval in the capture mode) by detecting the
sync field (SF) length and divides it by the number of bits.
• Serial interface UART60.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
286
Figure 13-4. Port Configuration for LIN Reception Operation (UART61)
RxD61 input
P11/RxD61
Port mode
(PM11)
Output latch
(P11)
Selector
INTP1 input
P30/INTP1
Port input
switch control
(ISC4)
<ISC4>
0: Select INTP1 (P30)
1: Select RxD61 (P11)
Port mode
(PM30)
Output latch4
(P30)
Selector Selector
Remark ISC4: Bit 4 of the input switch control register (ISC) (see Figure 13-19)
The peripheral functions used in the LIN communication operation are shown below.
<Peripheral functions used>
• External interrupt (INTP1); wakeup signal detection
Use: Detects the wakeup signal edges and detects start of communication.
• Serial interface UART61.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 287
13.2 Configurations of Serial Interface UART60 and UART61
Serial interfaces UART60 and UART61 include the following hardware.
Table 13-1. Configurations of Serial Interface UART60 and UART61
Item Configuration
Registers Receive buffer register 6n (RXB6n)
Receive shift register 6n (RXS6n)
Transmit buffer register 6n (TXB6n)
Transmit shift register 6n (TXS6n)
Control registers Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n)
Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6n (ASIS6n)
Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6n (ASIF6n)
Clock selection register 6n (CKSR6n)
Baud rate generator control register 6n (BRGC6n)
Asynchronous serial interface control register 6n (ASICL6n)
Input switch control register (ISC)
Port mode register 1 (PM1)
Port register 1 (P1)
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
288
Figure 13-5. Block Diagram of Serial Interface UART60
TI010, INTP0
Internal bus
Asynchronous serial interface
control register 60 (ASICL60)
Transmit buffer register 60
(TXB60)
Transmit shift register 60
(TXS60)
T
X
D60/P13
INTST60
Baud rate
generator
Asynchronous serial interface
control register 60 (ASICL60)
Reception control
Receive shift register 60
(RXS60)
Receive buffer register 60
(RXB60)
R
X
D60/P14
INTSR60
Baud rate
generator
Filter
INTSRE60
Asynchronous serial
interface reception error
status register 60 (ASIS60)
Asynchronous serial
interface operation mode
register 60 (ASIM60)
Asynchronous serial
interface transmission
status register 60 (ASIF60)
Transmission control
Registers
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
f
PRS
/2
2
f
PRS
/2
3
f
PRS
/2
4
f
PRS
/2
5
f
PRS
/2
6
f
PRS
/2
7
f
PRS
/2
8
f
PRS
/2
9
f
PRS
/2
10
8-bit timer/
event counter
50 output
8
Reception unit
Transmission unit
Clock selection
register 60 (CKSR60)
Baud rate generator
control register 60
(BRGC60)
PM13
8
Selector
Output latch
P13
Note Selectable with input switch control register (ISC)
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 289
Figure 13-6. Block Diagram of Serial Interface UART61
Internal bus
Asynchronous serial interface
control register 61 (ASICL61)
Transmit buffer register 61
(TXB61)
Transmit shift register 61
(TXS61)
T
X
D61/P10/SCK10
INTST61
Baud rate
generator
Asynchronous serial interface
control register 61 (ASICL61)
Reception control
Receive shift register 61
(RXS61)
Receive buffer register 61
(RXB61)
R
X
D61/P11/SI10
INTSR61
Baud rate
generator
Filter
INTSRE61
Asynchronous serial
interface reception error
status register 61 (ASIS61)
Asynchronous serial
interface operation mode
register 61 (ASIM61)
Asynchronous serial
interface transmission
status register 61 (ASIF61)
Transmission control
Registers
f
PRS
f
PRS
/2
f
PRS
/2
2
f
PRS
/2
3
f
PRS
/2
4
f
PRS
/2
5
f
PRS
/2
6
f
PRS
/2
7
f
PRS
/2
8
f
PRS
/2
9
f
PRS
/2
10
8-bit timer/
event counter
50 output
8
Reception unit
Transmission unit
Clock selection
register 61 (CKSR61)
Baud rate generator
control register 61
(BRGC61)
PM10
8
Selector
Output latch
P10
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
290
(1) Receive buffer register 6n (RXB6n)
This 8-bit register stores parallel data converted by receive shift register 6n (RXS6n).
Each time 1 byte of data has been received, new receive data is transferred to this register from RXS6n. If the
data length is set to 7 bits, data is transferred as follows.
• In LSB-first reception, the receive data is transferred to bits 0 to 6 of RXB6n and the MSB of RXB6n is always 0.
• In MSB-first reception, the receive data is transferred to bits 1 to 7 of RXB6n and the LSB of RXB6n is always 0.
If an overrun error (OVE6n) occurs, the receive data is not transferred to RXB6n.
RXB6n can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. No data can be written to this register.
Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH.
(2) Receive shift register 6n (RXS6n)
This register converts the serial data input to the RXD6n pins into parallel data.
RXS6n cannot be directly manipulated by a program.
(3) Transmit buffer register 6n (TXB6n)
This buffer register is used to set transmit data. Transmission is started when data is written to TXB6n.
This register can be read or written by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH.
Cautions 1. Do not write data to TXB6n when bit 1 (TXBF6n) of asynchronous serial interface
transmission status register 6n (ASIF6n) is 1.
2. Do not refresh (write the same value to) TXB6n by software during a communication
operation (when bits 7 and 6 (POWER6n, TXE6n) of asynchronous serial interface
operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n) are 1 or when bits 7 and 5 (POWER6n, RXE6n) of
ASIM6n are 1).
3. Set transmit data to TXB6n at least one base clock (fXCLK6) after setting TXE6n = 1.
(4) Transmit shift register 6n (TXS6n)
This register transmits the data transferred from TXB6n from the TxD6n pins as serial data. Data is transferred
from TXB6n immediately after TXB6n is written for the first transmission, or immediately before INTST6n occurs
after one frame was transmitted for continuous transmission. Data is transferred from TXB6n and transmitted
from the TXD6n pins at the falling edge of the base clock.
TXS6n cannot be directly manipulated by a program.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 291
13.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interfaces UART60 and UART61
Serial interfaces UART60 and UART61 are controlled by the following nine registers.
• Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n)
• Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6n (ASIS6n)
• Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6n (ASIF6n)
• Clock selection register 6n (CKSR6n)
• Baud rate generator control register 6n (BRGC6n)
• Asynchronous serial interface control register 6n (ASICL6n)
• Input switch control register (ISC)
• Port mode register 1 (PM1)
• Port register 1 (P1)
(1) Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n)
This 8-bit register controls the serial communication operations of serial interface UART60 and UART61.
This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to 01H.
Remarks 1. ASIM6n can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication
operation (when bits 7 and 6 (POWER6n, TXE6n) of ASIM6n = 1 or bits 7 and 5 (POWER6n,
RXE6n) of ASIM6n = 1).
2. n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
292
Figure 13-7. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 60 (ASIM60) (1/2)
Address: FF2EH After reset: 01H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> 4 3 2 1 0
ASIM60 POWER60 TXE60 RXE60 PS610 PS600 CL60 SL60 ISRM60
POWER60 Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock
0
Note 1 Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously
resets the internal circuitNote 2.
1 Enables operation of the internal operation clock
TXE60 Enables/disables transmission
0 Disables transmission (synchronously resets the transmission circuit).
1 Enables transmission
RXE60 Enables/disables reception
0 Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit).
1 Enables reception
Notes 1. The output of the TXD60 pins goes high level and the input from the RXD60 pins is fixed to the high
level when POWER60 = 0 during transmission.
2. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 60 (ASIS60), asynchronous serial
interface transmission status register 60 (ASIF60), bit 7 (SBRF60) and bit 6 (SBRT60) of asynchronous
serial interface control register 60 (ASICL60), and receive buffer register 60 (RXB60) are reset.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 293
Figure 13-7. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 60 (ASIM60) (2/2)
PS610 PS600 Transmission operation Reception operation
0 0 Does not output parity bit. Reception without parity
0 1 Outputs 0 parity. Reception as 0 parityNote
1 0 Outputs odd parity. Judges as odd parity.
1 1 Outputs even parity. Judges as even parity.
CL60 Specifies character length of transmit/receive data
0 Character length of data = 7 bits
1 Character length of data = 8 bits
SL60 Specifies number of stop bits of transmit data
0 Number of stop bits = 1
1 Number of stop bits = 2
ISRM60 Enables/disables occurrence of reception completion interrupt in case of error
0 “INTSRE60” occurs in case of error (at this time, INTSR60 does not occur).
1 “INTSR60” occurs in case of error (at this time, INTSRE60 does not occur).
Note If “reception as 0 parity” is selected, the parity is not judged. Therefore, bit 2 (PE60) of asynchronous serial
interface reception error status register 60 (ASIS60) is not set and the error interrupt does not occur.
Cautions 1. To start the transmission, set POWER60 to 1 and then set TXE60 to 1. To stop the
transmission, clear TXE60 to 0, and then clear POWER60 to 0.
2. To start the reception, set POWER60 to 1 and then set RXE60 to 1. To stop the reception,
clear RXE60 to 0, and then clear POWER60 to 0.
3. Set POWER60 to 1 and then set RXE60 to 1 while a high level is input to the RxD60 pins. If
POWER60 is set to 1 and RXE60 is set to 1 while a low level is input, reception is started.
4. TXE60 and RXE60 are synchronized by the base clock (fXCLK6) set by CKSR60. To enable
transmission or reception again, set TXE60 or RXE60 to 1 at least two clocks of the base
clock after TXE60 or RXE60 has been cleared to 0. If TXE60 or RXE60 is set within two clocks
of the base clock, the transmission circuit or reception circuit may not be initialized.
5. Set transmit data to TXB60 at least one base clock (fXCLK6) after setting TXE60 = 1.
6. Clear the TXE60 and RXE60 bits to 0 before rewriting the PS610, PS600, and CL60 bits.
7. Fix the PS610 and PS600 bits to 0 when used in LIN communication operation.
8. Clear TXE60 to 0 before rewriting the SL60 bit. Reception is always performed with “the
number of stop bits = 1”, and therefore, is not affected by the set value of the SL60 bit.
9. Make sure that RXE60 = 0 when rewriting the ISRM60 bit.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
294
Figure 13-8. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 61 (ASIM61) (1/2)
Address: FF2FH After reset: 01H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> 4 3 2 1 0
ASIM61 POWER61 TXE61 RXE61 PS611 PS601 CL61 SL61 ISRM61
POWER61 Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock
0
Note 1 Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously
resets the internal circuitNote 2.
1 Enables operation of the internal operation clock
TXE61 Enables/disables transmission
0 Disables transmission (synchronously resets the transmission circuit).
1 Enables transmission
RXE61 Enables/disables reception
0 Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit).
1 Enables reception
Notes 1. The output of the TXD61 pins goes high level and the input from the RXD61 pins is fixed to the high
level when POWER61 = 0 during transmission.
2. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 61 (ASIS61), asynchronous serial
interface transmission status register 61 (ASIF61), bit 7 (SBRF61) and bit 6 (SBRT61) of asynchronous
serial interface control register 61 (ASICL61), and receive buffer register 61 (RXB61) are reset.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 295
Figure 13-8. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 61 (ASIM61) (2/2)
PS611 PS601 Transmission operation Reception operation
0 0 Does not output parity bit. Reception without parity
0 1 Outputs 0 parity. Reception as 0 parityNote
1 0 Outputs odd parity. Judges as odd parity.
1 1 Outputs even parity. Judges as even parity.
CL61 Specifies character length of transmit/receive data
0 Character length of data = 7 bits
1 Character length of data = 8 bits
SL61 Specifies number of stop bits of transmit data
0 Number of stop bits = 1
1 Number of stop bits = 2
ISRM61 Enables/disables occurrence of reception completion interrupt in case of error
0 “INTSRE61” occurs in case of error (at this time, INTSR61 does not occur).
1 “INTSR61” occurs in case of error (at this time, INTSRE61 does not occur).
Note If “reception as 0 parity” is selected, the parity is not judged. Therefore, bit 2 (PE61) of asynchronous serial
interface reception error status register 61 (ASIS61) is not set and the error interrupt does not occur.
Cautions 1. To start the transmission, set POWER61 to 1 and then set TXE61 to 1. To stop the
transmission, clear TXE61 to 0, and then clear POWER61 to 0.
2. To start the reception, set POWER61 to 1 and then set RXE61 to 1. To stop the reception,
clear RXE61 to 0, and then clear POWER61 to 0.
3. Set POWER61 to 1 and then set RXE61 to 1 while a high level is input to the RxD61 pins. If
POWER61 is set to 1 and RXE61 is set to 1 while a low level is input, reception is started.
4. TXE61 and RXE61 are synchronized by the base clock (fXCLK6) set by CKSR61. To enable
transmission or reception again, set TXE61 or RXE61 to 1 at least two clocks of the base
clock after TXE61 or RXE61 has been cleared to 0. If TXE61 or RXE61 is set within two clocks
of the base clock, the transmission circuit or reception circuit may not be initialized.
5. Set transmit data to TXB61 at least one base clock (fXCLK6) after setting TXE61 = 1.
6. Clear the TXE61 and RXE61 bits to 0 before rewriting the PS611, PS601, and CL61 bits.
7. Fix the PS611 and PS601 bits to 0 when used in LIN communication operation.
8. Clear TXE61 to 0 before rewriting the SL61 bit. Reception is always performed with “the
number of stop bits = 1”, and therefore, is not affected by the set value of the SL61 bit.
9. Make sure that RXE61 = 0 when rewriting the ISRM61 bit.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
296
(2) Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6n (ASIS6n)
This register indicates an error status on completion of reception by serial interfaces UART60 and UART61. It
includes three error flag bits (PE6n, FE6n, OVE6n).
This register is read-only by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation, or clearing bit 7 (POWER6n) or bit 5 (RXE6n) of ASIM6n to 0 clears this register to 00H.
00H is read when this register is read. If a reception error occurs, read ASIS6n and then read receive buffer
register 6n (RXB6n) to clear the error flag.
Figure 13-9. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Reception Error Status Register 60 (ASIS60)
Address: FF53H After reset: 00H R
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ASIS60 0 0 0 0 0 PE60 FE60 OVE60
PE60 Status flag indicating parity error
0 If POWER60 = 0 and RXE60 = 0, or if ASIS60 register is read
1 If the parity of transmit data does not match the parity bit on completion of reception
FE60 Status flag indicating framing error
0 If POWER60 = 0 and RXE60 = 0, or if ASIS60 register is read
1 If the stop bit is not detected on completion of reception
OVE60 Status flag indicating overrun error
0 If POWER60 = 0 and RXE60 = 0, or if ASIS60 register is read
1
If receive data is set to the RXB60 register and the next reception operation is completed before the
data is read.
Cautions 1. The operation of the PE60 bit differs depending on the set values of the PS610 and PS600
bits of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 60 (ASIM60).
2. The first bit of the receive data is checked as the stop bit, regardless of the number of stop
bits.
3. If an overrun error occurs, the next receive data is not written to receive buffer register 60
(RXB60) but discarded.
4. If data is read from ASIS60, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ASIS60 when the
CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the high-speed system clock is stopped. For
details, see CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 297
Figure 13-10. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Reception Error Status Register 61 (ASIS61)
Address: FF2FH After reset: 00H R
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ASIS61 0 0 0 0 0 PE61 FE61 OVE61
PE61 Status flag indicating parity error
0 If POWER61 = 0 and RXE61 = 0, or if ASIS61 register is read
1 If the parity of transmit data does not match the parity bit on completion of reception
FE61 Status flag indicating framing error
0 If POWER61 = 0 and RXE61 = 0, or if ASIS61 register is read
1 If the stop bit is not detected on completion of reception
OVE61 Status flag indicating overrun error
0 If POWER61 = 0 and RXE61 = 0, or if ASIS61 register is read
1
If receive data is set to the RXB61 register and the next reception operation is completed before the
data is read.
Cautions 1. The operation of the PE61 bit differs depending on the set values of the PS611 and PS601
bits of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 61 (ASIM61).
2. The first bit of the receive data is checked as the stop bit, regardless of the number of stop
bits.
3. If an overrun error occurs, the next receive data is not written to receive buffer register 61
(RXB61) but discarded.
4. If data is read from ASIS61, a wait cycle is generated. Do not read data from ASIS6 when the
CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the high-speed system clock is stopped. For
details, see CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
298
(3) Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6n (ASIF6n)
This register indicates the status of transmission by serial interfaces UART60 and UART61. It includes two status
flag bits (TXBF6n and TXSF6n).
Transmission can be continued without disruption even during an interrupt period, by writing the next data to the
TXB6n register after data has been transferred from the TXB6n register to the TXS6n register.
This register is read-only by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation, or clearing bit 7 (POWER6n) or bit 6 (TXE6n) of ASIM6n to 0 clears this register to 00H.
Figure 13-11. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmission Status Register 60 (ASIF60)
Address: FF55H After reset: 00H R
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ASIF60 0 0 0 0 0 0 TXBF60 TXSF60
TXBF60 Transmit buffer data flag
0 If POWER60 = 0 or TXE60 = 0, or if data is transferred to transmit shift register 60 (TXS60)
1 If data is written to transmit buffer register 60 (TXB60) (if data exists in TXB60)
TXSF60 Transmit shift register data flag
0
If POWER60 = 0 or TXE60 = 0, or if the next data is not transferred from transmit buffer register 60
(TXB60) after completion of transfer
1 If data is transferred from transmit buffer register 60 (TXB60) (if data transmission is in progress)
Cautions 1. To transmit data continuously, write the first transmit data (first byte) to the TXB60 register.
Be sure to check that the TXBF60 flag is “0”. If so, write the next transmit data (second byte)
to the TXB60 register. If data is written to the TXB60 register while the TXBF60 flag is “1”, the
transmit data cannot be guaranteed.
2. To initialize the transmission unit upon completion of continuous transmission, be sure to
check that the TXSF60 flag is “0” after generation of the transmission completion interrupt,
and then execute initialization. If initialization is executed while the TXSF60 flag is “1”, the
transmit data cannot be guaranteed.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 299
Figure 13-12. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmission Status Register 61 (ASIF61)
Address: FF38H After reset: 00H R
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ASIF61 0 0 0 0 0 0 TXBF61 TXSF61
TXBF61 Transmit buffer data flag
0 If POWER61 = 0 or TXE61 = 0, or if data is transferred to transmit shift register 61 (TXS61)
1 If data is written to transmit buffer register 61 (TXB61) (if data exists in TXB61)
TXSF61 Transmit shift register data flag
0
If POWER61 = 0 or TXE61 = 0, or if the next data is not transferred from transmit buffer register 61
(TXB61) after completion of transfer
1 If data is transferred from transmit buffer register 61 (TXB61) (if data transmission is in progress)
Cautions 1. To transmit data continuously, write the first transmit data (first byte) to the TXB61 register.
Be sure to check that the TXBF61 flag is “0”. If so, write the next transmit data (second byte)
to the TXB61 register. If data is written to the TXB61 register while the TXBF61 flag is “1”, the
transmit data cannot be guaranteed.
2. To initialize the transmission unit upon completion of continuous transmission, be sure to
check that the TXSF61 flag is “0” after generation of the transmission completion interrupt,
and then execute initialization. If initialization is executed while the TXSF61 flag is “1”, the
transmit data cannot be guaranteed.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
300
(4) Clock selection register 6n (CKSR6n)
This register selects the base clocks of serial interface UART60 and UART61.
CKSR6n can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Remark CKSR6n can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication
operation (when bits 7 and 6 (POWER6n, TXE6n) of ASIM6n = 1 or bits 7 and 5 (POWER6n,
RXE6n) of ASIM6n = 1).
Figure 13-13. Format of Clock Selection Register 60 (CKSR60)
Address: FF56H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CKSR60 0 0 0 0 TPS630 TPS620 TPS610 TPS600
Base clock (fXCLK6) selection TPS630 TPS620 TPS610 TPS600
fPRS =
4 MHz
fPRS =
5 MHz
fPRS =
10 MHz
fPRS =
20 MHz
0 0 0 0 fPRS 4 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
0 0 0 1 fPRS/2 2 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz
0 0 1 0 fPRS/22 1 MHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz
0 0 1 1 fPRS/23 500 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz
0 1 0 0 fPRS/24 250 kHz 312.5 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz
0 1 0 1 fPRS/25 125 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz 625 kHz
0 1 1 0 fPRS/26 62.5 kHz 78.13 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz
0 1 1 1 fPRS/27 31.25 kHz 39.06 kHz 78.13 kHz 156.25 kHz
1 0 0 0 fPRS/28 15.625 kHz 19.53 kHz 39.06 kHz 78.13 kHz
1 0 0 1 fPRS/29 7.813 kHz 9.77 kHz 19.53 kHz 39.06 kHz
1 0 1 0 fPRS/210 3.906 kHz 4.88 kHz 9.77 kHz 19.53 kHz
1 0 1 1 TM50 outputNote
Other than above Setting prohibited
Note Note the following points when selecting the TM50 output as the base clock.
• Mode in which the count clock is cleared and started upon a match of TM50 and CR50 (TMC506 = 0)
Start the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 50 first and then enable the timer F/F inversion
operation (TMC501 = 1).
• PWM mode (TMC506 = 1)
Start the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 50 first and then set the count clock to make the duty =
50%.
It is not necessary to enable the TO50 pin as a timer output pin in any mode.
Caution Make sure POWER60 = 0 when rewriting TPS630 to TPS600.
Remarks 1. f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
2. TMC506: Bit 6 of 8-bit timer mode control register 50 (TMC50)
TMC501: Bit 1 of TMC50
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 301
Figure 13-14. Format of Clock Selection Register 61 (CKSR61)
Address: FF39H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CKSR61 0 0 0 0 TPS631 TPS621 TPS611 TPS601
Base clock (fXCLK6) selection TPS631 TPS621 TPS611 TPS601
fPRS =
4 MHz
fPRS =
5 MHz
fPRS =
10 MHz
fPRS =
20 MHz
0 0 0 0 fPRS 4 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz 20 MHz
0 0 0 1 fPRS/2 2 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz
0 0 1 0 fPRS/22 1 MHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz
0 0 1 1 fPRS/23 500 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz
0 1 0 0 fPRS/24 250 kHz 312.5 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz
0 1 0 1 fPRS/25 125 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz 625 kHz
0 1 1 0 fPRS/26 62.5 kHz 78.13 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz
0 1 1 1 fPRS/27 31.25 kHz 39.06 kHz 78.13 kHz 156.25 kHz
1 0 0 0 fPRS/28 15.625 kHz 19.53 kHz 39.06 kHz 78.13 kHz
1 0 0 1 fPRS/29 7.813 kHz 9.77 kHz 19.53 kHz 39.06 kHz
1 0 1 0 fPRS/210 3.906 kHz 4.88 kHz 9.77 kHz 19.53 kHz
1 0 1 1 TM50 outputNote
Other than above Setting prohibited
Note Note the following points when selecting the TM50 output as the base clock.
• Mode in which the count clock is cleared and started upon a match of TM50 and CR50 (TMC506 = 0)
Start the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 50 first and then enable the timer F/F inversion
operation (TMC501 = 1).
• PWM mode (TMC506 = 1)
Start the operation of 8-bit timer/event counter 50 first and then set the count clock to make the duty =
50%.
It is not necessary to enable the TO50 pin as a timer output pin in any mode.
Caution Make sure POWER61 = 0 when rewriting TPS631 to TPS601.
Remarks 1. f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
2. TMC506: Bit 6 of 8-bit timer mode control register 50 (TMC50)
TMC501: Bit 1 of TMC50
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
302
(5) Baud rate generator control register 6n (BRGC6n)
This register sets the division value of the 8-bit counters of serial interface UART60 and UART61.
BRGC6n can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH.
Remark BRGC6n can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication
operation (when bits 7 and 6 (POWER6n, TXE6n) of ASIM6n = 1 or bits 7 and 5 (POWER6n,
RXE6n) of ASIM6n = 1).
Figure 13-15. Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register 60 (BRGC60)
Address: FF57H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BRGC60 MDL670 MDL660 MDL650 MDL640 MDL630 MDL620 MDL610 MDL600
MDL670 MDL660 MDL650 MDL640 MDL630 MDL620 MDL610 MDL600 k Output clock selection of
8-bit counter
0 0 0 0 0 0 × × × Setting prohibited
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 fXCLK6/4
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 fXCLK6/5
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 fXCLK6/6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 252 fXCLK6/252
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 253 fXCLK6/253
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 254 fXCLK6/254
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255 fXCLK6/255
Cautions 1. Make sure that bit 6 (TXE60) and bit 5 (RXE60) of the ASIM6n register = 0 when rewriting the
MDL670 to MDL600 bits.
2. The baud rate is the output clock of the 8-bit counter divided by 2.
Remarks 1. f
XCLK6: Frequency of base clock selected by the TPS630 to TPS600 bits of CKSR60 register
2. k: Value set by MDL670 to MDL600 bits (k = 4, 5, 6, ..., 255)
3. ×: Don’t care
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 303
Figure 13-16. Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register 61 (BRGC61)
Address: FF3EH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
BRGC61 MDL671 MDL661 MDL651 MDL641 MDL631 MDL621 MDL611 MDL601
MDL671 MDL661 MDL651 MDL641 MDL631 MDL621 MDL611 MDL601 k Output clock selection of
8-bit counter
0 0 0 0 0 0 × × × Setting prohibited
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 4 fXCLK6/4
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 5 fXCLK6/5
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 6 fXCLK6/6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 252 fXCLK6/252
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 253 fXCLK6/253
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 254 fXCLK6/254
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 255 fXCLK6/255
Cautions 1. Make sure that bit 6 (TXE61) and bit 5 (RXE61) of the ASIM61 register = 0 when rewriting the
MDL671 to MDL601 bits.
2. The baud rate is the output clock of the 8-bit counter divided by 2.
Remarks 1. f
XCLK6: Frequency of base clock selected by the TPS631 to TPS601 bits of CKSR61 register
2. k: Value set by MDL671 to MDL601 bits (k = 4, 5, 6, ..., 255)
3. ×: Don’t care
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
304
(6) Asynchronous serial interface control register 6n (ASICL6n)
This register controls the serial communication operations of serial interface UART60 and UART61.
ASICL6n can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to 16H.
Caution ASICL6n can be refreshed (the same value is written) by software during a communication
operation (when bits 7 and 6 (POWER6n, TXE6n) of ASIM6n = 1 or bits 7 and 5 (POWER6n,
RXE6n) of ASIM6n = 1). However, do not set both SBRT6n and SBTT6n to 1 by a refresh
operation during SBF reception (SBRT6n = 1) or SBF transmission (until INTST6n occurs
since SBTT6n has been set (1)), because it may re-trigger SBF reception or SBF transmission.
Figure 13-17. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Control Register 60 (ASICL60) (1/2)
Address: FF58H After reset: 16H R/WNote
Symbol <7> <6> 5 4 3 2 1 0
ASICL60 SBRF60 SBRT60 SBTT60 SBL620 SBL610 SBL600 DIR60 TXDLV60
SBRF60 SBF reception status flag
0 If POWER60 = 0 and RXE60 = 0 or if SBF reception has been completed correctly
1 SBF reception in progress
SBRT60 SBF reception trigger
0 −
1 SBF reception trigger
SBTT60 SBF transmission trigger
0 −
1 SBF transmission trigger
Note Bit 7 is read-only.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 305
Figure 13-17. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Control Register 60 (ASICL60) (2/2)
SBL620 SBL610 SBL600 SBF transmission output width control
1 0 1 SBF is output with 13-bit length.
1 1 0 SBF is output with 14-bit length.
1 1 1 SBF is output with 15-bit length.
0 0 0 SBF is output with 16-bit length.
0 0 1 SBF is output with 17-bit length.
0 1 0 SBF is output with 18-bit length.
0 1 1 SBF is output with 19-bit length.
1 0 0 SBF is output with 20-bit length.
DIR60 First-bit specification
0 MSB
1 LSB
TXDLV60 Enables/disables inverting TXD6n output
0 Normal output of TXD60
1 Inverted output of TXD60
Cautions 1. In the case of an SBF reception error, the mode returns to the SBF reception mode. The
status of the SBRF60 flag is held (1).
2. Before setting the SBRT60 bit, make sure that bit 7 (POWER60) and bit 5 (RXE60) of ASIM60 =
1. After setting the SBRT60 bit to 1, do not clear it to 0 before SBF reception is completed
(before an interrupt request signal is generated).
3. The read value of the SBRT60 bit is always 0. SBRT60 is automatically cleared to 0 after SBF
reception has been correctly completed.
4. Before setting the SBTT60 bit to 1, make sure that bit 7 (POWER60) and bit 6 (TXE60) of
ASIM60 = 1. After setting the SBTT60 bit to 1, do not clear it to 0 before SBF transmission is
completed (before an interrupt request signal is generated).
5. The read value of the SBTT60 bit is always 0. SBTT60 is automatically cleared to 0 at the end
of SBF transmission.
6. Do not set the SBRT60 bit to 1 during reception, and do not set the SBTT60 bit to 1 during
transmission.
7 Before rewriting the DIR60 and TXDLV60 bits, clear the TXE60 and RXE60 bits to 0.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
306
Figure 13-18. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Control Register 61 (ASICL61) (1/2)
Address: FF3FH After reset: 16H R/WNote
Symbol <7> <6> 5 4 3 2 1 0
ASICL61 SBRF61 SBRT61 SBTT61 SBL621 SBL611 SBL601 DIR61 TXDLV61
SBRF61 SBF reception status flag
0 If POWER61 = 0 and RXE61 = 0 or if SBF reception has been completed correctly
1 SBF reception in progress
SBRT61 SBF reception trigger
0 −
1 SBF reception trigger
SBTT61 SBF transmission trigger
0 −
1 SBF transmission trigger
Note Bit 7 is read-only.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 307
Figure 13-18. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Control Register 61 (ASICL61) (2/2)
SBL621 SBL611 SBL601 SBF transmission output width control
1 0 1 SBF is output with 13-bit length.
1 1 0 SBF is output with 14-bit length.
1 1 1 SBF is output with 15-bit length.
0 0 0 SBF is output with 16-bit length.
0 0 1 SBF is output with 17-bit length.
0 1 0 SBF is output with 18-bit length.
0 1 1 SBF is output with 19-bit length.
1 0 0 SBF is output with 20-bit length.
DIR61 First-bit specification
0 MSB
1 LSB
TXDLV61 Enables/disables inverting TXD6n output
0 Normal output of TXD6n
1 Inverted output of TXD6n
Cautions 1. In the case of an SBF reception error, the mode returns to the SBF reception mode. The
status of the SBRF61 flag is held (1).
2. Before setting the SBRT61 bit, make sure that bit 7 (POWER61) and bit 5 (RXE61) of ASIM61 =
1. After setting the SBRT61 bit to 1, do not clear it to 0 before SBF reception is completed
(before an interrupt request signal is generated).
3. The read value of the SBRT61 bit is always 0. SBRT61 is automatically cleared to 0 after SBF
reception has been correctly completed.
4. Before setting the SBTT61 bit to 1, make sure that bit 7 (POWER61) and bit 6 (TXE61) of
ASIM61 = 1. After setting the SBTT61 bit to 1, do not clear it to 0 before SBF transmission is
completed (before an interrupt request signal is generated).
5. The read value of the SBTT61 bit is always 0. SBTT61 is automatically cleared to 0 at the end
of SBF transmission.
6. Do not set the SBRT61 bit to 1 during reception, and do not set the SBTT61 bit to 1 during
transmission.
7. Before rewriting the DIR61 and TXDLV61 bits, clear the TXE61 and RXE61 bits to 0.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
308
(7) Input switch control register (ISC)
The input switch control register (ISC) is used to receive a status signal transmitted from the master during LIN
(Local Interconnect Network) reception. The input source is switched by setting ISC.
This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 13-19. Format of Input Switch Control Register (ISC)
Address: FF4FH After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ISC ISC7 0 0 ISC4 ISC3 1Note ISC1 ISC0
ISC7 Interrupt source selection
0 INTWTI
1 INTDMU
ISC4 INTP1 input source selection
0 INTP1 (P30)
1 RxD61(P11)
ISC3 INTP0 input source selection
0 INTP0 (P120)
1 RxD60 (P14)
ISC1 TI010 input source selection
0 TI010 (P01)
1 RxD60 (P14)
ISC0 TI000 input source selection
0 TI000 (P00)
1 TSOUT
Note Be sure to set bit 2 of ISC to 1.
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 309
(8) Port mode register 1 (PM1)
This register sets port 1 input/output in 1-bit units.
When using the P13/TxD60 and P10/SCK10/TxD61 pins for serial interface data output, clear PM13 and PM10 to
0 and set the output latch of P13 and P10 to 1.
When using the P14/RxD60 and P11/SI10/RxD61 in for serial interface data input, set PM14 and PM11 to 1. The
output latch of P14 and P11 at this time may be 0 or 1.
PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to FFH.
Figure 13-20. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1)
Address: FF21H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10
PM1n P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7)
0 Output mode (output buffer on)
1 Input mode (output buffer off)
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
310
13.4 Operations of Serial Interface UART60 and UART61
Serial interfaces UART60 and UART61 have the following two modes.
• Operation stop mode
• Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode
13.4.1 Operation stop mode
In this mode, serial communication cannot be executed; therefore, the power consumption can be reduced. In
addition, the pins can be used as ordinary port pins in this mode. To set the operation stop mode, clear bits 7, 6, and
5 (POWER6n, TXE6n, and RXE6n) of ASIM6n to 0.
(1) Register used
The operation stop mode is set by asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n).
ASIM6n can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to 01H.
Address: FF50H After reset: 01H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> 4 3 2 1 0
ASIM6n POWER6n TXE6n RXE6n PS61n PS60n CL6n SL6n ISRM6n
POWER6n Enables/disables operation of internal operation clock
0
Note 1 Disables operation of the internal operation clock (fixes the clock to low level) and asynchronously
resets the internal circuitNote 2.
TXE6n Enables/disables transmission
0 Disables transmission operation (synchronously resets the transmission circuit).
RXE6n Enables/disables reception
0 Disables reception (synchronously resets the reception circuit).
Notes 1. The output of the TXD6n pins goes high and the input from the RXD6n pins is fixed to high level when
POWER6n = 0.
2. Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6n (ASIS6n), asynchronous serial
interface transmission status register 6n (ASIF6n), bit 7 (SBRF6n) and bit 6 (SBRT6n) of asynchronous
serial interface control register 6n (ASICL6n), and receive buffer register 6n (RXB6n) are reset.
Caution Clear POWER6n to 0 after clearing TXE6n and RXE6n to 0 to stop the operation.
To start the communication, set POWER6n to 1, and then set TXE6n and RXE6n to 1.
Remarks 1. To use the RxD60/P14, RxD61/P11/SI10, TxD60/P13 and TxD61/P10/SCK10 pins as general-
purpose port pins, see CHAPTER 4 PORT FUNCTIONS.
2. n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 311
13.4.2 Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode
In this mode, data of 1 byte is transmitted/received following a start bit, and a full-duplex operation can be
performed.
A dedicated UART baud rate generator is incorporated, so that communication can be executed at a wide range of
baud rates.
(1) Registers used
• Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n)
• Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6n (ASIS6n)
• Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6n (ASIF6n)
• Clock selection register 6n (CKSR6n)
• Baud rate generator control register 6n (BRGC6n)
• Asynchronous serial interface control register 6n (ASICL6n)
• Input switch control register (ISC)
• Port mode register 1 (PM1)
• Port register 1 (P1)
The basic procedure of setting an operation in the UART mode is as follows.
<1> Set the CKSR6n register (see Figure 13-13, 13-14).
<2> Set the BRGC6n register (see Figure 13-15, 13-16).
<3> Set bits 0 to 4 (ISRM6n, SL6n, CL6n, PS60n, PS61n) of the ASIM6n register (see Figure 13-7, 13-8).
<4> Set bits 0 and 1 (TXDLV6n, DIR6n) of the ASICL6n register (see Figure 13-17, 13-18).
<5> Set bit 7 (POWER6n) of the ASIM6n register to 1.
<6> Set bit 6 (TXE6n) of the ASIM6n register to 1. → Transmission is enabled.
Set bit 5 (RXE6n) of the ASIM6n register to 1. → Reception is enabled.
<7> Write data to transmit buffer register 6n (TXB6n). → Data transmission is started.
Caution Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port mode register
and port register.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
312
The relationship between the register settings and pins is shown below.
Table 13-2. Relationship Between Register Settings and Pins
(a) UART60
Pin Function POWER6n TXE6n RXE6n PM13 P13 PM14 P14 UART60
Operation TxD60/P13 RxD60/P14
0 0 0 ×Note ×
Note ×
Note ×
Note Stop P13 P14
0 1 ×Note ×
Note 1 × Reception P13 RxD60
1 0 0 1 ×Note ×
Note Transmission TxD60 P14
1
1 1 0 1 1 ×
Transmission/
reception
TxD60 RxD60
(b) UART61
Pin Function POWER6n TXE6n RXE6n PM10 P10 PM11 P11 UART61
Operation TxD61/P10/SCK61 RxD61/P11/SI10
0 0 0 ×Note ×
Note ×
Note ×
Note Stop P10 P11
0 1 ×Note ×
Note 1 × Reception P10 RxD61
1 0 0 1 ×Note ×
Note Transmission TxD61 P11
1
1 1 0 1 1 ×
Transmission/
reception
TxD61 RxD61
Note Can be set as port function.
Remark ×: don’t care
POWER6n: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n)
TXE6n: Bit 6 of ASIM6n
RXE6n: Bit 5 of ASIM6n
PM1×: Port mode register
P1×: Port output latch
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 313
(2) Communication operation
(a) Format and waveform example of normal transmit/receive data
Figures 13-21 and 13-22 show the format and waveform example of the normal transmit/receive data.
Figure 13-21. Format of Normal UART Transmit/Receive Data
1. LSB-first transmission/reception
Start
bit
Parity
bit
D0 D1 D2 D3 D4
1 data frame
Character bits
D5 D6 D7 Stop bit
2. MSB-first transmission/reception
Start
bit
Parity
bit
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3
1 data frame
Character bits
D2 D1 D0 Stop bit
One data frame consists of the following bits.
• Start bit ... 1 bit
• Character bits ... 7 or 8 bits
• Parity bit ... Even parity, odd parity, 0 parity, or no parity
• Stop bit ... 1 or 2 bits
The character bit length, parity, and stop bit length in one data frame are specified by asynchronous serial
interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n).
Whether data is communicated with the LSB or MSB first is specified by bit 1 (DIR6) of asynchronous serial
interface control register 6n (ASICL6n).
Whether the TXD6n pins outputs normal or inverted data is specified by bit 0 (TXDLV6) of ASICL6n.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
314
Figure 13-22. Example of Normal UART Transmit/Receive Data Waveform
1. Data length: 8 bits, LSB first, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H
1 data frame
Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity Stop
2. Data length: 8 bits, MSB first, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H
1 data frame
Start D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Parity Stop
3. Data length: 8 bits, MSB first, Parity: Even parity, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 55H, TXD6n pin
inverted output
1 data frame
Start D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 Parity Stop
4. Data length: 7 bits, LSB first, Parity: Odd parity, Stop bit: 2 bits, Communication data: 36H
1 data frame
Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Parity StopStop
5. Data length: 8 bits, LSB first, Parity: None, Stop bit: 1 bit, Communication data: 87H
1 data frame
Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Stop
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 315
(b) Parity types and operation
The parity bit is used to detect a bit error in communication data. Usually, the same type of parity bit is used
on both the transmission and reception sides. With even parity and odd parity, a 1-bit (odd number) error
can be detected. With zero parity and no parity, an error cannot be detected.
Caution Fix the PS61n and PS60n bits to 0 when the device is used in LIN communication
operation.
(i) Even parity
• Transmission
Transmit data, including the parity bit, is controlled so that the number of bits that are “1” is even.
The value of the parity bit is as follows.
If transmit data has an odd number of bits that are “1”: 1
If transmit data has an even number of bits that are “1”: 0
• Reception
The number of bits that are “1” in the receive data, including the parity bit, is counted. If it is odd, a
parity error occurs.
(ii) Odd parity
• Transmission
Unlike even parity, transmit data, including the parity bit, is controlled so that the number of bits that
are “1” is odd.
If transmit data has an odd number of bits that are “1”: 0
If transmit data has an even number of bits that are “1”: 1
• Reception
The number of bits that are “1” in the receive data, including the parity bit, is counted. If it is even, a
parity error occurs.
(iii) 0 parity
The parity bit is cleared to 0 when data is transmitted, regardless of the transmit data.
The parity bit is not detected when the data is received. Therefore, a parity error does not occur
regardless of whether the parity bit is “0” or “1”.
(iv) No parity
No parity bit is appended to the transmit data.
Reception is performed assuming that there is no parity bit when data is received. Because there is no
parity bit, a parity error does not occur.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
316
(c) Normal transmission
When bit 7 (POWER6n) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n) is set to 1 and
bit 6 (TXE6n) of ASIM6n is then set to 1, transmission is enabled. Transmission can be started by writing
transmit data to transmit buffer register 6n (TXB6n). The start bit, parity bit, and stop bit are automatically
appended to the data.
When transmission is started, the data in TXB6n is transferred to transmit shift register 6n (TXS6n). After
that, the data is sequentially output from TXS6n to the TXD6n pins. When transmission is completed, the
parity and stop bits set by ASIM6n are appended and a transmission completion interrupt request (INTST6n)
is generated.
Transmission is stopped until the data to be transmitted next is written to TXB6n.
Figure 13-23 shows the timing of the transmission completion interrupt request (INTST6n). This interrupt
occurs as soon as the last stop bit has been output.
Figure 13-23. Normal Transmission Completion Interrupt Request Timing
1. Stop bit length: 1
INTST6n
D0Start D1 D2 D6 D7 Stop
T
X
D6n (output) Parity
2. Stop bit length: 2
T
X
D6n (output)
INTST6n
D0Start D1 D2 D6 D7 Parity Stop
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 317
(d) Continuous transmission
The next transmit data can be written to transmit buffer register 6n (TXB6n) as soon as transmit shift register
6 (TXS6n) has started its shift operation. Consequently, even while the INTST6n interrupt is being serviced
after transmission of one data frame, data can be continuously transmitted and an efficient communication
rate can be realized. In addition, the TXB6n register can be efficiently written twice (2 bytes) without having
to wait for the transmission time of one data frame, by reading bit 0 (TXSF6n) of asynchronous serial
interface transmission status register 6n (ASIF6n) when the transmission completion interrupt has occurred.
To transmit data continuously, be sure to reference the ASIF6n register to check the transmission status and
whether the TXB6n register can be written, and then write the data.
Cautions 1. The TXBF6n and TXSF6n flags of the ASIF6n register change from “10” to “11”, and
to “01” during continuous transmission. To check the status, therefore, do not use a
combination of the TXBF6n and TXSF6n flags for judgment. Read only the TXBF6n
flag when executing continuous transmission.
2. When the device is used in LIN communication operation, the continuous
transmission function cannot be used. Make sure that asynchronous serial interface
transmission status register 6n (ASIF6n) is 00H before writing transmit data to
transmit buffer register 6n (TXB6n).
TXBF6n Writing to TXB6 Register
0 Writing enabled
1 Writing disabled
Caution To transmit data continuously, write the first transmit data (first byte)
to the TXB6n register. Be sure to check that the TXBF6n flag is “0”.
If so, write the next transmit data (second byte) to the TXB6n register.
If data is written to the TXB6n register while the TXBF6n flag is “1”,
the transmit data cannot be guaranteed.
The communication status can be checked using the TXSF6n flag.
TXSF6n Transmission Status
0 Transmission is completed.
1 Transmission is in progress.
Cautions 1. To initialize the transmission unit upon completion of continuous
transmission, be sure to check that the TXSF6n flag is “0” after
generation of the transmission completion interrupt, and then
execute initialization. If initialization is executed while the
TXSF6n flag is “1”, the transmit data cannot be guaranteed.
2. During continuous transmission, an overrun error may occur,
which means that the next transmission was completed before
execution of TXSF6n interrupt servicing after transmission of one
data frame. An overrun error can be detected by developing a
program that can count the number of transmit data and by
referencing the TXSF6n flag.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
318
Figure 13-24 shows an example of the continuous transmission processing flow.
Figure 13-24. Example of Continuous Transmission Processing Flow
Write TXB6n.
Set registers.
Write TXB6n.
Transfer
executed necessary
number of times?
Yes
Read ASIF6n
TXBF6n = 0?
No
No
Yes
Transmission
completion interrupt
occurs?
Read ASIF6n
TXSF6n = 0?
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Completion of
transmission processing
Transfer
executed necessary
number of times?
Remark TXB6n: Transmit buffer register 6n
ASIF6n: Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6n
TXBF6n: Bit 1 of ASIF6n (transmit buffer data flag)
TXSF6n: Bit 0 of ASIF6n (transmit shift register data flag)
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 319
Figure 13-25 shows the timing of starting continuous transmission, and Figure 13-25 shows the timing of
ending continuous transmission.
Figure 13-25. Timing of Starting Continuous Transmission
T
X
D6n Start
INTST6n
Data (1)
Data (1) Data (2) Data (3)
Data (2)Data (1) Data (3)
FF
FF
Parity Stop Data (2) Parity Stop
TXB6n
TXS6n
TXBF6n
TXSF6n
Start Start
Note
Note When ASIF6n is read, there is a period in which TXBF6n and TXSF6n = 1, 1. Therefore, judge
whether writing is enabled using only the TXBF6n bit.
Remark T
XD6n: TxD6n pins (output)
INTST6n: Interrupt request signal
TXB6n: Transmit buffer register 6n
TXS6n: Transmit shift register 6n
ASIF6n: Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6n
TXBF6n: Bit 1 of ASIF6n
TXSF6n: Bit 0 of ASIF6n
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
320
Figure 13-26. Timing of Ending Continuous Transmission
T
X
D6n Start
INTST6n
Data (n − 1)
Data (n − 1) Data (n)
Data (n)Data (n − 1) FF
Parity
Stop Stop Data (n) Parity Stop
TXB6n
TXS6n
TXBF6n
TXSF6n
POWER6n or TXE6n
Start
Remark T
XD6n: TXD6n pins (output)
INTST6n: Interrupt request signal
TXB6n: Transmit buffer register 6n
TXS6n: Transmit shift register 6n
ASIF6n: Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 6n
TXBF6n: Bit 1 of ASIF6n
TXSF6n: Bit 0 of ASIF6n
POWER6n: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register (ASIM6n)
TXE6n: Bit 6 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register (ASIM6n)
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 321
(e) Normal reception
Reception is enabled and the RXD6n pins input is sampled when bit 7 (POWER6n) of asynchronous serial
interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n) is set to 1 and then bit 5 (RXE6n) of ASIM6n is set to 1.
The 8-bit counter of the baud rate generator starts counting when the falling edge of the RXD6n pins input is
detected. When the set value of baud rate generator control register 6n (BRGC6n) has been counted, the
RXD6n pins input is sampled again ( in Figure 13-27). If the RXD6n pins are low level at this time, it is
recognized as a start bit.
When the start bit is detected, reception is started, and serial data is sequentially stored in the receive shift
register (RXS6n) at the set baud rate. When the stop bit has been received, the reception completion
interrupt (INTSR6n) is generated and the data of RXS6n is written to receive buffer register 6n (RXB6n). If
an overrun error (OVE6n) occurs, however, the receive data is not written to RXB6n.
Even if a parity error (PE6n) occurs while reception is in progress, reception continues to the reception
position of the stop bit, and an error interrupt (INTSR6n/INTSRE6n) is generated on completion of reception.
Figure 13-27. Reception Completion Interrupt Request Timing
R
X
D6n (input)
INTSR6n
Start D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 Parity
RXB6n
Stop
Cautions 1. If a reception error occurs, read ASIS6n and then RXB6n to clear the error flag.
Otherwise, an overrun error will occur when the next data is received, and the reception
error status will persist.
2. Reception is always performed with the “number of stop bits = 1”. The second stop bit
is ignored.
3. Be sure to read asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6n
(ASIS6n) before reading RXB6n.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
322
(f) Reception error
Three types of errors may occur during reception: a parity error, framing error, or overrun error. If the error
flag of asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 6n (ASIS6n) is set as a result of data
reception, a reception error interrupt request (INTSR6n/INTSRE6n) is generated.
Which error has occurred during reception can be identified by reading the contents of ASIS6n in the
reception error interrupt servicing (INTSR6n/INTSRE6n) (see Figure 13-9, 13-10).
The contents of ASIS6n are cleared to 0 when ASIS6n is read.
Table 13-3. Cause of Reception Error
Reception Error Cause
Parity error The parity specified for transmission does not match the parity of the receive data.
Framing error Stop bit is not detected.
Overrun error Reception of the next data is completed before data is read from receive buffer
register 6n (RXB6n).
The error interrupt can be separated into reception completion interrupt (INTSR6n) and error interrupt
(INTSRE6n) by clearing bit 0 (ISRM6n) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n
(ASIM6n) to 0.
Figure 13-28. Reception Error Interrupt
1. If ISRM6n is cleared to 0 (reception completion interrupt (INTSR6n) and error interrupt (INTSRE6n)
are separated)
(a) No error during reception (b) Error during reception
INTSR6n
INTSRE6n
INTSR6n
INTSRE6n
2. If ISRM6n is set to 1 (error interrupt is included in INTSR6n)
(a) No error during reception (b) Error during reception
INTSRE6n
INTSR6n
INTSRE6n
INTSR6n
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 323
(g) Noise filter of receive data
The RXD6n signal’s is sampled with the base clock output by the prescaler block.
If two sampled values are the same, the output of the match detector changes, and the data is sampled as
input data.
Because the circuit is configured as shown in Figure 13-29, the internal processing of the reception operation
is delayed by two clocks from the external signal status.
Figure 13-29. Noise Filter Circuit
Internal signal B
Internal signal A
Match detector
In
Base clock
RXD60/P14
RxD61/P11SI10
QIn
LD_EN
Q
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
324
(h) SBF transmission
When the device is used in LIN communication operation, the SBF (Synchronous Break Field) transmission
control function is used for transmission. For the transmission operation of LIN, see Figure 13-1 LIN
Transmission Operation.
When bit 7 (POWER6n) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n) is set to 1 and
bit 6 (TXE6n) of ASIM6n is then set to 1, transmission is enabled.
SBF transmission can be started by setting bit 5 (SBTT6n) of asynchronous serial interface control register
6n (ASICL6n) to 1.
Thereafter, a low level of bits 13 to 20 (set by bits 4 to 2 (SBL62n to SBL60n) of ASICL6n) is output.
Following the end of SBF transmission, the transmission completion interrupt request (INTST6n) is
generated and SBTT6n is automatically cleared. Thereafter, the normal transmission mode is restored.
Transmission is suspended until the data to be transmitted next is written to transmit buffer register 6n
(TXB6n), or until SBTT6n is set to 1.
Remark n = 0, 1
Figure 13-30. SBF Transmission
TXD6n
INTST6n
SBTT6n
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Stop
Remark T
XD6n: TXD6n pins (output)
INTST6n: Transmission completion interrupt request
SBTT6n: Bit 5 of asynchronous serial interface control register 6n (ASICL6n)
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 325
(i) SBF reception
When the device is incorporated in LIN, the SBF (Synchronous Break Field) reception control function is
used for reception. For the reception operation of LIN, see Figure 13-2 LIN Reception Operation.
Reception is enabled when bit 7 (POWER6n) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n
(ASIM6n) is set to 1 and then bit 5 (RXE6n) of ASIM6n is set to 1. SBF reception is enabled when bit 6
(SBRT6n) of asynchronous serial interface control register 6n (ASICL6n) is set to 1. In the SBF reception
enabled status, the RXD6n pins are sampled and the start bit is detected in the same manner as the normal
reception enable status.
When the start bit has been detected, reception is started, and serial data is sequentially stored in the
receive shift register 6n (RXS6n) at the set baud rate. When the stop bit is received and if the width of SBF
is 11 bits or more, a reception completion interrupt request (INTSR6n) is generated as normal processing. At
this time, the SBRF6n and SBRT6n bits are automatically cleared, and SBF reception ends. Detection of
errors, such as OVE6n, PE6n, and FE6n (bits 0 to 2 of asynchronous serial interface reception error status
register 6n (ASIS6n)) is suppressed, and error detection processing of UART communication is not
performed. In addition, data transfer between receive shift register 6n (RXS6n) and receive buffer register 6n
(RXB6n) is not performed, and the reset value of FFH is retained. If the width of SBF is 10 bits or less, an
interrupt does not occur as error processing after the stop bit has been received, and the SBF reception
mode is restored. In this case, the SBRF6n and SBRT6n bits are not cleared.
Figure 13-31. SBF Reception
1. Normal SBF reception (stop bit is detected with a width of more than 10.5 bits)
R
X
D6n
SBRT6n
/SBRF6n
INTSR6n
1234567891011
2. SBF reception error (stop bit is detected with a width of 10.5 bits or less)
RXD6n
SBRT6n
/SBRF6n
INTSR6n
12345678910
“0”
Remark R
XD6n: RXD6n pins (input)
SBRT6n: Bit 6 of asynchronous serial interface control register 6n (ASICL6n)
SBRF6n: Bit 7 of ASICL6n
INTSR6n: Reception completion interrupt request
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
326
13.4.3 Dedicated baud rate generator
The dedicated baud rate generator consists of a source clock selector and an 8-bit programmable counter, and
generates a serial clock for transmission/reception of UART60 and UART61.
Separate 8-bit counters are provided for transmission and reception.
(1) Configuration of baud rate generator
• Base clock
The clock selected by bits 3 to 0 (TPS63n to TPS60n) of clock selection register 6n (CKSR6n) is supplied to
each module when bit 7 (POWER6n) of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n)
is 1. This clock is called the base clock and its frequency is called fXCLK6. The base clock is fixed to low
level when POWER6n = 0.
• Transmission counter
This counter stops operation, cleared to 0, when bit 7 (POWER6n) or bit 6 (TXE6n) of asynchronous serial
interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n) is 0.
It starts counting when POWER6n = 1 and TXE6n = 1.
The counter is cleared to 0 when the first data transmitted is written to transmit buffer register 6n (TXB6n).
If data are continuously transmitted, the counter is cleared to 0 again when one frame of data has been
completely transmitted. If there is no data to be transmitted next, the counter is not cleared to 0 and continues
counting until POWER6n or TXE6n is cleared to 0.
• Reception counter
This counter stops operation, cleared to 0, when bit 7 (POWER6n) or bit 5 (RXE6n) of asynchronous serial
interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n) is 0.
It starts counting when the start bit has been detected.
The counter stops operation after one frame has been received, until the next start bit is detected.
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 327
Figure 13-32. Configuration of Baud Rate Generator
Selector
POWER6n
8-bit counter
Match detector Baud rate
Baud rate generator
BRGC6n: MDL67n to MDL60n
1/2
POWER6n, TXE6n (or RXE6n)
CKSR6n: TPS63n to TPS60n
fPRS
fPRS/2
fPRS/22
fPRS/23
fPRS/24
fPRS/25
fPRS/26
fPRS/27
fPRS/28
fPRS/29
fPRS/210
8-bit timer/
event counter
50 output
f
XCLK6
Remark POWER6n: Bit 7 of asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 6n (ASIM6n)
TXE6n: Bit 6 of ASIM6n
RXE6n: Bit 5 of ASIM6n
CKSR6n: Clock selection register 6n
BRGC6n: Baud rate generator control register 6n
n = 0, 1
(2) Generation of serial clock
A serial clock can be generated by using clock selection register 6n (CKSR6n) and baud rate generator control
register 6n (BRGC6n).
Select the clock to be input to the 8-bit counter by using bits 3 to 0 (TPS63n to TPS60n) of CKSR6n.
Bits 7 to 0 (MDL67n to MDL60n) of BRGC6n can be used to select the division value of the 8-bit counter.
(a) Baud rate
The baud rate can be calculated by the following expression.
• Baud rate = [bps]
fXCLK6: Frequency of base clock selected by TPS63n to TPS60n bits of CKSR6n register
k: Value set by MDL67n to MDL60n bits of BRGC6n register (k = 4, 5, 6, ..., 255)
(b) Error of baud rate
The baud rate error can be calculated by the following expression.
• Error (%) = − 1 × 100 [%]
Actual baud rate (baud rate with error)
Desired baud rate (correct baud rate)
fXCLK6
2 × k
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
328
Cautions 1. Keep the baud rate error during transmission to within the permissible error range at
the reception destination.
2. Make sure that the baud rate error during reception satisfies the range shown in (4)
Permissible baud rate range during reception.
Example: Frequency of base clock = 10 MHz = 10,000,000 Hz
Set value of MDL67n to MDL60n bits of BRGC6 register = 00100001B (k = 33)
Target baud rate = 153600 bps
Baud rate = 10 M/(2 × 33)
= 10000000/(2 × 33) = 151,515 [bps]
Error = (151515/153600 − 1) × 100
= −1.357 [%]
(3) Example of setting baud rate
Table 13-4. Set Data of Baud Rate Generator
fPRS = 5.0 MHz fPRS = 10.0 MHz fPRS = 20.0 MHz
Baud Rate
[bps] TPS63n,
TPS60n
k Calculated
Value
ERR
[%]
TPS63n,
TPS60n
k Calculated
Value
ERR
[%]
TPS63n,
TPS60n
k Calculated
Value
ERR
[%]
300 7H 65 301 0.16 8H 65 301 0.16 9H 65 301 0.16
600 6H 65 601 0.16 7H 65 601 0.16 8H 65 601 0.16
1200 5H 65 1202 0.16 6H 65 1202 0.16 7H 65 1202 0.16
2400 4H 65 2404 0.16 5H 65 2404 0.16 6H 65 2404 0.16
4800 3H 65 4808 0.16 4H 65 4808 0.16 5H 65 4808 0.16
9600 2H 65 9615 0.16 3H 65 9615 0.16 4H 65 9615 0.16
19200 1H 65 19231 0.16 2H 65 19231 0.16 3H 65 19231 0.16
24000 3H 13 24038 0.16 4H 13 24038 0.16 5H 13 24038 0.16
31250 4H 5 31250 0 5H 5 31250 0 6H 5 31250 0
38400 0H 65 38462 0.16 1H 65 38462 0.16 2H 65 38462 0.16
48000 2H 13 48077 0.16 3H 13 48077 0.16 4H 13 48077 0.16
76800 0H 33 75758 −1.36 0H 65 76923 0.16 1H 65 76923 0.16
115200 1H 11 113636 −1.36 0H 43 116279 0.94 0H 87 114943 −0.22
153600 1H 8 156250 1.73 0H 33 151515 −1.36 1H 33 151515 −1.36
312500 0H 8 312500 0 1H 8 312500 0 2H 8 312500 0
625000 0H 4 625000 0 1H 4 625000 0 2H 4 625000 0
Remark TPS63n to TPS60n: Bits 3 to 0 of clock selection register 6n (CKSR6n) (setting of base
clock (fXCLK6))
k Value set by MDL67n to MDL60n bits of baud rate generator control
register 6n (BRGC6n) (k = 4, 5, 6, ..., 255)
f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
ERR: Baud rate error
n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 329
(4) Permissible baud rate range during reception
The permissible error from the baud rate at the transmission destination during reception is shown below.
Caution Make sure that the baud rate error during reception is within the permissible error range, by
using the calculation expression shown below.
Figure 13-33. Permissible Baud Rate Range During Reception
FL
1 data frame (11 × FL)
FLmin
FLmax
Data frame lengtz of
UART60 and UART61 Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit
Minimum permissible
data frame length
Maximum permissible
data frame length
Stop bit
Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit
Latch timing
Stop bit
Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit
As shown in Figure 13-33, the latch timing of the receive data is determined by the counter set by baud rate
generator control register 6n (BRGC6n) after the start bit has been detected. If the last data (stop bit) meets this
latch timing, the data can be correctly received.
Assuming that 11-bit data is received, the theoretical values can be calculated as follows.
FL = (Brate)−1
Brate: Baud rate of UART60 and UART61
k: Set value of BRGC6n
FL: 1-bit data length
Margin of latch timing: 2 clocks
Remark n = 0, 1
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
330
Minimum permissible data frame length: FLmin = 11 × FL − × FL = FL
Therefore, the maximum receivable baud rate at the transmission destination is as follows.
BRmax = (FLmin/11)−1 = Brate
Similarly, the maximum permissible data frame length can be calculated as follows.
10 k + 2 21k − 2
11 2 × k 2 × k
FLmax = FL × 11
Therefore, the minimum receivable baud rate at the transmission destination is as follows.
BRmin = (FLmax/11)−1 = Brate
The permissible baud rate error between UART60 and UART61 and the transmission destination can be
calculated from the above minimum and maximum baud rate expressions, as follows.
Table 13-5. Maximum/Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error
Division Ratio (k) Maximum Permissible Baud Rate Error Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error
4 +2.33% −2.44%
8 +3.53% −3.61%
20 +4.26% −4.31%
50 +4.56% −4.58%
100 +4.66% −4.67%
255 +4.72% −4.73%
Remarks 1. The permissible error of reception depends on the number of bits in one frame, input clock
frequency, and division ratio (k). The higher the input clock frequency and the higher the
division ratio (k), the higher the permissible error.
2. k: Set value of BRGC6n
3. n = 0, 1
22k
21k + 2
× FLmax = 11 × FL − × FL = FL
21k – 2
20k
20k
21k − 2
k − 2
2k
21k + 2
2k
CHAPTER 13 SERIAL INTERFACES UART60 AND UART61
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 331
(5) Data frame length during continuous transmission
When data is continuously transmitted, the data frame length from a stop bit to the next start bit is extended by
two clocks of base clock from the normal value. However, the result of communication is not affected because
the timing is initialized on the reception side when the start bit is detected.
Figure 13-34. Data Frame Length During Continuous Transmission
Start bit Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 7 Parity bit Stop bit
FL
1 data frame
FL FL FL FL FLFLFLstp
Start bit of
second byte
Start bit Bit 0
Where the 1-bit data length is FL, the stop bit length is FLstp, and base clock frequency is fXCLK6, the following
expression is satisfied.
FLstp = FL + 2/fXCLK6
Therefore, the data frame length during continuous transmission is:
Data frame length = 11 × FL + 2/fXCLK6
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
332
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
The 78K0/FC2 incorporate serial interface CSI10.
14.1 Functions of Serial Interface CSI10
Serial interface CSI10 has the following two modes.
• Operation stop mode
• 3-wire serial I/O mode
(1) Operation stop mode
This mode is used when serial communication is not performed and can enable a reduction in the power
consumption.
For details, see 14.4.1 Operation stop mode.
(2) 3-wire serial I/O mode (MSB/LSB-first selectable)
This mode is used to communicate 8-bit data using three lines: a serial clock line (SCK10) and two serial data
lines (SI10 and SO10).
The processing time of data communication can be shortened in the 3-wire serial I/O mode because transmission
and reception can be simultaneously executed.
In addition, whether 8-bit data is communicated with the MSB or LSB first can be specified, so this interface can
be connected to any device.
The 3-wire serial I/O mode is used for connecting peripheral ICs and display controllers with a clocked serial
interface.
For details, see 14.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode.
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 333
14.2 Configuration of Serial Interface CSI10
Serial interface CSI10 includes the following hardware.
Table 14-1. Configuration of Serial Interface CSI10
Item Configuration
Controller Transmit controller
Clock start/stop controller & clock phase controller
Registers Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10)
Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10)
Control registers Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)
Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10)
Port mode register 1 (PM1)
Port register 1 (P1)
Figure 14-1. Block Diagram of Serial Interface CSI10
SCK10/P10/TxD61
Internal bus
SI10/P11/R
X
D61
INTCSI10
f
PRS
/2
f
PRS
/2
2
f
PRS
/2
3
f
PRS
/2
4
f
PRS
/2
5
f
PRS
/2
6
f
PRS
/2
7
Transmit buffer
register 10 (SOTB10)
Transmit controller
Clock start/stop controller &
clock phase controller
Serial I/O shift
register 10 (SIO10)
Output
selector
Output latch
8
Transmit data
controller
8
Selector
SO10/P12
Output latch
(P12)
PM12
(a)
Baud rate generator
Output latch
(P10)
PM10
Remark (a): SO10 output
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
334
(1) Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10)
This register sets the transmit data.
Transmission/reception is started by writing data to SOTB10 when bit 7 (CSIE10) and bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial
operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is 1.
The data written to SOTB10 is converted from parallel data into serial data by serial I/O shift register 10, and
output to the serial output pin (SO10).
SOTB10 can be written or read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Caution Do not access SOTB10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication).
(2) Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10)
This is an 8-bit register that converts data from parallel data into serial data and vice versa.
This register can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reception is started by reading data from SIO10 if bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)
is 0.
During reception, the data is read from the serial input pin (SI10) to SIO10.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Caution Do not access SIO10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication).
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 335
14.3 Registers Controlling Serial Interface CSI10
Serial interface CSI10 is controlled by the following four registers.
• Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)
• Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10)
• Port mode register 1 (PM1)
• Port register 1 (P1)
(1) Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)
CSIM10 is used to select the operation mode and enable or disable operation.
CSIM10 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 14-2. Format of Serial Operation Mode Register 10 (CSIM10)
Address: FF80H After reset: 00H R/WNote 1
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CSIM10 CSIE10 TRMD10 0 DIR10 0 0 0 CSOT10
CSIE10 Operation control in 3-wire serial I/O mode
0 Disables operationNote 2 and asynchronously resets the internal circuitNote 3.
1 Enables operation
TRMD10Note 4 Transmit/receive mode control
0
Note 5 Receive mode (transmission disabled).
1 Transmit/receive mode
DIR10Note 6 First bit specification
0 MSB
1 LSB
CSOT10 Communication status flag
0 Communication is stopped.
1 Communication is in progress.
Notes 1. Bit 0 is a read-only bit.
2. To use P10/SCK10/TXD61 and P12/SO10 as general-purpose ports, set CSIM10 in the default status
(00H).
3. Bit 0 (CSOT10) of CSIM10 and serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) are reset.
4. Do not rewrite TRMD10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication).
5. The SO10 output (see (a) in Figure 14-1) is fixed to the low level when TRMD10 is 0. Reception is
started when data is read from SIO10.
6. Do not rewrite DIR10 when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial communication).
Caution Be sure to clear bit 5 to 0.
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
336
(2) Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10)
This register specifies the timing of the data transmission/reception and sets the serial clock.
CSIC10 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 14-3. Format of Serial Clock Selection Register 10 (CSIC10)
Address: FF81H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CSIC10 0 0 0 CKP10 DAP10 CKS102 CKS101 CKS100
CKP10 DAP10 Specification of data transmission/reception timing Type
0 0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCK10
SO10
SI10 input timing
1
0 1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCK10
SO10
SI10 input timing
2
1 0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCK10
SO10
SI10 input timing
3
1 1
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCK10
SO10
SI10 input timing
4
CSI10 serial clock selection CKS102 CKS101 CKS100
f
PRS =
4 MHz
fPRS =
5 MHz
fPRS =
10 MHz
fPRS =
20 MHz
Mode
0 0 0 fPRS/2 2 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz 10 MHz
0 0 1 fPRS/22 1 MHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz 5 MHz
0 1 0 fPRS/23 500 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz 2.5 MHz
0 1 1 fPRS/24 250 kHz 312.5 kHz 625 kHz 1.25 MHz
1 0 0 fPRS/25 125 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz 625 kHz
1 0 1 fPRS/26 62.5 kHz 78.13 kHz 156.25 kHz 312.5 kHz
1 1 0 fPRS/27 31.25 kHz 39.06 kHz 78.13 kHz 156.25 kHz
Master mode
1 1 1 External clock input to SCK10 Slave mode
Cautions 1. Do not write to CSIC10 while CSIE10 = 1 (operation enabled).
2. To use P10/SCK10/TXD61 and P12/SO10 as general-purpose ports, set CSIC10 in the default
status (00H).
3. The phase type of the data clock is type 1 after reset.
Remark f
PRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 337
(3) Port mode registers 1 (PM1)
These registers set port 1 input/output in 1-bit units.
When using P10/SCK10 as the clock output pins of the serial interface, clear PM10 to 0, and the output latches of
P10 to 1.
When using P12/SO10 as the data output pins of the serial interface, clear PM12, P12 to 0.
When using P10/SCK10/TxD61 as the clock input pins of the serial interface, P11/SI10/RxD61 as the data input
pins, set PM10 and M11 to 1. At this time, the output latches of P10 and P11 may be 0 or 1.
PM1 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH.
Figure 14-4. Format of Port Mode Register 1 (PM1)
Address: FF21H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
PM1 PM17 PM16 PM15 PM14 PM13 PM12 PM11 PM10
PM10 P1n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 7)
0 Output mode (Output buffer on)
1 Input mode (Output buffer off)
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
338
14.4 Operation of Serial Interface CSI10
Serial interface CSI10 can be used in the following two modes.
• Operation stop mode
• 3-wire serial I/O mode
14.4.1 Operation stop mode
Serial communication is not executed in this mode. Therefore, the power consumption can be reduced. In
addition, the P10/SCK10/TXD61, P11/SI10/RXD61 and P12/SO10 pins can be used as ordinary I/O port pins in this
mode.
(1) Register used
The operation stop mode is set by serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10).
To set the operation stop mode, clear bit 7 (CSIE10) of CSIM10 to 0.
(a) Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)
CSIM10 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears CSIM10 to 00H.
• Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)
Address: FF80H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CSIM10 CSIE10 TRMD10 0 DIR10 0 0 0 CSOT10
CSIE10 Operation control in 3-wire serial I/O mode
0 Disables operationNote 1 and asynchronously resets the internal circuitNote 2.
Notes 1. To use P10/SCK10/TXD61 and P12/SO10 as general-purpose ports, set CSIM10 in the default
status (00H).
2. Bit 0 (CSOT10) of CSIM10 and serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) are reset.
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 339
14.4.2 3-wire serial I/O mode
The 3-wire serial I/O mode is used for connecting peripheral ICs and display controllers with a clocked serial
interface.
In this mode, communication is executed by using three lines: the serial clock (SCK10), serial output (SO10), and
serial input (SI10) lines.
(1) Registers used
• Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)
• Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10)
• Port mode register 1 (PM1)
• Port register 1 (P1)
The basic procedure of setting an operation in the 3-wire serial I/O mode is as follows.
<1> Set the CSIC10 register (see Figures 14-3).
<2> Set bits 0 and 4 to 6 (CSOT10, DIR10, and TRMD10) of the CSIM10 register (see Figures 14-2).
<3> Set bit 7 (CSIE10) of the CSIM10 register to 1. → Transmission/reception is enabled.
<4> Write data to transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10). → Data transmission/reception is started.
Read data from serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10). → Data reception is started.
Caution Take relationship with the other party of communication when setting the port mode register
and port register.
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
340
The relationship between the register settings and pins is shown below.
Table 14-2. Relationship Between Register Settings and Pins
(a) Serial interface CSI10
Pin Function CSIE10 TRMD10 PM11 P11 PM12 P12 PM10 P10 CSI10
Operation SI10/RxD61/
P11
SO10/P12 SCK10/TxD61/
P10
0 × ×Note 1 ×
Note 1 ×
Note 1 ×
Note 1 ×
Note 1 ×
Note 1 Stop RxD61/
P11
P12 TxD61/
P10Note 2
1 0 1 × ×Note 1 ×
Note 1 1 × Slave
receptionNote 3
SI10 P12 SCK10
(input)Note 3
1 1 ×Note 1 ×
Note 1 0 0 1 × Slave
transmissionNote 3
RxD61/
P11
SO10 SCK10
(input)Note 3
1 1 1 × 0 0 1 × Slave
transmission/
receptionNote 3
SI10 SO10 SCK10
(input)Note 3
1 0 1 × ×Note 1 ×
Note 1 0 1 Master
reception
SI10 P12 SCK10
(output)
1 1 ×Note 1 ×
Note 1 0 0 0 1 Master
transmission
RxD61/
P11
SO10 SCK10
(output)
1 1 1 × 0 0 0 1 Master
transmission/
reception
SI10 SO10 SCK10
(output)
Notes 1. Can be set as port function.
2. To use P10/SCK10/TxD61 as port pins, clear CKP10 to 0.
3. To use the slave mode, set CKS102, CKS101, and CKS100 to 1, 1, 1.
Remark ×: don’t care
CSIE10: Bit 7 of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)
TRMD10: Bit 6 of CSIM10
CKP10: Bit 4 of serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10)
CKS102, CKS101, CKS100: Bits 2 to 0 of CSIC10
PM1×: Port mode register
P1×: Port output latch
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 341
(2) Communication operation
In the 3-wire serial I/O mode, data is transmitted or received in 8-bit units. Each bit of the data is transmitted or
received in synchronization with the serial clock.
Data can be transmitted or received if bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is 1.
Transmission/reception is started when a value is written to transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10). In addition,
data can be received when bit 6 (TRMD10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is 0.
Reception is started when data is read from serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10).
After communication has been started, bit 0 (CSOT10) of CSIM10 is set to 1. When communication of 8-bit data
has been completed, a communication completion interrupt request flag (CSIIF10) is set, and CSOT10 is cleared
to 0. Then the next communication is enabled.
Caution Do not access the control register and data register when CSOT10 = 1 (during serial
communication).
Figure 14-5. Timing in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (1/2)
(1) Transmission/reception timing (Type 1; TRMD10 = 1, DIR10 = 0, CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 0)
AAHABH 56H ADH 5AH B5H 6AH D5H
55H (communication data)
55H is written to SOTB10
SCK10
SOTB10
SIO10
CSOT10
CSIIF10
SO10
SI1n (receive AAH)
Read/write trigger
INTCSI10
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
342
Figure 14-5. Timing in 3-Wire Serial I/O Mode (2/2)
(2) Transmission/reception timing (Type 2; TRMD10 = 1, DIR10 = 0, CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 1)
ABH 56H ADH 5AH B5H 6AH D5H
SCK10
SOTB10
SIO10
CSOT10
CSIIF10
SO10
SI10input AAH)
AAH
55H (communication data)
55H is written to SOTB10.
Read/write trigger
INTCSI10
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 343
Figure 14-6. Timing of Clock/Data Phase
(a) Type 1; CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 0, DIR10 = 0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCK10
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
SI10 capture
CSIIF10
CSOT10
(b) Type 2; CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 1, DIR10 = 0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCK10
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
SI10 capture
CSIIF10
CSOT10
(c) Type 3; CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 0, DIR10 = 0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCK10
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
SI10 capture
CSIIF10
CSOT10
(d) Type 4; CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 1, DIR10 = 0
D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
SCK10
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
SI10 capture
CSIIF10
CSOT10
Remark The above figure illustrates a communication operation where data is transmitted with the MSB first.
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
344
(3) Timing of output to SO10 pin (first bit)
When communication is started, the value of transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) is output from the SO10 pin.
The output operation of the first bit at this time is described below.
Figure 14-7. Output Operation of First Bit (1/2)
(a) Type 1: CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 0
SCK10
SOTB10
SIO10
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
First bit 2nd bit
Output latch
(b) Type 3: CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 0
SCK10
SOTB10
SIO10
Output latch
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
First bit 2nd bit
The first bit is directly latched by the SOTB10 register to the output latch at the falling (or rising) edge of SCK10,
and output from the SO10 pin via an output selector. Then, the value of the SOTB10 register is transferred to the
SIO10 register at the next rising (or falling) edge of SCK10, and shifted one bit. At the same time, the first bit of
the receive data is stored in the SIO10 register via the SI10 pin.
The second and subsequent bits are latched by the SIO10 register to the output latch at the next falling (or rising)
edge of SCK10, and the data is output from the SO10 pin.
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 345
Figure 14-7. Output Operation of First Bit (2/2)
(c) Type 2: CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 1
SCK10
SOTB10
SIO10
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
First bit 2nd bit 3rd bit
Output latch
(d) Type 4: CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 1
First bit 2nd bit 3rd bit
SCK10
SOTB10
SIO10
Output latch
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
The first bit is directly latched by the SOTB10 register at the falling edge of the write signal of the SOTB10
register or the read signal of the SIO10 register, and output from the SO10 pin via an output selector. Then, the
value of the SOTB10 register is transferred to the SIO10 register at the next falling (or rising) edge of SCK10, and
shifted one bit. At the same time, the first bit of the receive data is stored in the SIO10 register via the SI10 pin.
The second and subsequent bits are latched by the SIO10 register to the output latch at the next rising (or falling)
edge of SCK10, and the data is output from the SO10 pin.
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
346
(4) Output value of SO10 pin (last bit)
After communication has been completed, the SO10 pin holds the output value of the last bit.
Figure 14-8. Output Value of SO10 Pin (Last Bit) (1/2)
(a) Type 1: CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 0
SCK10
SOTB10
SIO10
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
( ← Next request is issued.)
Last bit
Output latch
(b) Type 3: CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 0
Last bit
( ← Next request is issued.)
SCK10
SOTB10
SIO10
Output latch
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 347
Figure 14-8. Output Value of SO10 Pin (Last Bit) (2/2)
(c) Type 2: CKP10 = 0, DAP10 = 1
SCK10
SOTB10
SIO10
SO10 Last bit
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10 ( ← Next request is issued.)
Output latch
(d) Type 4: CKP10 = 1, DAP10 = 1
Last bit
( ← Next request is issued.)
SCK10
SOTB10
SIO10
Output latch
SO10
Writing to SOTB10 or
reading from SIO10
CHAPTER 14 SERIAL INTERFACE CSI10
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
348
(5) SO10 output (see (a) in Figure 14-1)
The status of the SO10 output is as follows if bit 7 (CSIE10) of serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) is
cleared to 0.
Table 14-3. SO10 Output Status
TRMD10 DAP10 DIR10 SO10 OutputNote 1
TRMD10 = 0Note − − Outputs low levelNote 2
DAP10 = 0 − Value of SO10 latch
(low-level output)
DIR10 = 0 Value of bit 7 of SOTB10
TRMD10 = 1
DAP10 = 1
DIR10 = 1 Value of bit 0 of SOTB10
Notes 1. The actual output of the SO10/P12 pin is determined according to PM12 and P12,
as well as the SO10 output.
2. Status after reset
Caution If a value is written to TRMD10, DAP10, and DIR10, the output value of SO10
changes.
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 349
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
15.1 Outline Description
This product features an on-chip 1-channel CAN (Controller Area Network) controller that complies with CAN
protocol as standardized in ISO 11898.
15.1.1 Features
- Compliant with ISO 11898 and tested according to ISO/DIS 16845 (CAN conformance test)
- Standard frame and extended frame transmission/reception enabled
- Transfer rate: 1 Mbps max. (CAN clock input ≥ 8 MHz)
- 16 message buffers/1 channel
- Receive/transmit history list function
- Automatic block transmission function
- Multi-buffer receive block function
- Mask setting of four patterns is possible for each channel
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
350
15.1.2 Overview of functions
Table 15-1 presents an overview of the CAN controller functions.
Table 15-1. Overview of Functions
Function Details
Protocol CAN protocol ISO 11898 (standard and extended frame transmission/reception)
Baud rate Maximum 1 Mbps (CAN clock input ≥ 8 MHz)
Data storage Storing messages in the CAN RAM
Number of messages - 16 message buffers/1 channel
- Each message buffer can be set to be either a transmit message buffer or a receive
message buffer.
Message reception - Unique ID can be set to each message buffer.
- Mask setting of four patterns is possible for each channel.
- A receive completion interrupt is generated each time a message is received and stored in
a message buffer.
- Two or more receive message buffers can be used as a FIFO receive buffer (multi-buffer
receive block function).
- Receive history list function
Message transmission - Unique ID can be set to each message buffer.
- Transmit completion interrupt for each message buffer
- Message buffer number 0 to 7 specified as the transmit message buffer can be used for
automatic block transfer. Message transmission interval is programmable (automatic
block transmission function (hereafter referred to as “ABT”)).
- Transmission history list function
Remote frame processing Remote frame processing by transmit message buffer
Time stamp function - The time stamp function can be set for a message reception when a 16-bit timer is used in
combination.
Time stamp capture trigger can be selected (SOF or EOF in a CAN message frame can
be detected.).
Diagnostic function - Readable error counters
- “Valid protocol operation flag” for verification of bus connections
- Receive-only mode
- Single-shot mode
- CAN protocol error type decoding
- Self-test mode
Forced release from bus-off state - Forced release from bus-off (by ignoring timing constraint) possible by software.
- No automatic release from bus-off (software must re-enable).
Power save mode - CAN sleep mode (can be woken up by CAN bus)
- CAN stop mode (cannot be woken up by CAN bus)
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 351
15.1.3 Configuration
The CAN controller is composed of the following four blocks.
(1) NPB interface
This functional block provides an NPB (NEC peripheral I/O bus) interface and means of transmitting and
receiving signals between the CAN module and the host CPU.
(2) MCM (Message Control Module)
This functional block controls access to the CAN protocol layer and to the CAN RAM within the CAN module.
(3) CAN protocol layer
This functional block is involved in the operation of the CAN protocol and its related settings.
(4) CAN RAM
This is the CAN memory functional block, which is used to store message IDs, message data, etc.
Figure 15-1. Block Diagram of CAN Module
CTxD
CRxD
CPU
CAN module
CAN RAM
NPB
(NEC Peripheral I/O Bus)
MCM
(Message Control Module)
NPB
interface
Interrupt request
INTTRX0
INTREC0
INTERR0
INTWUP0
CAN
Protocol
Layer
CAN
transceiver
Message
buffer 0
Message
buffer 1
Message
buffer 2
Message
buffer 3
Message
buffer 15
C
0
MASK1
C
0
MASK2
C
0
MASK3
C
0
MASK4
...
CAN_H0
CAN_L0
CAN bus
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
352
15.2 CAN Protocol
CAN (Controller Area Network) is a high-speed multiplex communication protocol for real-time communication in
automotive applications (class C). CAN is prescribed by ISO 11898. For details, refer to the ISO 11898
specifications.
The CAN specification is generally divided into two layers: a physical layer and a data link layer. In turn, the data
link layer includes logical link and medium access control. The composition of these layers is illustrated below.
Figure 15-2. Composition of Layers
Physical layer Prescription of signal level and bit description
Data link
layer
Note
· Logical link control (LLC)
· Medium access control (MAC)
· Acceptance filtering
· Overload report
· Recovery management
· Data capsuled/not capsuled
· Frame coding (stuffing/not stuffing)
· Medium access management
· Error detection
· Error report
· Acknowledgement
· Seriated/not seriated
Higher
Lower
Note CAN controller specification
15.2.1 Frame format
(1) Standard format frame
- The standard format frame uses 11-bit identifiers, which means that it can handle up to 2048 messages.
(2) Extended format frame
- The extended format frame uses 29-bit (11 bits + 18 bits) identifiers which increase the number of
messages that can be handled to 2048 x 218 messages.
- Extended format frame is set when “recessive level” (CMOS level equals “1”) is set for both the SRR and
IDE bits in the arbitration field.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 353
15.2.2 Frame types
The following four types of frames are used in the CAN protocol.
Table 15-2. Frame Types
Frame Type Description
Data frame Frame used to transmit data
Remote frame Frame used to request a data frame
Error frame Frame used to report error detection
Overload frame Frame used to delay the next data frame or remote frame
(1) Bus value
The bus values are divided into dominant and recessive.
- Dominant level is indicated by logical 0.
- Recessive level is indicated by logical 1.
- When a dominant level and a recessive level are transmitted simultaneously, the bus value becomes
dominant level.
15.2.3 Data frame and remote frame
(1) Data frame
A data frame is composed of seven fields.
Figure 15-3. Data Frame
R
D
Interframe space
End of frame (EOF)
ACK field
CRC field
Data field
Control field
Arbitration field
Start of frame (SOF)
Data frame
<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7> <8>
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
354
(2) Remote frame
A remote frame is composed of six fields.
Figure 15-4. Remote Frame
R
D
Interframe space
End of frame (EOF)
ACK field
CRC field
Control field
Arbitration field
Start of frame (SOF)
Remote frame
<1> <2> <3> <5> <6> <7> <8>
Remarks 1. The data field is not transferred even if the control field’s data length code is not “0000B”.
2. D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
(3) Description of fields
<1> Start of frame (SOF)
The start of frame field is located at the start of a data frame or remote frame.
Figure 15-5. Start of Frame (SOF)
R
D
1 bit
Start of frame
(Interframe space or bus idle) (Arbitration field)
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
• If dominant level is detected in the bus idle state, a hard-synchronization is performed (the current TQ
is assigned to be the SYNC segment).
• If dominant level is sampled at the sample point following such a hard-synchronization, the bit is
assigned to be a SOF. If recessive level is detected, the protocol layer returns to the bus idle state
and regards the preceding dominant pulse as a disturbance only. No error frame is generated in
such case.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 355
<2> Arbitration field
The arbitration field is used to set the priority, data frame/remote frame, and frame format.
Figure 15-6. Arbitration Field (in Standard Format Mode)
R
D
IDE
(r1)
r0RTRIdentifier
Arbitration field (Control field)
(11 bits)
ID28 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ID18
(1 bit) (1 bit)
Cautions 1. ID28 to ID18 are identifiers.
2. An identifier is transmitted MSB first.
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
Figure 15-7. Arbitration Field (in Extended Format Mode)
R
D
r1 r0RTRIDESRRIdentifier Identifier
Arbitration field (Control field)
(11 bits) (18 bits)
ID28 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ID18 ID17 · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ID0
(1 bit) (1 bit) (1 bit)
Cautions 1. ID28 to ID18 are identifiers.
2. An identifier is transmitted MSB first.
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
Table 15-3. RTR Frame Settings
Frame Type RTR Bit
Data frame 0 (D)
Remote frame 1 (R)
Table 15-4. Frame Format Setting (IDE Bit) and Number of Identifier (ID) Bits
Frame Format SRR Bit IDE Bit Number. of Bits
Standard format mode None 0 (D) 11 bits
Extended format mode 1 (R) 1 (R) 29 bits
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
356
<3> Control field
The control field sets “N” as the number of data bytes in the data field (N = 0 to 8).
Figure 15-8. Control Field
R
D
r1
(IDE)
r0RTR DLC2DLC3 DLC1 DLC0
Control field (Data field)
(Arbitration field)
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
In a standard format frame, the control field’s IDE bit is the same as the r1 bit.
Table 15-5. Data Length Setting
Data Length Code
DLC3 DLC2 DLC1 DLC0
Data Byte Count
0 0 0 0 0 bytes
0 0 0 1 1 byte
0 0 1 0 2 bytes
0 0 1 1 3 bytes
0 1 0 0 4 bytes
0 1 0 1 5 bytes
0 1 1 0 6 bytes
0 1 1 1 7 bytes
1 0 0 0 8 bytes
Other than above 8 bytes regardless of the
value of DLC3 to DLC0
Caution In the remote frame, there is no data field even if
the data length code is not 0000B.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 357
<4> Data field
The data field contains the amount of data (byte units) set by the control field. Up to 8 units of data can
be set.
Figure 15-9. Data Field
R
D
Data0
(8 bits)
MSB → LSB
Data7
(8 bits)
MSB → LSB
Data field (CRC field)
(Control field)
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
<5> CRC field
The CRC field is a 16-bit field that is used to check for errors in transmit data.
Figure 15-10. CRC Field
R
D
CRC sequence
CRC delimiter
(1 bit)
(15 bits)
CRC field (ACK field)
(Data field or control field)
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
- The polynomial P(X) used to generate the 15-bit CRC sequence is expressed as follows.
P(X) = X15 + X14 + X10 + X8 + X7 + X4 + X3 + 1
- Transmitting node: Transmits the CRC sequence calculated from the data (before bit stuffing) in the
start of frame, arbitration field, control field, and data field.
- Receiving node: Compares the CRC sequence calculated using data bits that exclude the stuffing
bits in the receive data with the CRC sequence in the CRC field. If the two CRC
sequences do not match, the node issues an error frame.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
358
<6> ACK field
The ACK field is used to acknowledge normal reception.
Figure 15-11. ACK Field
R
D
ACK slot
(1 bit)
ACK delimiter
(1 bit)
ACK field (End of frame)(CRC field)
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
- If no CRC error is detected, the receiving node sets the ACK slot to the dominant level.
- The transmitting node outputs two recessive-level bits.
<7> End of frame (EOF)
The end of frame field indicates the end of data frame/remote frame.
Figure 15-12. End of Frame (EOF)
R
D
End of frame
(7 bits)
(Interframe space or overload frame)(ACK field)
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 359
<8> Interframe space
The interframe space is inserted after a data frame, remote frame, error frame, or overload frame to
separate one frame from the next.
- The bus state differs depending on the error status.
(a) Error active node
The interframe space consists of a 3-bit intermission field and a bus idle field.
Figure 15-13. Interframe Space (Error Active Node)
R
D
Interframe space
Intermission
(3 bits)
Bus idle
(0 to ∞ bits)
(Frame)(Frame)
Remarks 1. Bus idle: State in which the bus is not used by any node.
2. D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
(b) Error passive node
The interframe space consists of an intermission field, a suspend transmission field, and a bus idle field.
Figure 15-14. Interframe Space (Error Passive Node)
R
D
Interframe space
Intermission
(3 bits)
Suspend transmission
(8 bits)
Bus idle
(0 to ∞ bits)
(Frame)(Frame)
Remarks 1. Bus idle: State in which the bus is not used by any node.
Suspend transmission: Sequence of 8 recessive-level bits transmitted from the node in
the error passive status.
2. D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
Usually, the intermission field is 3 bits. If the transmitting node detects a dominant level at the third bit of
the intermission field, however, it executes transmission.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
360
- Operation in error status
Table 15-6. Operation in Error Status
Error Status Operation
Error active A node in this status can transmit immediately after a 3-bit intermission.
Error passive A node in this status can transmit 8 bits after the intermission.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 361
15.2.4 Error frame
An error frame is output by a node that has detected an error.
Figure 15-15. Error Frame
<1>
R
D
<2> <3>
6 bits
0 to 6 bits
8 bits
(<4>) (<5>)
Interframe space or overload frame
Error delimiter
Error flag2
Error flag1
Error bit
Error frame
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
Table 15-7. Definition Error Frame Fields
No. Name Bit Count Definition
<1> Error flag1 6 Error active node: Outputs 6 dominant-level bits consecutively.
Error passive node: Outputs 6 recessive-level bits consecutively.
If another node outputs a dominant level while one node is outputting a
passive error flag, the passive error flag is not cleared until the same level
is detected 6 bits in a row.
<2> Error flag2 0 to 6 Nodes receiving error flag 1 detect bit stuff errors and issues this error
flag.
<3> Error delimiter 8 Outputs 8 recessive-level bits consecutively.
If a dominant level is detected at the 8th bit, an overload frame is
transmitted from the next bit.
<4> Error bit – The bit at which the error was detected.
The error flag is output from the bit next to the error bit.
In the case of a CRC error, this bit is output following the ACK delimiter.
<5> Interframe space/overload
frame
– An interframe space or overload frame starts from here.5
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
362
15.2.5 Overload frame
An overload frame is transmitted under the following conditions.
- When the receiving node has not completed the reception operationNote
- If a dominant level is detected at the first two bits during intermission
- If a dominant level is detected at the last bit (7th bit) of the end of frame or at the last bit (8th bit) of the error
delimiter/overload delimiter
Note The CAN is internally fast enough to process all received frames not generating overload frames.
Figure 15-16. Overload Frame
<1>
R
D
<2> <3>
6 bits 0 to 6 bits 8 bits
(<4>) (<5>)
Interframe space or overload frame
Overload delimiter
Overload flag
Overload flag
Frame
Overload frame
Remark D: Dominant = 0
R: Recessive = 1
Table 15-8. Definition of Overload Frame Fields
No Name Bit Count Definition
<1> Overload flag 6 Outputs 6 dominant-level bits consecutively.
<2> Overload flag from other node 0 to 6 The node that received an overload flag in the interframe
space outputs an overload flag.
<3> Overload delimiter 8 Outputs 8 recessive-level bits consecutively.
If a dominant level is detected at the 8th bit, an overload frame
is transmitted from the next bit.
<4> Frame – Output following an end of frame, error delimiter, or overload
delimiter.
<5> Interframe space/overload
frame
– An interframe space or overload frame starts from here.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 363
15.3 Functions
15.3.1 Determining bus priority
(1) When a node starts transmission:
- During bus idle, the node that output data first transmits the data.
(2) When more than one node starts transmission:
- The node that outputs the dominant level for the longest consecutively from the first bit of the arbitration field
acquires the bus priority (if a dominant level and a recessive level are simultaneously transmitted, the
dominant level is taken as the bus value).
- The transmitting node compares its output arbitration field and the data level on the bus.
Table 15-9. Determining Bus Priority
Level match Continuous transmission
Level mismatch Continuous transmission
(3) Priority of data frame and remote frame
- When a data frame and a remote frame are on the bus, the data frame has priority because its RTR bit, the
last bit in the arbitration field, carries a dominant level.
Remark If the extended-format data frame and the standard-format remote frame conflict on the bus (if ID28 to
ID18 of both of them are the same), the standard-format remote frames takes priority.
15.3.2 Bit stuffing
Bit stuffing is used to establish synchronization by appending 1-bit inverted data if the same level continues for 5
bits, in order to prevent a burst error.
Table 15-10. Bit Stuffing
Transmission During the transmission of a data frame or remote frame, when the same level continues for 5 bits in the data
between the start of frame and the ACK field, 1 inverted-level bit of data is inserted before the following bit.
Reception During the reception of a data frame or remote frame, when the same level continues for 5 bits in the data
between the start of frame and the ACK field, reception is continued after deleting the next bit.
15.3.3 Multi masters
As the bus priority (a node acquiring transmit functions) is determined by the identifier, any node can be the bus
master.
15.3.4 Multi cast
Although there is one transmitting node, two or more nodes can receive the same data at the same time because
the same identifier can be set to two or more nodes.
15.3.5 CAN sleep mode/CAN stop mode function
The CAN sleep mode/CAN stop mode function puts the CAN controller in waiting mode to achieve low power
consumption.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
364
The controller is woken up from the CAN sleep mode by bus operation but it is not woken up from the CAN stop
mode by bus operation (the CAN stop mode is controlled by CPU access).
15.3.6 Error control function
(1) Error types
Table 15-11. Error Types
Description of Error Detection State Type
Detection Method Detection
Condition
Transmission/
Reception
Field/Frame
Bit error Comparison of output level and
level on the bus
Mismatch of levels Transmitting/
receiving node
Bit that outputting data on the
bus at the start of frame to end of
frame, error frame and overload
frame.
Stuff error Check the receive data at the
stuff bit
6 consecutive bits
of the same output
level
Receiving node Start of frame to CRC sequence
CRC error Comparison of the CRC
sequence generated from the
receive data and the received
CRC sequence
Mismatch of CRC Receiving node CRC field
Form error Field/frame check of the fixed
format
Detection of fixed
format violation
Receiving node CRC delimiter
ACK field
End of frame
Error frame
Overload frame
ACK error Check of the ACK slot by the
transmitting node
Detection of
recessive level in
ACK slot
Transmitting node ACK slot
(2) Output timing of error frame
Table 15-12. Output Timing of Error Frame
Type Output Timing
Bit error, stuff error,
form error, ACK error
Error frame output is started at the timing of the bit following the detected error.
CRC error Error frame output is started at the timing of the bit following the ACK delimiter.
(3) Processing in case of error
The transmission node re-transmits the data frame or remote frame after the error frame (However, it does
not re-transmit the frame in the single-shot mode.).
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 365
(4) Error state
(a) Types of error states
The following three types of error states are defined by the CAN specification.
- Error active
- Error passive
- Bus-off
These types of error states are classified by the values of the TEC7 to TEC0 bits (transmission error
counter bits) and the REC6 to REC0 bits (reception error counter bits) of the CAN error counter register
(C0ERC) as shown in Table 15-13.
The present error state is indicated by the CAN module information register (C0INFO).
When each error counter value becomes equal to or greater than the error warning level (96), the TECS0
or RECS0 bit of the C0INFO register is set to 1. In this case, the bus state must be tested because it is
considered that the bus has a serious fault. An error counter value of 128 or more indicates an error
passive state and the TECS1 or RECS1 bit of the C0INFO register is set to 1.
- If the value of the transmission error counter is greater than or equal to 256 (actually, the transmission
error counter does not indicate a value greater than or equal to 256), the bus-off state is reached and
the BOFF bit of the C0INFO register is set to 1.
- If only one node is active on the bus at startup (i.e., a particular case such as when the bus is
connected only to the local station), ACK is not returned even if data is transmitted. Consequently, re-
transmission of the error frame and data is repeated. In the error passive state, however, the
transmission error counter is not incremented and the bus-off state is not reached.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
366
Table 15-13. Types of Error States
Type Operation Value of Error
Counter
Indication of
C0INFO Register
Operation specific to Given Error State
Error active Transmission 0-95 TECS1, TECS0 = 00
Reception 0-95 RECS1, RECS0 = 00
Transmission 96-127 TECS1, TECS0 = 01
Reception 96-127 RECS1, RECS0 = 01
- Outputs an active error flag (6 consecutive
dominant-level bits) on detection of the
error.
Error passive Transmission 128-255 TECS1, TECS0 = 11
Reception 128 or more RECS1, RECS0 = 11
- Outputs a passive error flag (6 consecutive
recessive-level bits) on detection of the
error.
- Transmits 8 recessive-level bits, in
between transmissions, following an
intermission (suspend transmission).
Bus-off Transmission 256 or more (not
indicated)Note
BOFF = 1,
TECS1, TECS0 = 11
- Communication is not possible.
Messages are not stored when receiving
frames, however, the following operations of
<1>, <2>, and <3> are done.
<1> TSOUT toggles.
<2> REC is incremented/decremented.
<3> VALID bit is set.
- If the CAN module is entered to the
initialization mode and then transition
request to any operation mode is made,
and when 11 consecutive recessive-level
bits are detected 128 times, the error
counter is reset to 0 and the error active
state can be restored.
Note The value of the transmission error counter (TEC) is invalid when the BOFF bit is set to 1. If an error that
increments the value of the transmission error counter by +8 while the counter value is in a range of 248 to
255, the counter is not incremented and the bus-off state is assumed.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 367
(b) Error counter
The error counter counts up when an error has occurred, and counts down upon successful transmission
and reception. The error counter is updated immediately after error detection.
Table 15-14. Error Counter
State Transmission Error Counter
(TEC7 to TEC0)
Reception Error Counter
(REC6 to REC0)
Receiving node detects an error (except bit error in the active error flag
or overload flag).
No change +1 (when REPS bit = 0)
Receiving node detects dominant level following error flag of error
frame.
No change +8 (when REPS bit = 0)
Transmitting node transmits an error flag.
[As exceptions, the error counter does not change in the following
cases.]
<1> ACK error is detected in error passive state and dominant level is
not detected while the passive error flag is being output.
<2> A stuff error is detected in an arbitration field that transmitted a
recessive level as a stuff bit, but a dominant level is detected.
+8 No change
Bit error detection while active error flag or overload flag is being output
(error-active transmitting node)
+8 No change
Bit error detection while active error flag or overload flag is being output
(error-active receiving node)
No change +8 (when REPS bit = 0)
When the node detects 14 consecutive dominant-level bits from the
beginning of the active error flag or overload flag, and then subsequently
detects 8 consecutive dominant-level bits. When the node detects 8
consecutive dominant levels after a passive error flag
+8 (during transmission) +8 (during reception,
when REPS bit = 0)
When the transmitting node has completed transmission without error
(±0 if error counter = 0)
–1 No change
When the receiving node has completed reception without error No change - –1 (1 ≤ REC6 to REC0
≤ 127, when REPS bit =
0)
- ±0 (REC6 to REC0 = 0,
when REPS bit = 0)
- Value of 119 to 255 is
set (when REPS bit = 1)
(c) Occurrence of bit error in intermission
An overload frame is generated.
Caution If an error occurs, the error flag output (active or passive) is controlled according to the
contents of the transmission error counter and reception error counter before the error
occurred. The value of the error counter is incremented after the error flag has been
output.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
368
(5) Recovery from bus-off state
When the CAN module is in the bus-off state, the CAN module permanently sets its output signals (CTxD) to
recessive level.
The CAN module recovers from the bus-off state in the following bus-off recovery sequence.
<1> A request to enter the CAN initialization mode
<2> A request to enter a CAN operation mode
(a) Recovery operation through normal recovery sequence
(b) Forced recovery operation that skips recovery sequence
(a) Recovery operation from bus-off state through normal recovery sequence
The CAN module first issues a request to enter the initialization mode (refer to timing <1> in Figure 15-
17). This request will be immediately acknowledged, and the OPMODE bits of the C0CTRL register are
cleared to 000B. Processing such as analyzing the fault that has caused the bus-off state, re-defining
the CAN module and message buffer using application software, or stopping the operation of the CAN
module can be performed by clearing the GOM bit to 0.
Next, the user requests to change the mode from the initialization mode to an operation mode (refer to
timing <2> in Figure 15-17). This starts an operation to recover the CAN module from the bus-off state.
The conditions under which the module can recover from the bus-off state are defined by the CAN
protocol ISO 11898, and it is necessary to detect 11 consecutive recessive-level bits 128 times. At this
time, the request to change the mode to an operation mode is held pending until the recovery conditions
are satisfied. When the recovery conditions are satisfied (refer to timing <3> in Figure 15-17), the CAN
module can enter the operation mode it has requested. Until the CAN module enters this operation
mode, it stays in the initialization mode. Completion to be requested operation mode can be confirmed
by reading the OPMODE bits of the C0CTRL register.
During the bus-off period and bus-off recovery sequence, the BOFF bit of the C0INFO register stays set
(to 1). In the bus-off recovery sequence, the reception error counter (REC[6:0]) counts the number of
times 11 consecutive recessive-level bits have been detected on the bus. Therefore, the recovery state
can be checked by reading REC[6:0].
Cautions 1. When the transmission from the initialization mode to any operation modes is
requested to execute bus-off recovery sequence again in the bus-off recovery
sequence, reception error counter is cleared.
Therefore it is necessary to detect 11 consecutive recessive-level bits 128 times on
the bus again.
2. In the bus-off recovery sequence, REC[6:0] counts up (+1) each time 11
consecutive recessive-level bits have been detected. Even during the bus-off
period, the CAN module can enter the CAN sleep mode or CAN stop mode. To start
the bus-off recovery sequence, it is necessary to transit to the initialization mode
once. However, when the CAN module is in either CAN sleep mode or CAN stop
mode, transition request to the initialization mode is not accepted, thus you have
to release the CAN sleep mode first. In this case, as soon as the CAN sleep mode is
released, the bus-off recovery sequence starts and no transition to initialization
mode is necessary. If the can module detects a dominant edge on the CAN bus
while in sleep mode even during bus-off, the sleep mode will be left and the bus-off
recovery sequence will start.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 369
Figure 15-17. Recovery Operation from Bus-off State through Normal Recovery Sequence
»error-passive«
00H
00H ≠ 00H
00H
80H ≤ TEC[7:0] ≤ FFH
BOFF bit
in C0INFO
register
OPMODE[2:0]
in C0CTRL
register
(user writings)
OPMODE[2:0]
in C0CTRL
register
(user readings)
TEC[7:0]
in C0ERC
register
REPS, REC[6:0]
in C0ERC
register
TEC > FFH
≠ 00H ≠ 00H
≠ 00H
FFH < TEC [7:0]
»bus-off« »bus-off-recovery-sequence« »error-active«
00H ≤ TEC[7:0] < 80H
00H ≤ REPS, REC[6:0] < 80H
<1> <2>
<3>
Undefined
80H ≤ REPS, REC[6:0] ≤ FFH
(b) Forced recovery operation that skips bus-off recovery sequence
The CAN module can be forcibly released from the bus-off state, regardless of the bus state, by skipping
the bus-off recovery sequence. Here is the procedure.
First, the CAN module requests to enter the initialization mode. For the operation and points to be noted
at this time, refer to (a) Recovery operation from bus-off state through normal recovery sequence.
Next, the module requests to enter an operation mode. At the same time, the CCERC bit of the C0CTRL
register must be set to 1.
As a result, the bus-off recovery sequence defined by the CAN protocol ISO 11898 is skipped, and the
module immediately enters the operation mode. In this case, the module is connected to the CAN bus
after it has monitored 11 consecutive recessive-level bits. For details, refer to the processing in Figure
15-56.
Caution This function is not defined by the CAN protocol ISO 11898. When using this function,
thoroughly evaluate its effect on the network system.
(6) Initializing CAN module error counter register (C0ERC) in initialization mode
If it is necessary to initialize the CAN module error counter register (C0ERC) and CAN module information
register (C0INFO) for debugging or evaluating a program, they can be initialized to the default value by
setting the CCERC bit of the C0CTRL register in the initialization mode. When initialization has been
completed, the CCERC bit is automatically cleared to 0.
Cautions 1. This function is enabled only in the initialization mode. Even if the CCERC bit is set to
1 in a CAN operation mode, the C0ERC and C0INFO registers are not initialized.
2. The CCERC bit can be set at the same time as the request to enter a CAN operation
mode.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
370
15.3.7 Baud rate control function
(1) Prescaler
The CAN controller has a prescaler that divides the clock (fCAN) supplied to CAN. This prescaler generates a
CAN protocol layer basic clock (fTQ) derived from the CAN module system clock (fCANMOD), and divided by 1 to
256 (refer to 15.6 (12) CAN Bit Rate Prescaler Register (C0BRP)).
(2) Data bit time (8-25 time quanta)
One data bit time is defined as shown in Figure 15-18.
The CAN controller sets time segment 1, time segment 2, and reSynchronization Jump Width (SJW) as the
parameter of data bit time, as shown in Figure 15-18. Time segment 1 is equivalent to the total of the
propagation (prop) segment and phase segment 1 that are defined by the CAN protocol specification. Time
segment 2 is equivalent to phase segment 2.
Figure 15-18. Segment Setting
Data bit time(DBT)
Phase segment 1
Prop segmentSync segment Phase segment 2
Time segment 1(TSEG1) Time segment 2
(TSEG2)
Sample point (SPT)
Segment Name Settable Range Notes on Setting to Confirm to CAN Specification
Time Segment 1 (TSEG1) 2TQ-16TQ —
Time Segment 2 (TSEG2) 1TQ-8TQ IPT of the CAN controller is 0TQ. To conform to the CAN
protocol specification, therefore, a length equal to phase
segment 1 must be set here. This means that the length
of time segment 1 minus 1TQ is the settable upper limit of
time segment 2.
Resynchronization jump
width(SJW)
1TQ-4TQ The length of time segment 1 minus 1TQ or 4 TQ,
whichever is smaller.
Remark IPT : Information Processing Time
TQ : Time Quanta
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 371
Reference: The CAN standard ISO 11898 specification defines the segments constituting the data bit time as
shown in Figure 15-19.
Figure 15-19. Reference: Configuration of Data Bit Time Defined by CAN Specification
Phase segment 1Prop segmentSync segment Phase segment 2
Sample point (SPT)
SJW
Data bit time(DBT)
Segment Name Segment Length Description
Sync Segment
(Synchronization Segment)
1 This segment starts at the edge where the level changes
from recessive to dominant when hard-synchronization is
established.
Prop Segment Programmable to 1 to 8
or more
This segment absorbs the delay of the output buffer, CAN
bus, and input buffer.
The length of this segment is set so that ACK is returned
before the start of phase segment 1.
Time of prop segment ≥ (Delay of output buffer) + 2 x
(Delay of CAN bus) + (Delay of input buffer)
Phase Segment 1 Programmable to 1 to 8
Phase Segment 2 Phase Segment 1 or
IPT, whichever greater
This segment compensates for an error of data bit time.
The longer this segment, the wider the permissible range
but the slower the communication speed.
SJW Programmable from
1TQ to length of
segment 1 or 4TQ,
whichever is smaller
This width sets the upper limit of expansion or contraction
of the phase segment during resynchronization.
Remark IPT : Information Processing Time
TQ : Time Quanta
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
372
(3) Synchronizing data bit
- The receiving node establishes synchronization by a level change on the bus because it does not have a
sync signal.
- The transmitting node transmits data in synchronization with the bit timing of the transmitting node.
(a) Hard-synchronization
This synchronization is established when the receiving node detects the start of frame in the interframe
space.
- When a falling edge is detected on the bus, that TQ means the sync segment and the next segment is
the prop segment. In this case, synchronization is established regardless of SJW.
Figure 15-20. Hard-synchronization at Recognition of Dominant Level during Bus Idle
Start of frameInterframe space
CANbus
Bit timing Phase
segment 1
Prop
segment
Sync
segment
Phase
segment 2
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 373
(b) Resynchronization
Synchronization is established again if a level change is detected on the bus during reception (only if a
recessive level was sampled previously).
- The phase error of the edge is given by the relative position of the detected edge and sync segment.
<Sign of phase error>
0: If the edge is within the sync segment
Positive: If the edge is before the sample point (phase error)
Negative: If the edge is after the sample point (phase error)
If phase error is positive: Phase segment 1 is longer by specified SJW.
If phase error is negative: Phase segment 2 is shorter by specified SJW.
- The sample point of the data of the receiving node moves relatively due to the “discrepancy” in baud
rate between the transmitting node and receiving node.
Figure 15-21. Resynchronization
CAN bus
Bit timing
CAN bus
Bit timing
Data bit time(DBT)
Phase segment 1
Prop
segment
Sync
segment Phase
segment 2
Phase segment 1
Prop
segment
Sync
segment
Phase
segment 2
Sample point
Sample point
If phase error is negative
If phase error is positve
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
374
15.4 Connection with Target System
The microcontroller incorporated a CAN has to be connected to the CAN bus using an external transceiver.
Figure 15-22. Connection to CAN Bus
Microcontroller
incorporated
a CAN
Transceiver
CTxD
CRxD
CANL
CANH
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 375
15.5 Internal Registers of CAN Controller
15.5.1 CAN controller configuration
Table 15-15. List of CAN Controller Registers
Item Register Name
CAN global registers CAN global control register (C0GMCTRL)
CAN global clock selection register (C0GMCS)
CAN global automatic block transmission control register (C0GMABT)
CAN global automatic block transmission delay register (C0GMABTD)
CAN module registers CAN module mask 1 register (C0MASK1L, C0MASK1H)
CAN module mask 2 register (C0MASK2L, C0MASK2H)
CAN module mask3 register (C0MASK3L, C0MASK3H)
CAN module mask 4 registers (C0MASK4L, C0MASK4H)
CAN module control register (C0CTRL)
CAN module last error code register (C0LEC)
CAN module information register (C0INFO)
CAN module error counter register (C0ERC)
CAN module interrupt enable register (C0IE)
CAN module interrupt status register (C0INTS)
CAN module bit rate prescaler register (C0BRP)
CAN module bit rate register (C0BTR)
CAN module last in-pointer register (C0LIPT)
CAN module receive history list register (C0RGPT)
CAN module last out-pointer register (C0LOPT)
CAN module transmit history list register (C0TGPT)
CAN module time stamp register (C0TS)
Message buffer registers CAN message data byte 01 register m (C0MDATA01m)
CAN message data byte 0 register m (C0MDATA0m)
CAN message data byte 1 register m (C0MDATA1m)
CAN message data byte 23 register m (C0MDATA23m)
CAN message data byte 2 register m (C0MDATA2m)
CAN message data byte 3 Register m (C0MDATA3m)
CAN message data byte 45 Register m (C0MDATA45m)
CAN message data byte 4 Register m (C0MDATA4m)
CAN message data byte 5 Register m (C0MDATA5m)
CAN message data byte 67 Register m (C0MDATA67m)
CAN message data byte 6 register m (C0MDATA6m)
CAN message data byte 7 register m (C0MDATA7m)
CAN message data length register m (C0MDLCm)
CAN message configuration register m (C0MCONFm)
CAN message ID register m (C0MIDLm, C0MIDHm)
CAN message control register m (C0MCTRLm)
Remark m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
376
15.5.2 Register access type
Table 15-16. Register Access Types (1/9)
Bit Manipulation Units Address Register Name Symbol R/W
1 8 16
Default Value
FA00H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 00 C0MDATA0100 √ Undefined
FA00H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 00 C0MDATA000 √ Undefined
FA01H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 00 C0MDATA100 √ Undefined
FA02H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 00 C0MDATA2300 √ Undefined
FA02H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 00 C0MDATA200 √ Undefined
FA03H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 00 C0MDATA300 √ Undefined
FA04H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 00 C0MDATA4500 √ Undefined
FA04H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 00 C0MDATA400 √ Undefined
FA05H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 00 C0MDATA500 √ Undefined
FA06H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 00 C0MDATA6700 √ Undefined
FA06H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 00 C0MDATA600 √ Undefined
FA07H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 00 C0MDATA700 √ Undefined
FA08H CAN0 message data length code register 00 C0MDLC00 √ 0000xxxxB
FA09H CAN0 message configuration register 00 C0MCONF00 √ Undefined
FA0AH C0MIDL00
√ Undefined
FA0CH
CAN0 message ID register 00
C0MIDH00
√ Undefined
FA0EH CAN0 message control register 00 C0MCTRL00 √ 00x00000
000xx000B
FA10H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 01 C0MDATA0101 √ Undefined
FA10H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 01 C0MDATA001 √ Undefined
FA11H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 01 C0MDATA101 √ Undefined
FA12H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 01 C0MDATA2301 √ Undefined
FA12H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 01 C0MDATA201 √ Undefined
FA13H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 01 C0MDATA301 √ Undefined
FA14H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 01 C0MDATA4501 √ Undefined
FA14H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 01 C0MDATA401 √ Undefined
FA15H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 01 C0MDATA501 √ Undefined
FA16H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 01 C0MDATA6701 √ Undefined
FA16H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 01 C0MDATA601 √ Undefined
FA17H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 01 C0MDATA701 √ Undefined
FA18H CAN0 message data length code register 01 C0MDLC01 √ 0000xxxxB
FA19H CAN0 message configuration register 01 C0MCONF01 √ Undefined
FA1AH C0MIDL01
√ Undefined
FA1CH
CAN0 message ID register 01
C0MIDH01
√ Undefined
FA1EH CAN0 message control register 01 C0MCTRL01
R/W
√ 00x00000
000xx000B
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 377
Table 15-16. Register Access Types (2/9)
Bit Manipulation Units Address Register Name Symbol R/W
1 8 16
Default Value
FA20H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 02 C0MDATA0102 √ Undefined
FA20H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 02 C0MDATA002 √ Undefined
FA21H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 02 C0MDATA102 √ Undefined
FA22H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 02 C0MDATA2302 √ Undefined
FA22H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 02 C0MDATA202 √ Undefined
FA23H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 02 C0MDATA302 √ Undefined
FA24H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 02 C0MDATA4502 √ Undefined
FA24H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 02 C0MDATA402 √ Undefined
FA25H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 02 C0MDATA502 √ Undefined
FA26H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 02 C0MDATA6702 √ Undefined
FA26H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 02 C0MDATA602 √ Undefined
FA27H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 02 C0MDATA702 √ Undefined
FA28H CAN0 message data length code register 02 C0MDLC02 √ 0000xxxxB
FA29H CAN0 message configuration register 02 C0MCONF02 √ Undefined
FA2AH C0MIDL02
√ Undefined
FA2CH
CAN0 message ID register 02
C0MIDH02
√ Undefined
FA2EH CAN0 message control register 02 C0MCTRL02 √ 00x00000
000xx000B
FA30H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 03 C0MDATA0103 √ Undefined
FA30H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 03 C0MDATA003 √ Undefined
FA31H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 03 C0MDATA103 √ Undefined
FA32H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 03 C0MDATA2303 √ Undefined
FA32H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 03 C0MDATA203 √ Undefined
FA33H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 03 C0MDATA303 √ Undefined
FA34H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 03 C0MDATA4503 √ Undefined
FA34H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 03 C0MDATA403 √ Undefined
FA35H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 03 C0MDATA503 √ Undefined
FA36H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 03 C0MDATA6703 √ Undefined
FA36H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 03 C0MDATA603 √ Undefined
FA37H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 03 C0MDATA703 √ Undefined
FA38H CAN0 message data length code register 03 C0MDLC03 √ 0000xxxxB
FA39H CAN0 message configuration register 03 C0MCONF03 √ Undefined
FA3AH C0MIDL03
√ Undefined
FA3CH
CAN0 message ID register 03
C0MIDH03
√ Undefined
FA3EH CAN0 message control register 03 C0MCTRL03
R/W
√ 00x00000
000xx000B
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
378
Table 15-16. Register Access Types (3/9)
Bit Manipulation Units Address Register Name Symbol R/W
1 8 16
Default Value
FA40H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 04 C0MDATA0104 √ Undefined
FA40H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 04 C0MDATA004 √ Undefined
FA41H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 04 C0MDATA104 √ Undefined
FA42H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 04 C0MDATA2304 √ Undefined
FA42H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 04 C0MDATA204 √ Undefined
FA43H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 04 C0MDATA304 √ Undefined
FA44H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 04 C0MDATA4504 √ Undefined
FA44H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 04 C0MDATA404 √ Undefined
FA45H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 04 C0MDATA504 √ Undefined
FA46H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 04 C0MDATA6704 √ Undefined
FA46H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 04 C0MDATA604 √ Undefined
FA47H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 04 C0MDATA704 √ Undefined
FA48H CAN0 message data length code register 04 C0MDLC04 √ 0000xxxxB
FA49H CAN0 message configuration register 04 C0MCONF04 √ Undefined
FA4AH C0MIDL04
√ Undefined
FA4CH
CAN0 message ID register 04
C0MIDH04
√ Undefined
FA4EH CAN0 message control register 04 C0MCTRL04 √ 00x00000
000xx000B
FA50H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 05 C0MDATA0105 √ Undefined
FA50H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 05 C0MDATA005 √ Undefined
FA51H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 05 C0MDATA105 √ Undefined
FA52H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 05 C0MDATA2305 √ Undefined
FA52H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 05 C0MDATA205 √ Undefined
FA53H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 05 C0MDATA305 √ Undefined
FA54H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 05 C0MDATA4505 √ Undefined
FA54H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 05 C0MDATA405 √ Undefined
FA55H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 05 C0MDATA505 √ Undefined
FA56H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 05 C0MDATA6705 √ Undefined
FA56H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 05 C0MDATA605 √ Undefined
FA57H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 05 C0MDATA705 √ Undefined
FA58H CAN0 message data length code register 05 C0MDLC05 √ 0000xxxxB
FA59H CAN0 message configuration register 05 C0MCONF05 √ Undefined
FA5AH C0MIDL05
√ Undefined
FA5CH
CAN0 message ID register 05
C0MIDH05
√ Undefined
FA5EH CAN0 message configuration register 05 C0MCTRL05
R/W
√ 00x00000
000xx000B
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 379
Table 15-16. Register Access Types (4/9)
Bit Manipulation Units Address Register Name Symbol R/W
1 8 16
Default Value
FA60H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 06 C0MDATA0106 √ Undefined
FA60H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 06 C0MDATA006 √ Undefined
FA61H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 06 C0MDATA106 √ Undefined
FA62H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 06 C0MDATA2306 √ Undefined
FA62H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 06 C0MDATA206 √ Undefined
FA63H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 06 C0MDATA306 √ Undefined
FA64H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 06 C0MDATA4506 √ Undefined
FA64H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 06 C0MDATA406 √ Undefined
FA65H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 06 C0MDATA506 √ Undefined
FA66H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 06 C0MDATA6706 √ Undefined
FA66H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 06 C0MDATA606 √ Undefined
FA67H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 06 C0MDATA706 √ Undefined
FA68H CAN0 message data length code register 06 C0MDLC06 √ 0000xxxxB
FA69H CAN0 message configuration register 06 C0MCONF06 √ Undefined
FA6AH C0MIDL06
√ Undefined
FA6CH
CAN0 message ID register 06
C0MIDH06
√ Undefined
FA6EH CAN0 message control register 06 C0MCTRL06 √ 00x00000
000xx000B
FA70H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 07 C0MDATA0107 √ Undefined
FA70H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 07 C0MDATA007 √ Undefined
FA71H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 07 C0MDATA107 √ Undefined
FA72H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 07 C0MDATA2307 √ Undefined
FA72H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 07 C0MDATA207 √ Undefined
FA73H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 07 C0MDATA307 √ Undefined
FA74H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 07 C0MDATA4507 √ Undefined
FA74H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 07 C0MDATA407 √ Undefined
FA75H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 07 C0MDATA507 √ Undefined
FA76H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 07 C0MDATA6707 √ Undefined
FA76H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 07 C0MDATA607 √ Undefined
FA77H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 07 C0MDATA707 √ Undefined
FA78H CAN0 message data length code register 07 C0MDLC07 √ 0000xxxxB
FA79H CAN0 message configuration register 07 C0MCONF07 √ Undefined
FA7AH C0MIDL07
√ Undefined
FA7CH
CAN0 message ID register 07
C0MIDH07
√ Undefined
FA7EH CAN0 message control register 07 C0MCTRL07
R/W
√ 00x00000
000xx000B
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
380
Table 15-16. Register Access Types (5/9)
Bit Manipulation Units Address Register Name Symbol R/W
1 8 16
Default Value
FA80H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 08 C0MDATA0108 √ Undefined
FA80H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 08 C0MDATA008 √ Undefined
FA81H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 08 C0MDATA108 √ Undefined
FA82H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 08 C0MDATA2308 √ Undefined
FA82H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 08 C0MDATA208 √ Undefined
FA83H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 08 C0MDATA308 √ Undefined
FA84H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 08 C0MDATA4508 √ Undefined
FA84H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 08 C0MDATA408 √ Undefined
FA85H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 08 C0MDATA508 √ Undefined
FA86H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 08 C0MDATA6708 √ Undefined
FA86H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 08 C0MDATA608 √ Undefined
FA87H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 08 C0MDATA708 √ Undefined
FA88H CAN0 message data length code register 08 C0MDLC08 √ 0000xxxxB
FA89H CAN0 message configuration register 08 C0MCONF08 √ Undefined
FA8AH C0MIDL08
√ Undefined
FA8CH
CAN0 message ID register 08
C0MIDH08
√ Undefined
FA8EH CAN0 message control register 08 C0MCTRL08 √ 00x00000
000xx000B
FA90H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 09 C0MDATA0109 √ Undefined
FA90H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 09 C0MDATA009 √ Undefined
FA91H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 09 C0MDATA109 √ Undefined
FA92H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 09 C0MDATA2309 √ Undefined
FA92H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 09 C0MDATA209 √ Undefined
FA93H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 09 C0MDATA309 √ Undefined
FA94H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 09 C0MDATA4509 √ Undefined
FA94H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 09 C0MDATA409 √ Undefined
FA95H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 09 C0MDATA509 √ Undefined
FA96H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 09 C0MDATA6709 √ Undefined
FA96H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 09 C0MDATA609 √ Undefined
FA97H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 09 C0MDATA709 √ Undefined
FA98H CAN0 message data length code register 09 C0MDLC09 √ 0000xxxxB
FA99H CAN0 message configuration register 09 C0MCONF09 √ Undefined
FA9AH C0MIDL09
√ Undefined
FA9CH
CAN0 message ID register 09
C0MIDH09
√ Undefined
FA9EH CAN0 message control register 09 C0MCTRL09
R/W
√ 00x00000
000xx000B
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 381
Table 15-16. Register Access Types (6/9)
Bit Manipulation Units Address Register Name Symbol R/W
1 8 16
Default Value
FAA0H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 10 C0MDATA0110 √ Undefined
FAA0H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 10 C0MDATA010 √ Undefined
FAA1H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 10 C0MDATA110 √ Undefined
FAA2H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 10 C0MDATA2310 √ Undefined
FAA2H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 10 C0MDATA210 √ Undefined
FAA3H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 10 C0MDATA310 √ Undefined
FAA4H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 10 C0MDATA4510 √ Undefined
FAA4H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 10 C0MDATA410 √ Undefined
FAA5H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 10 C0MDATA510 √ Undefined
FAA6H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 10 C0MDATA6710 √ Undefined
FAA6H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 10 C0MDATA610 √ Undefined
FAA7H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 10 C0MDATA710 √ Undefined
FAA8H CAN0 message data length code register 10 C0MDLC10 √ 0000xxxxB
FAA9H CAN0 message configuration register 10 C0MCONF10 √ Undefined
FAAAH C0MIDL10
√ Undefined
FAACH
CAN0 message ID register 10
C0MIDH10
√ Undefined
FAAEH CAN0 message control register 10 C0MCTRL10 √ 00x00000
000xx000B
FAB0H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 11 C0MDATA0111 √ Undefined
FAB0H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 11 C0MDATA011 √ Undefined
FAB1H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 11 C0MDATA111 √ Undefined
FAB2H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 11 C0MDATA2311 √ Undefined
FAB2H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 11 C0MDATA211 √ Undefined
FAB3H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 11 C0MDATA311 √ Undefined
FAB4H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 11 C0MDATA4511 √ Undefined
FAB4H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 11 C0MDATA411 √ Undefined
FAB5H CAN0 message data byte 51 register 11 C0MDATA511 √ Undefined
FAB6H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 11 C0MDATA6711 √ Undefined
FAB6H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 11 C0MDATA611 √ Undefined
FAB7H CAN0 message data byte 71 register 11 C0MDATA711 √ Undefined
FAB8H CAN0 message data length code register 11 C0MDLC11 √ 0000xxxxB
FAB9H CAN0 message configuration register 11 C0MCONF11 √ Undefined
FABAH C0MIDL11
√ Undefined
FABCH
CAN0 message ID register 11
C0MIDH11
√ Undefined
FABEH CAN0 message control register 11 C0MCTRL11
R/W
√ 00x00000
000xx000B
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
382
Table 15-16. Register Access Types (7/9)
Bit Manipulation Units Address Register Name Symbol R/W
1 8 16
Default Value
FAC0H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 12 C0MDATA0112 √ Undefined
FAC0H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 12 C0MDATA012 √ Undefined
FAC1H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 12 C0MDATA112 √ Undefined
FAC2H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 12 C0MDATA2312 √ Undefined
FAC2H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 12 C0MDATA212 √ Undefined
FAC3H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 12 C0MDATA312 √ Undefined
FAC4H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 12 C0MDATA4512 √ Undefined
FAC4H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 12 C0MDATA412 √ Undefined
FAC5H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 12 C0MDATA512 √ Undefined
FAC6H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 12 C0MDATA6712 √ Undefined
FAC6H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 12 C0MDATA612 √ Undefined
FAC7H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 12 C0MDATA712 √ Undefined
FAC8H CAN0 message data length code register 12 C0MDLC12 √ 0000xxxxB
FAC9H CAN0 message configuration register 12 C0MCONF12 √ Undefined
FACAH C0MIDL12
√ Undefined
FACCH
CAN0 message ID register 12
C0MIDH12
√ Undefined
FACEH CAN0 message control register 12 C0MCTRL12 √ 00x00000
000xx000B
FAD0H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 13 C0MDATA0113 √ Undefined
FAD0H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 13 C0MDATA013 √ Undefined
FAD1H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 13 C0MDATA113 √ Undefined
FAD2H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 13 C0MDATA2313 √ Undefined
FAD2H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 13 C0MDATA213 √ Undefined
FAD3H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 13 C0MDATA313 √ Undefined
FAD4H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 13 C0MDATA4513 √ Undefined
FAD4H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 13 C0MDATA413 √ Undefined
FAD5H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 13 C0MDATA513 √ Undefined
FAD6H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 13 C0MDATA6713 √ Undefined
FAD6H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 13 C0MDATA613 √ Undefined
FAD7H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 13 C0MDATA713 √ Undefined
FAD8H CAN0 message data length code register 13 C0MDLC13 √ 0000xxxxB
FAD9H CAN0 message configuration register 13 C0MCONF13 √ Undefined
FADAH C0MIDL13
√ Undefined
FADCH
CAN0 message ID register 13
C0MIDH13
√ Undefined
FADEH CAN0 message control register 13 C0MCTRL13
R/W
√ 00x00000
000xx000B
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 383
Table 15-16. Register Access Types (8/9)
Bit Manipulation Units Address Register Name Symbol R/W
1 8 16
Default Value
FAE0H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 14 C0MDATA0114 √ Undefined
FAE0H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 14 C0MDATA014 √ Undefined
FAE1H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 14 C0MDATA114 √ Undefined
FAE2H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 14 C0MDATA2314 √ Undefined
FAE2H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 14 C0MDATA214 √ Undefined
FAE3H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 14 C0MDATA314 √ Undefined
FAE4H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 14 C0MDATA4514 √ Undefined
FAE4H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 14 C0MDATA414 √ Undefined
FAE5H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 14 C0MDATA514 √ Undefined
FAE6H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 14 C0MDATA6714 √ Undefined
FAE6H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 14 C0MDATA614 √ Undefined
FAE7H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 14 C0MDATA714 √ Undefined
FAE8H CAN0 message data length code register 14 C0MDLC14 √ 0000xxxxB
FAE9H CAN0 message configuration register 14 C0MCONF14 √ Undefined
FAEAH C0MIDL14
√ Undefined
FAECH
CAN0 message ID register 14
C0MIDH14
√ Undefined
FAEEH CAN0 message control register 14 C0MCTRL14 √ 00x00000
000xx000B
FAF0H CAN0 message data byte 01 register 15 C0MDATA0115 √ Undefined
FAF0H CAN0 message data byte 0 register 15 C0MDATA015 √ Undefined
FAF1H CAN0 message data byte 1 register 15 C0MDATA115 √ Undefined
FAF2H CAN0 message data byte 23 register 15 C0MDATA2315 √ Undefined
FAF2H CAN0 message data byte 2 register 15 C0MDATA215 √ Undefined
FAF3H CAN0 message data byte 3 register 15 C0MDATA315 √ Undefined
FAF4H CAN0 message data byte 45 register 15 C0MDATA4515 √ Undefined
FAF4H CAN0 message data byte 4 register 15 C0MDATA415 √ Undefined
FAF5H CAN0 message data byte 5 register 15 C0MDATA515 √ Undefined
FAF6H CAN0 message data byte 67 register 15 C0MDATA6715 √ Undefined
FAF6H CAN0 message data byte 6 register 15 C0MDATA615 √ Undefined
FAF7H CAN0 message data byte 7 register 15 C0MDATA715 √ Undefined
FAF8H CAN0 message data length code register 15 C0MDLC15 √ 0000xxxx
FAF9H CAN0 message configuration register 15 C0MCONF15 √ Undefined
FAFAH C0MIDL15
√ Undefined
FAFCH
CAN0 message ID register 15
C0MIDH15
√ Undefined
FAFEH CAN0 message control register 15 C0MCTRL15
R/W
√ 00x00000
000xx000B
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
384
Table 15-16. Register Access Types (9/9)
Bit Manipulation Units Address Register Name Symbol R/W
1 8 16
Default Value
FF60H CAN0 module receive history list register C0RGPT R/W - – √ xx02H
FF62H CAN0 module transmit history list register C0TGPT R/W – – √ xx02H
FF64H CAN0 global control register C0GMCTRL R/W – – √ 0000H
FF66H CAN0 global automatic block transmission
control register
C0GMABT R/W – – √ 0000H
FF68H CAN0 module last out-pointer register C0LOPT R – √ – Undefined
FF6EH CAN0 global clock select register C0GMCS R/W – √ – 0FH
FF6FH CAN0 global automatic block transmission
delay setting register
C0GMABTD R/W – √ – 00H
FF70H C0MASK1L
FF72H
CAN0 module mask 1 register
C0MASK1H
R/W – – √ Undefined
FF74H C0MASK2L
FF76H
CAN0 module mask 2 register
C0MASK2H
R/W – – √ Undefined
FF78H C0MASK3L
FF7AH
CAN0 module mask 3 register
C0MASK3H
R/W – – √ Undefined
FF7CH C0MASK4L
FF7EH
CAN0 module mask 4 register
C0MASK4H
R/W – – √ Undefined
FF8AH CAN0 module time stamp register C0TS R/W – – √ 0000H
FF90H CAN0 module control register C0CTRL R/W – – √ 0000H
FF92H CAN0 module last error information register C0LEC R/W – √ – 00H
FF93H CAN0 module information register C0INFO R – √ – 00H
FF94H CAN0 module error counter register C0ERC R – – √ 0000H
FF96H CAN0 module interrupt enable register C0IE R/W – – √ 0000H
FF98H CAN0 module interrupt status register C0INTS R/W – – √ 0000H
FF9CH CAN0 module bit rate register C0BTR R/W – – √ 370FH
FF9EH CAN0 module bit rate prescaler register C0BRP R/W – √ – FFH
FF9FH CAN0 module last in-pointer register C0LIPT R – √ – Undefined
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 385
15.5.3 Register bit configuration
Table 15-17. Bit Configuration of CAN Global Registers
Address Symbol Bit 7/15 Bit 6/14 Bit 5/13 Bit 4/12 Bit 3/11 Bit 2/10 Bit 1/9 Bit 0/8
FF64H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Clear
GOM
FF65H
C0GMCTRL(W)
0 0 0 0 0 0 Set EFSD Set GOM
FF64H C0GMCTRL(R) 0 0 0 0 0 0 EFSD GOM
FF65H MBON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FF66H C0GMABT(W) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Clear
ABTTRG
FF67H 0 0 0 0 0 0 Set
ABTCLR
Set
ABTTRG
FF66H C0GMABT(R) 0 0 0 0 0 0 ABTCLR ABTTRG
FF67H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FF6EH C0GMCS 0 0 0 0 CCP3 CCP2 CCP1 CCP0
FF6FH C0GMABTD 0 0 0 0 ABTD3 ABTD2 ABTD1 ABTD0
Caution The actual register address is calculated as follows:
Register Address = Global Register Area Offset (CH dependent) + Offset Address as listed in table
above
Remark (R) When read
(W) When write
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
386
Table 15-18. Bit Configuration of CAN Module Registers (1/2)
Address Symbol Bit 7/15 Bit 6/14 Bit 5/13 Bit 4/12 Bit 3/11 Bit 2/10 Bit 1/9 Bit 0/8
FF60H C0RGPT(W) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Clear
ROVF
FF61H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FF60H C0RGPT(R) 0 0 0 0 0 0 RHPM ROVF
FF61H RGPT[7:0]
FF62H C0LOPT LOPT[7:0]
FF64H C0TGPT(W) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Clear
TOVF
FF65H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FF64H C0TGPT(R) 0 0 0 0 0 0 THPM TOVF
FF65H TGPT[7:0]
FF70H CM1ID [7:0]
FF71H
C0MASK1L
CM1ID [15:8]
FF72H C0MASK1H CM1ID [23:16]
FF73H 0 0 0 CM1ID [28:24]
FF74H C0MASK2L CM2ID [7:0]
FF75H CM2ID [15:8]
FF76H C0MASK2H CM2ID [23:16]
FF77H 0 0 0 CM2ID [28:24]
FF78H C0MASK3L CM3ID [7:0]
FF79H CM3ID [15:8]
FF7AH C0MASK3H CM3ID [23:16]
FF7BH 0 0 0 CM3ID [28:24]
FF7CH C0MASK4L CM4ID [7:0]
FF7DH CM4ID [15:8]
FF7EH C0MASK4H CM4ID [23:16]
FF7FH 0 0 0 CM4ID [28:24]
FF8AH C0TS(W) 0 0 0 0 0 Clear
TSLOCK
Clear
TSSEL
Clear
TSEN
FF8BH 0 0 0 0 0 Set
TSLOCK
Set
TSSEL
Set
TSEN
FF8AH C0TS(R) 0 0 0 0 0 TSLOCK TSSEL TSEN
FF8BH 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Caution The actual register address is calculated as follows:
Register Address = Global Register Area Offset (CH dependent) + Offset Address as listed in table
above
Remark (R) When read
(W) When write
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 387
Table 15-18. Bit Configuration of CAN Module Registers (2/2)
Address Symbol Bit 7/15 Bit 6/14 Bit 5/13 Bit 4/12 Bit 3/11 Bit 2/10 Bit 1/9 Bit 0/8
FF90H C0CTRL(W) Clear
CCERC
Clear
AL
Clear
VALID
Clear
PSMODE
1
Clear
PSMODE
0
Clear
OPMODE
2
Clear
OPMODE
1
Clear
OPMODE
0
FF91H Set
CCERC
Set
AL
0 Set
PSMODE
1
Set
PSMODE
0
Set
OPMODE
2
Set
OPMODE
1
Set
OPMODE
0
FF90H C0CTRL(R) CCERC AL VALID PS
MODE1
PS
MODE0
OP
MODE2
OP
MODE1
OP
MODE0
FF91H 0 0 0 0 0 0 RSTAT TSTAT
FF92H C0LEC(W) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FF92H C0LEC(R) 0 0 0 0 0 LEC2 LEC1 LEC0
FF93H C0INFO 0 0 0 BOFF TECS1 TECS0 RECS1 RECS0
FF94H C0ERC TEC[7:0]
FF95H REC[7:0]
FF96H C0IE(W) 0 0 Clear CIE5 Clear CIE4 Clear CIE3 Clear CIE2 Clear CIE1 Clear CIE0
FF97H 0 0 Set CIE5 Set CIE4 Set CIE3 Set CIE2 Set CIE1 Set CIE0
FF96H C0IE(R) 0 0 CIE5 CIE4 CIE3 CIE2 CIE1 CIE0
FF97H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FF98H C0INTS(W) 0 0 Clear
CINTS5
Clear
CINTS4
Clear
CINTS3
Clear
CINTS2
Clear
CINTS1
Clear
CINTS0
FF99H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FF98H C0INTS(R) 0 0 CINTS5 CINTS4 CINTS3 CINTS2 CINTS1 CINTS0
FF99H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
FF9CH C0BTR 0 0 0 0 TSEG1[3:0]
FF9DH 0 0 SJW[1:0] 0 TSEG2[2:0]
FF9EH C0BRP TQPRS[7:0]
FF9FH C0LIPT LIPT[7:0]
Caution The actual register address is calculated as follows:
Register Address = Global Register Area Offset (CH dependent) + Offset Address as listed in table
above
Remark (R) When read
(W) When write
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
388
Table 15-19. Bit Configuration of Message Buffer Registers
Address Symbol Bit 7/15 Bit 6/14 Bit 5/13 Bit 4/12 Bit 3/11 Bit 2/10 Bit 1/9 Bit 0/8
FAx0H Message data (byte 0)
FAx1H
C0MDATA01m
Message data (byte 1)
FAx0H C0MDATA0m Message data (byte 0)
FAx1H C0MDATA1m Message data (byte 1)
FAx2H C0MDATA23m Message data (byte 2)
FAx3H Message data (byte 3)
FAx2H C0MDATA2m Message data (byte 2)
FAx3H C0MDATA3m Message data (byte 3)
FAx4H C0MDATA45m Message data (byte 4)
FAx5H Message data (byte 5)
FAx4H C0MDATA4m Message data (byte 4)
FAx5H C0MDATA5m Message data (byte 5)
FAx6H C0MDATA67m Message data (byte 6)
FAx7H Message data (byte 7)
FAx6H C0MDATA6m Message data (byte 6)
FAx7H C0MDATA7m Message data (byte 7)
FAx8H C0MDLCm 0 0 0 0 MDLC3 MDLC2 MDLC1 MDLC0
FAx9H C0MCONFm OWS RTR MT2 MT1 MT0 0 0 MA0
FAxAH ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0
FAxBH
C0MIDLm
ID15 ID14 ID13 ID12 ID11 ID10 ID9 ID8
FAxCH ID23 ID22 ID21 ID20 ID19 ID18 ID17 ID16
FAxDH
C0MIDHm
IDE 0 0 ID28 ID27 ID26 ID25 ID24
FAxEH 0 0 0 Clear MOW Clear IE Clear DN Clear TRQ Clear RDY
FAxFH
C0MCTRLm (W)
0 0 0 0 Set IE 0 Set TRQ Set RDY
FAxEH 0 0 0 MOW IE DN TRQ RDY
FAxFH
C0MCTRLm (R)
0 0 MUC 0 0 0 0 0
Caution The actual register address is calculated as follows:
Register Address = Global Register Area Offset (CH dependent) + Offset Address as listed in table
above
Remarks 1. (R) When read
(W) When write
2. m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 389
15.6 Bit Set/Clear Function
The CAN control registers include registers whose bits can be set or cleared via the CPU and via the CAN
interface. An operation error occurs if the following registers are written directly. Do not write any values directly via
bit manipulation, read/modify/write, or direct writing of target values.
• CAN global control register (C0GMCTRL)
• CAN global automatic block transmission control register (C0GMABT)
• CAN module control register (C0CTRL)
• CAN module interrupt enable register (C0IE)
• CAN module interrupt status register (C0INTS)
• CAN module receive history list register (C0RGPT)
• CAN module transmit history list register (C0TGPT)
• CAN module time stamp register (C0TS)
• CAN message control register (C0MCTRLm)
Remark m = 0 to 15
All the 16 bits in the above registers can be read via the usual method. Use the procedure described in figure 15-
23 below to set or clear the lower 8 bits in these registers.
Setting or clearing of lower 8 bits in the above registers is performed in combination with the higher 8 bits (refer to
the 16-bit data after a write operation in Figure 15-24). Figure 15-23 shows how the values of set bits or clear bits
relate to set/clear/no change operations in the corresponding register.
Figure 15-23. Example of Bit Setting/Clearing Operations
0000000011010001
0000101111011000
set00001011
0000000000000011
clear
11011000
Set
Set
No change
No change
Clear
No change
Clear
Clear
Bit status
Register’s current values
Write values
Register’s value after
write operations
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
390
Figure 15-24. 16-Bit Data during Write Operation
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
set 7 set 6 set 5 set 4 set 3 set 2 set 1 set 0 clear 7 clear 6 clear 5 clear 4 clear 3 clear 2 clear 1 clear 0
set n clear n Status of bit n after bit set/clear operation
0 0 No change
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 No change
Remark n = 0 to 7
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 391
15.7 Control Registers
Remark m = 0 to 15
(1) CAN global control register (C0GMCTRL)
The C0GMCTRL register is used to control the operation of the CAN module.
After reset: 0000H R/W Address: FF64H, FF65H
(a) Read
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0GMCTRL MBON 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 EFSD GOM
(b) Write
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0GMCTRL 0 0 0 0 0 0 Set
EFSD
Set
GOM
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Clear
GOM
(a) Read
MBON Bit Enabling Access to Message Buffer Register,
Transmit/Receive History List Registers
0 Write access and read access to the message buffer register and the transmit/receive history list
registers is disabled.
1 Write access and read access to the message buffer register and the transmit/receive history list
registers is enabled.
Cautions 1. While the MBON bit is cleared (to 0), software access to the message buffers
(C0MDATA0m, C0MDATA1m, C0MDATA01m, C0MDATA2m, C0MDATA3m,
C0MDATA23m, C0MDATA4m, C0MDATA5m, C0MDATA45m, C0MDATA6m,
C0MDATA7m, C0MDATA67m, C0MDLCm, C0MCONFm, C0MIDLm, C0MIDHm,
and C0MCTRLm), or registers related to transmit history or receive history
(C0LOPT, C0TGPT, C0LIPT, and C0RGPT) is disabled.
2. This bit is read-only. Even if 1 is written to MBON while it is 0, the value of
MBON does not change, and access to the message buffer registers, or
registers related to transmit history or receive history remains disabled.
Remark MBON bit is cleared (to 0) when the CAN module enters CAN sleep mode/CAN stop
mode or GOM bit is cleared (to 0).
MBON bit is set (to 1) when the CAN sleep mode/the CAN stop mode is released or
GOM bit is set (to 1).
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
392
EFSD Bit Enabling Forced Shut Down
0 Forced shut down by GOM = 0 disabled.
1 Forced shut down by GOM = 0 enabled.
Caution To request forced shutdown, the GOM bit must be cleared to 0 in a subsequent,
immediately following write access after the EFSD bit has been set to 1. If access
to another register (including reading the C0GMCTRL register) is executed
without clearing the GOM bit immediately after the EFSD bit has been set to 1,
the EFSD bit is forcibly cleared to 0, and the forced shutdown request is invalid.
GOM Global Operation Mode Bit
0 CAN module is disabled from operating.
1 CAN module is enabled to operate.
Caution The GOM bit can be cleared only in the initialization mode or immediately after
EFSD bit is set (to 1).
(b) Write
Set EFSD EFSD Bit Setting
0 No change in ESFD bit .
1 EFSD bit set to 1.
Set GOM Clear GOM GOM Bit Setting
0 1 GOM bit cleared to 0.
1 0 GOM bit set to 1.
Other than above No change in GOM bit.
Caution Set GOM bit and ESFD bit always separately.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 393
(2) CAN global clock selection register (C0GMCS)
The C0GMCS register is used to select the CAN module system clock.
After reset: 0FH R/W Address: FF6EH
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0GMCS 0 0 0 0 CCP3 CCP2 CCP1 CCP0
CCP3 CCP2 CCP1 CCP1 CAN Module System Clock (fCANMOD)
0 0 0 0 fCAN/1
0 0 0 1 fCAN/2
0 0 1 0 fCAN/3
0 0 1 1 fCAN/4
0 1 0 0 fCAN/5
0 1 0 1 fCAN/6
0 1 1 0 fCAN/7
0 1 1 1 fCAN/8
1 0 0 0 fCAN/9
1 0 0 1 fCAN/10
1 0 1 0 fCAN/11
1 0 1 1 fCAN/12
1 1 0 0 fCAN/13
1 1 0 1 fCAN/14
1 1 1 0 fCAN/15
1 1 1 1 fCAN/16 (Default value)
Remark fCAN = Clock supplied to CAN
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
394
(3) CAN global automatic block transmission control register (C0GMABT)
The C0GMABT register is used to control the automatic block transmission (ABT) operation.
After reset: 0000H R/W Address: FF66H, FF67H
(a) Read
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0GMABT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 ABTCLR ABTTRG
(b) Write
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0GMABT 0 0 0 0 0 0 Set
ABTCLR
Set
ABTTRG
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Clear
ABTTRG
Caution Before changing the normal operation mode with ABT to the initialization mode,
be sure to set the C0GMABT register to the default value (0000H).
(a) Read
ABTCLR Automatic Block Transmission Engine Clear Status Bit
0 Clearing the automatic transmission engine is completed.
1 The automatic transmission engine is being cleared.
Remarks 1. Set the ABTCLR bit to 1 while the ABTTRG bit is cleared (0).
The operation is not guaranteed if the ABTCLR bit is set to 1 while the ABTTRG bit
is set to 1.
2. When the automatic block transmission engine is cleared by setting the ABTCLR bit
to 1, the ABTCLR bit is automatically cleared to 0 as soon as the requested
clearing processing is complete.
ABTTRG Automatic Block Transmission Status Bit
0 Automatic block transmission is stopped.
1 Automatic block transmission is under execution.
Caution Do not set the ABTTRG bit (ABTTRG = 1) in the initialization mode. If the
ABTTRG bit is set in the initialization mode, the operation is not guaranteed
after the CAN module has entered the normal operation mode with ABT.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 395
(b) Write
Set ABTCLR Automatic Block Transmission Engine Clear Request Bit
0 The automatic block transmission engine is in idle state or under operation.
1 Request to clear the automatic block transmission engine. After the automatic block
transmission engine has been cleared, automatic block transmission is started from
message buffer 0 by setting the ABTTRG bit to 1.
Set ABTTRG Clear
ABTTRG
Automatic Block Transmission Start Bit
0 1 Request to stop automatic block transmission.
1 0 Request to start automatic block transmission.
Other than above No change in ABTTRG bit.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
396
(4) CAN global automatic block transmission delay setting register (C0GMABTD)
The C0GMABTD register is used to set the interval at which the data of the message buffer assigned to ABT
is to be transmitted in the normal operation mode with ABT.
After reset: 00H R/W Address: FF6FH
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0GMABTD 0 0 0 0 ABTD3 ABTD2 ABTD1 ABTD0
ABTD3 ABTD2 ABTD1 ABTD0 Data frame interval during automatic block transmission (unit:
Data bit time (DBT))
0 0 0 0 0 DBT (default value)
0 0 0 1 25 DBT
0 0 1 0 26 DBT
0 0 1 1 27 DBT
0 1 0 0 28 DBT
0 1 0 1 29 DBT
0 1 1 0 210 DBT
0 1 1 1 211 DBT
1 0 0 0 212 DBT
Other than above Setting prohibited
Cautions 1. Do not change the contents of the C0GMABTD register while the ABTTRG bit
is set to 1.
2. The timing at which the ABT message is actually transmitted onto the CAN
bus differs depending on the status of transmission from the other station or
how a request to transmit a message other than an ABT message (message
buffers 8 to 15) is made.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 397
(5) CAN module mask control register (C0MASKaL, C0MASKaH) (a = 1, 2, 3, or 4)
The C0MASKaL and C0MASKaH registers are used to extend the number of receivable messages into the
same message buffer by masking part of the ID comparison of a message and invalidating the ID of the
masked part.
- CAN Module Mask 1 Register (C0MASK1L, C0MASK1H)
After reset: Undefined R/W Address: C0MASK1L FF70H, FF71H
C0MASK1H FF72H, FF73H
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MASK1L CMID15 CMID14 CMID13 CMID12 CMID11 CMID10 CMID9 CMID8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CMID7 CMID6 CMID5 CMID4 CMID3 CMID2 CMID1 CMID0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MASK1H 0 0 0 CMID28 CMID27 CMID26 CMID25 CMID24
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CMID23 CMID22 CMID21 CMID20 CMID19 CMID18 CMID17 CMID16
- CAN Module Mask 2 Register (C0MASK2L, C0MASK2H)
After reset: Undefined R/W Address: C0MASK2L FF74H, FF75H
C0MASK2H FF76H, FF77H
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MASK2L CMID15 CMID14 CMID13 CMID12 CMID11 CMID10 CMID9 CMID8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CMID7 CMID6 CMID5 CMID4 CMID3 CMID2 CMID1 CMID0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MASK2H 0 0 0 CMID28 CMID27 CMID26 CMID25 CMID24
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CMID23 CMID22 CMID21 CMID20 CMID19 CMID18 CMID17 CMID16
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
398
- CAN Module Mask 3 Register (C0MASK3L, C0MASK3H)
After reset: Undefined R/W Address: C0MASK3L FF78H, FF79H
C0MASK3H FF7AH, FF7BH
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MASK3L CMID15 CMID14 CMID13 CMID12 CMID11 CMID10 CMID9 CMID8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CMID7 CMID6 CMID5 CMID4 CMID3 CMID2 CMID1 CMID0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MASK3H 0 0 0 CMID28 CMID27 CMID26 CMID25 CMID24
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CMID23 CMID22 CMID21 CMID20 CMID19 CMID18 CMID17 CMID16
- CAN Module Mask 4 Register (C0MASK4L, C0MASK4H)
After reset: Undefined R/W Address: C0MASK4L FF7CH, FF7DH
C0MASK4H FF7EH, FF7FH
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MASK4L CMID15 CMID14 CMID13 CMID12 CMID11 CMID10 CMID9 CMID8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CMID7 CMID6 CMID5 CMID4 CMID3 CMID2 CMID1 CMID0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MASK4H 0 0 0 CMID28 CMID27 CMID26 CMID25 CMID24
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CMID23 CMID22 CMID21 CMID20 CMID19 CMID18 CMID17 CMID16
CMID28-CMID0 Sets Mask Pattern of ID Bit.
0 The ID bits of the message buffer set by the CMID28 to CMID0 bits are compared with
the ID bits of the received message frame.
1 The ID bits of the message buffer set by the CMID28 to CMID0 bits are not compared
with the ID bits of the received message frame (they are masked).
Remark Masking is always defined by an ID length of 29 bits. If a mask is assigned to a message
with a standard ID, CMID17 to CMID0 are ignored. Therefore, only CMID28 to CMID18
of the received ID are masked. The same mask can be used for both the standard and
extended IDs.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 399
(6) CAN module control register (C0CTRL)
The C0CTRL register is used to control the operation mode of the CAN module.
After reset: 0000H R/W Address: FF90H, FF91H
(a) Read
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0CTRL 0 0 0 0 0 0 RSTAT TSTAT
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
CCERC AL VALID PSMODE1 PSMODE0 OPMODE2 OPMODE1 OPMODE0
(b) Write
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0CTRL Set
CCERC
Set
AL
0 Set
PSMODE1
Set
PSMODE0
Set
OPMODE2
Set
OPMODE1
Set
OPMODE0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Clear
CCERC
Clear
AL
Clear
VALID
Clear
PSMODE1
Clear
PSMODE0
Clear
OPMODE2
Clear
OPMODE1
Clear
OPMODE0
(a) Read
RSTAT Reception Status Bit
0 Reception is stopped.
1 Reception is in progress.
Remark - The RSTAT bit is set to 1 under the following conditions (timing).
- The SOF bit of a receive frame is detected
- On occurrence of arbitration loss during a transmit frame
- The RSTAT bit is cleared to 0 under the following conditions (timing)
- When a recessive level is detected at the second bit of the interframe space
- On transition to the initialization mode at the first bit of the interframe space
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
400
TSTAT Transmission Status Bit
0 Transmission is stopped.
1 Transmission is in progress.
Remark - The TSTAT bit is set to 1 under the following conditions (timing).
- The SOF bit of a transmit frame is detected
- The first bit of an error flag is detected during a transmit frame
- The TSTAT bit is cleared to 0 under the following conditions (timing).
- During transition to bus-off state
- On occurrence of arbitration loss in transmit frame
- On detection of recessive level at the second bit of the interframe space
- On transition to the initialization mode at the first bit of the interframe space
CCERC Error Counter Clear Bit
0 The C0ERC and C0INFO registers are not cleared in the initialization mode.
1 The C0ERC and C0INFO registers are cleared in the initialization mode.
Remarks 1. The CCERC bit is used to clear the C0ERC and C0INFO registers for re-initialization or
forced recovery from the bus-off state. This bit can be set to 1 only in the
initialization mode.
2. When the C0ERC and C0INFO registers have been cleared, the CCERC bit is also
cleared to 0 automatically.
3. The CCERC bit can be set to 1 at the same time as a request to change the
initialization mode to an operation mode is made.4. The CCERC bit is read-only in the
CAN sleep mode or CAN stop mode.
4. The receive data may be corrupted in case of setting the CCERC bit to (1)
immediately after entering the INIT mode from self-test mode.
AL Bit to Set Operation in Case of Arbitration Loss
0 Re-transmission is not executed in case of an arbitration loss in the single-shot mode.
1 Re-transmission is executed in case of an arbitration loss in the single-shot mode.
Remark The AL bit is valid only in the single-shot mode.
VALID Valid Receive Message Frame Detection Bit
0 A valid message frame has not been received since the VALID bit was last cleared to 0.
1 A valid message frame has been received since the VALID bit was last cleared to 0.
Remarks 1. Detection of a valid receive message frame is not dependent upon storage in the
receive message buffer (data frame) or transmit message buffer (remote frame).
2. Clear the VALID bit (0) before changing the initialization mode to an operation mode.
3. If only two CAN nodes are connected to the CAN bus with one transmitting a
message frame in the normal operation mode and the other in the receive-only
mode, the VALID bit is not set to 1 before the transmitting node enters the error
passive state, because in receive-only mode no acknowledge is generated.
4. In order to clear the VALID bit, set the Clear VALID bit to 1 first and confirm that the
VALID bit is cleared. If it is not cleared, perform clearing processing again.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 401
PSMODE1 PSMODE0 Power Save Mode
0 0 No power save mode is selected.
0 1 CAN sleep mode
1 0 Setting prohibited
1 1 CAN stop mode
Cautions 1. Transition to and from the CAN stop mode must be made via CAN sleep mode.
A request for direct transition to and from the CAN stop mode is ignored.
2. The MBON flag of C0GMCTRL must be checked after releasing a power save
mode, prior to access the message buffers again.
3. CAN Sleep mode requests are kept pending, until cancelled by software or
entered on appropriate bus condition (bus idle). Software can check the actual
status by reading PSMODE.
OPMODE2 OPMODE1 OPMODE0 Operation Mode
0 0 0 No operation mode is selected (CAN module is in the initialization mode).
0 0 1 Normal operation mode
0 1 0 Normal operation mode with automatic block transmission function
(normal operation mode with ABT)
0 1 1 Receive-only mode
1 0 0 Single-shot mode
1 0 1 Self-test mode
Other than above Setting prohibited
Caution Transit to initialization mode or power saving modes may take some time. Be sure
to verify the success of mode change by reading the values, before proceeding.
Remark The OPMODE[2:0] bits are read-only in the CAN sleep mode or CAN stop mode.
(b)Write
Set CCERC Clear CCERC Setting of CCERC Bit
1 1 CCERC bit is set to 1.
Other than
above
0 CCERC bit is not changed.
Set AL Clear AL Setting of AL Bit
0 1 AL bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 AL bit is set to 1.
Other than above AL bit is not changed.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
402
Clear VALID Setting of VALID Bit
0 VALID bit is not changed.
1 VALID bit is cleared to 0.
Set
PSMODE0
Clear
PSMODE0
Setting of PSMODE0 Bit
0 1 PSMODE0 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 PSMODE bit is set to 1.
Other than above PSMODE0 bit is not changed.
Set
PSMODE1
Clear
PSMODE1
Setting of PSMODE1 Bit
0 1 PSMODE1 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 PSMODE1 bit is set to 1.
Other than above PSMODE1 bit is not changed.
Set
OPMODE0
Clear
OPMODE0
Setting of OPMODE0 Bit
0 1 OPMODE0 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 OPMODE0 bit is set to 1.
Other than above OPMODE0 bit is not changed.
Set
OPMODE1
Clear
OPMODE1
Setting of OPMODE1 Bit
0 1 OPMODE1 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 OPMODE1 bit is set to 1.
Other than above OPMODE1 bit is not changed.
Set
OPMODE2
Clear
OPMODE2
Setting of OPMODE2 Bit
0 1 OPMODE2 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 OPMODE2 bit is set to 1.
Other than above OPMODE2 bit is not changed.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 403
(7) CAN module last error code register (C0LEC)
The C0LEC register provides the error information of the CAN protocol.
After reset: 00H R/W Address: FF92H
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0LEC 0 0 0 0 0 LEC2 LEC1 LEC0
Remarks 1. The contents of the C0LEC register are not cleared when the CAN module changes
from an operation mode to the initialization mode.
2. If an attempt is made to write a value other than 00H to the C0LEC register by
software, the access is ignored.
LEC2 LEC1 LEC0 Last CAN Protocol Error Information
0 0 0 No error
0 0 1 Stuff error
0 1 0 Form error
0 1 1 ACK error
1 0 0
Bit error (The CAN module tried to transmit a recessive-level bit as part
of a transmit message (except the arbitration field), but the value on the
CAN bus is a dominant-level bit.)
1 0 1
Bit error (The CAN module tried to transmit a dominant-level bit as part
of a transmit message, ACK bit, error frame, or overload frame, but the
value on the CAN bus is a recessive-level bit.)
1 1 0 CRC error
1 1 1 Undefined
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
404
(8) CAN module information register (C0INFO)
The C0INFO register indicates the status of the CAN module.
After reset: 00H R Address: FF93H
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0INFO 0 0 0 BOFF TECS1 TECS0 RECS1 RECS0
BOFF Bus-off State Bit
0 Not bus-off state (transmit error counter ≤ 255) (The value of the transmit counter is less than
256.)
1 Bus-off state (transmit error counter > 255) (The value of the transmit counter is 256 or more.)
TECS1 TECS0 Transmission Error Counter Status Bit
0 0 The value of the transmission error counter is less than that of the warning level (<96).
0 1 The value of the transmission error counter is in the range of the warning level (96 to
127).
1 0 Undefined
1 1 The value of the transmission error counter is in the range of the error passive or bus-
off state (≥ 128).
RECS1 RECS0 Reception Error Counter Status Bit
0 0 The value of the reception error counter is less than that of the warning level (<96).
0 1 The value of the reception error counter is in the range of the warning level (96 to 127).
1 0 Undefined
1 1 The value of the reception error counter is in the error passive range (≥ 128).
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 405
(9) CAN module error counter register (C0ERC)
The C0ERC register indicates the count value of the transmission/reception error counter.
After reset: 0000H R Address: FF94H, FF95H
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0ERC REPS REC6 REC5 REC4 REC3 REC2 REC1 REC0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
TEC7 TEC6 TEC5 TEC4 TEC3 TEC2 TEC1 TEC0
REPS Reception error passive status bit
0 Reception error counter is not error passive (<128)
1 Reception error counter is error passive range (≥128)
REC6-REC0 Reception Error Counter Bit
0-127 Number of reception errors. These bits reflect the status of the reception error
counter. The number of errors is defined by the CAN protocol.
Remark REC6 to REC0 of the reception error counter are invalid in the reception error passive
state (RECS [1:0] = 11B).
TEC7-TEC0 Transmission Error Counter Bit
0-255 Number of transmission errors. These bits reflect the status of the transmission
error counter. The number of errors is defined by the CAN protocol.
Remark TEC7 to TEC0 of the transmission error counter are invalid in the bus-off state (BOFF
= 1).
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
406
(10) CAN module interrupt enable register (C0IE)
The C0IE register is used to enable or disable the interrupts of the CAN module.
After reset: 0000H R/W Address: FF96H, FF97H
(a) Read
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0IE 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 CIE5 CIE4 CIE3 CIE2 CIE1 CIE0
(b) Write
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0IE 0 0 Set
CIE5
Set
CIE4
Set
CIE3
Set
CIE2
Set
CIE1
Set
CIE0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Clear
CIE5
Clear
CIE4
Clear
CIE3
Clear
CIE2
Clear
CIE1
Clear
CIE0
(a) Read
CIE5-CIE0 CAN Module Interrupt Enable Bit
0 Output of the interrupt corresponding to interrupt status register CINTSx bit is disabled.
1 Output of the interrupt corresponding to interrupt status register CINTSx bit is enabled.
(b) Write
Set CIE5 Clear CIE5 Setting of CIE5 Bit
0 1 CIE5 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 CIE5 bit is set to 1.
Other than above CIE5 bit is not changed.
Set CIE4 Clear CIE4 Setting of CIE4 Bit
0 1 CIE4 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 CIE4 bit is set to 1.
Other than above CIE4 bit is not changed.
Set CIE3 Clear CIE3 Setting of CIE Bit
0 1 CIE3 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 CIE3 bit is set to 1.
Other than above CIE3 bit is not changed.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 407
Set CIE2 Clear CIE2 Setting of CIE2 Bit
0 1 CIE2 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 CIE2 bit is set to 1.
Other than above CIE2 bit is not changed.
Set CIE1 Clear CIE1 Setting of CIE1 Bit
0 1 CIE1 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 CIE1 bit is set to 1.
Other than above CIE1 bit is not changed.
Set CIE0 Clear CIE0 Setting of CIE0 Bit
0 1 CIE0 bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 CIE0 bit is set to 1.
Other than above CIE0 bit is not changed.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
408
(11) CAN module interrupt status register (C0INTS)
The C0INTS register indicates the interrupt status of the CAN module.
After reset: 0000H R/W Address: FF98H, FF99H
(a) Read
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0INTS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 CINTS5 CINTS4 CINTS3 CINTS2 CINTS1 CINTS0
(b) Write
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0INTS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 Clear
CINTS5
Clear
CINTS4
Clear
CINTS3
Clear
CINTS2
Clear
CINTS1
Clear
CINTS0
(a) Read
CINTS5-CINTS0 CAN Interrupt Status Bit
0 No related interrupt source event is pending.
1 A related interrupt source event is pending.
Interrupt Status Bit Related Interrupt Source Event
CINTS5 Wakeup interrupt from CAN sleep modeNote
CINTS4 Arbitration loss interrupt
CINTS3 CAN protocol error interrupt
CINTS2 CAN error status interrupt
CINTS1 Interrupt on completion of reception of valid message frame to message buffer m
CINTS0 Interrupt on normal completion of transmission of message frame from message buffer m
Note The CINTS5 bit is set only when the CAN module is woken up from the CAN sleep mode
by a CAN bus operation. The CINTS5 bit is not set when the CAN sleep mode has been
released by software.
(b) Write
Clear
CINTS5-CINTS0
Setting of CINTS5 to CINTS0 Bits
0 CINTS5 to CINTS0 bits are not changed.
1 CINTS5 to CINTS0 bits are cleared to 0.
Caution Please clear the status bit of this register with software when the confirmation of
each status is necessary in the interrupt processing, because these bits are not
cleared automatically.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 409
(12) CAN module bit rate prescaler register (C0BRP)
The C0BRP register is used to select the CAN protocol layer basic clock (fTQ). The communication baud rate
is set to the C0BTR register.
After reset: FFH R/W Address: FF9EH
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0BRP TQPRS7 TQPRS6 TQPRS5 TQPRS4 TQPRS3 TQPRS2 TQPRS1 TQPRS0
TQPRS7-TQPRS0 CAN Protocol Layer Basic System Clock (fTQ)
0 fCANMOD/1
1 fCANMOD/2
: :
n fCANMOD/(n+1)
: :
255 fCANMOD/256 (default value)
Figure 15-25. CAN Module Clock
CCP
3
CCP2
Prescaler
CAN module bit-rate prescaler register
(C0BRP)
CAN module clock selection register
(C0GMCS)
Baud rate generator CAN bit-rate
register (C0BTR)
CCP1 CCP0
TQPRS0
f
CAN
f
CANMOD
f
TQ
0
00
0
TQPRS1
TQPRS2
TQPRS3TQPRS4TQPRS5
TQPRS6TQPRS7
Caution The C0BRP register can be write-accessed only in the initialization mode.
Remark fCAN: Clock supplied to CAN (fPRS)
f
CANMOD: CAN module system clock
f
TQ: CAN protocol layer basic system clock
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
410
(13) CAN module bit rate register (C0BTR)
The C0BTR register is used to control the data bit time of the communication baud rate.
After reset: 370FH R/W Address: FF9CH, FF9DH
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0BTR 0 0 SJW1 SJW0 0 TSEG22 TSEG21 TSEG20
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 TSEG13 TSEG12 TSEG11 TSEG10
Figure 15-26. Data Bit Time
Data bit time (DBT)
Time segmet 1(TSEG1)
Phase segment 2
Phase segment 1
Sample point(SPT)
Prop segmentSync segment
Time segmet 2(TSEG2)
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 411
SJW1 SJW0 Length of Synchronization jump width
0 0 1TQ
0 1 2TQ
1 0 3TQ
1 1 4TQ (default value)
TSEG22 TSEG21 TSEG20 Length of time segment 2
0 0 0 1TQ
0 0 1 2TQ
0 1 0 3TQ
0 1 1 4TQ
1 0 0 5TQ
1 0 1 6TQ
1 1 0 7TQ
1 1 1 8TQ (default value)
TSEG13 TSEG12 TSEG11 TSEG10 Length of time segment 1
0 0 0 0 Setting prohibited
0 0 0 1 2TQNote
0 0 1 0 3TQNote
0 0 1 1 4TQ
0 1 0 0 5TQ
0 1 0 1 6TQ
0 1 1 0 7TQ
0 1 1 1 8TQ
1 0 0 0 9TQ
1 0 0 1 10TQ
1 0 1 0 11TQ
1 0 1 1 12TQ
1 1 0 0 13TQ
1 1 0 1 14TQ
1 1 1 0 15TQ
1 1 1 1 16TQ (default value)
Note This setting must not be made when the C0BRP register = 00H.
Remark TQ = 1/fTQ (fTQ: CAN protocol layer basic system clock)
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
412
(14) CAN module last in-pointer register (C0LIPT)
The C0LIPT register indicates the number of the message buffer in which a data frame or a remote frame
was last stored.
After reset: Undefined R Address: FF9FH
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0LIPT LIPT7 LIPT6 LIPT5 LIPT4 LIPT3 LIPT2 LIPT1 LIPT0
LIPT7-LIPT0 Last In-Pointer Register (C0LIPT)
0 to 15 When the C0LIPT register is read, the contents of the element indexed by the last in-
pointer (LIPT) of the receive history list are read. These contents indicate the number of
the message buffer in which a data frame or a remote frame was last stored.
Remark The read value of the C0LIPT register is undefined if a data frame or a remote frame
has never been stored in the message buffer. If the RHPM bit of the C0RGPT register
is set to 1 after the CAN module has changed from the initialization mode to an
operation mode, therefore, the read value of the C0LIPT register is undefined.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 413
(15) CAN module receive history list register (C0RGPT)
The C0RGPT register is used to read the receive history list.
After reset: xx02H R/W Address: FF60H, FF61H
(a) Read
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0RGPT RGPT7 RGPT6 RGPT5 RGPT4 RGPT3 RGPT2 RGPT1 RGPT0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 RHPM ROVF
(b) Write
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0RGPT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Clear
ROVF
(a) Read
RGPT7-RGPT0 Receive History List Get Pointer
0 to 15 When the C0RGPT register is read, the contents of the element indexed by the receive
history list get pointer (RGPT) of the receive history list are read. These contents
indicate the number of the message buffer in which a data frame or a remote frame has
been stored.
RHPM
Note
Receive History List Pointer Match
0 The receive history list has at least one message buffer number that has not been read.
1 The receive history list has no message buffer numbers that has not been read.
Note The read value of RGPT0 to RGPT7 is invalid when RHPM = 1.
ROVF Receive History List Overflow Bit
0 All the message buffer numbers that have not been read are preserved. All the numbers of the
message buffer in which a new data frame or remote frame has been received and stored are
recorded to the receive history list (the receive history list has a vacant element).
1 All the message buffer numbers that are recorded are preserved except the message buffer number
recorded last Note. The RHL is fully loaded with the unread message buffer number and all RHL
elements beside the last one are preserved. Message buffer number of subsequent data frame
storage or remote frame assignment is always logged in the RHL element LIPT pointer –1 is
pointing to. Note that the RHL will be updated, but the LIPT pointer will not be incremented.
Always the position the LIPT pointer –1 is pointing to is overwritten (the receive history list does not
have a vacant element).
Note If ROVF is set, RHPM is no longer cleared on message storage, but RHPM is still set, if all
entries of C0RGPT are read by software.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
414
(b) Write
Clear ROVF Setting of ROVF Bit
0 ROVF bit is not changed.
1 ROVF bit is cleared to 0.
(16) CAN module last out-pointer register (C0LOPT)
The C0LOPT register indicates the number of the message buffer to which a data frame or a remote frame
was transmitted last.
After reset: Undefined R Address: FF68H
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0LOPT LOPT7 LOPT6 LOPT5 LOPT4 LOPT3 LOPT2 LOPT1 LOPT0
LOPT7-LOPT0 Last Out-Pointer of Transmit History List (LOPT)
0 to 15 When the C0LOPT register is read, the contents of the element indexed by the last out-
pointer (LOPT) of the receive history list are read. These contents indicate the number
of the message buffer to which a data frame or a remote frame was transmitted last.
Remark The value read from the C0LOPT register is undefined if a data frame or remote frame
has never been transmitted from a message buffer. If the THPM bit is set to 1 after the
CAN module has changed from the initialization mode to an operation mode, therefore,
the read value of the C0LOPT register is undefined.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 415
(17) CAN module transmit history list register (C0TGPT)
The C0TGPT register is used to read the transmit history list.
After reset: xx02H R/W Address: FF62H, FF63H
(a) Read
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0TGPT TGPT7 TGPT6 TGPT5 TGPT4 TGPT3 TGPT2 TGPT1 TGPT0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 THPM TOVF
(b) Write
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0TGPT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Clear
TOVF
(a) Read
TGPT7-TGPT0 Transmit History List Read Pointer
0 to 15 When the C0TGPT register is read, the contents of the element indexed by the read
pointer (TGPT) of the transmit history list are read. These contents indicate the number
of the message buffer to which a data frame or a remote frame was transmitted last.
THPM Note Transmit History Pointer Match
0 The transmit history list has at least one message buffer number that has not been read.
1 The transmit history list has no message buffer number that has not been read.
Note The read value of TGPT0 to TGPT7 is invalid when THPM = 1.
TOVF Transmit History List Overflow Bit
0 All the message buffer numbers that have not been read are preserved. All the numbers
of the message buffers to which a new data frame or remote frame has been transmitted
are recorded to the transmit history list (the transmit history list has a vacant element).
1 At least 7 entries have been stored since the host processor has serviced the THL last
time (i.e. read CnTGPT). The first 6 entries are sequentially stored while the last entry
can have been overwritten whenever a message is newly transmitted because all buffer
numbers are stored at position LOPT-1 when TOVF bit is set. Thus the sequence of
transmissions can not be recovered completely now.
Note If TOVF is set, THPM is no longer cleared on message transmission, but THPM is still set,
if all entries of C0TGPT are read by software.
Remark Transmission from message buffer 0 to 7 is not recorded to the transmit history list in
the normal operation mode with ABT.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
416
(b) Write
Clear TOVF Setting of TOVF Bit
0 TOVF bit is not changed.
1 TOVF bit is cleared to 0.
(18) CAN module time stamp register (C0TS)
The C0TS register is used to control the time stamp function.
After reset: 0000H R/W Address: FF8AH, FF8BH
(a) Read
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0TS 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 TSLOCK TSSEL TSEN
(b) Write
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0TS 0 0 0 0 0 Set
TSLOCK
Set
TSSEL
Set
TSEN
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 Clear
TSLOCK
Clear
TSSEL
Clear
TSEN
Remark The lock function of the time stamp function must not be used when the CAN module
is in the normal operation mode with ABT.
(a) Read
TSLOCK Time Stamp Lock Function Enable Bit
0 Time stamp lock function stopped.
The TSOUT signal is toggled each time the selected time stamp capture event occurs.
1 Time stamp lock function enabled.
The TSOUT signal is toggled each time the selected time stamp capture event occurs.
However, the TSOUT output signal is locked when a data frame has been correctly
received to message buffer 0Note.
Note The TSEN bit is automatically cleared to 0.
TSSEL Time Stamp Capture Event Selection Bit
0 The time stamp capture event is SOF.
1 The time stamp capture event is the last bit of EOF.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 417
TSEN TSOUT Signal Operation Setting Bit
0 Disable TSOUT signal toggle operation.
1 Enable TSOUT signal toggle operation.
Remark The signal TSOUT is output from the CAN macro to a timer resource, depending on
implementation. Refer to documentation of device implementation for details.
(b) Write
Set TSLOCK Clear
TSLOCK
Setting of TSLOCK Bit
0 1 TSLOCK bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 TSLOCK bit is set to 1.
Other than above TSLOCK bit is not changed.
Set TSSEL Clear TSSEL Setting of TSSEL Bit
0 1 TSSEL bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 TSSEL bit is set to 1.
Other than above TSSEL bit is not changed.
Set TSEN Clear TSEN Setting of TSEN Bit
0 1 TSEN bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 TSEN bit is set to 1.
Other than above TSEN bit is not changed.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
418
(19) CAN message data byte register (C0MDATAxm)(x = 0 to 7), (C0MDATAzm) (z = 01, 23, 45, 67)
The C0MDATAxm, C0MDATAzm registers are used to store the data of a transmit/receive message.
The C0MDATAzm registers can access the C0MDATAxm registers in 16-bit units.
After reset: Undefined R/W Address: See Table 15-16
- C0MDATAxm Register
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0MDATA0m MDATA07 MDATA06 MDATA05 MDATA04 MDATA03 MDATA02 MDATA01 MDATA00
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0MDATA1m MDATA17 MDATA16 MDATA15 MDATA14 MDATA13 MDATA12 MDATA11 MDATA10
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0MDATA2m MDATA27 MDATA26 MDATA25 MDATA24 MDATA23 MDATA22 MDATA21 MDATA20
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0MDATA3m
MDATA37 MDATA36 MDATA35 MDATA34 MDATA33 MDATA32 MDATA31 MDATA30
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0MDATA4m MDATA47 MDATA46 MDATA45 MDATA44 MDATA43 MDATA42 MDATA41 MDATA40
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0MDATA5m MDATA57 MDATA56 MDATA55 MDATA54 MDATA53 MDATA52 MDATA51 MDATA50
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0MDATA6m MDATA67 MDATA66 MDATA65 MDATA64 MDATA63 MDATA62 MDATA61 MDATA60
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0MDATA7m MDATA77 MDATA76 MDATA75 MDATA74 MDATA73 MDATA72 MDATA71 MDATA70
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 419
- C0MDATAzm Register
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MDATA01m MDATA011
5
MDATA011
4
MDATA011
3
MDATA011
2
MDATA011
1
MDATA011
0
MDATA019 MDATA018
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MDATA017 MDATA016 MDATA015 MDATA014 MDATA013 MDATA012 MDATA011 MDATA010
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MDATA23m MDATA231
5
MDATA231
4
MDATA231
3
MDATA231
2
MDATA231
1
MDATA231
0
MDATA239 MDATA238
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MDATA237 MDATA236 MDATA235 MDATA234 MDATA233 MDATA232 MDATA231 MDATA230
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MDATA45m MDATA451
5
MDATA451
4
MDATA451
3
MDATA451
2
MDATA451
1
MDATA451
0
MDATA459 MDATA458
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MDATA457 MDATA456 MDATA455 MDATA454 MDATA453 MDATA452 MDATA451 MDATA450
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MDATA67m MDATA671
5
MDATA671
4
MDATA671
3
MDATA671
2
MDATA671
1
MDATA671
0
MDATA679 MDATA678
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
MDATA677 MDATA676 MDATA675 MDATA674 MDATA673 MDATA672 MDATA671 MDATA670
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
420
(20) CAN message data length register m (C0MDLCm)
The C0MDLCm register is used to set the number of bytes of the data field of a message buffer.
After reset: 0000xxxxB R/W Address: See Table 15-16
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0MDLCm 0 0 0 0 MDLC3 MDLC2 MDLC1 MDLC0
MDLC3 MDLC2 MDLC1 MDLC0 Data Length Of Transmit/Receive Message
0 0 0 0 0 bytes
0 0 0 1 1 byte
0 0 1 0 2 bytes
0 0 1 1 3 bytes
0 1 0 0 4 bytes
0 1 0 1 5 bytes
0 1 1 0 6 bytes
0 1 1 1 7 bytes
1 0 0 0 8 bytes
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Setting prohibited
(If these bits are set during transmission, 8-byte data is transmitted
regardless of the set DLC value when a data frame is transmitted.
However, the DLC actually transmitted to the CAN bus is the DLC
value set to this register.)Note
Note The data and DLC value actually transmitted to CAN bus are as follows.
Type of Transmit Frame Length of Transmit Data DLC Transmitted
Data frame Number of bytes specified by DLC
(However, 8 bytes if DLC ≥ 8)
MDLC[3:0]
Remote frame 0 bytes
Cautions 1. Be sure to set bits 7 to 4 0000B.
2. Receive data is stored in as many C0MDATAx as the number of bytes
(however, the upper limit is 8) corresponding to DLC of the received frame.
C0MDATAx in which no data is stored is undefined.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 421
(21) CAN message configuration register (C0MCONFm)
The C0MCONFm register is used to specify the type of the message buffer and to set a mask.
After reset: Undefined R/W Address: See Table 15-16
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
C0MCONFm OWS RTR MT2 MT1 MT0 0 0 MA0
OWS Overwrite Control Bit
0 The message buffer that has already received a data frameNote is not overwritten by a newly
received data frame. The newly received data frame is discarded.
1 The message buffer that has already received a data frameNote is overwritten by a newly received
data frame.
Note The “message buffer that has already received a data frame” is a receive message buffer whose DN
bit has been set to 1.
Remark A remote frame is received and stored, regardless of the setting of OWS bit and DN
bit. A remote frame that satisfies the other conditions (ID matches, RTR = 0, TRQ = 0)
is always received and stored in the corresponding message buffer (interrupt
generated, DN flag set, MDLC[3:0] bits updated, and recorded to the receive history
list).
RTR Remote Frame Request BitNote
0 Transmit a data frame.
1 Transmit a remote frame.
Note The RTR bit specifies the type of message frame that is transmitted from a message
buffer defined as a transmit message buffer.Even if a valid remote frame has been
received, RTR of the transmit message buffer that has received the frame remains
cleared to 0.Even if a remote frame whose ID matches has been received from the CAN
bus with the RTR bit of the transmit message buffer set to 1 to transmit a remote frame,
that remote frame is not received or stored (interrupt generated, DN flag set, MDLC[3:0]
bits updated, and recorded to the receive history list).
MT2 MT1 MT0 Message Buffer Type Setting Bit
0 0 0 Transmit message buffer
0 0 1 Receive message buffer (no mask setting)
0 1 0 Receive message buffer (mask 1 set)
0 1 1 Receive message buffer (mask 2 set)
1 0 0 Receive message buffer (mask 3 set)
1 0 1 Receive message buffer (mask 4 set)
Other than above Setting prohibited
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
422
MA0 Message Buffer Assignment Bit
0 Message buffer not used.
1 Message buffer used.
Caution Be sure to write 0 to bits 2 and 1.
(22) CAN message id register m (C0MIDLm, C0MIDHm)
The C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm registers are used to set an identifier (ID).
After reset: Undefined R/W Address: See Table 15-16
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MIDLm ID15 ID14 ID13 ID12 ID11 ID10 ID9 ID8
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ID7 ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MIDHm IDE 0 0 ID28 ID27 ID26 ID25 ID24
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
ID23 ID22 ID21 ID20 ID19 ID18 ID17 ID16
IDE Format Mode Specification Bit
0 Standard format mode (ID28 to ID18: 11 bits)Note
1 Extended format mode (ID28 to ID0: 29 bits)
Note The ID17 to ID0 bits are not used.
ID28 to ID0 Message ID
ID28 to ID18 Standard ID value of 11 bits (when IDE = 0)
ID28 to ID0 Extended ID value of 29 bits (when IDE = 1)
Cautions 1. Be sure to write 0 to bits 14 and 13 of the C0MIDHm register.
2. Be sure to align the ID value according to the given bit positions into this
registers. Note that for standard ID, the ID value must be shifted to fit into
ID28 to ID11 bit positions.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 423
(23) CAN message control register m (C0MCTRLm)
The C0MCTRLm register is used to control the operation of the message buffer.
After reset: 00x000000
00000000B
R/W Address: See Table 15-16.
(a) Read
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MCTRLm 0 0 MUC 0 0 0 0 0
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 MOW IE DN TRQ RDY
(b) Write
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
C0MCTRLm 0 0 0 0 Set
IE
0 Set
TRQ
Set
RDY
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 Clear
MOW
Clear
IE
Clear
DN
Clear
TRQ
Clear
RDY
(a) Read
MUCNote Message Buffer Data Updating Bit
0 The CAN module is not updating the message buffer (reception and storage).
1 The CAN module is updating the message buffer (reception and storage).
Note The MUC bit is undefined until the first reception and storage is performed.
MOW Message Buffer Overwrite Status Bit
0 The message buffer is not overwritten by a newly received data frame.
1 The message buffer is overwritten by a newly received data frame.
Remark MOW bit is not set to 1 even if a remote frame is received and stored in the transmit
message buffer with DN = 1.
IE Message Buffer Interrupt Request Enable Bit
0 Receive message buffer: Valid message reception completion interrupt disabled.
Transmit message buffer: Normal message transmission completion interrupt disabled.
1 Receive message buffer: Valid message reception completion interrupt enabled.
Transmit message buffer: Normal message transmission completion interrupt enabled.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
424
DN Message Buffer Data Updating Bit
0 A data frame or remote frame is not stored in the message buffer.
1 A data frame or remote frame is stored in the message buffer.
TRQ Message Buffer Transmission Request Bit
0 No message frame transmitting request that is pending or being transmitted is in the message buffer.
1 The message buffer is holding transmission of a message frame pending or is transmitting a
message frame.
Caution Do not set the TRQ bit and the RDY bit (1) at the same time. Set the RDY bit (1) before
setting the TRQ bit.
RDY Message Buffer Ready Bit
0 The message buffer can be written by software. The CAN module cannot write to the message
buffer.
1 Writing the message buffer by software is ignored (except a write access to the RDY, TRQ, DN, and
MOW bits). The CAN module can write to the message buffer.
Cautions 1. Do not clear the RDY bit (0) during message transmission.
Follow the transmission abort process about clearing the RDY bit (0) for
redefinition of the message buffer.
2. Clear again when RDY bit is not cleared even if this bit is cleared.
3. Be sure that RDY is cleared before writing to the other message buffer
registers, by checking the status of the RDY bit.
(b) Write
Clear MOW Setting of MOW Bit
0 MOW bit is not changed.
1 MOW bit is cleared to 0.
Set IE Clear IE Setting of IE Bit
0 1 IE bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 IE bit is set to 1.
Other than above IE bit is not changed.
Caution Set IE bit and RDY bit always separately.
Clear DN Setting of DN Bit
0 DN bit is not changed.
1 DN bit is cleared to 0.
Caution Do not set the DN bit to 1 by software. Be sure to write 0 to bit 10.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 425
Set TRQ Clear TRQ Setting of TRQ Bit
0 1 TRQ bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 TRQ bit is set to 1.
Other than above TRQ bit is not changed.
Set RDY Clear RDY Setting of RDY Bit
0 1 RDY bit is cleared to 0.
1 0 RDY bit is set to 1.
Other than above RDY bit is not changed.
Caution Set IE bit and RDY bit always separately.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
426
15.8 CAN Controller Initialization
15.8.1 Initialization of CAN module
Before the CAN module operation is enabled, the CAN module system clock needs to be determined by setting the
CCP[3:0] bits of the C0GMCS register by software. Do not change the setting of the CAN module system clock after
CAN module operation is enabled.
The CAN module is enabled by setting the GOM bit of the C0GMCTRL register.
For the procedure of initializing the CAN module, refer to 15.16 Operation Of CAN Controller.
15.8.2 Initialization of message buffer
After the CAN module is enabled, the message buffers contain undefined values. A minimum initialization for all
the message buffers, even for those not used in the application, is necessary before switching the CAN module from
the initialization mode to one of the operation modes.
- Clear the RDY, TRQ, and DN bits of the C0MCTRLm register to 0.
- Clear the MA0 bit of the C0MCONFm register to 0.
Remark m = 0 to 15
15.8.3 Redefinition of message buffer
Redefining a message buffer means changing the ID and control information of the message buffer while a
message is being received or transmitted, without affecting other transmission/reception operations.
(1) To redefine message buffer in initialization mode
Place the CAN module in the initialization mode once and then change the ID and control information of the
message buffer in the initialization mode. After changing the ID and control information, set the CAN module
in an operation mode.
(2) To redefine message buffer during reception
Perform redefinition as shown in Figure 15-40.
(3) To redefine message buffer during transmission
To rewrite the contents of a transmit message buffer to which a transmission request has been set, perform
transmission abort processing (refer to 15.10.4 (1) Transmission abort process except for in normal
operation mode with automatic block transmission (ABT) and 15.10.4 (2) Transmission abort process
except for ABT transmission in normal operation mode with automatic block transmission (ABT).
Confirm that transmission has been aborted or completed, and then redefine the message buffer. After
redefining the transmit message buffer, set a transmission request using the procedure described below.
When setting a transmission request to a message buffer that has been redefined without aborting the
transmission in progress, however, the 1-bit wait time is not necessary.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 427
Figure 15-27. Setting Transmission Request (TRQ) to Transmit Message Buffer After Redefining
End
Redefinition completed
Execute transmission?
Wait for 1 bit of CAN data.
Set TRQ bit
Set TRQ = 1
Clear TRQ = 0
Yes
No
Cautions 1. When a message is received, reception filtering is performed in accordance with the ID and mask
set to each receive message buffer. If the procedure in Figure 15-40 is not observed, the
contents of the message buffer after it has been redefined may contradict the result of reception
(result of reception filtering). If this happens, check that the ID and IDE received first and stored
in the message buffer following redefinition are those stored after the message buffer has been
redefined. If no ID and IDE are stored after redefinition, redefine the message buffer again.
2. When a message is transmitted, the transmission priority is checked in accordance with the ID,
IDE, and RTR bits set to each transmit message buffer to which a transmission request was set.
The transmit message buffer having the highest priority is selected for transmission. If the
procedure in Figure 15-41 is not observed, a message with an ID not having the highest priority
may be transmitted after redefinition.
15.8.4 Transition from initialization mode to operation mode
The CAN module can be switched to the following operation modes.
- Normal operation mode
- Normal operation mode with ABT
- Receive-only mode
- Single-shot mode
- Self-test mode
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
428
Figure 15-28. Transition to Operation Modes
CAN module
channel invalid
[Receive-only mode]
OPMODE[2:0]=03H
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
and CAN bus is busy.
OPMODE[2:0] = 03H [Single-shot mode]
OPMODE[2:0]=04H
OPMODE[2:0] = 04H
OPMODE[2:0] = 05H
INIT mode
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
EFSD = 1
and GOM = 0
All CAN modules are
in INIT mode and GOM = 0
GOM = 1
RESET
RESET released
[Normal operation
mode with ABT]
OPMODE[2:0]=02H
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
and CAN bus is busy.
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
and interframe space
OPMODE[2:0] = 02H
OPMODE[2:0] = 01H
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
and CAN bus is busy.
[Normal operation
mode]
OPMODE[2:0]=01H
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
and CAN bus is busy.
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
and interframe space
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
and interframe space
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
and interframe space
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
and interframe space
OPMODE[2:0] = 00H
and CAN bus is busy.
[Self-test mode]
OPMODE[2:0]=05H
The transition from the initialization mode to an operation mode is controlled by the bit string OPMODE[2:0] in the
C0CTRL register.
Changing from one operation mode into another requires shifting to the initialization mode in between. Do not
change one operation mode to another directly; otherwise the operation will not be guaranteed.
Requests for transition from the operation mode to the initialization mode are held pending when the CAN bus is
not in the interframe space (i.e., frame reception or transmission is in progress), and the CAN module enters the
initialization mode at the first bit in the interframe space (the value of OPMODE[2:0] are changed to 00H). After
issuing a request to change the mode to the initialization mode, read the OPMODE[2:0] bits until their value becomes
000B to confirm that the module has entered the initialization mode (refer to Figure 15-37).
15.8.5 Resetting error counter C0ERC of CAN module
If it is necessary to reset the CAN module error counter C0ERC and the CAN module information register C0INFO
when re-initialization or forced recovery from the bus-off state is made, set the CCERC bit of the C0CTRL register to 1
in the initialization mode. When this bit is set to 1, the CAN module error counter C0ERC and the CAN module
information register C0INFO are cleared to their default values.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 429
15.9 Message Reception
15.9.1 Message reception
In all the operation modes, the complete message buffer area is analyzed to find a suitable buffer to store a newly
received message. All message buffers satisfying the following conditions are included in that evaluation (RX-search
process).
- Used as a message buffer
(MA0 bit of C0MCONFm register set to 1B.)
- Set as a receive message buffer
(MT[2:0] bits of C0MCONFm register set to 001B, 010B, 011B, 100B, or 101B.)
- Ready for reception
(RDY bit of C0MCTRLm register set to 1.)
When two or more message buffers of the CAN module receive a message, the message is stored according to
the priority explained below. The message is always stored in the message buffer with the highest priority, not in a
message buffer with a low priority. For example, when an unmasked receive message buffer and a receive message
buffer linked to mask 1 have the same ID, the received message is not stored in the message buffer linked to mask 1,
even if that message buffer has not received a message and a message has already been received in the unmasked
receive message buffer. In other words, when a condition has been set to store a message in two or more message
buffers with different priorities, the message buffer with the highest priority always stores the message; the message
is not stored in message buffers with a lower priority. This also applies when the message buffer with the highest
priority is unable to receive and store a message (i.e., when DN = 1 indicating that a message has already been
received, but rewriting is disabled because OWS = 0). In this case, the message is not actually received and stored in
the candidate message buffer with the highest priority, but neither is it stored in a message buffer with a lower priority.
Priority Storing Condition If Same ID is Set
1 (high) Unmasked message buffer DN = 0
DN = 1 and OWS = 1
2 Message buffer linked to mask 1 DN = 0
DN = 1 and OWS = 1
3 Message buffer linked to mask 2 DN = 0
DN = 1 and OWS = 1
4 Message buffer linked to mask 3 DN = 0
DN = 1 and OWS = 1
5(low) Message buffer linked to mask 4 DN = 0
DN = 1 and OWS = 1
Remark m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
430
15.9.2 Receive Data Read
To keep data consistency when reading CAN message buffers, perform the data reading according to Figure 15-51
to 15-53.
During message reception, the CAN module sets DN of the C0MCTRLm register two times: at the beginning of the
storage process of data to the message buffer, and again at the end of this storage process. During this storage
process, the MUC bit of the C0MCTRLm register of the message buffer is set. (Refer to Figure 15-29.)
The receive history list is also updated just before the storage process. In addition, during storage process (MUC =
1), the RDY bit of the C0MCTRL register of the message buffer is locked to avoid the coincidental data WR by CPU.
Note the storage process may be disturbed (delayed) when the CPU accesses the message buffer.
Figure 15-29. DN and MUC Bit Setting Period (for Standard ID Format)
SOF
(1)
ID
IDE
RTR
R0
DLC DATA0-DATA7 CRC ACK EOF
CAN std ID format
(11) (1)(1) (1) (4) (0-64) (16) (2)
Recessive
Dominant
DN
MUC
Message Store
MDATA,MDLC.MIDx- > MBUF
(7)
Set DN & clear MUC
at the same timing
CINTS1
Set DN & MUC
at the same time
IFS
INTREC1
Operation of the CAN contoroller
Remark m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 431
15.9.3 Receive history list function
The receive history list (RHL) function records in the receive history list the number of the receive message buffer
in which each data frame or remote frame was received and stored. The RHL consists of storage elements equivalent
to up to 23 messages, the last in-message pointer (LIPT) with the corresponding C0LIPT register and the receive
history list get pointer (RGPT) with the corresponding C0RGPT register.
The RHL is undefined immediately after the transition of the CAN module from the initialization mode to one of the
operation modes.
The C0LIPT register holds the contents of the RHL element indicated by the value of the LIPT pointer minus 1. By
reading the C0LIPT register, therefore, the number of the message buffer that received and stored a data frame or
remote frame first can be checked. The LIPT pointer is utilized as a write pointer that indicates to what part of the
RHL a message buffer number is recorded. Any time a data frame or remote frame is received and stored, the
corresponding message buffer number is recorded to the RHL element indicated by the LIPT pointer. Each time
recording to the RHL has been completed, the LIPT pointer is automatically incremented. In this way, the number of
the message buffer that has received and stored a frame will be recorded chronologically.
The RGPT pointer is utilized as a read pointer that reads a recorded message buffer number from the RHL. This
pointer indicates the first RHL element that the CPU has not read yet. By reading the C0RGPT register by software,
the number of a message buffer that has received and stored a data frame or remote frame can be read. Each time a
message buffer number is read from the C0RGPT register, the RGPT pointer is automatically incremented.
If the value of the RGPT pointer matches the value of the LIPT pointer, the RHPM bit (receive history list pointer
match) of the C0RGPT register is set to 1. This indicates that no message buffer number that has not been read
remains in the RHL. If a new message buffer number is recorded, the LIPT pointer is incremented and because its
value no longer matches the value of the RGPT pointer, the RHPM bit is cleared. In other words, the numbers of the
unread message buffers exist in the RHL.
If the LIPT pointer is incremented and matches the value of the RGPT pointer minus 1, the ROVF bit (receive
history list overflow) of the C0RGPT register is set to 1. This indicates that the RHL is full of numbers of message
buffers that have not been read. When further message reception and storing occur, the last recorded message
buffer number is overwritten by the number of the message buffer that received and stored the new message. In this
case, after the ROVF bit has been set (1), the recorded message buffer numbers in the RHL do not completely reflect
the chronological order. However messages itself are not lost and can be located by CPU search in message buffer
memory with the help of the DN-bit.
Caution If the history list is in the overflow condition (ROVF is set), reading the history list contents is
still possible, until the history list is empty (indicated by RHPM flag set). Nevertheless, the
history list remains in the overflow condition, until ROVF is cleared by software. If ROVF is not
cleared, the RHPM flag will also not be updated (cleared) upon a message storage of newly
received frame. This may lead to the situation, that RHPM indicates an empty history list,
although a reception has taken place, while the history list is in the overflow state (ROVF and
RHPM are set).
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
432
As long as the RHL contains 23 or less entries the sequence of occurrence is maintained. If more receptions occur
without reading the RHL by the host processor, complete sequence of receptions can not be recovered.
Figure 15-30. Receive History List
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Receive history list (RHL)
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Receive history list(RHL)
Last in-message
pointer(LIPT)
23
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
23
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
0
When RHL is full
ROVF is set.
:
:
:
When message buffer 6 is read
:
:
:
:
:
:
22
00
22 22
22
Message buffer 7
Message buffer 2
Message buffer 9
Message buffer 6
If message is stored in message
buffers 3, 4, and 8
Message buffer 8
Message buffer 4
Message buffer 3
Message buffer 7
Message buffer 2
Message buffer 9
Receive history
list get pointer
(RGPT)
Receive history list(RHL)
Message buffer 1
Message buffer 5
Message buffer 8
Message buffer 4
Message buffer 3
Message buffer 7
Message buffer 2
Message buffer 9
Message buffer 9
Receive history
list get pointer
(RGPT)
Last in-message
pointer(LIPT)
LIPT is locked.
Receive history
list get pointer
(RGPT)
Receive history
list get pointer
(RGPT)
Last in-message
pointer(LIPT)
Message buffer 3
Message buffer 9
Message buffer 7
Message buffer 5
Message buffer 3
Message buffer 4
Message buffer 8
Message buffer 2
Message buffer 9
Receive history list (RHL)
When ROVF = 1, message
buffer number is stored
(overwritten) to element
indicated by LIPT-1.
Last in-message
pointer(LIPT)
When message buffer 3
receives and stores more messages
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 433
15.9.4 Mask function
For any message buffer, which is used for reception, the assignment to one of four global reception masks (or no
mask) can be selected.
By using the mask function, the message ID comparison can be reduced by masked bits, herewith allowing the
reception of several different IDs into one buffer.
While the mask function is in effect, an identifier bit that is defined to be "1" by a mask in the received message is
not compared with the corresponding identifier bit in the message buffer.
However, this comparison is performed for any bit whose value is defined as "0" by the mask.
For example, let us assume that all messages that have a standard-format ID, in which bits ID27 to ID25 are "0"
and bits ID24 and ID22 are "1", are to be stored in message buffer 14. The procedure for this example is shown
below.
<1> Identifier to be stored in message buffer
ID28 ID27 ID26 ID25 ID24 ID23 ID22 ID21 ID20 ID19 ID18
x 0 0 0 1 x 1 x x x x
x = don’t care
<2> Identifier to be configured in message buffer 14 (example)
(using CANn message ID registers L14 and H14 (C0MIDL14 and C0MIDH14))
ID28 ID27 ID26 ID25 ID24 ID23 ID22 ID21 ID20 ID19 ID18
x 0 0 0 1 x 1 x x x x
ID17 ID16 ID15 ID14 ID13 ID12 ID11 ID10 ID9 ID8 ID7
x x x x x x x x x x x
ID6 ID5 ID4 ID3 ID2 ID1 ID0
x x x x x x x
ID with ID27 to ID25 cleared to "0" and ID24 and ID22 set to "1" is registered (initialized) to message buffer 14.
Remark Message buffer 14 is set as a standard format identifier that is linked to mask 1 (MT[2:0] of
C0MCONF14 register are set to 010B).
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
434
<3> Mask setting for CAN module 1 (mask 1) (Example)
(Using CAN1 address mask 1 registers L and H (C1MASKL1 and C1MASKH1))
CMID28 CMID27 CMID26 CMID25 CMID24 CMID23 CMID22 CMID21 CMID20 CMID19 CMID18
1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
CMID17 CMID16 CMID15 CMID14 CMID13 CMID12 CMID11 CMID10 CMID9 CMID8 CMID7
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
CMID6 CMID5 CMID4 CMID3 CMID2 CMID1 CMID0
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Not compared (masked)
0: Compared
The CMID27 to CMID24 and CMID22 bits are cleared to "0", and CMID28, CMID23, and CMID21 to
CMID0 bits are set to "1".
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 435
15.9.5 Multi buffer receive block function
The multi buffer receive block (MBRB) function is used to store a block of data in two or more message buffers
sequentially with no CPU interaction, by setting the same ID to two or more message buffers with the same message
buffer type.
Suppose, for example, the same message buffer type is set to 5 message buffers, message buffers 10 to 14, and
the same ID is set to each message buffer. If the first message whose ID matches the ID of the message buffers is
received, it is stored in message buffer 10. At this point, the DN bit of message buffer 10 is set, prohibiting overwriting
the message buffer when subsequent messages are received.
If the next message with a matching ID is received, it is received and stored in message buffer 11. Each time a
message with a matching ID is received, it is sequentially (in the ascending order) stored in message buffers 12, 13,
and 14. Even when a data block consisting of multiple messages is received, the messages can be stored and
received without overwriting the previously received matching-ID data.
Whether a data block has been received and stored can be checked by setting the IE bit of the C0MCTRLm
register of each message buffer. For example, if a data block consists of k messages, k message buffers are
initialized for reception of the data block. The IE bit in message buffers 0 to (k-2) is cleared to 0 (interrupts disabled),
and the IE bit in message buffer k-1 is set to 1 (interrupts enabled). In this case, a reception completion interrupt
occurs when a message has been received and stored in message buffer k-1, indicating that MBRB has become full.
Alternatively, by clearing the IE bit of message buffers 0 to (k-3) and setting the IE bit of message buffer k-2, a
warning that MBRB is about to overflow can be issued.
The basic conditions of storing receive data in each message buffer for the MBRB are the same as the conditions
of storing data in a single message buffer.
Cautions 1. MBRB can be configured for each of the same message buffer types. Therefore, even if a
message buffer of another MBRB whose ID matches but whose message buffer type is
different has a vacancy, the received message is not stored in that message buffer, but
instead discarded.
2. MBRB does not have a ring buffer structure. Therefore, after a message is stored in the
message buffer having the highest number in the MBRB configuration, a newly received
message will not be stored in the message buffer having the lowest message buffer
number.
3. MBRB operates based on the reception and storage conditions; there are no settings
dedicated to MBRB, such as function enable bits. By setting the same message buffer type
and ID to two or more message buffers, MBRB is automatically configured.
4. With MBRB, "matching ID" means "matching ID after mask". Even if the ID set to each
message buffer is not the same, if the ID that is masked by the mask register matches, it is
considered a matching ID and the buffer that has this ID is treated as the storage
destination of a message.
5. The priority between MBRBs is mentioned in 15.9.1 Message Reception.
Remark m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
436
15.9.6 Remote frame reception
In all the operation modes, when a remote frame is received, the message buffer that is to store the remote frame
is searched from all the message buffers satisfying the following conditions.
- Used as a message buffer
(MA0 bit of C0MCONFm register set to 1B.)
- Set as a transmit message buffer
(MT[2:0] bits in C0MCONFm register set to 000B)
- Ready for reception
(RDY bit of C0MCTRLm register set to 1.)
- Set to transmit message
(RTR bit of C0MCONFm register is cleared to 0.)
- Transmission request is not set.
(TRQ bit of C0MCTRLm register is cleared to 1.)
Upon acceptance of a remote frame, the following actions are executed if the ID of the received remote frame
matches the ID of a message buffer that satisfies the above conditions.
- The MDLC[3:0] bit string in the C0MDLCm register stores the received DLC value.
- C0MDATA0m to C0MDATA7m in the data area are not updated (data before reception is saved).
- The DN bit of the C0MCTRLm register is set to 1.
- The CINTS1 bit of the C0INTS register is set to 1 (if the IE bit in the C0MCTRLm register of the message buffer
that receives and stores the frame is set to 1).
- The reception completion interrupt (INTC0REC) is output (if the IE bit in the C0MCTRLm register of the message
buffer that receives and stores the frame is set to 1 and if the CIE1 bit of the C0IE register is set to 1).
- The message buffer number is recorded to the receive history list.
Caution When a message buffer is searched for receiving and storing a remote frame, overwrite control
by the OWS bit of the C0MCONFm register of the message buffer and the DN bit of the
C0MCTRLm register are not affected. The setting of OWS is ignored, and DN is set in any case.
If more than one transmit message buffer has the same ID and the ID of the received remote
frame matches that ID, the remote frame is stored in the transmit message buffer with the
lowest message buffer number.
Remark m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 437
15.10 Message Transmission
15.10.1 Message transmission
In all the operation modes, if the TRQ bit is set to 1 in a message buffer that satisfies the following conditions, the
message buffer that is to transmit a message is searched.
- Used as a message buffer
(MA0 bit of C0MCONFm register set to 1B.)
- Set as a transmit message buffer
(MT[2:0] bits of C0MCONFm register set to 000B.)
- Ready for transmission
(RDY bit of C0MCTRLm register set to 1.)
The CAN system is a multi-master communication system. In a system like this, the priority of message
transmission is determined based on message identifiers (IDs). To facilitate transmission processing by software
when there are several messages awaiting transmission, the CAN module uses hardware to check the ID of the
message with the highest priority and automatically identifies that message. This eliminates the need for software-
based priority control.
Transmission priority is controlled by the identifier (ID).
Figure 15-31. Message Processing Example
Message No.
The CAN module transmits messages in the following sequence.
Message waiting to be transmitted
ID = 120H
ID = 229H
ID = 223H
ID = 023H
ID = 123H
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
1. Message 6
2. Message 1
3. Message 8
4. Message 5
5. Message 2
After the transmit message search, the transmit message with the highest priority of the transmit message buffers
that have a pending transmission request (message buffers with the TRQ bit set to 1 in advance) is transmitted.
If a new transmission request is set, the transmit message buffer with the new transmission request is compared
with the transmit message buffer with a pending transmission request. If the new transmission request has a higher
priority, it is transmitted, unless transmission of a message with a low priority has already started. If transmission of a
message with a low priority has already started, however, the new transmission request is transmitted later. To solve
this priority inversion effect, the software can perform a transmission abort request for the lower priority message.
The highest priority is determined according to the following rules.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
438
Priority Conditions Description
1(high) Value of first 11 bits of ID
[ID28 to ID18]:
The message frame with the lowest value represented by the first
11 bits of the ID is transmitted first. If the value of an 11-bit
standard ID is equal to or smaller than the first 11 bits of a 29-bit
extended ID, the 11-bit standard ID has a higher priority than
message frame with the 29-bit extended ID.
2 Frame type A data frame with an 11-bit standard ID (RTR bit is cleared to 0)
has a higher priority than a remote frame with a standard ID and a
message frame with an extended ID.
3 ID type A message frame with a standard ID (IDE bit is cleared to 0) has a
higher priority than a message frame with an extended ID.
4 Value of lower 18 bits of ID
[ID17 to ID0]:
If more than one transmission-pending extended ID message frame
have equal values in the first 11 bits of the ID and the same frame
type (equal RTR bit values), the message frame with the lowest
value in the lower 18 bits of its extended ID is transmitted first.
5(low) Message buffer number If two or more message buffers request transmission of message
frames with the same ID, the message from the message buffer
with the lowest message buffer number is transmitted first.
Remarks 1. If automatic block transmission request bit ABTTRG is set to 1 in the normal operation mode with
ABT, the TRQ bit is set to 1 only for one message buffer in the ABT message buffer group.
If the ABT mode was triggered by ABTTRG bit, one TRQ bit is set to 1 in the ABT area (buffer 0
through 7). Beyond this TRQ bit, the application can request transmissions (set TRQ to 1) for other
TX-message buffers that do not belong to the ABT area. In that case an interval arbitration process
(TX-search) evaluates all TX-message buffers with TRQ bit set to 1 and chooses the message buffer
that contains the highest prioritized identifier for the next transmission. If there are 2 or more
identifiers that have the highest priority (i.e. identical identifiers), the message located at the lowest
message buffer number is transmitted at first.
Upon successful transmission of a message frame, the following operations are performed.
- The TRQ flag of the corresponding transmit message buffer is automatically cleared to 0.
- The transmission completion status bit CINTS0 of the C0INTS register is set to 1 (if the interrupt
enable bit (IE) of the corresponding transmit message buffer is set to 1).
- An interrupt request signal INTC0TRX output (if the CIE0 bit of the C0IE register is set to 1 and if the
interrupt enable bit (IE) of the corresponding transmit message buffer is set to 1).
2. When changing the contents of a transmit buffer, the RDY flag of this buffer must be cleared before
updating the buffer contents. As during internal transfer actions, the RDY flag may be locked
temporarily, the status of RDY must be checked by software, after changing it.
3. m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 439
15.10.2 Transmit history list function
The transmit history list (THL) function records in the transmit history list the number of the transmit message buffer
from which data or remote frames have been were sent. The THL consists of storage elements equivalent to up to
seven messages, the last out-message pointer (LOPT) with the corresponding C0LOPT register, and the transmit
history list get pointer (TGPT) with the corresponding C0TGPT register.
The THL is undefined immediately after the transition of the CAN module from the initialization mode to one of the
operation modes.
The C0LOPT register holds the contents of the THL element indicated by the value of the LOPT pointer minus 1.
By reading the C0LOPT register, therefore, the number of the message buffer that transmitted a data frame or remote
frame first can be checked. The LOPT pointer is utilized as a write pointer that indicates to what part of the THL a
message buffer number is recorded. Any time a data frame or remote frame is transmitted, the corresponding
message buffer number is recorded to the THL element indicated by the LOPT pointer. Each time recording to the
THL has been completed, the LOPT pointer is automatically incremented. In this way, the number of the message
buffer that has received and stored a frame will be recorded chronologically.
The TGPT pointer is utilized as a read pointer that reads a recorded message buffer number from the THL. This
pointer indicates the first THL element that the CPU has not yet read. By reading the C0TGPT register by software,
the number of a message buffer that has completed transmission can be read. Each time a message buffer number
is read from the C0TGPT register, the TGPT pointer is automatically incremented.
If the value of the TGPT pointer matches the value of the LOPT pointer, the THPM bit (transmit history list pointer
match) of the C0TGPT register is set to 1. This indicates that no message buffer numbers that have not been read
remain in the THL. If a new message buffer number is recorded, the LOPT pointer is incremented and because its
value no longer matches the value of the TGPT pointer, the THPM bit is cleared. In other words, the numbers of the
unread message buffers exist in the THL.
If the LOPT pointer is incremented and matches the value of the TGPT pointer minus 1, the TOVF bit (transmit
history list overflow) of the C0TGPT register is set to 1. This indicates that the THL is full of message buffer numbers
that have not been read. If a new message is received and stored, the message buffer number recorded last is
overwritten by the number of the message buffer that transmitted its message afterwards. After the TOVF bit has
been set (1), therefore, the recorded message buffer numbers in the THL do not completely reflect the chronological
order. However the other transmitted messages can be found by a CPU search applied to all transmit message
buffers unless the CPU has not overwritten a transmit object in one of these buffers beforehand. In total up to six
transmission completions can occur without overflowing the THL.
Caution If the history list is in the overflow condition (TOVF is set), reading the history list contents is
still possible, until the history list is empty (indicated by THPM flag set). Nevertheless, the
history list remains in the overflow condition, until TOVF is cleared by software. If TOVF is not
cleared, the THPM flag will also not be updated (cleared) upon successful transmission of a
new message. This may lead to the situation, that THPM indicates an empty history list,
although a successful transmission has taken place, while the history list is in the overflow
state (TOVF and THPM are set).
Remark m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
440
Figure 15-32. Transmit History List
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Transmit history list(THL)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
When THL is full
TOVF is set.
0
00
When TOVF = 1, message buffer
number is stored (overwritten) to
element indicated by LOPT-1.
0
Last out-message
pointer(LOPT)
Message buffer 7
Message buffer 2
Message buffer 9
Message buffer 6 Transmit history list
get pointer(TGPT)
Transmit history list(THL)
Message buffer 4
Message buffer 3
Message buffer 7
Message buffer 2
Message buffer 9
When message buffer 6 is read
If transmission from
message buffers 3 and 4
is completed
Last
out-message
pointer(LOPT)
Transmit history list
get pointer(TGPT)
Transmit history list(THL)
Transmit history list
get pointer(TGPT)
Last out-message
pointer(LOPT)
LOPT is locked.
Transmit
history
list get
pointer
(TGPT)
Transmit history list(THL)
When transmission from message
buffer 3 is completed.
Last out-message
pointer(LOPT)
Message buffer 3
Message buffer 8
Message buffer 4
Message buffer 3
Message buffer 7
Message buffer 2
Message buffer 9
Message buffer 5
Message buffer 8
Message buffer 4
Message buffer 3
Message buffer 7
Message buffer 2
Message buffer 9
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 441
15.10.3 Automatic block transmission (ABT)
The automatic block transmission (ABT) function is used to transmit two or more data frames successively with no
CPU interaction. The maximum number of transmit message buffers assigned to the ABT function is eight (message
buffer numbers 0 to 7).
By setting OPMODE [2:0] bits of the CnCTRL register to 010B, "normal operation mode with automatic block
transmission function" (hereafter referred to as ABT mode) can be selected.
To issue an ABT transmission request, define the message buffers by software first. Set the MA0 bit (1) in all the
message buffers used for ABT, and define all the buffers as transmit message buffers by setting MT [2:0] bits to 000B.
Be sure to set the ID for each message buffer for ABT even when the same ID is being used for all the message
buffers. To use two or more IDs, set the ID of each message buffer by using the CnMIDLm and CnMIDHm registers.
Set the CnMDLCm and CnMDATA0m to CnMDATA7m registers before issuing a transmission request for the ABT
function.
After initialization of message buffers for ABT is finished, the RDY bit needs to be set (1). In the ABT mode, the
TRQ bit does not have to be manipulated by software.
After the data for the ABT message buffers has been prepared, set the ABTTRG bit to 1. Automatic block
transmission is then started. When ABT is started, the TRQ bit in the first message buffer (message buffer 0) is
automatically set to 1. After transmission of the data of message buffer 0 has finished, TRQ bit of the next message
buffer, message buffer 1, is set automatically. In this way, transmission is executed successively.
A delay time can be inserted by program in the interval in which the transmission request (TRQ) is automatically
set while successive transmission is being executed. The delay time to be inserted is defined by the CnGMABTD
register. The unit of the delay time is DBT (data bit time). DBT depends on the setting of the CnBRP and CnBTR
registers.
Among transmit objects within the ABT-area, the priority of the transmission ID is not evaluated. The data of
message buffers 0 to 7 are sequentially transmitted. When transmission of the data frame from message buffer 7 has
been completed, the ABTTRG bit is automatically cleared to 0 and the ABT operation is finished.
If the RDY bit of an ABT message buffer is cleared during ABT, no data frame is transmitted from that buffer, ABT
is stopped, and the ABTTRG bit is cleared. After that, transmission can be resumed from the message buffer where
ABT stopped, by setting the RDY and ABTTRG bits to 1 by software. To not resume transmission from the message
buffer where ABT stopped, the internal ABT engine can be reset by setting the ABTCLR bit to 1 while ABT mode is
stopped and ABTTRG bit is cleared to 0. In this case, transmission is started from message buffer 0 if the ABTCLR bit
is cleared to 0 and then the ABTTRG bit is set to 1.
An interrupt can be used to check if data frames have been transmitted from all the message buffers for ABT. To
do so, the IE bit of the CnMCTRLm register of each message buffer except the last message buffer needs to be
cleared (0).
If a transmit message buffer other than those used by the ABT function (message buffer 8 to 15) is assigned to a
transmit message buffer, the message to be transmitted next is determined by the priority of the transmission ID of the
ABT message buffer whose transmission is currently held pending and the transmission ID of the message buffers
other than those used by the ABT function.
Transmission of a data frame from an ABT message buffer is not recorded in the transmit history list (THL).
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
442
Cautions 1. Set the ABTCLR bit to 1 while the ABTTRG bit is cleared to 0 in order to resume ABT
operation at buffer No.0. If the ABTCLR bit is set to 1 while the ABTTRG bit is set to
1, the subsequent operation is not guaranteed.
2. If the automatic block transmission engine is cleared by setting the ABTCLR bit to 1,
the ABTCLR bit is automatically cleared immediately after the processing of the
clearing request is completed.
3. Do not set the ABTTRG bit in the initialization mode. If the ABTTRG bit is set in the
initialization mode, the proper operation is not guaranteed after the mode is changed
from the initialization mode to the ABT mode.
4. Do not set TRQ bit of the ABT message buffers to 1 by software in the normal
operation mode with ABT. Otherwise, the operation is not guaranteed.
5. The C0GMABTD register is used to set the delay time that is inserted in the period
from completion of the preceding ABT message to setting of the TRQ bit for the next
ABT message when the transmission requests are set in the order of message
numbers for each message for ABT that is successively transmitted in the ABT
mode. The timing at which the messages are actually transmitted onto the CAN bus
varies depending on the status of transmission from other stations and the status of
the setting of the transmission request for messages other than the ABT messages
(message buffer 8 to 15).
6. If a transmission request is made for a message other than an ABT message and if
no delay time is inserted in the interval in which transmission requests for ABT are
automatically set (C0GMABTD = 00H), messages other than ABT messages may be
transmitted not depending on the priority of the ABT message.
7. Do not clear the RDY bit to 0 when ABTTRG = 1.
8. If a message is received from another node while normal operation mode with ABT is
active, the TX-message from the ABT-area may be transmitted with delay of one
frame although CnGMABTD register was set up with 00H.
Remark m = 0 to 15
15.10.4 Transmission abort process
(1) Transmission abort process except for in normal operation mode with automatic block transmission
(ABT)
The user can clear the TRQ bit of the C0MCTRLm register to 0 to abort a transmission request. The TRQ bit
will be cleared immediately if the abort was successful. Whether the transmission was successfully aborted
or not can be checked using the TSTAT bit of the C0CTRL register and the C0TGPT register, which indicate
the transmission status on the CAN bus (for details, refer to the processing in Figure 15-47).
(2) Transmission abort process except for ABT transmission in normal operation mode with automatic
block transmission (ABT)
The user can clear the ABTTRG bit of the C0GMABT register to 0 to abort a transmission request. After
checking the ABTTRG bit of the C0GMABT register = 0, clear the TRQ bit of the C0MCTRLm register to 0.
The TRQ bit will be cleared immediately if the abort was successful. Whether the transmission was
successfully aborted or not can be checked using the TSTAT bit of the C0CTRL register and the C0TGPT
register, which indicate the transmission status on the CAN bus (for details, refer to the processing in Figure
15-48).
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 443
(3) Transmission abort process for ABT transmission in normal operation mode with automatic block
transmission (ABT)
To abort ABT that is already started, clear the ABTTRG bit of the C0GMABT register to 0. In this case, the
ABTTRG bit remains 1 if an ABT message is currently being transmitted and until the transmission is
completed (successfully or not), and is cleared to 0 as soon as transmission is finished. This aborts ABT.
If the last transmission (before ABT) was successful, the normal operation mode with ABT is left with the
internal ABT pointer pointing to the next message buffer to be transmitted.
In the case of an erroneous transmission, the position of the internal ABT pointer depends on the status of
the TRQ bit in the last transmitted message buffer. If the TRQ bit is set to 1 when clearing the ABTTRG bit is
requested, the internal ABT pointer points to the last transmitted message buffer (for details, refer to the
process in Figure 15-49). If the TRQ bit is cleared to 0 when clearing the ABTTRG bit is requested, the
internal ABT pointer is incremented (+1) and points to the next message buffer in the ABT area (for details,
refer to the process in Figure 15-50).
Caution Be sure to abort ABT by clearing ABTTRG to 0. The operation is not guaranteed if
aborting transmission is requested by clearing RDY bit.
When the normal operation mode with ABT is resumed after ABT has been aborted and ABTTRG bit is set to
1, the next ABT message buffer to be transmitted can be determined from the following table.
Status of TRQ of
ABT Message
Buffer
Abort After Successful Transmission Abort after erroneous transmission
Set (1) Next message buffer in the ABT
areaNote
Same message buffer in the ABT area
Cleared (0) Next message buffer in the ABT
areaNote
Next message buffer in the ABT areaNote
Note The above resumption operation can be performed only if a message buffer ready for ABT exists in the
ABT area. For example, an abort request that is issued while ABT of message buffer 7 is in progress is
regarded as completion of ABT, rather than abort, if transmission of message buffer 7 has been
successfully completed, even if ABTTRG is cleared to 0. If the RDY bit in the next message buffer in the
ABT area is cleared to 0, the internal ABT pointer is retained, but the resumption operation is not
performed even if ABTTRG is set to 1, and ABT ends immediately.
Remark m = 0 to 15
15.10.5 Remote frame transmission
Remote frames can be transmitted only from transmit message buffers. Set whether a data frame or remote frame
is transmitted via the RTR bit of the C0MCONFm register. Setting (1) the RTR bit sets remote frame transmission.
Remark m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
444
15.11 Power Save Modes
15.11.1 CAN sleep mode
The CAN sleep mode can be used to set the CAN controller to standby mode in order to reduce power
consumption. The CAN module can enter the CAN sleep mode from all operation modes. Release of the CAN sleep
mode returns the CAN module to exactly the same operation mode from which the CAN sleep mode was entered.
In the CAN sleep mode, the CAN module does not transmit messages, even when transmission requests are
issued or pending.
(1) Entering CAN sleep mode
The CPU issues a CAN sleep mode transition request by writing 01B to the PSMODE[1:0] bits of the
C0CTRL register.
This transition request is only acknowledged only under the following conditions.
- The CAN module is already in one of the following operation modes
- Normal operation mode
- Normal operation mode with ABT
- Receive-only mode
- Single-shot mode
- Self-test mode
- CAN stop mode in all the above operation modes
- The CAN bus state is bus idle (the 4th bit in the interframe space is recessive)Note
- No transmission request is pending
Note If the CAN bus is fixed to dominant, the request for transition to the CAN sleep mode is held pending.
Also the transition from CAN stop mode to CAN sleep mode is independent of the CAN bus state.
Remark If a sleep mode request is pending, and at the same time a message is received in a message
box, the sleep mode request is not cancelled, but is executed right after message storage has
been finished. This may result in AFCAN being in sleep mode, while the CPU would execute the
RX interrupt routine. Therefore, the interrupt routine must check the access to the message
buffers as well as reception history list registers by using the MBON flag, if sleep mode is used.
If any one of the conditions mentioned above is not met, the CAN module will operate as follows.
- If the CAN sleep mode is requested from the initialization mode, the CAN sleep mode transition request is
ignored and the CAN module remains in the initialization mode.
- If the CAN bus state is not bus idle (i.e., the CAN bus state is either transmitting or receiving) when the CAN
sleep mode is requested in one of the operation modes, immediate transition to the CAN sleep mode is not
possible. In this case, the CAN sleep mode transition request is held pending until the CAN bus state
becomes bus idle (the 4th bit in the interframe space is recessive). In the time from the CAN sleep mode
request to successful transition, the PSMODE [1:0] bits remain 00B. When the module has entered the CAN
sleep mode, PSMODE [1:0] bits are set to 01B.
- If a request for transition to the initialization mode and a request for transition to the CAN sleep are made at
the same time while the CAN module is in one of the operation modes, the request for the initialization
mode is enabled. The CAN module enters the initialization mode at a predetermined timing. At this time, the
CAN sleep mode request is not held pending and is ignored.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 445
- Even when initialization mode and sleep mode are not requested simultaneously (i.e the first request has
not been granted while the second request is made), the request for initialization has priority over the sleep
mode request. The sleep mode request is cancelled when the initialization mode is requested. When a
pending request for initialization mode is present, a subsequent request for Sleep mode request is
cancelled right at the point in time where it was submitted.
(2) Status in CAN sleep mode
The CAN module is in one of the following states after it enters the CAN sleep mode.
- The internal operating clock is stopped and the power consumption is minimized.
- The function to detect the falling edge of the CAN reception pin (CRxD) remains in effect to wake up the
CAN module from the CAN bus.
- To wake up the CAN module from the CPU, data can be written to PSMODE [1:0] of the CAN module
control register (C0CTRL), but nothing can be written to other CAN module registers or bits.
- The CAN module registers can be read, except for C0LIPT, C0RGPT, C0LOPT, and C0TGPT.
- The CAN message buffer registers cannot be written or read.
- MBON bit of the CAN Global Control register (C0GMCTRL) is cleared.
- A request for transition to the initialization mode is not acknowledged and is ignored.
(3) Releasing CAN sleep mode
The CAN sleep mode is released by the following events.
- When the CPU writes 00B to the PSMODE [1:0] bits of the C0CTRL register
- A falling edge at the CAN reception pin (CRxD) (i.e. the CAN bus level shifts from recessive to dominant)
Caution Even if the falling edge belongs to the SOF of a receive message, this message will not be
received and stored. If the CPU has turned off the clock to the CAN while the CAN was in
sleep mode, even subsequently the CAN sleep mode will not be released and PSMODE
[1:0] will continue to be 01B unless the clock to the CAN is supplied again. In addition to
this, the receive message will not be received after that.
After releasing the sleep mode, the CAN module returns to the operation mode from which the CAN sleep
mode was requested and the PSMODE [1:0] bits of the C0CTRL register are reset to 00B. If the CAN sleep
mode is released by a change in the CAN bus state, the CINTS5 bit of the C0INTS register is set to 1,
regardless of the CIE bit of the C0IE register. After the CAN module is released from the CAN sleep mode, it
participates in the CAN bus again by automatically detecting 11 consecutive recessive-level bits on the CAN
bus. The user application has to wait until MBON = 1, before accessing message buffers again.
When a request for transition to the initialization mode is made while the CAN module is in the CAN sleep
mode, that request is ignored; the CPU has to be released from sleep mode by software first before entering
the initialization mode.
Caution Be aware that the release of CAN sleep mode by CAN bus event, and thus the wake up
interrupt may happen at any time, even right after requesting sleep mode, if a CAN bus
event occurs.
Remark m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
446
15.11.2 CAN stop mode
The CAN stop mode can be used to set the CAN controller to standby mode to reduce power consumption. The
CAN module can enter the CAN stop mode only from the CAN sleep mode. Release of the CAN stop mode puts the
CAN module in the CAN sleep mode.
The CAN stop mode can only be released (entering CAN sleep mode) by writing 01B to the PSMODE [1:0] bits of
the C0CTRL register and not by a change in the CAN bus state. No message is transmitted even when transmission
requests are issued or pending.
(1) Entering CAN stop mode
A CAN stop mode transition request is issued by writing 11B to the PSMODE [1:0] bits of the C0CTRL
register.
A CAN stop mode request is only acknowledged when the CAN module is in the CAN sleep mode. In all
other modes, the request is ignored.
Caution To set the CAN module to the CAN stop mode, the module must be in the CAN sleep
mode. To confirm that the module is in the sleep mode, check that PSMODE [1:0] = 01B,
and then request the CAN stop mode. If a bus change occurs at the CAN reception pin
(CRxD) while this process is being performed, the CAN sleep mode is automatically
released. In this case, the CAN stop mode transition request cannot be acknowledged.
(2) Status in CAN stop mode
The CAN module is in one of the following states after it enters the CAN stop mode.
- The internal operating clock is stopped and the power consumption is minimized.
- To wake up the CAN module from the CPU, data can be written to PSMODE [1:0] of the CAN module
control register (C0CTRL), but nothing can be written to other CAN module registers or bits.
- The CAN module registers can be read, except for C0LIPT, C0RGPT, C0LOPT, and C0TGPT.
- The CAN message buffer registers cannot be written or read.
- MBON bit of the CAN Global Control register (C0GMCTRL) is cleared.
- An initialization mode transition request is not acknowledged and is ignored.
(3) Releasing CAN stop mode
The CAN stop mode can only be released by writing 01B to the PSMODE [1:0] bits of the C0CTRL register.
After releasing the CAN stop mode, the CAN module enters the CAN sleep mode.
When the initialization mode is requested while the CAN module is in the CAN stop mode, that request is
ignored; the CPU has to release the stop mode and subsequently CAN sleep mode before entering the
initialization mode. It is impossible to enter the other operation mode directly from the CAN stop mode not
entering the CAN sleep mode, that request is ignored.
Remark m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 447
15.11.3 Example of using power saving modes
In some application systems, it may be necessary to place the CPU in a power saving mode to reduce the power
consumption. By using the power saving mode specific to the CAN module and the power saving mode specific to the
CPU in combination, the CPU can be woken up from the power saving status by the CAN bus.
Here is an example of using the power saving modes.
First, put the CAN module in the CAN sleep mode (PSMODE = 01B). Next, put the CPU in the power saving
mode. If an edge transition from recessive to dominant is detected at the CAN reception pin (CRxD) in this status, the
CINTS5 bit in the CAN module is set to 1. If the CIE5 bit of the C0CTRL register is set to 1, a wakeup interrupt
(INTC0WUP) is generated. The CAN module is automatically released from the CAN sleep mode (PSMODE = 00B)
and returns to the normal operation mode. The CPU, in response to INTC0WUP, can release its own power saving
mode and return to the normal operation mode.
To further reduce the power consumption of the CPU, the internal clocks, including that of the CAN module, may
be stopped. In this case, the operating clock supplied to the CAN module is stopped after the CAN module is put in
the CAN sleep mode. Then the CPU enters a power saving mode in which the clock supplied to the CPU is stopped.
If an edge transition from recessive to dominant is detected at the CAN reception pin (CRxD) in this status, the CAN
module can set the CINTS5 bit to 1 and generate the wakeup interrupt (INTC0WUP) even if it is not supplied with the
clock. The other functions, however, do not operate because clock supply to the CAN module is stopped, and the
module remains in the CAN sleep mode. The CPU, in response to INTC0WUP, releases its power saving mode,
resumes supply of the internal clocks, including the clock to the CAN module, after the oscillation stabilization time
has elapsed, and starts instruction execution. The CAN module is immediately released from the CAN sleep mode
when clock supply is resumed, and returns to the normal operation mode (PSMODE = 00B).
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
448
15.12 Interrupt Function
The CAN module provides 6 different interrupt sources.
The occurrence of these interrupt sources is stored in interrupt status registers. Four separate interrupt request
signals are generated from the six interrupt sources. When an interrupt request signal that corresponds to two or
more interrupt sources is generated, the interrupt sources can be identified by using an interrupt status register. After
an interrupt source has occurred, the corresponding interrupt status bit must be cleared to 0 by software.
Table 15-20. List of CAN Module Interrupt Sources
No. Interrupt Status Bit Interrupt Enable Bit
Name Register Name Register
Interrupt
Request Signal
Interrupt Source Description
1 CINTS0Note C0INTS CIE0Note C0IE INTC0TRX Message frame successfully transmitted
from message buffer m
2 CINTS1Note C0INTS CIE1Note C0IE INTC0REC Valid message frame reception in
message buffer m
3 CINTS2 C0INTS CIE2 C0IE CAN module error state interrupt
(Supplement 1)
4 CINTS3 C0INTS CIE3 C0IE CAN module protocol error interrupt
(Supplement 2)
5 CINTS4 C0INTS CIE4 C0IE
INTC0ERR
CAN module arbitration loss interrupt
6 CINTS5 C0INTS CIE5 C0IE INTC0WUP CAN module wakeup interrupt from CAN
sleep mode (Supplement 3)
Note The IE bit (message buffer interrupt enable bit) in the C0MCTRL register of the corresponding message buffer
has to be set to 1 for that message buffer to participate in the interrupt generation process.
Supplements 1. This interrupt is generated when the transmission/reception error counter is at the warning level, or
in the error passive or bus-off state.
2. This interrupt is generated when a stuff error, form error, ACK error, bit error, or CRC error occurs.
3. This interrupt is generated when the CAN module is woken up from the CAN sleep mode because
a falling edge is detected at the CAN reception pin (CAN bus transition from recessive to
dominant).
Remark m = 0 to 15
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 449
15.13 Diagnosis Functions and Special Operational Modes
The CAN module provides a receive-only mode, single-shot mode, and self-test mode to support CAN bus
diagnosis functions or the operation of specific CAN communication methods.
15.13.1 Receive-only mode
The receive-only mode is used to monitor receive messages without causing any interference on the CAN bus and
can be used for CAN bus analysis nodes.
For example, this mode can be used for automatic baud-rate detection. The baud rate in the CAN module is
changed until "valid reception" is detected, so that the baud rates in the module match ("valid reception" means a
message frame has been received in the CAN protocol layer without occurrence of an error and with an appropriate
ACK between nodes connected to the CAN bus). A valid reception does not require message frames to be stored in a
receive message buffer (data frames) or transmit message buffer (remote frames). The event of valid reception is
indicated by setting the VALID bit of the C0CTRL register (1).
Figure 15-33. CAN Module Terminal Connection in Receive-Only Mode
CAN macro
Rx
Tx
CTxD CRxD
Fixed to
the recessive
level
In the receive-only mode, no message frames can be transmitted from the CAN module to the CAN bus. Transmit
requests issued for message buffers defined as transmit message buffers are held pending.
In the receive-only mode, the CAN transmission pin (CTxD) in the CAN module is fixed to the recessive level.
Therefore, no active error flag can be transmitted from the CAN module to the CAN bus even when a CAN bus error is
detected while receiving a message frame. Since no transmission can be issued from the CAN module, the
transmission error counter TEC is never updated. Therefore, a CAN module in the receive-only mode does not enter
the bus-off state.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
450
Furthermore, ACK is not returned to the CAN bus in this mode upon the valid reception of a message frame.
Internally, the local node recognizes that it has transmitted ACK. An overload frame cannot be transmitted to the CAN
bus.
Caution If only two CAN nodes are connected to the CAN bus and one of them is operating in the
receive-only mode, there is no ACK on the CAN bus. Due to the missing ACK, the transmitting
node will transmit an active error flag, and repeat transmitting a message frame. The
transmitting node becomes error passive after transmitting the message frame 16 times
(assuming that the error counter was 0 in the beginning and no other errors have occurred).
After the message frame for the 17th time is transmitted, the transmitting node generates a
passive error flag. The receiving node in the receive-only mode detects the first valid message
frame at this point, and the VALID bit is set to 1 for the first time.
15.13.2 Single-shot mode
In the single-shot mode, automatic re-transmission as defined in the CAN protocol is switched off (According to the
CAN protocol, a message frame transmission that has been aborted by either arbitration loss or error occurrence has
to be repeated without control by software.). All other behavior of single shot mode is identical to normal operation
mode. Features of single shot mode can not be used in combination with normal mode with ABT.
The single-shot mode disables the re-transmission of an aborted message frame transmission according to the
setting of the AL bit of the C0CTRL register. When the AL bit is cleared to 0, re-transmission upon arbitration loss and
upon error occurrence is disabled. If the AL bit is set to 1, re-transmission upon error occurrence is disabled, but re-
transmission upon arbitration loss is enabled. As a consequence, the TRQ bit in a message buffer defined as a
transmit message buffer is cleared to 0 by the following events.
- Successful transmission of the message frame
- Arbitration loss while sending the message frame
- Error occurrence while sending the message frame
The events arbitration loss and error occurrence can be distinguished by checking the CINTS4 and CINTS3 bits of
the C0INTS register respectively, and the type of the error can be identified by reading the LEC[2:0] bits of the C0LEC
register.
Upon successful transmission of the message frame, the transmit completion interrupt bit CINTS0 of the C0INTS
register is set to 1. If the CIE0 bit of the C0IE register is set to 1 at this time, an interrupt request signal is output.
The single-shot mode can be used when emulating time-triggered communication methods (e.g. TTCAN level 1).
Caution The AL bit is only valid in Single-shot mode. It does not influence the operation of re-
transmission upon arbitration loss in the other operation modes.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 451
15.13.3 Self-test mode
In the self-test mode, message frame transmission and message frame reception can be tested without connecting
the CAN node to the CAN bus or without affecting the CAN bus.
In the self-test mode, the CAN module is completely disconnected from the CAN bus, but transmission and
reception are internally looped back. The CAN transmission pin (CTxD) is fixed to the recessive level.
If the falling edge on the CAN reception pin (CRxD) is detected after the CAN module has entered the CAN sleep
mode from the self-test mode, however, the module is released from the CAN sleep mode in the same manner as the
other operation modes. To keep the module in the CAN sleep mode, use the CAN reception pin (CRxD) as a port pin.
Figure 15-34. CAN Module Terminal Connection in Self-test Mode
CAN macro
Rx
Tx
CTxD CRxD
Fixed to
the recessive
level
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
452
15.13.4 Receive/Transmit Operation in Each Operation Mode
Table 15-21 shows outline of the receive/transmit operation in each operation mode.
Table 15-21. Outline of the Receive/Transmit in Each Operation Mode
Operation
Mode
Transmission
of data/
remote frame
Transmission
of ACK
Transmission
of error/
overload frame
Transmission
retry
Automatic
Block
Transmission
(ABT)
Set of
VALID bit
Store Data
to message
buffer
Initialization
Mode
No No No No No No No
Normal
Operation
Mode
Yes Yes Yes Yes No Yes Yes
Normal
Operation
Mode with
ABT
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Receive-
only mode
No No No No No Yes Yes
Single-shot
Mode
Yes Yes Yes No
Note 1 No Yes Yes
Self-test
Mode
Yes Note 2 Yes Note 2 Yes Note 2 Yes Note 2 No Yes Note 2 Yes Note 2
Notes 1. When the arbitration lost occurs, control of re-transmission is possible by the AL bit of C0CTRL register.
2. Each signals are not generated to outside, but generated into the CAN module.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 453
15.14 Time Stamp Function
CAN is an asynchronous, serial protocol. All nodes connected to the CAN bus have a local, autonomous clock. As
a consequence, the clocks of the nodes have no relation (i.e., the clocks are asynchronous and may have different
frequencies).
In some applications, however, a common time base over the network (= global time base) is needed. In order to
build up a global time base, a time stamp function is used. The essential mechanism of a time stamp function is the
capture of timer values triggered by signals on the CAN bus.
15.14.1 Time stamp function
The CAN controller supports the capturing of timer values triggered by a specific frame. An on-chip 16-bit capture
timer unit in a microcontroller system is used in addition to the CAN controller. The 16-bit capture timer unit captures
the timer value according to a trigger signal (TSOUT) for capturing that is output when a data frame is received from
the CAN controller. The CPU can retrieve the time of occurrence of the capture event, i.e., the time stamp of the
message received from the CAN bus, by reading the captured value. TSOUT signal can be selected from the
following two event sources and is specified by the TSSEL bit of the C0TS register.
- SOF event (start of frame) (TSSEL = 0)
- EOF event (last bit of end of frame) (TSSEL = 1)
The TSOUT signal is enabled by setting the TSEN bit of the C0TS register to 1.
Figure 15-35. Timing Diagram of Capture Signal TSOUT
t
TSOUT
SOF SOF SOF SOF
TSOUT signal toggles its level upon occurrence of the selected event during data frame reception (in the above
timing diagram, the SOF is used as the trigger event source). To capture a timer value by using TSOUT signal, the
capture timer unit must detect the capture signal at both the rising edge and falling edge.
This time stamp function is controlled by the TSLOCK bit of the C0TS register. When TSLOCK is cleared to 0,
TSOUT bit toggles upon occurrence of the selected event. If TSLOCK bit is set to 1, TSOUT toggles upon occurrence
of the selected event, but the toggle is stopped as the TSEN bit is automatically cleared to 0 as soon as the message
storing to the message buffer 0 starts. This suppresses the subsequent toggle occurrence by TSOUT, so that the
time stamp value toggled last (= captured last) can be saved as the time stamp value of the time at which the data
frame was received in message buffer 0.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
454
Caution The time stamp function using TSLOCK bit is to stop toggle of TSOUT bit by receiving a data
frame in message buffer 0. Therefore, message buffer 0 must be set as a receive message
buffer. Since a receive message buffer cannot receive a remote frame, toggle of TSOUT bit
cannot be stopped by reception of a remote frame. Toggle of TSOUT bit does not stop when a
data frame is received in a message buffer other than message buffer 0.
For these reasons, a data frame cannot be received in message buffer 0 when the CAN module
is in the normal operation mode with ABT, because message buffer 0 must be set as a transmit
message buffer. In this operation mode, therefore, the function to stop toggle of TSOUT bit by
TSLOCK bit cannot be used.
The input source of the timer value according to a trigger signal (TSOUT) can be input to the 16-bit timer/event
counter 00 by port input switch control (ISC0), without connectingTI000, externally.
Figure 15-36. Port Input Switch Control
TI000 input
P00/TI000
Port input
switch control
(ISC0)
<ISC0>
0: Select TI000 (P00)
1: Select TSOUT
Port mode
(PM00)
Output latch
(P00)
Selector Selector
CAN
controller
Remark ISC0: Bit 0 of the input switch control register (ISC) (see Figure 13-19)
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 455
15.15 Baud Rate Settings
15.15.1 Baud rate settings
Make sure that the settings are within the range of limit values for ensuring correct operation of the CAN controller,
as follows.
(a) 5TQ ≤ SPT (sampling point) ≤ 17 TQ
SPT = TSEG1 + 1
(b) 8 TQ ≤ DBT (data bit time) ≤ 25 TQ
DBT = TSEG1 + TSEG2 + 1TQ = TSEG2 + SPT
(c) 1 TQ ≤ SJW (synchronization jump width) ≤ 4TQ
SJW ≤ DBT – SPT
(d) 4 ≤ TSEG1 ≤ 16 [3 (Setting value of TSEG1 [3:0] ≤ 15]
(e) 1 ≤ TSEG2 ≤ 8 [0 (Setting value of TSEG2 [2:0] ≤ 7]
Remark TQ = 1/fTQ (fTQ: CAN protocol layer basic system clock)
TSEG1 [3:0]: Bits 3 to 0 of CAN0 bit rate register (C0BTR)
TSEG2 [2:0]: Bits 10 to 8 of CAN0 bit rate register (C0BTR)
Table 15-22 shows the combinations of bit rates that satisfy the above conditions.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
456
Table 15-22. Settable Bit Rate Combinations (1/3)
Valid Bit Rate Setting C0BTR Register Setting
Value
DBT Length SYNC
SEGMENT
PROP
SEGMENT
PHASE
SEGMENT1
PHASE
SEGMENT2
TSEG1[3:0] TSEG2[2:0]
Sampling Point
(Unit %)
25 1 8 8 8 1111 111 68.0
24 1 7 8 8 1110 111 66.7
24 1 9 7 7 1111 110 70.8
23 1 6 8 8 1101 111 65.2
23 1 8 7 7 1110 110 69.6
23 1 10 6 6 1111 101 73.9
22 1 5 8 8 1100 111 63.6
22 1 7 7 7 1101 110 68.2
22 1 9 6 6 1110 101 72.7
22 1 11 5 5 1111 100 77.3
21 1 4 8 8 1011 111 61.9
21 1 6 7 7 1100 110 66.7
21 1 8 6 6 1101 101 71.4
21 1 10 5 5 1110 100 76.2
21 1 12 4 4 1111 011 81.0
20 1 3 8 8 1010 111 60.0
20 1 5 7 7 1011 110 65.0
20 1 7 6 6 1100 101 70.0
20 1 9 5 5 1101 100 75.0
20 1 11 4 4 1110 011 80.0
20 1 13 3 3 1111 010 85.0
19 1 2 8 8 1001 111 57.9
19 1 4 7 7 1010 110 63.2
19 1 6 6 6 1011 101 68.4
19 1 8 5 5 1100 100 73.7
19 1 10 4 4 1101 011 78.9
19 1 12 3 3 1110 010 84.2
19 1 14 2 2 1111 001 89.5
18 1 1 8 8 1000 111 55.6
18 1 3 7 7 1001 110 61.1
18 1 5 6 6 1010 101 66.7
18 1 7 5 5 1011 100 72.2
18 1 9 4 4 1100 011 77.8
18 1 11 3 3 1101 010 83.3
18 1 13 2 2 1110 001 88.9
18 1 15 1 1 1111 000 94.4
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 457
Table 15-22. Settable Bit Rate Combinations (2/3)
Valid Bit Rate Setting C0BTR Register Setting
Value
DBT Length SYNC
SEGMENT
PROP
SEGMENT
PHASE
SEGMENT1
PHASE
SEGMENT2
TSEG1[3:0] TSEG2[2:0]
Sampling Point
(Unit %)
17 1 2 7 7 1000 110 58.8
17 1 4 6 6 1001 101 64.7
17 1 6 5 5 1010 100 70.6
17 1 8 4 4 1011 011 76.5
17 1 10 3 3 1100 010 82.4
17 1 12 2 2 1101 001 88.2
17 1 14 1 1 1110 000 94.1
16 1 1 7 7 0111 110 56.3
16 1 3 6 6 1000 101 62.5
16 1 5 5 5 1001 100 68.8
16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
16 1 11 2 2 1100 001 87.5
16 1 13 1 1 1101 000 93.8
15 1 2 6 6 0111 101 60.0
15 1 4 5 5 1000 100 66.7
15 1 6 4 4 1001 011 73.3
15 1 8 3 3 1010 010 80.0
15 1 10 2 2 1011 001 86.7
15 1 12 1 1 1100 000 93.3
14 1 1 6 6 0110 101 57.1
14 1 3 5 5 0111 100 64.3
14 1 5 4 4 1000 011 71.4
14 1 7 3 3 1001 010 78.6
14 1 9 2 2 1010 001 85.7
14 1 11 1 1 1011 000 92.9
13 1 2 5 5 0110 100 61.5
13 1 4 4 4 0111 011 69.2
13 1 6 3 3 1000 010 76.9
13 1 8 2 2 1001 001 84.6
13 1 10 1 1 1010 000 92.3
12 1 1 5 5 0101 100 58.3
12 1 3 4 4 0110 011 66.7
12 1 5 3 3 0111 010 75.0
12 1 7 2 2 1000 001 83.3
12 1 9 1 1 1001 000 91.7
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
458
Table 15-22. Settable Bit Rate Combinations (3/3)
Valid Bit Rate Setting C0BTR Register Setting
Value
DBT Length SYNC
SEGMENT
PROP
SEGMENT
PHASE
SEGMENT1
PHASE
SEGMENT2
TSEG1[3:0] TSEG2[2:0]
Sampling Point
(Unit %)
11 1 2 4 4 0101 011 63.6
11 1 4 3 3 0110 010 72.7
11 1 6 2 2 0111 001 81.8
11 1 8 1 1 1000 000 90.9
10 1 1 4 4 0100 011 60.0
10 1 3 3 3 0101 010 70.0
10 1 5 2 2 0110 001 80.0
10 1 7 1 1 0111 000 90.0
9 1 2 3 3 0100 010 66.7
9 1 4 2 2 0101 001 77.8
9 1 6 1 1 0110 000 88.9
8 1 1 3 3 0011 010 62.5
8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
7Note 1 2 2 2 0011 001 71.4
7Note 1 4 1 1 0100 000 85.7
6Note 1 1 2 2 0010 001 66.7
6Note 1 3 1 1 0011 000 83.3
5Note 1 2 1 1 0010 000 80.0
4Note 1 1 1 1 0001 000 75.0
Note Setting with a DBT value of 7 or less is valid only when the value of the C0BRP register is other than 00H.
Caution The values in Table 15-22 do not guarantee the operation of the network system. Thoroughly
check the effect on the network system, taking into consideration oscillation errors and delays of
the CAN bus and CAN transceiver.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 459
15.15.2 Representative examples of baud rate settings
Tables 15-23 and 15-24 show representative examples of baud rate setting.
Table 15-23. Representative Examples of Baud Rate Settings (fCANMOD = 8 MHz) (1/2)
Valid Bit Rate Setting (Unit: kbps) C0BTR Register
Setting Value
Set Baud
Rate Value
(Unit: kbps)
Division
Ratio of
C0BRP
C0BRP
Register
Set Value Length
of DBT
SYNC
SEGME
NT
PROP
SEGME
NT
PHASE
SEGME
NT1
PHASE
SEGME
NT2
TSEG1
[3:0]
TSEG2
[2:0]
Samplin
g point
(Unit: %)
1000 1 00000000 8 1 1 3 3 0011 010 62.5
1000 1 00000000 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
1000 1 00000000 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
500 1 00000000 16 1 1 7 7 0111 110 56.3
500 1 00000000 16 1 3 6 6 1000 101 62.5
500 1 00000000 16 1 5 5 5 1001 100 68.8
500 1 00000000 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
500 1 00000000 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
500 1 00000000 16 1 11 2 2 1100 001 87.5
500 1 00000000 16 1 13 1 1 1101 000 93.8
500 2 00000001 8 1 1 3 3 0011 010 62.5
500 2 00000001 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
500 2 00000001 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
250 2 00000001 16 1 1 7 7 0111 110 56.3
250 2 00000001 16 1 3 6 6 1000 101 62.5
250 2 00000001 16 1 5 5 5 1001 100 68.8
250 2 00000001 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
250 2 00000001 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
250 2 00000001 16 1 11 2 2 1100 001 87.5
250 2 00000001 16 1 13 1 1 1101 000 93.8
250 4 00000011 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
250 4 00000011 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
125 4 00000011 16 1 1 7 7 0111 110 56.3
125 4 00000011 16 1 3 6 6 1000 101 62.5
125 4 00000011 16 1 5 5 5 1001 100 68.8
125 4 00000011 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
125 4 00000011 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
125 4 00000011 16 1 11 2 2 1100 001 87.5
125 4 00000011 16 1 13 1 1 1101 000 93.8
125 8 00000111 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
125 8 00000111 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
Caution The values in Table 15-23 do not guarantee the operation of the network system. Thoroughly
check the effect on the network system, taking into consideration oscillation errors and delays
of the CAN bus and CAN transceiver.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
460
Table 15-23. Representative Examples of Baud Rate Settings (fCANMOD = 8 MHz) (2/2)
Valid Bit Rate Setting (Unit: kbps) C0BTR Register
Setting Value
Set Baud
Rate Value
(Unit: kbps)
Division
Ratio of
C0BRP
C0BRP
Register
Set Value Length
of DBT
SYNC
SEGME
NT
PROP
SEGME
NT
PHASE
SEGME
NT1
PHASE
SEGME
NT2
TSEG1
[3:0]
TSEG2
[2:0]
Samplin
g point
(Unit: %)
100 4 00000011 20 1 7 6 6 1100 101 70.0
100 4 00000011 20 1 9 5 5 1101 100 75.0
100 5 00000100 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
100 5 00000100 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
100 8 00000111 10 1 3 3 3 0101 010 70.0
100 8 00000111 10 1 5 2 2 0110 001 80.0
100 10 00001001 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
100 10 00001001 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
83.3 4 00000011 24 1 7 8 8 1110 111 66.7
83.3 4 00000011 24 1 9 7 7 1111 110 70.8
83.3 6 00000101 16 1 5 5 5 1001 100 68.8
83.3 6 00000101 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
83.3 6 00000101 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
83.3 6 00000101 16 1 11 2 2 1100 001 87.5
83.3 8 00000111 12 1 5 3 3 0111 010 75.0
83.3 8 00000111 12 1 7 2 2 1000 001 83.3
83.3 12 00001011 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
83.3 12 00001011 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
33.3 10 00001001 24 1 7 8 8 1110 111 66.7
33.3 10 00001001 24 1 9 7 7 1111 110 70.8
33.3 12 00001011 20 1 7 6 6 1100 101 70.0
33.3 12 00001011 20 1 9 5 5 1101 100 75.0
33.3 15 00001110 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
33.3 15 00001110 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
33.3 16 00001111 15 1 6 4 4 1001 011 73.3
33.3 16 00001111 15 1 8 3 3 1010 010 80.0
33.3 20 00010011 12 1 5 3 3 0111 010 75.0
33.3 20 00010011 12 1 7 2 2 1000 001 83.3
33.3 24 00010111 10 1 3 3 3 0101 010 70.0
33.3 24 00010111 10 1 5 2 2 0110 001 80.0
33.3 30 00011101 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
33.3 30 00011101 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
Caution The values in Table 15-23 do not guarantee the operation of the network system. Thoroughly
check the effect on the network system, taking into consideration oscillation errors and delays of
the CAN bus and CAN transceiver.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 461
Table 15-24. Representative Examples of Baud Rate Settings (fCANMOD = 16 MHz) (1/2)
Valid Bit Rate Setting (Unit: kbps) C0BTR Register
Setting Value
Set Baud
Rate Value
(Unit: kbps)
Division
Ratio of
C0BRP
C0BRP
Register
Set Value Length
of DBT
SYNC
SEGME
NT
PROP
SEGME
NT
PHASE
SEGME
NT1
PHASE
SEGME
NT2
TSEG1
[3:0]
TSEG2
[2:0]
Samplin
g point
(Unit: %)
1000 1 00000000 16 1 1 7 7 0111 110 56.3
1000 1 00000000 16 1 3 6 6 1000 101 62.5
1000 1 00000000 16 1 5 5 5 1001 100 68.8
1000 1 00000000 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
1000 1 00000000 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
1000 1 00000000 16 1 11 2 2 1100 001 87.5
1000 1 00000000 16 1 13 1 1 1101 000 93.8
1000 2 00000001 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
1000 2 00000001 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
500 2 00000001 16 1 1 7 7 0111 110 56.3
500 2 00000001 16 1 3 6 6 1000 101 62.5
500 2 00000001 16 1 5 5 5 1001 100 68.8
500 2 00000001 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
500 2 00000001 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
500 2 00000001 16 1 11 2 2 1100 001 87.5
500 2 00000001 16 1 13 1 1 1101 000 93.8
500 4 00000011 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
500 4 00000011 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
250 4 00000011 16 1 3 6 6 1000 101 62.5
250 4 00000011 16 1 5 5 5 1001 100 68.8
250 4 00000011 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
250 4 00000011 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
250 4 00000011 16 1 11 2 2 1100 001 87.5
250 8 00000111 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
250 8 00000111 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
125 8 00000111 16 1 3 6 6 1000 101 62.5
125 8 00000111 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
125 8 00000111 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
125 8 00000111 16 1 11 2 2 1100 001 87.5
125 16 00001111 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
125 16 00001111 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
Caution The values in Table 15-24 do not guarantee the operation of the network system. Thoroughly
check the effect on the network system, taking into consideration oscillation errors and delays
of the CAN bus and CAN transceiver.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
462
Table 15-24. Representative Examples of Baud Rate Settings (fCANMOD = 16 MHz) (2/2)
Valid Bit Rate Setting (Unit: kbps) C0BTR Register
Setting Value
Set Baud
Rate Value
(Unit: kbps)
Division
Ratio of
C0BRP
C0BRP
Register
Set Value Length
of DBT
SYNC
SEGME
NT
PROP
SEGME
NT
PHASE
SEGME
NT1
PHASE
SEGME
NT2
TSEG1
[3:0]
TSEG2
[2:0]
Samplin
g point
(Unit: %)
100 8 00000111 20 1 9 5 5 1101 100 75.0
100 8 00000111 20 1 11 4 4 1110 011 80.0
100 10 00001001 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
100 10 00001001 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
100 16 00001111 10 1 3 3 3 0101 010 70.0
100 16 00001111 10 1 5 2 2 0110 001 80.0
100 20 00010011 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
83.3 8 00000111 24 1 7 8 8 1110 111 66.7
83.3 8 00000111 24 1 9 7 7 1111 110 70.8
83.3 12 00001011 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
83.3 12 00001011 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
83.3 12 00001011 16 1 11 2 2 1100 001 87.5
83.3 16 00001111 12 1 5 3 3 0111 010 75.0
83.3 16 00001111 12 1 7 2 2 1000 001 83.3
83.3 24 00010111 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
83.3 24 00010111 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
33.3 30 00011101 24 1 7 8 8 1110 111 66.7
33.3 30 00011101 24 1 9 7 7 1111 110 70.8
33.3 24 00010111 20 1 9 5 5 1101 100 75.0
33.3 24 00010111 20 1 11 4 4 1110 011 80.0
33.3 30 00011101 16 1 7 4 4 1010 011 75.0
33.3 30 00011101 16 1 9 3 3 1011 010 81.3
33.3 32 00011111 15 1 8 3 3 1010 010 80.0
33.3 32 00011111 15 1 10 2 2 1011 001 86.7
33.3 37 00100100 13 1 6 3 3 1000 010 76.9
33.3 37 00100100 13 1 8 2 2 1001 001 84.6
33.3 40 00100111 12 1 5 3 3 0111 010 75.0
33.3 40 00100111 12 1 7 2 2 1000 001 83.3
33.3 48 00101111 10 1 3 3 3 0101 010 70.0
33.3 48 00101111 10 1 5 2 2 0110 001 80.0
33.3 60 00111011 8 1 3 2 2 0100 001 75.0
33.3 60 00111011 8 1 5 1 1 0101 000 87.5
Caution The values in Table 15-24 do not guarantee the operation of the network system. Thoroughly
check the effect on the network system, taking into consideration oscillation errors and delays
of the CAN bus and CAN transceiver.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 463
15.16 Operation of CAN Controller
Remark m = 0 to 15
Figure 15-37. Initialization
START
Set
CnGMCS registe
r
Set
CnGMCTRL
register (Set GOM = 1)
Set
CnIE register
Set
CnMASK registe
r
END
Initialize
message buffers
Set
CnBRP register,
CnBTR register
Set
CnCTRL register (set OPMODE)
Remark OPMODE: Normal operation mode, normal operation mode with ABT, receive-only mode, single-
shot mode, self-test mode
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
464
Figure 15-38. Re-initialization
START
Set
C0BRP register,
C0BTR register
Set
C0IE register
Set
C0MASK register
Set C0CTRL register
(Set OPMODE)
END
Clear
OPMODE
INIT mode?
No
Yes
Set CCERC bit
Yes
No
Initialize message buffers
C0ERC and C0INFO
register clear?
Caution After setting the CAN module to the initialization mode, avoid setting the module to another
operation mode immediately after. If it is necessary to immediately set the module to another
operation mode, be sure to access registers other than the C0CTRL and C0GMCTRL registers
(e.g. set a message buffer).
Remark OPMODE: Normal operation mode, normal operation mode with ABT, receive-only mode, single-
shot mode, self-test mode
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 465
Figure 15-39. Message Buffer Initialization
START
Set
C0MCONFm registe
r
END
RDY = 1?
No
Yes
RDY = 0?
Set
C0MIDHm register,
C0MIDLm registe
r
Transmit message buffer?
Clea
r
C0MDATAm registe
r
Set
registe
r
Set
registe
r
No
No
Yes
Yes
START
Clear RDY bit
Set RDY bit
C0MDLCm
C0MCTRLm
Cautions 1. Before a message buffer is initialized, the RDY bit must be cleared.
2. Make the following settings for message buffers not used by the application.
- Clear the RDY, TRQ, and DN bits of the C0MCTRLm register to 0.
- Clear the MA0 bit of the C0MCONFm register to 0.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
466
Figure 15-40 shows the processing for a receive message buffer (MT [2:0] bits of C0MCONFm register = 001B to
101B).
Figure 15-40. Message Buffer Redefinition
START
Set
message buffers
END
RDY = 1?
No
Yes
Clear RDY bit
RDY = 0?
RSTAT = 0 or
VALID = 1?
Note1
No
Clear VALID bit
Set RDY bit
Yes
Yes
No
Note 2
Wait for 4 CAN data bits
Notes 1. Confirm that a message is being received because RDY bit must be set after a message is completely
received.
2. Avoid message buffer redefinition during store operation of message reception by waiting additional 4
CAN data bits.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 467
Figure 15-41 shows the processing for a transmit message buffer during transmission (MT [2:0] bits of
C0MCONFm register = 000B).
Figure 15-41. Message Buffer Redefinition during Transmission
START
END
RDY = 0? No
Yes
Data frame or remote frame?
Set RDY bit
Set C0MDATAxm register
Set C0MDLCm register
Clear RTR bit of C0MCONFm
register
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
Set C0MDLCm register
Set RTR bit of C0MCONFm
register
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
Remote frame
Data frame
Transmit abort process
Clear RDY bit
Transmit?
Set TRQ bit
Yes
Wait for 1CAN data bits
No
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
468
Figure 15-42 shows the processing for a transmit message buffer (MT [2:0] bits of C0MCONFm register = 000B).
Figure 15-42. Message Transmit Processing
START
END
TRQ = 0? No
Yes
RDY = 0?
Data frame or remote frame?
Set RDY bit
Yes
No
Set C0MDATAxm register
Set C0MDLCm register
Clear RTR bit of C0MCONFm
register
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
Set C0MDLCm register
Set RTR bit of C0MCONFm
register
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
Remote frame
Data frame
Clear RDY bit
Set TRQ bit
Cautions 1. The TRQ bit should be set after the RDY bit is set.
2. The RDY bit and TRQ bit should not be set at the same time.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 469
Figure 15-43 shows the processing for a transmit message buffer (MT [2:0] bits of C0MCONFm register = 000B).
Figure 15-43. ABT Message Transmit Processing
START
Set C0MDATAxm register
Set C0MDLCm register
Clear RTR bit of C0MCONFm
register
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
END
ABTTRG = 0?
No
Yes
Clear RDY bit
RDY = 0?
Set RDY bit
Yes
No
Set ABTTRG bit
Set all ABT transmit messages?
TSTAT = 0?
Yes
No
Yes
No
Caution The ABTTRG bit should be set to 1 after the TSTAT bit is cleared to 0. Checking the TSTAT
bit and setting the ABTTRG bit to 1 must be processed continuously.
Remark This processing (normal operation mode with ABS) can only be applied to message buffers 0 to 7.
For message buffers other than the ABT message buffers, refer to Figure 15-42.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
470
Figure 15-44. Transmission via Interrupt (Using C0LOPT register)
START
END
Clear RDY bit
RDY = 0?
Data frame or remote frame?
Set RDY bit
Yes
No
Set C0MDATAxm register
Set C0MDLCm register,
Clear RTR bit of C0MCONFm
register.
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
Set C0MDLCm register
Set RTR bit of C0MCONFm
register.
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
Set TRQ bit
Remote frame
Data frame
Transmit completion
interrupt processing
Read C0LOPT register
Cautions 1. The TRQ bit should be set after the RDY bit is set.
2. The RDY bit and TRQ bit should not be set at the same time.
Remark Also check the MBON flag at the beginning and at the end of the interrupt routine, in order to check
the access to the message buffers as well as TX history list registers, in case a pending sleep mode
had been executed. If MBON is detected to be cleared at any check, the actions and results of the
processing have to be discarded and processed again, after MBON is set again.
It is recommended to cancel any sleep mode requests, before processing TX interrupts.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 471
Figure 15-45. Transmit via Interrupt (Using C0TGPT register)
START
END
TOVF = 1?
Data frame or remote frame?
Set RDY bit
Yes
No
Set C0MDATAxm register
Set C0MDLCm register
Clear RTR bit of C0MCONFm
register
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
Set C0MDLCm register
Set RTR bit of C0MCONFm
register
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
Set TRQ bit
Remote frameData frame
Read C0TGPT register
Clear TOVF bit
Clear RDY bit
RDY = 0?
THPM = 1?
No
Yes
No
Yes
Transmit completion
interrupt processing
Cautions 1. The TRQ bit should be set after the RDY bit is set.
2. The RDY bit and TRQ bit should not be set at the same time.
Remark Also check the MBON flag at the beginning and at the end of the interrupt routine, in order to check
the access to the message buffers as well as TX history list registers, in case a pending sleep mode
had been executed. If MBON is detected to be cleared at any check, the actions and results of the
processing have to be discarded and processed again, after MBON is set again.
It is recommended to cancel any sleep mode requests, before processing TX interrupts.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
472
Figure 15-46. Transmission via Software Polling
START
END
TOVF = 1?
Data frame or
remote frame?
Set RDY bit
Yes
No
Set C0MDATAxm registe
r
Set C0MDLCm register
Clear RTR bit of C0MCONFm
register.
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
Set C0MDLCm registe
r
Set RTR bit of C0MCONFm
Set C0MIDLm and C0MIDHm
registers
Set TRQ bit
Remote frameData frame
Read C0TGPT register
Clear TOVF bit
Clear RDY bit
RDY = 0?
THPM = 1?
No
Yes
No
Yes
CINTS0 = 1? No
Clear CINTS0 bit
Yes
Cautions 1. The TRQ bit should be set after the RDY bit is set.
2. The RDY bit and TRQ bit should not be set at the same time.
Remark Also check the MBON flag at the beginning and at the end of the polling routine, in order to check the
access to the message buffers as well as TX history list registers, in case a pending sleep mode had
been executed. If MBON is detected to be cleared at any check, the actions and results of the
processing have to be discarded and processed again, after MBON is set again.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 473
Figure 15-47. Transmission Abort Processing (Except Normal Operation Mode with ABT)
START
Read C0LOPT registe
r
END
No
Yes
Clear TRQ bit
TSTAT = 0?
Message buffer to
be aborted matches C0LOPT
register?
No
Wait for 11 CAN data bits
Transmission successful
Transmit abort request
was successful
Yes
Note
Note There is a possibility of starting the transmission without being aborted even if TRQ bit is cleared,
because the transmission request to protocol layer might already been accepted between 11 bits,
total of interframe space (3 bits) and suspend transmission (8 bits).
Cautions 1. Execute transmission request abort processing by clearing the TRQ bit, not the RDY
bit.
2. Before making a sleep mode transition request, confirm that there is no transmission
request left using this processing.
3. The TSTAT bit can be periodically checked by a user application or can be checked
after the transmit completion interrupt.
4. Do not execute the new transmission request including in the other message buffers
while transmission abort processing is in progress.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
474
Figure 15-48. Transmission Abort Processing Except for ABT Transmission
(Normal Operation Mode with ABT)
START
Read C0LOPT registe
r
END
No
Yes
Clear TRQ bit
TSTAT = 0?
Message buffer to
be aborted matches C0LOPT
register?
No
Wait for 11 CAN data bits
Transmission successful
Transmit abort request
was successful
Yes
No
ABTTRG = 0?
Clear ABTTRG bit
Yes
Transmission successful
Transmit abort request
was successful
Note
Note There is a possibility of starting the transmission without being aborted even if TRQ bit is cleared,
because the transmission request to protocol layer might already been accepted between 11 bits,
total of interframe space (3 bits) and suspend transmission (8 bits).
Cautions 1. Execute transmission request abort processing by clearing the TRQ bit, not the RDY
bit.
2. Before making a sleep mode transition request, confirm that there is no transmission
request left using this processing.
3. The TSTAT bit can be periodically checked by a user application or can be checked
after the transmit completion interrupt.
4. Do not execute the new transmission request including in the other message buffers
while transmission abort processing is in progress.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 475
Figure 15-49 shows the processing not to skip resumption of transmitting a message that was stopped when
transmission of an ABT message buffer was aborted.
Figure 15-49. ABT Transmission Abort Processing (Normal Operation Mode with ABT)
START
END
No
Clear ABTTRG bit
ABTTRG = 0?
Transmission start No
Clear TRQ bit of message
buffer whose transmission
was aborted
Transmit abort
Yes
Set ABTCLR bit
Yes
No
TSTAT = 0?
Yes
Cautions 1. Do not set any transmission requests while ABT transmission abort processing is in
progress.
2. Make a CAN sleep mode/CAN stop mode transition request after ABTTRG bit is
cleared (after ABT mode is aborted) following the procedure shown in Figure 15-49
or 15-50. When clearing a transmission request in an area other than the ABT area,
follow the procedure shown in Figure 15-47.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
476
Figure 15-50 shows the processing to skip resumption of transmitting a message that was stopped when
transmission of an ABT message buffer was aborted.
Figure 15-50. ABT Transmission Request Abort Processing (Normal Operation Mode with ABT)
START
END
No
Clear ABTTRG bit
ABTTRG = 0?
Transmission start
pointer clear?
No
Transmit abort
Yes
Set ABTCLR bit
Yes
Clear TRQ bit of message buffe
r
undergoing transmission
Cautions 1. Do not set any transmission requests while ABT transmission abort processing is in
progress.
2. Make a CAN sleep mode/CAN stop mode request after ABTTRG is cleared (after ABT
mode is stopped) following the procedure shown in Figure 15-49 or 15-50. When
clearing a transmission request in an area other than the ABT area, follow the
procedure shown in Figure 15-47.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 477
Figure 15-51. Reception via Interrupt (Using C0LIPT Register)
START
No
Read C0MDATAxm , C0MDLCm,
C0MIDLm, and C0MIDHm
registers
DN = 0
AND
MUC = 0
Read C0LIPT registe
r
Yes
Generation of receive
completion interrupt
Clear DN bit
Note
END
, ,
Note Check the MUC and DN bits using one read access.
Remark Also check the MBON flag at the beginning and at the end of the interrupt routine, in order to check
the access to the message buffers as well as reception history list registers, in case a pending sleep
mode had been executed. If MBON is detected to be cleared at any check, the actions and results
of the processing have to be discarded and processed again, after MBON is set again.
It is recommended to cancel any sleep mode requests, before processing RX interrupts.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
478
Figure 15-52. Reception via Interrupt (Using C0RGPT Register)
No
START
Clear ROVF bit
No
ROVF = 1?
Read C0RGPT registe
r
Yes
Generation of receive
completion interrupt
Clear DN bit
DN = 0
AND
MUC = 0
Note
RHPM = 1?
END
Yes
No
Yes
Read C0MDATAxm , C0MDLCm,
C0MIDLm, C0MIDHm registers
, ,
,
Correct data is read Ille
g
al data is read
Note Check the MUC and DN bits using one read access.
Remark Also check the MBON flag at the beginning and at the end of the interrupt routine, in order to check
the access to the message buffers as well as reception history list registers, in case a pending sleep
mode had been executed. If MBON is detected to be cleared at any check, the actions and results
of the processing have to be discarded and processed again, after MBON is set again.
It is recommended to cancel any sleep mode requests, before processing RX interrupts.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 479
Figure 15-53. Reception via Software Polling
START
CINTS1 = 1?
Yes
No
Clear ROVF bit
No
ROVF = 1?
Read C0RGPT registe
r
Yes
Clear DN bit
DN = 0
AND
MUC = 0
Note
RHPM = 1?
END
Yes
No
Yes
No
Read C0MDATAxm , C0MDLCm,
C0MIDLm, C0MIDHm registers
, ,
,
Correct data is read Illegal data is read
Clear CINTS1 bit
Note Check the MUC and DN bits using one read access.
Remark Also check the MBON flag at the beginning and at the end of the polling routine, in order to check
the access to the message buffers as well as reception history list registers, in case a pending sleep
mode had been executed. If MBON is detected to be cleared at any check, the actions and results
of the processing have to be discarded and processed again, after MBON is set again.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
480
Figure 15-54. Setting CAN Sleep Mode/Stop Mode
START (when PSMODE[1:0] = 00B)
PSMODE0 = 1?
Set PSMODE0 bit
CAN sleep mode
CAN sleep mode
END
Ye s
No
Set PSMODE1 bit
PSMODE1 = 1?
CAN stop mode
CAN stop mode
Request CAN sleep
mode again?
Ye s
No
Ye s
No
INIT mode?
Ye s
No
Clear CINTS5 bit
Clear OPMODE
Access to registers other than the
C0CTRL and C0GMCTRL registers
Set C0CTRL register
(Set OPMODE)
Caution To abort transmission before making a request for the CAN sleep mode, perform processing
according to Figures 15-47 and 15-48.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 481
Figure 15-55. Clear CAN Sleep/Stop Mode
START
CAN sleep mode
END
Clear PSMODE1 bit
After CRxD is dominant
level, CINTS5 = 1
Clear PSMODE0
CAN stop mode
Clear CINTS5 bit
Released by CRxD at
CPU NOT standby state
(VPCLK is still supplied)
After CR
x
D is dominant
level, PSMODE0 = 0,
CINTS5 = 1
Clear CINTS5 bit
Released by CRxD at
CPU standby state
(VPCLK is stopped)
Clear PSMODE0
Released by USER
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
482
Figure 15-56. Bus-Off Recovery (Expect Normal Operation Mode with ABT)
START
Access to registers other than
C0CTRL and C0GMCTRL
registers
Set C0CTRL register
(Clear OPMODE)
Forced recovery from bus off?
END
BOFF = 1?
Yes
No
Set CCERC bit
Set C0CTRL register
(Set OPMODE) Wait for recovery
from bus off
Set C0CTRL register
(Set OPMODE)
Yes
No
Clear all TRQ bits
Note
Note Clear all TRQ bits when re-initialization of message buffer is executed by clearing RDY bit before bus-off
recovery sequence is started.
Caution When the transmission from the initialization mode to any operation modes is requested to
execute bus-off recovery sequence again in the bus-off recovery sequence, reception error
counter is cleared.
Therefore it is necessary to detect 11 consecutive recessive-level bits 128 times on the bus
again.
Remark OPMODE: Normal operation mode, normal operation mode with ABT, receive-only mode, single-shot
mode, self-test mode
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 483
Figure 15-57. Bus-Off Recovery (Normal Operation Mode with ABT)
START
Access to registers other than
C0CTRL and C0GMCTRL
registers
Set C0CTRL register
(Clear OPMODE)
Forced recovery from bus off?
END
BOFF = 1?
Yes
No
Set CCERC bit
Set C0CTRL register
(Set OPMODE) Wait for recovery
from bus off
Set C0CTRL register
(Set OPMODE)
Yes
No
Clear all TRQ bits
Clear ABTTRG bit
Note
Note Clear all TRQ bits when re-initialization of message buffer is executed by clearing RDY bit before bus-off
recovery sequence is started.
Caution When the transmission from the initialization mode to any operation modes is requested to
execute bus-off recovery sequence again in the bus-off recovery sequence, reception error
counter is cleared.
Therefore it is necessary to detect 11 consecutive recessive-level bits 128 times on the bus
again.
Remark OPMODE: Normal operation mode, normal operation mode with ABT, receive-only mode, single-shot
mode, self-test mode
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
484
Figure 15-58. Normal Shutdown Process
START
GOM = 0?
END
Yes
No
Clear GOM bit
INIT mode
Shutdown successful
GOM = 0, EFSD = 0
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 485
Figure 15-59. Forced Shutdown Process
START
GOM = 0?
Clear GOM bit
END
Yes
No
Shutdown successful
GOM = 0, EFSD = 0
Set EFSD bit
Must be a subseguent write
Caution Do not read- or write-access any registers by software between setting the EFSD bit and
clearing the GOM bit.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
486
Figure 15-60. Error Handling
START
Clear CINTS2 bit
CINTS2 = 1?
CINTS3 = 1?
END
Yes
Check CAN protocol error state
(read C0LEC register)
No
Yes
No
Error interrupt
Check CAN module state
(read C0INFO register)
CINTS4 = 1? No
Yes
Clear CINTS3 bit
Clear CINTS4 bit
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 487
Figure 15-61. Setting CPU Standby (from CAN Sleep Mode)
START
PSMODE0 = 1?
END
Yes
Set CPU standby mode
No
CAN sleep mode
Set PSMODE0 bit
END
Caution Before the CPU is set in the CPU standby mode, please check the CAN sleep mode or not.
However, after check of the CAN sleep mode, until the CPU is set in the CPU standby mode, the
CAN sleep mode may be cancelled by wakeup from CAN bus.
CHAPTER 15 CAN CONTROLLER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
488
Figure 15-62. Setting CPU Standby (from CAN Stop Mode)
START
PSMODE0 = 1?
Yes
No
CAN sleep mode
Clear CINTS5 bit
Note
Set PSMODE0 bit
Set PSMODE1 bit
CAN stop mode
PSMODE1 = 1?
END
Set CPU standby mode
Yes
No
Note During wakeup interrupts
Caution The CAN stop mode can only be released by writing 01B to the PSMODE[1:0] bit of the C0CTRL
register and not by a change in the CAN bus state.
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 489
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
16.1 Interrupt Function Types
The following two types of interrupt functions are used.
(1) Maskable interrupts
These interrupts undergo mask control. Maskable interrupts can be divided into a high interrupt priority group and
a low interrupt priority group by setting the priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, PR1H).
Multiple interrupt servicing can be applied to low-priority interrupts when high-priority interrupts are generated. If
two or more interrupt requests, each having the same priority, are simultaneously generated, then they are processed
according to the priority of vectored interrupt servicing. For the priority order, see Table 16-1.
A standby release signal is generated and STOP and HALT modes are released.
8 external interrupt requests and 24 internal interrupt requests are provided as maskable interrupts.
(2) Software interrupt
This is a vectored interrupt generated by executing the BRK instruction. It is acknowledged even when interrupts
are disabled. The software interrupt does not undergo interrupt priority control.
16.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration
A total of 33 interrupt sources exist for maskable and software interrupts. In addition, they also have up to four
reset source (see Table 16-1).
<R>
<R>
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
490
Table 16-1. Interrupt Source List (1/2)
Interrupt Source
Interrupt
Type
Default
PriorityNote 1 Name Trigger
Internal/
External
Vector
Table
Address
Basic
Configuration
TypeNote 2
0 INTLVI Low-voltage detectionNote 3 Internal 0004H (A)
1 INTP0 Pin input edge detection 0006H
2 INTP1 Pin input edge detection 0008H
3 INTP2 Pin input edge detection 000AH
4 INTP3 Pin input edge detection 000CH
5 INTP4 Pin input edge detection 000EH
6 INTP5 Pin input edge detection
External
0010H
(B)
7 INTC0ERR AFCAN0 error occurrence 0012H
8 INTC0WUP AFCAN0 wakeup 0014H
9 INTC0REC AFCAN0 reception completion 0016H
10 INTC0TRX AFCAN0 transmission completion 0018H
11 INTSRE60 UART60 reception error generation 001AH
12 INTSR60 End of UART60 reception 001CH
13 INTST60 End of UART60 transmission 001EH
INTCSI10 End of CSI10 transmission 14
INTSRE61 UART61 reception error generation
Internal
0020H
(A)
INTP6 Pin input edge detection External (B) 15
INTSR61 End of UART61 reception Internal
0022H
(A)
16 INTP7 Pin input edge detection External 0024H (B)
INTST61 End of UART61 transmission Internal (A)
17 INTTMH1 Match between TMH1 and CMP01
(when compare register is specified)
0026H
18 INTTMH0 Match between TMH0 and CMP00
(when compare register is specified)
0028H
19 INTTM50 Match between TM50 and CR50
(when compare register is specified)
002AH
20 INTTM000 Match between TM00 and CR000
(when compare register is specified),
TI010 pin valid edge detection
(when capture register is specified)
002CH
21 INTTM010 Match between TM00 and CR010
(when compare register is specified),
TI000 pin valid edge detection
(when capture register is specified)
002EH
Maskable
22 INTAD End of A/D conversion 0030H
Notes 1. The default priority is the priority applicable when two or more maskable interrupt are generated
simultaneously. 0 is the highest priority, and 27 is the lowest.
2. Basic configuration types (A) to (C) correspond to (A) to (C) in Figure 16-1.
3. When bit 1 (LVIMD) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) is set to 0.
<R>
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 491
Table 16-1. Interrupt Source List (2/2)
Interrupt Source
Interrupt
Type
Default
PriorityNote 1 Name Trigger
Internal/
External
Vector
Table
Address
Basic
Configuration
TypeNote 2
23 INTWTI Watch timer reference time interval signal 0032H
INTDMU DMU operation end
24 INTTM51Note 3 Match between TM51 and CR51
(when compare register is specified)
0034H
25 INTWT Watch timer overflow 0036H
26 INTTM001 Match between TM01 and CR001
(when compare register is specified),
TI011 pin valid edge detection
(when capture register is specified)
003AH
Maskable
27 INTTM011 Match between TM01 and CR011
(when compare register is specified)
Internal
003CH
(A)
Software − BRK BRK instruction execution − 003EH (C)
RESET Reset input
POC Power-on clear
LVI Low-voltage detectionNote 4
Reset −
WDT WDT overflow
− 0000H −
Notes 1. The default priority is the priority applicable when two or more maskable interrupt are generated
simultaneously. 0 is the highest priority, and 27 is the lowest.
2. Basic configuration types (A) to (C) correspond to (A) to (C) in Figure 16-1.
3. When the 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is used in the carrier generator mode, the interrupt source is
INTTM5H1 (see Figure 8-13 Transfer Timing).
4. When bit 1 (LVIMD) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) is set to 1.
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
492
Figure 16-1. Basic Configuration of Interrupt Function
(A) Internal maskable interrupt
Internal bus
Interrupt
request IF
MK IE PR ISP
Priority controller Vector table
address generator
Standby release signal
(B) External maskable interrupt (INTP0 to INTP7)
Internal bus
Interrupt
request IF
MK IE PR ISP
Priority controller Vector table
address generator
Standby release signal
External interrupt edge
enable register
(EGP, EGN)
Edge
detector
(C) Software interrupt
Internal bus
Interrupt
request Priority controller Vector table
address generator
IF: Interrupt request flag
IE: Interrupt enable flag
ISP: In-service priority flag
MK: Interrupt mask flag
PR: Priority specification flag
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 493
16.3 Registers Controlling Interrupt Functions
The following 6 types of registers are used to control the interrupt functions.
• Interrupt request flag register (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H)
• Interrupt mask flag register (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H)
• Priority specification flag register (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, PR1H)
• External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP)
• External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN)
• Program status word (PSW)
Table 16-2 shows a list of interrupt request flags, interrupt mask flags, and priority specification flags corresponding
to interrupt request sources.
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
494
Table 16-2. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources
Interrupt Request Flag Interrupt Mask Flag Priority Specification Flag
Interrupt
Request Register Register Register
INTLVI LVIIF IF0L LVIMK MK0L LVIPR PR0L
INTP0 PIF0 PMK0 PPR0
INTP1 PIF1 PMK1 PPR1
INTP2 PIF2 PMK2 PPR2
INTP3 PIF3 PMK3 PPR3
INTP4 PIF4 PMK4 PPR4
INTP5 PIF5 PMK5 PPR5
INTC0ERR C0ERRIF C0ERRMK C0ERRPR
INTC0WUP C0WUPIF IF0H C0WUPMK MK0H C0WUPPR PR0H
INTC0REC C0RECIF C0RECMK C0RECPR
INTC0TRX C0TRXIF C0TRXMK C0TRXPR
INTSRE60 SREIF60 SREMK60 SREPR60
INTSR60 SRIF60 SRMK60 SRPR60
INTST60 STIF60 STMK60 STPR60
INTCSI10 CSIIF10 CSIMK10 CSIPR10
INTSRE61 SREIF61
DUALIF0
Note 1 SREMK61
DUALMK0
Note 2 SREPR61
DUALPR0
Note 2
INTP6 PIF6 PMK6 PPR6
INTSR61 SRIF61
DUALIF1
Note 1
SRMK61
DUALMK1
Note 2
SRPR61
DUALPR1
Note 2
INTP7 PIF7 IF1L PMK7 MK1L PPR7 PR1L
INTST61 STIF61
DUALIF2
Note 1 STMK61
DUALMK2
Note 2 STPR61
DUALPR2
Note 2
INTTMH1 TMIFH1 TMMKH1 TMPRH1
INTTMH0 TMIFH0 TMMKH0 TMPRH0
INTTM50 TMIF50 TMMK50 TMPR50
INTTM000 TMIF000 TMMK000 TMPR000
INTTM010 TMIF010 TMMK010 TMPR010
INTAD ADIF ADMK ADPR
INTWTI WTIIF WTIMK WTIPR
INTDMU DMUIF
DUALIF7
Note 1 DMUMK
DUALMK7
Note 2 DMUPR
DUALPR7
Note 2
INTTM51Note 3 TMIF51 IF1H TMMK51 MK1H TMPR51 PR1H
INTWT WTIF WTMK WTPR
INTTM001 TMIF001 TMMK001 TMPR001
INTTM011 TMIF011 TMMK011 TMPR011
Notes 1. If either of the two types of interrupt sources is generated, these flags are set (1).
2. Both types of interrupt sources are supported.
3. When the 8-bit timer/event counter 51 is used in the carrier generator mode, the interrupt source is
INTTM5H1 (see Figure 8-13 Transfer Timing).
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 495
(1) Interrupt request flag registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H)
The interrupt request flags are set to 1 when the corresponding interrupt request is generated or an instruction is
executed. They are cleared to 0 when an instruction is executed upon acknowledgment of an interrupt request or
upon reset signal generation.
When an interrupt is acknowledged, the interrupt request flag is automatically cleared and then the interrupt
routine is entered.
IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, and IF1H are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When IF0L and IF0H, and
IF1L and IF1H are combined to form 16-bit registers IF0 and IF1, they are read with a 16-bit memory
manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H.
Figure 16-2. Format of Interrupt Request Flag Registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H)
Address: FFE0H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
IF0L C0ERRIF PIF5 PIF4 PIF3 PIF2 PIF1 PIF0 LVIIF
Address: FFE1H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
IF0H DUALIF1
PIF6
SRIF61
DURLIF0
CSIIF10
SREIF61
STIF60 SRIF60 SREIF60 C0TRXIF C0RECIF C0WUPIF
Address: FFE2H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
IF1L DUALIF7
WTIIF
DMUIF
ADIF TMIF010 TMIF000 TMIF50 TMIFH0 TMIFH1
DUALIF2
PIF7
STIF61
Address: FFE3H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 <4> <3> 2 <1> <0>
IF1H 0 0 0 TMIF011 TMIF001 0 WTIF TMIF51
XXIFX Interrupt request flag
0 No interrupt request signal is generated
1 Interrupt request is generated, interrupt request status
Cautions 1. Be sure to set bits 2, 5 to 7 of IF1H to 0.
2. When operating a timer, serial interface, or A/D converter after standby release, operate it
once after clearing the interrupt request flag. An interrupt request flag may be set by noise.
<R>
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
496
Cautions 3. When manipulating a flag of the interrupt request flag register, use a 1-bit memory
manipulation instruction (CLR1). When describing in C language, use a bit manipulation
instruction such as “IF0L.0 = 0;” or “_asm(“clr1 IF0L, 0”);” because the compiled assembler
must be a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction (CLR1).
If a program is described in C language using an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction
such as “IF0L &= 0xfe;” and compiled, it becomes the assembler of three instructions.
mov a, IF0L
and a, #0FEH
mov IF0L, a
In this case, even if the request flag of another bit of the same interrupt request flag register
(IF0L) is set to 1 at the timing between “mov a, IF0L” and “mov IF0L, a”, the flag is cleared
to 0 at “mov IF0L, a”. Therefore, care must be exercised when using an 8-bit memory
manipulation instruction in C language.
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 497
(2) Interrupt mask flag registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H)
The interrupt mask flags are used to enable/disable the corresponding maskable interrupt servicing.
MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, and MK1H are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. When MK0L and
MK0H, and MK1L and MK1H are combined to form 16-bit registers MK0 and MK1, they are set with a 16-bit
memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets these registers sets to FFH.
Figure 16-3. Format of Interrupt Mask Flag Registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H)
Address: FFE4H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
MK0L C0ERRMK PMK5 PMK4 PMK3 PMK2 PMK1 PMK0 LVIMK
Address: FFE5H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
MK0H DUALMK1
PMK6
SRMK61
DURLMK0
CSIMK10
SREMK61
STMK60 SRMK60 SREMK60 C0TRXMK C0RECMK C0WUPMK
Address: FFE6H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
MK1L DUALMK7
WTIMK
DMUMK
ADMK TMMK010 TMMK000 TMMK50 TMMKH0 TMMKH1 DUALMK2
PMK7
STMK61
Address: FFE7H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 <4> <3> 2 <1> <0>
MK1H 1 1 1 TMMK011
TMMK001 1 WTMK TMMK51
XXMKX Interrupt servicing control
0 Interrupt servicing enabled
1 Interrupt servicing disabled
Caution Be sure to set bits 2, 5 to 7 of MK1H to 1.
<R>
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
498
(3) Priority specification flag registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, PR1H)
The priority specification flag registers are used to set the corresponding maskable interrupt priority order.
PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, and PR1H are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction. If PR0L and PR0H,
and PR1L and PR1H are combined to form 16-bit registers PR0 and PR1, they are set with a 16-bit memory
manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets these registers to FFH.
Figure 16-4. Format of Priority Specification Flag Registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, PR1H)
Address: FFE8H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR0L C0ERRPR PPR5 PPR4 PPR3 PPR2 PPR1 PPR0 LVIPR
Address: FFE9H After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR0H DUALPR1
PPR6
SRPR61
DURLPR0
CSIPR10
SREPR61
STPR60 SRPR60 SREPR60 C0TRXPR C0RECPR C0WUPPR
Address: FFEAH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol <7> <6> <5> <4> <3> <2> <1> <0>
PR1L DUALPR7
WTIPR
DMUPR
ADPR TMPR010 TMPR000 TMPR50 TMPRH0 TMPRH1 DUALPR2
PPR7
STPR61
Address: FFEBH After reset: FFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 <4> <3> 2 <1> <0>
PR1H 1 1 1 TMPR011 TMPR001 1 WTPR TMPR51
XXPRX Priority level selection
0 High priority level
1 Low priority level
Caution Be sure to set bit 2, 5 to 7 of PR1H to 1.
<R>
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 499
(4) External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP), external interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN)
These registers specify the valid edge for INTP0 to INTP7.
EGP and EGN are set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears these registers to 00H.
Figure 16-5. Format of External Interrupt Rising Edge Enable Register (EGP)
and External Interrupt Falling Edge Enable Register (EGN)
Address: FF48H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EGP EGP7 EPG6 EGP5 EGP4 EGP3 EGP2 EGP1 EGP0
Address: FF49H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
EGN EGN7 EGN6 EGN5 EGN4 EGN3 EGN2 EGN1 EGN0
EGPn EGNn INTPn pin valid edge selection (n = 0 to 7)
0 0 Edge detection disabled
0 1 Falling edge
1 0 Rising edge
1 1 Both rising and falling edges
Table 16-3 shows the ports corresponding to EGPn and EGNn.
Table 16-3. Ports Corresponding to EGPn and EGNn
Detection Enable Register Edge Detection Port External Request Signal
EGP0 EGN0 P120 INTP0
EGP1 EGN1 P30 INTP1
EGP2 EGN2 P31 INTP2
EGP3 EGN3 P32 INTP3
EGP4 EGN4 P33 INTP4
EGP5 EGN5 P16 INTP5
EGP6 EGN6 P72 INTP6
EGP7 EGN7 P73 INTP7
Caution Select the port mode by clearing EGPn and EGNn to 0 because an edge
may be detected when the external interrupt function is switched to the
port function.
Remark n = 0 to 7
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
500
(5) Program status word (PSW)
The program status word is a register used to hold the instruction execution result and the current status for an
interrupt request. The IE flag that sets maskable interrupt enable/disable and the ISP flag that controls multiple
interrupt servicing are mapped to the PSW.
Besides 8-bit read/write, this register can carry out operations using bit manipulation instructions and dedicated
instructions (EI and DI). When a vectored interrupt request is acknowledged, if the BRK instruction is executed,
the contents of the PSW are automatically saved into a stack and the IE flag is reset to 0. If a maskable interrupt
request is acknowledged, the contents of the priority specification flag of the acknowledged interrupt are
transferred to the ISP flag. The PSW contents are also saved into the stack with the PUSH PSW instruction.
They are restored from the stack with the RETI, RETB, and POP PSW instructions.
Reset signal generation sets PSW to 02H.
Figure 16-6. Format of Program Status Word
<7>
IE
<6>
Z
<5>
RBS1
<4>
AC
<3>
RBS0
2
0
<1>
ISP
0
CYPSW
After reset
02H
ISP
High-priority interrupt servicing (low-priority
interrupt disabled)
IE
0
1
Disabled
Priority of interrupt currently being serviced
Interrupt request acknowledgment enable/disable
Used when normal instruction is executed
Enabled
Interrupt request not acknowledged, or low-
priority interrupt servicing (all maskable
interrupts enabled)
0
1
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 501
16.4 Interrupt Servicing Operations
16.4.1 Maskable interrupt acknowledgement
A maskable interrupt becomes acknowledgeable when the interrupt request flag is set to 1 and the mask (MK) flag
corresponding to that interrupt request is cleared to 0. A vectored interrupt request is acknowledged if interrupts are
in the interrupt enabled state (when the IE flag is set to 1). However, a low-priority interrupt request is not
acknowledged during servicing of a higher priority interrupt request (when the ISP flag is reset to 0). The times from
generation of a maskable interrupt request until interrupt servicing is performed are listed in Table 16-4 below.
For the interrupt request acknowledgement timing, see Figures 16-8 and 16-9.
Table 16-4. Time from Generation of Maskable Interrupt Until Servicing
Minimum Time Maximum TimeNote
When ××PR = 0 7 clocks 32 clocks
When ××PR = 1 8 clocks 33 clocks
Note If an interrupt request is generated just before a divide instruction, the wait time becomes longer.
Remark 1 clock: 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU clock)
If two or more maskable interrupt requests are generated simultaneously, the request with a higher priority level
specified in the priority specification flag is acknowledged first. If two or more interrupts requests have the same
priority level, the request with the highest default priority is acknowledged first.
An interrupt request that is held pending is acknowledged when it becomes acknowledgeable.
Figure 16-7 shows the interrupt request acknowledgement algorithm.
If a maskable interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents are saved into the stacks in the order of PSW, then
PC, the IE flag is reset (0), and the contents of the priority specification flag corresponding to the acknowledged
interrupt are transferred to the ISP flag. The vector table data determined for each interrupt request is the loaded into
the PC and branched.
Restoring from an interrupt is possible by using the RETI instruction.
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
502
Figure 16-7. Interrupt Request Acknowledgement Processing Algorithm
Start
××IF = 1?
××MK = 0?
××PR = 0?
IE = 1?
ISP = 1?
Interrupt request held pending
Yes
Yes
No
No
Yes (interrupt request generation)
Yes
No (Low priority)
No
No
Yes
Yes
No
IE = 1?
No
Any high-priority
interrupt request among those
simultaneously generated
with ××PR = 0?
Yes (High priority)
No
Yes
Yes
No
Vectored interrupt servicing
Interrupt request held pending
Interrupt request held pending
Interrupt request held pending
Interrupt request held pending
Interrupt request held pending
Interrupt request held pending
Vectored interrupt servicing
Any high-priority
interrupt request among
those simultaneously
generated?
Any high-priority
interrupt request among
those simultaneously generated
with ××PR = 0?
××IF: Interrupt request flag
××MK: Interrupt mask flag
××PR: Priority specification flag
IE: Flag that controls acknowledgement of maskable interrupt request (1 = Enable, 0 = Disable)
ISP: Flag that indicates the priority level of the interrupt currently being serviced (0 = high-priority interrupt
servicing, 1 = No interrupt request acknowledged, or low-priority interrupt servicing)
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 503
Figure 16-8. Interrupt Request Acknowledgement Timing (Minimum Time)
8 clocks
7 clocks
Instruction Instruction
PSW and PC saved,
jump to interrupt
servicing
Interrupt servicing
program
CPU processing
××IF
(××PR = 1)
××IF
(××PR = 0)
6 clocks
Remark 1 clock: 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU clock)
Figure 16-9. Interrupt Request Acknowledgement Timing (Maximum Time)
33 clocks
32 clocks
Instruction Divide instruction
PSW and PC saved,
jump to interrupt
servicing
Interrupt servicing
program
CPU processing
××IF
(××PR = 1)
××IF
(××PR = 0)
6 clocks25 clocks
Remark 1 clock: 1/fCPU (fCPU: CPU clock)
16.4.2 Software interrupt request acknowledgement
A software interrupt acknowledge is acknowledged by BRK instruction execution. Software interrupts cannot be
disabled.
If a software interrupt request is acknowledged, the contents are saved into the stacks in the order of the program
status word (PSW), then program counter (PC), the IE flag is reset (0), and the contents of the vector table (003EH,
003FH) are loaded into the PC and branched.
Restoring from a software interrupt is possible by using the RETB instruction.
Caution Do not use the RETI instruction for restoring from the software interrupt.
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
504
16.4.3 Multiple interrupt servicing
Multiple interrupt servicing occurs when another interrupt request is acknowledged during execution of an interrupt.
Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur unless the interrupt request acknowledgement enabled state is selected
(IE = 1). When an interrupt request is acknowledged, interrupt request acknowledgement becomes disabled (IE = 0).
Therefore, to enable multiple interrupt servicing, it is necessary to set (1) the IE flag with the EI instruction during
interrupt servicing to enable interrupt acknowledgement.
Moreover, even if interrupts are enabled, multiple interrupt servicing may not be enabled, this being subject to
interrupt priority control. Two types of priority control are available: default priority control and programmable priority
control. Programmable priority control is used for multiple interrupt servicing.
In the interrupt enabled state, if an interrupt request with a priority equal to or higher than that of the interrupt
currently being serviced is generated, it is acknowledged for multiple interrupt servicing. If an interrupt with a priority
lower than that of the interrupt currently being serviced is generated during interrupt servicing, it is not acknowledged
for multiple interrupt servicing. Interrupt requests that are not enabled because interrupts are in the interrupt disabled
state or because they have a lower priority are held pending. When servicing of the current interrupt ends, the
pending interrupt request is acknowledged following execution of at least one main processing instruction execution.
Table 16-5 shows relationship between interrupt requests enabled for multiple interrupt servicing and Figure 16-10
shows multiple interrupt servicing examples.
Table 16-5. Relationship Between Interrupt Requests Enabled for Multiple Interrupt Servicing
During Interrupt Servicing
Maskable Interrupt Request
PR = 0 PR = 1
Multiple Interrupt Request
Interrupt Being Serviced IE = 1 IE = 0 IE = 1 IE = 0
Software
Interrupt
Request
ISP = 0 { × × × {
Maskable interrupt
ISP = 1 { × { × {
Software interrupt { × { × {
Remarks 1. : Multiple interrupt servicing enabled
2. ×: Multiple interrupt servicing disabled
3. ISP and IE are flags contained in the PSW.
ISP = 0: An interrupt with higher priority is being serviced.
ISP = 1: No interrupt request has been acknowledged, or an interrupt with a lower
priority is being serviced.
IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgement is disabled.
IE = 1: Interrupt request acknowledgement is enabled.
4. PR is a flag contained in PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, and PR1H.
PR = 0: Higher priority level
PR = 1: Lower priority level
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 505
Figure 16-10. Examples of Multiple Interrupt Servicing (1/2)
Example 1. Multiple interrupt servicing occurs twice
Main processing INTxx servicing INTyy servicing INTzz servicing
EI EI EI
RETI RETI
RETI
INTxx
(PR = 1)
INTyy
(PR = 0)
INTzz
(PR = 0)
IE = 0 IE = 0 IE = 0
IE = 1 IE = 1
IE = 1
During servicing of interrupt INTxx, two interrupt requests, INTyy and INTzz, are acknowledged, and multiple
interrupt servicing takes place. Before each interrupt request is acknowledged, the EI instruction must always be
issued to enable interrupt request acknowledgment.
Example 2. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur due to priority control
Main processing INTxx servicing INTyy servicing
INTxx
(PR = 0)
INTyy
(PR = 1)
EI
RETI
IE = 0
IE = 0
EI
1 instruction execution
RETI
IE = 1
IE = 1
Interrupt request INTyy issued during servicing of interrupt INTxx is not acknowledged because its priority is lower
than that of INTxx, and multiple interrupt servicing does not take place. The INTyy interrupt request is held pending,
and is acknowledged following execution of one main processing instruction.
PR = 0: Higher priority level
PR = 1: Lower priority level
IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgment disabled
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
506
Figure 16-10. Examples of Multiple Interrupt Servicing (2/2)
Example 3. Multiple interrupt servicing does not occur because interrupts are not enabled
Main processing INTxx servicing INTyy servicing
EI
1 instruction execution
RETI
RETI
INTxx
(PR = 0)
INTyy
(PR = 0)
IE = 0
IE = 0
IE = 1
IE = 1
Interrupts are not enabled during servicing of interrupt INTxx (EI instruction is not issued), therefore, interrupt
request INTyy is not acknowledged and multiple interrupt servicing does not take place. The INTyy interrupt request
is held pending, and is acknowledged following execution of one main processing instruction.
PR = 0: Higher priority level
IE = 0: Interrupt request acknowledgement disabled
CHAPTER 16 INTERRUPT FUNCTIONS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 507
16.4.4 Interrupt request hold
There are instructions where, even if an interrupt request is issued for them while another instruction is being
executed, request acknowledgement is held pending until the end of execution of the next instruction. These
instructions (interrupt request hold instructions) are listed below.
• MOV PSW, #byte
• MOV A, PSW
• MOV PSW, A
• MOV1 PSW. bit, CY
• MOV1 CY, PSW. bit
• AND1 CY, PSW. bit
• OR1 CY, PSW. bit
• XOR1 CY, PSW. bit
• SET1 PSW. bit
• CLR1 PSW. bit
• RETB
• RETI
• PUSH PSW
• POP PSW
• BT PSW. bit, $addr16
• BF PSW. bit, $addr16
• BTCLR PSW. bit, $addr16
• EI
• DI
• Manipulation instructions for the IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H, MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H, PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, and
PR1H registers.
Caution The BRK instruction is not one of the above-listed interrupt request hold instructions. However,
the software interrupt activated by executing the BRK instruction causes the IE flag to be
cleared. Therefore, even if a maskable interrupt request is generated during execution of the
BRK instruction, the interrupt request is not acknowledged.
Figure 16-11 shows the timing at which interrupt requests are held pending.
Figure 16-11. Interrupt Request Hold
Instruction N Instruction M PSW and PC saved, jump
to interrupt servicing
Interrupt servicing
program
CPU processing
××IF
Remarks 1. Instruction N: Interrupt request hold instruction
2. Instruction M: Instruction other than interrupt request hold instruction
3. The ××PR (priority level) values do not affect the operation of ××IF (instruction request).
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
508
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
17.1 Standby Function and Configuration
17.1.1 Standby function
The standby function is designed to reduce the operating current of the system. The following two modes are
available.
(1) HALT mode
HALT instruction execution sets the HALT mode. In the HALT mode, the CPU operation clock is stopped. If the
high-speed system clock oscillator, internal high-speed oscillator, internal low-speed oscillator, or subsystem
clock oscillator is operating before the HALT mode is set, oscillation of each clock continues. In this mode, the
operating current is not decreased as much as in the STOP mode, but the HALT mode is effective for restarting
operation immediately upon interrupt request generation and carrying out intermittent operations.
(2) STOP mode
STOP instruction execution sets the STOP mode. In the STOP mode, the high-speed system clock oscillator and
internal high-speed oscillator stop, stopping the whole system, thereby considerably reducing the CPU operating
current.
Because this mode can be cleared by an interrupt request, it enables intermittent operations to be carried out.
However, because a wait time is required to secure the oscillation stabilization time after the STOP mode is
released, select the HALT mode if it is necessary to start processing immediately upon interrupt request
generation.
In either of these two modes, all the contents of registers, flags and data memory just before the standby mode is
set are held. The I/O port output latches and output buffer statuses are also held.
Cautions 1. The STOP mode can be used only when the CPU is operating on the main system clock.
The subsystem clock oscillation cannot be stopped. The HALT mode can be used when the
CPU is operating on either the main system clock or the subsystem clock.
2. When shifting to the STOP mode, be sure to stop the peripheral hardware operation
operating with main system clock before executing STOP instruction.
3. The following sequence is recommended for operating current reduction of the A/D
converter when the standby function is used: First clear bit 7 (ADCS) and bit 0 (ADCE) of
the A/D converter mode register (ADM) to 0 to stop the A/D conversion operation, and then
execute the STOP instruction.
17.1.2 Registers controlling standby function
The standby function is controlled by the following two registers.
• Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)
• Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)
Remark For the registers that start, stop, or select the clock, see CHAPTER 5 CLOCK GENERATOR.
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 509
(1) Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC)
This is the register that indicates the count status of the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time counter. When X1
clock oscillation starts with the internal high-speed oscillation clock or subsystem clock used as the CPU clock,
the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time can be checked.
OSTC can be read by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
When reset is released (reset by RESET input, POC, LVI and WDT), the STOP instruction and MSTOP (bit 7 of
MOC register) = 1 clear OSTC to 00H.
Figure 17-1. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC)
Address: FFA3H After reset: 00H R
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OSTC 0 0 0 MOST11 MOST13 MOST14 MOST15 MOST16
Oscillation stabilization time status
MOST
11
MOST
13
MOST
14
MOST
15
MOST
16 fX = 4 MHz fX = 5 MHz fX = 10 MHz fX = 20 MHz
1 0 0 0 0 211/fX min. 512
μ
s min. 409.6
μ
s min. 204.8
μ
s min. 102.4
μ
s min.
1 1 0 0 0 213/fX min. 2.05 ms min. 1.64 ms min. 819.2
μ
s min. 409.6
μ
s min.
1 1 1 0 0 214/fX min. 4.10 ms min. 3.27 ms min. 1.64 ms min. 819.2
μ
s min.
1 1 1 1 0 215/fX min. 8.19 ms min. 6.55 ms min. 3.27 ms min. 1.64 ms min.
1 1 1 1 1 216/fX min. 16.38 ms min. 13.11 ms min. 6.55 ms min. 3.27 ms min.
Cautions 1. After the above time has elapsed, the bits are set to 1 in order from MOST11 and
remain 1.
2. The oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation stabilization time
set by OSTS. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the internal high-
speed oscillation clock is being used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization
time as follows.
• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time set by
OSTS
Note, therefore, that only the status up to the oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS
is set to OSTC after STOP mode is released.
3. The X1 clock oscillation stabilization time does not include the time until clock
oscillation starts (“a” below).
a
STOP mode release
X1 pin voltage
waveform
Remark f
X: X1 clock oscillation frequency
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
510
(2) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)
This register is used to select the X1 clock oscillation stabilization time when the STOP mode is released. When
the X1 clock is selected as the CPU clock, the operation waits for the time set using OSTS after the STOP mode
is released.
When the internal high-speed oscillation clock is selected as the CPU clock, confirm with OSTC that the desired
oscillation stabilization time has elapsed after the STOP mode is released. The oscillation stabilization time can
be checked up to the time set using OSTC.
OSTS can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets OSTS to 05H.
Figure 17-2. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Select Register (OSTS)
Address: FFA4H After reset: 05H R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
OSTS 0 0 0 0 0 OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0
OSTS2 OSTS1 OSTS0 Oscillation stabilization time selection
fX = 4 MHz fX = 5 MHz fX = 10 MHz fX = 20 MHz
0 0 1 211/fX 512
μ
s 409.6
μ
s 204.8
μ
s 102.4
μ
s
0 1 0 213/fX 2.05 ms 1.64 ms 819.2
μ
s 409.6
μ
s
0 1 1 214/fX 4.10 ms 3.27 ms 1.64 ms 819.2
μ
s
1 0 0 215/fX 8.19 ms 6.55 ms 3.27 ms 1.64 ms
1 0 1 216/fX 16.38 ms 13.11 ms 6.55 ms 3.27 ms
Other than above Setting prohibited
Cautions 1. To set the STOP mode when the X1 clock is used as the CPU clock, set OSTS before
executing the STOP instruction.
2. Do not change the value of the OSTS register during the X1 clock oscillation
stabilization time.
3. The oscillation stabilization time counter counts up to the oscillation stabilization time
set by OSTS. If the STOP mode is entered and then released while the internal high-
speed oscillation clock is being used as the CPU clock, set the oscillation stabilization
time as follows.
• Desired OSTC oscillation stabilization time ≤ Oscillation stabilization time set by
OSTS
Note, therefore, that only the status up to the oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS
is set to OSTC after STOP mode is released.
4. The X1 clock oscillation stabilization time does not include the time until clock
oscillation starts (“a” below).
a
STOP mode release
X1 pin voltage
waveform
Remark fX: X1 clock oscillation frequency
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 511
17.2 Standby Function Operation
17.2.1 HALT mode
(1) HALT mode
The HALT mode is set by executing the HALT instruction. HALT mode can be set regardless of whether the CPU
clock before the setting was the high-speed system clock, internal high-speed oscillation clock, or subsystem
clock.
The operating statuses in the HALT mode are shown below.
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
512
Table 17-1. Operating Statuses in HALT Mode (1/2)
When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Main System Clock HALT Mode Setting
Item
When CPU Is Operating on
Internal High-Speed
Oscillation Clock (fRH)
When CPU Is Operating on
X1 Clock (fX)
When CPU Is Operating on
External Main System Clock
(fEXCLK)
System clock Clock supply to the CPU is stopped
fRH Operation continues (cannot
be stopped)
Status before HALT mode was set is retained
fX Status before HALT mode
was set is retained
Operation continues (cannot
be stopped)
Status before HALT mode
was set is retained
Main system clock
fEXCLK Operates or stops by external clock input Operation continues (cannot
be stopped)
fXT Status before HALT mode was set is retained
Subsystem clock
fEXCLKS Operates or stops by external clock input
fRL Status before HALT mode was set is retained
CPU Operation stopped
Flash memory Operation stopped
RAM Status before HALT mode was set is retained
Port (latch) Status before HALT mode was set is retained
00 16-bit timer/event
counter 01
50 8-bit timer/event
counter 51
H0 8-bit timer
H1
Watch timer
Operable
Watchdog timer Operable. Clock supply to watchdog timer stops when “internal low-speed oscillator can be
stopped by software” is set by option byte.
Clock output
Buzzer output
A/D converter
UART60
UART61
Serial interface
CSI10
CAN controller
Multiplier/divider
Power-on-clear function
Low-voltage detection function
External interrupt
Operable
Remark fRH: Internal high-speed oscillation clock
f
X: X1 clock
f
EXCLK: External main system clock
f
XT: XT1 clock
f
EXCLKS: External subsystem clock
fRL: Internal low-speed oscillation clock
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 513
Table 17-1. Operating Statuses in HALT Mode (2/2)
When HALT Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Subsystem Clock HALT Mode Setting
Item
When CPU Is Operating on XT1 Clock (fXT) When CPU Is Operating on External
Subsystem Clock (fEXCLKS)
System clock Clock supply to the CPU is stopped
fRH
fX
Status before HALT mode was set is retained
Main system clock
fEXCLK Operates or stops by external clock input
fXT Operation continues (cannot be stopped) Status before HALT mode was set is retained
Subsystem clock
fEXCLKS Operates or stops by external clock input Operation continues (cannot be stopped)
fRL Status before HALT mode was set is retained
CPU Operation stopped
Flash memory Operation stopped
RAM Status before HALT mode was set is retained
Port (latch) Status before HALT mode was set is retained
00 Note
16-bit timer/event
counter 01 Note
50 Note
8-bit timer/event
counter 51 Note
H0 8-bit timer
H1
Watch timer
Operable
Watchdog timer Operable. Clock supply to watchdog timer stops when “internal low-speed oscillator can be
stopped by software” is set by option byte.
Clock output Operable
Buzzer output Operable. However, operation disabled when peripheral hardware clock (fPRS) is stopped.
A/D converter
UART60
UART61
Serial interface
CSI10 Note
CAN controller
Multiplier/divider
Power-on-clear function
Low-voltage detection function
External interrupt
Operable
Note When the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the internal high-speed oscillation clock has been
stopped, do not start operation of these functions on the external clock input from peripheral hardware pins.
Remark f
RH: Internal high-speed oscillation clock
f
X: X1 clock
f
EXCLK: External main system clock
f
XT: XT1 clock
f
EXCLKS: External subsystem clock
f
RL: Internal low-speed oscillation clock
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
514
(2) HALT mode release
The HALT mode can be released by the following two sources.
(a) Release by unmasked interrupt request
When an unmasked interrupt request is generated, the HALT mode is released. If interrupt
acknowledgement is enabled, vectored interrupt servicing is carried out. If interrupt acknowledgement is
disabled, the next address instruction is executed.
Figure 17-3. HALT Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation
HALT
instruction
Wait Operating modeHALT modeOperating mode
Oscillation
High-speed system clock,
internal high-speed oscillation clock,
or subsystem clock
Status of CPU
Standby
release signal
Interrupt
request
Note
Note The wait time is as follows:
• When vectored interrupt servicing is carried out: 8 or 9 clocks
• When vectored interrupt servicing is not carried out: 2 or 3 clocks
Remark The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request which has released the standby
mode is acknowledged.
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 515
(b) Release by reset signal generation
When the reset signal is generated, HALT mode is released, and then, as in the case with a normal reset
operation, the program is executed after branching to the reset vector address.
Figure 17-4. HALT Mode Release by Reset
(1) When high-speed system clock is used as CPU clock
HALT
instruction
Reset signal
High-speed
system clock
(X1 oscillation)
HALT mode
Reset
period
Oscillates
Oscillation
stopped
Oscillates
Status of CPU
Normal operation
(high-speed
system clock)
Oscillation stabilization time
(2
11
/f
X
to 2
16
/f
X
)
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Oscillation
stopped
Starting X1 oscillation is
specified by software.
Reset
processing
(11 to 45 s)
μ
(2) When internal high-speed oscillation clock is used as CPU clock
HALT
instruction
Reset signal
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock) HALT mode
Reset
period
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Oscillates
Oscillation
stopped
Oscillates
Status of CPU
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
Reset
processing
(11 to 45 s)
μ
μ
(3) When subsystem clock is used as CPU clock
HALT
instruction
Reset signal
Subsystem clock
(XT1 oscillation)
Normal operation
(subsystem clock) HALT mode
Reset
period
Normal operation mode
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Oscillates
Oscillation
stopped
Oscillates
Status of CPU
Oscillation
stopped
Starting XT1 oscillation is
specified by software.
Reset
processing
(11 to 45 s)
μ
Remark f
X: X1 clock oscillation frequency
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
516
Table 17-2. Operation in Response to Interrupt Request in HALT Mode
Release Source MK×× PR×× IE ISP Operation
0 0 0 × Next address
instruction execution
0 0 1 × Interrupt servicing
execution
0 1 0 1
0 1 × 0
Next address
instruction execution
0 1 1 1
Interrupt servicing
execution
Maskable interrupt
request
1 × × × HALT mode held
Reset signal input − − × × Reset processing
×: don’t care
17.2.2 STOP mode
(1) STOP mode setting and operating statuses
The STOP mode is set by executing the STOP instruction, and it can be set only when the CPU clock before the
setting was the main system clock.
Caution Because the interrupt request signal is used to clear the standby mode, if there is an interrupt
source with the interrupt request flag set and the interrupt mask flag reset, the standby mode
is immediately cleared if set. Thus, the STOP mode is reset to the HALT mode immediately
after execution of the STOP instruction and the system returns to the operating mode as soon
as the wait time set using the oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) has elapsed.
The operating statuses in the STOP mode are shown below.
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 517
Table 17-3. Operating Statuses in STOP Mode
When STOP Instruction Is Executed While CPU Is Operating on Main System Clock STOP Mode Setting
Item
When CPU Is Operating on
Internal High-Speed
Oscillation Clock (fRH)
When CPU Is Operating on
X1 Clock (fX)
When CPU Is Operating on
External Main System Clock
(fEXCLK)
System clock Clock supply to the CPU is stopped
fRH
fX
Stopped
Main system clock
fEXCLK Input invalid
fXT Status before STOP mode was set is retained
Subsystem clock
fEXCLKS Operates or stops by external clock input
fRL Status before STOP mode was set is retained
CPU Operation stopped
Flash memory Operation stopped
RAM Status before STOP mode was set is retained
Port (latch) Status before STOP mode was set is retained
00Note
16-bit timer/event
counter 01Note
Operation stopped
50Note Operable only when TI50 is selected as the count clock
8-bit timer/event
counter 51Note Operable only when TI51 is selected as the count clock
H0 Operable only when TM50 output is selected as the count clock during 8-bit timer/event counter
50 operation
8-bit timer
H1 Operable only when fRL, fRL/27, fRL/29 is selected as the count clock
Watch timer Operable only when subsystem clock is selected as the count clock
Watchdog timer Operable. Clock supply to watchdog timer stops when “internal low-speed oscillator can be
stopped by software” is set by option byte.
Clock output Operable only when subsystem clock is selected as the count clock
Buzzer output Operation stopped
A/D converter
UART60
UART61
Operable only when TM50 output is selected as the serial clock during 8-bit timer/event counter
50 operation
Serial interface
CSI10Note Operable only when external clock is selected as the serial clock
CAN controller Operable. Can be woken up from sleep mode.
Multiplier/divider Operation stopped
Power-on-clear function
Low-voltage detection function
External interrupt
Operable
Note Do not start operation of these functions on the external clock input from peripheral hardware pins in the stop
mode.
(Remark and Cautions are listed on the next page.)
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
518
Remark fRH: Internal high-speed oscillation clock
f
X: X1 clock
fEXCLK: External main system clock
f
XT: XT1 clock
f
EXCLKS: External subsystem clock
fRL: Internal low-speed oscillation clock
Cautions 1. To use the peripheral hardware that stops operation in the STOP mode, and the peripheral
hardware for which the clock that stops oscillating in the STOP mode after the STOP mode is
released, restart the peripheral hardware.
2. Even if “internal low-speed oscillator can be stopped by software” is selected by the option
byte, the internal low-speed oscillator continues in the STOP mode in the status before the
STOP mode is set. To stop the internal low-speed oscillator in the STOP mode, stop it by
software and then execute the STOP instruction.
3. To shorten oscillation stabilization time after the STOP mode is released when the CPU operates
with the high-speed system clock (X1 oscillation), temporarily switch the CPU clock to the
internal high-speed oscillation clock before the next execution of the STOP instruction. Before
changing the CPU clock from the internal high-speed oscillator to the high-speed system clock
(X1 oscillation) after the STOP mode is released, check the oscillation stabilization time with the
oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC).
4. If the STOP instruction is executed when AMPH = 1, supply of the CPU clock is stopped for 4.06
to 16.12
μ
s after the STOP mode is released when the internal high-speed oscillation clock is
selected as the CPU clock, or for the duration of 160 external clocks when the high-speed
system clock (external clock input) is selected as the CPU clock.
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 519
(2) STOP mode release
Figure 17-5. Operation Timing When STOP Mode Is Released
(When Unmasked Interrupt Request Is Generated)
STOP mode
STOP mode release
High-speed system
clock (X1 oscillation)
High-speed system
clock (external clock
input)
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock
High-speed system
clock (X1 oscillation)
is selected as CPU
clock when STOP
instruction is executed
High-speed system
clock (external clock
input) is selected as
CPU clock when STOP
instruction is executed
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock is
selected as CPU clock
when STOP instruction
is executed
Wait for oscillation accuracy
stabilization (86 to 361 s)
μ
HALT status
(oscillation stabilization time set by OSTS)
Clock switched by software
Clock switched by software
High-speed system clock
High-speed system clock
Wait
Note2
Wait
Note2
Supply of the CPU clock is stopped (4.06 to 16.12 s)
Note1
High-speed system clock
μ
Supply of the CPU clock is stopped (160 external clocks)
Note1
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock
Notes 1. When AMPH = 1
2. The wait time is as follows:
• When vectored interrupt servicing is carried out: 8 or 9 clocks
• When vectored interrupt servicing is not carried out: 2 or 3 clocks
The STOP mode can be released by the following two sources.
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
520
(a) Release by unmasked interrupt request
When an unmasked interrupt request is generated, the STOP mode is released. After the oscillation
stabilization time has elapsed, if interrupt acknowledgment is enabled, vectored interrupt servicing is carried
out. If interrupt acknowledgment is disabled, the next address instruction is executed.
Figure 17-6. STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation (1/2)
(1) When high-speed system clock (X1 oscillation) is used as CPU clock
Normal operation
(high-speed
system clock)
Normal operation
(high-speed
system clock)
OscillatesOscillates
STOP
instruction
STOP mode
Wait
(set by OSTS)
Standby release signal
Oscillation stabilization wait
(HALT mode status)
Oscillation stopped
High-speed
system clock
(X1 oscillation)
Status of CPU
Oscillation stabilization time (set by OSTS)
Interrupt
request
(2) When high-speed system clock (external clock input) is used as CPU clock (1/2)
• When AMPH = 1
Interrupt
request
STOP
instruction
Standby release signal
Status of CPU
High-speed
system clock
(external clock input)
Oscillates
Normal operation
(high-speed
system clock) STOP mode
Oscillation stopped Oscillates
Normal operation
(high-speed
system clock)
Wait
Note
Supply of the CPU
clock is stopped
(160 external
clocks)
Note The wait time is as follows:
• When vectored interrupt servicing is carried out: 8 or 9 clocks
• When vectored interrupt servicing is not carried out: 2 or 3 clocks
Remark The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request that has released the standby mode
is acknowledged.
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 521
Figure 17-6. STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation (2/2)
(2) When high-speed system clock (external clock input) is used as CPU clock (2/2)
• When AMPH = 0
Interrupt
request
STOP
instruction
Standby release signal
Status of CPU
High-speed
system clock
(external clock input)
Normal operation
(high-speed
system clock)
Oscillates
STOP mode
Oscillation stopped
Wait
Note
Normal operation
(high-speed
system clock)
Oscillates
(3) When internal high-speed oscillation clock is used as CPU clock
• When AMPH = 1
(4.06 to 16.12 s)
Standby release signal
Status of CPU
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Oscillates
STOP mode
Oscillation stopped
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
μ
Interrupt
request
STOP
instruction
Wait
Note
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Supply of the CPU
clock is stopped
μ
Oscillates
• When AMPH = 0
WaitNote
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
Oscillates
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
STOP mode
Oscillation stopped
Oscillates
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock
Status of CPU
Standby release signal
STOP
instruction
Interrupt
request
μ
Note The wait time is as follows:
• When vectored interrupt servicing is carried out: 8 or 9 clocks
• When vectored interrupt servicing is not carried out: 2 or 3 clocks
Remark The broken lines indicate the case when the interrupt request that has released the standby mode
is acknowledged.
CHAPTER 17 STANDBY FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
522
(b) Release by reset signal generation
When the reset signal is generated, STOP mode is released, and then, as in the case with a normal reset
operation, the program is executed after branching to the reset vector address.
Figure 17-7. STOP Mode Release by Reset Signal Input
(1) When high-speed system clock is used as CPU clock
STOP
instruction
Reset signal
High-speed
system clock
(X1 oscillation)
Normal operation
(high-speed
system clock) STOP mode
Reset
period
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Oscillates
Oscillation
stopped
Oscillates
Status of CPU
Oscillation stabilization time
(2
11
/f
X
to 2
16
/f
X
)
Oscillation
stopped
Starting X1 oscillation is
specified by software.
Oscillation stopped
Reset
processing
(11 to 45 s)
μ
(2) When internal high-speed oscillation clock is used as CPU clock
STOP
instruction
Reset signal
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
STOP mode
Reset
period
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Oscillates
Oscillation
stopped
Status of CPU
Oscillates
Oscillation stopped
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
Reset
processing
(11 to 45 s)
μ
μ
Remark f
X: X1 clock oscillation frequency
Table 17-4. Operation in Response to Interrupt Request in STOP Mode
Release Source MK×× PR×× IE ISP Operation
0 0 0 × Next address
instruction execution
0 0 1 × Interrupt servicing
execution
0 1 0 1
0 1 × 0
Next address
instruction execution
0 1 1 1
Interrupt servicing
execution
Maskable interrupt
request
1 × × × STOP mode held
Reset signal input − − × × Reset processing
×: don’t care
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 523
CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION
The following four operations are available to generate a reset signal.
(1) External reset input via RESET pin
(2) Internal reset by watchdog timer program loop detection
(3) Internal reset by comparison of supply voltage and detection voltage of power-on-clear (POC) circuit
(4) Internal reset by comparison of supply voltage and detection voltage of low-power-supply detector (LVI)
External and internal resets have no functional differences. In both cases, program execution starts at the address
at 0000H and 0001H when the reset signal is generated.
A reset is applied when a low level is input to the RESET pin, the watchdog timer overflows, or by POC and LVI
circuit voltage detection, and each item of hardware is set to the status shown in Tables 18-1 and 18-2. Each pin is
high impedance during reset signal generation or during the oscillation stabilization time just after a reset release,
except for P130, which is low-level output.
When a low level is input to the RESET pin, the device is reset. It is released from the reset status when a high
level is input to the RESET pin and program execution is started with the internal high-speed oscillation clock after
reset processing. A reset by the watchdog timer is automatically released, and program execution starts using the
internal high-speed oscillation clock (see Figures 18-2 to 18-4) after reset processing. Reset by POC and LVI circuit
power supply detection is automatically released when VDD ≥ VPOC or VDD ≥ VLVI after the reset, and program
execution starts using the internal high-speed oscillation clock (see CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT
and CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR) after reset processing.
Cautions 1. For an external reset, input a low level for 10
μ
s or more to the RESET pin.
2. During reset input, the X1 clock, XT1 clock, internal high-speed oscillation clock, and
internal low-speed oscillation clock stop oscillating. External main system clock input and
external subsystem clock input become invalid.
3. When the STOP mode is released by a reset, the STOP mode contents are held during reset
input. However, the port pins become high-impedance, except for P130, which is set to
low-level output.
CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
524
Figure 18-1. Block Diagram of Reset Function
LVIRFWDTRF
Reset control flag
register (RESF)
Internal bus
Watchdog timer reset signal
RESET
Power-on-clear circuit reset signal
Low-voltage detector reset signal Reset signal
Reset signal to LVIM/LVIS register
Clear
Set
Clear
Set
Caution An LVI circuit internal reset does not reset the LVI circuit.
Remarks 1. LVIM: Low-voltage detection register
2. LVIS: Low-voltage detection level selection register
CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 525
Figure 18-2. Timing of Reset by RESET Input
Delay Delay
(5 s (TYP.))
Hi-Z
Normal operationCPU clock Reset period
(oscillation stop)
Normal operation
(internal high-speed oscillation clock)
RESET
Internal reset signal
Port pin
(except P130)
Port pin
(P130) Note
High-speed system clock
(when X1 oscillation is selected)
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock
Starting X1 oscillation is specified by software.
Reset
processing
(11 to 45 s)
μ
μ
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
μ
Note Set P130 to high-level output by software.
Remark When reset is effected, P130 outputs a low level. If P130 is set to output a high level before reset is
effected, the output signal of P130 can be dummy-output as the CPU reset signal.
Figure 18-3. Timing of Reset Due to Watchdog Timer Overflow
Normal operation Reset period
(oscillation stop)
CPU clock
Watchdog timer
overflow
Internal reset signal
Hi-Z
Port pin
(except P130)
Port pin
(P130) Note
High-speed system clock
(when X1 oscillation is selected)
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock
Starting X1 oscillation is specified by software.
Normal operation
(internal high-speed oscillation clock)
Reset
processing
(11 to 45 s)
μ
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
μ
Note Set P130 to high-level output by software.
Caution A watchdog timer internal reset resets the watchdog timer.
Remark When reset is effected, P130 outputs a low level. If P130 is set to output a high level before reset is
effected, the output signal of P130 can be dummy-output as the CPU reset signal.
CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
526
Figure 18-4. Timing of Reset in STOP Mode by RESET Input
Delay
Normal
operation
CPU clock Reset period
(oscillation stop)
RESET
Internal reset signal
STOP instruction execution
Stop status
(oscillation stop)
High-speed system clock
(when X1 oscillation is selected)
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock
Hi-Z
Port pin
(except P130)
Port pin
(P130) Note
Starting X1 oscillation is specified by software.
Normal operation
(internal high-speed oscillation clock)
Reset
processing
(11 to 45 s)
Delay
(5 s (TYP.))
μ
μ
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
μ
Note Set P130 to high-level output by software.
Remarks 1. When reset is effected, P130 outputs a low level. If P130 is set to output a high level before reset is
effected, the output signal of P130 can be dummy-output as the CPU reset signal.
2. For the reset timing of the power-on-clear circuit and low-voltage detector, see CHAPTER 20
POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT and CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR.
CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 527
Table 18-1. Operation Statuses During Reset Period
Item During Reset Period
System clock Clock supply to the CPU is stopped.
fRH Operation stopped
fX Operation stopped (pin is I/O port mode)
Main system clock
fEXCLK Clock input invalid (pin is I/O port mode)
fXT Operation stopped (pin is I/O port mode)
Subsystem clock
fEXCLKS Clock input invalid (pin is I/O port mode)
fRL
CPU
Flash memory
RAM
Operation stopped
Regulator Operable
Port (latch)
00
16-bit timer/event
counter 01
50
8-bit timer/event
counter 51
H0 8-bit timer
H1
Watch timer
Watchdog timer
Clock output
Buzzer output
A/D converter
UART60
UART61
Serial interface
CSI10
CAN controller
Multiplier/divider
Operation stopped
Power-on-clear function Operable
Low-voltage detection function
External interrupt
Operation stopped
Remark fRH: Internal high-speed oscillation clock
fX: X1 oscillation clock
f
EXCLK: External main system clock
f
XT: XT1 oscillation clock
f
EXCLKS: External subsystem clock
f
RL: Internal low-speed oscillation clock
CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
528
Table 18-2. Hardware Statuses After Reset Acknowledgment (1/3)
Hardware After Reset
AcknowledgmentNote 1
Program counter (PC) The contents of the
reset vector table
(0000H, 0001H) are
set.
Stack pointer (SP) Undefined
Program status word (PSW) 02H
Data memory UndefinedNote 2 RAM
General-purpose registers UndefinedNote 2
Port registers (P0, P1, P3, P4, P6 to P9, P12, P13) (output latches) 00H
PM0, PM1, PM3, PM4, PM6 to PM9, PM12 FFH Port mode registers
PM13 FEH
Pull-up resistor option registers (PU0, PU1, PU3, PU4, PU7, PU12, PU13) 00H
Internal expansion RAM size switching register (IXS) 0CHNote 3
Internal memory size switching register (IMS) CFHNote 3
Processor clock control register (PCC) 01H
Clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL) 00H
Internal oscillator mode register (RCM) 00HNote 4
Main clock mode register (MCM) 00H
Main OSC control register (MOC) 80H
Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS) 05H
Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) 00H
Timer counters 00, 01 (TM00, TM01) 0000H
Capture/compare registers 000, 001, 010, 011(CR000, CR001, CR010, CR011) 0000H
Mode control registers 00, 01 (TMC00, TMC01) 00H
Prescaler mode registers 00, 01 (PRM00, PRM01) 00H
Capture/compare control registers 00, 01 (CRC00, CRC01) 00H
16-bit timer/event
counters 00, 01
Timer output control registers 00, 01 (TOC00, TOC01) 00H
Notes 1. During reset signal generation or oscillation stabilization time wait, only the PC contents among the
hardware statuses become undefined. All other hardware statuses remain unchanged after reset.
2. When a reset is executed in the standby mode, the pre-reset status is held even after reset.
3. The initial values of the internal memory size switching register (IMS) and internal expansion RAM size
switching register (IXS) after a reset release are constant (IMS = CFH, IXS = 0CH) in all the 78K0/FC2
products, regardless of the internal memory capacity. Therefore, after a reset is released, be sure to set
the following values for each product.
Flash Memory Version
(78K0/FC2)
IMS IXS
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884 C8H 0AH
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885 CCH 08H
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886 CFH 08H
4. The value of this register is 00H immediately after a reset release but automatically changes to 80H after
internal high-speed oscillation has been stabilized.
CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 529
Table 18-2. Hardware Statuses After Reset Acknowledgment (2/3)
Hardware Status After Reset
Acknowledgment
Timer counters 50, 51 (TM50, TM51) 00H
Compare registers 50, 51 (CR50, CR51) 00H
Timer clock selection registers 50, 51 (TCL50, TCL51) 00H
8-bit timer/event counters
50, 51
Mode control registers 50, 51 (TMC50, TMC51) 00H
Compare registers 00, 10, 01, 11 (CMP00, CMP10, CMP01, CMP11) 00H
Mode registers (TMHMD0, TMHMD1) 00H
8-bit timers H0, H1
Carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)Note 1 00H
Watch timer Operation mode register (WTM) 00H
Clock output/buzzer
output controller
Clock output selection register (CKS) 00H
Watchdog timer Enable register (WDTE) 1AH/9AHNote 2
10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR) 0000H
8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH) 00H
Mode register (ADM) 00H
Analog input channel specification register (ADS) 00H
A/D converter
A/D port configuration register (ADPC) 00H
Receive buffer register 60, 61 (RXB60, RXB61) FFH
Transmit buffer register 60, 61 (TXB60, TXB61) FFH
Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 60, 61 (ASIM60,
ASIM61)
01H
Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 60, 61
(ASIS60, ASIS61)
00H
Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 60, 61 (ASIF60,
ASIF61)
00H
Clock selection register 60, 61 (CKSR60, CKSR61) 00H
Baud rate generator control register 60, 61 (BRGC60, BRGC61) FFH
Asynchronous serial interface control register 60, 61 (ASICL60, ASICL61) 16H
Serial interface UART60,
UART61
Input switch control register (ISC) 00H
Transmit buffer registers 10 (SOTB10) 00H
Serial I/O shift registers 10 (SIO10) 00H
Serial operation mode registers 10 (CSIM10) 00H
Serial interfaces CSI10
Serial clock selection registers 10 (CSIC10) 00H
Notes 1. During reset signal generation or oscillation stabilization time wait, only the PC contents among the
hardware statuses become undefined. All other hardware statuses remain unchanged after reset.
2. 8-bit timer H1 only.
3. The reset value of WDTE is determined by the option byte setting.
CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
530
Table 18-2. Hardware Statuses After Reset Acknowledgment (3/3)
Hardware Status After Reset
Acknowledgment
Remainder data register 0 (SDR0) 0000H
Multiplication/division data register A0 (MDA0H, MDA0L) 0000H
Multiplication/division data register B0 (MDB0) 0000H
Multiplier/divider
Multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0) 00H
Reset function Reset control flag register (RESF) 00HNote
Low-voltage detection register (LVIM) 00HNote Low-voltage detector
Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS) 00HNote
Request flag registers 0L, 0H, 1L, 1H (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H) 00H
Mask flag registers 0L, 0H, 1L, 1H (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H) FFH
Priority specification flag registers 0L, 0H, 1L, 1H (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L,
PR1H)
FFH
External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP) 00H
Interrupt
External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN) 00H
Notes 1. During reset signal generation or oscillation stabilization time wait, only the PC contents among the
hardware statuses become undefined. All other hardware statuses remain unchanged after reset.
2 These values vary depending on the reset source.
Reset Source
Register
RESET Input Reset by POC Reset by WDT Reset by LVI
WDTRF bit Set (1) Held RESF
LVIRF bit
Cleared (0) Cleared (0)
Held Set (1)
LVIM
LVIS
Cleared (00H) Cleared (00H) Cleared (00H) Held
CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 531
18.1 Register for Confirming Reset Source
Many internal reset generation sources exist in the 78K0/FC2. The reset control flag register (RESF) is used to
store which source has generated the reset request.
RESF can be read by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
RESET input, reset input by power-on-clear (POC) circuit, and reading RESF clear RESF to 00H.
Figure 18-5. Format of Reset Control Flag Register (RESF)
Address: FFACH After reset: 00HNote R
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
RESF 0 0 0 WDTRF 0 0 0 LVIRF
WDTRF Internal reset request by watchdog timer (WDT)
0 Internal reset request is not generated, or RESF is cleared.
1 Internal reset request is generated.
LVIRF Internal reset request by low-voltage detector (LVI)
0 Internal reset request is not generated, or RESF is cleared.
1 Internal reset request is generated.
Note The value after reset varies depending on the reset source.
Caution Do not read data by a 1-bit memory manipulation instruction.
The status of RESF when a reset request is generated is shown in Table 18-3.
Table 18-3. RESF Status When Reset Request Is Generated
Reset Source
Flag
RESET Input Reset by POC Reset by WDT Reset by LVI
WDTRF Set (1) Held
LVIRF
Cleared (0) Cleared (0)
Held Set (1)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
532
CHAPTER 19 MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER
19.1 Functions of Multiplier/Divider
The multiplier/divider has the following functions.
• 16 bits × 16 bits = 32 bits (multiplication)
• 32 bits ÷ 16 bits = 32 bits, 16-bit remainder (division)
19.2 Configuration of Multiplier/Divider
The multiplier/divider includes the following hardware.
Table 19-1. Configuration of Multiplier/Divider
Item Configuration
Registers Remainder data register 0 (SDR0)
Multiplication/division data registers A0 (MDA0H, MDA0L)
Multiplication/division data registers B0 (MDB0)
Control register Multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0)
Figure 19-1 shows the block diagram of the multiplier/divider.
CHAPTER 19 MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 533
Figure 19-1. Block Diagram of Multiplier/Divider
Internal bus
CPU clock
Start
Clear
17-bit
adder
Controller
Multiplication/division data register B0
(MDB0 (MDB0H + MDB0L)
Remainder data register 0
(SDR0 (SDR0H + SDR0L)
6-bit
counter
DMUSEL0
Multiplier/divider control
register 0 (DMUC0)
Controller
Multiplication/division data register A0
(
MDA0H (MDA0HH + MDA0HL) + MDA0L (MDA0LH + MDA0LL)
)
Controller
DMUE
MDA000 INTDMU
CHAPTER 19 MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
534
(1) Remainder data register 0 (SDR0)
SDR0 is a 16-bit register that stores a remainder. This register stores 0 in the multiplication mode and the
remainder of an operation result in the division mode.
SDR0 can be read by an 8-bit or 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears SDR0 to 0000H.
Figure 19-2. Format of Remainder Data Register 0 (SDR0)
Address: FF44H, FF45H After reset: 0000H R
Symbol FF45H (SDR0H) FF44H (SDR0L)
SDR0 SDR
015
SDR
014
SDR
013
SDR
012
SDR
011
SDR
010
SDR
009
SDR
008
SDR
007
SDR
006
SDR
005
SDR
004
SDR
003
SDR
002
SDR
001
SDR
000
Cautions 1. The value read from SDR0 during operation processing (while bit 7 (DMUE) of
multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0) is 1) is not guaranteed.
2. SDR0 is reset when the operation is started (when DMUE is set to 1).
(2) Multiplication/division data register A0 (MDA0H, MDA0L)
MDA0 is a 32-bit register that sets a 16-bit multiplier A in the multiplication mode and a 32-bit dividend in the
division mode, and stores the 32-bit result of the operation (higher 16 bits: MDA0H, lower 16 bits: MDA0L).
Figure 19-3. Format of Multiplication/Division Data Register A0 (MDA0H, MDA0L)
Address: FF4AH, FF4BH, FF4CH, FF4DH After reset: 0000H, 0000H R/W
Symbol FF4DH (MDA0HH) FF4CH (MDA0HL)
MDA0H MDA
031
MDA
030
MDA
029
MDA
028
MDA
027
MDA
026
MDA
025
MDA
024
MDA
023
MDA
022
MDA
021
MDA
020
MDA
019
MDA
018
MDA
017
MDA
016
Symbol FF4BH (MDA0LH) FF4AH (MDA0LL)
MDA0L MDA
015
MDA
014
MDA
013
MDA
012
MDA
011
MDA
010
MDA
009
MDA
008
MDA
007
MDA
006
MDA
005
MDA
004
MDA
003
MDA
002
MDA
001
MDA
000
Cautions 1. MDA0H is cleared to 0 when an operation is started in the multiplication mode (when
multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0) is set to 81H).
2. Do not change the value of MDA0 during operation processing (while bit 7 (DMUE) of
multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0) is 1). Even in this case, the operation is
executed, but the result is undefined.
3. The value read from MDA0 during operation processing (while DMUE is 1) is not guaranteed.
CHAPTER 19 MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 535
The functions of MDA0 when an operation is executed are shown in the table below.
Table 19-2. Functions of MDA0 During Operation Execution
DMUSEL0 Operation Mode Setting Operation Result
0 Division mode Dividend Division result (quotient)
1 Multiplication mode Higher 16 bits: 0, Lower 16
bits: Multiplier A
Multiplication result
(product)
The register configuration differs between when multiplication is executed and when division is executed, as
follows.
• Register configuration during multiplication
<Multiplier A> <Multiplier B> <Product>
MDA0 (bits 15 to 0) × MDB0 (bits 15 to 0) = MDA0 (bits 31 to 0)
• Register configuration during division
<Dividend> <Divisor> <Quotient> <Remainder>
MDA0 (bits 31 to 0) ÷ MDB0 (bits 15 to 0) = MDA0 (bits 31 to 0) … SDR0 (bits 15 to 0)
MDA0 fetches the calculation result as soon as the clock is input, when bit 7 (DMUE) of multiplier/divider
control register 0 (DMUC0) is set to 1.
MDA0H and MDA0L can be set by an 8-bit or 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears MDA0H and MDA0L to 0000H.
(3) Multiplication/division data register B0 (MDB0)
MDB0 is a register that stores a 16-bit multiplier B in the multiplication mode and a 16-bit divisor in the
division mode.
MDB0 can be set by an 8-bit or 16-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears MDB0 to 0000H.
Figure 19-4. Format of Multiplication/Division Data Register B0 (MDB0)
Address: FFAEH, FFAFH After reset: 0000H R/W
Symbol FFAFH (MDB0H) FFAEH (MDB0L)
MDB0 MDB
015
MDB
014
MDB
013
MDB
012
MDB
011
MDB
010
MDB
009
MDB
008
MDB
007
MDB
006
MDB
005
MDB
004
MDB
003
MDB
002
MDB
001
MDB
000
Cautions 1. Do not change the value of MDB0 during operation processing (while bit 7 (DMUE) of
multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0) is 1). Even in this case, the operation is
executed, but the result is undefined.
2. Do not clear MDB0 to 0000H in the division mode. If set, undefined operation results are
stored in MDA0 and SDR0.
CHAPTER 19 MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
536
19.3 Register Controlling Multiplier/Divider
The multiplier/divider is controlled by multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0).
(1) Multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0)
DMUC0 is an 8-bit register that controls the operation of the multiplier/divider.
DMUC0 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears DMUC0 to 00H.
Figure 19-5. Format of Multiplier/Divider Control Register 0 (DMUC0)
DMUE
DMUC0 0 0 0 0 0 0 DMUSEL0
Stops operation
Starts operation
DMUE
Note
0
1
Operation start/stop
Division mode
Multiplication mode
DMUSEL0
0
1
Operation mode (multiplication/division) selection
Address: FF42H After reset: 00H R/W
Symbol 4 3 2 1 06<7> 5
Note When DMUE is set to 1, the operation is started. DMUE is automatically cleared to 0 after the operation is
complete.
Cautions 1. If DMUE is cleared to 0 during operation processing (when DMUE is 1), the operation result
is not guaranteed. If the operation is completed while the clearing instruction is being
executed, the operation result is guaranteed, provided that the interrupt flag is set.
2. Do not change the value of DMUSEL0 during operation processing (while DMUE is 1). If it is
changed, undefined operation results are stored in multiplication/division data register A0
(MDA0) and remainder data register 0 (SDR0).
3. If DMUE is cleared to 0 during operation processing (while DMUE is 1), the operation
processing is stopped. To execute the operation again, set multiplication/division data
register A0 (MDA0), multiplication/division data register B0 (MDB0), and multiplier/divider
control register 0 (DMUC0), and start the operation (by setting DMUE to 1).
CHAPTER 19 MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 537
19.4 Operations of Multiplier/Divider
19.4.1 Multiplication operation
• Initial setting
1. Set operation data to multiplication/division data register A0L (MDA0L) and multiplication/division data register
B0 (MDB0).
2. Set bits 0 (DMUSEL0) and 7 (DMUE) of multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0) to 1. Operation will start.
• During operation
3. The operation will be completed when 16 internal clocks have been issued after the start of the operation
(intermediate data is stored in the MDA0L and MDA0H registers during operation, and therefore the read
values of these registers are not guaranteed).
• End of operation
4. The operation result data is stored in the MDA0L and MDA0H registers.
5. DMUE is cleared to 0 (end of operation).
6. After the operation, an interrupt request signal (INTDMU) is generated.
• Next operation
7. To execute multiplication next, start from the initial setting in 19.4.1 Multiplication operation.
8. To execute division next, start from the initial setting in 19.4.2 Division operation.
CHAPTER 19 MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
538
Figure 19-6. Timing Chart of Multiplication Operation (00DAH × 0093H)
Operation clock
MDA0
SDR0
MDB0
1 2 3456789ABCD E F 10
0 0
0000
0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000
0000
0000
006D
0000
00DA
XXXX
00DA
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
0049
8036 0024
C01B 005B
E00D 0077
7006 003B
B803 0067
5C01 007D
2E00 003E
9700 001F
4B80 000F
A5C0 0007
D2E0 0003
E970 0001
F4B8 0000
FA5C
0000
7D2E
0093
XXXX
Internal clock
DMUE
DMUSEL0
Counter
INTDMU
CHAPTER 19 MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 539
19.4.2 Division operation
• Initial setting
1. Set operation data to multiplication/division data register A0 (MDA0L and MDA0H) and multiplication/division
data register B0 (MDB0).
2. Set bits 0 (DMUSEL0) and 7 (DMUE) of multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0) to 0 and 1, respectively.
Operation will start.
• During operation
3. The operation will be completed when 32 internal clocks have been issued after the start of the operation
(intermediate data is stored in the MDA0L and MDA0H registers and remainder data register 0 (SDR0) during
operation, and therefore the read values of these registers are not guaranteed).
• End of operation
4. The result data is stored in the MDA0L, MDA0H, and SDR0 registers.
5. DMUE is cleared to 0 (end of operation).
6. After the operation, an interrupt request signal (INTDMU) is generated.
• Next operation
7. To execute multiplication next, start from the initial setting in 19.4.1 Multiplication operation.
8. To execute division next, start from the initial setting in 19.4.2 Division operation.
CHAPTER 19 MULTIPLIER/DIVIDER
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
540
Figure 19-7. Timing Chart of Division Operation (DCBA2586H ÷ 0018H)
Operation clock
MDA0
SDR0
MDB0
12345678 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 200 0
0000
0001 0003 0006 000D 0003 0007 000E 0004 000B 0016 0014 0010 0008 0011 000B
0016
B974
4B0C
DCBA
2586
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
72E8
A618 E5D1
2C30 CBA2
6860 A744
BAC1 2E89
6182 6D12
C304 BA25
8609 0C12
64D8 1824
C9B0 3049
9361 6093
26C3 C126
4D87 824C
9B0E 0499
361D
0932
6C3A
0018
XXXX
Internal clock
DMUE
DMUSEL0
Counter
INTDMU
“0”
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 541
CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT
20.1 Functions of Power-on-Clear Circuit
The power-on-clear circuit (POC) has the following functions.
• Generates internal reset signal at power on.
In the 1.59 V POC mode (option byte: LVISTART = 0), the reset signal is released when the supply voltage
(VDD) exceeds 1.59 V ±0.15 V.
In the 2.7 V/1.59 V POC mode (option byte: LVISTART = 1), the reset signal is released when the supply
voltage (VDD) exceeds 2.7 V ±0.2 V.
• Compares supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VPOC = 1.59 V ±0.15 V), generates internal reset signal
when VDD < VPOC.
Caution If an internal reset signal is generated in the POC circuit, the reset control flag register (RESF)
is cleared to 00H.
Remark The 78K0/FC2 incorporates multiple hardware functions that generate an internal reset signal. A flag
that indicates the reset cause is located in the reset control flag register (RESF) for when an internal
reset signal is generated by the watchdog timer (WDT) or low-voltage-detector (LVI). RESF is not
cleared to 00H and the flag is set to 1 when an internal reset signal is generated by WDT or LVI. For
details of RESF, see CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION.
CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
542
20.2 Configuration of Power-on-Clear Circuit
The block diagram of the power-on-clear circuit is shown in Figure 20-1.
Figure 20-1. Block Diagram of Power-on-Clear Circuit
−
+
Reference
voltage
source
Internal reset signal
VDD
VDD
20.3 Operation of Power-on-Clear Circuit
(1) In 1.59 V POC mode (option byte: LVISTART = 0)
• An internal reset signal is generated on power application. When the supply voltage (VDD) exceeds the
detection voltage (VPOC = 1.59 V ±0.15 V), the reset status is released.
• The supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VPOC = 1.59 V ±0.15 V) are compared. When VDD < VPOC, the
internal reset signal is generated. It is released when VDD ≥ VPOC.
(2) In 2.7 V/1.59 V POC mode (option byte: LVISTART = 1)
• An internal reset signal is generated on power application. When the supply voltage (VDD) exceeds the
detection voltage (VDDPOC = 2.7 V ±0.2 V), the reset status is released.
• The supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VPOC = 1.59 V ±0.15 V) are compared. When VDD < VPOC, the
internal reset signal is generated. It is released when VDD ≥ VDDPOC.
The timing of generation of the internal reset signal by the power-on-clear circuit and low-voltage detector is
shown below.
CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 543
Figure 20-2. Timing of Generation of Internal Reset Signal by Power-on-Clear Circuit
and Low-Voltage Detector (1/2)
(1) In 1.59 V POC mode (option byte: LVISTART = 0)
Note 3 Note 3
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock (f
RH
)
High-speed
system clock (f
XH
)
(when X1 oscillation
is selected)
Starting oscillation is
specified by software.
V
POC
= 1.59 V (TYP.)
V
LVI
Operation
stops
Wait for voltage
stabilization
(1.93 to 5.39 ms)
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Note 4
Operation stops
Reset period
(oscillation
stop)
Reset period
(oscillation
stop)
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Note 4
Starting oscillation is
specified by software. Starting oscillation is
specified by software.
CPU
0 V
Supply voltage
(VDD)
1.8 V
Note 1
Wait for voltage
stabilization
(1.93 to 5.39 ms)
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Note 4
0.5 V/ms (MIN.)
Note 2
Set LVI to be
used for reset
Set LVI to be
used for reset
Set LVI to be
used for interrupt
Internal reset signal
Reset processing (11 to 45 s)
μ
Reset processing (11 to 45 s)
μ
Reset processing (11 to 45 s)
μ
μ
Notes 1. The operation guaranteed range is 1.8 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V. To make the state at lower than 1.8 V reset
state when the supply voltage falls, use the reset function of the low-voltage detector, or input the low
level to the RESET pin.
2. If the voltage rises to 1.8 V at a rate slower than 0.5 V/ms (MIN.) on power application, input a low level
to the RESET pin after power application and before the voltage reaches 1.8 V, or set the 2.7 V/1.59 V
POC mode by using an option byte (LVISTART = 1).
3. The internal voltage stabilization time includes the oscillation accuracy stabilization time of the internal
high-speed oscillation clock.
4. The internal high-speed oscillation clock and a high-speed system clock or subsystem clock can be
selected as the CPU clock. To use the X1 clock, use the OSTC register to confirm the lapse of the
oscillation stabilization time. To use the XT1 clock, use the timer function for confirmation of the lapse
of the stabilization time.
Caution Set the low-voltage detector by software after the reset status is released (see CHAPTER 21
LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR).
Remark V
LVI : LVI detection voltage
VPOC : POC detection voltage
CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
544
Figure 20-2. Timing of Generation of Internal Reset Signal by Power-on-Clear Circuit
and Low-Voltage Detector (2/2)
(2) In 2.7 V / 1.59 V POC mode (option byte: LVISTART = 1)
Internal high-speed
oscillation clock (f
RH
)
High-speed
system clock (f
XH
)
(when X1 oscillation
is selected)
Starting oscillation is
specified by software.
Internal reset signal
VDDPOC = 2.7 V (TYP.)
V
POC
= 1.59 V (TYP.)
V
LVI
Operation
stops
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Note 2
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Note 2
Operation stops
Reset period
(oscillation
stop)
Reset period
(oscillation
stop)
Normal operation
(internal high-speed
oscillation clock)
Note 2
Starting oscillation is
specified by software.
Starting oscillation is
specified by software.
CPU
0 V
Supply voltage
(VDD)
1.8 V
Note 1
Reset processing (11 to 45 s)
μ
Reset processing (11 to 45 s)
μ
Reset processing (11 to 45 s)
μ
Set LVI to be
used for reset
Set LVI to be
used for reset
Set LVI to be
used for interrupt
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
μ
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
μ
Wait for oscillation
accuracy stabilization
(86 to 361 s)
μ
Notes 1. The operation guaranteed range is 1.8 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V. To make the state at lower than 1.8 V reset
state when the supply voltage falls, use the reset function of the low-voltage detector, or input the low
level to the RESET pin.
2. The internal high-speed oscillation clock and a high-speed system clock or subsystem clock can be
selected as the CPU clock. To use the X1 clock, use the OSTC register to confirm the lapse of the
oscillation stabilization time. To use the XT1 clock, use the timer function for confirmation of the lapse
of the stabilization time.
Cautions 1. Set the low-voltage detector by software after the reset status is released (see CHAPTER 21
LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR).
2. A voltage oscillation stabilization time of 1.93 to 5.39 ms is required after the supply voltage
reaches 1.59 V (TYP.). If the supply voltage rises from 1.59 V (TYP.) to 2.7 V (TYP.) within 1.93
ms, the power supply oscillation stabilization time of 0 to 5.39 ms is automatically generated
before reset processing.
Remark V
LVI : LVI detection voltage
VPOC : POC detection voltage
CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 545
20.4 Cautions for Power-on-Clear Circuit
In a system where the supply voltage (VDD) fluctuates for a certain period in the vicinity of the POC detection
voltage (VPOC), the system may be repeatedly reset and released from the reset status. In this case, the time from
release of reset to the start of the operation of the microcontroller can be arbitrarily set by taking the following action.
<Action>
After releasing the reset signal, wait for the supply voltage fluctuation period of each system by means of a
software counter that uses a timer, and then initialize the ports.
Figure 20-3. Example of Software Processing After Reset Release (1/2)
• If supply voltage fluctuation is 50 ms or less in vicinity of POC detection voltage
;Check the reset sourceNote 2
Initialize the port.
Note 1
Reset
Initialization
processing <1>
50 ms has passed?
(TMIFH1 = 1?)
Initialization
processing <2>
Setting 8-bit timer H1
(to measure 50 ms)
; Setting of division ratio of system clock,
such as setting of timer or A/D converter
Yes
No
Power-on-clear
Clearing WDT
;f
PRS = Internal high-speed oscillation clock (8.4 MHz (MAX.)) (default)
Source: fPRS (8.4 MHz (MAX.))/212,
where comparison value = 102: ≅ 50 ms
Timer starts (TMHE1 = 1).
Notes 1. If reset is generated again during this period, initialization processing <2> is not started.
2. A flowchart is shown on the next page.
CHAPTER 20 POWER-ON-CLEAR CIRCUIT
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
546
Figure 20-3. Example of Software Processing After Release of Reset (2/2)
• Checking reset cause
Yes
No
Check reset cause
Power-on-clear/external
reset generated
Reset processing by
watchdog timer
Reset processing by
low-voltage detector
No
WDTRF of RESF
register = 1?
LVIRF of RESF
register = 1?
Yes
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 547
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
21.1 Functions of Low-Voltage Detector
The low-voltage detector (LVI) has the following functions.
• The LVI circuit compares the supply voltage (VDD) with the detection voltage (VLVI) or the input voltage from an
external input pin (EXLVI) with the detection voltage (VEXLVI = 1.21 V (TYP.): fixed), and generates an internal
reset or internal interrupt signal.
• The supply voltage (VDD) or input voltage from an external input pin (EXLVI) can be selected by software.
• Reset or interrupt function can be selected by software.
• Detection levels (16 levels) of supply voltage can be changed by software.
• Operable in STOP mode.
The reset and interrupt signals are generated as follows depending on selection by software.
Selection of Level Detection of Supply Voltage (VDD)
(LVISEL = 0)
Selection Level Detection of Input Voltage from
External Input Pin (EXLVI) (LVISEL = 1)
Selects reset (LVIMD = 1). Selects interrupt (LVIMD = 0). Selects reset (LVIMD = 1). Selects interrupt (LVIMD = 0).
Generates an internal reset
signal when VDD < VLVI and
releases the reset signal when
VDD ≥ VLVI.
Generates an internal interrupt
signal when VDD drops lower
than VLVI (VDD < VLVI) or when
VDD becomes VLVI or higher
(VDD ≥ VLVI).
Generates an internal reset
signal when EXLVI < VEXLVI
and releases the reset signal
when EXLVI ≥ VEXLVI.
Generates an internal interrupt
signal when EXLVI drops
lower than VEXLVI (EXLVI <
VEXLVI) or when EXLVI
becomes VEXLVI or higher
(EXLVI ≥ VEXLVI).
Remark LVISEL: Bit 2 of low-voltage detection register (LVIM)
LVIMD: Bit 1 of LVIM
While the low-voltage detector is operating, whether the supply voltage or the input voltage from an external input
pin is more than or less than the detection level can be checked by reading the low-voltage detection flag (LVIF: bit 0
of LVIM).
When the low-voltage detector is used to reset, bit 0 (LVIRF) of the reset control flag register (RESF) is set to 1 if
reset occurs. For details of RESF, see CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION.
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
548
21.2 Configuration of Low-Voltage Detector
The block diagram of the low-voltage detector is shown in Figure 21-1.
Figure 21-1. Block Diagram of Low-Voltage Detector
LVIS1 LVIS0 LVION
−
+
Reference
voltage
source
VDD
Internal bus
N-ch
Low-voltage detection level
selection register (LVIS)
Low-voltage detection register
(LVIM)
LVIS2
LVIS3 LVIF
INTLVI
Internal reset signal
4
LVISEL
EXLVI/P120/
INTP0
LVIMD
VDD
Low-voltage detection
level selector
Selector
Selector
21.3 Registers Controlling Low-Voltage Detector
The low-voltage detector is controlled by the following registers.
• Low-voltage detection register (LVIM)
• Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS)
• Port mode register 12 (PM12)
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 549
(1) Low-voltage detection register (LVIM)
This register sets low-voltage detection and the operation mode.
This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears LVIM to 00H.
Figure 21-2. Format of Low-Voltage Detection Register (LVIM)
<0>
LVIF
<1>
LVIMD
<2>
LVISEL
3
0
4
0
5
0
6
0
<7>
LVION
Symbol
LVIM
Address: FFBEH After reset: 00H R/W
Note 1
LVIONNotes 2, 3 Enables low-voltage detection operation
0 Disables operation
1 Enables operation
LVISELNote 2 Voltage detection selection
0 Detects level of supply voltage (VDD)
1 Detects level of input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI)
LVIMDNote 2 Low-voltage detection operation mode (interrupt/reset) selection
0 • LVISEL = 0: Generates an internal interrupt signal when the supply voltage (VDD) drops
lower than the detection voltage (VLVI) (VDD < VLVI) or when VDD becomes
VLVI or higher (VDD ≥ VLVI).
• LVISEL = 1: Generates an interrupt signal when the input voltage from an external
input pin (EXLVI) drops lower than the detection voltage (VEXLVI) (EXLVI <
VEXLVI) or when EXLVI becomes VEXLVI or higher (EXLVI ≥ VEXLVI).
1 • LVISEL = 0: Generates an internal reset signal when the supply voltage (VDD) <
detection voltage (VLVI) and releases the reset signal when VDD ≥ VLVI.
• LVISEL = 1: Generates an internal reset signal when the input voltage from an
external input pin (EXLVI) < detection voltage (VEXLVI) and releases the
reset signal when EXLVI ≥ VEXLVI.
LVIFNote 4 Low-voltage detection flag
0 • LVISEL = 0: Supply voltage (VDD) ≥ detection voltage (VLVI), or when operation is
disabled
• LVISEL = 1: Input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) ≥ detection voltage (VEXLVI),
or when operation is disabled
1 • LVISEL = 0: Supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI)
• LVISEL = 1: Input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) < detection voltage (VEXLVI)
Notes 1. Bit 0 is read-only.
2. LVION, LVIMD, and LVISEL are cleared to 0 in the case of a reset other than an LVI reset.
These are not cleared to 0 in the case of an LVI reset.
3. When LVION is set to 1, operation of the comparator in the LVI circuit is started. Use
software to wait for an operation stabilization time and minimum pulse width (10
μ
s (MAX.))
when LVION is set to 1 until the voltage is confirmed at LVIF.
4. The value of LVIF is output as the interrupt request signal INTLVI when LVION = 1 and
LVIMD = 0.
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
550
Cautions 1. To stop LVI, follow either of the procedures below.
• When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction: Write 00H to LVIM.
• When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction: Clear LVION to 0.
2. Input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) must be EXLVI < VDD.
(2) Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS)
This register selects the low-voltage detection level.
This register can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears LVIS to 00H.
Figure 21-3. Format of Low-Voltage Detection Level Selection Register (LVIS)
0
LVIS0
1
LVIS1
2
LVIS2
3
LVIS3
4
0
5
0
6
0
7
0
Symbol
LVIS
Address: FFBFH After reset: 00H R/W
LVIS3 LVIS2 LVIS1 LVIS0 Detection level
0 0 0 0 VLVI0 (4.24 V ±0.1 V)
0 0 0 1 VLVI1 (4.09 V ±0.1 V)
0 0 1 0 VLVI2 (3.93 V ±0.1 V)
0 0 1 1 VLVI3 (3.78 V ±0.1 V)
0 1 0 0 VLVI4 (3.62 V ±0.1 V)
0 1 0 1 VLVI5 (3.47 V ±0.1 V)
0 1 1 0 VLVI6 (3.32 V ±0.1 V)
0 1 1 1 VLVI7 (3.16 V ±0.1 V)
1 0 0 0 VLVI8 (3.01 V ±0.1 V)
1 0 0 1 VLVI9 (2.85 V ±0.1 V)
1 0 1 0 VLVI10 (2.70 V ±0.1 V)
1 0 1 1 VLVI11 (2.55 V ±0.1 V)
1 1 0 0 VLVI12 (2.39 V ±0.1 V)
1 1 0 1 VLVI13 (2.24 V ±0.1 V)
1 1 1 0 VLVI14 (2.08 V ±0.1 V)
1 1 1 1 VLVI15 (1.93 V ±0.1 V)
Cautions 1. Be sure to clear bits 4 to 7 to 0.
2. Do not change the value of LVIS during LVI operation.
3. When an input voltage from the external input pin (EXLVI) is detected, the detection
voltage (VEXLVI = 1.21 V (TYP.)) is fixed. Therefore, setting of LVIS is not necessary.
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 551
(3) Port mode register 12 (PM12)
When using the P120/EXLVI/INTP0 pin for external low-voltage detection potential input, set PM120 to 1. At this
time, the output latch of P120 may be 0 or 1.
PM12 can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets PM12 to FFH.
Figure 21-4. Format of Port Mode Register 12 (PM12)
0
PM120
1
PM121
2
PM122
3
PM123
4
PM124
5
1
6
1
7
1
Symbol
PM12
Address: FF2CH After reset: FFH R/W
PM12n P12n pin I/O mode selection (n = 0 to 4)
0 Output mode (output buffer on)
1 Input mode (output buffer off)
21.4 Operation of Low-Voltage Detector
The low-voltage detector can be used in the following two modes.
(1) Used as reset (LVIMD = 1)
• If LVISEL = 0, compares the supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VLVI), generates an internal reset
signal when VDD < VLVI, and releases internal reset when VDD ≥ VLVI.
• If LVISEL = 1, compares the input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) and detection voltage (VEXLVI = 1.21
V (TYP.)), generates an internal reset signal when EXLVI < VEXLVI, and releases internal reset when EXLVI ≥
VEXLVI.
(2) Used as interrupt (LVIMD = 0)
• If LVISEL = 0, compares the supply voltage (VDD) and detection voltage (VLVI). When VDD drops lower than
VLVI (VDD < VLVI) or when VDD becomes VLVI or higher (VDD ≥ VLVI), generates an interrupt signal (INTLVI).
• If LVISEL = 1, compares the input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) and detection voltage (VEXLVI = 1.21
V (TYP.)). When EXLVI drops lower than VEXLVI (EXLVI < VEXLVI) or when EXLVI becomes VEXLVI or higher
(EXLVI ≥ VEXLVI), generates an interrupt signal (INTLVI).
While the low-voltage detector is operating, whether the supply voltage or the input voltage from an external input
pin is more than or less than the detection level can be checked by reading the low-voltage detection flag (LVIF: bit 0
of LVIM).
Remark LVIMD: Bit 1 of low-voltage detection register (LVIM)
LVISEL: Bit 2 of LVIM
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
552
21.4.1 When used as reset
(1) When detecting level of supply voltage (VDD)
• When starting operation
<1> Mask the LVI interrupt (LVIMK = 1).
<2> Clear bit 2 (LVISEL) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) to 0 (detects level of supply voltage
(VDD)) (default value).
<3> Set the detection voltage using bits 3 to 0 (LVIS3 to LVIS0) of the low-voltage detection level selection
register (LVIS).
<4> Set bit 7 (LVION) of LVIM to 1 (enables LVI operation).
<5> Use software to wait for an operation stabilization time and minimum pulse width (10
μ
s (MAX.)).
<6> Wait until it is checked that (supply voltage (VDD) ≥ detection voltage (VLVI)) by bit 0 (LVIF) of LVIM.
<7> Set bit 1 (LVIMD) of LVIM to 1 (generates reset when the level is detected).
Figure 21-5 shows the timing of the internal reset signal generated by the low-voltage detector. The numbers
in this timing chart correspond to <1> to <7> above.
Cautions 1. <1> must always be executed. When LVIMK = 0, an interrupt may occur immediately
after the processing in <4>.
2. If supply voltage (VDD) ≥ detection voltage (VLVI) when LVIMD is set to 1, an internal
reset signal is not generated.
• When stopping operation
Either of the following procedures must be executed.
• When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction:
Write 00H to LVIM.
• When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction:
Clear LVIMD to 0 and then LVION to 0.
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 553
Figure 21-5. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Internal Reset Signal Generation
(Detects Level of Supply Voltage (VDD)) (1/2)
(1) In 1.59 V POC mode (option byte: LVISTART = 0)
Supply voltage (V
DD
)
<3>
<1>
Time
LVIMK flag
(set by software)
LVIF flag
LVIRF flag
Note 3
Note2
LVI reset signal
POC reset signal
Internalreset signal
Cleared by
software
Not cleared
Cleared by
software
<4>
<7>
Clear
Clear
Clear
<5>Wait time
LVION flag
(set by software)
LVIMD flag
(set by software)
H
Note1
L
LVISEL flag
(set by software)
<6>
<2>
V
LVI
V
POC
= 1.59 V (TYP.)
Not clearedNot cleared
Not cleared
Notes 1. The LVIMK flag is set to “1” by reset signal generation.
2. The LVIF flag may be set (1).
3. LVIRF is bit 0 of the reset control flag register (RESF). For details of RESF, see CHAPTER 18
RESET FUNCTION.
Remark <1> to <7> in Figure 21-5 above correspond to <1> to <7> in the description of “When starting
operation” in 21.4.1 (1) When detecting level of supply voltage (VDD).
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
554
Figure 21-5. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Internal Reset Signal Generation
(Detects Level of Supply Voltage (VDD)) (2/2)
(2) In 2.7/1.59 V POC mode (option byte: LVISTART = 1)
Supply voltage (V
DD
)
V
LVI
<3>
<1>
Time
LVIMK flag
(set by software)
LVIF flag
LVIRF flag
Note 3
Note 2
LVI reset signal
POC reset signal
Internal reset signal
Cleared by
software
Not cleared Not cleared
Not cleared Not cleared
Cleared by
software
<4>
<7>
Clear
Clear
Clear
<5>
Wait time
LVION flag
(set by software)
LVIMD flag
(set by software)
H
Note 1
L
LVISEL flag
(set by software)
<6>
<2>
2.7 V (TYP.)
V
POC
= 1.59 V (TYP.)
Notes 1. The LVIMK flag is set to “1” by reset signal generation.
2. The LVIF flag may be set (1).
3. LVIRF is bit 0 of the reset control flag register (RESF). For details of RESF, see CHAPTER 18
RESET FUNCTION.
Remark <1> to <7> in Figure 21-5 above correspond to <1> to <7> in the description of “When starting
operation” in 21.4.1 (1) When detecting level of supply voltage (VDD).
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 555
(2) When detecting level of input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI)
• When starting operation
<1> Mask the LVI interrupt (LVIMK = 1).
<2> Set bit 2 (LVISEL) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) to 1 (detects level of input voltage from
external input pin (EXLVI)).
<3> Set bit 7 (LVION) of LVIM to 1 (enables LVI operation).
<4> Use software to wait for an operation stabilization time and minimum pulse width (10
μ
s (MAX.)).
<5> Wait until it is checked that (input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) ≥ detection voltage (VEXLVI =
1.21 V (TYP.))) by bit 0 (LVIF) of LVIM.
<6> Set bit 1 (LVIMD) of LVIM to 1 (generates reset signal when the level is detected).
Figure 21-6 shows the timing of the internal reset signal generated by the low-voltage detector. The numbers
in this timing chart correspond to <1> to <6> above.
Cautions 1. <1> must always be executed. When LVIMK = 0, an interrupt may occur immediately
after the processing in <3>.
2. If input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) ≥ detection voltage (VEXLVI = 1.21 V
(TYP.)) when LVIMD is set to 1, an internal reset signal is not generated.
3. Input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) must be EXLVI < VDD.
• When stopping operation
Either of the following procedures must be executed.
• When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction:
Write 00H to LVIM.
• When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction:
Clear LVIMD to 0 and then LVION to 0.
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
556
Figure 21-6. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Internal Reset Signal Generation
(Detects Level of Input Voltage from External Input Pin (EXLVI))
Input voltage from
external input pin (EXLVI)
LVI detection voltage
(VEXLVI)
<1>
Time
LVIMK flag
(set by software)
LVIF flag
LVIRF flagNote 3
Note 2
LVI reset signal
Internal reset signal
Cleared by
software
Not cleared Not cleared
Not cleared Not cleared
Cleared by
software
<3>
<6>
LVION flag
(set by software)
LVIMD flag
(set by software)
HNote 1
LVISEL flag
(set by software)
<5>
<2>
Not clearedNot cleared
<4> Wait time
Not cleared
Not cleared
Not cleared
Notes 1. The LVIMK flag is set to “1” by reset signal generation.
2. The LVIF flag may be set (1).
3. LVIRF is bit 0 of the reset control flag register (RESF). For details of RESF, see CHAPTER 18
RESET FUNCTION.
Remark <1> to <6> in Figure 21-6 above correspond to <1> to <6> in the description of “When starting
operation” in 21.4.1 (2) When detecting level of input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI).
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 557
21.4.2 When used as interrupt
(1) When detecting level of supply voltage (VDD)
• When starting operation
<1> Mask the LVI interrupt (LVIMK = 1).
<2> Clear bit 2 (LVISEL) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) to 0 (detects level of supply voltage
(VDD)) (default value).
<3> Set the detection voltage using bits 3 to 0 (LVIS3 to LVIS0) of the low-voltage detection level selection
register (LVIS).
<4> Set bit 7 (LVION) of LVIM to 1 (enables LVI operation).
<5> Use software to wait for an operation stabilization time and minimum pulse width (10
μ
s (MAX.)).
<6> Confirm that “supply voltage (VDD) ≥ detection voltage (VLVI)” when detecting the falling edge of VDD, or
“supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI)” when detecting the rising edge of VDD, at bit 0 (LVIF) of
LVIM.
<7> Clear the interrupt request flag of LVI (LVIIF) to 0.
<8> Release the interrupt mask flag of LVI (LVIMK).
<9> Clear bit 1 (LVIMD) of LVIM to 0 (generates interrupt signal when the level is detected) (default value).
<10> Execute the EI instruction (when vector interrupts are used).
Figure 21-7 shows the timing of the interrupt signal generated by the low-voltage detector. The numbers in
this timing chart correspond to <1> to <9> above.
• When stopping operation
Either of the following procedures must be executed.
• When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction:
Write 00H to LVIM.
• When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction:
Clear LVION to 0.
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
558
Figure 21-7. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Interrupt Signal Generation
(Detects Level of Supply Voltage (VDD)) (1/2)
(1) In 1.59 V POC mode setup (option byte: LVISTART = 0)
Supply voltage (V
DD
)
Time
<1>
Note 1
<8> Cleared by software
LVIMK flag
(set by software)
LVIF flag
INTLVI
LVIIF flag
Internal reset signal
<4>
<6>
<7>
Cleared by software
<5> Wait time
LVION flag
(set by software)
Note 2
Note 2
<3>
L
LVISEL flag
(set by software)
<2>
LVIMD flag
(set by software) L
<9>
V
LVI
V
POC
= 1.59 V (TYP.)
Note 2
Notes 1. The LVIMK flag is set to “1” by reset signal generation.
2. The interrupt request signal (INTLVI) is generated and the LVIF and LVIIF flags may be set (1).
Remark <1> to <9> in Figure 21-7 above correspond to <1> to <9> in the description of “When starting
operation” in 21.4.2 (1) When detecting level of supply voltage (VDD).
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 559
Figure 21-7. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Interrupt Signal Generation
(Detects Level of Supply Voltage (VDD)) (2/2)
(2) In 2.7/1.59 V POC mode setup (option byte: LVISTART = 1)
Supply voltage (V
DD
)
Time
<1>
Note 1
<8> Cleared by software
LVIMK flag
(set by software)
LVIF flag
INTLVI
LVIIF flag
Internal reset signal
<4>
<6>
<7>
Cleared by software
<5> Wait time
LVION flag
(set by software)
Note 2
Note 2
<3>
L
LVISEL flag
(set by software)
<2>
LVIMD flag
(set by software) L
<9>
V
LVI
2.7 V(TYP.)
V
POC
= 1.59 V (TYP.)
Note 2
Notes 1. The LVIMK flag is set to “1” by reset signal generation.
2. The interrupt request signal (INTLVI) is generated and the LVIF and LVIIF flags may be set (1).
Remark <1> to <9> in Figure 21-7 above correspond to <1> to <9> in the description of “When starting
operation” in 21.4.2 (1) When detecting level of supply voltage (VDD).
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
560
(2) When detecting level of input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI)
• When starting operation
<1> Mask the LVI interrupt (LVIMK = 1).
<2> Set bit 2 (LVISEL) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM) to 1 (detects level of input voltage from
external input pin (EXLVI)).
<3> Set bit 7 (LVION) of LVIM to 1 (enables LVI operation).
<4> Use software to wait for an operation stabilization time and minimum pulse width (10
μ
s (MAX.)).
<5> Confirm that “input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) ≥ detection voltage (VEXLVI = 1.21 V (TYP.)”
when detecting the falling edge of EXLVI, or “input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) < detection
voltage (VEXLVI = 1.21 V (TYP.))” when detecting the rising edge of EXLVI, at bit 0 (LVIF) of LVIM.
<6> Clear the interrupt request flag of LVI (LVIIF) to 0.
<7> Release the interrupt mask flag of LVI (LVIMK).
<8> Clear bit 1 (LVIMD) of LVIM to 0 (generates interrupt signal when the level is detected) (default value).
<9> Execute the EI instruction (when vector interrupts are used).
Figure 21-8 shows the timing of the interrupt signal generated by the low-voltage detector. The numbers in
this timing chart correspond to <1> to <8> above.
Caution Input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI) must be EXLVI < VDD.
• When stopping operation
Either of the following procedures must be executed.
• When using 8-bit memory manipulation instruction:
Write 00H to LVIM.
• When using 1-bit memory manipulation instruction:
Clear LVION to 0.
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 561
Figure 21-8. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Interrupt Signal Generation
(Detects Level of Input Voltage from External Input Pin (EXLVI))
Input voltage from
external input pin (EXLVI)
V
EXLVI
Time
<1>
Note 1
<7> Cleared by software
LVIMK flag
(set by software)
LVIF flag
INTLVI
LVIIF flag
<3>
<5>
<6>
Cleared by software
<4> Wait time
LVION flag
(set by software)
Note 2
Note 2
LVISEL flag
(set by software)
<2>
LVIMD flag
(set by software) L
<8>
Note 2
Notes 1. The LVIMK flag is set to “1” by reset signal generation.
2. The interrupt request signal (INTLVI) is generated and the LVIF and LVIIF flags may be set (1).
Remark <1> to <8> in Figure 21-8 above correspond to <1> to <8> in the description of “When starting
operation” in 21.4.2 (2) When detecting level of input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI).
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
562
21.5 Cautions for Low-Voltage Detector
In a system where the supply voltage (VDD) fluctuates for a certain period in the vicinity of the LVI detection voltage
(VLVI), the operation is as follows depending on how the low-voltage detector is used.
(1) When used as reset
The system may be repeatedly reset and released from the reset status.
In this case, the time from release of reset to the start of the operation of the microcontroller can be arbitrarily set
by taking action (1) below.
(2) When used as interrupt
Interrupt requests may be frequently generated. Take (b) of action (2) below.
<Action>
(1) When used as reset
After releasing the reset signal, wait for the supply voltage fluctuation period of each system by means of a
software counter that uses a timer, and then initialize the ports (see Figure 21-9).
(2) When used as interrupt
(a) Confirm that “supply voltage (VDD) ≥ detection voltage (VLVI)” when detecting the falling edge of VDD, or
“supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI)” when detecting the rising edge of VDD, in the servicing routine
of the LVI interrupt by using bit 0 (LVIF) of the low-voltage detection register (LVIM). Clear bit 0 (LVIIF) of
interrupt request flag register 0L (IF0L) to 0.
(b) In a system where the supply voltage fluctuation period is long in the vicinity of the LVI detection voltage, wait
for the supply voltage fluctuation period, confirm that “supply voltage (VDD) ≥ detection voltage (VLVI)” when
detecting the falling edge of VDD, or “supply voltage (VDD) < detection voltage (VLVI)” when detecting the rising
edge of VDD, using the LVIF flag, and clear the LVIIF flag to 0.
Remark If bit 2 (LVISEL) of the low voltage detection register (LVIM) is set to “1”, the meanings of the above
words change as follows.
• Supply voltage (VDD) → Input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI)
• Detection voltage (VLVI) → Detection voltage (VEXLVI = 1.21 V)
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 563
Figure 21-9. Example of Software Processing After Reset Release (1/2)
• If supply voltage fluctuation is 50 ms or less in vicinity of LVI detection voltage
;Check the reset source
Note
Initialize the port.
; Setting of detection level by LVIS
The low-voltage detector operates (LVION = 1).
Reset
Initialization
processing <1>
50 ms has passed?
(TMIFH1 = 1?)
Initialization
processing <2>
Setting 8-bit timer H1
(to measure 50 ms)
; Setting of division ratio of system clock,
such as setting of timer or A/D converter
Yes
No
Setting LVI
Clearing WDT
Detection
voltage or higher
(LVIF = 0?)
Yes
LVIF = 0
Restarting timer H1
(TMHE1 = 0 → TMHE1 = 1)
No
;The low-voltage detection flag is cleared.
; The timer counter is cleared and the timer is started.
LVI reset
;f
PRS
= Internal high-speed oscillation clock (8.4 MHz (MAX.)) (default)
Source: f
PRS
(8.4 MHz (MAX.))/2
12
,
Where comparison value = 102: ≅ 50 ms
Timer starts (TMHE1 = 1).
Note A flowchart is shown on the next page.
CHAPTER 21 LOW-VOLTAGE DETECTOR
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
564
Figure 21-9. Example of Software Processing After Reset Release (2/2)
• Checking reset cause
Yes
No
Check reset cause
Power-on-clear/external
reset generated
Reset processing by
watchdog timer
Reset processing by
low-voltage detector
Yes
WDTRF of RESF
register = 1?
LVIRF of RESF
register = 1?
No
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 565
CHAPTER 22 OPTION BYTE
22.1 Functions of Option Bytes
The flash memory at 0080H to 0084H of the 78K0/FC2 is an option byte area. When power is turned on or when
the device is restarted from the reset status, the device automatically references the option bytes and sets specified
functions. When using the product, be sure to set the following functions by using the option bytes.
When the boot swap operation is used during self-programming, 0080H to 0084H are switched to 1080H to 1084H.
Therefore, set values that are the same as those of 0080H to 0084H to 1080H to 1084H in advance.
Caution Be sure to set 00H to 0082H and 0083H (0082H/1082H and 0083H/1083H when the boot swap
function is used).
(1) 0080H/1080H
{ Internal low-speed oscillator operation
• Can be stopped by software
• Cannot be stopped
{ Watchdog timer interval time setting
{ Watchdog timer counter operation
• Enabled counter operation
• Disabled counter operation
{ Watchdog timer window open period setting
Caution Set a value that is the same as that of 0080H to 1080H because 0080H and 1080H are
switched during the boot swap operation.
(2) 0081H/1081H
{ Selecting POC mode
• During 2.7 V/1.59 V POC mode operation (LVISTART = 1)
The device is in the reset state upon power application and until the supply voltage reaches 2.7 V (TYP.). It
is released from the reset state when the voltage exceeds 2.7 V (TYP.). After that, POC is not detected at
2.7 V but is detected at 1.59 V (TYP.).
If the supply voltage rises to 1.8 V after power application at a pace slower than 0.5 V/ms (MIN.), use of the
2.7 V/1.59 V POC mode is recommended.
• During 1.59 V POC mode operation (LVISTART = 0)
The device is in the reset state upon power application and until the supply voltage reaches 1.59 V (TYP.).
It is released from the reset state when the voltage exceeds 1.59 V (TYP.). After that, POC is detected at
1.59 V (TYP.), in the same manner as on power application.
Caution LVISTART can only be written by using a dedicated flash memory programmer. It cannot be
set during self-programming or boot swap operation during self-programming (at this time,
1.59 V POC mode (default) is set). However, because the value of 1081H is copied to 0081H
during the boot swap operation, it is recommended to set a value that is the same as that of
0081H to 1081H when the boot swap function is used.
CHAPTER 22 OPTION BYTE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
566
(3) 0084H/1084H
{ On-chip debug operation control
• Disabling on-chip debug operation
• Enabling on-chip debug operation and erasing data of the flash memory in case authentication of the on-
chip debug security ID fails
• Enabling on-chip debug operation and not erasing data of the flash memory even in case authentication of
the on-chip debug security ID fails
Caution To use the on-chip debug function, set 02H or 03H to 0084H. Set a value that is the same as
that of 0084H to 1084H because 0084H and 1084H are switched during the boot operation.
CHAPTER 22 OPTION BYTE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 567
22.2 Format of Option Byte
The format of the option byte is shown below.
Figure 22-1. Format of Option Byte (1/2)
Address: 0080H/1080HNote
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 WINDOW1 WINDOW0 WDTON WDCS2 WDCS1 WDCS0 LSROSC
WINDOW1 WINDOW0 Watchdog timer window open period
0 0 25%
0 1 50%
1 0 75%
1 1 100%
WDTON Operation control of watchdog timer counter/illegal access detection
0 Counter operation disabled (counting stopped after reset), illegal access detection operation
disabled
1 Counter operation enabled (counting started after reset), illegal access detection operation enabled
WDCS2 WDCS1 WDCS0 Watchdog timer overflow time
0 0 0 210/fRL (3.88 ms)
0 0 1 211/fRL (7.76 ms)
0 1 0 212/fRL (15.52 ms)
0 1 1 213/fRL (31.03 ms)
1 0 0 214/fRL (62.06 ms)
1 0 1 215/fRL (124.12 ms)
1 1 0 216/fRL (248.24 ms)
1 1 1 217/fRL (496.48 ms)
LSROSC Internal low-speed oscillator operation
0 Can be stopped by software (stopped when 1 is written to bit 0 (LSRSTOP) of RCM register)
1 Cannot be stopped (not stopped even if 1 is written to LSRSTOP bit)
Note Set a value that is the same as that of 0080H to 1080H because 0080H and 1080H are switched during the
boot swap operation.
Cautions 1. The combination of WDCS2 = WDCS1 = WDCS0 = 0 and WINDOW1 = WINDOW0 = 0 is
prohibited.
2. The watchdog timer continues its operation during self-programming and EEPROM
emulation of the flash memory. During processing, the interrupt acknowledge time is
delayed. Set the overflow time and window size taking this delay into consideration.
3. If LSROSC = 0 (oscillation can be stopped by software), the count clock is not supplied to the
watchdog timer in the HALT and STOP modes, regardless of the setting of bit 0 (LSRSTOP) of
the internal oscillator mode register (RCM).
When 8-bit timer H1 operates with the internal low-speed oscillation clock, the count clock is
supplied to 8-bit timer H1 even in the HALT/STOP mode.
4. Be sure to clear bit 7 to 0.
Remarks 1. fRL: Internal low-speed oscillation clock frequency
2. ( ): fRL = 264 kHz (MAX.)
CHAPTER 22 OPTION BYTE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
568
Figure 22-1. Format of Option Byte (2/2)
Address: 0081H/1081HNotes 1, 2
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 LVISTART
LVISTART POC mode selection
0 1.59 V POC mode (default)
1 2.7 V/1.59 V POC mode
Notes 1. LVISTART can only be written by using a dedicated flash memory programmer. It cannot be set during
self-programming or boot swap operation during self-programming (at this time, 1.59 V POC mode
(default) is set). However, because the value of 1081H is copied to 0081H during the boot swap
operation, it is recommended to set a value that is the same as that of 0081H to 1081H when the boot
swap function is used.
2. To change the setting for the POC mode, set the value to 0081H again after batch erasure (chip
erasure) of the flash memory. The setting cannot be changed after the memory of the specified block
is erased.
Caution Be sure to clear bits 7 to 1 to “0”.
Address: 0082H/1082H, 0083H/1083HNote
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Note Be sure to set 00H to 0082H and 0083H, as these addresses are reserved areas. Also set 00H to 1082H
and 1083H because 0082H and 0083H are switched with 1082H and 1083H when the boot swap operation
is used.
Address: 0084H/1084HNote
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 OCDEN1 OCDEN0
OCDEN1 OCDEN0 On-chip debug operation control
0 0 Operation disabled
0 1 Setting prohibited
1 0 Operation enabled. Does not erase data of the flash memory in case authentication
of the on-chip debug security ID fails.
1 1 Operation enabled. Erases data of the flash memory in case authentication of the
on-chip debug security ID fails.
Note To use the on-chip debug function, set 02H or 03H to 0084H. Set a value that is the same as that of 0084H
to 1084H because 0084H and 1084H are switched during the boot swap operation.
Remark For the on-chip debug security ID, see CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION.
CHAPTER 22 OPTION BYTE
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 569
Here is an example of description of the software for setting the option bytes.
OPT CSEG AT 0080H
OPTION: DB 30H ; Enables watchdog timer operation (illegal access detection operation),
; Window open period of watchdog timer: 50%,
; Overflow time of watchdog timer: 210/fRL,
; Internal low-speed oscillator can be stopped by software.
DB 00H ; 1.59 V POC mode
DB 00H ; Reserved area
DB 00H ; Reserved area
DB 00H ; On-chip debug operation disabled
Remark Referencing of the option byte is performed during reset processing. For the reset processing timing,
see CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION.
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
570
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
The 78K0/FC2 incorporates the flash memory to which a program can be written, erased, and overwritten while
mounted on the board.
23.1 Internal Memory Size Switching Register
The internal memory capacity can be selected using the internal memory size switching register (IMS).
IMS is set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets IMS to CFH.
Caution Be sure to set each product to the values shown in Table 23-1 after a reset release.
Figure 23-1. Format of Internal Memory Size Switching Register (IMS)
Address: FFF0H After reset: CFH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IMS RAM2 RAM1 RAM0 0 ROM3 ROM2 ROM1 ROM0
RAM2 RAM1 RAM0 Internal high-speed RAM capacity selection
1 1 0 1024 bytes
Other than above Setting prohibited
ROM3 ROM2 ROM1 ROM0 Internal ROM capacity selection
1 0 0 0 32 KB
1 1 0 0 48 KB
1 1 1 1 60 KB
Other than above Setting prohibited
Caution To set the memory size, set IMS and then IXS. Set the memory size so that the internal ROM and
internal expansion RAM areas do not overlap.
Table 23-1. Internal Memory Size Switching Register Settings
Flash Memory Versions (78K0/FC2) IMS Setting
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884 C8H
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885 CFH
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886 CFH
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 571
23.2 Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register
The internal expansion RAM capacity can be selected using the internal expansion RAM size switching register
(IXS).
IXS is set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets IXS to 0CH.
Caution Be sure to set each product to the values shown in Table 23-2 after a reset release.
Figure 23-2. Format of Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register (IXS)
Address: FFF4H After reset: 0CH R/W
Symbol 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
IXS 0 0 0 IXRAM4 IXRAM3 IXRAM2 IXRAM1 IXRAM0
IXRAM4 IXRAM3 IXRAM2 IXRAM1 IXRAM0 Internal expansion RAM capacity selection
0 1 0 1 0 1024 bytes
0 1 0 0 0 2048 bytes
Other than above Setting prohibited
Caution To set memory size, set IMS and then IXS. Set memory size so that the internal ROM area and
internal expansion RAM area do not overlap.
Table 23-2. Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register Settings
Flash Memory Versions (78K0/FC2) IXS Setting
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884 0AH
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885 08H
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
572
23.3 Writing with Flash Memory Programmer
Data can be written to the flash memory on-board or off-board, by using a dedicated flash memory programmer.
(1) On-board programming
The contents of the flash memory can be rewritten after the 78K0/FC2 has been mounted on the target system.
The connectors that connect the dedicated flash memory programmer must be mounted on the target system.
(2) Off-board programming
Data can be written to the flash memory with a dedicated program adapter (FA series) before the 78K0/FC2 is
mounted on the target system.
Remark The FA series is a product of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.
Table 23-3. Wiring Between 78K0/FC2 and Dedicated Flash memory Programmer
(
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883)
Pin Configuration of Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer With CSI10 With UART60
Signal Name I/O Pin Function Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name Pin No.
SI/RxD Input Receive signal SO10/P12 29 TxD60/P13 28
SO/TxD Output Transmit signal SI10/RxD61/P11 30 RxD60/P14 27
SCK Output Transfer clock SCK10/TxD61/P10 31 − −
CLK Output Clock to 78K0/FC2 −Note 1 − Note 2 Note 2
/RESET Output Reset signal RESET 3 RESET 3
FLMD0 Output Mode signal FLMD0 6 FLMD0 6
VDD 11 VDD 11
EVDD 11 EVDD 11
VDD I/O
VDD voltage generation/
power monitoring
AVREF 32 AVREF 32
VSS 10 VSS 10
EVSS 10 EVSS 10
GND − Ground
AVSS 33 AVSS 33
Notes 1. Only the internal high-speed oscillation clock (fRH) can be used when CSI10 is used.
2. Only the X1 clock (fX) or external main system clock (fEXCLK) can be used when UART60 is used. When
using the clock output of the dedicated flash memory programmer, pin connection varies depending on the
type of the dedicated flash memory programmer used.
• PG-FP4, FL-PR4: Connect CLK of the programmer to EXCLK/X2/P122 (pin 7).
• PG-FPL3, FP-LITE3: Connect CLK of the programmer to X1/P121 (pin 8), and connect its inverted
signal to X2/EXCLK/P122 (pin 7).
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 573
Examples of the recommended connection when using the adapter for flash memory writing are shown below.
Figure 23-3. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI10) Mode
(
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883)
GND
VDD
VDD2 (LVDD)
V
DD
(2.7 to 5.5 V)
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SI SO SCK CLK /RESET FLMD0
WRITER INTERFACE
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
574
Figure 23-4. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in UART (UART60) Mode
(
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883)
GND
V
DD
V
DD2
(LV
DD
)
V
DD
(2.7 to 5.5 V)
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
SI SO SCK CLK /RESET FLMD0
WRITER INTERFACE
Note
Note
Note The above figure illustrates an example of wiring when using the clock output from the PG-FP4 or FL-PR4.
When using the clock output from the PG-FPL3 or FP-LITE3, connect CLK to X1/P121 (pin 8), and connect
its inverted signal to X2/EXCLK/P122 (pin 7).
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 575
Table 23-4. Wiring Between 78K0/FC2 and Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer
(
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886)
Pin Configuration of Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer With CSI10 With UART60
Signal Name I/O Pin Function Pin Name Pin No. Pin Name Pin No.
SI/RxD Input Receive signal SO10/P12 32 TxD60/P13 31
SO/TxD Output Transmit signal SI10/RxD61/P11 33 RxD60/P14 30
SCK Output Transfer clock SCK10/TxD61/P10 34 − −
CLK Output Clock to 78K0/FC2 −Note 1 − Note 2 Note 2
/RESET Output Reset signal RESET 4 RESET 4
FLMD0 Output Mode signal FLMD0 7 FLMD0 7
VDD 12 VDD 12
EVDD 12 EVDD 12
VDD I/O
VDD voltage generation/
power monitoring
AVREF 35 AVREF 35
VSS 11 VSS 11
EVSS 11 EVSS 11
GND − Ground
AVSS 36 AVSS 36
Notes 1. Only the internal high-speed oscillation clock (fRH) can be used when CSI10 is used.
2. Only the X1 clock (fX) or external main system clock (fEXCLK) can be used when UART60 is used. When
using the clock output of the dedicated flash memory programmer, pin connection varies depending on the
type of the dedicated flash memory programmer used.
• PG-FP4, FL-PR4: Connect CLK of the programmer to EXCLK/X2/P122 (pin 8).
• PG-FPL3, FP-LITE3: Connect CLK of the programmer to X1/P121 (pin 9), and connect its inverted
signal to X2/EXCLK/P122 (pin 8).
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
576
Examples of the recommended connection when using the adapter for flash memory writing are shown below.
Figure 23-5. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI10) Mode
(
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886)
GND
V
DD
V
DD2
(LV
DD
)
VDD (2.7 to 5.5 V)
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SI SO SCK CLK /RESET FLMD0
WRITER INTERFACE
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 577
Figure 23-6. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in UART (UART60) Mode
(
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886)
GND
V
DD
V
DD2
(LV
DD
)
V
DD
(2.7 to 5.5 V)
GND
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
SI SO SCK CLK /RESET FLMD0
WRITER INTERFACE
Note
Note
Note The above figure illustrates an example of wiring when using the clock output from the PG-FP4 or FL-PR4.
When using the clock output from the PG-FPL3 or FP-LITE3, connect CLK to X1/P121 (pin 9), and connect
its inverted signal to X2/EXCLK/P122 (pin 8).
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
578
23.4 Programming Environment
The environment required for writing a program to the flash memory of the 78K0/FC2 is illustrated below.
Figure 23-7. Environment for Writing Program to Flash Memory
RS-232C
Host machine
78K0/FC2
V
DD
V
SS
RESET
CSI10/UART60
Dedicated flash
memory programmer
USB
PG-FP4
(Flash Pro4)
Cxxxxxx
Bxxxxx
Axxxx
XXX YYY
XXXXX XXXXXX
XXXX
XXXX YYYY
STATVE
FLMD0
A host machine that controls the dedicated flash memory programmer is necessary.
To interface between the dedicated flash memory programmer and the 78K0/FC2, CSI10 or UART60 is used for
manipulation such as writing and erasing. To write the flash memory off-board, a dedicated program adapter (FA
series) is necessary.
23.5 Communication Mode
Communication between the dedicated flash memory programmer and the 78K0/FC2 is established by serial
communication via CSI10 or UART60 of the 78K0/FC2.
(1) CSI10
Transfer rate: 2.4 kHz to 2.5 MHz
Figure 23-8. Communication with Dedicated Flash memory programmer (CSI10)
78K0/FC2
RESET
SO10
SI10
SCK10
VDD
GND
/RESET
SI/RxD
SO/TxD
SCK
Dedicated flash
memory programmer
PG-FP4
(Flash Pro4)
Cxxxxxx
Bxxxxx
Axxxx
XXX YYY
XXXXX XXXXXX
XXXX
XXXX YYYY
STATVE
VDD/EVDD/AVREF
VSS/EVSS/AVSS
FLMD0FLMD0
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 579
(2) UART60
Transfer rate: 115200 bps
Figure 23-9. Communication with Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer (UART60)
78K0/FC2
V
DD
/EV
DD
/AV
REF
V
SS
/EV
SS
/AV
SS
RESET
TxD60
RxD60
V
DD
GND
/RESET
SI/RxD
SO/TxD
EXCLK
Note
CLK
Note
Dedicated flash
memory programmer
PG-FP4
(Flash Pro4)
Cxxxxxx
Bxxxxx
Axxxx
XXX YYY
XXXXX XXXXXX
XXXX
XXXX YYYY
STATVE
FLMD0FLMD0
Note The above figure illustrates an example of wiring when using the clock output from the PG-FP4 or FL-PR4.
When using the clock output from the PG-FPL3 or FP-LITE3, connect CLK to X1/P121 (pin 8;
μ
PD78F0881,
78F0882, 78F0883, pin 9;
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886), and connect its inverted signal to
X2/EXCLK/P122 (pin 7;
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883, pin 8;
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886).
X1CLK
X2
The dedicated flash memory programmer generates the following signals for the 78K0/FC2. For details, refer to
the user’s manual for the PG-FP4, FL-PR4, PG-FPL3, or FP-LITE3.
Table 23-5. Pin Connection
Dedicated Flash memory programmer 78K0/FC2 Connection
Signal Name I/O Pin Function Pin Name CSI10 UART60
FLMD0 Output Mode signal FLMD0
VDD I/O VDD voltage generation/power monitoring VDD, EVDD, AVREF
GND − Ground VSS, EVSS, AVSS
CLK Output Clock output to 78K0/FC2 Note 1 ×Note 2 {Note 1
/RESET Output Reset signal RESET
SI/RxD Input Receive signal SO10/TxD60
SO/TxD Output Transmit signal SI10/RxD60
SCK Output Transfer clock SCK10 ×
Notes 1. Only the X1 clock (fX) or external main system clock (fEXCLK) can be used when UART60 is used. When
using the clock output of the dedicated flash memory programmer, pin connection varies depending on the
type of the dedicated flash memory programmer used.
• PG-FP4, FL-PR4: Connect CLK of the programmer to EXCLK/X2/P122 (pin 7;
μ
PD78F0881,
78F0882, 78F0883, pin 8;
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886).
• PG-FPL3, FP-LITE3: Connect CLK of the programmer to X1/P121 (pin 8;
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882,
78F0883, pin 9;
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886), and connect its inverted
signal to X2/EXCLK/P122 (pin 7;
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883, pin 8;
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886).
2. Only the internal high-speed oscillation clock (fRH) can be used when CSI10 is used.
Remark : Be sure to connect the pin.
{: The pin does not have to be connected if the signal is generated on the target board.
×: The pin does not have to be connected.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
580
23.6 Connection of Pins on Board
To write the flash memory on-board, connectors that connect the dedicated flash memory programmer must be
provided on the target system. First provide a function that selects the normal operation mode or flash memory
programming mode on the board.
When the flash memory programming mode is set, all the pins not used for programming the flash memory are in
the same status as immediately after reset. Therefore, if the external device does not recognize the state immediately
after reset, the pins must be handled as described below.
23.6.1 FLMD0 pin
In the normal operation mode, 0 V is input to the FLMD0 pin. In the flash memory programming mode, the VDD
write voltage is supplied to the FLMD0 pin. An FLMD0 pin connection example is shown below.
Figure 23-10. FLMD0 Pin Connection Example
78K0/FC2
FLMD0
10 kΩ (recommended)
Dedicated flash
memory
programmer
connection pin
23.6.2 Serial interface pins
The pins used by each serial interface are listed below.
Table 23-6. Pins Used by Each Serial Interface
Serial Interface Pins Used
CSI10 SO10, SI10, SCK10
UART60 TxD60, RxD60
To connect the dedicated flash memory programmer to the pins of a serial interface that is connected to another
device on the board, care must be exercised so that signals do not collide or that the other device does not
malfunction.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 581
(1) Signal collision
If the dedicated flash memory programmer (output) is connected to a pin (input) of a serial interface connected to
another device (output), signal collision takes place. To avoid this collision, either isolate the connection with the
other device, or make the other device go into an output high-impedance state.
Figure 23-11. Signal Collision (Input Pin of Serial Interface)
Input pin Signal collision
Dedicated flash memory
programmer connection pin
Other device
Output pin
In the flash memory programming mode, the signal output by the device
collides with the signal sent from the dedicated flash memory programmer.
Therefore, isolate the signal of the other device.
78K0/FC2
(2) Malfunction of other device
If the dedicated flash memory programmer (output or input) is connected to a pin (input or output) of a serial
interface connected to another device (input), a signal may be output to the other device, causing the device to
malfunction. To avoid this malfunction, isolate the connection with the other device.
Figure 23-12. Malfunction of Other Device
Pin
Dedicated flash memory
programmer connection pin
Other device
Input pin
If the signal output by the 78K0/FC2 in the flash memory programming
mode affects the other device, isolate the signal of the other device.
Pin
Dedicated flash memory
programmer connection pin
Other device
Input pin
If the signal output by the dedicated flash memory programmer in the flash
memory programming mode affects the other device, isolate the signal of
the other device.
78K0/FC2
78K0/FC2
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
582
23.6.3 RESET pin
If the reset signal of the dedicated flash memory programmer is connected to the RESET pin that is connected to
the reset signal generator on the board, signal collision takes place. To prevent this collision, isolate the connection
with the reset signal generator.
If the reset signal is input from the user system while the flash memory programming mode is set, the flash
memory will not be correctly programmed. Do not input any signal other than the reset signal of the dedicated flash
memory programmer.
Figure 23-13. Signal Collision (RESET Pin)
RESET
Dedicated flash memory
programmer connection signal
Reset signal generator
Signal collision
Output pin
In the flash memory programming mode, the signal output by the reset
signal generator collides with the signal output by the dedicated flash
memory programmer. Therefore, isolate the signal of the reset signal
generator.
78K0/FC2
23.6.4 Port pins
When the flash memory programming mode is set, all the pins not used for flash memory programming enter the
same status as that immediately after reset. If external devices connected to the ports do not recognize the port
status immediately after reset, the port pin must be connected to VDD or VSS via a resistor.
23.6.5 REGC pin
Connect the REGC pin to GND via a capacitor (0.47 to 1
μ
F: recommended) in the same manner as during normal
operation.
23.6.6 Other signal pins
Connect X1 and X2 in the same status as in the normal operation mode when using the on-board clock.
To input the operating clock from the dedicated flash memory programmer, however, connect as follows.
• PG-FP4, FL-PR4: Connect CLK of the programmer to EXCLK/X2/P122.
• PG-FPL3, FP-LITE3: Connect CLK of the programmer and X1/P121, and connect its inverted signal to
X2/EXCLK/P122.
Cautions 1. Only the internal high-speed oscillation clock (fRH) can be used when CSI10 is used.
2. Only the X1 clock (fX) or external main system clock (fEXCLK) can be used when UART60 is
used.
3. Connect P31/INTP2/TI002 and P121/X1 as follows when writing the flash memory with a
flash memory programmer.
• P31/INTP2/TI002: Connect to EVSS via a resistor (10 kΩ: recommended).
• P121/X1: When using this pin as a port, connect it to VSS via a resistor (10 kΩ:
recommended) (in the input mode) or leave it open (in the output mode).
The above connection is not necessary when writing the flash memory by means of self
programming.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 583
23.6.7 Power supply
To use the supply voltage output of the flash memory programmer, connect the VDD pin to VDD of the flash memory
programmer, and the VSS pin to GND of the flash memory programmer.
To use the on-board supply voltage, connect in compliance with the normal operation mode.
However, be sure to connect the VDD and VSS pins to VDD and GND of the flash memory programmer to use the
power monitor function with the flash memory programmer, even when using the on-board supply voltage.
Supply the same other power supplies (EVDD, EVSS, AVREF, and AVSS) as those in the normal operation mode.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
584
23.7 Programming Method
23.7.1 Controlling flash memory
The following figure illustrates the procedure to manipulate the flash memory.
Figure 23-14. Flash Memory Manipulation Procedure
Start
Selecting communication mode
Manipulate flash memory
End?
Yes
FLMD0 pulse supply
No
End
Flash memory programming
mode is set
23.7.2 Flash memory programming mode
To rewrite the contents of the flash memory by using the dedicated flash memory programmer, set the 78K0/FC2 in
the flash memory programming mode. To set the mode, set the FLMD0 pin to VDD and clear the reset signal.
Change the mode by using a jumper when writing the flash memory on-board.
Figure 23-15. Flash Memory Programming Mode
VDD
RESET
5.5 V
0 V
VDD
0 V
Flash memory programming mode
FLMD0
FLMD0 pulse
VDD
0 V
Table 23-7. Relationship Between FLMD0 Pin and Operation Mode After Reset Release
FLMD0 Operation Mode
0 Normal operation mode
VDD Flash memory programming mode
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 585
23.7.3 Selecting communication mode
In the 78K0/FC2, a communication mode is selected by inputting pulses (up to 8 pulses) to the FLMD0 pin after the
dedicated flash memory programming mode is entered. These FLMD0 pulses are generated by the flash memory
programmer.
The following table shows the relationship between the number of pulses and communication modes.
Table 23-8. Communication Modes
Standard SettingNote 1 Communication
Mode Port Speed Frequency Multiply
Rate
Pins Used Peripheral
Clock
Number of
FLMD0
Pulses
UART-Ext-Osc fX 0 UART
(UART60) UART-Ext-FP4CK
115200 bpsNote 2 2 to 20 MHzNote 3 TxD60,
RxD60 fEXCLK 3
3-wire serial I/O
(CSI10)
CSI-Internal-Osc 2.4 kHz to
2.5 MHz
−
1.0
SO10, SI10,
SCK10
fRH 8
Notes 1. Selection items for Standard settings on GUI of the flash memory programmer.
2. Because factors other than the baud rate error, such as the signal waveform slew, also affect UART
communication, thoroughly evaluate the slew as well as the baud rate error.
3. The possible setting range differs depending on the voltage. For details, refer to the chapter of electrical
specifications.
Caution When UART60 is selected, the receive clock is calculated based on the reset command sent from
the dedicated flash memory programmer after the FLMD0 pulse has been received.
Remark fX: X1 clock
fEXCLK: External main system clock
f
RH: Internal high-speed oscillation clock
23.7.4 Communication commands
The 78K0/FC2 communicates with the dedicated flash memory programmer by using commands. The signals sent
from the flash memory programmer to the 78K0/FC2 are called commands, and the commands sent from the
78K0/FC2 to the dedicated flash memory programmer are called response.
Figure 23-16. Communication Commands
78K0/FC2
Command
Response
Dedicated flash
memor
y
p
ro
g
rammer
PG-FP4
(Flash Pro4)
Cxxxxxx
Bxxxxx
Axxxx
XXX YYY
XXXXX XXXXXX
XXXX
XXXX YYYY
STATVE
The flash memory control commands of the 78K0/FC2 are listed in the table below. All these commands are
issued from the programmer and the 78K0/FC2 perform processing corresponding to the respective commands.
Table 23-9. Flash Memory Control Commands
Classification Command Name Function
Verify Verify Compares the contents of a specified area of the flash memory with
data transmitted from the programmer.
Erase Chip Erase Erases the entire flash memory.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
586
Block Erase Erases a specified area in the flash memory.
Blank check Block Blank Check Checks if a specified block in the flash memory has been correctly
erased.
Write Programming Writes data to a specified area in the flash memory.
Status Gets the current operating status (status data).
Silicon Signature Gets 78K0/Fx2 information (such as the part number and flash memory
configuration).
Version Get Gets the 78K0/Fx2 version and firmware version.
Getting information
Checksum Gets the checksum data for a specified area.
Security Security Set Sets security information.
Reset Used to detect synchronization status of communication. Others
Oscillating Frequency Set Specifies an oscillation frequency.
The 78K0/FC2 return a response for the command issued by the dedicated flash memory programmer. The
response names sent from the 78K0/FC2 are listed below.
Table 23-10. Response Names
Command Name Function
ACK Acknowledges command/data.
NAK Acknowledges illegal command/data.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 587
23.8 Security Settings
The 78K0/FC2 supports a security function that prohibits rewriting the user program written to the internal flash
memory, so that the program cannot be changed by an unauthorized person.
The operations shown below can be performed using the security set command. The security setting is valid when
the programming mode is set next.
• Disabling batch erase (chip erase)
Execution of the block erase and batch erase (chip erase) commands for entire blocks in the flash memory is
prohibited by this setting during on-board/off-board programming. Once execution of the batch erase (chip
erase) command is prohibited, all of the prohibition settings (including prohibition of batch erase (chip erase)) can
no longer be cancelled.
Caution After the security setting for the batch erase is set, erasure cannot be performed for the
device. In addition, even if a write command is executed, data different from that which has
already been written to the flash memory cannot be written, because the erase command is
disabled.
• Disabling block erase
Execution of the block erase command for a specific block in the flash memory is prohibited during on-board/off-
board programming. However, blocks can be erased by means of self programming.
• Disabling write
Execution of the write and block erase commands for entire blocks in the flash memory is prohibited during on-
board/off-board programming. However, blocks can be written by means of self programming.
• Disabling rewriting boot cluster 0
Execution of the batch erase (chip erase) command, block erase command, and write command on boot cluster
0 (0000H to 0FFFH) in the flash memory is prohibited by this setting.
Caution If a security setting that rewrites boot cluster 0 has been applied, boot cluster 0 of that device
will not be rewritten.
The batch erase (chip erase), block erase, write commands, and rewriting boot cluster 0 are enabled by the default
setting when the flash memory is shipped. Security can be set by on-board/off-board programming and self
programming. Each security setting can be used in combination.
Prohibition of erasing blocks and writing is cleared by executing the batch erase (chip erase) command.
Table 23-11 shows the relationship between the erase and write commands when the 78K0/FC2 security function
is enabled.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
588
Table 23-11. Relationship Between Enabling Security Function and Command
(1) During on-board/off-board programming
Executed Command Valid Security
Batch Erase (Chip Erase) Block Erase Write
Prohibition of batch erase (chip erase) Cannot be erased in batch Can be performedNote.
Prohibition of block erase Can be performed.
Prohibition of writing
Can be erased in batch.
Blocks cannot be
erased.
Cannot be performed.
Prohibition of rewriting boot cluster 0 Cannot be erased in batch Boot cluster 0 cannot be
erased.
Boot cluster 0 cannot be
written.
Note Confirm that no data has been written to the write area. Because data cannot be erased after batch erase
(chip erase) is prohibited, do not write data if the data has not been erased.
(2) During self programming
Executed Command Valid Security
Block Erase Write
Prohibition of batch erase (chip erase)
Prohibition of block erase
Prohibition of writing
Blocks can be erased. Can be performed.
Prohibition of rewriting boot cluster 0 Boot cluster 0 cannot be erased. Boot cluster 0 cannot be written.
Table 23-12 shows how to perform security settings in each programming mode.
Table 23-12. Setting Security in Each Programming Mode
(1) On-board/off-board programming
Security Security Setting How to Disable Security Setting
Prohibition of batch erase (chip erase) Cannot be disabled after set.
Prohibition of block erase
Prohibition of writing
Execute batch erase (chip erase)
command
Prohibition of rewriting boot cluster 0
Set via GUI of dedicated flash memory
programmer, etc.
Cannot be disabled after set.
(2) Self programming
Security Security Setting How to Disable Security Setting
Prohibition of batch erase (chip erase) Cannot be disabled after set.
Prohibition of block erase
Prohibition of writing
Execute batch erase (chip erase)
command during on-board/off-board
programming (cannot be disabled during
self programming)
Prohibition of rewriting boot cluster 0
Set by using information library.
Cannot be disabled after set.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 589
23.9 Processing Time for Each Command When PG-FP4 Is Used (Reference)
The following table shows the processing time for each command (reference) when the PG-FP4 is used as a
dedicated flash memory programmer.
Table 23-13. Processing Time for Each Command When PG-FP4 Is Used (Reference)
(1)
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886 (internal ROM capacity: 60 KB)
Port: UART-Ext-FP4CK (External main system clock (fEXCLK)),
Speed: 115,200 bps
Command of
PG-FP4
Port: CSI-Internal-OSC
(Internal high-speed
oscillation clock (fRH)),
Speed: 2.5 MHz Frequency: 2.0 MHz Frequency: 20 MHz
Signature 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.)
Blankcheck 1 s (TYP.) 1 s (TYP.) 1 s (TYP.)
Erase 1.5 s (TYP.) 1 s (TYP.) 1 s (TYP.)
Program 5 s (TYP.) 9 s (TYP.) 9 s (TYP.)
Verify 2 s (TYP.) 6.5 s (TYP.) 6.5 s (TYP.)
E.P.V 6 s (TYP.) 10.5 s (TYP.) 10.5 s (TYP.)
Checksum 0.5 s (TYP.) 1 s (TYP.) 1 s (TYP.)
Security 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.)
(2)
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884 (internal ROM capacity: 32 KB)
Port: UART-Ext-FP4CK (External main system clock (fEXCLK)),
Speed: 115,200 bps
Command of
PG-FP4
Port: CSI-Internal-OSC
(Internal high-speed
oscillation clock (fRH)),
Speed: 2.5 MHz Frequency: 2.0 MHz Frequency: 20 MHz
Signature 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.)
Blankcheck 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.)
Erase 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.)
Program 2.5 s (TYP.) 5 s (TYP.) 5 s (TYP.)
Verify 1.5 s (TYP.) 4 s (TYP.) 3.5 s (TYP.)
E.P.V 3.5 s (TYP.) 6 s (TYP.) 6 s (TYP.)
Checksum 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.)
Security 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.) 0.5 s (TYP.)
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
590
23.10 Flash Memory Programming by Self-Programming
The 78K0/FC2 supports a self-programming function that can be used to rewrite the flash memory via a user
program. Because this function allows a user application to rewrite the flash memory by using the 78K0/FC2 self-
programming library, it can be used to upgrade the program in the field.
If an interrupt occurs during self-programming, self-programming can be temporarily stopped and interrupt
servicing can be executed. To execute interrupt servicing, restore the normal operation mode after self-programming
has been stopped, and execute the EI instruction. After the self-programming mode is later restored, self-
programming can be resumed.
Remark For details of the self-programming function and the 78K0/FC2 self-programming library, refer to a
separate document to be published (document name: 78K0/Fx2 Application Note, release schedule:
Pending).
Cautions 1. The self-programming function cannot be used when the CPU operates with the
subsystem clock.
2. Input a high level to the FLMD0 pin during self-programming.
3. Be sure to execute the DI instruction before starting self-programming.
The self-programming function checks the interrupt request flags (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, and
IF1H). If an interrupt request is generated, self-programming is stopped.
4. Self-programming is also stopped by an interrupt request that is not masked even in the
DI status. To prevent this, mask the interrupt by using the interrupt mask flag registers
(MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, and MK1H).
5. Self-programming is executed with the internal high-speed oscillation clock. If the CPU
operates with the X1 clock or external main system clock, the oscillation stabilization wait
time of the internal high-speed oscillation clock elapses during self-programming.
6. Allocate the entry program for self-programming in the common area of 0000H to 7FFFH.
Figure 23-17. Operation Mode and Memory Map for Self-Programming (
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886)
Normal mode
Flash memory
(common area)
0000H
8000H
7FFFH
FFFFH
FB00H
FAFFH
F000H
EFFFH
F800H
F7FFH
FF00H
FEFFH
Internal high-
speed RAM
Internal
expansion RAM
SFR
Flash memory
control
firmware ROM
Disable
accessing
Reserved
Flash memory
control
firmware ROM
Enable
accessing
FFFFH
Self-programming mode
Flash memory
(common area)
0000H
8000H
7FFFH
FB00H
FAFFH
F000H
EFFFH
F800H
F7FFH
FF00H
FEFFH
Internal high-
speed RAM
Internal
expansion RAM
SFR
Reserved
Disable
accessing
Instructions can be fetched
from common area. Instructions can be
fetched from common
area and firmware ROM.
FA00H
F9FFH
AFCAN area
FA00H
F9FFH
AFCAN area
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 591
The following figure illustrates a flow of rewriting the flash memory by using a self programming sample library.
Figure 23-18. Flow of Self-Programming (Rewriting Flash Memory)
Start of self programming
FlashStart
FLMD0 pin
Low level → High level
Normal completion?
Yes
No
Setting operating environment
FlashEnv
CheckFLMD
FlashBlockBlankCheck
Erased?
Yes
Yes
No
FlashBlockErase
Normal completion?
FlashWordWrite
Normal completion?
FlashBlockVerify
Normal completion?
FlashEnd
FLMD0 pin
High level → Low level
End of self programming
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
592
The following table shows the processing time and interrupt response time for the self programming sample library.
Table 23-14. Processing Time and Interrupt Response Time for Self Programming Sample Library (1/4)
(1) When internal high-speed oscillation clock is used and entry RAM is located outside short direct
addressing range
Processing Time (
μ
s)
Normal Model of C Compiler Static Model of
C Compiler/Assembler
Interrupt Response Time (
μ
s)Library Name
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Self programming start library 4.25 − −
Initialize library 977.75 − −
Mode check library 753.875 753.125 − −
Block blank check library 12770.875 12765.875 391.25 1300.5
Block erase library 36909.5 356318 36904.5 356296.25 389.25 1393.5
Word write library 1214
(1214.375)
2409
(2409.375)
1207
(1207.375)
2402
(2402.375)
394.75 1289.5
Program verify library 25618.875 25613.875 390.25 1324.5
Self programming end library 4.25 − −
Get information library
(option value: 03H)
871.25
(871.375)
866
(866.125)
− −
Get information library
(option value: 04H)
863.375
(863.5)
858.125
(858.25)
− −
Get information library
(option value: 05H)
1024.75
(1043.625)
1037.5
(1038.375)
− −
Set information library 105524.75 790809.375 105523.75 790808.375 387 852.5
EEPROM write library 1496.5
(1496.875)
2691.5
(2691.875)
1489.5
(1489.875)
2684.5
(2684.875)
399.75 1395.5
Remark The value in the parentheses indicates the value when a write start address structure is located at a place
other than the internal high-speed RAM.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 593
Table 23-14. Processing Time and Interrupt Response Time for Self Programming Sample Library (2/4)
(2) When internal high-speed oscillation clock is used and entry RAM is located in short direct addressing
range (FE20H)
Processing Time (
μ
s)
Normal Model of C Compiler Static Model of
C Compiler/Assembler
Interrupt Response Time (
μ
s)Library Name
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Self programming start library 4.25 − −
Initialize library 443.5 − −
Mode check library 219.625 218.875 − −
Block blank check library 12236.625 12231.625 81.25 727.5
Block erase library 36363.25 355771.75 36358.25 355750 79.25 820.5
Word write library 679.75
(680.125)
1874.75
(1875.125)
672.75
(673.125)
1867.75
(1868.125)
84.75 716.5
Program verify library 25072.625 25067.625 80.25 751.5
Self programming end library 4.25 − −
Get information library
(option value: 03H)
337
(337.125)
331.75
(331.875)
− −
Get information library
(option value: 04H)
329.125
(239.25)
323.875
(324)
− −
Get information library
(option value: 05H)
502.25
(503.125)
497
(497.875)
− −
Set information library 104978.5 541143.125 104977.5 541142.125 77 279.5
EEPROM write library 962.25
(962.625)
2157.25
(2157.625)
955.25
(955.625)
2150.25
(2150.625)
89.75 822.5
Remark The value in the parentheses indicates the value when a write start address structure is located at a place
other than the internal high-speed RAM.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
594
Table 23-14. Processing Time and Interrupt Response Time for Self Programming Sample Library (3/4)
(3) When high-speed system clock (X1 oscillation or external clock input) is used and entry RAM is located
outside short direct addressing range
Processing Time (
μ
s)
Normal Model of C Compiler Static Model of C
Compiler/Assembler
Interrupt Response Time (
μ
s)Library Name
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Self programming start library 34/fXH − −
Initialize library 49/fXH + 485.8125 − −
Mode check library 35/fXH + 374.75 29/fXH + 374.75 − −
Block blank check library 174/fXH + 6382.0625 134/fXH + 6382.0625 18/fXH + 192 28/fXH + 698
Block erase library 174/fXH +
31093.875
174/fXH +
298948.125
134/fXH +
31093.875
134/fXH +
298948.125
18/fXH + 186 28/fXH + 745
Word write library 318 (321)/fXH
+ 644.125
318 (321)/fXH
+ 1491.625
262 (265)/fXH
+ 644.125
262 (265)/fXH
+ 1491.625
22/fXH + 189 28/fXH + 693
Program verify library 174/fXH + 13448.5625 134/fXH + 13448.5625 18/fXH + 192 28/fXH + 709
Self programming end library 34/fXH − −
Get information library
(option value: 03H)
171 (172)/fXH + 432.4375 129 (130)/fXH + 432.4375 − −
Get information library
(option value: 04H)
181 (182)/fXH + 427.875 139 (140)/fXH + 427.875 − −
Get information library
(option value: 05H)
404 (411)/fXH + 496.125 362 (369)/fXH + 496.125 − −
Set information library 75/fXH +
79157.6875
75/fXH +
652400
67/fXH +
79157.6875
67/fXH +
652400
16/fXH + 190 28/fXH + 454
EEPROM write library 318 (321)/fXH
+ 799.875
318 (321)/fXH
+ 1647.375
262 (265)/fXH
+ 799.875
262 (265)/fXH
+ 1647.375
22/fXH + 191 28/fXH + 783
Remarks 1. The value in the parentheses indicates the value when a write start address structure is located at a
place other than the internal high-speed RAM.
2. f
XH: High-speed system clock frequency
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 595
Table 23-14. Processing Time and Interrupt Response Time for Self Programming Sample Library (4/4)
(4) When high-speed system clock (X1 oscillation or external clock input) is used and entry RAM is located
in short direct addressing range (FE20H)
Processing Time (
μ
s)
Normal Model of C Compiler Static Model of
C Compiler/Assembler
Interrupt Response Time (
μ
s)Library Name
Min. Max. Min. Max. Min. Max.
Self programming start library 34/fXH − −
Initialize library 49/fXH + 224.6875 − −
Mode check library 35/fXH + 113.625 29/fXH + 113.625 − −
Block blank check library 174/fXH + 6120.9375 134/fXH + 6120.9375 18/fXH + 55 28/fXH + 462
Block erase library 174/fXH +
30820.75
174/fXH +
298675
134/fXH +
30820.75
134/fXH +
298675
18/fXH + 49 28/fXH + 509
Word write library 318 (321)/fXH
+ 383
318 (321)/fXH
+ 1230.5
262 (265)/fXH
+ 383
262 (265)/fXH
+ 1230.5
22/fXH + 52 28/fXH + 457
Program verify library 174/fXH + 13175.4375 134/fXH + 13175.4375 18/fXH + 55 28/fXH + 473
Self programming end library 34/fXH − −
Get information library
(option value: 03H)
171 (172)/fXH + 171.3125 129 (130)/fXH + 171.3125 − −
Get information library
(option value: 04H)
181 (182)/fXH + 166.75 139 (140)/fXH + 166.75 − −
Get information library
(option value: 05H)
404 (411)/fXH + 231.875 362 (369)/fXH + 231.875 − −
Set information library 75/fXH +
78884.5625
75/fXH +
527566.875
67/fXH +
78884.5625
67/fXH +
527566.875
16/fXH +53 28/fXH +218
EEPROM write library 318 (321)/fXH
+ 538.75
318 (321)/fXH
+ 1386.25
262 (265)/fXH
+ 538.75
262 (265)/fXH
+ 1386.25
22/fXH +54 28/fXH +547
Remarks 1. The value in the parentheses indicates the value when a write start address structure is located at a
place other than the internal high-speed RAM.
2. f
XH: High-speed system clock frequency
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
596
23.10.1 Registers used for self-programming function
The following three registers are used for the self-programming function.
• Flash-programming mode control register (FLPMC)
• Flash protect command register (PFCMD)
• Flash status register (PFS)
(1) Flash-programming mode control register (FLPMC)
This register is used to enable or disable writing or erasing of the flash memory and to set the operation mode
during self-programming.
The FLPMC can be written only in a specific sequence (see 23.10.1 (2) Flash protect command register
(PFCMD)) so that the application system does not stop inadvertently due to malfunction caused by noise or
program hang-up.
FLPMC can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation sets this register to 0xHNote.
Note Differs depending on the operation mode.
• User mode: 08H
• On-board mode: 0CH
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 597
Figure 23-19. Format of Flash-Programming Mode Control Register (FLPMC)
0
Symbol
FLPMC 0 0 0 FWEDIS
FWEPR
FLSPM1 FLSPM0
Address: FFC4H After reset: 0×HNote 1 R/WNote 2
Selection of operation mode during self-programming
Normal mode
Access (fetch of a command, lead of data) is possible to
all the address domains of a flash memory.
Self-programming mode
Execution"CALL #8100 H" of firmware is possible.
Access (lead of an instruction fetch and data) is possible
to a flash memory .
Setting prohibited
FLSPM1
Note 4
0
0
1
1
FLSPM0
Note 4
0
1
1
0
FWEDIS
0
Control of flash memory writing/erasing
Writing/erasing enabledNote 3
Writing/erasing disabled
1
Status of FLMD0 pin
Low level
High levelNote 3
FWEPR
0
1
Notes 1. Differs depending on the operation mode.
• User mode: 08H
• On-board mode: 0CH
2. Bit 2 (FWEPR) is read-only.
3. For actual writing/erasing, the FLMD0 pin must be high (FWEPR = 1), as well as
FWEDIS = 0.
FWEDIS FWEPR Enable or disable of flash memory writing/erasing
0 1 Writing/erasing enabled
Other than above Writing/erasing disabled
4. The user ROM (flash memory) or firmware ROM can be selected by FLSPM1 and
FLSPM0, and the operation mode set on the application system by the mode pin or
the self-programming mode can be selected.
Cautions 1. Be sure to keep FWEDIS at 0 until writing or erasing of the flash memory is
completed.
2. Make sure that FWEDIS = 1 in the normal mode.
3. Manipulate FLSPM1 and FLSPM0 after execution branches to the internal
RAM. The address of the flash memory is specified by an address signal
from the CPU when FLSPM1 = 0 or the set value of the firmware written when
FLSPM1 = 1. In the on-board mode, the specifications of FLSPM1 and
FLSPM0 are ignored.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
598
(2) Flash protect command register (PFCMD)
If the application system stops inadvertently due to malfunction caused by noise or program hang-up, an
operation to write the flash programming mode control register (FLPMC) may have a serious effect on the system.
PFCMD is used to protect FLPMC from being written, so that the application system does not stop inadvertently.
Writing FLPMC is enabled only when a write operation is performed in the following specific sequence.
<1> Write a specific value to PFCMD (PFCMD = A5H)
<2> Write the value to be set to FLPMC (writing in this step is invalid)
<3> Write the inverted value of the value to be set to FLPMC
<4> Write the value to be set to FLPMC (writing in this step is valid)
This rewrites the value of the register, so that the register cannot be written illegally.
Occurrence of an illegal store operation can be checked by bit 0 (FPRERR) of the flash status register (PFS).
A5H must be written to PFCMD each time the value of FLPMC is changed.
PFCMD can be set by an 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation makes this register undefined.
Figure 23-20. Format of Flash Protect Command Register (PFCMD)
REG7
Symbol
PFCMD REG6 REG5 REG4 REG3 REG2 REG1 REG0
Address: FFC0H After reset: Undefined W
(3) Flash status register (PFS)
If data is not written to the flash programming mode control register (FLPMC), which is protected, in the correct
sequence (writing the flash protect command register (PFCMD)), FLPMC is not written and a protection error
occurs. If this happens, bit 0 of PFS (FPRERR) is set to 1.
This bit is a cumulative flag. After checking FPRERR, clear it by writing 0 to it.
PFS can be set by a 1-bit or 8-bit memory manipulation instruction.
Reset signal generation clears this register to 00H.
Figure 23-21. Format of Flash Status Register (PFS)
0
Symbol
PFS 0 0 0 0 0 0 FPRERR
Address: FFC2H After reset: 00H R/W
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 599
The operating conditions of the FPRERR flag are as follows.
<Setting conditions>
• If PFCMD is written when the store instruction operation recently performed on a peripheral register is not to
write a specific value (A5H) to PFCMD
• If the first store instruction operation after <1> is on a peripheral register other than FLPMC
• If the first store instruction operation after <2> is on a peripheral register other than FLPMC
• If a value other than the inverted value of the value to be set to FLPMC is written by the first store instruction
after <2>
• If the first store instruction operation after <3> is on a peripheral register other than FLPMC
• If a value other than the value to be set to FLPMC (value written in <2>) is written by the first store instruction
after <3>
Remark The numbers in angle brackets above correspond to the those in (2) Flash protect command
register (PFCMD).
<Reset conditions>
• If 0 is written to the FPRERR flag
• If reset signal is generated
<Example of description in specific sequence>
To write 05H to FLPMC
MOV PFCMD, #0A5H ; Writes A5H to PFCMD.
MOV FLPMC, #05H ; Writes 05H to FLPMC.
MOV FLPMC, #0FAH ; Writes 0FAH (inverted value of 05H) to FLPMC.
MOV FLPMC, #05H ; Writes 05H to FLPMC.
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
600
23.11 Boot Swap Function
If rewriting the boot area has failed during self-programming due to a power failure or some other cause, the data
in the boot area may be lost and the program may not be restarted by resetting.
The boot swap function is used to avoid this problem.
Before erasing boot cluster 0Note, which is a boot program area, by self-programming, write a new boot program to
boot cluster 1 in advance. When the program has been correctly written to boot cluster 1, swap this boot cluster 1 and
boot cluster 0 by using the set information function of the firmware of the 78K0/FC2, so that boot cluster 1 is used as a
boot area. After that, erase or write the original boot program area, boot cluster 0.
As a result, even if a power failure occurs while the boot programming area is being rewritten, the program is
executed correctly because it is booted from boot cluster 1 to be swapped when the program is reset and started next.
If the program has been correctly written to boot cluster 0, restore the original boot area by using the set
information function of the firmware of the 78K0/FC2.
Note A boot cluster is a 4 KB area and boot clusters 0 and 1 are swapped by the boot swap function.
Boot cluster 0 (0000H to 0FFFH): Original boot program area
Boot cluster 1 (1000H to 1FFFH): Area subject to boot swap function
Figure 23-22. Boot Swap Function
Boot program
(boot cluster 0)
New boot program
(boot cluster 1)
User program Self-programming
to boot cluster 1
Self-programming
to boot cluster 0
Execution of boot
swap by firmware
Execution of boot
swap by firmware
User program
Boot program
(boot cluster 0)
User program
New boot program
(boot cluster 1)
New boot program
(boot cluster 0)
User program
New boot program
(boot cluster 1)
New boot program
(boot cluster 0)
User program
New boot program
(boot cluster 1)
Boot program
(boot cluster 0)
User program
XXXXH
XXXXH
2000H
0000H
1000H
2000H
0000H
1000H
Boot Boot
Boot
Boot
Boot
CHAPTER 23 FLASH MEMORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 601
Figure 23-23. Example of Executing Boot Swapping
Boot
cluster 1
Booted by boot cluster 0
Booted by boot cluster 1
Booted by boot cluster 0
Block number
Erasing block 4
Boot
cluster 0
Program
Program
Boot program
1000H
0000H
1000H
0000H
0000H
1000H
Erasing block 5
Writing blocks 5 to 7 Boot swap
Boot swap canceled
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program
Program
Program
Program
Program
Boot program
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program
Program
Program
Boot program
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program
Program
Erasing block 6 Erasing block 7
Program
Boot program
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
Boot program
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
Erasing block 0 Erasing block 1
Erasing block 2 Erasing block 3
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
Boot program
Boot program
Boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
Boot program
Boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
Boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
Writing blocks 0 to 3
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
New boot program
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
602
CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION
24.1 Outline of Functions
The 78K0/FC2 uses the VDD, FLMD0, RESET, X1 (or P31), X2 (or P32), and VSS pins to communicate with the host
machine via an on-chip debug emulator (QB-78K0MINI). Whether X1 and P31, or X2 and P32 are used can be
selected.
Caution Do not use this product for mass production after the on-chip debug function has been used
because its reliability cannot be guaranteed, due to issues with respect to the number of times
the flash memory can be rewritten. NEC Electronics does not accept complaints concerning
when use this product for mass production after the on-chip debug function has been used.
CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 603
24.2 Connection with MINICUBE
In order to connect QB-78K0MINI, it is necessary to mount the connector for emulator connection, and the circuit
for connection on a target system.
The connector for OCD (a two-row 2.54 pitch type connector, with reverse-insertion blocker) is described below.
• Recommended connectors: (straight) HIF3FC-10PA-2.54DSA (manufactured by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.)
(right angle) HIF3FC-10PA-2.54DS (manufactured by Hirose Electric Co., Ltd.))
Pin No. Name IN/OUT Remark
1 RESET_IN IN Target reset input signal
2 RESET_OUT OUT Reset signal output to target device
3 FLMD0 OUT
Output signalNote used to control on-chip
debugging functions
4 VDD_IN IN This signal is used to generate an interface
output signal when the target system’s VDD
is detected.
5 X2 IN/OUT
Bidirectional signal used for data
communications
6 GND − Connected to GND.
7 X1 OUT Output signal used for clock supply
8 GND − Connected to GND.
9 RESERVED
− Open
10 RESERVED
− Open
Note FLMD0 is at high level during on-chip debugging.
Figure 24-1. Connector Pin Layout
(Top view)
10-pin general-purpose
connector
Target system
TOP VIEW
2
9
10
7
8
5
6
3
4
1
CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
604
24.3 Connection Circuit Examples
The following are examples of circuits required when connecting the QB-78K0MINI to the target system.
Figure 24-2. Connection Circuit Example (When QB-78K0MINI Is Not Used)
V
DD
Target device
QB-78K0MINI target connector
P31
FLMD0
X1
X2
Target reset
RESET IN
X2
X1
FLMD0
RESET
V
DD
RESET OUT
GND
Shorted by jumper
GND
Note
Note
Note Make pull-down resistor 470 Ω or more (10 kΩ: recommended).
Figure 24-3. Connection Circuit Example (When Using QB-78K0MINI: X1 and X2 Are Used)
V
DD
Target device
P31
FLMD0
X1
X2
Target reset
RESET IN
X2
X1
FLMD0
RESET
V
DD
RESET OUT
GND
Oscillator is deleted
QB-78K0MINI target connector
GND
Note
Note
Note Make pull-down resistor 470 Ω or more (10 kΩ: recommended).
Cautions 1. Input the clock from the X1 pin during on-chip debugging.
2. Control the X1 and X2 pins by externally pulling down the P31 pin or by using an external
circuit using the P130 pin (that outputs a low level when the device is reset).
CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 605
Figure 24-4. Connection Circuit Example (When Using QB-78K0MINI: Ports 31 and 32 Are Used)
QB-78K0MINI target connector
V
DD
Target device
P32
FLMD0
P31
X2
Target reset
RESET IN
X2
X1
FLMD0
RESET
V
DD
RESET OUT
GND
X1
GND
Note
Note
Note Make pull-down resistor 470 Ω or more (10 kΩ: recommended).
Connect the FLMD0 pin as follows when performing self programming by means of on-chip debugging.
Figure 24-5. Connection of FLMD0 Pin for Self Programming by Means of On-Chip Debugging
QB-78K0MINI target connector
FLMD0 FLMD0
Target device
Port
1 k
Ω
(recommended)
10 k
Ω
(recommended)
CHAPTER 24 ON-CHIP DEBUG FUNCTION
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
606
24.4 On-Chip Debug Security ID
The 78K0/FC2 has an on-chip debug operation control flag in the flash memory at 0084H (see CHAPTER 22
OPTION BYTE) and an on-chip debug security ID setting area at 0085H to 008EH.
When the boot swap function is used, also set a value that is the same as that of 1084H and 1085H to 108EH in
advance, because 0084H, 0085H to 008EH and 1084H, and 1085H to 108EH are switched.
For details on the on-chip debug security ID, refer to the QB-78K0MINI User’s Manual (U17029E).
Table 24-1. On-Chip Debug Security ID
Address On-Chip Debug Security ID
0085H to 008EH
1085H to 108EH
Any ID code of 10 bytes
24.5 Restrictions and Cautions on On-Chip Debug Function
When setting to on-chip debugging mode via the normal port, without using pins X1 and X2, two of the user ports
will be unavailable for use.
A high-level signal is always output from to the FLMD0 pin during emulation when self-writing. Be sure to connect a
pull-down resistor to the FLMD0 pin, and manipulate this pin based on high/high impedance levels, rather than on
high/low levels, when using ports for manipulation.
In order to realize on-chip debug function, use the following user resource.
(a) Flash memory area
{ Addresses 0x02 and 0x03
{ Addresses 0x7E and 0x7F (when using a software break)
{ Address 0x84
{ Addresses 0x85 to 0x8E
{ Addresses 0x8F to 0x18F: Standard value of program
(+256 bytes when using pseudo real-time RAM monitor function)
(when using a device with 10 or more SFRs the can be accessed in 16-bit units: +n (the number of
exceeding registers x 6 bytes))
(b) Internal extended RAM area
{ Addresses 0xF7F0 to 0xF7FF
(when using pseudo real-time RAM monitor function)
(c) Internal high-speed RAM area
{ 7 bytes as stack area: Standard value of stack
(+2 bytes when using software breaks)
(+7 bytes when using pseudo real-time RAM monitor function)
For details, refer to the QB-78K0MINI User's Manual (U17029E).
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 607
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
This chapter lists each instruction set of 78K0/FC2 in table form. For details of each operation and operation code,
refer to the separate document 78K/0 Series Instructions User’s Manual (U12326E).
25.1 Conventions Used in Operation List
25.1.1 Operand identifiers and specification methods
Operands are written in the “Operand” column of each instruction in accordance with the specification method of
the instruction operand identifier (refer to the assembler specifications for details). When there are two or more
methods, select one of them. Upper case letters and the symbols #, !, $ and [ ] are keywords and must be written as
they are. Each symbol has the following meaning.
• #: Immediate data specification
• !: Absolute address specification
• $: Relative address specification
• [ ]: Indirect address specification
In the case of immediate data, describe an appropriate numeric value or a label. When using a label, be sure to
write the #, !, $, and [ ] symbols.
For operand register identifiers r and rp, either function names (X, A, C, etc.) or absolute names (names in
parentheses in the table below, R0, R1, R2, etc.) can be used for specification.
Table 25-1. Operand Identifiers and Specification Methods
Identifier Specification Method
r
rp
sfr
sfrp
X (R0), A (R1), C (R2), B (R3), E (R4), D (R5), L (R6), H (R7),
AX (RP0), BC (RP1), DE (RP2), HL (RP3)
Special function register symbolNote
Special function register symbol (16-bit manipulatable register even addresses only)Note
saddr
saddrp
FE20H to FF1FH Immediate data or labels
FE20H to FF1FH Immediate data or labels (even address only)
addr16
addr11
addr5
0000H to FFFFH Immediate data or labels
(Only even addresses for 16-bit data transfer instructions)
0800H to 0FFFH Immediate data or labels
0040H to 007FH Immediate data or labels (even address only)
word
byte
bit
16-bit immediate data or label
8-bit immediate data or label
3-bit immediate data or label
RBn RB0 to RB3
Note Addresses from FFD0H to FFDFH cannot be accessed with these operands.
Remark For special function register symbols, see Table 3-7. Special Function Register List.
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
608
25.1.2 Description of operation column
A: A register; 8-bit accumulator
X: X register
B: B register
C: C register
D: D register
E: E register
H: H register
L: L register
AX: AX register pair; 16-bit accumulator
BC: BC register pair
DE: DE register pair
HL: HL register pair
PC: Program counter
SP: Stack pointer
PSW: Program status word
CY: Carry flag
AC: Auxiliary carry flag
Z: Zero flag
RBS: Register bank select flag
IE: Interrupt request enable flag
( ): Memory contents indicated by address or register contents in parentheses
XH, XL: Higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits of 16-bit register
∧: Logical product (AND)
∨: Logical sum (OR)
∨: Exclusive logical sum (exclusive OR)
⎯⎯: Inverted data
addr16: 16-bit immediate data or label
jdisp8: Signed 8-bit data (displacement value)
25.1.3 Description of flag operation column
(Blank): Not affected
0: Cleared to 0
1: Set to 1
×: Set/cleared according to the result
R: Previously saved value is restored
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 609
25.2 Operation List
Clocks Flag
Instruction
Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes
Note 1 Note 2
Operation ZACCY
r, #byte 2 4 − r ← byte
saddr, #byte 3 6 7 (saddr) ← byte
sfr, #byte 3 − 7 sfr ← byte
A, r Note 3 1 2 − A ← r
r, A Note 3 1 2 − r ← A
A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← (saddr)
saddr, A 2 4 5 (saddr) ← A
A, sfr 2 − 5 A ← sfr
sfr, A 2 − 5 sfr ← A
A, !addr16 3 8 9 A ← (addr16)
!addr16, A 3 8 9 (addr16) ← A
PSW, #byte 3 − 7 PSW ← byte × × ×
A, PSW 2 − 5 A ← PSW
PSW, A 2 − 5 PSW ← A × × ×
A, [DE] 1 4 5 A ← (DE)
[DE], A 1 4 5 (DE) ← A
A, [HL] 1 4 5 A ← (HL)
[HL], A 1 4 5 (HL) ← A
A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A ← (HL + byte)
[HL + byte], A 2 8 9 (HL + byte) ← A
A, [HL + B] 1 6 7 A ← (HL + B)
[HL + B], A 1 6 7 (HL + B) ← A
A, [HL + C] 1 6 7 A ← (HL + C)
MOV
[HL + C], A 1 6 7 (HL + C) ← A
A, r Note 3 1 2 − A ↔ r
A, saddr 2 4 6 A ↔ (saddr)
A, sfr 2 − 6 A ↔ (sfr)
A, !addr16 3 8 10 A ↔ (addr16)
A, [DE] 1 4 6 A ↔ (DE)
A, [HL] 1 4 6 A ↔ (HL)
A, [HL + byte] 2 8 10 A ↔ (HL + byte)
A, [HL + B] 2 8 10 A ↔ (HL + B)
8-bit data
transfer
XCH
A, [HL + C] 2 8 10 A ↔ (HL + C)
Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access
2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed
3. Except “r = A”
Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control
register (PCC).
2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
610
Clocks Flag
Instruction
Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes
Note 1 Note 2
Operation ZACCY
rp, #word 3 6 − rp ← word
saddrp, #word 4 8 10 (saddrp) ← word
sfrp, #word 4 − 10 sfrp ← word
AX, saddrp 2 6 8 AX ← (saddrp)
saddrp, AX 2 6 8 (saddrp) ← AX
AX, sfrp 2 − 8 AX ← sfrp
sfrp, AX 2 − 8 sfrp ← AX
AX, rp Note 3 1 4 − AX ← rp
rp, AX Note 3 1 4 − rp ← AX
AX, !addr16 3 10 12 AX ← (addr16)
MOVW
!addr16, AX 3 10 12 (addr16) ← AX
16-bit data
transfer
XCHW AX, rp Note 3 1 4 − AX ↔ rp
A, #byte 2 4 − A, CY ← A + byte × × ×
saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) + byte × × ×
A, r Note 4 2 4 − A, CY ← A + r × × ×
r, A 2 4 − r, CY ← r + A × × ×
A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A + (saddr) × × ×
A, !addr16 3 8 9 A, CY ← A + (addr16) × × ×
A, [HL] 1 4 5 A, CY ← A + (HL) × × ×
A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + byte) × × ×
A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + B) × × ×
ADD
A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + C) × × ×
A, #byte 2 4 − A, CY ← A + byte + CY × × ×
saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) + byte + CY × × ×
A, r Note 4 2 4 − A, CY ← A + r + CY × × ×
r, A 2 4 − r, CY ← r + A + CY × × ×
A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A + (saddr) + CY × × ×
A, !addr16 3 8 9 A, CY ← A + (addr16) + C × × ×
A, [HL] 1 4 5 A, CY ← A + (HL) + CY × × ×
A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + byte) + CY × × ×
A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + B) + CY × × ×
8-bit
operation
ADDC
A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A + (HL + C) + CY × × ×
Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access
2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed
3. Only when rp = BC, DE or HL
4. Except “r = A”
Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control
register (PCC).
2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 611
Clocks Flag
Instruction
Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes
Note 1 Note 2
Operation ZACCY
A, #byte 2 4 − A, CY ← A − byte × × ×
saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) − byte × × ×
A, r Note 3 2 4 − A, CY ← A − r × × ×
r, A 2 4 − r, CY ← r − A × × ×
A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A − (saddr) × × ×
A, !addr16 3 8 9 A, CY ← A − (addr16) × × ×
A, [HL] 1 4 5 A, CY ← A − (HL) × × ×
A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + byte) × × ×
A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + B) × × ×
SUB
A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + C) × × ×
A, #byte 2 4 − A, CY ← A − byte − CY × × ×
saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr), CY ← (saddr) − byte − CY × × ×
A, r Note 3 2 4 − A, CY ← A − r − CY × × ×
r, A 2 4 − r, CY ← r − A − CY × × ×
A, saddr 2 4 5 A, CY ← A − (saddr) − CY × × ×
A, !addr16 3 8 9 A, CY ← A − (addr16) − CY × × ×
A, [HL] 1 4 5 A, CY ← A − (HL) − CY × × ×
A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + byte) − CY × × ×
A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + B) − CY × × ×
SUBC
A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A, CY ← A − (HL + C) − CY × × ×
A, #byte 2 4 − A ← A ∧ byte ×
saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) ← (saddr) ∧ byte ×
A, r Note 3 2 4 − A ← A ∧ r ×
r, A 2 4 − r ← r ∧ A ×
A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← A ∧ (saddr) ×
A, !addr16 3 8 9 A ← A ∧ (addr16) ×
A, [HL] 1 4 5 A ← A ∧ [HL] ×
A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A ← A ∧ [HL + byte] ×
A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A ← A ∧ [HL + B] ×
8-bit
operation
AND
A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A ← A ∧ [HL + C] ×
Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access
2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed
3. Except “r = A”
Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control
register (PCC).
2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
612
Clocks Flag
Instruction
Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes
Note 1 Note 2
Operation ZACCY
A, #byte 2 4 − A ← A ∨ byte ×
saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) ← (saddr) ∨ byte ×
A, r Note 3 2 4 − A ← A ∨ r ×
r, A 2 4 − r ← r ∨ A ×
A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← A ∨ (saddr) ×
A, !addr16 3 8 9 A ← A ∨ (addr16) ×
A, [HL] 1 4 5 A ← A ∨ (HL) ×
A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + byte) ×
A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + B) ×
OR
A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + C) ×
A, #byte 2 4 − A ← A ∨ byte ×
saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) ← (saddr) ∨ byte ×
A, r Note 3 2 4 − A ← A ∨ r ×
r, A 2 4 − r ← r ∨ A ×
A, saddr 2 4 5 A ← A ∨ (saddr) ×
A, !addr16 3 8 9 A ← A ∨ (addr16) ×
A, [HL] 1 4 5 A ← A ∨ (HL) ×
A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + byte) ×
A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + B) ×
XOR
A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A ← A ∨ (HL + C) ×
A, #byte 2 4 − A − byte × × ×
saddr, #byte 3 6 8 (saddr) − byte × × ×
A, r Note 3 2 4 − A − r × × ×
r, A 2 4 − r − A × × ×
A, saddr 2 4 5 A − (saddr) × × ×
A, !addr16 3 8 9 A − (addr16) × × ×
A, [HL] 1 4 5 A − (HL) × × ×
A, [HL + byte] 2 8 9 A − (HL + byte) × × ×
A, [HL + B] 2 8 9 A − (HL + B) × × ×
8-bit
operation
CMP
A, [HL + C] 2 8 9 A − (HL + C) × × ×
Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access
2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed
3. Except “r = A”
Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control
register (PCC).
2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 613
Clocks Flag
Instruction
Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes
Note 1 Note 2
Operation ZACCY
ADDW AX, #word 3 6 − AX, CY ← AX + word × × ×
SUBW AX, #word 3 6 − AX, CY ← AX − word × × ×
16-bit
operation
CMPW AX, #word 3 6 − AX − word × × ×
MULU X 2 16
− AX ← A × X Multiply/
divide DIVUW C 2 25
− AX (Quotient), C (Remainder) ← AX ÷ C
r 1 2
− r ← r + 1 × × INC
saddr 2 4 6 (saddr) ← (saddr) + 1 × ×
r 1 2
− r ← r − 1 × × DEC
saddr 2 4 6 (saddr) ← (saddr) − 1 × ×
INCW rp 1 4
− rp ← rp + 1
Increment/
decrement
DECW rp 1 4
− rp ← rp − 1
ROR A, 1 1 2 − (CY, A7 ← A0, Am − 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×
ROL A, 1 1 2 − (CY, A0 ← A7, Am + 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×
RORC A, 1 1 2 − (CY ← A0, A7 ← CY, Am − 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×
ROLC A, 1 1 2 − (CY ← A7, A0 ← CY, Am + 1 ← Am) × 1 time ×
ROR4 [HL] 2 10 12 A3 − 0 ← (HL)3 − 0, (HL)7 − 4 ← A3 − 0,
(HL)3 − 0 ← (HL)7 − 4
Rotate
ROL4 [HL] 2 10 12 A3 − 0 ← (HL)7 − 4, (HL)3 − 0 ← A3 − 0,
(HL)7 − 4 ← (HL)3 − 0
ADJBA 2 4
− Decimal Adjust Accumulator after Addition × × ×
BCD
adjustment ADJBS 2 4
− Decimal Adjust Accumulator after Subtract × × ×
CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← (saddr.bit) ×
CY, sfr.bit 3 − 7 CY ← sfr.bit ×
CY, A.bit 2 4 − CY ← A.bit ×
CY, PSW.bit 3 − 7 CY ← PSW.bit ×
CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 CY ← (HL).bit ×
saddr.bit, CY 3 6 8 (saddr.bit) ← CY
sfr.bit, CY 3 − 8 sfr.bit ← CY
A.bit, CY 2 4 − A.bit ← CY
PSW.bit, CY 3 − 8 PSW.bit ← CY × ×
Bit
manipulate
MOV1
[HL].bit, CY 2 6 8 (HL).bit ← CY
Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access
2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed
Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control
register (PCC).
2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
614
Clocks Flag
Instruction
Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes
Note 1 Note 2
Operation ZACCY
CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← CY ∧ saddr.bit) ×
CY, sfr.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∧ sfr.bit ×
CY, A.bit 2 4 − CY ← CY ∧ A.bit ×
CY, PSW.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∧ PSW.bit ×
AND1
CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 CY ← CY ∧ (HL).bit ×
CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← CY ∨ (saddr.bit) ×
CY, sfr.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∨ sfr.bit ×
CY, A.bit 2 4 − CY ← CY ∨ A.bit ×
CY, PSW.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∨ PSW.bit ×
OR1
CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 CY ← CY ∨ (HL).bit ×
CY, saddr.bit 3 6 7 CY ← CY ∨ (saddr.bit) ×
CY, sfr.bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∨ sfr.bit ×
CY, A.bit 2 4 − CY ← CY ∨ A.bit ×
CY, PSW. bit 3 − 7 CY ← CY ∨ PSW.bit ×
XOR1
CY, [HL].bit 2 6 7 CY ← CY ∨ (HL).bit ×
saddr.bit 2 4 6 (saddr.bit) ← 1
sfr.bit 3
− 8 sfr.bit ← 1
A.bit 2 4
− A.bit ← 1
PSW.bit 2
− 6 PSW.bit ← 1 × × ×
SET1
[HL].bit 2 6 8 (HL).bit ← 1
saddr.bit 2 4 6 (saddr.bit) ← 0
sfr.bit 3
− 8 sfr.bit ← 0
A.bit 2 4
− A.bit ← 0
PSW.bit 2
− 6 PSW.bit ← 0 × × ×
CLR1
[HL].bit 2 6 8 (HL).bit ← 0
SET1 CY 1 2
− CY ← 1 1
CLR1 CY 1 2
− CY ← 0 0
Bit
manipulate
NOT1 CY 1 2
− CY ← CY ×
Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access
2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed
Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control
register (PCC).
2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 615
Clocks Flag
Instruction
Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes
Note 1 Note 2
Operation ZACCY
CALL !addr16 3 7
− (SP − 1) ← (PC + 3)H, (SP − 2) ← (PC + 3)L,
PC ← addr16, SP ← SP − 2
CALLF !addr11 2 5
− (SP − 1) ← (PC + 2)H, (SP − 2) ← (PC + 2)L,
PC15 − 11 ← 00001, PC10 − 0 ← addr11,
SP ← SP − 2
CALLT [addr5] 1 6
− (SP − 1) ← (PC + 1)H, (SP − 2) ← (PC + 1)L,
PCH ← (00000000, addr5 + 1),
PCL ← (00000000, addr5),
SP ← SP − 2
BRK 1 6
− (SP − 1) ← PSW, (SP − 2) ← (PC + 1)H,
(SP − 3) ← (PC + 1)L, PCH ← (003FH),
PCL ← (003EH), SP ← SP − 3, IE ← 0
RET 1 6
− PCH ← (SP + 1), PCL ← (SP),
SP ← SP + 2
RETI 1 6
− PCH ← (SP + 1), PCL ← (SP),
PSW ← (SP + 2), SP ← SP + 3
RRR
Call/return
RETB 1 6
− PCH ← (SP + 1), PCL ← (SP),
PSW ← (SP + 2), SP ← SP + 3
RRR
PSW 1 2
− (SP − 1) ← PSW, SP ← SP − 1 PUSH
rp 1 4
− (SP − 1) ← rpH, (SP − 2) ← rpL,
SP ← SP − 2
PSW 1 2
− PSW ← (SP), SP ← SP + 1 R R RPOP
rp 1 4
− rpH ← (SP + 1), rpL ← (SP),
SP ← SP + 2
SP, #word 4 − 10 SP ← word
SP, AX 2 − 8 SP ← AX
Stack
manipulate
MOVW
AX, SP 2 − 8 AX ← SP
!addr16 3
6 − PC ← addr16
$addr16 2
6 − PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8
Unconditional
branch
BR
AX 2
8 − PCH ← A, PCL ← X
BC $addr16 2
6 − PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 1
BNC $addr16 2
6 − PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if CY = 0
BZ $addr16 2
6 − PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 1
Conditional
branch
BNZ $addr16 2
6 − PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if Z = 0
Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access
2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed
Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control
register (PCC).
2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
616
Clocks Flag
Instruction
Group Mnemonic Operands Bytes
Note 1 Note 2
Operation ZACCY
saddr.bit, $addr16 3 8 9 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if(saddr.bit) = 1
sfr.bit, $addr16 4 − 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1
A.bit, $addr16 3 8 − PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1
PSW.bit, $addr16 3 − 9 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1
BT
[HL].bit, $addr16 3 10 11 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 1
saddr.bit, $addr16 4 10 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if(saddr.bit) = 0
sfr.bit, $addr16 4 − 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 0
A.bit, $addr16 3 8 − PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 0
PSW.bit, $addr16 4 − 11 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW. bit = 0
BF
[HL].bit, $addr16 3 10 11 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 0
saddr.bit, $addr16 4 10 12 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8
if(saddr.bit) = 1
then reset(saddr.bit)
sfr.bit, $addr16 4 − 12 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if sfr.bit = 1
then reset sfr.bit
A.bit, $addr16 3 8 − PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if A.bit = 1
then reset A.bit
PSW.bit, $addr16 4 − 12 PC ← PC + 4 + jdisp8 if PSW.bit = 1
then reset PSW.bit
× × ×
BTCLR
[HL].bit, $addr16 3 10 12 PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if (HL).bit = 1
then reset (HL).bit
B, $addr16 2 6 − B ← B − 1, then
PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if B ≠ 0
C, $addr16 2 6 − C ← C −1, then
PC ← PC + 2 + jdisp8 if C ≠ 0
Conditional
branch
DBNZ
Saddr, $addr16 3 8 10 (saddr) ← (saddr) − 1, then
PC ← PC + 3 + jdisp8 if(saddr) ≠ 0
SEL RBn 2 4
− RBS1, 0 ← n
NOP 1 2
− No Operation
EI 2
− 6 IE ← 1(Enable Interrupt)
DI 2
− 6 IE ← 0(Disable Interrupt)
HALT 2 6
− Set HALT Mode
CPU
control
STOP 2 6
− Set STOP Mode
Notes 1. When the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed or for an instruction with no data access
2. When an area except the internal high-speed RAM area is accessed
Remarks 1. One instruction clock cycle is one cycle of the CPU clock (fCPU) selected by the processor clock control
register (PCC).
2. This clock cycle applies to the internal ROM program.
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 617
25.3 Instructions Listed by Addressing Type
(1) 8-bit instructions
MOV, XCH, ADD, ADDC, SUB, SUBC, AND, OR, XOR, CMP, MULU, DIVUW, INC, DEC, ROR, ROL, RORC,
ROLC, ROR4, ROL4, PUSH, POP, DBNZ
Second Operand
First Operand
#byte A rNote sfr saddr !addr16 PSW [DE] [HL]
[HL + byte]
[HL + B]
[HL + C]
$addr16 1 None
A ADD
ADDC
SUB
SUBC
AND
OR
XOR
CMP
MOV
XCH
ADD
ADDC
SUB
SUBC
AND
OR
XOR
CMP
MOV
XCH
MOV
XCH
ADD
ADDC
SUB
SUBC
AND
OR
XOR
CMP
MOV
XCH
ADD
ADDC
SUB
SUBC
AND
OR
XOR
CMP
MOV MOV
XCH
MOV
XCH
ADD
ADDC
SUB
SUBC
AND
OR
XOR
CMP
MOV
XCH
ADD
ADDC
SUB
SUBC
AND
OR
XOR
CMP
ROR
ROL
RORC
ROLC
r MOV MOV
ADD
ADDC
SUB
SUBC
AND
OR
XOR
CMP
INC
DEC
B, C DBNZ
sfr MOV MOV
saddr MOV
ADD
ADDC
SUB
SUBC
AND
OR
XOR
CMP
MOV DBNZ INC
DEC
!addr16 MOV
PSW MOV MOV PUSH
POP
[DE] MOV
[HL] MOV ROR4
ROL4
[HL + byte]
[HL + B]
[HL + C]
MOV
X MULU
C DIVUW
Note Except “r = A”
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
618
(2) 16-bit instructions
MOVW, XCHW, ADDW, SUBW, CMPW, PUSH, POP, INCW, DECW
Second Operand
First Operand
#word AX rpNote sfrp saddrp !addr16 SP None
AX ADDW
SUBW
CMPW
MOVW
XCHW
MOVW MOVW MOVW MOVW
rp MOVW MOVWNote INCW
DECW
PUSH
POP
Sfrp MOVW MOVW
saddrp MOVW MOVW
!addr16 MOVW
SP MOVW MOVW
Note Only when rp = BC, DE, HL
(3) Bit manipulation instructions
MOV1, AND1, OR1, XOR1, SET1, CLR1, NOT1, BT, BF, BTCLR
Second Operand
First Operand
A.bit sfr.bit saddr.bit PSW.bit [HL].bit CY $addr16 None
A.bit MOV1
BT
BF
BTCLR
SET1
CLR1
sfr.bit MOV1
BT
BF
BTCLR
SET1
CLR1
saddr.bit MOV1
BT
BF
BTCLR
SET1
CLR1
PSW.bit MOV1
BT
BF
BTCLR
SET1
CLR1
[HL].bit MOV1
BT
BF
BTCLR
SET1
CLR1
CY MOV1
AND1
OR1
XOR1
MOV1
AND1
OR1
XOR1
MOV1
AND1
OR1
XOR1
MOV1
AND1
OR1
XOR1
MOV1
AND1
OR1
XOR1
SET1
CLR1
NOT1
CHAPTER 25 INSTRUCTION SET
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 619
(4) Call instructions/branch instructions
CALL, CALLF, CALLT, BR, BC, BNC, BZ, BNZ, BT, BF, BTCLR, DBNZ
Second Operand
First Operand
AX !addr16 !addr11 [addr5] $addr16
Basic instruction BR CALL
BR
CALLF CALLT BR
BC
BNC
BZ
BNZ
Compound
instruction
BT
BF
BTCLR
DBNZ
(5) Other instructions
ADJBA, ADJBS, BRK, RET, RETI, RETB, SEL, NOP, EI, DI, HALT, STOP
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
620
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
VDD −0.5 to +6.5 V
EVDD −0.5 to +6.5 V
VSS −0.5 to +0.3 V
EVSS −0.5 to +0.3 V
AVREF −0.5 to VDD +0.3Note1 V
Supply voltage
AVSS −0.5 to +0.3 V
REGC pin
Input voltage
VREGC −0.5 to +3.6
and ≤ VDD
V
VI1 P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73, P80 to P87, P90,
P120, P131, X1, X2, XT1, XT2, RESET,
FLMD0
−0.3 to VDD +0.3Note1 V Input voltage
VI2 P60 to P63 N-ch open drain −0.3 to +6.5 V
Output voltage VO −0.3 to VDD +0.3Note1 V
Analog input voltage VAN ANI0 to ANI8Note2 −0.3 to AVREF +0.3Note1
and −0.3 to VDD +0.3Note1
V
Per pin P00, P01, P06,
P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73,
P120, P130, P131
−10 mA
P06, P10 to P17,
P30 to P33, P70 to P73,
P130
−55 mA
IOH
Total of all pins
−80 mA
P00, P01, P40, P41,
P120, P131
−25 mA
Per pin −0.5 IOH2
Total of all pins
P80 to P87, P90
−2
mA
Per pin −1
Output current, high
IOH3
Total of all pins
P121 to P124
−4
mA
Notes 1. Must be 6.5 V or lower.
2. ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885 and 78F0886 only.
Cautions 1. Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for
any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is
on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under
conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.
2. P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port
pins.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 621
Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
Per pin P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17,
P30 to P33, P40, P41,
P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P120,
P130, P131
30 mA
P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P130
140 mA
IOL
Total of
all pins
200 mA P00, P01, P40, P41, P120,
P131
60 mA
Per pin 1 IOL2
All pins
P80 to P87, P90
5
mA
Per pin 4
Output current, low
IOL3
All pins
P121 to P124
10
mA
In normal operation mode −40 to +85
Operating ambient
temperature
TA
In flash memory programming mode −40 to +85
°C
Storage temperature Tstg −65 to +150 °C
Cautions 1. Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for
any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is
on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under
conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.
2. P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port
pins.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
622
26.2 Oscillator Characteristics
(1) Main System Clock (Crystal/Ceramic) Oscillator Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 4.0 20
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 10
Ceramic
resonator
C1
X2X1
V
SS
C2
X1 clock
oscillation
frequency (fX)Note
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 4.0 5.0
MHz
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 4.0 20
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 10
Crystal
resonator
C1
X2X1
V
SS
C2
X1 clock
oscillation
frequency (fX)Note
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 4.0 5.0
MHz
Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.
Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the
above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.
• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.
• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.
• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.
• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.
• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.
• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.
2. Since the CPU is started by the 8 MHz internal oscillator after reset, check the oscillation
stabilization time of the main system clock using the oscillation stabilization time counter status
register (OSTC). Determine the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTC register and oscillation
stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization
time with the resonator to be used.
Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the
oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 623
(2) On-chip Internal Oscillator Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Resonator Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 7.6 8
8.4 MHz RSTS = 1
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 7.6 8 10.4 MHz
8 MHz internal oscillator Internal high-speed oscillation
clock frequency (fRH)Note
RSTS = 0 2.48 5.6 9.86 MHz
240 kHz internal oscillator 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 216 240 264 kHz
Internal low-speed oscillation
clock frequency (fRL) 1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 192 240 264 kHz
Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.
Remark RSTS: Bit 7 of the internal oscillation mode register (RCM)
(3) Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Crystal
resonator
XT1
V
SS
XT2
C4 C3
Rd
XT1 clock oscillation
frequency (fXT)Note
32 32.768 35 kHz
Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.
Cautions 1. When using the XT1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the
above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.
• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.
• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.
• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.
• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.
• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.
• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.
2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power
consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the high-speed system clock
oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem
clock is used.
Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the
oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
624
26.3 DC Characteristics
DC Characteristics (1/7)
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 4.0 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Per pin for P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73, P120, P130, P131
−3.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P70 to P73, P130
−18.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P00, P01, P40, P41, P120, P131 −12.0 mA
Output current, highNote 1 IOH1
Total of pinsNote2 −23.0 mA
IOH2 Per pin for P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD −100
μ
A
Per pin for P121 to P124
Per pin for P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73, P120, P130, P131
8.5 mA
Per pin for P60 to P63 15 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P130
45 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P00, P01, P40, P41, P120, P131 20 mA
Output current, lowNote3 IOL1Note3
Total of pinsNote2 65 mA
IOL2 Per pin for P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 400
μ
A
Per pin for P121 to P124
Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from VDD to an output
pin.
2. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from an output pin to
GND.
3. Specification under conditions where the duty factor is 70% (time for which current is output is 0.7 × t and
time for which current is not output is 0.3 × t, where t is a specific time). The total output current of the pins
at a duty factor of other than 70% can be calculated by the following expression.
• Where the duty factor of IOH is n%: Total output current of pins = (IOH × 0.7) / (n × 0.01)
<Example> Where the duty factor is 50%, IOH = 20.0 mA
Total output current of pins = (20.0 × 0.7) / (50 × 0.01) = 28.0 mA
However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A
current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin.
Caution P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.
High level output current and low level current are the spec in Duty = 70% conditions.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 625
DC Characteristics (2/7)
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD < 4.0 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Per pin for P00, P01,P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73, P120, P130, P131
−2.5 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P70 to P73, P130
−15.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P00, P01, P40, P41, P120, P131 −7.0 mA
Output current, highNote 1 IOH1
Total of pinsNote2 −18.0 mA
IOH2 Per pin for P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD −100
μ
A
Per pin for P121 to P124
Per pin for P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P120, P130,
P131
5.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P130
35 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P00, P01, P40, P41, P120, P131 15 mA
Output current, low IOL1Note3
Total of pinsNote2 50 mA
IOL2 Per pin for P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 400
μ
A
Per pin for P121 to P124
Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from VDD to an output
pin.
2. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from an output pin to
GND.
3. Specification under conditions where the duty factor is 70% (time for which current is output is 0.7 × t and
time for which current is not output is 0.3 × t, where t is a specific time). The total output current of the pins
at a duty factor of other than 70% can be calculated by the following expression.
• Where the duty factor of IOH is n%: Total output current of pins = (IOH × 0.7) / (n × 0.01)
<Example> Where the duty factor is 50%, IOH = 20.0 mA
Total output current of pins = (20.0 × 0.7) / (50 × 0.01) = 28.0 mA
However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A
current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin.
Caution P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.
High level output current and low level current are the spec in Duty = 70% conditions.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
626
DC Characteristics (3/7)
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD < 2.7 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Per pin for P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73, P120, P130, P131
−1.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P70 to P73, P130
−10 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P00, P01, P40, P41, P120, P131 −5.0 mA
Output current, highNote 1 IOH1
Total of pinsNote2 −15 mA
IOH2 Per pin for P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD −100
μ
A
Per pin for P121 to P124
Per pin for P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17 P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P120, P130,
P131
2.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P130
20 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P00, P01, P40, P41, P120, P131 9 mA
Output current, low IOL1Note3
Total of pinsNote2 29 mA
IOL2 Per pin for P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 400
μ
A
Per pin for P121 to P124
Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from VDD to an output
pin.
2. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from an output pin to
GND.
3. Specification under conditions where the duty factor is 70% (time for which current is output is 0.7 × t and
time for which current is not output is 0.3 × t, where t is a specific time). The total output current of the pins
at a duty factor of other than 70% can be calculated by the following expression.
• Where the duty factor of IOH is n%: Total output current of pins = (IOH × 0.7) / (n × 0.01)
<Example> Where the duty factor is 50%, IOH = 20.0 mA
Total output current of pins = (20.0 × 0.7) / (50 × 0.01) = 28.0 mA
However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A
current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin.
Caution P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.
High level output current and low level current are the spec in Duty = 70% conditions.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 627
DC Characteristics (4/7)
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
VIH1 P12, P13, P15, P40, P41, P70, P121 to P124 0.7VDD VDD V
VIH2 P00, P01, P06, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33,
P71 to P73, P120, P131, RESET, EXCLK, EXCLKS
0.8VDD VDD V
VIH3 P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 0.7AVREF AVREF V
Input voltage, high
VIH4 P60 to P63 0.7VDD
6.0 V
VIL1 P12, P13, P15, P40, P41, P60 to P63, P70,
P121 to P124
0 0.3VDD V
VIL2 P00, P01, P06, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33,
P71 to P73, P120, P131, RESET, EXCLK, EXCLKS
0 0.2VDD V
Input voltage, low
VIL3 P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 0 0.3AVREF V
IOH = −3.0 mA 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V VDD − 0.7 V
IOH = −2.5 mA 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V VDD − 0.5 V
VOH1
IOH = −1.0 mA
P00, P01, P06,
P10 to P17,
P30 to P33, P40,
P41, P70 to P73,
P120, P130, P131
1.8 V ≤ VDD ≤ 2.7V VDD − 0.5 V
IOH = −100
μ
AP80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD VDD − 0.5 V
Output voltage, high
VOH2
P121 to P124
IOL = 8.5 mA 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.7 V
IOL = 5.0 mA 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V 0.7 V
IOL = 2.0 mA 1.8 V ≤ VDD ≤ 2.7 V 0.5 V
IOL = 1.0 mA 1.8 V ≤ VDD ≤ 2.7 V 0.5 V
VOL1
IOL = 0.5 mA
P00, P01, P06,
P10 to P17,
P30 to P33, P40,
P41, P70 to P73,
P120, P130, P131
1.8 V ≤ VDD ≤ 2.7 V 0.4 V
P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 0.4 VOL2 IOL = 400
μ
A
P121 to P124
V
IOL = 15 mA P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 V
IOL = 5.0 mA 0.4 V
IOL = 5.0 mA 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V 0.6 V
IOL = 3.0 mA 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V 0.4 V
Output voltage, low
VOL3
IOL = 2.0 mA 1.8 V ≤ VDD ≤ 2.7 V 0.4 V
Caution P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
628
DC Characteristics (5/7)
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
ILIH1 VI = VDD P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P120,
P131, RESET, FLMD0
1
μ
A
ILIH2 VI = AVREF P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 1
μ
A
ILIH3 VI = VDD P121 to P124 I/O port mode 1
μ
A
Input leakage current,
high
(X1, X2, XT1, XT2) OSC port mode 20
μ
A
ILIL1 VI = VSS P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P120,
P131, RESET, FLMD0
−1
μ
A
ILIL2 P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD −1
μ
A
ILIL3 P121 to P124 I/O port mode −1
μ
A
Input leakage current,
low
(X1, X2, XT1, XT2) OSC port mode −20
μ
A
Pull-up resistor RU VI = VSS 10 20 100 kΩ
FLMD0 supply voltage VIL In normal operation mode 0 0.2VDD V
VIH In self programming mode 0.8 VDD VDD V
Caution P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 629
DC Characteristics (6/7)
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Square wave input 3.4 6.8
fXH = 20 MHzNote 2,
VDD = 5.0 V
Resonator connection 4.7 8.2
mA
Square wave input 1.8 3.6
fXH = 10 MHzNotes 2, 3,
VDD = 5.0 V Resonator connection 2.5 4.7
mA
Square wave input
1.7 3.5
fXH = 10 MHzNotes 2, 3,
VDD = 3.0 V
Resonator connection 2.4 4.0
mA
Square wave input 1.0 2.0
fXH = 5 MHzNotes 2, 3,
VDD = 3.0 V Resonator connection 1.4 2.4
mA
Square wave input
0.8 1.7
fXH = 5 MHzNotes 2, 3,
VDD = 2.0 V
Resonator connection 1.1 1.9
mA
fRH = 8 MHz Note 4, VDD = 5.0 V
1.5 2.7 mA
Square wave input 6 30
IDD1 Operating
mode
fSUB = 32.768 kHzNote 5,
VDD = 5.0 V Resonator connection 15 35
μ
A
Square wave input
1.0 3.9
fXH = 20 MHzNote 2,
VDD = 5.0 V
Resonator connection 2.2 5.7
mA
Square wave input
0.6 2.0
fXH = 10 MHzNotes 2, 3,
VDD = 5.0 V
Resonator connection 1.2 3.1
mA
Square wave input
0.3 1.0
fXH = 5 MHzNotes 2, 3,
VDD = 3.0 V
Resonator connection 0.6 1.5
mA
fRH = 8 MHz Note 4, VDD = 5.0 V
0.5 1.4 mA
Square wave input
3.0 27
IDD2 HALT mode
fSUB = 32.768 kHzNote 5,
VDD = 5.0 V
Resonator connection 12 32
μ
A
Supply currentNote 1
IDD3 Note 6 STOP mode VDD = 5.0 V 1 20
μ
A
Notes 1. Total current flowing into the internal power supply (VDD, EVDD), including the peripheral operation current
and the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin are fixed to VDD or VSS. However, the
current flowing into the pull-up resistors and the output current of the port is not included.
2. Not including the operating current of the 8 MHz internal oscillator, XT1 oscillation, 240 kHz internal
oscillator and the current flowing into the A/D converter, watchdog timer and LVI circuit.
3. When AMPH (bit 0 of clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)) = 0.
4. Not including the operating current of the X1 oscillation, XT1 oscillation and 240 kHz internal oscillator.
Not including the current flowing into the A/D converter, watchdog timer, LVI circuit and CAN controller.
5. Not including the operating current of the X1 oscillation, 8 MHz internal oscillator and 240 kHz internal
oscillator, and the current flowing into the A/D converter, watchdog timer and LVI circuit.
6. Not including the operating current of the 240 kHz internal oscillator and XT1 oscillation, and the current
flowing into the A/D converter, watchdog timer and LVI circuit.
Remarks 1. f
XH: High-speed system clock frequency (X1 clock oscillation frequency or external main system clock
frequency)
2. f
RH: Internal high-speed oscillation clock frequency
3. f
SUB: Subsystem clock frequency (XT1 clock oscillation frequency or external subsystem clock
frequency)
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
630
DC Characteristics (7/7)
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
A/D converter
operating current
IADCNote 1 ADCE = 1 0.86 1.9 mA
Watchdog timer
operating current
IWDTNote 2 During 240 kHz internal low-speed oscillation clock operation 5 10
μ
A
LVI operating
current
ILVINote 3 9 18
μ
A
Notes 1. Current flowing only to the A/D converter (AVREF-pin). The current value of the 78K0/FC2 is the sum of
IDD1 or IDD2 and IADC when the A/D converter operates in an operation mode or the HALT mode.
2. Current flowing only to the watchdog timer (VDD-pin) (including the operating current of the 240 kHz
internal oscillator). The current value of the 78K0/FC2 is the sum of IDD2 or IDD3 and IWDT when the
watchdog timer operates in the HALT or STOP mode.
3. Current flowing only to the LVI circuit (VDD-pin). The current value of the 78K0/FC2 is the sum of IDD2 or
IDD3 and ILVI when the LVI circuit operates in the HALT or STOP mode.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 631
26.4 AC Characteristics
(1) Basic operation
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
0.1 8
μ
s
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.2 8
μ
s
Main system clock (fXP)
operation
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 0.4 Note1 8
μ
s
Instruction cycle (minimum
instruction execution time)
TCY
Subsystem clock (fSUB) operation 114 122 125
μ
s
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
20
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 10
fPRS = fXH
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 5
MHz
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 7.6 8.4
Peripheral hardware clock
frequency
fPRS
fPRS = fRH
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V
Note2
7.6 10.4
MHz
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
4.0 20 MHz
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 10 MHz
External main system clock
frequency
fEXT
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 4.0 5 MHz
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
24
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 48
External clock input high level
width, low level width
fEXTH,
fEXTL
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 96
ns
External subsystem clock
frequency
fEXTS 32 32.768 35 kHz
External sub clock input high
level width, low level width
fEXTSH,
fEXTSL
12
μ
s
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
2/fsam +
0.1Note3
μ
s
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2/fsam +
0.2Note3
μ
s
TI000, TI010, TI011 input high-
level width, low-level width
tTIH0,
tTIL0
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 2/fsam +
0.5Note3
μ
s
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
10 MHz
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 10 MHz
TI50, TI51 input frequency fTI5
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 5 MHz
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
50 ns
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 50 ns
TI50, TI51 input high-level width,
low-level width
tTIH5,
tTIL5
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 100 ns
1
μ
s
Interrupt input high-level width,
low-level width
tINIH,
tINIL
RESET low-level width tRSL 10
μ
s
Notes 1. 0.38
μ
s when operating with the 8 MHz internal oscillator.
2. This spec is a definition of the main system clock. Therefore, peripheral hardware must use the clock of
fRH/2 or less. (VDD = 1.8 V or less)
3. TI sampling with selection count clock (fPRS, fPRS/4, fPRS/256) using bits 0 and 1 (PRM0n0, PRM0n1) of
prescaler mode registers 00 (PRM0n). Note that when selecting the TI0n0 valid edge as the count clock,
fsam = fPRS (n = 0, 1).
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
632
TCY vs. VDD (Main System Clock Operation)
Supply voltage V
DD
[V]
Cycle time T
CY
[ s]
μ
5.0
1.0
2.0
0.4
0.2
0.1
0
10.0
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
5.5
1.8
20.0
Guaranteed
operation range
8.0
2.7
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 633
AC Timing Test Points (Excluding X1, XT1)
0.8VDD
0.2VDD
Test points 0.8VDD
0.2VDD
External clock input timing
EXCLK 0.8VDD
0.2VDD
1/fEXT
tEXTL tEXTH
1/fEXTS
tEXTSL tEXTSH
EXCLKS 0.8VDD
0.2VDD
TI Timing
TI000, TI010,
TI011
tTIL0 tTIH0
TI50, TI51
1/fTI5
tTIL5 tTIH5
Interrupt Request Input Timing
INTP0 to INTP7
t
INTL
t
INTH
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
634
RESET Input Timing
RESET
t
RSL
(2) Serial interface
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
(a) UART mode (UART6n, dedicated baud rate generator output)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Transfer rate 625 kbps
Remark n = 0, 1
(b) 3-wire serial I/O mode (master mode, SCK10... internal clock output)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
200 ns
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 400
SCK10 cycle time tKCY1
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 600
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
tKCY1/2 − 20 ns
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V tKCY1/2 − 30
SCK10 high-/low-level widthNote1 tKH1,
tKL1
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V tKCY1/2 − 60
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
70 ns
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 100
SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK1
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 190
SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI1 30 ns
Delay time from SCK10↓ to
SO10 output
tKSO1 C = 50 pFNote2 40 ns
Notes 1. It is value at the time of fX use. Keep in mind that spec different at the time of fOSC8 use.
2. C is the load capacitance of the SCK10 and SO10 output lines.
(c) 3-wire serial I/O mode (slave mode, SCK10... external clock input)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
SCK10 cycle time tKCY2 400 ns
SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH2,
tKL2
t
KCY2/2 ns
SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK2 80 ns
SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI2 50 ns
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 120
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 120
Delay time from SCK10↓ to
SO10 output
tKSO2 C = 50 pFNote
1.8 V ≤ VDD < 2.7 V 180
ns
Note C is the load capacitance of the SO10 output line.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 635
Serial Transfer Timing
3-wire serial I/O mode:
SI10
SO10
t
KCYm
t
KLm
t
KHm
t
SIKm
t
KSIm
Input data
t
KSOm
Output data
SCK10
Remark m = 1, 2
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
636
(3) CAN controller
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Transfer rate 1 Mbps
Internal delay time tNODE 100 ns
CAN Internal clock
CTxD pin
(Transfer data)
CRxD pin
(Receive data)
t
output
t
input
note
Internal delay time (tNODE) = Internal Transfer Delay (toutput) + Internal Receive Delay (tinput)
Note CAN Internal clock (fCAN): CAN baud rate clock
Image figure of internal delay
78K0/FC2 CTxD pin
CRxD pin
CAN
macro
Internal Receive Delay
Internal Transfer Delay
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 637
(4) A/D Converter Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 1.8 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Resolution RES 10 bit
4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.4
2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.6
Overall errorNotes 1, 2 AINL
2.3 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V ±1.2
%FSR
4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V 6.1 36.7
2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V 12.2 36.7
Conversion time tCONV
2.3 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V 27 66.6
μ
s
4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.4
2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.6
Zero-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EZS
2.3 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V ±0.6
%FSR
4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±0.4
2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±0.6
Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS
2.3 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V ±0.6
%FSR
4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±2.5
2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±4.5
Integral non-linearity errorNote 1 ILE
2.3 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V ±6.5
LSB
4.0 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V ±1.5
2.7 V ≤ AVREF < 4.0 V ±2.0
Differential non-linearity error Note 1 DLE
2.3 V ≤ AVREF < 2.7 V ±2.0
LSB
Analog input voltage VAIN 2.3 V ≤ AVREF ≤ 5.5 V AVSS AVREF V
Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).
2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
638
(5) POC Circuit Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +85°C, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Detection voltage VPOC0 1.44 1.59 1.74 V
Power supply rise time tPTH VDD: 0 V → VPOC0 0.5 V/ms
Minimum pulse width tPW 200
μ
s
POC Circuit Timing
Supply voltage
(V
DD
)
Time
Detection voltage (MIN.)
Detection voltage (TYP.)
Detection voltage (MAX.)
t
PW
t
PTH
Caution Spec may change after device evaluation.
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 639
(6) LVI Circuit Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +85°C, VPOC ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
VLVI0 4.14 4.24 4.34 V
VLVI1 3.99 4.09 4.19 V
VLVI2 3.83 3.93 4.03 V
VLVI3 3.68 3.78 3.88 V
VLVI4 3.52 3.62 3.72 V
VLVI5 3.37 3.47 3.57 V
VLVI6 3.22 3.32 3.42 V
VLVI7 3.06 3.16 3.26 V
VLVI8 2.91 3.01 3.11 V
VLVI9 2.75 2.85 2.95 V
VLVI10 2.60 2.70 2.80 V
VLVI11 2.45 2.55 2.65 V
VLVI12 2.29 2.39 2.49 V
VLVI13 2.14 2.24 2.34 V
VLVI14 1.98 2.08 2.18 V
Supply voltage level
VLVI15 1.83 1.93 2.03 V
External input pinNote 1 EXLVI EXLVI < VDD, 1.8 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 1.11 1.21 1.31 V
Detection
voltage
Detection voltage on
application of supply
voltage
VDDLVI LVISTART (option bye) = 1 2.50 2.70 2.90 V
Minimum pulse width tLW 200
μ
s
Operation stabilization wait timeNote 2 tLWAIT1 10
μ
s
Notes 1. External input pin is alternate P120/INTP pin.
2. Time required from setting LVION to 1 to operation stabilization.
Remarks 1. V
LVIn−1 > VLVIn (n = 1 to 15)
2. V
POC < VLVIm (VPOC : Power-on clear detection voltage, m = 0 to 15)
LVI Circuit Timing
Supply voltage
(V
DD
)
Time
Detection voltage (MIN.)
Detection voltage (TYP.)
Detection voltage (MAX.)
t
LWAIT1
t
LW
LVION < -1
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
640
(7) Power Supply Starting Time
(TA = −40 to +85°C, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Starting maximum time to VDD min (1.8 V)Note
(VDD: 0 V→1.8 V)
tPUP1 LVI starting option invalid
When pin RESET intact
3.6 ms
Starting maximum time to VDD min (1.8 V)Note
(pin RESET release→VDD: 1.8 V)
tPUP2 LVI starting option invalid
When pin RESET use
1.9 ms
Note Start a power supply in time shorter than this when LVI staring option invalid.
1.8 V
0 V
POC
T
PUP1
V
DD
1.8 V
0 V
POC
T
PUP2
V
DD
RESET pin
Pin RESET intact Pin RESET use
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 641
26.5 Data Retention Characteristics
Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = −40 to +85°C)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Data retention supply voltage VDDDR 1.44Note 5.5 V
Note The value depends on the POC detection voltage. When the voltage drops, the data is retained until a POC
reset is effected, but data is not retained when a POC reset is effected.
Data Retention Timing
VDDDR
Data retention characteristics
VDD
STOP instruction execution
STOP mode
Standby release signal
(Interrupt request)
Operation
CHAPTER 26 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
642
26.6 Flash EEPROM Programming Characteristics
(1) Basic characteristics
(TA = −40 to +85°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
VDD supply current IDD fXP = 10 MHz (TYP.), 20 MHz (MAX.) 4.5 11.0 mA
All block Teraca 20 200 ms Erase timeNotes 1, 2
Block unit Terasa 20 200 ms
Write time (in 8-bit units)Note 1 Twrwa 10 100
μ
s
Number of rewrites per chip Cerwr Retention: 15 years
1 erase + 1 write after erase = 1 rewriteNote 3
100 Times
Notes 1. Characteristic of the flash memory. For the characteristic when a dedicated flash memory programmer,
PG-FP4, is used and the rewrite time during self programming,
2. The prewrite time before erasure and the erase verify time (writeback time) are not included.
3. When a product is first written after shipment, “erase → write” and “write only” are both taken as one
rewrite.
Remark SPEC may change after device evaluation.
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 643
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
27.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C) (1/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
VDD −0.5 to +6.5 V
EVDD −0.5 to +6.5 V
VSS −0.5 to +0.3 V
EVSS −0.5 to +0.3 V
AVREF −0.5 to VDD +0.3Note1 V
Supply voltage
AVSS −0.5 to +0.3 V
REGC pin
Input voltage
VREGC −0.5 to +3.6
and ≤ VDD
V
VI1 P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73, P80 to P87, P90,
P120, P131, X1, X2, XT1, XT2, RESET,
FLMD0
−0.3 to VDD +0.3Note1 V Input voltage
VI2 P60 to P63 N-ch open drain −0.3 to +6.5 V
Output voltage VO −0.3 to VDD +0.3Note1 V
Analog input voltage VAN ANI0 to ANI8Note2 −0.3 to AVREF +0.3Note1
and −0.3 to VDD +0.3Note1
V
Per pin P00, P01, P06,
P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73,
P120, P130, P131
−10 mA
P06, P10 to P17,
P30 to P33, P70 to P73,
P130
−55 mA
IOH
Total of all pins
−80 mA
P00, P01, P40, P41,
P120, P131
−25 mA
Per pin −0.5 IOH2
Total of all pins
P80 to P87, P90
−2
mA
Per pin −1
Output current, high
IOH3
Total of all pins
P121 to P124
−4
mA
Notes 1. Must be 6.5 V or lower.
2. ANI8 is
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885 and 78F0886 only.
Cautions 1. Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for
any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is
on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under
conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.
2. P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port
pins.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
644
Absolute Maximum Ratings (TA = 25°C) (2/2)
Parameter Symbol Conditions Ratings Unit
Per pin P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17,
P30 to P33, P40, P41,
P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P120,
P130, P131
30 mA
P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P130
140 mA
IOL
Total of
all pins
200 mA P00, P01, P40, P41, P120,
P131
60 mA
Per pin 1 IOL2
All pins
P80 to P87, P90
5
mA
Per pin 4
Output current, low
IOL3
All pins
P121 to P124
10
mA
In normal operation mode −40 to +125
Operating ambient
temperature
TA
In flash memory programming mode −40 to +125
°C
Storage temperature Tstg −65 to +150 °C
Cautions 1. Product quality may suffer if the absolute maximum rating is exceeded even momentarily for
any parameter. That is, the absolute maximum ratings are rated values at which the product is
on the verge of suffering physical damage, and therefore the product must be used under
conditions that ensure that the absolute maximum ratings are not exceeded.
2. P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port
pins.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 645
27.2 Oscillator Characteristics
(1) Main System Clock (Crystal/Ceramic) Oscillator Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 4.0 20
Ceramic
resonator
C1
X2X1
V
SS
C2
X1 clock
oscillation
frequency (fX)Note 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 10
MHz
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 4.0 20
Crystal
resonator
C1
X2X1
V
SS
C2
X1 clock
oscillation
frequency (fX)Note 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 10
MHz
Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.
Cautions 1. When using the X1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the
above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.
• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.
• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.
• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.
• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.
• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.
• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.
2. Since the CPU is started by the 8 MHz internal oscillator after reset, check the oscillation
stabilization time of the main system clock using the oscillation stabilization time counter status
register (OSTC). Determine the oscillation stabilization time of the OSTC register and oscillation
stabilization time select register (OSTS) after sufficiently evaluating the oscillation stabilization
time with the resonator to be used.
Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the
oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
646
(2) On-chip Internal Oscillator Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Resonator Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
RSTS = 1 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 7.6 8 8.46 MHz 8 MHz internal oscillator Internal high-speed oscillation
clock frequency (fRH)Note RSTS = 0 2.48 5.6 9.86 MHz
240 kHz internal oscillator Internal low-speed oscillation
clock frequency (fRL)Note
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 216 240 264 kHz
Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.
Remark RSTS: Bit 7 of the internal oscillation mode register (RCM)
(3) Subsystem Clock Oscillator Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Resonator Recommended Circuit Parameter Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Crystal
resonator
XT1
V
SS
XT2
C4 C3
Rd
XT1 clock oscillation
frequency (fXT)Note
32 32.768 35 kHz
Note Indicates only oscillator characteristics. Refer to AC Characteristics for instruction execution time.
Cautions 1. When using the XT1 oscillator, wire as follows in the area enclosed by the broken lines in the
above figures to avoid an adverse effect from wiring capacitance.
• Keep the wiring length as short as possible.
• Do not cross the wiring with the other signal lines.
• Do not route the wiring near a signal line through which a high fluctuating current flows.
• Always make the ground point of the oscillator capacitor the same potential as VSS.
• Do not ground the capacitor to a ground pattern through which a high current flows.
• Do not fetch signals from the oscillator.
2. The subsystem clock oscillator is designed as a low-amplitude circuit for reducing power
consumption, and is more prone to malfunction due to noise than the high-speed system clock
oscillator. Particular care is therefore required with the wiring method when the subsystem
clock is used.
Remark For the resonator selection and oscillator constant, customers are requested to either evaluate the
oscillation themselves or apply to the resonator manufacturer for evaluation.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 647
27.3 DC Characteristics
DC Characteristics (1/6)
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 4.0 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Per pin for P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73, P120, P130, P131
−1.5 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P70 to P73, P130
−10.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P00, P01, P40, P41, P120, P131 −6.0 mA
Output current, highNote 1 IOH1
Total of pinsNote2 −14.0 mA
IOH2 Per pin for P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD −100
μ
A
Per pin for P121 to P124
Per pin for P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73, P120, P130, P131
4.0 mA
Per pin for P60 to P63 8.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P130
20 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P00, P01, P40, P41, P120, P131 10 mA
Output current, lowNote3 IOL1Note3
Total of pinsNote2 30 mA
IOL2 Per pin for P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 400
μ
A
Per pin for P121 to P124
Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from VDD to an output
pin.
2. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from an output pin to
GND.
3. Specification under conditions where the duty factor is 70% (time for which current is output is 0.7 × t and
time for which current is not output is 0.3 × t, where t is a specific time). The total output current of the pins
at a duty factor of other than 70% can be calculated by the following expression.
• Where the duty factor of IOH is n%: Total output current of pins = (IOH × 0.7) / (n × 0.01)
<Example> Where the duty factor is 50%, IOH = 20.0 mA
Total output current of pins = (20.0 × 0.7) / (50 × 0.01) = 28.0 mA
However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A
current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin.
Caution P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.
High level output current and low level current are the spec in Duty = 70% conditions.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
648
DC Characteristics (2/6)
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD < 4.0 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Per pin for P00, P01,P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P70 to P73, P120, P130, P131
−1.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P70 to P73, P130
−8.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P00, P01, P40, P41, P120, P131 −4.0 mA
Output current, highNote 1 IOH1
Total of pinsNote2 −12.0 mA
IOH2 Per pin for P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD −100
μ
A
Per pin for P121 to P124
Per pin for P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P120, P130,
P131
2.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P130
16.0 mA
Total of pinsNote2 P00, P01, P40, P41, P120, P131 8.0 mA
Output current, low IOL1Note3
Total of pinsNote2 24.0 mA
IOL2 Per pin for P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 400
μ
A
Per pin for P121 to P124
Notes 1. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from VDD to an output
pin.
2. Value of current at which the device operation is guaranteed even if the current flows from an output pin to
GND.
3. Specification under conditions where the duty factor is 70% (time for which current is output is 0.7 × t and
time for which current is not output is 0.3 × t, where t is a specific time). The total output current of the pins
at a duty factor of other than 70% can be calculated by the following expression.
• Where the duty factor of IOH is n%: Total output current of pins = (IOH × 0.7) / (n × 0.01)
<Example> Where the duty factor is 50%, IOH = 20.0 mA
Total output current of pins = (20.0 × 0.7) / (50 × 0.01) = 28.0 mA
However, the current that is allowed to flow into one pin does not vary depending on the duty factor. A
current higher than the absolute maximum rating must not flow into one pin.
Caution P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.
High level output current and low level current are the spec in Duty = 70% conditions.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 649
DC Characteristics (3/6)
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
VIH1 P12, P13, P15, P40, P41, P70, P121 to P124 0.7VDD VDD V
VIH2 P00, P01, P06, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33,
P71 to P73, P120, P131, RESET, EXCLK, EXCLKS
0.8VDD VDD V
VIH3 P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 0.7AVREF AVREF V
Input voltage, high
VIH4 P60 to P63 0.7VDD
6.0 V
VIL1 P12, P13, P15, P40, P41, P60 to P63, P70,
P121 to P124
0 0.3VDD V
VIL2 P00, P01, P06, P10, P11, P14, P16, P17, P30 to P33,
P60 toP63, P71 to P73, P120, P131, RESET, EXCLK,
EXCLKS
0 0.2VDD V
Input voltage, low
VIL3 P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 0 0.3AVREF V
IOH = −1.5 mA 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V VDD − 0.7 V VOH1
IOH = −1.0 mA
P00, P01, P06,
P10 to P17,
P30 to P33, P40,
P41, P70 to P73,
P120, P130, P131
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V VDD − 0.7 V
IOH = −100
μ
AP80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD VDD − 0.5 V
Output voltage, high
VOH2
P121 to P124
IOL = 4.0mA 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 0.7 V
VOL1
IOL = 2.0 mA
P00, P01, P06,
P10 to P17,
P30 to P33, P40,
P41, P70 to P73,
P120, P130, P131
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V 0.7 V
P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 0.4 VOL2 IOL = 400
μ
A
P121 to P124
V
IOL = 8 mA P60 to P63 4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 2.0 V
IOL = 2.0 mA 0.6 V
Output voltage, low
VOL3
IOL = 2.0 mA 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V 0.6 V
Caution P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
650
DC Characteristics (4/6)
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
ILIH1 VI = VDD P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P120,
P131, RESET, FLMD0
5
μ
A
ILIH2 VI = AVREF P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD 5
μ
A
ILIH3 VI = VDD P121 to P124 I/O port mode 5
μ
A
Input leakage current,
high
(X1, X2, XT1, XT2) OSC port mode 20
μ
A
ILIL1 VI = VSS P00, P01, P06, P10 to P17, P30 to P33,
P40, P41, P60 to P63, P70 to P73, P120,
P131, RESET, FLMD0
−5
μ
A
ILIL2 P80 to P87, P90 AVREF = VDD −5
μ
A
ILIL3 P121 to P124 I/O port mode −5
μ
A
Input leakage current,
low
(X1, X2, XT1, XT2) OSC port mode −20
μ
A
Pull-up resistor RU VI = VSS 10 20 100 kΩ
FLMD0 supply voltage VIL In normal operation mode 0 0.2VDD V
VIH In self programming mode 0.8 VDD VDD V
Caution P06, P63, P90 and P131 are
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886 only.
Remark Unless specified otherwise, the characteristics of alternate-function pins are the same as those of port pins.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 651
DC Characteristics (5/6)
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Square wave input 3.4 10.3
fXH = 20 MHzNote2,
VDD = 5.0 V
Resonator connection 4.7 12.5
mA
Square wave input 1.8 5.4
fXH = 10 MHzNotes2, 3,
VDD = 5.0 V Resonator connection 2.5 7.2
mA
Square wave input
1.7 5.4
fXH = 10 MHzNotes2, 3,
VDD = 3.0 V
Resonator connection 2.4 6.0
mA
Square wave input 1.0 3.0
fXH = 5 MHzNotes2, 3,
VDD = 3.0 V Resonator connection 1.4 3.6
mA
fRH = 8 MHzNote4, VDD = 5.0 V
1.5 4.2 mA
Square wave input 6 138
IDD1 Operating
mode
fSUB = 32.768 kHzNote5,
VDD = 5.0 V Resonator connection 15 145
μ
A
Square wave input
1.0 5.9
fXH = 20 MHzNote2,
VDD = 5.0 V
Resonator connection 2.2 8.6
mA
Square wave input
0.6 3.1
fXH = 10 MHzNotes2, 3,
VDD = 5.0 V
Resonator connection 1.2 4.7
mA
Square wave input
0.3 1.6
fXH = 5 MHzNotes2, 3,
VDD = 3.0 V
Resonator connection 0.6 2.4
mA
fRH = 8 MHzNote4, VDD = 5.0 V
0.5 2.1 mA
Square wave input
3.0 133
IDD2 HALT mode
fSUB = 32.768 kHzNote5,
VDD = 5.0 V
Resonator connection 12 138
μ
A
Supply currentNote1
IDD3Note 6 STOP mode VDD = 5.0 V 1 100
μ
A
Notes 1. Total current flowing into the internal power supply (VDD, EVDD), including the peripheral operation current
and the input leakage current flowing when the level of the input pin are fixed to VDD or VSS. However, the
current flowing into the pull-up resistors and the output current of the port is not included.
2. Not including the operating current of the 8 MHz internal oscillator, XT1 oscillation, 240 kHz internal
oscillator and the current flowing into the A/D converter, watchdog timer and LVI circuit.
3. When AMPH (bit 0 of clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)) = 0.
4. Not including the operating current of the X1 oscillation, XT1 oscillation and 240 kHz internal oscillator.
Not including the current flowing into the A/D converter, watchdog timer, LVI circuit and CAN controller.
5. Not including the operating current of the X1 oscillation, 8 MHz internal oscillator and 240 kHz internal
oscillator, and the current flowing into the A/D converter, watchdog timer and LVI circuit.
6. Not including the operating current of the 240 kHz internal oscillator and XT1 oscillation, and the current
flowing into the A/D converter, watchdog timer and LVI circuit.
Remarks 1. f
XH: High-speed system clock frequency (X1 clock oscillation frequency or external main system clock
frequency)
2. f
RH: Internal high-speed oscillation clock frequency
3. f
SUB: Subsystem clock frequency (XT1 clock oscillation frequency or external subsystem clock
frequency)
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
652
DC Characteristics (6/6)
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
A/D converter
operating current
IADCNote 1 ADCE = 1 0.86 2.9 mA
Watchdog timer
operating current
IWDTNote 2 During 240 kHz internal low-speed oscillation clock operation 5 15
μ
A
LVI operating
current
ILVINote 3 9 27
μ
A
Notes 1. Current flowing only to the A/D converter (AVREF-pin). The current value of the 78K0/FC2 is the sum of
IDD1 or IDD2 and IADC when the A/D converter operates in an operation mode or the HALT mode.
2. Current flowing only to the watchdog timer (VDD-pin) (including the operating current of the 240 kHz
internal oscillator). The current value of the 78K0/FC2 is the sum of IDD2 or IDD3 and IWDT when the
watchdog timer operates in the HALT or STOP mode.
3. Current flowing only to the LVI circuit (VDD-pin). The current value of the 78K0/FC2 is the sum of IDD2 or
IDD3 and ILVI when the LVI circuit operates in the HALT or STOP mode.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 653
27.4 AC Characteristics
(1) Basic operation
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
0.1 8
μ
s
Main system clock (fXP)
operation 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 0.2 8
μ
s
Instruction cycle (minimum
instruction execution time)
TCY
Subsystem clock (fSUB) operation 114 122 125
μ
s
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
20 fPRS = fXH
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 10
MHz
Peripheral hardware clock
frequency
fPRS
fPRS = fRH 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 7.6 8.46 MHz
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
4.0 20 MHz
External main system clock
frequency
fEXT
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 4.0 10 MHz
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
24
External clock input high level
width, low level width
fEXTH,
fEXTL 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 48
ns
External subsystem clock
frequency
fEXTS 32 32.768 35 kHz
External sub clock input high
level width, low level width
fEXTSH,
fEXTSL
12
μ
s
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
2/fsam +
0.1Note
μ
s
TI000, TI010, TI011 input high-
level width, low-level width
tTIH0,
tTIL0
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 2/fsam +
0.2Note
μ
s
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
10 MHz TI50, TI51 input frequency fTI5
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 10 MHz
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
50 ns
TI50, TI51 input high-level width,
low-level width
tTIH5,
tTIL5 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 50 ns
1
μ
s
Interrupt input high-level width,
low-level width
tINIH,
tINIL
RESET low-level width tRSL 10
μ
s
Note TI sampling with selection count clock (fPRS, fPRS/4, fPRS/256) using bits 0 and 1 (PRM0n0, PRM0n1) of prescaler
mode registers 00 (PRM0n). Note that when selecting the TI0n0 valid edge as the count clock, fsam = fPRS (n = 0,
1).
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
654
TCY vs. VDD (Main System Clock Operation)
Supply voltage VDD [V]
Cycle time T
CY
[ s]
μ
5.0
1.0
2.0
0.4
0.2
0.1
0
10.0
1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
5.5
20.0
Guaranteed
operation range
8.0
2.7
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 655
AC Timing Test Points (Excluding X1, XT1)
0.8VDD
0.2VDD
Test points 0.8VDD
0.2VDD
External clock input timing
EXCLK 0.8VDD
0.2VDD
1/fEXT
tEXTL tEXTH
1/fEXTS
tEXTSL tEXTSH
EXCLKS 0.8VDD
0.2VDD
TI Timing
TI000, TI010,
TI011
tTIL0 tTIH0
TI50, TI51
1/fTI5
tTIL5 tTIH5
Interrupt Request Input Timing
INTP0 to INTP7
t
INTL
t
INTH
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
656
RESET Input Timing
RESET
t
RSL
(2) Serial interface
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
(a) UART mode (UART6n, dedicated baud rate generator output)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Transfer rate 625 kbps
Remark n = 0, 1
(b) 3-wire serial I/O mode (master mode, SCK10... internal clock output)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
200 ns SCK10 cycle time tKCY1
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 400
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
tKCY1/2 − 20 ns SCK10 high-/low-level widthNote1 tKH1,
tKL1 2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V tKCY1/2 − 30
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V
70 ns SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK1
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 100
SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI1 30 ns
Delay time from SCK10↓ to
SO10 output
tKSO1 C = 50 pFNote2 40 ns
Notes 1. It is value at the time of fX use. Keep in mind that spec different at the time of fOSC8 use.
2. C is the load capacitance of the SCK10 and SO10 output lines.
(c) 3-wire serial I/O mode (slave mode, SCK10... external clock input)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
SCK10 cycle time tKCY2 400 ns
SCK10 high-/low-level width tKH2,
tKL2
t
KCY2/2 ns
SI10 setup time (to SCK10↑) tSIK2 80 ns
SI10 hold time (from SCK10↑) tKSI2 50 ns
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 120
Delay time from SCK10↓ to
SO10 output
tKSO2 C = 50 pFNote
2.7 V ≤ VDD < 4.0 V 120
ns
Note C is the load capacitance of the SO10 output line.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 657
Serial Transfer Timing
3-wire serial I/O mode:
SI10
SO10
t
KCYm
t
KLm
t
KHm
t
SIKm
t
KSIm
Input data
t
KSOm
Output data
SCK10
Remark m = 1, 2
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
658
(3) CAN controller
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Transfer rate 1 Mbps
Internal delay time tNODE 100 ns
CAN Internal clock
CTxD pin
(Transfer data)
CRxD pin
(Receive data)
t
output
t
input
note
Internal delay time (tNODE) = Internal Transfer Delay (toutput) + Internal Receive Delay (tinput)
Note CAN Internal clock (fCAN): CAN baud rate clock
Image figure of internal delay
78K0/FC2 CTxD pin
CRxD pin
CAN
macro
Internal Receive Delay
Internal Transfer Delay
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 659
(4) A/D Converter Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V, 2.7 V ≤ AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = AVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Resolution RES 10 bit
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V ±0.4 Overall errorNotes 1, 2 AINL
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V ±0.6
%FSR
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 6.1 36.7 Conversion time tCONV
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V 12.2 36.7
μ
s
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V ±0.4 Zero-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EZS
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V ±0.6
%FSR
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V ±0.4 Full-scale errorNotes 1, 2 EFS
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V ±0.6
%FSR
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V ±2.5 Integral non-linearity errorNote 1 ILE
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V ±4.5
LSB
4.0 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V ±1.5 Differential non-linearity error Note 1 DLE
2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 4.0 V ±2.0
LSB
Analog input voltage VAIN AVSS AVREF V
Notes 1. Excludes quantization error (±1/2 LSB).
2. This value is indicated as a ratio (%FSR) to the full-scale value.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
660
(5) POC Circuit Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +125°C, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Detection voltage VPOC0 1.44 1.59 1.74 V
Power supply rise time tPTH VDD: 0 V → VPOC0 0.5 V/ms
Minimum pulse width tPW 200
μ
s
POC Circuit Timing
Supply voltage
(V
DD
)
Time
Detection voltage (MIN.)
Detection voltage (TYP.)
Detection voltage (MAX.)
t
PW
t
PTH
Caution Spec may change after device evaluation.
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 661
(6) LVI Circuit Characteristics
(TA = −40 to +125°C, VPOC ≤ VDD = EVDD = 0 V ≤ 5.5 V, AVREF ≤ VDD, VSS = EVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
VLVI0 4.14 4.24 4.34 V
VLVI1 3.99 4.09 4.19 V
VLVI2 3.83 3.93 4.03 V
VLVI3 3.68 3.78 3.88 V
VLVI4 3.52 3.62 3.72 V
VLVI5 3.37 3.47 3.57 V
VLVI6 3.22 3.32 3.42 V
VLVI7 3.06 3.16 3.26 V
VLVI8 2.91 3.01 3.11 V
Supply voltage level
VLVI9 2.75 2.85 2.95 V
External input pinNote 1 EXLVI EXLVI < VDD, 2.7 V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5 V 1.11 1.21 1.31 V
Detection
voltage
Detection voltage on
application of supply
voltage
VDDLVI LVISTART (option bye) = 1 2.50 2.70 2.90 V
Minimum pulse width tLW 200
μ
s
Operation stabilization wait time Note 2 tLWAIT1 10
μ
s
Notes 1. External input pin is alternate P120/INTP pin.
2. Time required from setting LVION to 1 to operation stabilization.
Remarks 1. V
LVIn−1 > VLVIn (n = 1 to 15)
2. V
POC < VLVIm (VPOC : Power-on clear detection voltage, m = 0 to 15)
LVI Circuit Timing
Supply voltage
(V
DD
)
Time
Detection voltage (MIN.)
Detection voltage (TYP.)
Detection voltage (MAX.)
t
LWAIT1
t
LW
LVION < -1
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
662
(7) Power Supply Starting Time
(TA = −40 to +125°C, VSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Starting maximum time to VDD min (2.7 V)Note
(VDD: 0 V→2.7 V)
tPUP1 LVI starting option invalid
When pin RESET intact
3.6 ms
Starting maximum time to VDD min (2.7 V)Note
(pin RESET release→VDD: 2.7 V)
tPUP2 LVI starting option invalid
When pin RESET use
1.9 ms
Note Start a power supply in time shorter than this when LVI staring option invalid.
2.7 V
0 V
POC
T
PUP1
V
DD
2.7 V
0 V
POC
T
PUP2
V
DD
RESET pin
Pin RESET intact Pin RESET use
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 663
27.5 Data Retention Characteristics
Data Memory STOP Mode Low Supply Voltage Data Retention Characteristics (TA = −40 to +125°C)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
Data retention supply voltage VDDDR 1.44Note 5.5 V
Note The value depends on the POC detection voltage. When the voltage drops, the data is retained until a POC
reset is effected, but data is not retained when a POC reset is effected.
Data Retention Timing
VDDDR
Data retention characteristics
VDD
STOP instruction execution
STOP mode
Standby release signal
(Interrupt request)
Operation
CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
664
27.6 Flash EEPROM Programming Characteristics
(1) Basic characteristics
(TA = −40 to +125°C, 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD = 0 V ≤ 5.5 V, VSS = EVSS = 0 V)
Parameter Symbol Conditions MIN. TYP. MAX. Unit
VDD supply current IDD fXP = 10 MHz (TYP.), 20 MHz (MAX.) 4.5 16 mA
All block Teraca 20 200 ms Erase timeNotes 1, 2
Block unit Terasa 20 200 ms
Write time (in 8-bit units)Note 1 Twrwa 10 100
μ
s
Number of rewrites per chip Cerwr Retention: 15 years
1 erase + 1 write after erase = 1 rewriteNote 3
100 Times
Notes 1. Characteristic of the flash memory. For the characteristic when a dedicated flash memory programmer,
PG-FP4, is used and the rewrite time during self programming,
2. The prewrite time before erasure and the erase verify time (writeback time) are not included.
3. When a product is first written after shipment, “erase → write” and “write only” are both taken as one
rewrite.
Remark SPEC may change after device evaluation.
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 665
CHAPTER 28 PACKAGE DRAWINGS
•
μ
PD78F0881GB(A)-GAF-AX, 78F0881GB(A2)-GAF-AX, 78F0882GB(A)-GAF-AX, 78F0882GB(A2)-GAF-AX,
78F0883GB(A)-GAF-AX, 78F0883GB(A2)-GAF-AX
S
y
e
Sxb
M
θ
L
c
Lp
HD
HE
ZD
ZE
L1
A1
A2
A
D
E
A3
S
0.125 +0.075
−0.025
(UNIT:mm)
ITEM DIMENSIONS
D
E
HD
HE
A
A1
A2
A3
10.00±0.20
10.00±0.20
12.00±0.20
12.00±0.20
1.60 MAX.
0.10±0.05
1.40±0.05
0.25
c
θ
e
x
y
ZD
ZE
0.80
0.20
0.10
1.00
1.00
L
Lp
L1
0.50
0.60±0.15
1.00±0.20
P44GB-80-GAF
3°+5°
−3°
NOTE
Each lead centerline is located within 0.20 mm of
its true position at maximum material condition.
detail of lead end
44-PIN PLASTIC LQFP (10x10)
0.35+0.08
−0.04
b
11
22
44 12
23
34
33
1
CHAPTER 27 PACKAGE DRAWINGS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
666
•
μ
PD78F0884GA(A)-GAM-AX, 78F0884GA(A2)-GAM-AX, 78F0885GA(A)-GAM-AX, 78F0885GA(A2)-GAM-AX,
78F0886GA(A)-GAM-AX, 78F0886GA(A2)-GAM-AX
48-PIN PLASTIC LQFP (FINE PITCH) (7x7)
S
y
e
Sxb M
θ
L
c
Lp
HD
HE
ZD
ZE
L1
A1
A2
A
D
E
A3
S
0.125 +0.075
−0.025
(UNIT:mm)
ITEM DIMENSIONS
D
E
HD
HE
A
A1
A2
A3
7.00±0.20
7.00±0.20
9.00±0.20
9.00±0.20
1.60 MAX.
0.10±0.05
1.40±0.05
0.25
c
θ
e
x
y
ZD
ZE
0.50
0.08
0.08
0.75
0.75
L
Lp
L1
0.50
0.60±0.15
1.00±0.20
P48GA-50-GAM
3°+5°
−3°
NOTE
Each lead centerline is located within 0.08 mm of
its true position at maximum material condition.
detail of lead end
0.20
b
12
24
1
48 13
25
37
36
+0.07
−0.03
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 667
CHAPTER 29 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS
These products should be soldered and mounted under the following recommended conditions.
For soldering methods and conditions other than those recommended below, please contact an NEC Electronics
sales representative.
For technical information, see the following website.
Semiconductor Device Mount Manual (http://www.necel.com/pkg/en/mount/index.html)
Table 29-1. Surface Mounting Type Soldering Conditions
• 44-pin plastic LQFP (10 × 10)
μ
PD78F0881GB(A)-GAF-AX, 78F0881GB(A2)-GAF-AX, 78F0882GB(A)-GAF-AX, 78F0882GB(A2)-GAF-AX,
78F0883GB(A)-GAF-AX, 78F0883GB(A2)-GAF-AX
• 48-pin plastic LQFP (7 × 7)
μ
PD78F0884GA(A)-GAM-AX, 78F0884GA(A2)-GAM-AX, 78F0885GA(A)-GAM-AX, 78F0885GA(A2)-GAM-AX,
78F0886GA(A)-GAM-AX, 78F0886GA(A2)-GAM-AX
Soldering Method Soldering Conditions Recommended
Condition Symbol
Infrared reflow Package peak temperature: 260°C, Time: 60 seconds max. (at 220°C or higher),
Count: 3 times or less, Exposure limit: 7 daysNote (after that, prebake at 125°C for
20 to 72 hours)
IR60-207-3
Partial heating Pin temperature: 350°C max., Time: 3 seconds max. (per pin row) −
Note After opening the dry pack, store it at 25°C or less and 65% RH or less for the allowable storage period.
Caution Do not use different soldering methods together (except for partial heating).
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
668
CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT
30.1 Cautions for Wait
This product has two internal system buses.
One is a CPU bus and the other is a peripheral bus that interfaces with the low-speed peripheral hardware.
Because the clock of the CPU bus and the clock of the peripheral bus are asynchronous, unexpected illegal data
may be passed if an access to the CPU conflicts with an access to the peripheral hardware.
When accessing the peripheral hardware that may cause a conflict, therefore, the CPU repeatedly executes
processing, until the correct data is passed.
As a result, the CPU does not start the next instruction processing but waits. If this happens, the number of
execution clocks of an instruction increases by the number of wait clocks (for the number of wait clocks, see Table 30-
1). This must be noted when real-time processing is performed.
CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 669
30.2 Peripheral Hardware That Generates Wait
Table 30-1 lists the registers that issue a wait request when accessed by the CPU, and the number of CPU wait
clocks.
Table 30-1. Registers That Generate Wait and Number of CPU Wait Clocks
Peripheral
Hardware
Register Access Number of Wait Clocks
Serial interface
UART60
ASIS60 Read 1 clock (fixed)
Serial interface
UART61
ASIS61 Read 1 clock (fixed)
ADM Write
ADS Write
ADPC Write
ADCR Read
1 to 5 clocks (when fAD = fPRS/2 is selected)
1 to 7 clocks (when fAD = fPRS/3 is selected)
1 to 9 clocks (when fAD = fPRS/4 is selected)
2 to 13 clocks (when fAD = fPRS/6 is selected)
2 to 17 clocks (when fAD = fPRS/8 is selected)
2 to 25 clocks (when fAD = fPRS/12 is selected)
A/D converter
The above number of clocks is when the same source clock is selected for fCPU and fPRS. The number of wait
clocks can be calculated by the following expression and under the following conditions.
<Calculating number of wait clocks>
• Number of wait clocks = 2 fCPU
fAD + 1
* Fraction is truncated if the number of wait clocks ≤ 0.5 and rounded up if the number of wait clocks > 0.5.
fAD: A/D conversion clock frequency (fPRS/2 to fPRS/12)
fCPU: CPU clock frequency
fPRS: Peripheral hardware clock frequency
fXP: Main system clock frequency
<Conditions for maximum/minimum number of wait clocks>
• Maximum number of times: Maximum speed of CPU (fXP), lowest speed of A/D conversion clock (fPRS/12)
• Minimum number of times: Minimum speed of CPU (fSUB/2), highest speed of A/D conversion clock (fPRS/2)
Caution When the CPU is operating on the subsystem clock and the peripheral hardware clock is stopped,
do not access the registers listed above using an access method in which a wait request is issued.
CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
670
Table 30-2 RAM Access That Generate Wait and Number of CPU Wait Clocks
number of wait clocks
Peripheral
Hardware
Register Access
MIN. MAX.
Cause
Global Reg.
CANmodule
Reg.
Read/Write 1 1 synchronizaition of NPB signals with VPCLK
<Calculating number of wait clocks>
MIN. ROUNDUP[(1/FVPCLK) × 1/(1/FVPSTB)]
MAX. ROUNDUP[(1/FVPCLK) × 2/(1/FVPSTB)]
C0RGPT
C0LIPT
C0TGPT
C0LOPT
Message Buf.
Read 2 14 Synchronization of NPB signals with VPCLK
RAM access delay (1 RAM – RD access)
<Calculating number of wait clocks>
MIN. ROUNDUP[(1/FCANCLK) × 3/(1/FVPSTB)]
MAX. ROUNDUP[(1/FCANCLK) × 4/(1/FVPSTB)]
Message Buf. Write(8 bit) 2 17 synchronization of NPB signals with VPCLK
RAM access delay (1RAM – RD + 1RAM – WR
access)
<Calculating number of wait clocks>
MIN. ROUNDUP[(1/FCANCLK) × 4/(1/FVPSTB)]
MAX. ROUNDUP[(1/FCANCLK) × 5/(1/FVPSTB)]
CAN
Message Buf. Write(16 bit) 1 11 synchronization of NPB signals with VPCLK
RAM access delay (1 RAM – WR access)
<Calculating number of wait clocks>
MIN. ROUNDUP[(1/FCANCLK) × 2/(1/FVPSTB)]
MAX. ROUNDUP[(1/FCANCLK) × 3/(1/FVPSTB)]
Caution When Value is ΦCANMOD(CAN module system clock) ≥ 2 MHz.
Remark FVPCLK: VPCLK frequency
F
VPSTB: VPSTB frequency
F
CANCLK: AFCAN macro frequency
CHAPTER 30 CAUTIONS FOR WAIT
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 671
30.3 Example of Wait Occurrence
• Serial interface UART61
<On execution of MOV A, ASIS61>
Number of execution clocks: 6
(5 clocks when data is read from a register that does not issue a wait (MOV A, sfr).)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
672
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
The following development tools are available for the development of systems that employ the 78K0/FC2.
Figure A-1 shows the development tool configuration.
• Support for PC98-NX series
Unless otherwise specified, products supported by IBM PC/ATTM compatibles are compatible with PC98-NX
series computers. When using PC98-NX series computers, refer to the explanation for IBM PC/AT compatibles.
• WindowsTM
Unless otherwise specified, “Windows” means the following OSs.
• Windows 98
• Windows NTTM
• Windows 2000
• Windows XPTM
Caution For the development tools of the 78K0/FC2, contact an NEC Electronics sales representative.
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 673
Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration (1/3)
(1) When using the in-circuit emulator QB-78K0FX2
Language processing software
• Assembler package
• C compiler package
• Device fileNote 1
• C library source fileNote 2
Debugging software
• Integrated debuggerNote 4
• System simulator
Host machine
(PC or EWS)
QB-78K0FX2Note 4
Emulation probe
Target system
Flash memory
programmerNote 4
Flash memory
write adapter
Flash memory
• Software package
• Project manager
Software package
Flash memory
write environment
Control software
(Windows only)Note 3
Power supply unit
Note 4
USB interface cableNote 4
Notes 1. Download the device file for 78K0/FC2 (DF780893) from the download site for development tools
(http://www.necel.com/micro/ods/eng/index.html).
2. The C library source file is not included in the software package.
3. The project manager PM+ is included in the assembler package.
PM+ is only used for Windows.
4. In-circuit emulator QB-78K0FX2 is supplied with integrated debugger ID78K0-QB, simple flash memory
programmer PG-FPL3, power supply unit, and USB interface cable. Any other products are sold
separately.
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
674
Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration (2/3)
(2) When using the on-chip debug emulator QB-78K0MINI
Language processing software
• Assembler package
• C compiler package
• Device file
Note 1
• C library source file
Note 2
Debugging software
• Integrated debugger
Note 4
• System simulator
Host machine
(PC or EWS)
USB interface cable
Note 4
QB-78K0MINI
Note 4
Connection cable
Note 4
Target connector
Target system
Flash memory
programmer
Flash memory
write adapter
Flash memory
• Software package
• Project manager
Software package
Flash memory
write environment
Control software
(Windows only)
Note 3
Notes 1. Download the device file for 78K0/FC2 (DF780893) from the download site for development tools
(http://www.necel.com/micro/ods/eng/index.html).
2. The C library source file is not included in the software package.
3. The project manager PM+ is included in the assembler package.
PM+ is only used for Windows.
4. On-chip debug emulator QB-78K0MINI is supplied with integrated debugger ID78K0-QB, USB
interface cable, and connection cable. Any other products are sold separately.
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 675
Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration (3/3)
(3) When using the on-chip debug emulator with programming function QB-MINI2
Language processing software
• Assembler package
• C compiler package
• Device file
Note 1
• C library source file
Note 2
Debugging software
• Integrated debugger
Note 1
• System simulator
Host machine
(PC or EWS)
USB interface cable
Note 4
QB-MINI2
Note 4
78K0-OCD board
Note 4
Target connector
Target system
• Software package
• Project manager
Software package
<When using QB-MINI2 as
a flash memory programmer>
Control software
(Windows only)
Note 3
<When using QB-MINI2 as
an on-chip degug emulator>
Connection cable
(10-pin/16-pin cable)
Note 4
QB-MINI2
Note 4
Connection cable
(16-pin cable)
Note 4
Notes 1. Download the device file for 78K0/FC2 (DF780893) and the integrated debugger (ID78K0-QB) from the
download site for development tools (http://www.necel.com/micro/ods/eng/index.html).
2. The C library source file is not included in the software package.
3. The project manager PM+ is included in the assembler package.
The PM+ is only used for Windows.
4. On-chip debug emulator QB-MINI2 is supplied with USB interface cable, connection cables (10-pin
cable and 16-pin cable), and 78K0-OCD board. Any other products are sold separately. In addition,
download the software for operating the QB-MINI2 from the download site for development tools
(http://www.necel.com/micro/ods/eng/index.html).
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
676
A.1 Software Package
Development tools (software) common to the 78K/0 Series are combined in this package.
SP78K0
78K/0 Series software package Part number:
μ
S××××SP78K0
Remark ×××× in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used.
μ
S××××SP78K0
×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium
AB17 Windows (Japanese version)
BB17
PC-9800 series,
IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version)
CD-ROM
A.2 Language Processing Software
This assembler converts programs written in mnemonics into object codes executable
with a microcontroller.
This assembler is also provided with functions capable of automatically creating symbol
tables and branch instruction optimization.
This assembler should be used in combination with a device file (DF780893)
<Precaution when using RA78K0 in PC environment>
This assembler package is a DOS-based application. It can also be used in Windows,
however, by using the project manager (included in assembler package) on Windows.
RA78K0
Assembler package
Part number:
μ
S××××RA78K0
This compiler converts programs written in C language into object codes executable with
a microcontroller.
This compiler should be used in combination with an assembler package and device file
(both sold separately).
<Precaution when using CC78K0 in PC environment>
This C compiler package is a DOS-based application. It can also be used in Windows,
however, by using the project manager (included in assembler package) on Windows.
CC78K0
C compiler package
Part number:
μ
S××××CC78K0
This file contains information peculiar to the device.
This device file should be used in combination with a tool (RA78K0, CC78K0, and
ID78K0-QB) (all sold separately).
The corresponding OS and host machine differ depending on the tool to be used (all sold
separately).
DF780893Note 1
Device file
Part number:
μ
S××××DF780893
This is a source file of the functions that configure the object library included in the C
compiler package (CC78K0).
This file is required to match the object library included in the C compiler package to the
user’s specifications.
CC78K/0-LNote 2
C library source file
Part number:
μ
S××××CC78K0-L
Notes 1. The DF780893 can be used in common with the RA78K0, CC78K0, and ID78K0-QB. Download the
DF780893 from the download site for development tools
(http://www.necel.com/micro/ods/eng/index.html).
2. The CC78K0-L is not included in the software package (SP78K0).
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 677
Remark ×××× in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used.
μ
S××××RA78K0
μ
S××××CC78K0
μ
S××××CC78K0-L
×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium
AB17 Windows (Japanese version)
BB17
PC-9800 series,
IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version)
3P17 HP9000 series 700TM HP-UXTM (Rel. 10.10)
3K17 SPARCstationTM SunOSTM (Rel. 4.1.4),
SolarisTM (Rel. 2.5.1)
CD-ROM
μ
S××××DF780893
×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium
AB13 Windows (Japanese version)
BB13
PC-9800 series,
IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version)
3.5-inch 2HD FD
A.3 Control Software
PM+
Project manager
This is control software designed to enable efficient user program development in the
Windows environment. All operations used in development of a user program, such as
starting the editor, building, and starting the debugger, can be performed from PM+.
<Caution>
PM+ is included in the assembler package (RA78K0).
It can only be used in Windows.
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
678
A.4 Flash Memory Programming Tools
A.4.1 When using flash memory programmer FG-FP4, FL-PR4, PG-FPL3, and FP-LITE3
PG-FP4, FL-PR4
Flash memory programmer
Flash memory programmer dedicated to microcontrollers with on-chip flash memory.
PG-FPL3, FP-LITE3
Simple flash memory programmer
Simple flash memory programmer dedicated to microcontrollers with on-chip flash
memory.
Remark FL-PR4, FP-LITE3 are products of Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.
TEL: +81-45-475-4191 Naito Densei Machida Mfg. Co., Ltd.
A.4.2 When using on-chip debug emulator with programming function QB-MINI2
QB-MINI2
On-chip debug emulator with
programming function
This is a flash memory programmer dedicated to microcontrollers with on-chip flash
memory. It is available also as on-chip debug emulator which serves to debug hardware
and software when developing application systems using the 78K0/Fx2. When using this
as flash memory programmer, it should be used in combination with a connection cable
(16-pin cable) and a USB interface cable that is used to connect the host machine.
Target connector specifications 16-pin general-purpose connector (2.54 mm pitch)
Remarks 1. The QB-MINI2 is supplied with a USB interface cable and connection cables (10-pin cable and 16-pin
cable), and the 78K0-OCD board. A connection cable (10-pin cable) and the 78K0-OCD board are
used only when using the on-chip debug function.
2. Download the software for operating the QB-MINI2 from the download site for development tools
(http://www.necel.com/micro/ods/eng/index.html).
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 679
A.5 Debugging Tools (Hardware)
A.5.1 When using in-circuit emulator QB-78K0FX2
QB-78K0FX2Note
In-circuit emulator
The in-circuit emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing application
systems using the 78K0/Fx2. It supports the integrated debugger (ID78K0-QB). This
emulator should be used in combination with a power supply unit and emulation probe, and
the USB is used to connect this emulator to the host machine.
QB-144-CA-01
Check pin adapter
This adapter is used in waveform monitoring using the oscilloscope, etc.
QB-80-EP-01T
Emulation probe
This emulation probe is flexible type and used to connect the in-circuit emulator and target
system.
QB-44GB-EA-02T
QB-48GA-EA-01T
Exchange adapter
This adapter is used to perform the pin conversion from the in-circuit emulator to the target
connector.
• QB-44GB-EA-02T: For 44-pin plastic LQFP (GB-UES, GB-GAF type)
• QB-48GA-EA-01T: For 48-pin plastic LQFP (GA-8EU, GA-GAM type)
QB-44GB-YS-01T
QB-48GA-YS-01T
Space adapter
This space adapter is used to adjust the height between the target system and in-circuit
emulator.
• QB-44GB-YS-01T: For 44-pin plastic LQFP (GB-UES, GB-GAF type)
• QB-48GA-YS-01T: For 48-pin plastic LQFP (GA-8EU, GA-GAM type)
QB-44GB-YQ-01T
QB-48GA-YQ-01T
YQ connector
This YQ connector is used to connect the target connector and exchange adapter.
• QB-44GB-YQ-01T: For 44-pin plastic LQFP (GB-UES, GB-GAF type)
• QB-48GA-YQ-01T: For 48-pin plastic LQFP (GA-8EU, GA-GAM type)
QB-44GB-HQ-01T
QB-48GA-HQ-01T
Mount adapter
This mount adapter is used to mount the target device with socket.
• QB-44GB-HQ-01T: For 44-pin plastic LQFP (GB-UES, GB-GAF type)
• QB-48GA-HQ-01T: For 48-pin plastic LQFP (GA-8EU, GA-GAM type)
QB-44GB-NQ-01T
QB-48GA-NQ-01T
Target connector
This target connector is used to mount on the target system.
• QB-44GB-NQ-01T: For 44-pin plastic LQFP (GB-UES, GB-GAF type)
• QB-48GA-NQ-01T: For 48-pin plastic LQFP (GA-8EU, GA-GAM type)
Note The QB-78K0FX2 is supplied with a power supply unit, USB interface cable, and flash memory programmer
PG-FPL3. It is also supplied with integrated debugger ID78K0-QB as control software.
Remark The package contents differ depending on the part number.
Package Contents
Part Number
In-Circuit Emulator Emulation Probe Exchange Adapter YQ Connector Target Connector
QB-78K0FX2-ZZZ (-EE) Not included
QB-78K0FX2-T44GB QB-44GB-EA-01T QB-44GB-YQ-01T QB-44GB-NQ-01T
QB-78K0FX2-T48GA
QB-78K0FX2
QB-80-EP-01T
QB-48GA-EA-01T QB-48GA-YQ-01T QB-48GA-NQ-01T
A.5.2 When using on-chip debug emulator QB-78K0MINI
QB-78K0MINI
On-chip debug emulator
This on-chip debug emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing
application systems using the 78K0/Fx2. It supports the integrated debugger (ID78K0-
QB). This emulator should be used a connection cable and a USB interface cable that is
used to connect the host machine.
Target connector specifications 10-pin general-purpose connector (2.54 mm pitch)
Remark The QB-78K0MINI is supplied with a USB interface cable and a connection cable. As control software, the
integrated debugger ID78K0-QB is supplied.
<R>
<R>
<R>
<R>
APPENDIX A DEVELOPMENT TOOLS
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
680
A.5.3 When using on-chip debug emulator with programming function QB-MINI2
QB-MINI2
On-chip debug emulator with
programming function
This on-chip debug emulator serves to debug hardware and software when developing
application systems using the 78K0/Fx2. It is available also as flash memory
programmer dedicated to microcontrollers with on-chip flash memory. When using this
as on-chip debug emulator, it should be used in combination with a connection cable (10-
pin cable or 16-pin cable), a USB interface cable that is used to connect the host
machine, and the 78K0-OCD board.
Target connector specifications 10-pin general-purpose connector (2.54 mm pitch) or 16-pin general-purpose connector
(2.54 mm pitch)
Remarks 1. The QB-MINI2 is supplied with a USB interface cable and connection cables (10-pin cable and 16-pin
cable), and the 78K0-OCD board. A connection cable (10-pin cable) and the 78K0-OCD board are
used only when using the on-chip debug function.
2. Download the software for operating the QB-MINI2 from the download site for development tools
(http://www.necel.com/micro/ods/eng/index.html).
A.6 Debugging Tools (Software)
SM+ for 78K0/Fx2Note
System simulator
SM+ for 78K0/Fx2 is Windows-based software.
It is used to perform debugging at the C source level or assembler level while simulating
the operation of the target system on a host machine.
Use of SM+ for 78K0/Fx2 allows the execution of application logical testing and
performance testing on an independent basis from hardware development, thereby
providing higher development efficiency and software quality.
SM+ for 78K0/FX2 should be used in combination with the device file (DF780893).
This debugger supports the in-circuit emulators for the 78K/0 Series. The ID78K0-QB is
Windows-based software.
It has improved C-compatible debugging functions and can display the results of tracing
with the source program using an integrating window function that associates the source
program, disassemble display, and memory display with the trace result. It should be
used in combination with the device file.
ID78K0-QB
Integrated debugger
Part number:
μ
S××××ID78K0-QB
Note This product is under development
Remark ×××× in the part number differs depending on the host machine and OS used.
μ
S××××ID78K0-QB
×××× Host Machine OS Supply Medium
AB17 Windows (Japanese version)
BB17
PC-9800 series,
IBM PC/AT compatibles Windows (English version)
CD-ROM
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 681
APPENDIX B NOTES ON TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN
This chapter shows areas on the target system where component mounting is prohibited and areas where there are
component mounting height restrictions when the QB-78K0FX2 is used.
(a) Case of 44-pin GB package
Figure B-1. The Restriction Domain on a Target System (Case of 44-pin GB Package)
15
9.85
13.375
10
15
9.85
17.375
10
: Exchange adapter area: Components up to 17.45 mm in height can be mountedNote
: Emulation probe tip area: Components up to 24.45 mm in height can be mountedNote
Note Height can be adjusted by using space adapters (each adds 2.4 mm)
APPENDIX B NOTES ON TARGET SYSTEM DESIGN
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
682
(b) Case of 48-pin GA package
Figure B-2. The Restriction Domain on a Target System (Case of 48-pin GA Package)
15
9.5
13.375
10
15
9.5
17.375
10
: Exchange adapter area: Components up to 17.45 mm in height can be mountedNote
: Emulation probe tip area: Components up to 24.45 mm in height can be mountedNote
Note Height can be adjusted by using space adapters (each adds 2.4 mm)
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 683
APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX
C.1 Register Index (In Alphabetical Order with Respect to Register Names)
[1]
10-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCR)..............................................................................................................265
16-bit timer capture/compare register 000 (CR000)....................................................................................................149
16-bit timer capture/compare register 001 (CR001)....................................................................................................149
16-bit timer capture/compare register 010 (CR010)....................................................................................................151
16-bit timer capture/compare register 011 (CR011)....................................................................................................151
16-bit timer counter 00 (TM00)....................................................................................................................................148
16-bit timer counter 01 (TM01)....................................................................................................................................148
16-bit timer mode control register 00 (TMC00) ...........................................................................................................154
16-bit timer mode control register 01 (TMC01) ...........................................................................................................154
16-bit timer output control register 00 (TOC00)...........................................................................................................159
16-bit timer output control register 01 (TOC01)...........................................................................................................159
[8]
8-bit A/D conversion result register (ADCRH).............................................................................................................266
8-bit timer compare register 50 (CR50).......................................................................................................................199
8-bit timer compare register 51 (CR51).......................................................................................................................199
8-bit timer counter 50 (TM50)......................................................................................................................................198
8-bit timer counter 51 (TM51)......................................................................................................................................198
8-bit timer H carrier control register 1 (TMCYC1)........................................................................................................221
8-bit timer H compare register 00 (CMP00) ................................................................................................................217
8-bit timer H compare register 01 (CMP01) ................................................................................................................217
8-bit timer H compare register 10 (CMP10) ................................................................................................................217
8-bit timer H compare register 11 (CMP11) ................................................................................................................217
8-bit timer H mode register 0 (TMHMD0)....................................................................................................................218
8-bit timer H mode register 1 (TMHMD1)....................................................................................................................218
8-bit timer mode control register 50 (TMC50) .............................................................................................................202
8-bit timer mode control register 51 (TMC51) .............................................................................................................202
[A]
A/D converter mode register (ADM)............................................................................................................................262
A/D port configuration register (ADPC) .......................................................................................................................268
Analog input channel specification register (ADS) ......................................................................................................267
Asynchronous serial interface control register 60 (ASICL60)......................................................................................304
Asynchronous serial interface control register 61 (ASICL61)......................................................................................304
Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 60 (ASIM60) .........................................................................291
Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 61 (ASIM61) .........................................................................291
Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 60 (ASIS60).................................................................296
Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 61 (ASIS61).................................................................296
Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 60 (ASIF60) ....................................................................298
Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 61 (ASIF61) ....................................................................298
APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
684
[B]
Baud rate generator control register 60 (BRGC60) .....................................................................................................302
Baud rate generator control register 61 (BRGC61) .....................................................................................................302
[C]
CAN global automatic block transmission control register (C0GMABT)......................................................................394
CAN global automatic block transmission delay setting register (C0GMABTD) ..........................................................396
CAN global clock selection register (C0GMCS) ..........................................................................................................393
CAN global control register (C0GMCTRL) ..................................................................................................................391
CAN message configuration register (C0MCONFm)...................................................................................................421
CAN message control register m (C0MCTRLm) .........................................................................................................423
CAN message data byte register xm (C0MDATAxm) .................................................................................................418
CAN message data byte register zm (C0MDATAzm) .................................................................................................418
CAN message data length register m (C0MDLCm) ....................................................................................................420
CAN message id register Hm (C0MIDHm)..................................................................................................................422
CAN message id register Lm (C0MIDLm)...................................................................................................................422
CAN module bit rate prescaler register (C0BRP) .......................................................................................................409
CAN module bit rate register (C0BTR)........................................................................................................................410
CAN module control register (C0CTRL)......................................................................................................................399
CAN module error counter register (C0ERC) ..............................................................................................................405
CAN module information register (C0INFO)................................................................................................................404
CAN module interrupt enable register (C0IE)..............................................................................................................406
CAN module interrupt status register (C0INTS) ..........................................................................................................408
CAN module last error code register (C0LEC) ............................................................................................................403
CAN module last in-pointer register (C0LIPT).............................................................................................................412
CAN module last out-pointer register (C0LOPT) .........................................................................................................414
CAN module mask control register 1H (C0MASK1H) .................................................................................................397
CAN module mask control register 1L (C0MASK1L)...................................................................................................397
CAN module mask control register 2H (C0MASK2H) .................................................................................................397
CAN module mask control register 2H (C0MASK2L) ..................................................................................................397
CAN module mask control register 3H (C0MASK3H) .................................................................................................397
CAN module mask control register 3L (C0MASK3L)...................................................................................................397
CAN module mask control register 4H (C0MASK4H) .................................................................................................397
CAN module mask control register 4L (C0MASK4L)...................................................................................................397
CAN module receive history list register (C0RGPT)....................................................................................................413
CAN module time stamp register (C0TS)....................................................................................................................416
CAN module transmit history list register (C0TGPT)...................................................................................................415
Capture/compare control register 00 (CRC00)............................................................................................................157
Capture/compare control register 01 (CRC01)............................................................................................................157
Clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL) ........................................................................................................116
Clock output selection register (CKS) .........................................................................................................................255
Clock selection register 60 (CKSR60).........................................................................................................................300
Clock selection register 61 (CKSR61).........................................................................................................................300
[E]
External interrupt falling edge enable register (EGN)..................................................................................................499
APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 685
External interrupt rising edge enable register (EGP)...................................................................................................499
[F]
Flash-programming mode control register (FLPMC)...................................................................................................596
Flash protect command register (PFCMD) .................................................................................................................598
Flash status register (PFS) .........................................................................................................................................598
[I]
Input switch control register (ISC) ...............................................................................................................................308
Internal expansion RAM size switching register (IXS).................................................................................................571
Internal memory size switching register (IMS) ............................................................................................................570
Internal oscillator mode register (RCM) ......................................................................................................................113
Interrupt mask flag register 0H (MK0H) ......................................................................................................................497
Interrupt mask flag register 0L (MK0L)........................................................................................................................497
Interrupt mask flag register 1H (MK1H) ......................................................................................................................497
Interrupt mask flag register 1L (MK1L)........................................................................................................................497
Interrupt request flag register 0H (IF0H) .....................................................................................................................495
Interrupt request flag register 0L (IF0L) ......................................................................................................................495
Interrupt request flag register 1H (IF1H) .....................................................................................................................495
Interrupt request flag register 1L (IF1L) ......................................................................................................................495
[L]
Low-voltage detection level selection register (LVIS)..................................................................................................550
Low-voltage detection register (LVIM) ........................................................................................................................549
[M]
Main clock mode register (MCM) ................................................................................................................................114
Main OSC control register (MOC) ...............................................................................................................................115
Multiplication/division data register A0H (MDA0H)......................................................................................................534
Multiplication/division data register A0L (MDA0L).......................................................................................................534
Multiplication/division data register B0 (MDB0)...........................................................................................................535
Multiplier/divider control register 0 (DMUC0) ..............................................................................................................536
[O]
Oscillation stabilization time counter status register (OSTC) ......................................................................................118
Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)....................................................................................................119
[P]
Port mode register 0 (PM0)...........................................................................................................................................99
Port mode register 1 (PM1)...........................................................................................................................................99
Port mode register 12 (PM12).......................................................................................................................................99
Port mode register 13 (PM13).......................................................................................................................................99
Port mode register 3 (PM3)...........................................................................................................................................99
Port mode register 4 (PM4)...........................................................................................................................................99
Port mode register 6 (PM6)...........................................................................................................................................99
Port mode register 7 (PM7)...........................................................................................................................................99
Port mode register 8 (PM8)...........................................................................................................................................99
Port mode register 9 (PM9)...........................................................................................................................................99
Port register 0 (P0)......................................................................................................................................................103
APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
686
Port register 1 (P1)......................................................................................................................................................103
Port register 12 (P12)..................................................................................................................................................103
Port register 13 (P13)..................................................................................................................................................103
Port register 3 (P3)......................................................................................................................................................103
Port register 4 (P4)......................................................................................................................................................103
Port register 6 (P6)......................................................................................................................................................103
Port register 7 (P7)......................................................................................................................................................103
Port register 8 (P8)......................................................................................................................................................103
Port register 9 (P9)......................................................................................................................................................103
Prescaler mode register 00 (PRM00)..........................................................................................................................162
Prescaler mode register 01 (PRM01)..........................................................................................................................162
Priority specification flag register 0H (PR0H) ..............................................................................................................498
Priority specification flag register 0L (PR0L) ...............................................................................................................498
Priority specification flag register 1H (PR1H) ..............................................................................................................498
Priority specification flag register 1L (PR1L) ...............................................................................................................498
Processor clock control register (PCC) .......................................................................................................................111
Program stetaus word (PSW)......................................................................................................................................500
Pull-up resistor option register 0 (PU0) .......................................................................................................................104
Pull-up resistor option register 1 (PU1) .......................................................................................................................104
Pull-up resistor option register 12 (PU12) ...................................................................................................................104
Pull-up resistor option register 13 (PU13) ...................................................................................................................104
Pull-up resistor option register 3 (PU3) .......................................................................................................................104
Pull-up resistor option register 4 (PU4) .......................................................................................................................104
Pull-up resistor option register 7 (PU7) .......................................................................................................................104
[R]
Receive buffer register 60 (RXB60) ............................................................................................................................290
Receive buffer register 61 (RXB61) ............................................................................................................................290
Receive shift register 60 (RXS60) ...............................................................................................................................290
Receive shift register 61 (RXS61) ...............................................................................................................................290
Remainder data register 0 (SDR0)..............................................................................................................................534
Reset control flag register (RESF) ..............................................................................................................................531
[S]
Serial clock selection register 10 (CSIC10).................................................................................................................336
Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10) ...............................................................................................................335
Serial I/O shift register 10 (SIO10) ..............................................................................................................................334
[T]
Timer clock selection register 50 (TCL50)...................................................................................................................200
Timer clock selection register 51 (TCL51)...................................................................................................................200
Transmit buffer register 10 (SOTB10) .........................................................................................................................334
Transmit buffer register 60 (TXB60)............................................................................................................................290
Transmit buffer register 61 (TXB61)............................................................................................................................290
Transmit shift register 60 (TXS60) ..............................................................................................................................290
Transmit shift register 61 (TXS61) ..............................................................................................................................290
APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 687
[W]
Watchdog timer enable register (WDTE) ....................................................................................................................248
Watch timer operation mode register (WTM) ..............................................................................................................241
APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
688
C.2 Register Index (In Alphabetical Order with Respect to Register Symbol)
[A]
ADCR: 10-bit A/D conversion result register ...................................................................................................265
ADCRH: 8-bit A/D conversion result register .....................................................................................................266
ADM: A/D converter mode register ...............................................................................................................262
ADPC: A/D port configureation register ..........................................................................................................268
ADS: Analog input channel specification register .........................................................................................267
ASICL60: Asynchronous serial interface control register 60 ...............................................................................304
ASICL61: Asynchronous serial interface control register 61 ...............................................................................304
ASIF60: Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 60............................................................298
ASIF61: Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register 61............................................................298
ASIM60: Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 60 .................................................................291
ASIM61: Asynchronous serial interface operation mode register 61 .................................................................291
ASIS60: Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 60 ........................................................296
ASIS61: Asynchronous serial interface reception error status register 61 ........................................................296
[B]
BRGC60: Baud rate generator control register 60...............................................................................................302
BRGC61: Baud rate generator control register 61...............................................................................................302
[C]
C0BRP: CAN module bit rate prescaler register ...............................................................................................409
C0BTR: CAN module bit rate register...............................................................................................................410
C0CTRL: CAN module control register ...............................................................................................................399
C0ERC: CAN module error counter register .....................................................................................................405
C0GMABT: CAN global automatic block transmission control register ..................................................................394
C0GMABTD: CAN global automatic block transmission delay setting register .........................................................396
C0GMCS: CAN global clock selection register.....................................................................................................393
C0GMCTRL: CAN global control register .................................................................................................................391
C0IE: CAN module interrupt enable register .................................................................................................406
C0INFO: CAN module information register ........................................................................................................404
C0INTS: CAN module interrupt status register ..................................................................................................408
C0LEC: CAN module last error code register...................................................................................................403
C0LIPT: CAN module last in-pointer register ....................................................................................................412
C0LOPT: CAN module last out-pointer register ..................................................................................................414
C0MCONFm: CAN message configuration register...................................................................................................421
C0MCTRL: CAN message control register ............................................................................................................423
C0MDATAxm: CAN message data byte register xm ..................................................................................................418
C0MDATAzm: CAN message data byte register zm ..................................................................................................418
C0MDLCm: CAN message data length register m .................................................................................................420
C0MASK1H: CAN module mask control register 1H ................................................................................................397
C0MASK1L: CAN module mask control register 1L.................................................................................................397
C0MASK2H: CAN module mask control register 2H ................................................................................................397
C0MASK2L: CAN module mask control register 2H ................................................................................................397
C0MASK3H: CAN module mask control register 3H ................................................................................................397
APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 689
C0MASK3L: CAN module mask control register 3L ...................................................................................................397
C0MASK4H: CAN module mask control register 4H ..................................................................................................397
C0MASK4L: CAN module mask control register 4L ...................................................................................................397
C0MIDHm: CAN message id register Hm ................................................................................................................422
C0MIDLm: CAN message id register Lm.................................................................................................................422
C0RGPT: CAN module receive history list register................................................................................................413
C0TGPT: CAN module transmit history list register...............................................................................................415
C0TS: CAN module time stamp register...........................................................................................................416
CKS: Clock output selection register ..............................................................................................................255
CKSR60: Clock selection register 60 ....................................................................................................................300
CKSR61: Clock selection register 61 ....................................................................................................................300
CMP00: 8-bit timer H compare register 00 ..........................................................................................................217
CMP01: 8-bit timer H compare register 01 ..........................................................................................................217
CMP10: 8-bit timer H compare register 10 ..........................................................................................................217
CMP11: 8-bit timer H compare register 11 ..........................................................................................................217
CR000: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 000.............................................................................................149
CR001: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 001.............................................................................................149
CR010: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 010.............................................................................................151
CR011: 16-bit timer capture/compare register 011.............................................................................................151
CR50: 8-bit timer compare register 50..............................................................................................................199
CR51: 8-bit timer compare register 51..............................................................................................................199
CRC00: Capture/compare control register 00 .....................................................................................................157
CRC01: Capture/compare control register 01 .....................................................................................................157
CSIC10: Serial clock selection register 10 ...........................................................................................................336
CSIM10: Serial operation mode register 10..........................................................................................................335
[D]
DMUC0: Multiplier/divider control register 0.........................................................................................................536
[E]
EGN: External interrupt falling edge enable register .......................................................................................499
EGP: External interrupt rising edge enable register ........................................................................................499
[F]
FLPMC: Flash-programming mode control register.............................................................................................596
[I]
IF0H: Interrupt request flag register 0H...........................................................................................................495
IF0L: Interrupt request flag register 0L ...........................................................................................................495
IF1H: Interrupt request flag register 1H...........................................................................................................495
IF1L: Interrupt request flag register 1L ...........................................................................................................495
IMS: Internal memory size switching register.................................................................................................570
ISC: Input switch control register...................................................................................................................308
IXS: Internal expansion RAM size switching register ....................................................................................571
[L]
LVIM: Low-voltage detection register...............................................................................................................549
LVIS: Low-voltage detection level selection register .......................................................................................550
APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
690
[M]
MCM: Main clock mode register.........................................................................................................................114
MDA0H: tiplication/division data register A0H........................................................................................................534
MDA0L: ltiplication/division data register A0L........................................................................................................534
MDB0: ltiplication/division data register B0..........................................................................................................535
MK0H: Interrupt mask flag register 0H ................................................................................................................497
MK0L: Interrupt mask flag register 0L .................................................................................................................497
MK1H: Interrupt mask flag register 1H ................................................................................................................497
MK1L: Interrupt mask flag register 1L .................................................................................................................497
MOC: Main OSC control register .......................................................................................................................115
[O]
OSCCTL: Clock operation mode select register ......................................................................................................116
OSTC: Oscillation stabilization time counter status register ................................................................................118
OSTS: Oscillation stabilization time select register .............................................................................................119
[P]
P0: Port register 0..........................................................................................................................................103
P1: Port register 1..........................................................................................................................................103
P12: Port register 12 ........................................................................................................................................103
P13: Port register 13 ........................................................................................................................................103
P3: Port register 3..........................................................................................................................................103
P4: Port register 4..........................................................................................................................................103
P6: Port register 6..........................................................................................................................................103
P7: Port register 7..........................................................................................................................................103
P8: Port register 8..........................................................................................................................................103
P9: Port register 9..........................................................................................................................................103
PCC: Processor clock control register...............................................................................................................111
PFCMD: Flash protect command register ..............................................................................................................598
PFS: Flash status register ................................................................................................................................598
PM0: Port mode register 0 ..................................................................................................................................99
PM1: Port mode register 1 ..................................................................................................................................99
PM12: Port mode register 12 ................................................................................................................................99
PM13: Port mode register 13 ................................................................................................................................99
PM3: Port mode register 3 ..................................................................................................................................99
PM4: Port mode register 4 ..................................................................................................................................99
PM6: Port mode register 6 ..................................................................................................................................99
PM7: Port mode register 7 ..................................................................................................................................99
PM8: Port mode register 8 ..................................................................................................................................99
PM9: Port mode register 9 ..................................................................................................................................99
PR0H: Priority specification flag register 0H .......................................................................................................498
PR0L: Priority specification flag register 0L ........................................................................................................498
PR1H: Priority specification flag register 1H .......................................................................................................498
PR1L: Priority specification flag register 1L ........................................................................................................498
PRM00: Prescaler mode register 00 .....................................................................................................................162
PRM01: Prescaler mode register 01 .....................................................................................................................162
APPENDIX C REGISTER INDEX
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 691
PSW: Program stetaus word .............................................................................................................................500
PU0: Pull-up resistor option register 0..............................................................................................................104
PU1: Pull-up resistor option register 1..............................................................................................................104
PU12: Pull-up resistor option register 12............................................................................................................104
PU13: Pull-up resistor option register 13............................................................................................................104
PU3: Pull-up resistor option register 3..............................................................................................................104
PU4: Pull-up resistor option register 4..............................................................................................................104
PU7: Pull-up resistor option register 7..............................................................................................................104
[R]
RCM: Internal oscillator mode register ..............................................................................................................113
RESF: Reset control flag register .......................................................................................................................531
RXB60: Receive buffer register 60 .......................................................................................................................290
RXB61: Receive buffer register 61 .......................................................................................................................290
RXS60: Receive shift register 60..........................................................................................................................290
RXS61: Receive shift register 61..........................................................................................................................290
[S]
SDR0: Remainder data register 0.......................................................................................................................534
SIO10: Serial I/O shift register 10........................................................................................................................334
SOTB10: Transmit buffer register 10 ......................................................................................................................334
[T]
TCL50: Timer clock selection register 50.............................................................................................................200
TCL51: Timer clock selection register 51.............................................................................................................200
TM00: 16-bit timer counter 00 ............................................................................................................................148
TM01: 16-bit timer counter 01 ............................................................................................................................148
TM50: 8-bit timer counter 50 ..............................................................................................................................198
TM51: 8-bit timer counter 51 ..............................................................................................................................198
TMC00: 16-bit timer mode control register 00.......................................................................................................154
TMC01: 16-bit timer mode control register 01.......................................................................................................154
TMC50: 8-bit timer mode control register 50.........................................................................................................202
TMC51: 8-bit timer mode control register 51.........................................................................................................202
TMCYC1: 8-bit timer H carrier control register 1......................................................................................................221
TMHMD0: 8-bit timer H mode register 0...................................................................................................................218
TMHMD1: 8-bit timer H mode register 1...................................................................................................................218
TOC00: 16-bit timer output control register 00......................................................................................................159
TOC01: 16-bit timer output control register 01......................................................................................................159
TXB60: Transmit buffer register 60 ......................................................................................................................290
TXB61: Transmit buffer register 61 ......................................................................................................................290
TXS60: Transmit shift register 60.........................................................................................................................290
TXS61: Transmit shift register 61.........................................................................................................................290
[W]
WDTE: Watchdog timer enable register ..............................................................................................................248
WTM: Watch timer operation mode register ......................................................................................................241
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
692
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
The mark <R> shows major revised points.
The revised points can be easily searched by copying an “<R>” in the PDF file and specifying it in the “Fine what:” field.
D.1 Main Revisions in this Edition
Page Description
p.7 Addition of QB-MINI2 in Documents Related to Development Tools (Hardware) (User’s Manuals)
Change of PG-FPL3 in Documents Related to Flash Memory Programming
p.23 Change of table in 1.5.1 78K0/Fx2 product lineup
p.27 Change of table in 1.7 Outline of Functions
Change of table for timer in 1.7 Outline of Functions
p.83 Change of Caution 1 in 4.2.3 Port 3
p.88 Change of Figure 4-12. Block Diagram of P70
p.107 Change of Figure 4-24. Bit Manipulation Instruction (P10)
p.163 Change of Figure 6-14. Format of Prescaler Mode Register 00 (PRM00)
p.164 Change of Figure 6-15. Format of Prescaler Mode Register 01 (PRM01)
p.249 Change of table in 10.4.1 Controlling operation of watchdog timer
p.261 Change of the explanation in 12.2 (9) AVREF pin
Change of the explanation in 12.2 (12) A/D port configuration register (ADPC)
p.489 Change of the explanation in 16.1 (1) Maskable interrupts
Change of the explanation in 16.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration
p.490 Change of Table 16-1. Interrupt Source List
p.495 Change of Figure 16-2. Format of Interrupt Request Flag Registers (IF0L, IF0H, IF1L, IF1H)
p.497 Change of Figure 16-3. Format of Interrupt Mask Flag Registers (MK0L, MK0H, MK1L, MK1H)
p.498 Change of Figure 16-4. Format of Priority Specification Flag Registers (PR0L, PR0H, PR1L, PR1H)
p.679 Change of A.5.1 When using in-circuit emulator QB-78K0FX2
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 693
D.2 Revision History of Preceding Editions
Here is the revision history of the preceding editions. Chapter indicates the chapter of each edition.
(1/10)
Edition Description
3rd Addition of ANI8 to alternative function of P90
Addition of PG-FPL3 in Documents Related to Flash Memory Programming
Change of the explanation in 1.1 Features
1.4 Pin Configuration (Top View)
• Addition of Caution 1 to 4
Change of 10-bit A/D converter number for 78K0/FC2 in 1.5.1 78K0/Fx2 product lineup
Change of AD converter in 1.7 Outline of Functions
Change of EVDD and VDD in Table 2-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies
Change of REGC in Table 2-3. Non-port pins (2/2)
Change of 2.2.8 P90 (port 9)
Change of 2.2.14 REGC
Change of Figure 3-1. Memory Map (
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884)
Addition of Note 3 and 4 and Remark in Figure 3-1. Memory Map (
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0884)
Change of Figure 3-2. Memory Map (
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885)
Addition of Note 3 and 4 and Remark in Figure 3-2. Memory Map (
μ
PD78F0882, 78F0885)
Change of Figure 3-3. Memory Map (
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886)
Addition of Note 3 and 4 and Remark in Figure 3-3. Memory Map (
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886)
Addition of Table 3-2. Correspondence Between Address Values and Block Numbers in Flash Memory
Addition of (5) On-chip debug security ID setting area in 3.1.1 Internal program memory space
Addition of Note 1 in Table 3-7. Special Function Register List (4/5)
Change of Note in Table 3-7. Special Function Register List (5/5)
Change of EVDD and VDD in Table 4-1. Pin I/O Buffer Power Supplies
Addition of Caution in 4.2.2 Port 1
Addition of Caution 1 in 4.2.3 Port 3
Change of the explanation in 4.2.5 Port 6
4.2.7 Port 8
• Change of the explanation
• Addition of Table 4-4. Setting Functions of P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7 Pins and Caution
Change of 4.2.8 Port 9
Addition of Caution 1 in 4.2.9 Port 12
Change of Figure 4-17. Block Diagram of P120
Change of Figure 4-18. Block Diagram of P121 to P124
Addition of ADPC in 4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function
Addition of (4) A/D port configuration register (ADPC) in 4.3 Registers Controlling Port Function
Addition of 4.5 Cautions on 1-Bit Manipulation Instruction for Port Register n (Pn)
Change of Caution 1 and Addition of Caution 3 in 5.3 (4) Main OSC control register (MOC)
Change of Caution 2 and 3 in 5.3 (5) Clock operation mode select register (OSCCTL)
Addition of the explanation in 5.4.1 X1 oscillator and 5.4.2 XT1 oscillator
Addition of (b) External clock in Figure 5-9. Example of External Circuit of X1 Oscillator and Figure 6-10.
Example of External Circuit of XT1 Oscillator
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
694
(2/10)
Edition Description
3rd Change of explanation and Remark in 5.4.3 When subsystem clock is not used
Figure 5-12 Operation of the clock generating circuit when power supply voltage injection (When 1.59 V POC
mode setup (option byte: LVISTART = 0))
• Change of Figure 5-12 and Note 2
• Addition of Note 1
Figure 5-13 Operation of the clock generating circuit when power supply voltage injection (When 2.7 V/1.59V
POC mode setup (option byte: LVISTART = 1))
• Change of Figure 5-13 and Caution 2
• Addition of Caution 1
Change of 5.6.1 Controlling high-speed system clock
Change of explanation and Addition of Note in 5.6.1 (2) Example of setting procedure when using the external
main system clock
Change of 5.6.2 Example of controlling internal high-speed oscillation clock
Change of 5.6.3 Example of controlling subsystem clock
Figure 5-14. CPU Clock Status Transition Diagram
• Change of Figure 5-14
• Addition of Remark
Change of Table 5-5. Changing CPU Clock
Addition of 5.6.8 Time required for switchover of CPU clock and main system clock
Addition of 5.6.9 Conditions before clock oscillation is stopped
Change of Figure 6-2. Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 01 (
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883) and
Figure 6-3. Block Diagram of 16-Bit Timer/Event Counter 01 (
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886)
Change of explanation and Addition of Caution in 6.2 (1) 16-bit timer counter 0n (TM0n)
Addition of Caution in 6.2 (2) 16-bit timer capture/compare register 00n (CR00n)
Addition of 6.2 (4) Setting range when CR00n or CR01n is used as a compare register
Change of explanation in 6.3 (1) 16-bit timer mode control register 0n (TMC0n)
Change of Figure 6-7. Format of 16-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 00 (TMC00)
Change of Figure 6-8. Format of 16-Bit Timer Mode Control Register 01 (TMC01)
Change of explanation in 6.3 (2) Capture/compare control register 0n (CRC0n)
Change of Figure 6-9. Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 00 (CRC00)
Addition of Figure 6-10. Example of CR01n Capture Operation (When Rising Edge Is Specified)
Change of Figure 6-11. Format of Capture/Compare Control Register 01 (CRC01)
Change of explanation and Addition of Caution in 6.3 (3) 16-bit timer output control register 0n (TOC0n)
Change of Figure 6-12. Format of 16-Bit Timer Output Control Register 00 (TOC00)
Change of Figure 6-13. Format of 16-Bit Timer Output Control Register 01 (TOC01)
Change of explanation and Caution 1 to 3 in 6.3 (4) Prescaler mode register 0n (PRM0n)
Change of Figure 6-14. Format of Prescaler Mode Register 00 (PRM00)
Addition of 6.5 Special Use of TM0n
Addition of 6.6 Cautions for 16-Bit Timer/Event Counters 00 and 01
Change of explanation and Caution in 8.2 (1) 8-bit timer H compare register 0n (CMP0n)
Change of 8.2 (2) 8-bit timer H compare register 1n (CMP1n)
Change of Caution 1 in Figure 8-5. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 0 (TMHMD0)
Change of Figure 8-6. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 1 (TMHMD1)
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 695
(3/10)
Edition Description
3rd Change of Caution 1 in Figure 8-6. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Mode Register 1 (TMHMD1)
Change of Figure 8-7. Format of 8-Bit Timer H Carrier Control Register 1 (TMCYC1)
Change of WTM0 bit in Figure 9-2. Format of Watch Timer Operation Mode Register (WTM)
Change of explanation in 9.4.1 Watch timer operation
Change of Table 9-4. Watch Timer Interrupt Time
Change of Figure 9-3. Operation Timing of Watch Timer/Interval Timer
Change of explanation in 10.1 Functions of Watchdog Timer
Change of explanation in Table 10-2. Setting of Option Bytes and Watchdog Timer and Figure 10-1. Block
Diagram of Watchdog Timer
Change of explanation in 10.4.1 Controlling operation of watchdog timer
Change of Caution 4 and 5 in 10.4.1 Controlling operation of watchdog timer
Change of Caution 2 in Table 10-3. Setting of Overflow Time of Watchdog Timer
Change of explanation in 10.4.3 Setting window open period of watchdog timer
Change of Caution 2 in Table 10-4. Setting Window Open Period of Watchdog Timer
Addition of Note1, Caution1 and 2 in Figure 11-2. Format of Clock Output Selection Register (CKS)
Figure 12-1. Block Diagram of A/D Converter
• Change of figure
• Addition of Note 2
Change of explanation in 12.2 (2) Sample & hold circuit, (3) Series resistor string, (4) Voltage comparator and
(5) Successive approximation register (SAR)
Change of explanation in 12.2 (8) Controller
Addition of 12.2 (15) Port mode register 9 (PM9)
Change of Note 2 in Figure 12-3. Format of A/D Converter Mode Register (ADM)
Change of Table 12-1. Settings of ADCS and ADCE
Figure 12-4. Timing Chart When Comparator Is Used
• Change of Figure 12-4 and Note
Change of (1), (2) and Caution 1 and Addition of Caution 4 in Table 12-2. A/D Conversion Time Selection
Change of Figure 12-8. Format of Analog Input Channel Specification Register (ADS) and Caution 1
Change of explanation and Caution 1 in 12.3 (5) A/D port configuration register (ADPC)
Change of Figure 12-9. Format of A/D Port Configuration Register (ADPC)
Addition of explanation in 12.3 (6) Port mode register 8 (PM8)
Addition of 12.3 (7) Port mode register 9 (PM9)
Addition of Table 12-3. Setting Functions of P80/ANI0 to P87/ANI7, P90/ANI8 Pins
Change of 12.4.1 Basic operations of A/D converter
Change of explanation in 12.4.3 (1) A/D conversion operation
Change of 12.6 Cautions for A/D Converter
Change of explanation and Addition of Caution 3 to 5 in 13.1 (2) Asynchronous serial interface (UART) mode
Change of Figure 13-1. LIN Transmission Operation
Figure 13-2. LIN Reception Operation
• Change of Figure 13-2 and explanation
Addition of Figure 13-4. Port Configuration for LIN Reception Operation (UART61)
Addition of Caution 3 in 13.2 (3) Transmit buffer register 6n (TXB6n)
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
696
(4/10)
Edition Description
3rd Change of Note 1 in Figure 13-7. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 60
(ASIM60) (1/2)
Addition of Caution 4 and 5 in Figure 13-7. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register
60 (ASIM60) (2/2)
Change of Note 1 in Figure 13-8. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register 61
(ASIM61) (1/2)
Addition of Caution 4 and 5 in Figure 13-8. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Operation Mode Register
61 (ASIM61) (2/2)
Change of bit 0 from INTSR6n to TXSF6n of 13.3 (3) Asynchronous serial interface transmission status register
6n (ASIF6n) and Figure 13-11. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmission Status Register 60
(ASIF60) and Figure 13-12. Format of Asynchronous Serial Interface Transmission Status Register 61
(ASIF61)
Figure 13-15. Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register 60 (BRGC60)
• Change of Figure 13-15 and Remark 2
Figure 13-16. Format of Baud Rate Generator Control Register 61 (BRGC61)
• Change of Figure 13-16 and1 Remark 2
Change of Caution in 13.3 (6) Asynchronous serial interface control register 6n (ASICL6n)
Change of Caution 1, 2 and 4 and Addition of Caution 6 in Figure 13-17. Format of Asynchronous Serial
Interface Control Register 60 (ASICL60) (2/2)
Change of Caution 1, 2 and 4 and Addition of Caution 6 in Figure 13-18. Format of Asynchronous Serial
Interface Control Register 61 (ASICL61) (2/2)
Change of Caution in 13.4.1 (1) Register used
Change of explanation in 13.4.2 (2) (c) Normal transmission
Change of bit 0 from INTSR6n to TXSF6n of 13.4.2 (d) Continuous transmission
Change of bit 0 from INTSR6n to TXSF6n of Figure 13-24. Example of Continuous Transmission Processing
Flow
Change of bit 0 from INTSR6n to TXSF6n of Figure 13-25. Timing of Starting Continuous Transmission
Change of bit 0 from INTSR6n to TXSF6n of Figure 13-26. Timing of Ending Continuous Transmission
Change of Caution in 13.4.2 (2) (e) Normal reception
Change of explanation in 13.4.2 (2) (h) SBF transmission
Change of explanation in 13.4.3 (2) (a) Baud rate
Table 13-4. Set Data of Baud Rate Generator
• Change of Table 13-4 and Remark
Change of Table 13-5. Maximum/Minimum Permissible Baud Rate Error
Change of Table 14-1. Configuration of Serial Interface CSI10 and Figure 14-1. Block Diagram of Serial
Interface CSI10
• Change of Figure 14-1
• Addition of Remark
Change of Note 2 and 5 in Figure 14-2. Format of Serial Operation Mode Register 10 (CSIM10)
Change of Caution 2 in Figure 14-3. Format of Serial Clock Selection Register 10 (CSIC10)
Change of note 1 in 14.4.1 (1) (a) Serial operation mode register 10 (CSIM10)
Addition of Remark 1 in Figure 14-11. Timing of Clock/Data Phase
Change of 14.4.2 (3) Timing of output to SO1n pin (first bit)
Change of 14.4.2 (4) Output value of SO1n pin (last bit)
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 697
(5/10)
Edition Description
3rd Change of 14.4.2 (5) SO1n output (see (a) in Figure 14-1)
Change of Table 15-1. Overview of Functions
Change of Table 15-11. Error Types
Change of Table 15-13. Types of Error States
Change of explanation in 15.3.6 (4) (b) Error counter
Change of Caution in 15.3.6 (4) (c) Occurrence of bit error in intermission
Change of explanation in 15.3.6 (5) Recovery from bus-off state
Change of explanation and Caution 2 and Addition of Caution 1 in 15.3.6 (5) (a) Recovery operation from bus-off
state through normal recovery sequence
Change of explanation in 15.3.7 (1) Prescaler
Addition of Remark in Figure 15-18. Segment Setting and Figure 15-19. Reference: Configuration of Data Bit
Time Defined by CAN Specification
Addition of Caution in Table 15-17. Bit Configuration of CAN Global Registers to Table 15-19. Bit Configuration
of Message Buffer Registers
Movement of 15.6 Bit Set/Clear Function
Change of Caution in EFSD bit in 15.7 (1) (a) Read
Addition of Caution in GOM bit in 15.7 (1) (b) write
Change of Remark 4 in CCERC bit and Remark 3 in VAILD bit in 15.7 (6) (a) Read
Addition of Caution 2, 3 in PSMODE1 and PSMODE2 bits and Caution in OPMODE2-OPMODE0 bits in 15.7 (6) (a)
Read
Addition of Caution in CINTS5 to CINTS0 bit in 15.7 (11) (b) Write
Addition of Note in ROVF bit in 15.7 (15) (a) Read
Addition of Note in TOVF bit in 15.7 (17) (a) Read
Addition of Remark in TSEN bit in 15.7 (18) (a) Read
Change of Caution 2 in 15.7 (20) CAN message Data Length Register m (C0MDLCm)
Addition of Caution 2 in ID28 to ID0 in 15.7 (22) CAN Message ID Register m (C0MIDLm, C0MIDHm)
Addition of Caution in TRQ bit and Caution 2 and 3 in RDY bit in 15.7 (23) (a) Read
Addition of Caution in IE bit in 15.7 (23) (b) Write
Addition of Caution in RDY bit in 15.7 (23) (b) Write
Addition of 15.9.2 Receive Data Read
Addition of Caution in 15.9.3 Receive History List Function
Change of the explanation in 15.9.4 Mask Function
Change of Caution in 15.9.6 Remote Frame Reception
Change of the explanation in 15.10.1 Message Transmission
Change of Remark 2 in 15.10.1 Message Transmission
Addition of Caution in 15.10.2 Transmit History List Function
Addition of Remark in 15.11.1 (1) Entering CAN sleep mode
Change of the explanation in 15.11.1 (2) Status in CAN sleep mode
Change of the explanation and addition of Caution in 15.11.1 (3) Releasing CAN sleep mode
Change of the explanation in 15.11.2 (2) Status in CAN stop mode
Addition of 15.13.4 Receipt/Transmit Operation in Each Operation Mode
Change of explanation in Figure 15-35. Timing Diagram of Capture Signal TSOUT
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
698
(6/10)
Edition Description
3rd Addition of Note 2 in Figure 15-40. Message Buffer Redefinition
Addition of Remark in Figure 15-44. Transmission via Interrupt (Using C0LOPT Register)
Addition of Remark in Figure 15-45. Transmission via Interrupt (Using C0TGPT Register)
Addition of Remark in Figure 15-46. Transmission via Software Polling
Addition of Note in Figure 15-47. Transmission Abort Processing (Except Normal Operation Mode with ABT)
Addition of Note in Figure 15-48. Transmission Abort Processing Except for ABT Transmission (Normal
Operation Mode with ABT)
Change of Figure 15-51. Reception via Interrupt (Using C0LIPT Register) and addition of Remark
Change of Figure 15-52. Reception via Interrupt (Using C0RGPT Register) and addition of Remark
Change of Figure 15-53. Reception via Software Polling and addition of Remark
Change of Figure 15-54. Setting CAN Sleep Mode/Stop Mode
Change of Figure 15-55. Clear CAN Sleep/Stop Mode
Addition of Note, Caution and Remark in Figure 15-56. Bus-Off Recovery (Except Normal Operation Mode with
ABT)
Addition of Note, Caution and Remark in Figure 15-57. Bus-Off Recovery (Normal Operation Mode with ABT)
Change of Figure 15-61. Setting CPU Standby (from CAN Sleep Mode) and addition of Caution
Change of Figure 15-62. Setting CPU Standby (from CAN Stop Mode)
Change of explanation in 16.1 (1) Maskable interrupts
Change of explanation in 16.2 Interrupt Sources and Configuration
Addition of Note 3 in Table 16-1. Interrupt Source List (2/2)
Addition of Note 3 in Table 16-2. Flags Corresponding to Interrupt Request Sources
Change of Caution 3 in 17.1.1 (2) STOP mode
Figure 17-1. Format of Oscillation Stabilization Time Counter Status Register (OSTC)
• Change of Figure 17-1 and Caution 2
Change of explanation and Caution 3 in 17.1.2 (2) Oscillation stabilization time select register (OSTS)
Change of Table 17-1. Operating Statuses in HALT Mode
Addition of Note in Table 17-1. Operating Statuses in HALT Mode (2/2)
Change of Figure 17-4. HALT Mode Release by Reset
Change and addition of Note in Table 17-3. Operating Statuses in STOP Mode
Change of Caution 4 in Table 17-3. Operating Statuses in STOP Mode
Figure 17-5. Operation Timing When STOP Mode Is Released
• Change of Figure 17-5
• Addition of Note1 and 2
Change of Figure 17-6. STOP Mode Release by Interrupt Request Generation
Change of 17.2.2 (2) (b) Release by reset signal generation and Figure 17-7. STOP Mode Release by Reset
Change of explanation in CHAPTER 18 RESET FUNCTION
Change of Figure 18-2. Timing of Reset by RESET Input and Figure 18-3. Timing of Reset Due to Watchdog
Timer Overflow
Change of Figure 18-4. Timing of Reset in STOP Mode by RESET Input
Change of Table 18-1. Operation Statuses During Reset Period
Addition of Note 1 in Table 18-2. Hardware Statuses After Reset Acknowledgment (2/3)
Addition of Note 1 and change of Note 2 in Table 18-2. Hardware Statuses After Reset Acknowledgment (3/3)
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 699
(7/10)
Edition Description
3rd Change of explanation in 20.1 Functions of Power-on-Clear Circuit
Change of 20.3 Operation of Power-on-Clear Circuit
Figure 20-2. Timing of Generation of Internal Reset Signal by Power-on-Clear Circuit and Low-Voltage
Detector (1/2)
• Change of Figure and Note 2, 4
• Addition of Note 1, 3
Figure 20-2. Timing of Generation of Internal Reset Signal by Power-on-Clear Circuit and Low-Voltage
Detector (2/2)
• Change of Figure and Note 2
• Addition of Note 1 and Caution 2
Change of Figure 20-3. Example of Software Processing After Reset Release (1/2)
Change of explanation in 21.1 Functions of Low-Voltage Detector
Change of Figure 21-1. Block Diagram of Low-Voltage Detector
Figure 21-2. Format of Low-Voltage Detection Register (LVIM)
• Change of Figure and Note 3
Change of Caution 3 in Figure 21-3. Format of Low-Voltage Detection Level Selection Register (LVIS)
Change of explanation and Remark in 21.4 Operation of Low-Voltage Detector
Change of explanation in 21.4.1 (1) When detecting level of supply voltage (VDD)
Change of explanation and Note 2 in 21.4.2 (2) When detecting level of input voltage from external input pin
(EXLVI)
Change of Figure 21-6. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Internal Reset Signal Generation (Detects Level of
Input Voltage from External Input Pin (EXLVI))
Change of explanation in 21.4.1 (1) When detecting level of supply voltage (VDD)
Figure 21-7. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Interrupt Signal Generation (Detects Level of Supply Voltage
(VDD))
• Change of Figure 21-7 and Note 2
Change of explanation in 21.4.2 (2) When detecting level of input voltage from external input pin (EXLVI)
Figure 21-8. Timing of Low-Voltage Detector Interrupt Signal Generation (Detects Level of Input Voltage from
External Input Pin (EXLVI))
• Change of Figure 21-8 and Note 2
Change of explanation in 21.5 Cautions for Low-Voltage Detector
Change of Figure 21-9. Example of Software Processing After Reset Release (1/2)
Change of CHAPTER 22 OPTION BYTE
Addition of Caution in 23.1 Internal Memory Size Switching Register
Addition of Caution and change in 23.2 Internal Expansion RAM Size Switching Register
Change of Note 2 in Table 23-3. Wiring Between 78K0/FC2 and Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer
(
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883)
Change of Figure 23-3. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI10) Mode
(
μ
PD78F0881, 78F0882, 78F0883)
Figure 23-4. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in UART (UART60) Mode (
μ
PD78F0881,
78F0882, 78F0883)
• Change of Figure 23-4
• Addition of Note
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
700
(8/10)
Edition Description
3rd Change of Note 2 in Table 23-4. Wiring Between 78K0/FC2 and Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer
(
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886)
Change of Figure 23-5. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in 3-Wire Serial I/O (CSI10) Mode
(
μ
PD78F0884, 78F0885, 78F0886)
Figure 23-6. Example of Wiring Adapter for Flash Memory Writing in UART (UART60) Mode (
μ
PD78F0884,
78F0885, 78F0886)
• Change of Figure 23-6
• Addition of Note
Change of explanation in 23.5 (1) CSI10
Change of Figure 23-8. Communication with Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer (CSI10)
Figure 23-9. Communication with Dedicated Flash Memory Programmer (UART60)
• Change of Figure and Note
Change of explanation in 23.5 (2) UART60
Table 23-5. Pin Connection
• Change of Table and Note 1
Change of explanation in 23.6.5 REGC pin
Change of explanation and Caution 3 in 23.6.6 Other signal pins
Change of explanation in 23.6.7 Power supply
Change of Note 1 in Table 23-8. Communication Modes
Addition of 23.8 Security Settings
Addition of 23.9 Processing Time for Each Command When PG-FP4 Is Used (Reference)
Change of Figure 23-17. Operation Mode and Memory Map for Self-Programming (
μ
PD78F0883, 78F0886)
Change of Figure 23-18. Self-Programming Procedure
Addition of Table 23-14. Processing Time and Interrupt Response Time for Self Programming Sample Library
Change of 23.11 Boot swap function
Change of Caution in 24.1 Outline of Functions
Addition of Note and Caution in Figure 24-2. Connection Circuit Example (When QB-78K0MINI Is Not Used) and
Figure 24-3. Connection Circuit Example (When Using QB-78K0MINI: X1 and X2 Are Used)
Addition of Note in Figure 24-4. Connection Circuit Example (When Using QB-78K0MINI: Ports 31 and 32 Are
Used)
Addition of Figure 24-5. Connection of FLMD0 Pin for Self Programming by Means of On-Chip Debugging
Addition of 24.4 On-Chip Debug Security
Change of 24.5 Restrictions and Cautions on On-Chip Debug Function
26.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings
• Addition of REGC pin input voltage of Absolute Maximum Ratings
• Addition of IOH2 and IOH3 in Output current, high of Absolute Maximum Ratings
• Addition of IOL2 and IOL3 in Output current, low of Absolute Maximum Ratings
26.2 Oscillator Characteristics
• Addition of RSTS = 1 and RSTS = 0 in the condition of 8 MHz internal oscillator
• Change of MAX. and MIN. value of 240 kHz internal oscillator
• Addition of Remark in (2) On-chip Internal Oscillator Characteristics
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 701
(9/10)
Edition Description
3rd 26.3 DC Characteristics
• Change of MAX. value of Output current, high in 4.0 V ≤ VDD = EVDD ≤ 5.5 V and 2.7 V ≤ VDD = EVDD < 4.0 V
• Addition of Note 1 to 3 and change of Remark of Output current, high and Output current, low
• Change of MAX. value of Output current, high
• Addition of VIH4 of Input voltage, high
• Addition of IOL = 5.0 mA, 2.0 mA in the condition of Output voltage, low
• Change of MAX. value of Output voltage, low (IOL = 1.0 mA and VOL3, IOL = 5.0 mA, 3.0 mA, 1.0 mA)
• Change of Supply current, A/D converter operating current, Watchdog timer operating current, LVI
operating current
26.4 (1) Basic operation
• Change of MIN. value of External clock input high level width, low level width, External sub clock input high
level width, low level width and TI000, TI010, TI011 input high-level width, low-level width
• Addition of Peripheral hardware clock frequency and Note 1, 2
• Change of TCY vs. VDD (Main System Clock Operation)
• Change of External clock input timing
Change of MAX. value of Transfer rate in (a) UART mode (UART6n, dedicated baud rate generator output)
Change of MIN. value of SCK1n cycle time, SCK1n high-/low-level width, SI1n setup time (to SCK1n↑) in 26.4 (2) (b)
3-wire serial I/O mode (master mode, SCK1n... internal clock output)
Change of MAX. value of Delay time from SCK1n↓ to SO1n output in 26.4 (2) (c) 3-wire serial I/O mode (slave
mode, SCK1n... external clock input)
26.4 (4) A/D Converter Characteristics
• Addition of MAX. value of Overall, Conversion time, Zero-scale error, Full-scale error, Integral non-linearity
error, Differential non-linearity error
Change of MIN. value of Power supply rise time, Minimum pulse width in 26.4 (5) POC Circuit Characteristics
26.4 (6) LVI Circuit Characteristics
• Addition of condition
• Addition of MIN. and MAX. value of External input pin
• Addition of Detection voltage on application of supply voltage of Detection voltage
• Change of value of Minimum pulse width
• Change of LVI Circuit Timing
Change of value of Starting maximum time to VDD min (1.8 V) (VDD: 0 V→1.8 V) and Starting maximum time to
VDD min (1.8 V) (pin RESET release→VDD: 1.8 V) in 26.4 (7) Power Supply Starting Time
Change of Note in 26.5 Data Retention Characteristics
Change of 26.6 Flash EEPROM Programming Characteristics
Addition of CHAPTER 27 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS ((A2) GRADE PRODUCTS)
Change of 44-PIN PLASTIC LQFP (10x10) and 64-PIN PLASTIC LQFP (FINE PITCH) (12x12) in CHAPTER 28
PACKAGE DRAWINGS
Addition of CHAPTER 29 RECOMMENDED SOLDERING CONDITIONS
Change of Table 30-1. Registers That Generate Wait and Number of CPU Wait Clocks
Change of 30.3 Example of Wait Occurrence
Change of explanation in Windows
Addition of Note 1 in Figure A-1. Development Tool Configuration
Addition of (3) When using the on-chip debug emulator with programming function QB-MINI2 in Figure A-1.
Development Tool Configuration
APPENDIX D REVISION HISTORY
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD
702
(10/10)
Edition Description
3rd Change of DF780893 Device file, Note 1 and Remark in A.2 Language Processing Software
Change of A.4 Flash Memory Programming Tools
Change of explanation and Note in A.5.1 When using in-circuit emulator QB-78K0FX2
Addition of Remark in A.5.2 When using on-chip debug emulator QB-78K0MINI
Addition of A.5.3 When using on-chip debug emulator with programming function QB-MINI2
Change of A.6 Debugging Tools (Software)
2nd Modification of part number in 1. 3 Ordering Information
Addition of Caution 2 in 2.2.3 P30 to P33 (port 3)
Addition of Caution in 2.2.10 P120 to P124 (port 12)
Addition of Note in Table 2-4 Pin I/O Circuit Types (1/2)
Addition of Note 3 in Table 2-4 Pin I/O Circuit Types (2/2)
Addition of Caution 2 in 4.2.3 Port 3
Addition of Caution in 4.2.10 Port 12
Modification of processing time in Figure 5-12 Operation of the clock generating circuit when power supply
voltage injection (When 1.59 V POC mode setup (option byte: LVISTART = 0))
Modification of processing time in Figure 5-13 Operation of the clock generating circuit when power supply
voltage injection (When 2.7 V/1.59V POC mode setup (option byte: LVISTART = 1))
Modification of address to FF8FH in Figure 9-2 Format of Watch Timer Operation Mode Register (WTM)
Addition of Caution in 23.7.4 Port pins
Addition of Caution 3 in 23.7.6 Other signal pins
Modification of standard setting in Table 23-7 Communication Modes
Modification of Note 4 in 26.3 DC characteristics
User’s Manual U17555EJ4V0UD 703
[MEMO]
NEC Electronics Corporation
1753, Shimonumabe, Nakahara-ku,
Kawasaki, Kanagawa 211-8668,
Japan
Tel: 044-435-5111
http://www.necel.com/
[America]
NEC Electronics America, Inc.
2880 Scott Blvd.
Santa Clara, CA 95050-2554, U.S.A.
Tel: 408-588-6000
800-366-9782
http://www.am.necel.com/
[Asia & Oceania]
NEC Electronics (China) Co., Ltd
7th Floor, Quantum Plaza, No. 27 ZhiChunLu Haidian
District, Beijing 100083, P.R.China
Tel: 010-8235-1155
http://www.cn.necel.com/
NEC Electronics Shanghai Ltd.
Room 2511-2512, Bank of China Tower,
200 Yincheng Road Central,
Pudong New Area, Shanghai P.R. China P.C:200120
Tel: 021-5888-5400
http://www.cn.necel.com/
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.
Unit 1601-1613, 16/F., Tower 2, Grand Century Place,
193 Prince Edward Road West, Mongkok, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 2886-9318
http://www.hk.necel.com/
NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd.
7F, No. 363 Fu Shing North Road
Taipei, Taiwan, R. O. C.
Tel: 02-8175-9600
http://www.tw.necel.com/
NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd.
238A Thomson Road,
#12-08 Novena Square,
Singapore 307684
Tel: 6253-8311
http://www.sg.necel.com/
NEC Electronics Korea Ltd.
11F., Samik Lavied’or Bldg., 720-2,
Yeoksam-Dong, Kangnam-Ku,
Seoul, 135-080, Korea
Tel: 02-558-3737
http://www.kr.necel.com/
For further information,
please contact:
G07.1A
[Europe]
NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH
Arcadiastrasse 10
40472 Düsseldorf, Germany
Tel: 0211-65030
http://www.eu.necel.com/
Hanover Office
Podbielskistrasse 166 B
30177 Hannover
Tel: 0 511 33 40 2-0
Munich Office
Werner-Eckert-Strasse 9
81829 München
Tel: 0 89 92 10 03-0
Stuttgart Office
Industriestrasse 3
70565 Stuttgart
Tel: 0 711 99 01 0-0
United Kingdom Branch
Cygnus House, Sunrise Parkway
Linford Wood, Milton Keynes
MK14 6NP, U.K.
Tel: 01908-691-133
Succursale Française
9, rue Paul Dautier, B.P. 52
78142 Velizy-Villacoublay Cédex
France
Tel: 01-3067-5800
Sucursal en España
Juan Esplandiu, 15
28007 Madrid, Spain
Tel: 091-504-2787
Tyskland Filial
Täby Centrum
Entrance S (7th floor)
18322 Täby, Sweden
Tel: 08 638 72 00
Filiale Italiana
Via Fabio Filzi, 25/A
20124 Milano, Italy
Tel: 02-667541
Branch The Netherlands
Steijgerweg 6
5616 HS Eindhoven
The Netherlands
Tel: 040 265 40 10
